Halot Aramaic

Logos Library System 2.
0 Página 1
The Hebrew and Aramaic

Lexicon
of the Old Testament
BY
LUDWIG KOEHLER AND WALTER BAUMGARTNER
SUBSEQUENTLY REVISED BY
WALTER BAUMGARTNER AND JOHANN JAKOB STAMM
WITH ASSISTANCE FROM

BENEDIKT HARTMANN • ZE<EV BEN-H\AYYIM
EDUARD YECHEZKEL KUTSCHER • PHILIPPE REYMOND
V
ARAMAIC. SUPPLEMENTARY BIBLIOGRAPHY
TRANSLATED AND EDITED

UNDER THE SUPERVISION OF
M.E.J. RICHARDSON
BRILL
LEIDEN • BOSTON • KÖLN
2000
Logos Library System 2.0 Página 2
Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data

LC card number 94-207821
ISBN 90 04 11528 5 Vol. V

ISBN 90 04 09700 7 Set
© Copyright 2000 by Koninklijke Brill NV, Leiden, The Netherlands
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, translated, stored in a retrieval system, or
transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise,
without prior written permission from the publisher.
Authorization to photocopy items for internal or personal use is granted by Brill provided that the appropriate
fees are paid directly to The Copyright Clearance Center, 222 Rosewood Drive, Suite 910 Danvers MA
01923, USA.
Fees are subject to change.
PREFACE
It is a pleasure to say that, having completed the fifth and final volume, not only has a natural sense
of relief begun to dawn but also the sense of privilege with which I began the task continues to
shine, inasmuch as I have been able to see it through to its conclusion.
In the course of my work it became clear to me that the haste in which the editors of the
German edition were obliged to finish their work on vol. 5 (see below, Foreword) had resulted in a
number of misleading references; where I could I corrected these. A very detailed review by
Michael Sokoloff (see Dead Sea Discoveries 7 (2000), pp. 74–109), which pointed out many more
addenda et corrigenda for a large number of paragraphs, appeared just in time for me to be able to
incorporate them in this edition; I have referred to his article in all but the most minor of the
changes he requires. Otherwise I have followed the pattern of work for the English edition that I
adopted for the previous volumes, continuing to introduce quotations from the NRSV and REB
wherever it seemed appropriate to do so, as well as CAD and Wehr-Cowan for comparative
philological material.
Just a few weeks ago I received a copy of the CD-Rom version of vols. 1–4, and my first
impressions are that this will be a very much faster way to gain access to the many cross-references
in the printed form of the dictionary, as well as introducing the possibility of understanding words
more fully by making hyper-links, in particular to the text of BHS, Sept. and the bibliography of the
École Biblique, Jerusalem.
Appended to this volume is a very long and detailed Supplementary Bibliography. While the
bibliography originally published in HAL (see pp. xxii–xlv; see also HALOT pp. xii–lxiii) gives
fuller information than that published in the text of the Lexicon, there is a considerable amount of
supplementary literature referred to in the individual articles which is not mentioned at all in that
bibliography. Some of those references are barely adequate, and moreover it is important,
particularly for readers of the English version, to have a record of what supplementary literature
was referred to by the original editors, and also to be aware of what was not mentioned. That is
primarily why a supplementary bibliography has been prepared.
The basic material was assembled by Barsaum Can, who assisted me also for vol. 4 while he
was a student at Leiden University. He worked on the references in vols. 1–4, to which I added
those from vol. 5. Without his diligent help it would not have been possible to include this material
in this volume. It goes without saying that extreme care has to be exercised in recalling which of
the earlier volumes of HAL could not have included the more recently published articles.
The supplementary bibliography does not repeat material recorded in the principal bibliography.
It can most conveniently be used in conjunction with the CD-Rom edition of HALOT, for the
search facility on that disk will quickly show just where and how often any given reference occurs.
Wherever possible more information is given here than in the text of the Lexicon, particularly
concerning the titles and dates of articles. Had we had more time and resources this printed text
could have been improved, but it seemed best to publish it in this basic form and to plan to
integrate it with the text of the principal bibliography and abbreviations in time for the upgraded
CD-Rom next year.
My thanks are due as ever to the tremendous support of the management of Brill Academic
Publishers; in particular for this volume I would mention Anita Disseldorp and Anniek
Meinders-Durksz, who solved the many and varied production problems; and of course also, as for
all the previous volumes, Hans van der Meij. It should not be forgotten that without his imparting
to us his original vision and confidence at the very beginning of the project we could still be at
square one.
Glancing back over the decade it is a pleasure again to record my thanks to my former
colleagues at the University of Manchester who allowed me to take sabbatical leave to complete
vol. 1 and begin vol. 2, to the British Academy for research support funds to complete vols. 2 and
3, and to my physicians for keeping me well enough for vols. 4 and 5. And through all the changing
scenes of life there has always been my Hl;[]B' tr,f,[} lyIj'Atv,ae ; she shared every moment of
trouble and joy, and without her there would have been nothing.
Finally I would thank all my colleagues and friends who have never failed to give me advice of
a general and a particular nature when asked. Now it is finished I hope that they, as well as the
readers whom I do not know, will put aside any thoughts they may have had about the first part of
the proverb bleAhl;j} µ' hk;V;mum] tl,j,/T : rather let them cultivate what follows, hw:a} T' µyYIj' Å[ewÒ
ha;B;.
M. E. J. Richardson
Leiden
27 April 2000
FOREWORD
The publication of the fifth volume of this Hebrew-Aramaic Lexicon brings the work as a whole to
its conclusion.
While it was being prepared the main editor, Professor Johann Jakob Stamm, passed away after
a prolonged period of suffering on the 9th. November 1993. This tragic loss to the Lexicon has
been felt bitterly. J. J. Stamm could understand the Semitic languages, especially the ancient ones,
from all angles, and as such he immersed himself probably more than anyone else in the world of
Old Testament lexicography. Despite his illness he was able to prepare a draft manuscript as far as
the letter qof.
After some delay I began to work through all the material that was available and to prepare the
text for the last four letters of the alphabet, naturally in co-operation with my long-standing and
strongly supportive colleague P. Reymond. For North-west Semitic inscriptions this year we have
been able to use the new and completely revised two volume dictionary of Hoftijzer (DNWSI). In
the etymological section of each lemma we have sought to provide precise bibliographical
information, primarily from the dictionaries for the particular languages to which we have referred
and, as had been done before, to expand this information whenever we could. But we were not able
to do this completely, for we were obliged to make the poorer choice from that Arabic proverb
which says “Patience comes from God, but haste belongs to the Devil”. Despite this, we feel that
those who succeed us will be able to improve and expand our work.
We are sorry that after having given more than twenty years of immense scholarly help and
influence Professor Z. Ben H\ayyim has been obliged because of ill health to end his active
collaboration. But we are grateful that we have been able to make use of the fruit of his wisdom as
published in LOT and Rosenthal’s Aramaic Handbook. For technical typographical reasons it was
not possible to print the combination aµ and aó, which should have been used for Samaritan, and so
we have decided to use simply aµ.
It remains for us to express our words of thanks for all the help that we have received over the
course of the last years. First of all we remember the Swiss National Foundation for Scientific
Research, which for a long period has maintained its financial support.
Then we would like to thank the publisher E. J. Brill and its director R. J. Kastelijn; in
particular we must mention the editor, Hans van der Meij. He has always provided helpful and
purposeful guidance in his characteristically diplomatic matter and he has sweetened some bitter
pills with his natural kindness.
Finally thanks are due to some of my former students, Dr. Johannes Tromp, Dr. Joost Holleman
and Jaap Oppendijk, who have prepared the final copy for the press; they have also made some
helpful corrections to the text and provided supplementary bibliographical material for Syriac and
Neo-Syriac.
I hope that the new Koehler-Baumgartner-Stamm will be a help to those who use it, knowing
full well that dies diem docet, the motto of Gesenius-Bühl, is and will be appropriate for both the
readers and the writers of a lexicon like this.
Benedikt Hartmann
Zürich
Autumn 1995
a: —1. a interchanges with consonantal h as follows: —a) in the causative stem, where af. occurs
instead of haf.; see Baumgartner ZAW 45 (1927), 106f = Umwelt 93f (Bauer-Leander BArm.
91h).
—b) in the reflexive prefix to verbs, where ˜t]a,Ö˜t]ai occurs instead of ˜t]hi; see Baumgartner
ZAW 45 (1927), 108f = Umwelt 95f; Bauer-Leander BArm. 108j.
—c) commonly in other words, → Wla}, ÷WNai, Wra}, Jahe, ÷he.
—2. a interchanges with h as mater lectionis as follows: —a) in masc. det. and fem. abs.; see
Baumgartner ZAW 45 (1927), 90ff = Umwelt 77ff; Schaeder Iranische Beiträge 33ff;
Bauer-Leander BArm. 204a.
—b) in verbs y˜l and w˜l; see Baumgartner ZAW 45 (1927), 112ff = Umwelt 100ff; Schaeder
Iranische Beiträge 35ff; Bauer-Leander BArm. 151ff.
—3. a interchanges with y in impf. of y˜l and w˜l verbs (cf. Bauer-Leander BArm. §6t and w),
and in the pt. of y˜[ and w˜[ verbs (cf. µaeq;, pt. Q ÷ymiyÒq;; Bauer-Leander BArm. 145m); also in *
yf;j} and ay:F;j'.
—4. a is used as a distinguishing grapheme in raW"x'.
—5. a is expected as the initial sound with the indistinct vowel in dj' (Bauer-Leander BArm.
54a), but it has disappeared.
—6. a is quiescent in the following words: rt'(a)B;, vyaBi, rm'ame, ÷am; and vare; also in Q of
arem; with sf., and in a˜p verbs; in hw:G« and *wre, and also for the most part in a˜l verbs, it has
disappeared.
—7. a is dissimilated from [ in [a; (Bauer-Leander BArm. 50c), and also in ajm; see now
Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 81.
—8) a prosthetic vowel with < or >, to avoid a double consonant at the beginning of the word,
occurs in BArm. only with htv pe. pf., wyTiv]ai Da 53f; but it can already be seen in other Arm.
dialects, such as Pehlevi (Junker Frahang 19: 15 >sûthn; Herzfeld Paikuli, with < and >;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1198 s.v. sûty1); JArm. at;v]a, fem., six (Dalman Wb. 45a; and
Gramm. §94: 17); Syr. <esûtaµ six (Brockelmann Lexicon 811a); NeoSyr. isûtaµ (Maclean Lexicon
22b); CPArm. <ysûtyn sixty (Schulthess Lex. 216a; Gramm. §126); cf. Bauer-Leander BArm.
155q; Brockelmann Grundriss 1: §82, p. 210–219, especially p. 216f, l ab; Dalman Gramm. 94,
§17; Nöldeke Syr. Gramm. §51; Mand Gramm. §24; Schulthess Gramm. §46: 1; see further F.
Altheim and R. Stiehl Geschichte der Hunnen 4 (Berlin, 1962), 92f; Coxon ZAW 89 (1977),
275f; Toll ZDMG Suppl. 7: 37; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1198 s.v. sûty1.
*ba': → Heb. ba;; OArm., Zendjirli (Donner-R. Inschriften 214; 215); sg. in EmpArm., EgArm.
(Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Driver Arm. Docs.; Ah\iqar); Nab., Palm., Hatra; JArm.
inscr. (see Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 81); Pehl. (Junker Frahang 11: 2); Sogdian
(Gautier-Benveniste Essai ii: 236; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 1; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1);
JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 1; Beyer Arm. Texte 503); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Glossary 1a); CPArm.
(Schulthess Lex. 1a) <abbaµ (Schulthess Gramm. §85: 1 :: Bergsträsser OLZ 29 (1926), 498); Syr.
<abba (Brockelmann Lexicon 1a); Mnd. aba (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 1a, s.v. ab 3);
NeoArm. <oµb (Spitaler Gramm. 110a; Bergsträsser Gloss. 9); Bauer-Leander BArm. 247a (::
Ruzûicûka 142); see Beyer Arm. Texte 503: sf. ybia' Da 513 (variant ybia}, Bauer-Leander BArm.
77 l :: Birkeland Akzent und Vokalismus 3), JWba}, yhiWb&a} (Bauer-Leander BArm. 53q); pl.
constructed as fem. in JArm. (see above); Ph., Byblos <byty (Tomback Lex. 1); Palm. and Hatra
<bth(w)n; JArm. inscr.; Sam. <bhn aµbaón (Ben H\ayyim Glossary 1a); CPArm. and Mnd.; as masc.
in Zendjirli (Donner-R. Inschriften 216: 16; pl. sf. <bhy); EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap. 71: 2, sf.
<byhm; cf. Jean-H. Dictionnaire and Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary, see above); as masc. and
fem. in Sam. and Syr.: sf. ytih;b;a} (Bauer-Leander BArm. 77n), Jt;h;b;a}, an:t;&h;b;a} (variant an:t&'-,
Bauer-Leander BArm. 79t).
—1. father Da 52.11.13.18.
—2. ancestors Da 223 Ezr 415 512. †
*bae → *bnEa}.
dba: the same in Heb.; OArm., Zendjirli ? (Donner-R. Inschriften Nr. 215: 5); Sefire (pe.
Donner-R. Inschriften 222 B: 36; 223 B: 7; haf. 223 C: 4, 5); EmpArm., Neµrab (pe. Donner-R.
Inschriften 226: 10; haf. Donner-R. Inschriften 225: 11); EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling
Arm. Pap.; Driver Arm. Docs.; Ah\iqar) Nab. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 1f; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 4); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 1b; Beyer Arm. Texte 504); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex.
1b); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Glossary 1a); for JPArm. dby see Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 81; Syr.
(Brockelmann Lexicon 1b); Mnd. (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 3a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 247
2).
pe: impf. (jussive) Wdb&'ayE (Bauer-Leander BArm. 30a, 89d): to perish Jr 1011. †
haf (as in JArm. (for TgArm., JPArm., JBabArm., see Sokoloff, loc. cit.), CPArm. and Syr.;
Bauer-Leander BArm. 139i; CPArm. also <ybd, Schulthess Lex. 1b): impf. 2nd. sg. dbe/hT] (Or.
-bad, Bauer-Leander BArm. 140n), 3rd. pl. Da 218 ÷Wdb]hoyÒ; inf. hd;b;/h: to slay; with acc. Da 212.
18.24; abs. to destroy 726.
†
hof: pf. db'Wh (Bauer-Leander BArm. 139j :: Beyer Arm. Texte 504: pe. pf. passive): to be
destroyed Da 711. †
÷b,a:, the same in Heb.; Bauer-Leander BArm. 181x; OArm. stone; in Zendjirli used concretely
(Donner-R. Inschriften 214: 31), and also metaphorically (Donner-R. Inschriften 215: 7); Deir
Alla; EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.); Nab., Palm., JArm. inscr.
(Jean-H. Dictionnaire 2; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 6); JArm. an:b]a' (Dalman Wb. 3b; see
now Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 81); DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 504); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon
3a); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 2a); Sam.; Mnd. (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 4b): det. an:b]a':
stone.
—1. a single stone Da 234f.45, hd;j} ÷b,a, 618.
—2. stone used as a building material Da 54.23 for an idol, cf. Vogt Lex. 1b, s.v. ÷b,a,; Ezr 58 64
→ ll;GÒ ÷b,a, for the temple. †
*ar;GÒa/i hr;GÒa:i Bauer-Leander BArm. 241s; Heb. tr,G²ai; EmpArm., Asshur Ostracon
(Donner-R. Inschriften 233:4); Mesopotamia, EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Driver Arm. Docs.;
Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Ostraka, Degen-Müller-Röllig Neue Ephemeris iii 48: 8, 9); abs. likewise
trga, Leander Laut- und Formenlehre 112a :: Rosenthal Arm. Forschung 53); Palm. (Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 4; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 12); JArm., DSS aT;r]G¾ai (Dalman Wb. 6b;
Beyer Arm. Texte 505); Syr. <eggartaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 5a); CPArm. *<gr< (= <eggeraµ, see
Schulthess Gramm. §99; Lex. 3a); Mnd. >ngirta (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 353a; Nöldeke
Mand. Gramm. 318, 155a).
It should be noted on the one hand that the Aramaic sbst. can be taken as a loanword from late
Akkadian (see Wagner Aramäismen 3a, with bibliography; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 4; see further
e.g. Vogt Lexicon 2a); but for a different view see von Soden in AHw. 190a, where egertu is
said to come from Arm. iggeraµ, iggartaµ, and lead to Heb. tr,G²ai; see also Sokoloff, DSD 7
(2000), 81, who refers to Kaufman 48; On the other hand, according to Beyer Arm. Texte 505,
the origin of the sbst. is “unknown”; on this see also Wagner loc. cit.: det. aT;r]G¾ai, fem.: letter
Ezr 48.11 56. †
÷yId'a:, Or. <edayin (Bauer-Leander BArm. 66n): Heb. za;, yz¾a;} OArm., Zendjirli za (Donner-R.
Inschriften 214: 7; 215: 9; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 24 s.v. <z2); EmpArm. <dyn EgArm.
(Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Driver Arm. Docs.); Pehl. (Junker Frahang 25: 15;
Herzfeld Paikuli 12–16); Hatra, JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 4; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 13); yza Asshur Ostracon (Donner-R. Inschriften 233: 6, 14; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 25); ÷yId'aÔ JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 7a; Beyer Arm. Texte 505); JArm. also ÷ydeyÒh;
(Dalman Wb. 112a), corresponding to Syr. haµydeµn (with added → ah, see Brockelmann Lexicon
174b; see also Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 81): then Da 215-719 (20 times), Ezr 49 (textual
uncertainty, on which see Gunneweg KAT xix/1: 84, 89)—613 (9 times), ÷yId'aÔw< Ezr 55; ÷yId'aBe (
Or. be<edayin) then Da 214-711 (26 times), Ezr 424, on which see Gunneweg KAT xix/1: 85, 93 ::
Rudolph Esra und Nehemia 44; BHS; and KBL), 52 61; ÷yId'aÔA÷mi (Heb. za;me) since Ezr 516. †
rd;a:} the same in Heb. and JArm.; EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap. 61: 12; 67: 4; Kraeling Arm. Pap.
10: 1); Pehl. (Dura, Altheim-Stiehl Parola del Passato 31 (1953), 311); DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte
505); Syr. <aµdaµr (Brockelmann Lexicon 6a); Mnd. adar, dar (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 7a):
Adar, the name of the twelfth month (Babylonian a[d]daru, see AHw. 12a), Ezr 615. †
*rD'a:i EmpArm. (Vogt Lexicon 3a); on an Assyrian clay tablet ÷rda st. abs. pl. fem. (Donner-R.
Inschriften 235: 5); arda (Tell Halaf 5: 2; cf. Bauer-Meissner Pachtvertrag 13;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 18 s.v. <dr2); JArm., DSS (I ar;D]ai Dalman Wb. 7b; Beyer Arm.
Texte 505); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 6b), and CPArm. <edderaµ (Schulthess Lex. 3b);
NeoArm. ettra (Bergsträsser Gloss. 96) parallel with NeoSyr. eddra (cf. Bergsträsser
Einführung (1928; 1963), 87, >attroµya “to the threshing floor”); > <andar (Fraenkel Fremdwörter
136); so far not attested in Ugaritic; for adrm d bgrn “the dignitaries who are at the threshing
floor” (KTU 1, 17:v:6, 7) see Fisher Ras Shamra Parallels 1: p. 59 no. 46; cf. H.P. Müller ZA
64 (1975), 306; cf. also the place name A-du-ri in El-Amarna (VAB 2, 256:24); → Heb. µyIr'/da}
; loanword from Akk. adru(m) threshing floor, barn (AHw. 12b; CAD A/1: 129); pl. adraµtu,
adruµ; Assyrian idru (AHw. 364b; for CAD see under adru, cf. CAD I/J: 10): pl. cstr. yreD]ai:
threshing floor Da 235. †
*rz¾G:r]d'a:} < <adarzaµgar < Middle Persian <andarzðaghar adviser, < Old Persian *handarzða
advice + kara (Driver Arm. Docs.1 p. 303; cf. Bauer-Leander BArm. §15d; Hinz Altiranisches
Sprachgut 115; Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000) 81 refers to Rundgren OS 12 (1967) 89–98); EgArm.
zrdnh report, announcement (Driver Arm. Docs.1 57; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 67 :: Beyer Arm.
Texte 505 privy counsellor, counsellor at court): pl. aY:r'zÒG¾r]d'a} counsellor Da 32f. †
aD;zÒr'd]a:' Sept. (for Ezr 8

21) ejpimelw`", Vulgate diligenter, foreign word; Avestan zrasda > Old
Persian *drzdra firm, competent (Nober BiZ (NF) 2 (1958): 134ff :: KBL): careful devotion,
or faithful in heart; cf. Hinz Altiranisches Sprachgut 92f, and subsequently Beyer Arm. Texte
506; Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000) 82 refers to Nober, BZ 2 (1958) 134–138; Rundgren OS 31/32
(1982/83) 143–145: conscientious (:: KBL with zeal) Ezr 723. †
[r;d]a,, variant [r'd]a, (Bauer-Leander BArm. 215j) → *[r;D]; for etymology → Heb. ['/rzÒ and
['(/)rzÒa;, Bauer-Leander BArm. 44b, 193o; JArm. (Dalman Wb. 8a), DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 558
s.v. [r;D]: [rda force); JPArm [r'd]a,, Sokoloff Dictionary 37; Sam. idraó (Ben H\ayyim Gloss.
4a s.v. dr>); CPArm. emph. <dr>< (Schulthess Lex. 48b s.v. dr>): arm, or alternatively upper arm
(Vogt Lexicon 3a), metaphorically force: lyIj‰;wÒ ã,B]) Ezr 423; → *[r'D]. †
*dza: aD;zÒa', sbst. det. or adj. fem. (bad variant ad;zÒa;‰, as though from the JArm. root dza to
walk, so e.g. KBL); foreign word < Old Persian azdaµ notice (Andr. Hübschmann 92; Hinz
Altiranisches Sprachgut 52) or publicly announced, known, so Vogt Lexicon 3a, with reference
to EgArm. arkdza = azdaµ-kara “herald” (Cowley Arm. Pap. 17: 5–7; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 25); cf. Schaeder 66 “announcer”; also p. 68 azdaµ “announced”; see further Herzfeld
Inschriften 104; Kent Grammar 173f; EgArm. dza ÷h db[ty “if an investigation is made”
(Cowley Arm. Pap. 27:8; dza “examination, investigation”; see Cowley Arm. Pap. 102; and
Vogt Lexicon 3b; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 7; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 25 :: Rosenthal
Gramm. §189 (p. 59): aD;zÒa' publicly known :: Beyer Arm. Texte 506): definite, irrefutable,
undeniable; aD;zÒa' yNImi at;L]mi Da 25 and at;L]mi yNImi ã' 28.
Both these instances of aD;zÒa' can be translated in two ways: —a) “the word (matter) is
irrevocable”, so ZüBi; cf. Bentzen Daniel 205: “the matter is certain with me”; Montgomery
Daniel 147f; or —b) “the word (matter) is promulgated by me”, so KBL; TOB; Bentzen Daniel
20; cf. 25 NRSV, this is a public decree :: REB this is my firm decision; 28 NRSV, I have firmly
decreed; REB, I have come to this firm decision; for a discussion of these two possibilities see
especially Bentzen Daniel 20; Plöger KAT xviii: 44 and 455; literally “for my part the matter is
definite”, analogous to at;L]mi ab;yXiy" Da 613; see further Vogt Lexicon 3; Sokoloff, DSD 7
(2000) 82 refers to Rundgren, OS 25 (1978) 46–55; Huyse SEIr. 17 (1998), 331–337. †
hza (Beyer Arm. Texte 506 yza): JArm. aza to set light to, heat up a furnace (Dalman Wb. 11b);
JPArm. yza (Sokoloff Dictionary 43); with KBL cf. Arb. <azza to hum, buzz, hiss, fizzle,
wheeze (Wehr-Cowan 14a).
pe: pt. passive hz«ae, Or. <izeµ (Rosenthal Gramm. §123); inf. hz«me, sf. HyEzÒme (Bauer-Leander
BArm. 168c, 234k !): to set light to, heat up Da 319; pt. passive, heated 322. †
lza: the same in Heb.; < Arm. (Wagner Aramäismen 7 :: Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 82); OArm.,
Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften 222: B: 39); EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar;
Driver Arm. Docs.; Saqqara; Behistun 8 (Akk. it-ta-lak) passim; Pehl. (Junker Frahang 20:9;
Herzfeld Paikuli 39); Hatra, JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 7; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 25); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 11b; Beyer Arm. Texte 506); Syr. (Brockelmann
Lexicon 10a); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 5a); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 1a); Mnd.
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 12a); NeoArm. (Bergsträsser Gloss. 105).
pe: pf. lz¾a}, lz¾‰a}, Wlzà'a,} an:l]z¾&a}; impv. Alz²ae Ezr 515 (Bauer-Leander BArm. 67p; Rosenthal
Gramm. §122); impf. of → ûlh (EgArm.): to go.
—1. used absolutely Da 224 (for text see BHS and commentaries.), Ezr 515.
—2. used with preposition: with l] of place Da 217 619f Ezr 58; with l] of place and l[' of the
person Ezr 423. †
*ja': Heb. II ja;; Vogt Lexicon 4; it occurs in all the dialects; OArm. <h\wh “his brothers” (Tell
Fekherye 4, see p. 47); Zendjirli, Panammuwa 1 (Donner-R. Inschriften 214: 29); Barraµ-kib
(Donner-R. Inschriften 216: 14); Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften 224: 4, 9, 13, 17, 18); EmpArm.
, EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Driver Arm. Docs.; Saqqara; Sachau Papyri
und Ostraka; Hermopolis; Degen-Müller-Röllig Neue Ephemeris 1, 11:1, 9; 3, 48:1, 4)
Samaria; Asshur Ostracon (Donner-R. Inschriften 233: 1); Pehl. (Junker Frahang 11: 12); Nab.,
Palm., Hatra, JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 8; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 28 s.v. <h\1);
aj;a} JArm., DSS brother, companion (Dalman Wb. 12a; Beyer Arm. Texte 506); CPArm.
(Schulthess Lex. 5a); Sam.; Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 10b); NeoArm. h\oµna (Bergsträsser
Gloss. 33 s.v. h\; Spitaler Gloss. 87b s.v. h\n); Mnd. aha (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 8a).
It should also be noted that a word which is probably related to *ja' is OArm. (Zendjirli) jya
“relative, member of the royal dynasty(?)”, see Donner-R. Inschriften 214: 24, 27, 30; 215: 3,
17; 215: 5 yja, probably written defectively for yjya, see 2: p. 228; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 44: pl. sf. Jyj;a,, K JyIj'a', Q Jj;a, (Bauer-Leander BArm. 247b; Rosenthal Gramm.
§62; see also Vogt Lexicon 4): brother Ezr 718. †
*dja: Heb. zja (cf. Baumgartner Umwelt 89ff, for the interchange of z and d); zja in OArm.,
Zendjirli, Panammuwa 1 and 2 (Donner-R. Inschriften 214: 3, 15, 20, 25; 215: 11; 216: 11);
Tell Fekherye 19, zja and dja; EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.;
Driver Arm. Docs.; Saqqara; Ah\iqar); Behistun 1, 6, 11 (Akk. *s\abaµtu); Asshur Ostacon
(Donner-R. Inschriften 233: 5f); Neµrab (Donner-R. Inschriften 226: 4, itpe.); dja in Nab.,
Palm., Hatra, JArm., inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 9 s.v. dja; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary
35 s.v. <h\z); itpe. dja Pehl. (Junker Frahang 20:15; Herzfeld Paikuli 43); JArm., DSS
(Dalman Wb. 12b; Beyer Arm. Texte 507); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 5b); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim
Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 614); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 11a); Mnd. AHD
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 8f).
? Der. hd;yjia}.
ty"w:j} a': Da 512, → hwj haf.
*hd;yjia,} Or. <ah\éÆdaµ (Bauer-Leander BArm. 66n): dja, so also Gesenius-Buhl; on the grounds
that in the etpe. the vb. means “to be closed, locked” (Neµrab 4, on which see Donner-R.
Inschriften 2: p. 276, with reference to Jb 269, zja pi.); the sbst. means “something that is
closed up tightly” > “puzzle, riddle”; Heb. hd;yji; Syr. <uh\detaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 12a);
EmpArm., ? EgArm. (Ah\iqar 99 ydja cstr. pl.; see Jean-H. Dictionnaire 9; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 32 s.v. <h\d3; Leander Aèg. Arm. 75t, gentilic, the same as in Syr.); Bauer-Leander
BArm. 54a, 188j: pl. ÷d;yjia} riddle, or alternatively an enigmatic oracle (on which see H.P.
Müller VT 20 (1970), 474f, and VTSupp. 22 (1972), 2772) Da 512; cj. Da 128 for tyrja rd.
with Sept. parabolaiv t/djia}, so KBL, following Montgomery Daniel 478 (on which see also
Müller VT 20 (1970), 475 :: MT; Bentzen Daniel 86; Porteous ATD 23 (1962), 124; TOB;
Dhorme; ZüBi.; Lebram. †
*at;m]j]a:' place name, < *(a)÷tmja, Syr. <h\mtaµn, i.e. Ah\matan (Rudolph Esra und Nehemia
54); Old Persian Hagmataµna, Babylonian Agmatanu or similar (Streck ZA 15 (1900), 367f);
Sept. ÆEkbavtana, ÆAgbavtana (Weissbach in Pauly-Wissowa 5: 2155–2158; cf. Pauly-Wissowa
(Kl.) 2: 220f): Ecbatana; to be identified with modern Hamadan, ancient capital of the Medes,
and a summer-time residence for the kings of Persia (Reicke-Rost Hw. 384; Enz. Isl.1 2: 256)
Ezr 62. †
*rj'a:' rja, Bauer-Leander BArm. 255v, 256a; → Heb. rj'a' (< <ah\h\ar); OArm. ÷k rja (Tell
Fekherye 10); EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar 63, 99, 210;
Driver Arm. Docs.); Behistun 50 (Akk. ãr-ki-éá); Samaria; Pehl. (Junker Frahang 25: 42 <(w)h\l;
Herzfeld Paikuli 52 <h\r); Asia Minor, Lidzbarski Ephemeris 1: p. 67, 4); Nab. (Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 10; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 39 s.v. <h\r5); Pehl., Sogdian <gr
(Gautier-Benveniste Essai 2: 206); EgArm. preposition and adverb rja, yrja, hrja
(Leander Aèg. Arm. 199i, afterwards); JArm., DSS yre/j(a}) (Dalman Wb. 13a; Beyer Arm.
Texte 507); CPArm. lh\wry< and lwh\ry< (Schulthess Lex. 6a; Schulthess Gramm. §131: 4d); Syr. l
eh\artaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 13a); Mnd. ahuria, >huria, >uhuria (Drower-Macuch Dictionary
9a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 194); NeoArm. roh\l < *luh\ray (Bergsträsser Gloss. 75 s.v. rh\;
Spitaler Gramm. 131v); superseded by → rt'aB;: pl. cstr. yrej} a', Or. <ah\reµ, sf. ÷/hyrej} a': after
Da 724, hn:d] ã' after this 229.45 (Bauer-Leander BArm. 255v). †
*yrij} a': Heb. tyrij} a'; —a) Pehl. (see below); CPArm. *<h\ryt, b<h\ryt< (Schulthess Lex. 6a); Syr.
(Brockelmann Lexicon 13a), and NeoSyr. <h\raµytaµ (Maclean Dictionary 8); DSS yrja (Beyer
Arm. Texte 508); Bauer-Leander BArm. 197f; Rosenthal Gramm. §57.
—b) *hrja: Neµrab htrja his posterity, his descendants (Donner-R. Inschriften 226: 10);
Nab., on which see Jean-H. Dictionnaire 10; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 40; Vogt Lexicon
5b; also KBL; cf. Syr. (<)h\raµytaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 13a); Nab. <h\r (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 10;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 38 s.v. <h\r2): cstr. tyrij} a': end, ã' aY:m'/y Da 228 (< Heb. a'
µymiY:h tyrij} Montgomery Daniel 163f; cf. Bentzen Daniel 22f); Targum aY:m'/y ¹/s; Nyberg
Pahlavi Documents from Avroman 3: 4 ÷d[ tyrja :: Altheim-Stiehl Palaeologia 3 (1954), 47,
who read it differently. †
yrijÕa,; Or. uh\réÆ: EgArm. hrja (Leander Aèg. Arm. 76v); tyrja (Kraeling Arm. Pap. 6: 15);
Xanthos; Pehl. (Junker Frahang 27: 82 <h\l; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 10 s.v. rjaIII; Leander Aèg.
Arm. 76; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 38 s.v. <h\r3) JArm., DSS yrij]Wa and yri/j (Dalman
Gramm. §20: 5a and b; Dalman Wb. 113b, 140b; Beyer Arm. Texte 508); CPArm. fem. h\wry,
emph. h\wryt< or similar; Schulthess Lex. 5b; Schulthess Gramm. §65a); as also fem. <h\uréÆtaµ
(Spitaler Gramm. 626 and KBL); NeoArm. h\reµna, fem. h\réÆtaµ (Bergsträsser Gloss. 39 s.v. h\r;
Spitaler Gramm. 62k, m); Syr. masc. <h\reµnaµ, fem. *oh\reµ > (<)h\reµtaµ (Nöldeke Syr. Gramm. p. 92;
Brockelmann Lexicon 13a); Mnd. hurintia (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 137b; Nöldeke Mand.
Gramm. 185f); Arb. al-uhÉraµ the hereafter (<hÉry, Wehr-Cowan 8b); Bauer-Leander BArm. 200k ::
Rosenthal Palm. 53, fem. of → ÷r;jÕa': another woman; with WKl]m' Da 229; with hw:je 75f; with
÷r,q, 78.20. †
÷yrja, Q ÷rejÕa; (Or. <uh\reµn) and ÷r;jÕa;, K ÷re/÷yIr'jÕa; (Torczyner Entstehung 65f) or ÷yrij} a'
(Bauer-Leander BArm. 256w, and Nachträge, p. 372; Montgomery Daniel 227); EmpArm.,
EgArm. ÷rja (+ l[, Cowley Arm. Pap. 38:4; Ah\iqar 53, 64; Leander Aèg. Arm. 121 “finally,
in conclusion”); Kraeling Arm. Pap. 4: 19 anyrja subsequently, afterwards, later; Palm. anrja
besides, as well as (Cantineau Gramm. 136); by contrast EgArm. ÷(y)µdq(l) (Driver Arm.
Docs.1 59) and Palm. ÷ymdql earlier (Syria 12 (1931), 139: 3 :: Cantineau Gramm. 136
“before, earlier”; see Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 41 s.v. <h\rn5); JArm. ÷ymid]q'B] first; DSS
(Beyer Arm. Texte 508): adverb ÷yrja d[ at last, finally Da 45 (→ ÷r;jÕa;). †
÷r;jÕa,; Or. uh\raµn; Heb. rjea'; OArm., Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften 224: 24); EmpArm., EgArm.
(Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Driver Arm. Docs.; Saqqara); Samaria; Pehl. (Junker
Frahang 8:6; Herzfeld Pai-kuli 55f); Nab., Palm. and JArm. inscr.; Nisa (Jean-H. Dictionnaire
11; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 41); DSS ÷rja (Beyer Arm. Texte 508); JArm. ÷r;jÕa;, ÷r;j]a;
, ÷r;/j (Sam. uran) and ÷yri/j (Dalman Wb. 14a s.v. an:r;j]Wa, and 140b s.v. an:yri/j, 141a s.v.
an:r;/j); CPArm. h\wrn and h\wryn (Schulthess Gramm. §65:4); Syr. (<)h\reµnaµ< (Brockelmann
Lexicon 13a); Mnd. hurina (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 137f; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 185f);
NeoArm. h\reµna (Bergsträsser Gloss. 39 s.v. h\r; Spitaler Gramm. 62k, l); OSArb. <hÉr (Conti
Rossini Chrestomathia 102b); Arb. <aµhÉar another (Wehr-Cowan 8b); Bauer-Leander BArm.
196a: another.
—1. as sbst. Da 211 45 (→ ÷yrja Q) 517 724.
—2. as adj. Da 244 329 75.6; fem. → yrijÕa;. †
*÷P'r]D'v]j'a,} Or. >ah\sûea: → Heb. *÷P;r]D'v]j'a' (Ellenbogen Foreign Words 23 :: HAL 36a;
HALOT 37a); loanword < Old Persian Xsûaqrapaµvan “protector of the empire” (Kent Grammar
§78); also in cuneiform (AHw. 21a); Middle Persian s<trp (Herzfeld Paikuli 706), h\sûtrp “in
monumento Andabani V Susae invento”, see Parola del Passato 31 (1953), 307); Late
Babylonian ahÉsûad(a)rapaµnu (AHw. 21a; CAD A/1: 195a); > Syr. st\rp< and st\rpys
(Brockelmann Lexicon 469a), corresponding to KBL sat\raµpaµ; Greek (ej)xetravph", satravph"
(e.g. Liddell-Scott 1585; Hübschmann Armenische Gramm. 208; Montgomery Daniel 199);
Palm. di-vine name aprd, satraph" (for the divine name, cf. Haussig Wb. 1: 287f; J.G.
Février La religion des Palmyréniens (1931), 139–147; Pauly-Wissowa (Kl.) 4:1566f): pl. det.
aY:n"P]r]d'v]j'a}: satrap Da 32f.27 62–5.7f. †
÷l;yai: Heb. ÷/lae; JArm. inscr. (Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 46) JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb.
16a; Beyer Arm. Texte 509); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 1b); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 7); Syr.
(Brockelmann Lexicon 15a); Mnd. >lana (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 351a; Nöldeke Mand.
Gramm. 136b); Bauer-Leander BArm. 196b: det. an:l;yai: tree Da 47f.11.17.20.23. †
*µya: DSS hmya (Beyer Arm. Texte 509); JArm. at;m]yae (Dalman Wb. 16a) fright.
Der. *÷t;m]yae.
*÷t;m]yae: µya; JArm. ÷t;m]yae, an:t;m]yae (Dalman Wb. 16a): BArm. fem. ynIt;m]yae Bauer-Leander
BArm. 197f; Rosenthal Gramm. §57; variant ynIt;m]ae, cf. Lewy HUCA 18 (1944), 452122):
terrible Da 77 (parallel with hl;yjiD], adj. from → hwyj). †
yt'yai, variant yt'ai, Heb. vyE, also vai; Ug. it\ (cf. UF 6 (1974), 461).
—1. yya: OArm. (+ l) hyl “he is noth-ing, he possesses nothing, he has nothing” Zendjirli
(Donner-R. Inschriften 216: 16; Degen Altaram. Gramm. §47c; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary
576 s.v. lysû2); → v 2 (at the beginning); ytya: EmpArm.; Pehl. <yt (Junker Frahang 24:2);
EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Driver Arm. Docs.; Saqqara); Xanthos; Pehl.
(Junker Frahang 24: 8; Herzfeld Paikuli 71); Nisa; Palm., Nab., JArm. inscr. (Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 12; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 50); JArm. (Tg.B atya, Dalman Wb. 16b);
DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 509); for tya see Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000) 82; Syr. (Brockelmann
Lexicon 16a); NeoArm. oµt(i) (Bergsträsser Gloss. 100).
—2. with al, cf. Akk. laµ isûu > Assyrian lasûsûu there is not (von Soden Gramm. §111a; AHw.
402b and c; see p. 539b; see also CAD L: 108b); Pehl. l<yty (Junker Frahang 25: 43); EgArm.
ytya al and (y)tyal (Kraeling Arm. Pap. 7: 29; Rev. des Etudes Sémitiques (1942–45), 71); cf.
Leander Aèg. Arm. 119: 4; Palm., JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 138 s.v. tyl;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 576 s.v. lysû2); JArm. (Dalman Wb. 217b), and CPArm. liyt
(Schulthess Lex. 103b); Syr. layt (Brockelmann Lexicon 366a); Mnd. laiit, with sf. lait
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 228a); NeoArm. lit and lit\ (Spitaler §183); Arb. lais (s.v. laisa not
to be, see Wehr-Cowan 886a; see also Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000) 82); Brockelmann Grundriss 1:
75m; Bauer-Leander BArm. 254l-n; Rosenthal Palm. 83f :: Blake JAOS 35 (1915), 377ff; Eitan
AJSL 44 (1927–28), 187f; also 45 (1928–29), 138f.
—3. with a suffix (Bauer-Leander BArm. 256z; Rosenthal Gramm. §95) Jt;yai Q, JyIt'yai K
(Bauer-Leander BArm. 74z, 77o); yhi/tyai, ÷/kyteyai, an:t'&yai and an:t;&yai Q (Bauer-Leander BArm.
79u), an:yÒt'&yai K.
—a. existence (Bauer-Leander BArm. 331t-w), > there is Da 228 312 511; with al; there is not 2
10f 325.29 432 Ezr 416.
—b. to be found; theÝ dwelling of the gods is not situated with mortals Da 211b; wisdom that I
possess 230; they have sustained no harm 325.
—c. with ÷he: yDi yt'yai ÷he whether it be so that Ezr 517; as a stressed copula before a pt. or adj.
(Bauer-Leander BArm. 291e) … yt'yai ÷he lkiy: Da 317 “if our God is able to deliver” ::“if it is
so, then our God will deliver”, cf. Bauer-Leander BArm. 365b; on this see also Akk. ibasûsûi
“really” (the present of the vb. basûuÆ) “used as an adv.” (AHw. 113a); Landsberger Brief des
Bischofs von Esagila an König Asarhaddon (Amsterdam, 1965), 4868 compares Heb. vyE and
BArm. yt'yai with this use of ibasûsûi “really” (cf. also Coxon VT 26 (1976), 400ff, especially
406ff).
—d. elsewhere with sf. (Bauer-Leander BArm. 256z) Da 226 314f.18; with pleonastic sf. 3rd.
masc. 211. †
lka: the same in Heb.; OArm., Zendjirli, Panammuwa 1 (Donner-R. Inschriften 214: 9, 13, 17),
Panammuwa 2 (Donner-R. Inschriften 215: 9), Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften 222 A: 27, 30);
Tell Fekherye 22, wlkal impf./jussive, see p. 49; Deir Alla; EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm.
Pap.; Ah\iqar 89, 127, 129; Donner-R. Inschriften 270 B: 2; Sachau Papyri und Ostraka 76, i B:
6; 80, iii A: 2), Asshur Ostracon (Donner-R. Inschriften 233: 17), Pehl. (Herzfeld Paikuli 74;
Jean-H. Dictionnaire 13; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 51); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 17a;
Beyer Arm. Texte 509); CPArm. (<kl and <kyl, Schulthess Lex. 7b); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss.
1b); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 17a) Mnd. AKL (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 16f); NeoSyr.
(Maclean Dictionary 11b) and NeoArm. (Spitaler Gloss. 88a; Bergsträsser Gloss. 44 s.v. <hÉl).
pe: pf. Wlk&'a} (Or. <akaluµ, Bauer-Leander BArm. 138d); impf. lkuayE, lkuaTe (Or. y/toµkul,
Bauer-Leander BArm. 138a, b :: Littmann OLZ 31 (1928), 580); impv. fem ylik&ua} (Or. <ikuléÆ,
Bauer-Leander BArm. 138d); pt. fem. hl;k]a‰;: to eat.
—1. a) to feed on, with acc. bc'[} Da 430.
—b) to feed (of animals), with acc. rc'B] Da 75. —c) abs. Da 77.19.
—2. metaphorically: with acc. a[;r]a' to devastate 723.
—3. ÷yxir]q' lk'a} Da 38 625 → *År'q]. †
la': the same in Heb.; OArm., Zakir (Donner-R. Inschriften 202 A: 13); Zendjirli (Donner-R.
Inschriften 214; 215); Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften 22 A: 27); Tell Fekherye 22; EmpArm.
(Cowley Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar; Driver Arm. Docs.; Saqqara; Hermopolis; Leander Aèg. Arm. §61:
3), Asshur Ostra-con (Donner-R. Inschriften 233: 17); Pehl. (Junker Frahang 25: 41; Herzfeld
Paikuli 77; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 13; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 55 s.v. <l3); DSS (Beyer
Arm. Texte 510); afterwards out of use (Bauer-Leander BArm. 349e; Rosenthal Palm. 60;
Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 82 refers to Muraoka JSS 11 (1966) 162–163): as a prohibitive
particle, not Da 224 416 510. †
*lae: Heb. VI lae; Bauer-Leander BArm. 82b, 83k; OArm., Zakir; Zendjirli; Sefire; EmpArm.,
EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Driver Arm. Docs.; Saqqara (Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 78 and Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 333, s.v. hnz): demonstrative pronoun pl.,
see Degen Altaram. Gr. §39); sg. → hn:D]: these Ezr 515Q (K → hL,ae). †
Hl;a,; Or. <elaµh (Bauer-Leander BArm. 66n, 189p); Heb. H'/laÔ; OArm., Zendjirli (Donner-R.
Inschriften 214: 2, 4, 12f, 19, 29; 215: 2, 22f); Zakir (Donner-R. Inschriften 202 B: 9, 25);
Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften 222 A: 30; B: 6, 31; C: 15, 21; 223 B: 2; 224: 2 etc.) pl. normally
÷hla, see Donner-R. Inschriften 3: p. 28a; so also Tell Fekherye 14 :: ÷yhla 4; Pehl. (Junker
Frahang 1: 3) EmpArm., Tema (Donner-R. Inschriften texts 228 and 229); EgArm. (Cowley
Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Driver Arm. Docs.; Saqqara; Ah\iqar 95, 115, 124, 128, 135,
160; see Leander Aèg. Arm. 80z); Asshur Ostracon (Donner-R. Inschriften 233: 19 etc.); Nab.,
Palm., Hatra, JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 14; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 57); DSS,
together with the more common hla there is also the rarer la, which occurs also in EgArm. (
Ah\iqar 107, 154, 156, 161, 173); JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 13 s.v. laVI;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 53); cf. Leander Aèg. Arm. 69g, and under hla and la, see
Beyer Arm. Texte 510; JArm. Hl;aÔ (Dalman Wb. 19a); Sam. eµla (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 1b);
CPArm. ah;l;a, (vocalised with KBL; Schulthess Lex. 8f <lh); Syr. <allaµhaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon
21a states that l was not geminated by the Nestorians); > Arb. <allaµh (Littmann “Syriac
Inscription”, (1934), x f); Mnd. alaha (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 18b); NeoSyr. alaµhaµ
(Maclean Dictionary 12b); NeoArm. aloµ (Bergsträsser Gloss. 51): cstr. det. ah;l;aÔ, sf. yhil;aÔ,
Jh;l;aÔ, Hhel;aÔ, an:h&;l;aÔ (variant hn:h&'- Da 317, Bauer-Leander BArm. 73r), ÷/k/µ/kh} l;a,, ÷/h/
µhol;aÔ (Or. <elaµhaµ etc.); with prefix Hl;aÔl, (Or. le<elaµh), but det. and sf. ah;l;awE, ah;l;ale, ah;l;aBe
etc. (Bauer-Leander BArm. 60e, Or. le<elheh, wil<elaha; pl. ÷yhil;aÔ, det. aY:h'l;aÔ, cstr. yhel;aÔ,
yhel;ale sf. yh'l;ale, Jyh;l;ale (K Jyh'-, Q Jh;-, Bauer-Leander BArm. 77 o) Da 312.18; for
Standard Literary Aramaic see Sokoloff, DSD 7(2000), 82; also Sokoloff Dictionary 59: God.
—1. sg. in a general sense: a god Da 228; br' Hl;aÔ a great god 245; Hl;aÔAlK; any god at all 328 68.
13; Hl;aÔ aWhA÷m'W and who is a (the) god which will deliver you ? 315; det., meaning Yahweh Da
220 Ezr 612.18; Jh;l;aÔ Da 617.21 (:: Bauer-Leander BArm. 305f is a mistake); aB;r' ah;l;aÔ Ezr 58
aY:j' ãÔ Da 621.27; ay:L;[i ãÔ K 326.32 518.21, for Q ha;L;[i, see BHS on 326 and Bauer-Leander
BArm. 51k (on p. 52); with genitive aY:m'v] Hl;aÔ Da 218f.37.44 Ezr 511f 69f 712.21.23; ÷yhil;aÔ Hl;aÔ
Da 247 (Bauer-Leander BArm. 312i); laer;c]yI ãÔ Ezr 51 614 715; cj., for µl,v;WryÒ ãÔ prop. ˜ybi yDi
laer;c]yI ãÔ, on which see Rudolph Esra und Nehemia 70, and BHS Ezr 719; ytih;b;a} ãÔ Da 223;
ah;l;aÔ tyBe Da 53 Ezr 424-724 (25 times).
—2. pl. ÷yhil;aÔ: —a) the God of Israel: Hl;aÔ ÷yhil;aÔ Da 247 cf. sg.
—b. a) the gods of the other nations (in Daniel always Babylonian gods) Jr 1011 aY:h'l;aÔ
(Bauer-Leander BArm. 309n); Da 211 (on which see Bentzen Daniel 20: it is also possible to
take it a sg., Sept. a[ggelo" :: Montgomery Daniel 153 “but the author thinks that in the mouths
of the idol-worshippers it should really be a plural”; so also Plöger Daniel 42, 46; ZüBi; TOB;
NRSV; REB; JyIh;l;ale (K pl. JyIh-' , Q sg. Jh;-); the gods of Nebuchadnezzar: Da 312.18 (::
Montgomery Daniel 205 sg.; so also Plöger Daniel 58; Bentzen Daniel 28 :: MTK pl.,
preferring the idea that Nebuchadnezzar was a polytheist; so ZüBi; TOB; NRSV; REB; Lebram
60.
—b) yhel;aÔ gods of gold, silver, copper, iron, wood and stone Da 54.23.
—g) ÷yhil;aÔ rB' divine being, angel Da 325 (→ rB' 2), = Hkea} l]m' vs.28.
—d) ÷yviyDiq' ÷yhil;aÔ j'Wr the spirit of the holy god is in Daniel, which can be taken as sg. or pl.,
cf. Bentzen Daniel 32, 41; possibly what is meant is the gods of the Babylonians and the God of
Daniel (without ’q') Da 45f.15 1511.14.
hL,a:e the same in Heb.; OArm. la Zakir <l (Donner-R. Inschriften 202 A: 9, 16; B: 8; Degen
Altaram. Gr. §39); Zendjirli (Donner-R. Inschriften 214: 29); Sefire <ln (Donner-R. Inschriften
222 A: 38; B: 7, 11f etc.); EmpArm. hla; Asshur Ostracon (Donner-R. Inschriften 233: 12ff);
Bauer-Meissner Pachtvertrag 15; EgArm. hla (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.;
Driver Arm. Docs.; Saqqara); Samaria; Nab., Palm., Hatra, JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire
78 s.v. hnz; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 333 s.v. znh); Asia Minor (Lidzbarski Ephemeris 1,
323: 4); DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 511); < cj. *<illeµ < *<ileµ < Proto-Semitic *<ilay (Bauer-Leander
BArm. 83j) :: *<illay (Leander Aèg. Arm. 34 l); → *lae, ÷yLeai, JLeai; demonstrative pronoun
masc. and fem. pl.: these Jr 1011 Ezr 515 K (Q lae), sg. → hn:D]. †
Wla}, Or. <aluµ, Da 7 <iluµ (Bauer-Leander BArm. 66n!): —a) mostly considered as a by-form of →
8
Wra}, cf. Bauer-Leander BArm. §266a, b; and Vogt Lexicon 8f: Wla} and Wra}.
—b) Wla} is not to be separated from wlh: EmpArm., Asshur Ostracon (Donner-R. Inschriften
233: 9, 11, 13); EgArm. (Hermopolis), Sachau Arm. Pap. 282c; Leander §64; and Cowley ZAW
47 (1929), 150f; on this see also Baumgartner ZAW 45 (1927), 89 = Umwelt 76; Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 65; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 280); El-Amarna alluÆ, see AHw. 37b (alluÆ III);
CAD A/1: 358a, sv. alluÆ, interrogative particle; Ug. hl, see H.P. Müller ZA 64 (1974), 305,
interjection, look!, behold!: Wla} w" (Or. we<aluµ) Da 47.10 78 (variant Wra} w"). †
÷yLea,i ÷Leai Da 6 ; OArm. ÷la (Degen Altaram. Gr. §39); Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften 222 A: 7,
7
passim; 223 C: 2, 9; 224: 7, passim, cf. 3: p. 28a); Nab., Palm. ÷la (Cantineau Gramm. 129; cf.
Jean-H. Dictionnaire 78f s.v. hnz; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 333 s.v. znh); OSArb. <ln
(Höfner Gramm. §35bb); JArm. ÷yLeai and ÷yIL'ai; Bab. Arm. inscr. also ÷yleh;/÷la those (Rossel
Aramaic Magical Texts §3: 6, 4: 10); DSS ÷la *<elleµn (Dalman Wb. 19b, 113b; Beyer Arm.
Texte 511); Syr. (Nöldeke Syr. Gramm. §672) and CPArm. haµleµn (Schulthess Gramm. §621);
Mnd. <lin (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 351b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. §80); Bauer-Leander
BArm. 82j: as → *lae, hL,ae, JLeai: demonstrative pronoun pl.: these Da 240.44 63.7 717; sg. →
hn:D]. †
JLea:i EmpArm. ûla: EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Driver Arm. Docs.;
Behistun 20; Saqqara); Samaria; see Junker Frahang; Herzfeld Paikuli; Sogdian; Nab. <lk
(Jean-H. Dictionnaire 76 s.v. Jz; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 319 s.v. zk2); Syr. haµleµk and
haµloµk/haµnoµk (Nöldeke Syr. Gramm. §672); CPArm. helleµk, helloµk that (Schulthess Gramm. §62:
2; Lex. 49a); Mnd. hanik (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 125a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 91, ha<nyk
); Bab. Tg. (see Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 82) ûyla, and ykla “that” (Beyer Arm. Texte 511);
Arb. ulaµ<ika, pl. of d_aµka “this”; Bauer-Leander BArm. 82f and g; 83 l; like → ÷yLeai, *lae, hL,ae:
demonstrative pronoun pl., those Da 312f.21.23.27 66.12.16.25 Ezr 421 59 68; sg. → hn:D]. †
÷Lea:i → ÷yLeai.
¹l'a:} Heb. II ¹l,a,; Bauer-Leander BArm. 251q; OArm. ¹la (Tell Fekherye 19); EmpArm.,
EgArm. ¹la, pl. cstr. ypla (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Behistun 3, 9; Saqqara; see Leander 116n);
Nab. ¹la pl. abs. ÷ypla; Palm. (Rosenthal Palm. 80); JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 15;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 65 s.v. <lp5); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 21a, aP;l]a'; Beyer Arm.
Texte 512); Syr. <aleµp (Brockelmann Lexicon 22b); CPArm. <lp (Schulthess Gramm. §127): <aŒlef
or <aleŒf; st. cstr. <lp< = <alpaµ, pl. <lpyn = <aleféÆn (Schulthess Lex. 10b); Mnd. alpa
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 21a); NeoArm. oµlef (Spitaler Gloss. 89a; Bergsträsser Gloss. 52
s.v. <lf); NeoSyr. alpaµ, ilpaµ (Nöldeke Neusyrischen Sprache 152; Maclean Dictionary 13b): cstr.
¹l,a,, det. aP;l]a', pl. µypil]a' Da 710 K (Q ÷ypil]a') see Bauer-Leander BArm. 201f: cardinal
number, a thousand Da 51, ¹l,a, µypil]a' 710 many thousands (Bauer-Leander BArm. 312i). †
*hM;a:' the same in Heb., Bauer-Leander BArm. 180o; EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.;
Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Saqqara); Nab., Palm., JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 16;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 69 s.v. <mh1); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 24a; Beyer Arm. Texte
513); Syr. amtaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 24a); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 11a); Mnd. ama
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 21b), as in Arm.; pl. mostly constructed as a masc. ÷yMia', see
Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 83; Bauer-Leander BArm. 201k; cf. Mnd. amia, amamia
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 21b, and Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 1632); cf. Palm. pl., with
doubling of the second radical, amma; see Rosenthal Palm. 78) Bauer-Leander BArm. 240f:
cubit Da 31 Ezr 63. †
hM;a;u the same in Heb.; Bauer-Leander BArm. 181w; DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 513); JArm. <umm e
t\a (Dalman Wb. 24a), and Sam. ammem, ammayyaµ (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 1b s.v. <mh); JPArm.
hM;Wa, pl. ÷ymiWa, see Sokoloff Dictionary 39; Syr. <umtaµ (Nöldeke Syr. Gramm. §146, p. 91;
Brockelmann Lexicon 24a); Arb. umma nation, people, ummat Muh\ammad the community of
Muh\ammad, the followers of Muh\ammad, < Heb. hM;au, or Arm. at;M]au (Horowitz HUCA 2
(1925), 190; R. Paret Handwörterbuch des Islam (Leiden, 1941), 762f); fem. (Bauer-Leander
BArm. 239x) Da 329; otherwise generally constructed as pl. det.: aY:M'au Da 34 Ezr 410; aY:m'àau Da 3
7.31 519 626 714: nation, together with aM;[' and ÷v;li; sg. Da 329, pl. 34.7.31 519 626 714.
†
÷ma: the same in Heb.; EmpArm. haf., Pehl. ÷myh (Junker Frahang 18: 3), and under the
influence of Heb. ÷ymiaÔh‰,, pl. mhymn EgArm. (Hermopolis); Samaria; Palm., Hatra (Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 64 s.v. ÷myh; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 278 s.v. hymn); JArm. ÷ymiyhe, DSS
(Dalman Wb. 23a; Beyer Arm. Texte 513); Syr. haymen (Brockelmann Lexicon 175a); CPArm.
haymen (Schulthess Lex. 49 s.v. <mn); Mnd. haimin and haiman (Drower-Macuch Dictionary
22b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 221, 244); NeoSyr. meheméÆn, mehaméÆn (Maclean Dictionary
160b); > Arb. haymana (Horowitz HUCA 2 (1925), 47); sbst. atwnmyh EmpArm., EgArm. (
Ah\iqar 132; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 64; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 279 s.v. hymnwt); JArm.
(Dalman Wb. 112b); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 175a); Mnd. (Drower-Macuch Dictionary
120a), and NeoSyr. (Maclean Dictionary 76a); adj. ÷yma (Saqqara 3; Donner-R. Inschriften
266:3; Ah\iqar 132; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 64); Syr. and NeoSyr. (Maclean Dictionary 14a); pt.
passive, Pehl.; EgArm. (Hermopolis 4, 9); Palm. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 64); JArm., Bab. Tg.
(see Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 83, note 40; Beyer Arm. Texte 513); CPArm., Syr., NeoSyr. ::
Mnd. mhaiman, mhaimin (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 259a; active pt. haf.) dependable,
something believable, believer.
haf (Bauer-Leander BArm. 139i): pf. ÷miyhe (Or. heµmen) to trust in, with B] Da 624; passive
pt. ÷m'yhem] (Or. meheµmaµn, Bauer-Leander BArm. 297c) trustworthy Da 245 65. †
rma: the same in Heb.; Arm. (cf. Vogt Lexicon 10f), Deir Alla; OArm., Zakir (Donner-R.
Inschriften 202 A: 15); Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften 222 A: 33, 36; B: 24, 26; C: 18; 223 B: 5;
C: 1; 224: 5, 7, 18, 20, 30); Zendjirli 215: 21 (see Degen Altaram. Gr. p. 71); Tell Fekherye 10,
14, sbst. <mrt pmh “the word (words) of his mouth” (cf. Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 78 s.v.
<mrh); EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Driver Arm. Docs.; Ah\iqar;
Behistun 7, 18 (Akk. al-ta-par um-ma), 27 (Akk. iq-bu-u); Saqqara) Asshur Ostracon
(Donner-R. Inschriften 233: 8, 10, 17); Uruk 27, 43 a-ma-ar; Nab., Palm., Hatra (Donner-R.
Inschriften 249: 4; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 17; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 73 s.v. <mr1); JArm.
(Dalman Wb. 23b); DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 514); NeoArm. (Bergsträsser Gloss. 57 s.v. <mr);
NeoSyr. (Maclean Dictionary 14b); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 26a); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex.
11b); Sam. aµmaór (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 1b); Mnd. AMR I (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 23a).
pe: pf. rm'a} (Or. <amar, Bauer-Leander BArm. 138d), fem. tr,m,&a} (139g), 1st. sg. trem]a'
(138f), pl. an:r]m'a} Ezr 54.9, Wrm'àa}; impf. rm'ayE (Or. yoµmar, → lka), pl. ÷Wrm]aTe; impv. rm'aÔ,
rm‰;aÔ (Bauer-Leander BArm. 139 l); inf. rm'ame Da 29, rm'me Ezr 511 (:: rmal Asshur Ostracon 8,
EgArm. < Canaanite :: Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 83); pt. rm'a;, pl. ÷yrim]a‰;.
—1. to say (in direct speech: abs. rm'a;wÒ hnE[} Da 28 and elsewhere, → hn[; with l] of the person
Da 24.25 39 and elsewhere; with µd;qÕ 29 517 613f; with yDi 225; with ÷Ke 411 723; with am;nEK] Ezr 54.9;
with hn:d]Ki Jr 1011; rm'mel] (corresponding to Heb. rmoale) Ezr 511; ÷yrima‰; to you it has been said
(Bauer-Leander BArm. 333d!) Da 428 :: ÷yrima‰; (Bauer-Leander BArm. 292 l) they are talking
(speaking) to you Da 67.13f Ezr 53 (rm'a} Da 71 is not clear, see e.g. Plöger KAT xviii: 101, 103;
Bentzen Daniel 48).
—2. a) to say something: → hluv;, with l[' of the person, to speak against the Hebrew slaves
Da 329.
—b) to speak, tell, parallel with [dy hof., hwj pa., haf.: am;l]j, or ar;v]Pi Da 24.9.36 44f.6.15.
—3. to command (cf. Arb.) in direct speech: ÷yrim]a‰; (see above under 1) it is commanded Da 34
; with inf. and l] Da 212.46 313.19f 423; Wrm&'a} (Bauer-Leander BArm. 333d!), “and as it had been
commanded”, or alternatively, “and as someone had commanded” 52 624; with “the perfect of
execution” (Bauer-Leander BArm. 351e; cf. KBL) 529.
—4. for the following passages Vogt Lexicon 10b chooses to translate rma as “to ask”: Da 226;
215 324a 513 621 Ezr 53, and then also cj. vs.4, for an:r]m'a} prop. ÷yrim]a‰; “they asked”; while the
context of these various passages does suggest something different from the rest, especially for
Da 226 621 Ezr 53f, it is not necessary to take it as meaning → lav.
*rMea:i Heb. *rMeai, n.m. rMeai; OArm., Tell Fekherye 20; Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften 222 A:
23); EmpArm., EgArm. (Ah\iqar 121; Driver Arm. Docs. 6: 3); and Palm. rma (Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 18 s.v. rmaII; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 78 s.v. <mr3); JArm., DSS (ar;M]ai,
Dalman Wb. 24a; Beyer Arm. Texte 515); and CPArm. rM'ai (Schulthess Lex. 12a; but see also
Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 83); Syr. <emmeraµ< (Brockelmann Lexicon 26b); Mnd. >mbra
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 352b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. §69); fem. aT;r]M'ai JArm., CPArm.
see above; DSS hrma = <emmaraµ (Beyer loc. cit.); > Arb. <immar (Fraenkel Fremdwörter
107f); Ph., Punic <mr (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 18; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 78 s.v. <mr3;
Tomback Lexicon 24); cf. Punic mlk <mr “sacrificial lamb”, in Latin inscr. molchomor (Haussig
Wb. Myth. 1: 299f); Ug. imr lamb (Gordon Textbook §19.231; Aistleitner Wb. 287); loanword
from Akk. immeru (Zimmern Fremdwörter 50); it is probably not a loanword but rather a
common sbst. in Ug., Ph., Arm. and Heb., cf. Baumgartner VT 4 (1954), 196: pl. ÷yriM]ai lamb
(as an animal for sacrifice) Ezr 69.17 and 717 (together with ÷yrik]Di). †
HBenÒa:i → *bnEa}.
*bnEa} or * bae (so KBL, Vogt Lexicon 11a): Heb. *bae: —a) for both forms (with and without
nuµn) see Bauer-Leander BArm. 50d and e, and 221g; < Akk. inbu(m), enbu fruit, fruit tree (
AHw. 381b; cf. Beyer Arm. Texte 515; CAD I/J: 144a); according to Zimmern Fremdwörter 55,
also Pöbel ZA 39 (1930), 1492, and Kaufman Akkadian Influences 58, probably originally
related to → bn:[e (see HAL 805; HALOT 851; and for the cognate languages see
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 874).
—b) JArm. inscr. (Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 3, s.v. <b2); JArm. aB;ai, aB;nÒai and ab;b;a} µ'
(Dalman Wb. 1b, 24b, 221a); Syr. <ebbaµ< (Brockelmann Lexicon 1b) and Mnd. >bibia pl.
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 340a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 163) fruits; Arb. <abb (Nöldeke
ZDMG 40 (1886), 735); Amharic <ababaµ flower (KBL, cf. Leslau 9): sf. (collective) HBenÒai fruit
Da 49.11.18. †
hn:a,} variant Da 8 2 Ezr 612 an:a} (Bauer-Leander BArm. 69d), Or. hn:a' Da 427 516 (Bauer-Leander
BArm. 66n, 69d); Heb. ynIa;} OArm., Zakir, Zendjirli, Sefire; EmpArm., Nerab, Asshur Ostracon,
EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Driver Arm. Docs.; Hermopolis; Saqqara);
Behistun 21 (Akk. a-na-ku); Samaria; Uruk 10, 26 (a-na-<); Mcheta 1; Pehl. (Junker Frahang;
Herz-feld Paikuli), Nab., Palm., Hatra, JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 18;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 79 s.v. <nh3); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 2a); DSS (Beyer Arm.
Texte 515f); an:a} JArm., DSS rarely (Dalman Wb. 24b; Beyer loc. cit.); Hatra, Syr.
(Brockelmann Lexicon 27b) and Mnd. (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 24a; Nöldeke Mand.
Gramm. §75, p. 86); NeoArm. ana (Bergsträsser Gloss. 60, s.v. <n; Spitaler Gramm. 90b s.v. <n)
and NeoSyr. (Maclean Dictionary 15a): personal pronoun (cf. Vogt Lexicon 11f).
—a) 1st. sg. personal pronoun, I Da 28-728 (12 times), Ezr 612.
—b) strengthening a pronominal suffix yjiWr laYEnId; hn:a} my very own spirit, of me, Daniel Da
715; and hn:a} yNImi it is from me Ezr 721 (Bauer-Leander BArm. 69d, 267d). †
÷WNai, fem. ÷yNIai Da 7 fem. ynh Asshur Ostracon 12, on which see Donner-R. Inschriften 2: p.
17;
285, 3rd. fem. personal pronoun abs. (an older form ÷ynh as copula, Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 264 s.v. h<1); Nab. wna this (Cantineau Nab. 1: 60; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary
333 s.v. znh); Palm. ÷nh (Rosenthal Palm. p. 42; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 61 s.v. ahI;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 264 s.v. h<1); JArm. ÷WNai/hi, fem. ÷yNIa/i hi (Dalman Gramm.
112:5) that; DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 563) ÷wna = Sam. innon that (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 2a);
CPArm. (Schulthess Gramm. §56, hennoµ(n) personal pronoun, she; §62 helleµn that); and Syr.
hennoµn, fem. henneµn (Nöl-deke Syr. Gramm. §67) that; Mnd. hinum, fem. hinin, hin>n
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 146, 147; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm §75, p. 86); NeoArm. hinn(un),
personal pronoun, she (Bergsträsser Glossar 33); Bauer-Leander BArm. 71p, 124s; Schaeder
53f, 3rd. pl. masc. and fem. personal pronoun (sg. → awh, fem. ayh): they, as copula
(Bauer-Leander BArm. 268a) Da 717 Ezr 54, as acc. Da 625; as demonstrative pronoun, those (so
ZüBi; NRSV, REB: those kings :: Bauer-Leander BArm. 82e: these) Da 244; → (÷)/Mhi. †
v/na;: → vn:a.Ô
an:j]n&'a,' variant hn:j]n&'a}; Da 3

Ezr 416 511 (Bauer-Leander BArm. 70n): Heb. Wnj]n&'a;} EmpArm.,
16
EgArm. hnjna and ÷jna (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Leander 26 l; Saqqara;
Hermopolis); Samaria; Palm.; JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 18; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 81 s.v. <nh\n2); JArm. an:j]n(" a}) (Dalman Wb. 25a, 267b); DSS hnjna (Beyer Arm.
Texte 516); Syr. <nh\nn, h\nan (Nöldeke Syr. Gramm. §63:2; Brockelmann Lexicon 28a); CPArm.
<anan and <aneµ, later also <nyh (Schulthess Lex. 12b s.v. ana; Gramm. §56); NeoArm. anah\
(Spitaler Gloss. 90b); NeoSyr. <ah\néÆ or ah\nan (Nöldeke NSyr. Gramm. §34, p. 74; Maclean
Dictionary 8b); later form Tg.B ÷na; Sam. (an)anan (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 2a); for JPArm. see
Sokoloff Dictionary 66; CPArm. <anan, <anen (Schulthess Gramm. §56); Mnd. anin, an>n
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 27a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 87; Brockelmann Grundriss 1: 300):
1st. pl. personal pronoun, we Da 316f Ezr 416 511. †
sna: the same in Heb., < Arm. (Wagner Aramäismen 21/22); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 26b;
Beyer Arm. Texte 516); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 13b); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 30a); OArm.
, snh Zakir (Donner-R. Inschriften 202 B: 20; but see also Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 83);
EmpArm., Nerab (Donner-R. Inschriften 225: 6; 226: 8f; cf. Jean-H. Dictionnaire 68;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 290), variant of sna ? :: haf. from root swn to steal, drag off, cf.
Nöldeke ZA 21: 383, and Donner-R. Inschriften 2: p. 210, 275; 3: p. 38a.
pe: pt. snEa; to oppress Da 46, sbj. zr;: Jl‰; snEa;Aal; zr;Alk;wÒ “no mystery oppresses you”,
meaning, “no mystery is too difficult for you”, so Vogt Lexicon 12a. †
*¹n"a;} Heb. ¹na, ¹a'; —1. *¹na EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar; Kraeling Arm.
Pap.; Saqqara); Pehl. (Junker Frahang 10: 16); Tema (Donner-R. Inschriften 228 A: 14); JArm.
inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 21 s.v. ¹aII; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 83 s.v. <np2); JArm.
aP;nÒa' (Dalman Wb. 27a; see also Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 83); DSS *¹na and *¹a (Beyer
Arm. Texte 516 s.v. <np); Mnd. anpia, pl. (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 27a; Nöldeke Mand.
Gramm. §51).
—2. *¹a: Arslan Tash (Degen-Müller-Röllig Neue Epehemeris 2, 40: iii, sg. <p); Sefire dual.
(Donner-R. Inschriften 222 A: 28, 42 and 224: 2); EmpArm., EgArm. (Hermopolis); Palm. (for
Jean-H. Dictionnaire and Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary see above); JArm. aP;a' (Dalman Wb.
32b); DSS (see above); Syr. <appayya and <appeµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 39a); CPArm.
(Schulthess Lex. 13b s.v. *<np); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 2a s.v. <np: abban); NeoArm. ffoµya
(Bergsträsser Gloss. 24 s.v. f; Spitaler Gloss. 85b); Mnd. anpia (Drower-Macuch Dictionary
27a), Ruzûicðka. 130; Bauer-Leander BArm. 181x): *¹na and *¹a: dual (Bauer-Leander BArm.
202o; cf. Beyer loc. cit. :: pl. JArm., Syr., CPArm., Mnd.): sf. yhi/PnÒa': face (with Al[' lp'nÒ) Da
246, (ã µlex]) 319. †
vn:a,; Or. <enaµsû (Bauer-Leander BArm. 16s), Heb. v/naÔ.

—A. forms: OArm., Zendjirli (Donner-R. Inschriften 215:33); Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften
224:16); EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar 116, 122, 124,
151, 162, 167, 190); Tema (Donner-R. Inschriften 228 A: 20); Armazi (Donner-R. Inschriften
276: 10); Nab., Palm., Hatra, JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 19; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 84 s.v. <nsû3); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 27b; Beyer Arm. Texte 517); Syr.
(Brockelmann Lexicon 31a); CPArm. “a certain person, someone” (Schulthess Lex. 14a); Sam. (
Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 2a, someone, a person); Mnd. anasûa, nasûa (Drower-Macuch Dictionary
24b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 182f); NeoSyr. naµsûa (Nöldeke NSyr. Gramm. 1182); with the
ending -uµt (Bauer-Leander BArm. 197g): Pehl. atwna (Junker Frahang 11:1; Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 19; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 85); Syr. (<)naµsûuµt\a (Brockelmann Lexicon
31a); CPArm. *<nsûw, sf. <nsûwth (Schulthess Lex. 14a).
—B. meanings: —a) sg. na a person (an individual): EgArm., JArm., Nab., Palm. (Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 19); na rb a human being (Sefire Donner-R. Inschriften 224: 16).
—b) na collective, people: Zendjirli (Donner-R. Inschriften 215: 23); Tema (228 A: 20); Hatra
(256: 6f).
—c) pl. <nsûn (Tell Fekherye 14, with sf. <nsûwh 9, 22); JArm. ÷yvin:a;} also CPArm., Syr., Mnd. pl.
(as well as sg.).
—C. in BArm. basic form *<unaµsû (Bauer-Leander BArm. 41o, 190u); the same in the cstr. Ezr 4
11; det. av;n:a}, variant Da 243 413 521 and 78 ãÔ, Or. <enaµsûaµ and av;/naÔ, (Nab., Cantineau Nab. 2:
65, 212; and Palm., Rosenthal Palm. 27; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 19) Da 413f (K), see BHS;
Bauer-Leander BArm. 34a :: Brockelmann OLZ 37 (1934), 689f; pl. µyvin:a} Da 414 (Heb., rd.
av;n:a} collective, Bauer-Leander BArm. 201f).
—D. instances: —1. det. collective av;n:a}, JArm. (Dalman Gramm. §38: 1; Beyer Arm. Texte
517; but see also Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 83): mankind, the human race Da 413 (→ ÷mi 1b).14.22.
29f 78; the people of a particular country Ezr 411 (vn:aÔ st. cstr.); av;n:a} tWkl]m' the kingdom
(realm) of mankind, NRSV: the kingdom of mortals, REB: the kingdom of men Da 414.29 521;
ã} [r'zÒ human seed, referring to intermarriage (Akk. zeµr ameµluµti, see AHw. 1522a; CAD Z: 96,
s.v. zeµru 5a) Da 243, ã} ynEB] 238 521 individual human beings, vn:aÔ rB' an individual human
being (→ II rB' 2) 713, see Bauer-Leander BArm. 304a; Plöger KAT xviii: 104 with reference to
Bentzen Daniel 501.
—2. person, in a general sense, some person or other, a human being: JArm., DSS (Beyer Arm.
Texte 517); Nab. someone, and with negative, no-one; so also DSS; Da 210 55 ( yDi ÷[;B]x]a,
vn:aÔAdy" “the finger of a human hand”, so e.g. Bentzen Daniel 40); 68 (÷mi vn:aÔw< Hl;aÔAlK; “from
some god or a person”); vn:aÔAlK; everyone Da 310 57 613 (the same as AlK; Da 68), Ezr 611; AlK;
yDi vn:aÔ “everyone who …” Da 613. †
htna, K hT;nÒa' (only BArm.), Q and Ezr 7 25,also T]nÒa'; Heb. hT;a'; OArm., Zendjirli <t
(Donner-R. Inschriften 214: 33); Sefire (224: 11, 20; Degen Altaram. Gr. §35); EmpArm. <nt;
EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Driver Arm. Docs.; Saqqara); Behistun 52;
Samaria; <t Nerab (Donner-R. Inschriften 225: 5; 226: 8); Asshur Ostracon 2, 19; Gözne
(Donner-R. Inschriften 259: 2); Pehl. (Herzfeld Paikuli 108, <nt); Nab. <nt(<); Palm. <nt; JArm.
inscr. <(n)th; fem. <nty; EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.), Arebsun
(Donner-R. Inschriften 264: 5, 6); JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 29 s.v. taIII;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 85 s.v. <nth2); JArm. and CPArm. rarely; Syr. (K); JArm., DSS
(Dalman Wb. 27b, T]nÒa'; Gramm. §16a and 1; Beyer Arm. Texte 518; see also Sokoloff, DSD 7,
(2000), 84 for T]a'); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 14a); Sam. a½tta½ (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 2a); Syr. (
Q) (Nöldeke Syr. Gramm. §63a and 1); Mnd. anat (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 24b; for an
explanation of the form see Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 86f); NeoSyr. (Nöldeke NSyr. Gramm. 73
(§34); Maclean Dictionary 16a) and NeoArm. (Spitaler §34a, and f-k); Bauer-Leander BArm.
50e, 70k (cf. Leander 18j): 2nd. sg. masc. personal pronoun: you Da 229-621 (13 times), Ezr 725. †
÷WTnÒa:' Heb. µT,a'; OArm. ? µta Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften 222 B: 31f; cf. Degen Altaram.
Gr. §35a, p. 54f); EmpArm., EgArm. µtna (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Driver Arm. Docs.; Saqqara);
JArm. inscr. <twn (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 30 s.v. µta; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 85 s.v. <nth
2, cf. p. 86); JArm., ÷WTa', WTnÒa' (Dalman Gramm. §16a and 1; Wb. 27b, 45b); DSS (Beyer Arm.
Texte 519) ÷(w)tna; CPArm. <twn (<attoµn, see Schulthess Gramm. §56), also <ntwn; Syr. K <antoµn
, Q <attoµn (Nöldeke Syr. Gramm. §63, a, 1); Mnd. anatun (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 25a;
Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 86); NeoArm. (Spitaler 50f, i); NeoSyr. (Maclean Dictionary 16a);
Bauer-Leander BArm. 70o, → hT;nÒa': 2nd. pl. masc. personal pronoun you Da 28. †
rWsa;: rsa; Heb. rWsae; JArm. ar;Wsa} (Dalman Wb. 28a; see Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 84, who
speaks of Late Jewish Literary Aramaic); CPArm. *<swr, emphatic <wsr< = <osraµ Schulthess
Gramm. §97; Lex. 15f); Syr. >asuµraµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 38a); Mnd. >sura, >usura bond,
imprisonment etc. (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 354); NeoSyr. yisuµraµ (Nöldeke NSyr. Gramm.
§47:4, p. 100; Maclean Dictionary 121a): basic form *<isuµr ? :: Bauer-Leander BArm. 189s: pl.
÷yriWsaÔ.
—a. sg. fetter (made from metal) Da 412.20, cf. Beyer Arm. Texte 519.
—b. pl. custody, imprisonment (ZüBi; TOB; NRSV; REB) Ezr 726. †
rP'n"s]a:‰; proper noun, the name of a king of Assyria (:: Berger ZA 64 (1975), 229f, see below),
Ezr 410; the personal name has been corrupted in transmission and so we cannot know for
certain what the original form was; possibilities and suggestions include: —1. in the Versions.:
Sept.RA Asennafar (Sept.B/A); Sept.L and Josephus Ant. xi 2: 1 Salmana(")sarh"; Vulg.
Asennaphar; Pesh. <espéÆd rabbaµ.
—2. in modern interpretations: —a) a gar-bled version of lpn[br]sa, referring to
Assurbanipal, king of Assyria 669–630, so KBL; Rudolph Esra und Nehemia 36; Vogt Lexicon
14b.
—b) Esarhaddon, king of Assyria 681–669, so Gunneweg KAT xix/1: 84, 90, who also refers to
the fact that this king has already been mentioned in Ezr 42.
—c) the personal name would have been pronounced originally as Asûsûur-eµpir “Asshur is the
provider”. For names expressing thanks that are constructed with the vb. epeµru “to feed, look
after, provide with food rations” (AHw. 223b; CAD E: 190a), see Stamm Namengebung 189;
and for the corresponding general expressions meaning “X is a (my) provider” (with a
theophoric subject), see Stamm Namengebung 213, 222. See also Berger ZA 64 (1975), 229f;
according to him there is also the question of someone bearing this name in the time of
Esarhaddon who was “the official representative of the king, a sort of provincial governor”.
—3. of these three suggestions the last (2c) is hardly to be taken into consideration, for it is a
rather remote possibility; as for the others it is different; while both appear to be possible
interpretations, preference should be given to the first of them (2a). †
an:r]P's]a; (ospaŒrnaµ, see Vogt Lexicon 14b); Sept. ejpidevxion, ejpimelw`", toivmw"; ÷rpsa
(Donner-R. Inschriften 263 = CIS 2: 108; from Mysien, Abydos, not far from Çanakkale on the
Asian side of the Bosphorous, see Donner-R. Inschriften 263); EgArm. (Driver Arm. Docs.
10:4; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 20; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 90); loanword from Old Persian
a/usprna “the whole, completeness”, see e.g. Schaeder 75, Rosenthal Arm. Forsch. 24f; Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 20; Hinz 246: adv. completely, exactly (for the translation see Vogt Lexicon 14b,
and Beyer Arm. Texte 519); with db[ Ezr 58 612.13 721.26; with bhy hitpe. 68; with hnq 717. †
*rsa: the same in Heb.; OArm., Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften 224:18); EmpArm., EgArm.
(Cowley Arm. Pap., Saqqara, Ah\iqar 80), Uruk 5, 8 a-si-ir; cf. Gordon AfO 12, p. 106 no. 9;
Pehl. (Junker Frahang 20: 17: <slwn; Herzfeld Paikuli 116 [<sr], 117 [<slwn]); Palm. qal: a)
finite vb. pf. <srw, and b) passive pt. sg. a-si-ir and pl. st. emph. <syr<; the latter occurs in the
construct chain rb <syr<, in Greek parallels (ïRab)aseivrh, but the meaning of this is uncertain;
according to Jean-H. Dictionnaire 20, it is the name of a temple; so also Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary; according to KBL it is a divine name, on which see Rosenthal Palm. 772; Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 20; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 90; JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 31b; Beyer Arm.
Texte 519); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 15b); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 37b); Mnd. ASR
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 29b); NeoSyr. to bind (Nöldeke NSyr. Gramm. 228; Maclean
Dictionary 17b).
Der. rWsa,, rs;aÔ.
rs;a,; Or. <esaµr (Bauer-Leander BArm. 66n), and issaµr; Heb. rS;ai; basic form *isaµr
(Bauer-Leander BArm. 189r); the basic meaning bond > binding > fetter > prohibition: arsa
Babylonian Expedition of the University of Pennsylvania viii/1, no. 51; EmpArm., Samaria <sr<
bond, covenant (Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 91–92 s.v. <sr3); JArm. ar;S;ai and ar;S;aÔ
(Dalman Wb. 32a) bond, chain, binding (the latter is the rendering of the sbst. in Nu 302–6.11–15
according to Noth ATD 7: 194, instead of the traditional “vow of abstinence”); DSS (Beyer
Arm. Texte 519, <esaµr prohibition); CPArm. *<sr (<issaµr, so Schulthess Lex. 15b) fetter; Syr.
<esaµraµ (Nöldeke Syr. Gramm. §109) fetter, “vow of abstinence”, judgement, punishment
(Brockelmann Lexicon 37b); Mnd. asara (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 28a; Nöldeke Mand.
Gramm. 115): the same in the cstr.; det. ar;s;aÔ: prohibition, interdict (NRSV) Da 68f.10.13f.16. †
[a;: Heb. Å[e; EmpArm., Uruk 2 ahÉ-hÉu (= <a>, see Beyer Arm. Texte 119f): EgArm. q[ (Cowley
Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Saqqara; Ah\iqar); Nab. <> *Jean-H. Dictionnaire 219 s.v. Å[;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 879 s.v. >s\); JArm. a[;a;, for the form of the sbst. (Dalman Wb.
32b) see Beyer loc. cit.; Bauer-Leander BArm. 39d, 59c, 179f; Nöldeke Neue Beiträge 144f;
Vogt Lexicon 14b; for [[ in Qumran see Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 84.
In the other Arm. dialects for wood, tree a[;a; is replaced either by ÷l;yai (together with a[;a; in
JArm.), or by as;yqe; Pehl. (Junker Frahang 4: 7; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1009); JArm.
(Dalman Wb. 377a); CPArm. qys, emphatic qys< (Schulthess Lex. 179); Syr. qaysaµ
(Brockelmann Lexicon 665a), and NeoSyr. qeµsa (Maclean Dictionary 278a; KBL); NeoArm.
qéÆsa (Bergsträsser Gloss. 71 s.v. qys); so also Mnd. (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 411b): det.
a[;a;.
—1. wood Da 54.23.
—2. beam Ezr 58 64.11. †
¹a': Heb. I ¹a'; Pehl. (Junker Frahang 24: 6, 14; Herzfeld Paikuli 120–123); Sogd.
(Gauthier-Benveniste Essai 2: 208); EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Driver
Arm. Docs.; Hermopolis; Saqqara); Samaria; Xanthos; Taxila 11 (Donner-R. Inschriften
273:11); Palm. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 21 s.v. ¹a1; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 92 s.v. <p2);
also µpa EgAram. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 22;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 96; cf. Vogt Lexicon 15); JArm., DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 520,
together with ¹a (<ap); rarely also ¹wa, and bwa Dalman Wb. 32b, but see Sokoloff, DSD 7
(2000), 84, who disputes the existence of this form); Sam. af. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 2a) and Mnd.
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 30b); Syr. <aµp, <oµp (Brockelmann Lexicon 38f); Targ. (Levy 1:
136a) and CPArm. <wp (Schulthess Lex. 4b, and Gramm. §132: 1, <wp = <oµf); NeoSyr. aµp or uµp
(Nöldeke NSyr. Gramm. 163; cf. Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 2081; Maclean Dictionary 18a); also p
, OArm., Zendjirli (Donner-R. Inschriften 214; 215; 216:18); Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften 223
B: 4, 6) EmpArm., Bauer-Meissner Pachtvertrag 6; Nab.; Palm. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 225 s.v.
pI; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 898 s.v. p1); cf. Degen Altaram. Gramm. §46a (on p. 63,
with note 41); also p in Nab. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 225 s.v. pI): ¹a' also, always linked with wÒ (
¹a'w)Ò and also Da 623 Ezr 510.14 65. †
*‰y; s;r]p a}, pl. det. ayEs;r]p‰;a} (variant ˜rp'a}), Bauer-Leander BArm. 196d: Ezr 49; probably a
proper name (Sept. Afarsaiòi), in which the initial a of the sbst. has arisen by dittography
(see e.g. BHS); suggestions about the identification of the intended proper name include: —a)
ayEs;r]P' (→ ys;r]P') Persian, so e.g. KBL (with references to further bibliography); see further
Rudolph Esra und Nehemia 36; Gunneweg KAT xix/1: 82; —b) cj. for ayEs;r]p‰;a} prop. ayEr;P]si,
“Sipparite”, i.e., a resident of the city of Sippar, so Rosenthal Aramaic Handbook 1/2: 17f; and
subsequently Vogt Lexicon 15b.
Deciding which of these two possibilities to choose is not easy. The MT seems to favour the
first (a), but the mention of other names of cities in Ezr 49 rather supports the sec-ond (b).
*yk;s]r]p'a,} pl. det. ayEk;s]r]p'a} (variant ˜r]p‰;a}, see Bauer-Leander BArm. 196d) Ezr 56 66; the
meaning of the word is not certain but possibilities and suggestions include: —a) the name of a
people, so Sept. Afarsacaiòi, Vulg., and so also Gunneweg KAT xix/1: 99, 103, where the
sbst. is rendered as “the Apharsechite”; for the reasons on which this is based see p. 849 (on Ezr
49). According to Meyer Judentums 38, ayEk;s]r]p'a} would be the same as ayEs;r]P', but this is
improbable.
—b) an official title; Sept. (= 3 Esdras) hJgemovne"; Pesh. sûalléÆt\eµ; Arabic versions nawaµ-t\éÆr
guardian; a loanword from Old Pers. *prasaka/*frasaka + Aramaic suffix. aµy, so Eilers
Iranische Beamtennamen 5ff, 30ff; see further Rudolph Esra und Nehemia 50, and Vogt
Lexicon 15b, who translates the Old Persian word as the Latin inquisitor; Rosenthal Gramm.
§189 raises the question of Akk. iprasakku an official administering justice in the Persian
government (AHw. 385a; CAD I/J: 165b); see also Beyer Arm. Texte 520.
Clearly the second suggestion (b) deserves more preference than the first (a). †
*yk;t]s'r]p'a:} pl. det. ayEk;t]s'r]p'a} (variant ˜r]p‰;a}), Bauer-Leander BArm. 196d, Ezr 49. The
meaning of the word is not certain, but possible suggestions have been made, like those for
ayEk;s]r]p'a}, and it is often identified with this word; on this see Rudolph Esra und Nehemia 36;
Rosenthal Gramm. §189, and Gunneweg KAT xix/1, 84: —a) a proper name, so Sept., Vulg.;
also Gunneweg loc. cit.
—b) a Persian official title, of which the original form and meaning is given in various different
ways: —a) fraistaka “ambassador”, so Rudolph Esra und Nehemia 36, with reference to Eilers
Beamtennamen 391, 100; —b) *frastaµ-ka “top official”, corresponding to Greek prostavth",
so Rosenthal Gramm. §189, and similarly Vogt Lexicon 15b, with the Latin translation
praefectus; frastaµka (Beyer Arm. Texte 520, with reference to Hinz 97), the title of an official
representative in Samaria.
—g) freµstak, a loanword from Middle Pers. (KBL), > JArm. aq;T]s]riP], Syr. prstq< (Pers. piristak
) an ambassador of the king (Brockelmann Lexicon 603a).
It is better to understand it as a title (b) than as a proper name (a). †
*µtoP]a;' MSS s(/)t- (variantSecundum µTop]a') Ezr 413: an uncertain word which was no longer
understood by the Versions; for the various attempted explanations see KBL, and Rudolph Esra
und Nehemia 38f; it is most likely to be derived from Old Pers. apa-tam “surely” < Akk. appitti
(< ana pitti AHw. 60a, 871a) “surely, certainly”; on this see KBL, and Rudolph loc. cit. (both
with relevant bibliography); see further Rosenthal Gramm. §93; Rosenthal Aramaic Handbook
1/2, p. 18a; Vogt Lexicon 15f; Beyer Arm. Texte 520 (with reference to Hinz 31 and Kaufman
Akkadian Influences 35) < Persian apatana(m) “surely”; Gunneweg KAT xix/1: 83 translates
“finally”, and makes the observation (see p. 84) that “the meaning of the word is uncertain”. †
*[B'x]a,, Or. <is\ba>; the same in Heb.; JArm. also aT;[]B'x]a, (Dalman Wb. 37a; Sokoloff, DSD 7
(2000), 84); CPArm. *<s\b> (Schulthess Lex. 166a) and Bab. Tg. (see Sokoloff loc. cit. 83,
especially note 40; Beyer Arm. Texte 520); EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling
Arm. Pap.) [bx (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 241 s.v. [bxII; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 958 s.v.
s\b>2); JArm. a[;b]xi, see Sokoloff, loc. cit. 84; DSS [bxa (Dalman Wb. 358a s.v. a[;b]xiII;
Beyer Arm. Texte 520); Syr. s\eb>aµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 620a); Mnd. s\bata, variant s\bita
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 389b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 36); NeoSyr. s\b>< (= s\ip>aµ)
(Nöldeke NSyr. Gramm. 88; Maclean Dictionary 262b); NeoArm. spa>t\a (Bergsträsser Gloss.
79 s.v. sb>; Spitaler Gramm. 83); Bauer-Leander BArm. 193o; Rosenthal Gramm. §60: pl.
÷[;B]x]a,, at;[;B]x]a,, cstr. t[;B]x]a,, fem.
—1. finger Da 55.
—2. toe Da 241f. †
[B'r]a;' the same in Heb.; EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.); Samaria; Pehl. (Junker
Frahang 29: 4, <lb<); Nab., Palm., JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 23; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 101); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 38b; Beyer Arm. Texte 520); CPArm. (Schulthess
Lex. 188b s.v. rb> I); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 708b s.v. rb>); Mnd. arbia, less frequently arba
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 36a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 16); NeoSyr. arba, also arbeµ
(Nöldeke NSyr. Gramm. 151, 152; Maclean Dictionary 19b); NeoArm. arp>a (Bergsträsser
Gloss. 74 s.v. rb>; Spitaler Gramm. 15f; Gloss. 92a); Bauer-Leander BArm. 193m, 250i: fem.
h[;B;r]a': cardinal number, four Da 325 72f.6.17 Ezr 617; → y[;ybir]. †
*÷w:GÒr]a:' Heb. ÷m;G:r]a', once ÷w:GÒr]a' 2C 26 (Wagner 27); loanword from Akk. argamannu reddish
purple wool (AHw. 67a; cf. Kaufman 35; CAD A/2: 253a); Palm. (Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 103); JArm., DSS (Jastrow 115a; Beyer Arm. Texte 521, ÷awgra); CPArm.
(Schulthess Lex. 17b); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 46a); ? Mnd. argba (Drower-Macuch
Dictionary 36; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 502, 128); NeoSyr. (Maclean Dictionary 20a); det.
an:w:GÒr]a' purple, purple garment Da 57.16.29 as a mark of distinction for Daniel, a costly garment
worn by princes, Reicke-Rost Hw.1532). †
Wra}, Or. <aruµ; hra = <areµ ? EmpArm., Asshur Ostracon (Donner-R. Inschriften 233:19); EgArm.
(Hermopolis 1:5, 8; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 104 s.v. <rh2); JArm., DSS (Beyer Arm.
Texte 521) yria}, µWra}, yreh} (MHeb.) look out, since (→ Wla} Dalman Wb. 40b, 39b, 119a);
Canaanite < War]; Bauer-Leander BArm. 266b :: Eitan AJSL 44 (1927/28), 181ff; L. Bauer
Wörterbuch des palästinischen Arabisch, (41926), 74: har>uµh, helehuµ etc.: interjection look!,
behold!, Wra} w" (Or. we<aruµ) Da 72.5–7.13, variant vs.8 Wla} w" (→ Wla}). †
*jr'aÕ (basic form <urh\), so with Vogt Lexicon 16b, and Bauer-Leander BArm. 184o :: 230w
vocalised *jr'a', so also KBL, but this appears to be less fitting; Heb. jr'ao; OArm. jra,
Zendjirli (Donner-R. Inschriften 215:18); Sefire (224:9); EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.
, Ah\iqar); Palm.; JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 24; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 106 s.v.
<rh\2); JArm. aj;r]/a (Dalman Wb. 10b; Sokoloff Dictionary 42, JPArm. jrwa, det. aj;r]a;, pl.
÷jrwa); DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 522, jra, <orah\); CPArm. <wrh\, emph. <wrh\< (Schulthess Lex.
17b); Sam. uµraó (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 2a); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 47b) and NeoSyr. <urh\aµ
(Maclean Dictionary 7a); Mnd. >uhra (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 343a; Nöldeke Mand.
Gramm. 66, 160); NeoArm. orh\a occasion (Bergsträsser Gloss. 75). The sbst. is fem. (so
already at Sefire) and appears as a masc. only occasionally, on which see Beyer loc. cit., and
Nöl-deke Mand. Gramm. 160; in CPArm. and NeoArm. also formed as fem.: <orh\aµ, emphatic
<orh\etaµ (Schulthess Lex. 17b). Bauer-Leander BArm. 184o, 230w: pl. sf. (fem. as in most
occurrences) Jt;j;r]ao, Htej;r]ao, variant ˜r]a;: way; pl.
—a. ways of God, meaning God’s manner of action Da 434 parallel with yhi/db;[} µ'.
—b. ways of humans, fate of mortals Da 523 parallel with hm;v]nI, their fate and their breath
belong to God; cf. Heb. jr'ao, Jr,D,. †
hyEr]a:' the same in Heb.; a) <ryh, OArm. (Sefire, Donner-R. Inschriften 223 A:9); Pehl. (Junker
Frahang 9: 4); b) <ry, EmpArm., EgArm. (Ah\iqar 89, 110, 117); Palm. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire
24 s.v. yra and hyra; and Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 107 s.v. <ry3 and <ryh1); JArm., DSS
(Dalman Wb. 40b, hy:r]a'; Beyer Arm. Texte 522; for JPArm. yra see Sokoloff Dictionary 74);
CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 17b, <ry); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 48b); Mnd. (Drower-Macuch
Dictionary 37b) and NeoSyr. <aryaµ (Maclean Dictionary 20b) ayEr]a'; Bauer-Leander BArm. 200
l :: Brockelmann Grundriss 1: 412f; pl. det. at;w:y:r]a', Bauer-Leander BArm. 233i: lion: sg. Da 74
, pl. Da 68.13.17.20f.23.25.28. †
J/yr]a': a) Heb., see HAL 85a, HALOT 88a on Gn 14 . ; b) Arm. Da 2

19 24f.
—1. Sept., Theodotion, Judith 16, 2 Enoch 331 Ariwc (note that in Sept. Ariwc with Rahlfs,
and also with e.g. Zadok VT 26 (1976), 246 :: Grelot VT 25 (1975), ÆAriovch"); ÆArioukh" in
the Greek-Aramaic bilingual from Asia Minor, on which see Lidzbarski Ephemeris 2: 249f;
AJSL 45 (1928/29), 279; and Zadok loc. cit.; see further LipinŒski VT 28 (1978) 233–242,
mentioned by Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 84.
—2. the origin of the n.m. is uncertain, but possibilities include:
—a. from Hurrian Arriyuk, or Arriwuk in Mari (ARMT 2, 63:3), Ariukki in Nuzi, so de Vaux
Histoire 1: 210, with note 104; cf. also Sasson UF 6 (1974), 358, 376, 387a.
—b. from (Old) Iranian, see Grelot VT 25 (1975), 711–719 (with bibliography), especially 715;
also Zadok loc. cit. 246f; both of them infer different forms.
The choice between these two possibilities must remain open, but the first (a) has a certain
claim for preference.
—3. Arioch, a bodyguard at the court of the king of Babylon Da 224f. †
Jyria}, variants (as though < *<arrik, Bauer-Leander BArm. 58o) Jyria; and Jyria': hapax
legomenon Ezr 414, with l]; JArm. ak;yria}: 1). long; 2). correct, appropriate (Dalman Wb. 40b).
—a) the adj. is not a passive pt. (Kautzsch §57bg), on which see KBL, but a loanword from Old
Pers. aµrya-ka “worthy of an Aryan”, so Scheftelowitz Arisches im AT 79, and subsequently KBL
; Vogt Lexicon 17a; Bauer-Leander BArm. 188i; Rudolph Esra und Nehemia 40; also Rosenthal
Gramm. p. 78, and Aramaic Handbook 1/2: 18a (with a question mark), who suggests that the
translation of the adj. is “appropriate, seemly, fitting” or similar, and translates “for it is not
appropriate for us (or it does not befit us) to see aK;l]m' tw"r][, the dishonouring of the king (any
longer)”; so also Gunneweg KAT xix/1: 83.
—b) a different meaning is given in Beyer Arm. Texte 522 (with reference to Hinz 36): Jyria} <
Pers. arika “faithless”, and there Ezr 414 is translated as “there is no disloyalty in us in seeing
the dishonouring of the king”.
We consider that the first of these solutions (a) is the better one. †
*Jra: the same in Heb.; OArm. inf. pe. m<rk “to be long” (Tell Fekherye 7, 14); EmpArm.
(Nerab, Donner-R. Inschriften 226:3); Behistun 58 (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 24;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 108); JArm. (Dalman Wb. 41a); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 18a);
Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 2a); Syr. <rk, <éÆrek (Brockelmann Lexicon 49a; Nöldeke Syr. Gramm.
§174F); Mnd. ARK, <RK (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 37b); NeoArm. <rhÉ (Bergsträsser Gloss.
76; Spitaler Gloss. 92b); adj. ûyra EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.); Pehl. (Junker
Frahang 25: 20, <lyk); Hatra (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 25; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 108 s.v.
<rk4); JArm. (Dalman Wb. 40b); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 18a); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon
49a); Mnd. aruk/arik (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 37).
Der. hk;r]a'.
*aB;kur]a,' variant ˜ður]a' (Bauer-Leander BArm. 241q); MHeb. hB;Kur]a'; JArm. at;B]Kur]a', hbkra
DSS (Dalman Wb. 41a; Beyer Arm. Texte 523; for JPArm. hbwkra, see Sokoloff Dictionary
75); CPArm. <rkwb< (Schulthess Lex. 194a) = <arkuµbaµ (Gramm. §46: 1b); NeoArm. rhÉoppt\a
(Spitaler 15g; Bergsträsser Gloss. 76; Bauer-Leander BArm. 193o): traditionally from Heb. Jr,B,
(Brockelmann Grundriss 1: 276 :: Schwally 89, bkr, Arb. rukbat knee, see Wehr-Cowan
356b): pl. sf. HteB;kur]a', fem.: knee Da 56. †
hk;r]a:' Jra; MHeb. *Jrea; (but see Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 84, who recognises only MHeb.
root ûra, hif.) st. abs. for cstr. Jr,a, (Dalman Wb. 41a); cf. Baumgartner in Eissfeldt Fschr. (
BZAW 77) 30f; JArm. ak;r]a' (Dalman Wb. 41a) and DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 523) :: ak;r]Wa
JArm. (Dalman Wb. 41a); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 18a); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 49a);
Mnd. (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 346b) = Heb. Jr,ao; Bauer-Leander BArm. 185s: fem.: length
of time, prolongation Da 424 712. †
*yw:K]r]a' Ezr 49, pl. det. Q ayEw:K]r]a', K yEw:K]r]a' (Bauer-Leander BArm. 212z); Sept. ÆArcuaiòi, so
also Rahlfs with reference to the variant ajrcou`si in Sept.B: proper name, an inhabitant of
Uruk (→ Heb. Jr,a,, cuneiform [lu] Uruk-a-a, [lu] A-ra-ka-a-a, see Eilers 40); place name +
suffix. aµy (Bauer-Leander BArm. 196d), read yyEK;r]a' (sg. *yK;r]a'), see KBL; Rosenthal Aramaic
Handbook 1/2: 18a; and subsequently Vogt Lexicon 17b (:: Schaeder 60, < frataraka, an Iranian
official title; then subsequently Galling ZAW 63 (1951), 7018, and ATD 12 (1954), 1947).†
[r'a,} Or. <ara> (Bauer-Leander BArm. 66n): Heb. År,a,; → qr'a}; OArm., <rq Zendjirli (Donner-R.
Inschriften 214:5, 6, 7, 13; 215:5, 7, 14), Tell Fekherye 2; Zakir (Donner-R. Inschriften 202 B:
26); Zendjirli (216:4; 217:2); Sefire (222 A: 26, 28; B: 27; 223 A: 8; 224:6); EmpArm., <rq
EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Saqqara; Driver Arm. Docs.); <r> EgArm. (Kraeling Arm. Pap.;
Saqqara; Cowley Arm. Pap.); Pehl. (Junker Frahang 2: 1; 8: 3, <lk<); <r> Nab., Palm., JArm.
inscr.; r> Hatra (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 25; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 110 s.v. <rs\1); a[;r]a'
JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 42b, a[;r]a'; Beyer Arm. Texte 523); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 18b);
Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 2a); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 51a); NeoArm. ar>a (Spitaler Gloss.
92a; Bergsträsser Gloss. 74); NeoSyr. (Maclean Dictionary 21b); Bauer-Leander BArm. 26c, d,
181x (on p. 182).
—1. the earth Da 235.39 331 47f.12.17.19f.32 626 74.17.23; ã} wÒ aY:m'v] Ezr 511 Da 628, cf. Jr 1011a
aq;r]a'.
—2. a[;r]a' K, [r'a} Q (Bauer-Leander BArm. 254o); EgArm. [ra beneath (Kraeling Arm. Pap.
3: 5); JArm. (Dalman Wb. 43a) and CPArm. [r'l] (Schulthess Gramm. §26, 2c); NeoArm. erra
earthwards, downwards (Spitaler 118e, 130q); JN:mi ã} beneath you, a kingdom inferior to
yours (NRSV) Da 239. †
*y[ir]a:' adj. from the sbst. [r'a} (Bauer-Leander BArm. 197f); MHeb. ty[ir]a' the lowest; JArm.
at;y[ir]a' depth (Dalman Wb. 43a), cf. Babylonian Tg. cstr. ty[ir]a', see Beyer Arm. Texte 524:
cstr. ty[ir]a', fem. aB;G¬ ty[ir]a' the bottom of the pit Da 625; cf. Palm. [ra hjmwg the bottom
of his sepuchral niche (KBL; see Berytus 1, 38:10f; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 110 s.v. <rs\1
, especially p. 112 no. 2). †
*qr'a:} Heb. År,a,, → [r'a}: OArm., Zakir, Zendjirli, Sefire (for the occurrences see Degen
Altaram. Gr. §28: 1, on p. 45); see further Tell Fekherye 2; Pehl. (Junker Frahang 2: 1);
Saqqara (Donner-R. Inschriften 266: 2; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 110 s.v. <rs\1; see here
also for the instances in OArm. and EmpArm., and the change between [ :: q; EgArm. (cf.
Vogt Lexicon s.v. [r'a}; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 25f); Mnd. arqa (Drower-Macuch Dictionary
39a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 183); cf. ÆArakihl angel of the earth 1 Enoch 83; atqra in the
collocation rwb[ ˜ra the yield, produce of the earth (Driver Arm. Docs. xii: 6; cf. p. 33, 34b),
with a fem. ending following Akk. ers\etu(m) the earth, underworld, territory, soil (AHw. 245;
CAD s.v.) > atxra, st. abs. from *hxra, sf. ytxra, htxra (Nerab; Donner-R. Inschriften
225: 4, 7, 12; 226: 8). For Å instead of q in the sbst., see Baumgartner ZAW 45 (1927), 100f =
Umwelt 88; Schaeder Esr. 48f; det. aq;r]a' the earth aq;r]a'wÒ aY:m'v] Jr 1011a. †
aT;c]v'j]T'r]a' Ezr 4 7a,also aT]c]v'— Ezr 47b.8.11.23 614, also aT]s]v'— Ezr 712.21, see Heb.,
EgArm. once jtra, nine times sjtra (Kraeling Arm. Pap. p. 305a), and also eleven times,
see Cowley Arm. Pap. and Sardes (Schaeder Esr. 70); in the Lydian version ArtaksŒassa; sjtr[
a] Naksû-i-Rustam (F. Altheim Weltgesch. Asiens 1 (1947): 37); Pers. Artakhsûatra, or
alternatively ArtakhsûassŒa (cf. Schaeder 701; and see also Rudolph Esra und Nehemia 34; and
with (probably) a more precise transcription Vogt Lexicon 18b): Artaxerxes I, the king of
Persia 465–424 (Reicke-Rost Hw. 132f; Pauly-Wissowa (Kl.) 1: 615f). †
*va = <osû, < Akk. usûsûu, mostly pl. (AHw. 1442a); Sumerian loanword, see Kaufman 100; MHeb.
fem. hV;au, pl. ÷yViau; JArm., DSS at;V]au, indet. aV;au (Dalman Wb. 45a; Beyer Arm. Texte 524;
for JArm. and MHeb. see Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 84); CPArm. masc. *<sû, <wsû, more often pl.
and fem. <wsû< (st. abs.), pl. emph. <wsûy< fem. (Schulthess Lex. 19b), > Arb. <uss (Fraenkel 11).
The Aramaic sbst. must be distinguished from the BibHeb. tve :: KBL, → I tve 1 c): masc. pl.
det. aY:V'au, sf. yhi/Vau: foundation Ezr 412 516; 63 MT ÷ylib]/sm] yhi/VauwÒ, textual uncertainty or
corruption; on this see Gunneweg KAT xix/1: 1043. Suggestions for the meaning are given by
Rudolph Esra und Nehemia 54, and Vogt Lexicon 18b.
—1. Both of them take it as a sbst.; —a) yhi/Vau its foundations, taking the vb. as po>el passive
participle “they should be maintained”, on which see lbs, and Tuland JNES 17 (1958), 269ff.
—b) aY:V'a,, pl. st. det. of aV;a,, “the fire offerings should be presented”, → lbs, or yhi/Va, “its
fire offerings”, → aV;a,; NRSV: the place where burned offerings are brought; REB: a place
where fire offerings are brought.
—2. Rudolph loc. cit. adopts a cj., for the sbst. of the MT prop. yhi/jv]mi, < *jv'm], and the vb.
÷yli(y)ûiT]mi (ettaf>el of lyk) “its measurements are to be taken”.
One of the interpretations suggested under 1a and 1b is to be taken in preference to the cj.
mentioned under 2. †
aV;a,, fem. abs. (Baumgartner ZAW 45 (1927), 92 = Umwelt 79): Heb. vae and hV;ai; OArm.,
Sefire a (Donner-R. Inschriften 222 A:35, 37/38); fem. ha: EmpArm., Asshur Ostracon
(Donner-R. Inschriften 233: 17) and EgArm. ha (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar; Saqqara) st. emph.
ata (Cowley Arm. Pap. 31: 11); cf. Uruk 21, 31 isû-sûaŒ-a<; Pehl. (Junker Frahang 13: 5); JArm.
inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 27 s.v. aIII, and haII; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 121 s.v. <sû,
and 122 s.v. <sûh2); DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 524); JArm. at;V;ai (Dalman Wb. 45a; for JPArm.
abs. hV;a, see Sokoloff Dictionary 54); Sam. ata (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 2a); CPArm.
(Schulthess Lex. 20a s.v. <sûy, fever) and Syr. <eµsûaµtaµ< (Brockelmann Lexicon 52a); Mnd. >sûata
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 357f; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 168); NeoSyr. sûatha (Maclean
Dictionary 314a); fem. form also in Ug. isût (Aistleitner Wb. 436); Akk. isûaµtu fire (AHw 392b;
CAD I/J: 227b); Eth. <esûaµt (Dillmann 749); Bauer-Leander BArm. 189q; fem.
—1. fire Da 711.
—2. fire offering, offering made by fire (Heb. hV,ai) Ezr 63; pl. aY:V'a,, → *va 1b, or yhi/Vau →
*va 1a. †
¹v'a,; variant in Da 2 10 ¹v;a; and ¹V;a:' Heb. ¹V;a' Da 120 22; MHeb. ¹V;a' (but see Sokoloff, DSD
7 (2000), 84, who does not accept this form), so also JArm., DSS (Jastrow 129b; Beyer Arm.
Texte 524); Syr. *<aµsûoµpaµ and <asûsûaµpoµ, pa. denominative (Brockelmann Lexicon 53a); Mnd. ASP
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 41a) denominative vb. “to practise magic arts, practise sorcery”;
loanword from Akk. aµsûipu exorcist (Zimmern 67; CAD A/2: 431a; (w)aµsûipu(m) AHw. 1487f);
see Beyer loc. cit.; and Kaufman 38f; Bauer-Leander BArm. 190x :: Montgomery Daniel 138,
153: pl. ÷ypiv]a‰;, det. aY:p'v]a‰;: enchanter, sorcerer Da 210.27 44 57.11.15. †
*÷rva, det. an:r]V'au Ezr 53.9 parallel with hl;l;k]v'l] hn:d] ãuwÒ hy:nÒb]mil] hn:d] at;yÒB'; Sept.
corhgivan, Esd 64 th;n stevghn tau;thn kai; ta[lla pavnta, 610 ta; e[rga tau`ta; Pesh., Vulg.
“walls”; the meaning is uncertain; see C.G. Tuland, JNES 17 (1958), 269–275, referred to by
Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 85.
—1. < Persian aµcðarna (Hinz 21).

—2. EgArm. ÷ra (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Saqqara; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 28;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 129: < Iran) = *÷r;V]ai/au timber, panelling, cf. Arb. <asûara to saw
(Joüon, Biblica 22 (1941), 38ff) wooden equipment, wooden section of a building; so with
Beyer Arm. Texte 524; see further Tuland JNES 17 (1958), 262–275, especially 270ff; Galling
in Rudolph Fschr. 77; Vogt Lexicon 19a; see also Rosenthal Gramm. §189 (p. 59), and Arm.
Handbook 1/2: 18b; cf. further Gunneweg KAT xix/1: 95, with reference to Mowinckel Studia
Theologica (1965), 130ff: “the lexeme primarily indicates wooden material that has been used
in the construction of buildings or ships.” For the older bibliography see KBL.
—3) Akk. asûru place, country, building complex, (pl.) sacred place for a god, shrine (AHw. 83
A 4 d; CAD A/2: 456a, and especially 458b, s.v. d 2’); cf. Gesenius-Buhl.
—4) because of the parallelismus membrorum in both occurrences in Ezra (which are
coincidentally identical), where at;yÒB' is parallel with an:r]V'au, preference should be given to the
translation “shrine” (cf. ZüBi.) :: NRSV: finish the structure; REB: complete the furnishings. †
rWDt'v]a:, the derivation of the sbst. is uncertain, but for suggestions and possibilities cf. Vogt
Lexicon 19; they include: —a) from the root rdv, originally inf. itpa. (Brockelmann Grundriss
1: 580); somewhat differently Bauer-Leander BArm. 193o, but in any case from rdv,
“(probably a Canaanite) verbal noun on the pattern lF'q't]a,”; so also Rudolph Esra und
Nehemia 40.
—b) Willi in Zimmerli Fschr. 545f takes it as isûtaf. from the root rrd, meaning “freedom of
movement” (“moving freely”); cf. Gunneweg KAT xix/1: 84.
—c) from pe. aµsûtidrauga “breach of the peace”, so Rosenthal Gramm. §190 (p. 59), and
subsequently Beyer Arm. Texte 524.
We should leave open the question of deciding between these three possibilities (a-c), as Vogt
does, but perhaps the last of them (c) deserves to be given some preference; for a
correspondence with BHeb. hm;j;l]mi see Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 85: revolt Ezr 415.19. †
wyTiv]a;i Da 5 3f, → htv.
*ta;: Heb. t/a; JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 45b, at;a;; Beyer Arm. Texte 525); CPArm. (Schwally
8); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 53b); Mnd. (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 42b); Syr.
(Brockelmann Lexicon 54a) and NeoSyr. <aµtuµtaµ letter (Maclean Dictionary 23a); Bauer-Leander
BArm. 185s, t: pl. ÷ytia;, aY:t'a; (JArm. and CPArm., once in Syr., see Payne-Smith); pl. fem. in
Syr. and Mnd. (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 42b), rarely in JArm. and CPArm.; Schwally 8; sf.
yhi/ta;, masc.: sign, pl. together with ÷yhim]Ti Da 332f 628. †
hta: the same in Heb.; Deir Alla; OArm., Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften 222 B:28, 31, 32; 223 B
:13; 224:11, 12, 20); see Degen Altaram. Gr. §62 (p. 77); EmpArm. pe. and haf., Asshur
Ostracon (Donner-R. Inschriften 233:7, 11); in cuneiform in the seventh century, see Beyer
Arm. Texte 525, i-ta(-a); EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar; Behistun 31
(Akk. it-[ta]-lak); Driver Arm. Docs.; Saqqara; Hermopolis); cf. Vogt Lexicon 20; Pehl.
(Junker Frahang 20: 7, 18); Herzfeld Paikuli 169; Nisa; Nab., Palm., Hatra, JArm. inscr.
(Jean-H. Dictionnaire 28f; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 133 s.v. <ty1); JArm., DSS (Dalman
Wb. 45b; Beyer Arm. Texte. 525); CPArm. (Schulthess 20a); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 2a); Syr.
(Brockelmann Lexicon 54a); Mnd. ATA and >TA (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 41f; Nöldeke
Mand. Gramm. 257); NeoArm. pe., af. (Bergsträsser Gloss. 100) and NeoSyr. (Maclean
Dictionary 22b); JArm. afa (Levy 1: 58b) and CPArm. <t\< (Schulthess Lex. 6; for f see
Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 85); Bauer-Leander BArm. 168d.
pe: ht;a} Ezr 53 Bombergiana, at;a} Ezr 53.16 Leningradensis, pl. /ta}; impv. pl. /taÔ; inf.
ateme (< *ateame); pt. htea;: to come Da 32.26 713.22 Ezr 412 53.16. †
haf: (Bauer-Leander BArm. 141e, 169e): pf. ytiyÒh' (EgArm.), pl. wytiyÒh;' inf. hy:t;yÒh': to bring:
a) persons Da 313 513; 617.25 wytiyÒh' they brought here, meaning someone brought here; b) things
Da 52f.23.
hof. (Bauer-Leander BArm. 169f-h): pf. 3rd. fem. sg. Da 618 tyIt;yhe, read with variant tyIt'yhe
, Or. heµtéÆyat (Bauer-Leander BArm. 169g), tytyh Uzziah inscription (Albright BASOR 44
(1931), 8–10; see further Fitzmyer Gen. Ap.2 22, with bibliography; see also Sokoloff, DSD 7
(2000), 85); 3rd. pl. wyt;yhe Da 313 read with variant wyt'yhe, Or. haytéÆyuµ (:: Bauer-Leander BArm.
169h): to be brought Da 313 618, vs.25 see above under haf., variant †
*÷WTa': JArm. an:WTa' (Dalman Wb. 45b); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 20b); Syr. (Brockelmann
Lexicon 55b); Mnd. atuna (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 43a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 125); >
Arb. <attuµn (Fraenkel 26); Eth. <ettoµn Fraenkel 26; loanword < Akk. utuµnu (or ituµnum, atuµnu)
brick furnace, from Sumerian udun (AHw 1445b), on which see Kaufman 110; Beyer Arm.
Texte. 525: probably an older, pre-Sumerian culture word; the same in cstr. as det. an:WTa' masc.
: furnace, or alternatively a furnace for burning, or a furnace for smelting, so Berger ZA 64
(1975), 223f; cf. also Salonen Ziegeleien 119ff: an:WTa' the furnace Da 319.22; ar;Wn ÷WTa' aT;d]qiy:
the furnace of blazing fire, the burning, fiery furnace Da 36.11.15.17.20f.23.26. †
yt'a:i → yt'yai.
rt'a:} Heb. rv,a}; —1. ra; Deir Alla; OArm., Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften 222 A: 5; B: 3; 224:
5, 7; Degen Altaram. Gr. §28: 1, p. 45); Zendjirli (214: 27, 32) :: Zakir ( 202 B: 15, 16 ydy ra
“the work of my hands”, meaning the inscription I have made; cf. line 16f rkz [ydy] ra the
work of the hands of zkr (Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 128 s.v. <sûr5); Nerab (Donner-R.
Inschriften 225: 8).
—2. rta place: EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Driver Arm. Docs.; Saqqara; Ah\iqar
34); Saraidin (Donner-R. Inschriften 261: 6); Pehl. (Junker Frahang 25: 48; Herzfeld Paikuli);
Nab., Palm., JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 27 s.v. raII; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary
125 s.v. <sûr4); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 48b, ar;t]a'; Beyer Arm. Texte 526); CPArm.
(Schulthess Lex. 20b); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 2a); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 55b); Mnd.
atra (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 44; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 159); NeoSyr. (Maclean
Dictionary 23b); Ug. at\r (Aistleitner Wb. 476); Akk. asûru place (AHw 82b; CAD A/2: 456a);
Arb. <at\ar; OSArb. <t\r (Conti Rossini 110b) and Eth. <asûar trace (Dillmann 739–40); Safaitic <t\r
(Littmann Thamud und Safa 155) trace, inscription; Bauer-Leander BArm. 184p.
—1. trace Da 235 (or to be taken with 2).
—2. place, location (Sept. tovpo"): Hret]a'Al[' the house of God rebuilt on its former site Ezr 5
15 67; Hret]a'l] the vessels restored to their proper place in the temple Ezr 65: MT Jh'ywI Hret]a'l] (
hL;Ko) “and everything should come to its place”, on which → *lKo; yDi rt'a} Ezr 63 the place
where (Bauer-Leander BArm. 362q), where (Vogt Lexicon 21b), so also Vulg., in loco ubi
immolent hostias :: Sept. (Esdr B) oi\ko" ohJ/kodomhqhvtw, kai; tovpo" ou| qusiavzousin ta;
qumiavsmata “the house is to be rebuilt again as a place to which offerings are brought”; then
subsequently Rudolph Esra und Nehemia 54; and similarly Galling in Rudolph Fschr. 71.
—3. → rt'aB;. †
b equivalent to Heb. p in drb → drp (HAL 906a; HALOT 962a); interchanges with MHeb. and
Arm. p in [qb (see HAL 143; HALOT 149b), and in ¹sj in JArm. in the forms aP;s]j' and
aB;x]j'; for other examples → ¹s'j}.
B]: the same as in Heb.; OArm., Tell Fekherye line 22, b; line 11, with sf. bh; EmpArm.; Pehl.
rtab Junker Frahang 25: 9; hpnb Nyberg 2: 296; Herzfeld Paikuli 186; Uruk 21: 4 ba-;
Asshur Ostracon b (Donner-R. Inschriften 233: 21); and EgArm. (Leander §62: 3) b of price
(Kraeling Arm. Pap. 1: 3); Bowman Demotic 9: 4 (atyb)ab (see KBL p. xxxix; HALOT p.
lxxvii, in the Introduction by Baumgartner, §3d); Nab., Palm. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 30;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 137); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 46a; Beyer Arm. Texte. 526);
Syr. (Nöldeke Syr. Gramm. §248); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 21a); Mnd. (Drower-Macuch
Dictionary 44a); NeoSyr. (Nöldeke NSyr. Gramm. §87: 1, p. 170; Maclean Dictionary 23a);
NeoArm. (Bergsträsser Gloss. 9). In BArm. B] (bi before sûewa mobile, see Bauer-Leander BArm.
257b-h, especially d; so also JArm. :: Syr. BArm., see Heb.): sf. yBi, JB;, HBe, HB', ÷/hB].
—1. a) in (spatial, the place within which): the place where the statue was erected Da 31; *
÷G:lup]Bi in, meaning according to, corresponding to; they set the priests in their divisions and the
Levites in their courses (NRSV, REB similarly) Ezr 618 (→ hG:luP]); B] ql;j} a possession in the
province Ezr 416; b] Wbx] “the matter in Daniel” Da 618 (→ Wbx]), NRSV: so that nothing might
be changed concerning Daniel; REB: so that no attempt could be made to rescue Daniel.
—2. spatial (the place to (into) which): bh'yÒ Jd;yBi into whose hands he has given human beings
(NRSV); in whose hands he has placed mankind (REB) Da 238; b] hd;[} passed on to them (KBL
), touched them (KBL s.v. hd[) 327 :: NRSV: not even a smell of fire came from them; REB:
no smell of fire lingered about them.
—3. temporal: at the end of the day Da 228, ydi an:D;[iB] when, as soon as 35.
—4. instrumental: through, by means of: hm;k]j;b] al; not through any wisdom, NRSV; REB
(more freely): not because I am wiser Da 230; aY:n"r]q'B] tywEh} lK'T'c]mi I was moved to thought by
the horns (cf. ZüBib.) 78 :: NRSV, REB: I was considering the horns; they prospered thanks to
the prophecies; NRSV: through the prophesying; REB: as a result of the prophecies Ezr 614;
td;B], by means of, with the help of, by the power of the law of your God (for the unaltered MT
on the one hand, as well as for the cj. td;K] on the other hand, see Gunneweg KAT xix/1: 128,
with note 14; NRSV: according to the law; REB: with regard to the law) Ezr 714; b] hn:q] with
the money (aP;s]k'B]) you shall buy Ezr 717.
—5. of concomitant circumstances: hw:d]j,B] with rejoicing Ezr 616.
—6. other expressions: —a) with other verbs: B] htv (cf. Heb.) to drink from Da 52; b] ÷ymiyhe
to trust in 624 (→ ÷ma haf.), B] flev] to rule over 238, B] db'[} to treat, deal with the host of
heaven and the inhabitants of the earth as he wills 432; —b) µ/yB] µ/y day by day Ezr 69, the
same as in Heb., → I µ/y 2 (see HAL 382b; HALOT 399b), and Syr. (see Brockelmann Lexicon
300a).
—7. composite expressions: → rt'aB; and *wG¾.
*vyaBi: vab; (< vyaiB], see Bauer-Leander BArm. 66 l; Vogt Lexicon 25a); EmpArm., EgArm.
(Cowley Arm. Pap.; Driver Arm. Docs.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.); Asia Minor; Uruk 35, bi-<i-sûaµ-ti-ia
= be<isûaµti “what is bad for me”, pl. fem.; Palm., Hatra, JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 31;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 142 s.v. b<sû2); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 46b; Beyer Arm. Texte
528); yab, together with the rarer yb, in instances from Qumraµn, see Beyer loc. cit.; otherwise
yb, so Palm. (Rosenthal Palm. 29); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 21b); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss.
2b); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 57a); Mnd. (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 63a); NeoArm. béÆsûca
(Bergsträsser Gloss. 15 s.v. b>sû) and NeoSyr. (Maclean Dictionary 31a); Akk. béÆsûu, bi<sûu (adj.
from ba<aµsûu) malodorous, of bad quality, morally evil (AHw. 131; CAD B: 270b): fem.
aT;v]yaBi, variants aT;v]yaiB] and aT;v](y)Bi, Bauer-Leander BArm. 22b, c, 60k: evil, a wicked city
Ezr 412. †
vab: the same in Heb.; basic meaning to stink; EmpArm., Nerab ii: 9 haf. (Donner-R. Inschriften
226; see also Vogt Lexicon 25b); JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 32; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 142 s.v. b<sû1); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 47a; Beyer Arm. Texte 528); CPArm.
(Schulthess Lex. 22b); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 56b); Mnd. BIŠ (Drower-Macuch Dictionary
63a).
pe: pf. vaeB] to be bad, with l[' of the person, it displeases someone (Heb. l['/la, [[r →
I [[r qal 2 b) Da 615 (:: l[' baef] it pleases someone 624); cf. NRSV and REB: to be distressed.
†
rt'aB;, variant rt;B;; < *rt'a}-B' (see Brockelmann Grundriss 2: 371): OArm., Zendjirli rab
(Donner-R. Inschriften 214: 27, 32); EmpArm.; Pehl. (Junker Frahang 25: 48; Herzfeld Paikuli
191) and Nab. rtab; Palm. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 45; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 20b s.v.
btr); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 2a s.v. <tr); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 68b; Beyer Arm. Texte
526) and Syr. (excluding SyrSIN; Black 219; Brockelmann Lexicon 56a s.v. <atraµ) rtb; so also
CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 32f; Gramm. §134: 3 = baµt\ar); Mnd. abatar, less frequently batar
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 2a), batar (rtab, rtb, Drower-Macuch Dictionary 51b, 2a);
NeoSyr. baµthar > baµr (Nöldeke NSyr. Gramm. 172; Maclean Dictionary 41b); NeoArm. boµthar
(Bergsträsser Gloss. 17 s.v. bt\r; Spitaler 172e); Bauer-Leander BArm. 261k: sf. Jr;t]B‰;: in your
track (→ rt'a}) preposition: after, after you Da 239, → rt'aB; hn:D] after this 76f. †
lb,B;; the same in Heb.; lbb EgArm., JArm., DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 730) and Palm.
(Cantineau-Starcky Palm. ix, 11: 4); EmpArm. together with lbb also labb (Driver Arm.
Docs. 57); Bowman Demotic 7: 5 labab; Syr. also bbyl; Bauer-Leander BArm. 42w: Babylon
(for Heb. see HAL 103b; HALOT 107b; BHH 177f) Da 212-71 (15 times), Ezr 512-716 (10 times). †
Der. *yl;b]B‰;.
*‰y; l;b]B: gentilic from lb,B;; EgArm. ylbb (Cowley Arm. Pap. 619, on which see also Beyer Arm.
Texte 528); Akk. Ba-bi-lu-a-a (Herzfeld Inschriften 24: 16) an unusual writing following Old
Pers. for *Ba-bi-la-a-a (Tallqvist Personal Names 49b), equivalent to Babilayya (cf. von Soden
Gramm. §56p, p. 69), cf. JArm. ha;l;b]B;; for JPArm. yylbb see Sokoloff Dictionary 84;
Bauer-Leander BArm. 196d: pl. det. ayEl;b]B‰;, variant. ˜b]B': Babylonian Ezr 49. †
rdb: Heb. rzp and rzb; MHeb., Sard. (Donner-R. Inschriften 260 B: 8; Jean-H. Dictionnaire
32; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 145 s.v. bdr1); JArm. (Dalman Wb. 49a), CPArm.
(Schulthess Lex. 23a), Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 60a) and NeoSyr. (Maclean Dictionary 25b)
rdb pe. and pa.; JArm. also rzb (Dalman Wb. 51b, but see Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 85); Pehl.
(Junker Frahang 4: 5) rzb (Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 150); JArm. sbst. ar;zÒBi (Dalman
Gramm. 991, and Wb. 51b); > Arb. bad_r (Fraenkel 138, following Sokoloff loc. cit.) seed,
seed-corn; > Syr. bazr linseed oil (Brockelmann Lexicon 65a).
pa: impv. pl. WrD'B': to disperse, scatter fruit from a tree Da 411. †
WlyhiB:] lhb (Bauer-Leander BArm. 197g, on p. 198); JArm. (Dalman Wb. 49a); Bab. Talm.;
rather Tg.o (see Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 85); Syr. bahéÆluµtaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 61a): haste
Ezr 423. †
lhb: the same in Heb.; JArm., DSS (pa. to disturb, itpe. passive (Dalman Wb. 49a; Beyer Arm.
Texte 529), and to hasten; Syr. pe. to be quiet, cease (Brockelmann Lexicon 60b).
pa: impf. pl. sf. ynIN"luh} b'y,Ò HNEluh} b'yÒ, HNEWlh} b'yÒ (Bauer-Leander BArm. 130f, i), jussive
(Bauer-Leander BArm. 89d, 131k) Jl;h} b'yÒ and JWlh} b'y:Ò to frighten someone, terrify someone
Da 42.16 56.10 715.28. †
hitpe: (JArm., see Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 85) to hasten, inf. → hl;h;B]t]hi as sbst. Da 225 3
24 620.
†
hitpa: (JArm.) pt. lh'B;t]mi, Or. -bahal (Bauer-Leander BArm. 67t) and -behal (hitpa., JArm.
): to be frightened, be terrified Da 59. †
Der. WlyhiB], hl;h;B]t]hi.
lfb: the same in Heb., < Arm. (Wagner 39); EmpArm., JArm. inscr. pa. to eradicate, eliminate
(Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 150 s.v. bt\l1), lf'B] JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 52b; Beyer Arm.
Texte. 530); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 2b); lfeB] JArm., Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 66b), and
Mnd. BT\L (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 58a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 219); NeoSyr. (Maclean
Dictionary 30a); CPArm. bt\l (Schulthess Lex. 24b); Palm. pt. mbt\l, active, so Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 33; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 151 s.v. bt\l2; passive, see Rosenthal Palm. 63.
pe: pf. 3rd fem. tl'feB], variants tl'fiB] and tl'f]Bi (Bauer-Leander BArm. 68x, 103x); pt.
fem. al;f]B‰;, variant al;yfiB] pt. passive (Bauer-Leander BArm. 106i): to cease, be discontinued
Ezr 424. †
pa: pf. WlyFi&B'; inf. al;F;B': to stop, bring to an end Ezr 421.23 55; al;F;b'l] al;AyDi Ezr 68
(Bauer-Leander BArm. 302g) without any interruption, or without any time limit (cf.
Thucydides i, 129: 3 mhde; kekwlu;sqw; cf. Olmstead AJSL 49 (1932/33), 160). †
*÷yb: the same as in Heb.; Palm. af. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 34; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary
152 s.v. byn1); Mnd. pe. (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 55b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 250); JArm.
, DSS (Dalman Wb. 53b; Beyer Arm. Texte 523); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 68b); NeoSyr.;
pa.; CPArm. pol. (Schulthess Lex. 25a).
Der. ÷yBe, hn:yBi.
÷yBe; the same in Heb.; Akk. (ina, sûa) béÆri-, biréÆt between (AHw. 128; CAD B: 249b); generally
in Arm.; OArm., Sefire bny (Donner-R. Inschriften 224: 18, 19, 21), sf. bnyhm (cf. Degen
Altaram. Gr. §45a, p. 62); EmpArm., ÷yb EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.;
Driver Arm. Docs.; Ah\iqar); Samaria; Pehl. (Junker Frahang 25: 38; Herzfeld Paikuli 207);
Palm., Nab., JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 34; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 152 s.v. byn
2); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 53b; Beyer Arm. Texte 531); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 25a); Sam.
(Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 2b); JArm. ynEyBe, tn:yBe, and (t)yBe DSS (Dalman Wb. 53b; Beyer Arm. Texte
531); Sam. and CPArm. (t)÷yb (Schulthess Lex. 25b); Syr. baynay, baynaµt and beµyt
(Brockelmann Lexicon 68a); Palm. ynyb and twnyb (Berytus 2: 104, xii: 4); Nab. ynb; Mnd.
binat-, binia, bit, abinia (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 61; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 194f);
NeoArm. baint\ and bainot\ (Bergsträsser Gloss. 13 s.v. byn); NeoSyr. béÆl, also ben, béÆn
(Maclean Dictionary 30b); with this compare also Nöldeke NSyr. Gramm. 171; beµl (beµyl)
“between” from beyt-l (§21), as a vestige of beyt, that is beyn, béÆn with fem. ending, which is
superficially the same as byt house; Bauer-Leander BArm. 257i: ÷yBe Da 75, sf. K ÷/hy ÷eyBe, Q ÷yhe
-, variant ÷he- (Bauer-Leander BArm. 75h) Da 78: between. †
hn:yBi: ÷yb; the same in Heb.; JArm., CPArm. bwnnw (Schulthess Lex. 25a; Sokoloff, DSD 7
(2000), 85); Bauer-Leander BArm. 180k, 239x: discernment Da 221. †
*hr;yBi: the same as in Heb.; loanword from Akk. birtu(m) citadel, fort (AHw. 129b; see
Ellenbogen 49; Kaufman 44; see also CAD B: 261a, s.v. birtu A, sbst.; see further P. Mandel,
Tarbiz 61 (1992), 195–217, mentioned by Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 85); Sept. beira, det. birta
(Edgar Zenon Papyri i (1925), 59003: 13; Beyer Arm. Texte 95, cf. 532); EmpArm., Pehl. also
shortened to rb; Herzfeld Paikuli 211; EgArm. atryb (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.
; Saqqara; Driver Arm. Docs.); Persepolis, also atrb (Cowley Arm. Pap., and Kraeling Arm.
Pap.; Behistun); atryb Sardes (Donner-R. Inschriften 260 B: 2, p. 306); Nab. temple
(Cantineau 2: 70), cf. → Heb. hr;yBi 2); Hatra, Palm. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 35;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 155); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 54b; Beyer Arm. Texte 532);
Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 69b); for etymology see Lewy HUCA 27 (1956), 58f: det. at;r]yBi,
variant aT;r]yBi (Bauer-Leander BArm. 67r): fortified place, citadel; at;m]j]a'B] at;r]ybib] Ezr 62
(? delete with Versions., see BHS B]2, dittography; see also Rudolph Esra und Nehemia 54 :: MT
; ZüBi): in the fort in Ecbatana; Gunneweg KAT xix/1: 103, in Ecbatana in the citadel; NRSV,
in Ecbatana the capital; REB, in Ecbatana the royal residence. †
tyb: denominative from tyIB' :: Jean in Dus-saud Festschrift 704; —a. tyb: JArm., DSS (Dalman
Wb. 54b: tyBi, Beyer Arm. Texte. 531); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Lit. and Oral Tradition 2: 498); Akk.
biaµtum, Middle and Late Babylonian baÆtu, Assyrian biaµdu(m) to spend the night (AHw. 124;
CAD B: 169, baÆtu); Arb. baµta(i); Eth. beµta (Dillmann 534) = Tigr. (Littmann-Höfner Wb. 294).
—b. twb: JArm. inscr. b<t (Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 148 s.v. bwt1); CPArm. (Schulthess
Lex. 23b); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 63b); Mnd. (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 57b; Nöldeke
Mand. Gramm. 249); NeoSyr. (Maclean Dictionary 24a; Brockelmann Grundriss 1: 614).
pe: pf. tB;: to spend the night, the king spent the night fasting Da 619. †
tyIB:' see now Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 85, who prefers to cite the form *yB' the same in Heb.;
Deir Alla; OArm., Zakir, Zendjirli (Donner-R. Inschriften 214; 215; 216; 217), Hama (203),
Sefire (222; 223; 224), Zakir (202), Tell Fekherye bt line 17, emph. byth line 8; EmpArm.,
EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Saqqara; Driver Arm. Docs.; Hermopolis;
Ah\iqar), Behistun, Tema, yBi (Leander 24h; see also Beyer Arm. Texte 530); abs. Zendjirli
(Donner-R. Inschriften 216: 16); EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.); Uruk 4, 7 (
ba-a-a); Pehl. (Junker Frahang 2: 15, 16 etc.; Herzfeld Paikuli 212, 213); Nab., Hatra, Palm.,
JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 35; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 156 s.v. byt2); JArm.,
DSS at;yBe and yBe II (Dalman Wb. 55a and 53a; Beyer Arm. Texte 530 s.v. yb); CPArm.
(Schulthess Lex. 26a, byt and by); Sam. bet/bit (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 2b); Syr. (Brockelmann
Lexicon 69b) and NeoSyr. (Maclean Dictionary 31a-b, but see also Nöldeke NSyr. Gramm.
119f); Mnd. baita (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 47b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 183); NeoArm. beµ
(Bergsträsser Gloss. 10 s.v. by); cstr. JArm. (yBe); for NeoArm. see also Spitaler 101f;
Bauer-Leander BArm. 247c: det. at;'yÒB', Ezr 512 and 615 ht;yÒB', cstr. tyBe, sf. ytiyÒB' (Da 41, Or.,
and a bad variant, ytiyBe, Bauer-Leander BArm. 231a), HteyÒB' (Bauer-Leander BArm. 231k), pl.
sf. ÷/kyTeB'; Da 25 (Bauer-Leander BArm. 231b).
—1. house Da 217 329 611 Ezr 611, pl. Da 25; palace 41: aK;l]m' tyBe the house of the king,
meaning the royal treasury Ezr 64, Wkl]m' tyBe the royal residence Da 427, ay:T]v]mi ˜Be the
banqueting hall 510, aY:z¾nÒGI ˜Be the treasure house, treasure chambers (cf. Arb. bait el-maµl treasure
house, state treasury) Ezr 517, cf. 720 (Bauer-Leander BArm. 310b), aY:r'p]si ˜Be archive 61 (→
rp's]).
—2. temple (cf. Akk. béÆtu(m) with the meaning temple, see AHw. 132f, sub 2a; CAD B:
286b-289b, s.v. 1 c) Ezr 53.9.11f 63.15, tyBe ah;l;aÔ Da 53 gloss; Ezr 424-724 (17 times), sf Jh;l;aÔ ˜Be
Ezr 719f, µho/µ/kh} l;aÔ ˜Be Ezr 716.17, HteyÒB' Da 523, aY:m'v] Hl;aÔ tyBe Ezr 723. †
lB;: EmpArm., EgArm. (Ah\iqar 97 mind, Jean-H. Dictionnaire 36; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary
165 s.v. bl1); JPArm. (Sokoloff Dictionary 103); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 23b); Sam.; Syr.
(Brockelmann Lexicon 62b, baµlaµ) and NeoSyr. (Maclean Dictionary 32b); NeoArm. boµla
(Bergsträsser Gloss. 12); Arb. baµl spirit, heart, mind; Bauer-Leander BArm. 179h: heart (KBL),
spirit, mind DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 532); mind: lB; µc; with l] and inf., to turn one’s mind to,
give one’s attention to Da 615; NRSV, he was determined; REB, he tried to think of a way. †
rX'v'al]B:e n.m., Da 7 1 and variant 51 → rX'av'l]Be. †
*hlb (according to Beyer Arm. Texte 532 the original form of the root ylb with the meaning “to
be (become) rotten”): the same in Heb.; EgArm. alb, pe. pt. passive fem. hylb worn out
clothing, Kraeling Arm. Pap. 7:12 (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 36; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary
166 s.v. bly1), possibly used, as Cowley Arm. Pap. 26:1; bl<h to destroy (Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 165 s.v. bl<1); JArm. (Dalman Wb. 56a y/alb); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 26b bly)
and Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 74b) al;B] and yliB]; Mnd. BLA II (Drower-Macuch Dictionary
65a); NeoArm. bly IV to lead into trouble (Bergsträsser Gloss. 12).
pa: impf. aLeb'yÒ (Bauer-Leander BArm. 158k): to wear out Da 725, on which see also Plöger
KAT xviii: 103, and especially 117 :: Noth Gesammelte Studien 286 (because pa.) to hurt
seriously, with reference to Arb. balaµ(w) to put to the test (in I, IV and VIII theme; on this see
Wehr-Cowan 75a); cf. ZüBi to torment; NRSV, he shall wear out (cf. REB, he shall wear
down) the holy ones of the Most High. †
/lB], loanword from Akk. biltu load, tribute (AHw. 126; CAD B: 229a; see also Zimmern 10;
Ellenbogen 51; Kaufman 44; and also Beyer Arm. Texte 532); possibly Canaanite, instead of *
hl;B]; Bauer-Leander BArm. 196e :: Rosenthal Arm. Forsch. 51 with note 3; EgArm. (Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 37; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 166): tax paid in kind (KBL), or alternatively
produce tax (Beyer loc. cit.) Ezr 413.20 and 724 (between → hD;nÒmi/hD;mi and → Jl;h}). †
rX'av'f]l]Be (on the n.m. see already HAL 127; HALOT 133a), variants ˜f} l]Be and Da 4 5f rX'v'
-, Or. Belt\asûas\s\ar and Belat\sû-: n.m., Sept., Theodotion Baltasar (Ruzûicðka. 178), Vulg.
Baltassar; Belteshazzar, the Babylonian name given to Daniel (Da 12) 226 45f.15f 512. BHH 215.
It is no longer possible with any certainty to suggest the Babylonian name that lies behind this
form of the n.m., but suggestions that have been made (cf. also Vogt Lexicon 28a) include:
—a) *balaµt\-sûarri-us\ur “protect the life of the king!”.

—b) *balaµtsu-us\ur “protect his life (that of the king)”; cf. the short form balaµssu/balaµssi
(Tallqvist Personal Names 50f).
—c) *Beµleµt-sûarra-us\ur (instead of us\ri) “may Belet protect the king”, so Berger ZA 64 (1975),
226ff, 231.
We prefer not to make a decision between these three possibilities; see also LipinŒski, VT 28
(1978), 234, mentioned by Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 86. †
rX'av'l]B,e Da 5 1 and variant 71 rX'v'al]Be (Hebrew 81), Q rX'v'l]Be (see also BHS), rxlb 4Q Ps.
Dan. (RB 63: 4114; Beyer Arm. Texte 730); Sept., Theodotion Baltasar; Vulg. Baltassar:
Belshazzar (Reicke-Rost Hw. 214), the supposed son of → rX'an<d]k'WbnÒ and the last king of
lb,B; Da 51f.9.22.29f 71; it is in fact the same as the name Beµl-sûarra-us\ur, “may Bel protect the
king” (Tallqvist Personal Names 61b; cf. Berger ZA 64 (1975): 227, 230f); Arm. rxarslb
(Lidzbarski Ephemeris 3: 117f; Lidzbarski Urkunden 15, no. 1), the first born son of NabuÆ-na<id
, 555–539 B.C.; cf. R.T. Dougherty Nabonidus and Belshazzar (1929), 93ff; Bentzen Daniel
48f; Baumgartner Umwelt 316f (with bibliography); Plöger KAT xviii: 90f; see also LipinŒski,
VT 28 (1978), 234, mentioned by Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 86. †
hnb: the same in Heb.; OArm., Zakir (Donner-R. Inschriften 202 B: 9, 10), Zendjirli (214: 13,
1(4); 216: 20); EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Saqqara); Pehl.
(Junker Frahang 18: 7; Herzfeld Paikuli 215); Nab., Palm. (pa. bani, Dura 51), Hatra, JArm.
inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 38; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 173); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb.
58a, an:B]; Beyer Arm. Texte 533); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 27a); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss.
2b); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 78b); Mnd. BNA and BNN, BUN (Drower-Macuch Dictionary
66b and 67); on these forms see Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 83; NeoSyr. (Maclean Dictionary 34a).
pe: pf. pl. /nB] Ezr 614b (but on this see Rudolph Esra und Nehemia 60, and BHS; on the MT
cf. also Gunneweg KAT xix/1: 112); sf. yhin:&B] (Bauer-Leander BArm. 154n), 1st. sg. Ht'yÒn"BÔ (Da 4
27), variants ˜B,, ˜Be and ˜B] (Bauer-Leander BArm. 155p), also Ht;-; impf. pl. ÷/nb]y;I inf. a) anEb]mi
(Bauer-Leander BArm. 156x) Ezr 52 68, inf. sbst. ynbm Kraeling Arm. Pap. 9: 12; ay:nÒb]mi Ezr 59 (
HyEnÒb]mi ? Bauer-Leander BArm. 156z, but on this see also 371); b) anEb]li Ezr 53.13, which
according to Bauer-Leander BArm. 156y is a scribal error for anEb]mil] :: 371 with reference to
anbl, Zendjirli (Donner-R. Inschriften 214: 13, 14); so probably also KBL, and especially Vogt
Lexicon 28b, anEB]li an archaic form without the prefix m-; cf. Brockelmann Grundriss 1: 579;
pt. pl. ÷yIn"&B,; passive hnEB]: to build Da 427 Ezr 412 52.3.4.9.11.13.17 67f.14a. †
hitpe: impf. anEB]t]yI, anEB]t]Ti; pt. anEB]t]mi: to be built Ezr 413.16.21 515f 63; with acc. of the
material used for building ll;GÒ ÷b,a, 58 (Bauer-Leander BArm. 338m). †
Der. *÷y:nÒB.i
*÷y:nÒB:i hnb; the same in Heb., (< Arm., Wagner 44); the basic form is (probably) *bunyaµn, see
Bauer-Leander BArm. 195z; Wagner loc. cit.; cf. Beyer Arm. Texte 533); EmpArm., EgArm.
(Cowley Arm. Pap. 30: 10; 31: 9; cf. p. 279b; Kraeling Arm. Pap. 3: 22); Nab., Palm.
(Ingholt-Seyrig-Starcky Rec. des Tessères de Palmyre 141); Hatra (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 39;
Sam. binyaón (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 2b); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 27a); Syr. benyaµnaµ
(Brockelmann Lexicon 78b); Mnd. biniana (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 61b; Nöldeke Mand.
Gramm. 136); NeoSyr. (Maclean Dictionary 34b); > Arb. bunyaµn (Fraenkel 27); Bauer-Leander
BArm. 195z: det. an:y:nÒB,i masc.: building, construction work Ezr 54. †
÷ynIB:] → II rb.
snb: JArm. sn"B] to be unwilling, adj. as;ynIB] unwilling, morose (Dalman Wb. 58b); Sam. snp
(Kahle Bem. 53, loanword from < povno"); Steiner, JQR 82 (1992), 432–435 analyses as
preposition B] with sn", weakness, see Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 86.
pe: pf. sn"B], Or. benes: to become angry, get enraged (cf. Beyer Arm. Texte 553) Da 212. †
h[b and a[b (see Vogt Lexicon 29b; Bauer-Leander BArm. 154k): the same in Heb.; according
to KBL it comes perhaps from Arm., but it is better to treat it as a general Semitic root (with the
basic form bgùy, see Arb. bagùaµ(i)); see also HAL 135b, HALOT 141b, with instances from the
different Semitic languages; in Akk. always in the D-theme; bu<<uÆ(m) to search, examine (AHw.
145a; CAD B: 360b; von Soden Gramm. §106u; so also in El-Amarna, see VAB 2: 138);
OArm., Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften 222 B: 30; 223 B: 8, 17; 224: 2, 11; Degen Altaram. Gr.
§62, p. 77); EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Driver Arm. Docs.; Ah\iqar 3(4), 53;
Saqqara; Hermopolis), Xanthos; Pehl. (Junker Frahang 21: 14; Herzfeld Paikuli 456); Asia
Minor (Donner-R. Inschriften 258: 5; 259: 2f); Nab., Palm., Hatra (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 39;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 180); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 60a, a[;B]; Beyer Arm. Texte
533); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 29a); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 2b); Syr. (Brockel-mann
Lexicon 82b); Mnd. BAA (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 44f; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 257ff) and
NeoArm. (Bergsträsser Gloss. 10); NeoSyr. (Maclean Dictionary 35bf).
pe: pf. a/h[;B], pl. /[B], an:y[eB]; impf. a[eb]yI, a[eb]a,; inf. a[eb]mi; pt. a/h[eB;, pl. ÷yI['B; Da 65 (Q
Or ÷[;B;, Bauer-Leander BArm. 235z).
—1. to seek Da 65; 213, see below, para-graph 3.
—2. to request: with ÷mi of the person Da 216.23.49 613, with µd;q]A÷mi and acc. of the thing 218,
with l[' of the thing 716, W[B; to utter a prayer 68 (13 variant).14, abs. 612.
—3. with inf. to be about to occur, run a risk, the wise men were about to be executed
(NRSV) Da 213 (Targ. Jonah 14 for Heb. hb;V]ji; NeoSyr. for future, Nöldeke NSyr. Gramm.
259f; cf. Georg Behrmann Das Buch Daniel (GHK iii: 3/2, 1894) 10; Torrey Notes 257;
Bauer-Leander BArm. 341v) :: someone sought to have them executed (cf. Bauer-Leander
BArm. 290g), which is in any case a more likely translation; similarly also Bentzen Daniel 22;
and Plöger KAT xviii: 42f, 46. According to KBL it is to vocalised as a passive, with Charles,
w[iB] “they were sought”, and this is also to be considered; for JPArm, see Sokoloff Dictionary
108, pe., meaning 6. †
pa (otherwise not attested): impf. pl. ÷/[b'yÒ (Bauer-Leander BArm. 130g, 158n and
especially 283q), variant ÷/[b;yÒ (Bauer-Leander BArm. 58p): Da 433 to call upon, beseech, so
e.g. Vogt Lexicon 30a. This translation appears to be more suited to the context than “to search
eagerly” (KBL); cf. NRSV: my counsellors and my lords sought me out; REB: my courtiers and
my nobles sought audience of me. †

Der. *W[B;.
*W[B;: h[b: EmpArm.; Pehl. (Junker Frahang 30: 9; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 150); JArm.
(Dalman Wb. 60b, at;W[B;, see Beyer Arm. Texte 535); CPArm. *b>w, emph. b>wt< (Schulthess
Lex. 29a); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 445); Syr. baµ>uµtaµ (Brockelmann
Lexicon 83a); Mnd. buta (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 57b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 145, 146);
NeoSyr. (Maclean Dictionary 36a) = Syr. baµ>uµtaµ (Nöldeke NSyr. Gramm. 110); Bauer-Leander
BArm. 197g :: Blake 85f: sf. HteW[B;: petition, prayer Da 68 (13 variant).14. †
*l[b: the same in Heb.; see there also for the other Semitic languages; EmpArm., EgArm.
(Kraeling Arm. Pap. 7: 33) haf. to marry (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 40 s.v. b>lII; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 182 s.v. b>l1, said of a woman); JArm. (Dalman Wb. 60b, to live together); Syr. etp.
to marry (Brockelmann Lexicon 84b); it should be noted that the sbst. l['B' is probably not
derived from this vb., but the vb. is more likely to be denominative from the sbst.; cf. Akk.
beÆlu(m) to rule, be in charge (AHw. 120b, “probably denominative from beµlu”; CAD B: 199).
? Der. *l[eB].
*l[eB:] l[b, probably denominative vb.; Heb. l['B'; OArm. lord, husband, Zendjirli (Donner-R.
Inschriften 215: 3, 10, 11, 22; 216: 10, 11); Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften 222 A: 4; B: 4; 224:
23, 26); EmpArm., EgArm. (Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Cowley Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar); Xanthos; Nab.,
Palm., Hatra (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 40 s.v. lybI; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 182 s.v. b>l2);
JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 60b, lord, husband; Beyer Arm. Texte 534); CPArm. (only in the
collocation b>[y]ldbb< enemy (Schulthess Lex. 29b) = Syr. b>eldebaµbaµ); Syr. (Brockelmann
Lexicon 83b, lord, husband); Mnd. bil, bila (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 60b; Nöldeke Mand.
Gramm. 16, 101, < Akk. beµlu); NeoArm. (Bergsträsser Gloss. 11); Bauer-Leander BArm. 47x:
the same in cstr.; owner, lord, → µ[ef]Al[eB] Ezr 48f.17, vs.23 insert with one MSK, Sept.L, Pesh.;
see Rudolph Esra und Nehemia 44. †
*[qb: the same in Heb.: to cleave, split; MHeb., JArm. (Dalman Wb. 62b: [qb); [qp, JArm.
(Dalman Wb. 344b); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 161b); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 590a) and
NeoSyr. (Maclean Dictionary 256a); Mnd. PQA (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 376b; Nöldeke
Mand. Gramm. 47f; Brockelmann Grundriss 1: 169).
Der. *h[;q]Bi.
*h[;q]B:i [qb; the same in Heb.; OArm., Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften 222 B: 10), place name,
on which see Donner-R. Inschriften 2: p. 254; and Noth Biblisches Landes- und Altertumskunde
2: 194 (with bibliography); see also Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 187 s.v. bq>t; JArm. (also
˜q]B'; see Vogt Lexicon 30b), DSS (Dalman Wb. 62b, at;[} q]Bi plain; see Beyer Arm. Texte 535);
Syr. peqa>taµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 590a); Mnd. paqata pl. (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 362b;
Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 101); Bauer-Leander BArm. 243b: cstr. t['q]Bi plain Da 31. †
rqb: the same in Heb., where it is an Aramaism (Wagner 45); also in Akk. it is an Arm.
loanword (see AHw. 1549a), see buqquru, D-theme of baqaµrum/paqaµru (AHw. 104b; CAD
will list it under paqaµru); Nab., JArm. inscr. (both pa., Jean-H. Dictionnaire 41 s.v. rqbIII;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 187 s.v. bqr1, to examine); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 62b, pa.;
Beyer Arm. Texte 535); Sam., Syr. (pe. and pa.) to investigate, examine (Brockelmann Lexicon
87b); Mnd. BQR pe. (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 68b), mean-ing —a. to split, break open (→
Heb. I rqb, HAL 144b; HALOT 151a); —b. to exam-ine; NeoArm. pa. to know (Bergsträsser
Gloss. 13).
pa: pf. pl. WrQ&'B' (Bauer-Leander BArm. 42v, 134t) Ezr 419; impf. rQ'b'yÒ; inf. h/ar;Q;B' to
seek, investigate Ezr 415: a) MT rQ'b'yÒ “someone investigates”, 3rd. sg. with indefinite sbj. as
in Heb., see Brockelmann Heb. Syntax §36d; b) cj. either: a) pl. ÷WrQ]b'yÒ “they (meaning people)
should investigate”, see Brockelmann loc. cit. §36c; or b) (as 517) rQ'B't]yI “it should be
investigated”; for a) and b) see Bauer-Leander Kurzgefasste bibl.-aram. Gramm. (1929), 63
(for rQ'B't]yI > rQ'B'yI see KBL) Ezr 419 61; inf. ar;Q;B' with l[' to set up an enquiry about Ezr 714.
†
hitpa: impf. rQ'B't]yI to be investigated Ezr 517, cj. 415 (see pa.). †
* I rB': the same as Heb. IV, an Aramaism; see there for the instances from the cognate
languages; cf. also Wagner 47; OSArb. barr (Serta Cantab. (1954), 36; Beeston Sabaic
Dictionary 31, s.v. brr II, noun, “open country”); EmpArm., EgArm. (Kraeling Arm. Pap.;
Ah\iqar 109; Saqqara); Pehl. (Junker Frahang 25: 32; Herzfeld Paikuli 221f) br<, bl< (Nyberg
34); Palm., Hatra, JArm. inscr. (Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 195 s.v. br3); JArm., DSS
(Dalman Wb. 63a s.v. rB'III and ar;B;; Beyer Arm. Texte 537); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 31a);
Sam. (also elbar); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 88a, barraµ); Mnd. bar (Drower-Macuch
Dictionary 30a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 360); NeoSyr. (Maclean Dictionary 37b) and
NeoArm. elbar (Bergsträsser Gloss. 14) open country, outside, apart from; adj. yrb Nab.,
Palm., Hatra (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 43; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 197); Syr., Mnd. (÷m) rb
apart from, except, and arb outside EgArm. (Kraeling Arm. Pap. 310a); for ÷m (a)rb see also
Beyer Arm. Texte 578; Bauer-Leander BArm. 180n: det. ar;B;: field, countryside, ˜B; tw"yje
(Heb. hd,C;h' tY"j') beasts (NRSV, wild animals) of the field, animals of the countryside (REB,
wild animals) Da 238 49.18.20.22.29; ˜b; ydi aa;t]Di tender grass of the field (NRSV), lush grass
(REB) Da 412.20. †
II rB': Heb. I rB' and ÷Be (< Arm., Wagner 46); on the characteristic writing with a with the
earliest attestation about 800 B.C. (in Akk. bar and ba-ar, in Uruk 22 ba-ri), see Beyer Arm.
Texte 535; here it is also written as bir/bur. The sbst. is represented in all sections and branches
of Arm. from EmpArm. onwards (and earlier it is attested in Old Arm., Tell Fekherye 6), see
Jean-H. Dictionnaire 41–43; for EmpArm. and JArm. see especially Beyer Arm. Texte
535–537; see Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 86; see also Sokoloff Dictionary 97, ryb. Whether the
sbst. is also found in the Phoenician inscription of Klmw (Donner-R. Inschriften 24: 1;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 188) is uncertain; perhaps it is a part of the name, so

Landsberger Sam<al 46107; cf. also Gibson Syrian Semitic Inscriptions 3: 351; OArm., Zendjirli
(Donner-R. Inschriften 214; 218; 221); Bredsch (201: 2); Zakir (202 A: 4); Sefire (222; 223;
224); Arslan Tash (232); Tell Fekherye 6; EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling
Arm. Pap.; Driver Arm. Docs.; Ah\iqar; Hermopolis; Saqqara); Behistun 61 (Akk. apil-sûú>);
Uruk 22: ba-ri; Armazi (Donner-R. Inschriften 276: 5); Nerab (226: 5); Samaria; Xanthos; Nab.
rarely (from Heb.) ÷b and ÷ba (Cantineau Nab. 71b); Palm., Hatra, JArm. inscr.; Pehl. (br and bl
, Junker Frahang, as also in Herzfeld Paikuli); Sogdian (E. Benveniste Textes sogdiens (1940),
113; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 41; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 188); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb.
63a, ar;B]; Beyer Arm. Texte 535); Sam. ba½r (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 2b); Syr. beraµ
(Brockelmann Lexicon 88b); CPArm. ber (Schulthess Gramm. §31; Lex. 30a); Mnd. br, bra,
variant in st. emph. abra, >bra (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 68b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 25,
97); NeoArm. erba (Spitaler 63a; Bergsträsser Gloss. 13 s.v. br); NeoSyr. (Maclean Dictionary
37bf); Soqotri bar, ber (Leslau Lexique Soqotri 95), fem. birt in Mehri and Soqotri (Nöldeke
Neue Beiträge 138f; cf. B. Thomas Arabia Felix (1931), 462, 491; Ruzûicðka 68f; Brockelmann
Grundriss 1: 230); Bauer-Leander BArm. 179f: the same in the cstr. HreB], pl. cstr. ynEB,] sf. yhi/nB]
, ÷/hynEB.]
—1. a. son Da 522 Ezr 52, pl. children Da 225; —b. a) son (sons) of the king Ezr 610, meaning
his descendants 723; b) rB' grandson Ezr 51 614, cf. Zch. 11 and Heb. ÷Be (→ ÷Be 2, HAL 132a;
HALOT 137b); g) cf. … yrb ûrb my son … your son (Sefire, Donner-R. Inschriften 222 B:
25); ûrq[ … yrq[ my (your) descendants; atyb rb the son of the house, meaning of the
palace (Driver Arm. Docs. 100a); it is translated by Driver as prince, by which is meant Arsûam,
the Persian satrap in Egypt; cf. br byth a member of his house (household), so in an inscription
from Khirbet ©eµmar, some 2 km. north-west of Tell BéÆt Mirsim, dated from the fourth to the
seventh century AD (Meehan ZDPV 96 (1980), 59–66); pl. atyb ynb (Cowley Arm. Pap. 30:3)
princes of the palace, or alternatively members of the royal entourage; d) ÷yrwt ynb young bulls
Ezr 69.
—2. indicating a more distant relationship Bauer-Leander BArm. 312h (→ Heb. ÷Be 4–8); ynEB]
laer;c]yI Ezr 616, at;WlgÒ ynEB] Da 225 513 614 Ezr 616; vn:aÔ rB' a man Da 713; av;n:a} ynEB] men 238 521;
÷yhil;aÔ rB' an angel (→ ah;l;aÔ) 325; ÷yTer]t'wÒ ÷yTivi ÷ynIv] rb'K] a man of sixty-two years old (the
age of Darius when he came to the throne) Da 61. †
I Jrb: Heb. I Jrb (cf. Beyer Arm. Texte 539); denominative from Jr'B]; Syr. (Brockelmann
Lexicon 96a) and NeoSyr. (Maclean Dictionary 39b) pe>al; Mnd. RBK (metathesis from BRK)
af. (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 423a and 70a BRK af.; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 74) to bow the
knee.
pe: pt. JreB; (Bauer-Leander BArm. 293q), BHS with aWh, variant with aw:h} pa. pf. II Jrb
Da 611: to kneel. †
Der.: sbst., from which the vb. is derived: Jr'B], *aB;kur]a' (?).
II Jrb: Heb. II Jrb; in Akk. cuneiform in a personal name *barak, he blessed (Tallqvist
Personal Names 267b; Coogan West Semitic Personal Names 70; on which see Beyer Arm.
Texte 538); EmpArm., EgArm., Hermo-polis, Saqqara (Donner-R. Inschriften 267: 1); Cowley
Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap. also in proper names); Bowman Demotic 7: 3ff; Nab., Palm.,
Hatra, JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 44; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 198); JArm., DSS
(Dalman Wb. 65b, to bless, praise; Beyer Arm. Texte 538); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 32, to
bless); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 2b); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 96b); Mnd. BRK, pe. brak
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 70; on this see especially Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 215); NeoArm.
brhÉ (Bergsträsser Gloss. 14).
pe: pt. passive JyriB] blessed Da 328. †
pa: pf. (Bauer-Leander BArm. 130h) JriB; Da 219, JreB; 611 (→ I Jrb), tker]B‰; 431; pt.
passive Jr'b;m] (of God) praised Da 219f 431 (611 see above). †
*Jr'B] or more probably *JreB]: basic form birk (Bauer-Leander BArm. 183g); see Akk. birku(m)
together with burku knee, lap (AHw. 129a and 140a; CAD B: 255a); Heb. Jr,B,; EmpArm.,
Pehl. (Junker Frahang 10: 9; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 44 s.v. ûrbII; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 202 s.v. brk2); JArm., DSS aK;r]Bi (Dalman Wb. 65b; Beyer Arm. Texte 539); Syr.
(Brockelmann Lexicon 96a) and Mnd. ak;r]WB (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 57b; Nöldeke
Mand. Gramm. 157); NeoSyr. (Maclean Dictionary 39b) mostly birkaµ; → denom. I Jrb: pl. sf.
yhi/kr]Bi (variant yhi/Kr]Bi dual, Bauer-Leander BArm. 226x !): knee Da 611. †
µr'B:] JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 66a; Beyer Arm. Texte 539); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 97a);
Sam. berran (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 2b); CPArm. beran(deµ) < *beram-deµ (Schulthess Gramm.
§132, 1); cf. Herzfeld Paikuli 223 (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 44; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary
202 s.v. brm2) < I rB' and hm; :: Bauer-Leander BArm. 264o: except what, yet, but, however
Da 228 412.20 517 Ezr 513. †
rc'B:] Heb. rc;B;; rb; EmpArm., EgArm. (Ah\iqar (8)9, 1(0)(4)); Pehl. (Junker Frahang 10: 2, bsl
) and Palm. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 45; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 204); JArm., DSS
(Dalman Wb. 59b, 67a, ar;c]/s]Bi; Beyer Arm. Texte 539); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Literary and Oral
Tradition 2: 508); CPArm. besar (Schulthess Gramm. §87: 1; and Lex. 28b); JArm. and
NeoSyr. bisraµ (Maclean Dictionary 35b); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 82a) and NeoArm. besraµ
(Bergsträsser Gloss. 15 s.v. bsr); Mnd. bisra (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 62a) = ar;s]yBi
(Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 107); Bauer-Leander BArm. 29x, 184p, 218a: det. ar;c]Bi.
—1. flesh Da 75.
—2. metaphorically, collective (Bauer-Leander BArm. 202m; Heb. rc;B; 6) ar;c]Bi(AlK;) all
flesh, referring to mankind, mortals Da 211: ar;c]BiAlK; all flesh, referring to the animal world 49
.†
*tB': Heb. II tB'; MHeb.; JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 67b; Beyer Arm. Texte 540); Bauer-Leander
BArm. 222t; pl. ÷yTiB': a liquid measure, a bath Ezr 722. †
rt;B:; → rt'aB;.
g: interchanges with û in rgs.
*hag: the same in Heb., to be (become) high;metaphorically > to be superior, be arrogant; JArm.
, DSS (Dalman Wb. 68a; Beyer Arm. Texte 540); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 100a) and Mnd.
GAA pe. pa. etpa. (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 72a) to enjoy oneself, gloat (Nöldeke Mand.
Gramm. 132).
Der. hw:G.«
*bG¾: 1. the etymology is not completely certain, but suggestions include: —a) from *bbg (HAL
163b; HALOT 170b; and KBL); —b) from bng. Both these proposals (a and b) are mentioned in
KBL, but the second would be sufficient alone, since the meaning “side” can be derived from it
without difficulty, while the meaning “back” can be discarded (despite the evidence of the
Versions); see Vogt Lexicon, and similarly Rosenthal Gramm. 80; Beyer Arm. Texte 544.
—2. in the cognate languages it appears as follows: —a) bG¾ from the root bbg back, on which
see Heb. I bG¾ (HAL 163a; HALOT 170a); MHeb.; Pehl. (Junker Frahang 10: 7; Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 46, s.v. bgIII; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 207 s.v. gb3); and JArm. aB;G¾
(Dalman Wb. 69a, 68b): yBeG/¾ bG¾Al[' “on” (Montgomery Daniel 295).
—b) bG¾ from the root bng, see also Beyer Arm. Texte 544; Arm., OArm., Zakir B: 8 (Donner-R.
Inschriften 202) bg lkb on every side; Palm. emph. gb< (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 46;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 207); Arb. janb; JArm. sbst. and preposition (Dalman Wb. 68b,
69a; Beyer Arm. Texte 544); bg at, bgl to, (y)bg l[ at the side of, sideways to (the same as in
KBL yBeG/¾ bG¾ l['); CPArm. *gb side, also gp and preposition gb (>l gb) next to (Schulthess Lex.
39a); Syr. gabbaµ, cstr. and abs. ge(n)b, >al ge(n)b next to, near to (Brockelmann Lexicon 123b);
NeoSyr. gibbaµ (Maclean Dictionary 42a); NeoArm. gùapn (Spitaler 127f); Mnd. gamba/ganba
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 76b, 77a) side, bank; cf. Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 80, abmag next
to abnag.
—3. Versions: Sept. ptera; tevssara ejpavnw aujtou` ; Theodotion ptera; tevssara uJperavnw
aujth`"; Vulgate et alas … quattuor super se; Pesh. gappeµ <arbe>aµ >al gabbeµh. In the Versions bG¾
is connected with the meaning “back” from the root bbg (!); so also Bentzen Daniel 48;
Lebram 85; TOB; NRSV; REB; cf. Pritchard Pictures 651, 659.
—4. the sbst. in BArm.: pl. sf. K hy"B'G¾, Q HB'G¾ (Bauer-Leander BArm. 75c, 79s, 223á) side ˜G¾Al['
… [B'r]a' ÷yPiG¾ Da 76 (ZüBi; cf. Pritchard Pictures 644 :: Versions). †
bGO, b/G: Heb. I * bG«; Semitic; Akk. gubbu, here probably an Arm. loanword (see AHw. 295b; cf.
CAD G: 117, gubbu A: “the context of the Asshurbanipal passage suggests a loan word from
Syriac”; cf. also Rosenthal Arm. Forsch. 90; Nab., Palm. bg (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 46 s.v. bgII;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 207 s.v. gb2); JArm. aB;WG (Dalman Wb. 69a); CPArm. *gb and *
gwb (Schulthess Lex. 33a); Syr. gubbaµ and gubbet\a (Brockelmann Lexicon 100b); Mnd. guba
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 82a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 105); Arb. jubb well, cis-tern, pit
(Wehr-Cowan 110b), on which see also E. Cassin RHR 139 (1951), 138; Bauer-Leander BArm.
181v: cstr. bGO Da 68.25, b/G 613 (Bauer-Leander BArm. 222p), det. aB;G¬: pit for lions, the den of
lions Da 68.13.17.18.20.21.24.24.25. †
*hr;WbGÒ: rbg; the same in Heb.; OArm., Zendjirli (Donner-R. Inschriften 214: 32); EmpArm.;
Palm. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 47; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 211 s.v. gbrh2); JArm., DSS
(Dalman Wb. 69b, at;r]WbGÒ; Beyer Arm. Texte 541); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 34a); cf. Syr.
gabruµtaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 102b); Bauer-Leander BArm. 189m: det. at;r]WbGÒ, variant aT;
(Bauer-Leander BArm. 22b and c; 67r): strength, might of god Da 220.23. †
*rbg: the same in Heb.; to be strong; JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 70b; Beyer Arm. Texte 540);
CPArm. itpa. (Schulthess Lex. 34a); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 441);
Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 102b); Mnd. GBR (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 80a).
Der. *hr;WbGÒ, rb'GÒ, *rB;GI.
rb'G:Ò rbg; Heb. rb,G²; OArm., Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften 222 A: 39; B: 24; 224: 1–2);
EmpArm. (cf. Pehl., Junker Frahang 11: 2; Herzfeld Paikuli 234/5); Tema (Donner-R.
Inschriften 228 A: 12); EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Driver Arm. Docs.;
Ah\iqar 37, 42, 56, 98, 130; Behistun 45, for Akk. a-me-lu; Saqqara; see Aimé-Giron Textes
Araméens de l’Egypte 6: 1); Samaria; Uruk 12, 37 gab(a)reµ; Nab., Palm., Hatra, JArm. inscr.
(Jean-H. Dictionnaire 47; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 210 s.v. gbr2); JArm. also ar;b]WG sg.
and pl. (Dalman Wb. 70b); cf. yFrey. gwbar (see also DSS, Beyer Arm. Texte 541); CPArm.
(Schulthess Lex. 33b); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 3a, gaµbaór); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 102a),
and Mnd. gabra, pl. gubria (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 73a; cf. Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 18);
NeoArm. gùabroµna (Bergsträsser Gloss. 29; Spitaler Gloss. 86a); NeoSyr. goµraµ (Polotsky Gloss.
106b; Maclean Dictionary 43b): BArm. pl. ÷yrib]G¬, det. aY:r'b]G¬ (Bauer-Leander BArm. 225o;
JArm. and Mnd. cf. the place name Beth GubréÆn (Neubauer 122); Or. (Da 320–25), and CPArm.
(Schulthess Gramm. §42: 21) gabr-; see Vogt Lexicon 33: “Babylonian vocalisation gabréÆn”):
man Da 225 511; pl. 312.21–25.27 66.12.16.25 Ezr 421 54.10 68; lyIj'AyreB;GI ÷yrib]G¬ Da 320 and ÷yaid;WhyÒ/
÷yaid;c]K' ˜G¬ 38.12 (Bauer-Leander BArm. 318g; cf. Driver Arm. Docs. 6:4). †
*rB;G:I rbg; Heb. r/BGI; —1. n.m. rbg (Klmw = Donner-R. Inschriften 24: 2, 15); in cuneiform
Gabbaru (Tallqvist Personal Names 78a, 194b); Gabbara (Pliny vii: 16; see ZAW 57 (1939),
150).
—2. appellative name rbg (*rB;GI): OArm., Tell Fekherye 12, as an epithet for the divine name
hdd (haµdaµd; cf. Haussig Wb. i: 254) EmpArm.; JArm. inscr. (Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary
211 s.v. gbr3); JArm. ar;B;GI and ar;B;nÒG¾/GI (Dalman Wb. 70b, 83a; but see Sokoloff, DSD 7
(2000), 86, who says this form is confined to Late Jewish Literary Aramaic), DSS (Beyer Arm.
Texte 541); > Arb. gabbaµr (Horowitz HUCA 2 (1925), 51); Syr. ga(n)baµraµ (Brockelmann
Lexicon 103a); NeoSyr. gabaµra (Maclean Dictionary 53b s.v. gnbr<); Mnd. gabara
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 72; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 120); basic form. *gabbaµr (Ruzûicðka
109; Bauer-Leander BArm. 191c :: Brockelmann Grundriss 1: 3611): pl. cstr. yreB;GI strong man,
lyIj'AyreB‰;GI ÷yrib]G¬ some (several) strong men Da 320 (Heb. lyIj' r/BGI). †
*rb'd;G:Ò JArm. ar;b]d‰;GÒ, ar;b]D]GI and ar;B;d]GI; BArm. pl. det. aY:r'b]d‰;GÒ by-form of → *rB'zÒGI; for
the sbst. written with d instead of z, as would have been expected on etymological grounds, see
Baumgartner Umwelt 821; Schaeder 47f; and Beyer Arm. Texte 415; there is no necessity to
change the MT; see also M. Sznycer Semitica 13 (1963) 34–36, mentioned by Sokoloff, DSD 7
(2000), 86: chief treasurer Da 32f. †
ddg: the same in Heb.; JArm. (Dalman Wb. 71a); Syr. gad (Brockelmann Lexicon 103b); Mnd.
GDD (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 80b).
pe: impv. WDGO, Or. gudduµ (Bauer-Leander BArm. 166c): to cut down Da 411.20; obj. an:l;ya‰i a
tree. †
*¹dg: the root ¹dg, inasmuch as it is used in the Hebrew and Aramaic parts of the OT, gives rise
to a problem about whether it should be regarded as one root or as two homonymous roots. The
meaning attested in BHeb., to revile, blaspheme (see HALOT 180b), and the meaning in BArm.
, to fly (also to flap, if the noun ¹G¾ is to be traced back to this root) and to row, are probably not
be joined semantically, even though etymologically both meanings are linked to OSArb. gd_f,
Arb. gdf. Those who plead for one root include Gesenius-Buhl and Beyer Arm. Texte; two
separate roots are preferred in KBL and HAL. The root ¹dg with the meaning to revile is found
not just in BHeb., but elsewhere also; cf. JArm. pa. ¹yDeG¾ to blaspheme (Dalman Wb. 72b); Mnd.
GDP (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 81a); for the root ¹dg with the meaning “to fly” in BArm.
cf. JArm. aP;d]G¾, wing, poultry (Dalman Wb. 72b); Syr. gedaf to fly (Brockelmann Lexicon
105b); Arb. gadafa I and II, and also gud_afa, to row, fly (cf. Fraenkel 227f; but cf. also
Wehr-Cowan 115a, where the two meanings are treated separately).
? Der. ¹G¾.
*wG¾ or */G (Bauer-Leander BArm. 220b): Heb. II *wG¾; OArm., Zakir: 3 (Donner-R. Inschriften 202,
especially 2: p. 210); EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar; Kraeling Arm. Pap.;
Driver Arm. Docs.; Saqqara), often wgb within, inside, in etc. (on which see Leander 120m; cf.
also Driver Arm. Docs., p. 69); cf. body > slave, wg a maid or a concubine, Kraeling Arm. Pap.
12: 24 (Jean-H. Dictionnaire s.v. wgIII; cf. Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 217 s.v. gw3); cf.
Palm. I ywg the inner part (also Nab.); and II ywg eunuch, Nab., Hatra, JArm. inscr. (Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 49; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 215 s.v. gw2); JArm. yW"G¾ inside, at;yÒwÒGI body,
physique (Dalman Wb. 73b); Syr. gawwaµyaµ< inner part > eunuch (Brockelmann Lexicon 107b);
Mnd. gawaia (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 74b) the one within, euphemistically for eunuch (see
Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 141; Rosenthal Arm. Forsch. 982); Nab., Palm., JArm. inscr. and
CPArm. gw (Schulthess Lex. 34b); JArm. det. aW:G,¾ cstr. (a)/G (Dalman Wb. 73a); DSS (Beyer
Arm. Texte 541f); Sam. go/u (Ben H\ayyim Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 583), with b and l
egwu, elgu (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 3a); Syr. gawwa<, cstr. gaw (Brockelmann Lexicon 107a); Mnd.
gawa (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 74a) the inside, within (cf. Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 361);
NeoSyr. go/u (Maclean Dictionary 45a); NeoArm. gùauwa, with l elgùul (elgðul ?) (Spitaler 118g;
Bergsträsser Gloss. 29); NeoSyr. lalgul (Brockelmann Grundriss 1: 293f); Ph. wg midst; Arb.
jaww, pl. ajwaµ<, jiwaµ< the interior of a house, broad valley; for more recent and mod-ern
meanings, like air, see Wehr-Cowan 144b; Safaitic (Littmann Thamud und Safa 110f) gw
valley; BArm. Bauer-Leander BArm. 220a and b: the a is orthographic, or alternatively “only
graphic” Gesenius-Buhl 899b :: Nöldeke in Göttinger Gelehrte Anzeiger (1884): 1021, and ZA
30: 167; then subsequently Montgomery Daniel 204: the a is part of the root; cstr. a/G variant
and Or. /G, sf. HWEG,¾ HW"G¾ (variant HW:G,¾ so Ezr 415 Bombergiana, see BHK1; cf. Bauer-Leander
BArm. 79s): interior, inner part, always with a preposition.
—a. with B]: a/gB] in, in the middle of, with ar;Wn Da 325, with hy:r]qi Ezr 415, contained within a
document Ezr 57 62, with a[;r]a' Da 47; 715 cj. /g or wyGI, → hn<d]n.I
—b. with l]: a/gl] in, into Da 36.11.15.21.23f.
—c. with ÷mi: a/GA÷mi out, out from Da 326. †
a/G: → /G.
b/G: → bGO.
hw:G:« the same in Heb.; hag; JArm. at;WayG«, at;wÒyG« (Dalman Wb. 76b, 77a); DSS (cf. Beyer Arm.
Texte 540 s.v. hwag); Syr. gayuµtaµ, geµ<uµtaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 99a, b); Mnd. gaiuta, giuta
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 76a; also Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 146); Bauer-Leander BArm.
183f, perhaps < Heb.: pride Da 434. †
jwg: Heb. jyg, jwg; JArm. j'WG (Dalman Wb. 73b); DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 542); Syr. gaµh\
(Brockelmann Lexicon 108b).
haf: pt. pl. fem. ÷j;ygIm]: for Da 72 [B'r]a' aB‰;r' aM;y"l] ÷j;ygIm] aY:m'v] yjeWr possible
translations (cf. Montgomery Daniel 286) include: —a) intransitive, with Sept., Theodotion,
Vulgate, to burst forth, together with l] meaning “in” (on which see Gesenius-Buhl).
—b) transitive, with Pesh., with l] denot-ing the acc. (Bauer-Leander BArm. 340u; HALOT
(Aramaic) s.v. l] 12) to churn up, stir up the sea.
The second suggestion (b) is to be preferred to the first (a), so e.g. Montgomery loc. cit.;
Bauer-Leander BArm. 340u; KBL; Vogt Lexicon; ZüBi; TOB; Bentzen Daniel 48; Plöger KAT
xviii: 101; Lebram 85; NRSV: the four winds of heaven stirring up the great sea; REB: the
Great Sea churned up by the four winds of heaven. †
*rB'zÒG:I the same in Heb.; MHeb. rB;zÒGI; EmpArm., Persepolis gnzbr<, see R.A. Bowman Aramaic
ritual texts from Persepolis (Chicago, 1970); Hatra gzbr<; JArm. inscr. emph. gyzbrh (Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 50; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 229); JArm. ar;B;zÒGI and ar;b]Z¾GI, DSS (Dalman
Wb. 75a; Beyer Arm. Texte 544 s.v. rbzng); Sept. Ezr 18 gasbarhnov" ; Late Bab. ganza-baµru
treasurer (AHw. 281a; CAD G: 43a, ganzabaru, treasurer; Persian loanword, see below); see
also Eilers AfO 17: 331; ganzabar(r)a, ZDMG 90: 1692, on the plaster from Persepolis; Dura
Europos hrbzyg (Beyer loc. cit.); Syr. ge(y)zabraµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 111a); Mnd. ganzi-bra
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 77; for the meaning see Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 51, high priest,
really the treasurer; for bibliography see further KBL); a loanword from Old Persian ganzabara
(→ *zn"G)Ò supervisor of the treasury, Hinz 102; see further Schaeder 47f; Eilers 123f; Ellenbogen
55; Driver Arm. Docs. on x: 5; H. Koch ZA 71 (1982), 232–247: pl. det. aY:r'b]Z¾G,I variant ˜b]Z;GI
and ˜B;zÒGI: treasurer, Sept. gavza Ezr 721 Sept. pavsa" tai`" gavzai", by-form → *rb'd;GÒ. †
rzg: the same in Heb., to cut, determine, stipulate (see E. Kutsch “Verheissung und Gesetz:
Untersuchung zum sogenannten “Bund” im Alten Testament”, in BZAW 131 (1973), p. 48);
OArm., Tell Fekherye 23 (see also p. 50) ygtzr, etpe. to be exterminated; Sefire to cut up
(Donner-R. Inschriften 222 A: 40), to cut (222 B: 43), to stipulate contracts (222 A: 7);
EmpArm., cf. Junker Frahang App. 33; Asshur Ostracon (Donner-R. Inschriften 233: 16)
textual uncertainty; EgArm.
—1. Ostracon from Aswan (?), see Cowley JRAS 1929: 107 = ZAW 47 (1929), 150, gzr to
promise (there are other suggestions for translation in Jean-H. Dictionnaire 49).
—2. Ah\iqar 134 (Cowley Arm. Pap. 224, 243; cf. Vogt Lexicon 34b): pe. pt. passive ryzg to cut
off the neck (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 49; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 220 s.v. gzr1); JArm. to
cut, decide, arrange (Dalman Wb. 76a); DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 542) to cut, decide, arrange; for
similar meanings cf. CPArm. to circumcise, arrange (Schulthess Lex. 36a); Syr. to circumcise,
arrange (Brockelmann Lexicon 112a); also Mnd. GZR (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 87a).
pe: pt. pl. ÷yrizÒG;, det. aY:r'zÒG; Da 227 44 57.11; —a) Sept., Theodotion gazarhnoiv decider (of
fate), meaning an astrologer (cf. Heb. µyIm'v; yreb]jo; or —b) Vulgate haruspices, liver diviner, (
Arb. jazzaµr butcher, slaughterer), so with KBL; see further Montgomery Daniel 163 and
Bentzen Daniel 22; it is also possible to adopt the more genral rendering “seer” (Vogt Lexicon
34b); or alternatively —c) render as “soothsayer, fortune teller” (Beyer Arm. Texte loc. cit.); cf.
also Gesenius-Buhl. †
The sbst. GZR (*gaµzer) in the sg. is found in 4Q Or. Nab., Text A, line 4; on this see R. Meyer
Gebet des Nabonid, especially p. 24, “as a qaµtil-form of the root gzr to cut, stipulate (cf. Beyer
Arm. Texte 542) gaµzer means the one who decides destiny, such as an astrologer or a
soothsayer”.
hitpe: pf. 3rd. fem. sf. tr,z²GÒt]hi Da 234, ˜GÒt]ai 245 (Baumgartner ZAW 45 (1927), 108f =
Umwelt 96); Bauer-Leander BArm. 108j: to be broken off, break away from, a block of stone
from the mountainside. †
Der. *hr;z«GÒ. †
*hr;z«G:Ò rzg; Heb. fem. from the adj. *rz«G,: in the collocation hr;z«GÒ År,a, cut off land, meaning
unproductive land (see HAL 180a; HALOT 187b under *rz«G): ; JArm. hr;z«GÒ, hr;yzIG.Ò
—1. sloping place, precipice (Dalman Wb. 75b).
—2. resolution, decree (see Levy 1: 320f); cf. DSS, Beyer Arm. Texte 542, substantivised pt.
passive (qal/pe.); Bauer-Leander BArm. 186y; the same in Syr. gezéÆrtaµ decree (Brockelmann
Lexicon 112b); cf. Arb. jazéÆra island: cstr. tr'z«GÒ fem.: decree, resolution Da 414.21. †
*ryg: JArm. (Dalman Wb. 77b); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 36b), and Syr. pa. to whitewash;
denominative from ryGI.
*ryGI: Heb. rGI < Arm. (Wagner 61); JArm. plaster (Dalman Wb. 77b); Syr. lime; Bauer-Leander
BArm. 180j: det. ar;yGI plaster Da 55. †
Der. vb. ryg.
*lG¾l]G:¾ llg; the same in Heb. and *lG:l]GI (lG:l]GIh'); OArm., Zendjirli glgl wheel (Donner-R.
Inschriften 215: 13; 216: 8); EmpArm., EgArm.: personal names lglg and lwglg (Cowley Arm.
Pap. 49: 1 and 10: 21), meaning “eyeball” (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 50; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 222); DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 544; cf. Kornfeld 45, 46, gives this, as well as further
suggested meanings); JArm. al;GÒl]GI (Dalman Wb. 78b); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 103a) and
NeoSyr. géÆgelaµ (Maclean Dictionary 50a); Mnd. gargul, gargla, variant gargila, girgla, girgila
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 78, see Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 55); Bauer-Leander BArm. 192h:
pl. sf. yhi/LGIl]G¾: wheel Da 79. †
hlg: the same in Heb.; EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar 141) Pehl. (Junker
Frahang 8: 1); JArm. inscr. to reveal, go into exile (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 50;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 223); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 78a s.v. alg; Beyer Arm. Texte
543): ylg1 to reveal, expose, ylg2 to emigrate, go into exile (so also Vogt Lexicon 35a); CPArm.
(Schulthess Lex. 37); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 115b s.v. gelaµ); Mnd. GLA, GLL II (pa.,
Drower-Macuch Dictionary 92f; cf. Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 257, 253); NeoSyr. GL< (Maclean
Dictionary 51a).
pe: pt. h/aleG:; inf. alegÒmi; pf. passive yliG] Da 219, yliG² 230, Or. guléÆ; Bauer-Leander BArm.
41o, 156t: to reveal Da 222.28f.47; passive 219.30. †
haf: pf. yligÒh': to lead off into exile Ezr 410 512. †
Der. *WlG:.
*WlG:: hlg; Heb. tWlG:; Neo-Assyrian galéÆtu deportation (AHw. 1555b, with reference to Deller,
Orientalia 35: 194, who takes it as coming from Aramaic; not listed in CAD); JArm. at;WlG:
(Dalman Wb. 79b; for JPArm. abs. wlg, see Sokoloff Dictionary 129); DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte
543) galuµ (galuµt) emigration, exile; so also CPArm. *glw, emph. glwt< exile (Schulthess Lex.
37a), and Syr. gaµluµtaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 116a); Mnd. galiuta clarity (Drower-Macuch
Dictionary 76b; cf. Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 146); Bauer-Leander BArm. 197g, ? < Heb. (Blake
85f; Schulthess Gramm. §73: 2, note); R. Meyer Gramm. §56: 3: det. at;WlG: fem. deportation,
exile, ˜gÉ ynEB] those who had been deported Da 225 513 614 Ezr 616. †
*llg: the same in Heb.; Akk. (AHw. 273b); JArm. (Dalman Wb. 80a); Syr. (Brockelmann
Lexicon 115b); Mnd. (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 93b); cf. Beyer Arm. Texte 543, to rotate,
roll.
Der. *la'l]G¾, ll;GÒ and hL;gIm].
ll;G:Ò llg: JArm. stone (Dalman Wb. 80b); Mnd. glala stone, cliff (Drower-Macuch Dictionary
93); Syr. cliff; EmpArm., Persepolis passim, see R.A. Bowman Aramaic Ritual Texts from
Persepolis (Chicago 1970); Pehl. (Junker Frahang 16: 10); Palm., Greek parallel sthvlh liqivnh
stone stele (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 50; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 224); Akk. galaµlu pebble (
AHw. 273b; also CAD G: 11a-b; < Arm.); it has three meanings: 1) pebble; 2) block of stone,
ashlar; see also Orientalia 46 (1977), 196, where yet another meaning is adduced: 3) “statue”;
Bauer-Leander BArm. 187d: ÷b,a, ll;GÒ Ezr 58 64 collective, originally large stone, stone block,
ashlar, Akk. aban ga-la-la (Herzfeld Altpersische Inschriften); see also R. Bowman in Doron,
Hebraic Studies (1965) 64–74; H.G.M. Williamson, BASOR 280 (1990) 83–88 takes it as a
specially selected stone; both references mentioned by Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 86. †
rmg: the same in Heb., to come to an end, repay, requite, avenge; OArm., Zendjirli (Donner-R.
Inschriften 214: 30; see Jean-H. Dictionnaire 51 s.v. rmgI; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 226
s.v. gmr1); EmpArm. gmyr; Samaria; JArm. inscr. the full price, complete payment (Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 51 s.v. II; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 227, s.v. gmr4); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb
. 82a; Beyer Arm. Texte 544); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 38a); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon
124b); NeoSyr. (Maclean Dictionary 53a); and Mnd. GMR (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 94f; on
the etpa. see Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 213); always the meaning is to come to an end, be
complete, or similar, and in OArm., JArm. and Syr. it also means “to destroy”.
pe: pt. passive rymiGÒ (Bauer-Leander BArm. 188k; DSS, Beyer Arm. Texte 544): complete,
finished, ready; Ezr 712 is uncertain; it is either —a) an abbreviated expression (Ehrlich
Randglossen vii: 172), on which see now Gunneweg KAT xix/1: 12812; or —b) the word µl;v]
has to be restored before it; NRSV, peace (margin, perfect) :: REB, this is my decision; cf. Pesh.
Ezr 89; also Rudolph Esra und Nehemia 68; Vogt Lexicon 35a; cf. Ezr 57. †
*zng; MHeb., JArm. (Dalman Wb. 83b); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 39a) to hide, conceal; Syr. ge
nizaµ hidden (Brockelmann Lexicon 124b); Mnd. GNZ (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 96a);
denominative from *zn"G.Ò
*zn"GÒ; Heb. *µyzIn:G,Ò pl. cstr. yz«nÒG,I see HALOT 199a (HAL 191b) < Arm. (Wagner 58); EmpArm.,
EgArm. (zng Cowley Arm. Pap.; Driver Arm. Docs.; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 52;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 229); other possible forms are mentioned in Driver Arm. Docs.;
cf. Jean-H. Dictionnaire 123, and Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 519 s.v. µrsznk); JArm. azÉnÒG,I
aZÉG¾ and as;yGI (Dalman Wb. 83b, 75a, 84b); Targum also has azÉnÒG¾ (J.F. Stenning The Targum of
Isaiah (1949), xxiii); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 111a), and NeoSyr. gezaµ (Maclean Dictionary
49b); Mnd. ginza (variant ganza, Drower-Macuch Dictionary 90f, 77a; cf. Nöldeke Mand.
Gramm. 13); gaza, gazof(ulax) (F. Cumont Fouilles de Doura-Europos. Les inscriptions,
no. 50); Persian loanword, ganza (Schaeder 47; Hinz Altiranisches Sprachgut 102; see also
Hinz ZA 61 (1971), 261f; and Ellenbogen 57); BArm.: pl. det. aY:z¾nÒG,I cstr. yz«nÒG:I treasure, tyBe
aY:z¾nÒGI Ezr 517 61 (read thus!) 720 (BHH 1686): treasure chambers, treasury (Bauer-Leander BArm.
310b). †
Der. *zng, *rBzÒGI, *rb'd;GÒ
*¹G¾: ¹dg: with assimilation of d to the following p, Bauer-Leander BArm. 34j (cf. Beyer Arm.
Texte 541); JArm. aP;d]G¾ and aP;G¾ (Dalman Wb. 72b, 85a); cf. MHeb. ¹g¾a,} JArm. aP;g¾a}
(Dalman Wb. 6a; but see now Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 87); see below Akk. agappu(m);
CPArm. *gp < *gadpaµ (Schulthess Gramm. §37: 1c; Lex. 40a); Syr. geppaµ (Brockelmann
Lexicon (105b s.v. gdp) 128b); Mnd. gadpa and gapa (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 74a; 78a; cf.
Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 774) and ganpa (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 74a, 77b); Akk.
agappu(m) wing (AHw. 15b; CAD K: 185a, kappu): → bG¾: pl. ÷yPiG¾, sf. HyP'G¾ K Hy"P'G¾ or HyPeG¾
(Bauer-Leander BArm. 49e, 79a), Q HP'G¾, fem. wing Da 74.6. †
*µrg; the same in Heb.; JArm. to be strong, pa. to strengthen, crush bones (Dalman Wb. 87b);
Syr. itpa. to be gnawed to the bone (Brockelmann Lexicon 133b); denominative from *µr'GÒ.
*µr'GÒ or *µreGÒ; for µr,GÒ see Sokoloff Dictionary 136; probably a primary noun (→ *µrg
denominative vb.); Heb. µr,G²; EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.) bone (cf. Leander 105m)
and JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 53; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 235 s.v. grm1);
JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 87b; Beyer Arm. Texte 545) and Syr. am;r]G¾; CPArm. germaµ
(Schulthess Gramm. §34: 1a; Lex. 40); NeoArm. gùermaµ (Bergsträsser Gloss. 31); Mnd. girma
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 92b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 14); Bauer-Leander BArm. 182x: pl.
sf. ÷/hymer]G¾ bones (their bones, those of Daniel’s enemies crunched up in the den of lions), →
qqd haf.) Da 625. †
*µvg: Syr. pa. provided with a body; denominative from *µveGÒ.
*µveG:Ò JArm., DSS am;v]GI and am;v]WG (Dal-man Wb. 89a; Beyer Arm. Texte 545, but see Sokoloff,
DSD 7 (2000), 86); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 136b), and NeoSyr. gusûmaµ (also gumsûaµ
Maclean Dictionary 49a); Mnd. gisûuma, gisûma (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 92f; cf. Nöldeke
Mand. Gramm. 20, 32); Arb. jism; base-form gismu, Bauer-Leander BArm. 183g: sf. Hmev]GI,
Hm'v]GI, pl. sf. ÷/hm]v]G² Da 327 (Bauer-Leander BArm. 41s), ÷/hym]v]G² 328, K ÷/hymev]G² (::
Bauer-Leander BArm. 306k), Or. gisû: body Da 327f 430 521 711. †
d: —1. corresponds to Proto-Semitic d, Arb. d, Heb. d, in qbd, rbd, dwd etc.

—2. corresponds to Proto-Semitic d_, Arb. d_, Heb. z in ÷yId'aÔ, [r;d]a,, dja, rdb, aD;, jbd,
bh'R], yDi, JDe, JD;, ÷KeDi, rkd, hn:D], [r;D], hdej}, bdk, j'Bed]m', where quite often z is still
preserved in writing; see Baumgartner ZAW 45 (1927), 94ff = Umwelt 81ff; Rowley Aramaic
of the OT 16ff; Schaeder 44f; Bowman An Aramaic Religious Text in Demotic 22417.
—3. assimilated in bG¾ and ¹G¾, cf. Bauer-Leander BArm. 34j; cf. Beyer Arm. Texte 412 and 415
s.v. z; Bauer-Leander BArm. 34j.
—4. outside BArm. it interchanges with t in dmv, but see now Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 86.
aD;: Heb. hzœ, /z, tazœ; az OArm., Zendjirli (Donner-R. Inschriften 214: 18, 19 ?); Sefire (222 A:
35, 37; 224: 9; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 78 s.v. hnz); Tell Fekherye 15, and p. 48 z<t; EmpArm.,
Nerab (Donner-R. Inschriften 225: 12); Tema (228 A: 13); Asshur Ostracon (233: 8); EgArm.
(Cowley Arm. Pap. 21: 3, and elsewhere; once tzk 18: 3; cf. Jean-H. Dictionnaire 78), hd (
Hermopolis, see Beyer Arm. Texte 546); Bowman Aramaic Religious Text in Demotic 228 at;
Sogdian hzk (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 78); Nab. and CPArm. ad; Palm. and Sam. hd (Ben
H\ayyim Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 456); JArm. h/aD; and (instead of → h;) ad;h;; DSS
(Beyer Arm. Texte 548); Syr. haµdeµ<, haµd; Mnd. haza and hada (Drower-Macuch Dictionary
117b and 116a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 89f); NeoSyr. haµdhe and dhaµ (Maclean Dictionary 72a
and 59a); NeoArm. hoµdh(i) (Spitaler 5g; Brockelmann Grundriss 1: 322; Bauer-Leander BArm.
81a-c): demonstrative pronoun fem. (for masc. → hn:D]) this Da 427 78, ad;l] aD; to one another 5
6, aD;A÷mi aD; from one another 73 (Bauer-Leander BArm. 87a).
†
bDo: the same in Heb.; OArm., Sefire hhbd female bear (?) (Donner-R. Inschriften 222 A: 31): st.
abs. fem. sg., but that is uncertain; perhaps it is an error for hrbd “bee” (so Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 55; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 238 s.v. dbh; on which see Donner-R.
Inschriften 2: p. 248; also Gibson Syrian Semitic Inscriptions 2: 40); EmpArm.; Pehl. (Junker
Frahang 9: 7, dwb); EgArm. abd ? (Ah\iqar 120; on which see Cowley Arm. Pap., p. 240;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 237); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 90a, aB;Du, ab;/D; Beyer Arm.
Texte 546); Syr. debbaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 138a); NeoSyr. dibaµ wolf (Maclean Dictionary
59a); Bauer-Leander BArm. 181v: bear Da 75. †
jbd: Heb. jbz; —1. jbz: OArm., Zendjirli (Donner-R. Inschriften 214: 15–16, 21); EmpArm.,
Xanthos; Pehl. (Junker Frahang 19: 7; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 71 s.v. jbzI; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 301 s.v. zbh\1).
—2. jbd; JArm. (Dalman Wb. 90a); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 41b); Syr. (Brockelmann
Lexicon 138a); Mnd. DBA/DBH (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 101b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm.
43); NeoSyr. (Maclean Dictionary 60a); NeoArm. (Bergstrasser Gloss. 20 d_bh\).
pe: pt. pl. ÷yjib]D‰; to perform a sacrifice, with object ÷yjib]Di Ezr 63. †
Der. *jb'D], *jB'd]m'.
*jb'D:] jbd; Heb. jb'z²; —1. jbz: OArm., Zendjirli (Donner-R. Inschriften 214: 18, 22) zbh\h
offering (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 71 s.v. zbh\II; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 302 s.v. zbh\h);
Mnd. (!) zaba, pl. zabia, variant zubia/ zibia (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 156a; Nöldeke Mand.
Gramm. 43).
—2. jbd: EmpArm., EgArm. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 71 s.v. jbzII; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 301 s.v. zbh\2); JArm. (Dalman Wb. 90a, aj;b]Di); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Literary and
Oral Tradition 2: 455); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 138a, debh\a)µ : Bauer-Leander BArm. 183j;
pl. ÷yjib]Di animal sacrifice, with jbd Ezr 63. †
qbd: the same in Heb.; the basic meaning is probably to stick, cling to, cf. Heb. (HAL, HALOT
s.v.); EmpArm., EgArm. to adjoin (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.); so also in
Qumrân; to cling to (Hermopolis); Palm. to hang on to (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 54;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 238); DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 546); JArm. to hang on to, cling
to, af. to achieve, reach (Dalman Wb. 90b). For the meaning “to reach, attain” (pe.) in Qumrân,
see Beyer Arm. Texte 546; CPArm. to hang on to, follow, reach (Schulthess Lex. 41b); Syr. to
be fixed together, be joined, follow (Brockelmann Lexicon 139a); NeoSyr. (Maclean Dictionary
60a); Mnd. DBQ (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 101f) to cling to, stick to.
pe: pt. pl. ÷yqib]D‰; to cling to, stick together, with µ[i Da 243. †
*rbd: the same in Heb., II rbd; EgArm. only rbdl[, and once rbd[ (Cowley Arm. Pap. 45:
3 → *ar;b]Di).
Der. *hr;b]Di.
*hr;b]D:i rbd; the same in Heb., → II rbd; JArm., Deir Alla ii: 17; EmpArm., EgArm. only
rbdl[, see Leander 124x (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar 202; Saqqara;
Jean-H. Dictionnaire 55 s.v. rbdII; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 239 s.v. dbr3); JArm.
ar;WBDi speech, ar;ybeDi word (Dalman Wb. 90a, b; but see now Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 86);
Mnd. >ldbar (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 101b s.v. dbar2); from Canaanite formal language, as
used in bureaucracy (Rosenthal Arm. Forsch. 51); DSS (yd) trbdl[ (Beyer Arm. Texte 547);
BArm. cstr. tr'b]Di (Bauer-Leander BArm. 240b): matter, yDi tr'b]DiAl[' for the pur-pose of, so
that Da 230, corresponding to yDi tr'b]DiAd[' 414; rd. >addibrat (Vogt Lexicon 36a): >al d > >add
(Bauer-Leander BArm. 260z); cf. Heb. rb'D]Al[' and tr'b]DiAl['. †
bh'D:] Heb. bh;zÉ; OArm. bhz Zendjirli (Donner-R. Inschriften 215: 11; 216: 11); EmpArm., Pehl.
(Junker Frahang 16: 2 abhd); bhz also in EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar 143), and once
bhd (Cowley Arm. Pap. 10: 9); Nab., Palm. bhd, and once daab; JArm. inscr. (Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 72 s.v. bhz; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 306 s.v. zhb); JArm., DSS (Dalman
Wb. 92a; Beyer Arm. Texte 547); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 42b); Sam. det. daµbaó (Ben H\ayyim
Gloss. 3b); Syr. dahbaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 142b); Mnd. dahba, zahba (Drower-Macuch
Dictionary 98b and 157a; cf. Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 43, 106); NeoSyr. da(h)ba (Maclean
Dictionary 61a); NeoArm. d_ahba (Bergsträsser Gloss. 20; Spitaler Gloss. 85a); Bauer-Leander
BArm. 185p; BArm. bh'D] Ezr 715, det. ab;h} D' in Daniel, hb;h} D' in Ezra, Or. dahbaµ
(Bauer-Leander BArm. 45f): gold Ezr 715f.18, the material used for statues of the gods Da 232.35.38
.45 31.5.7.10.12.14.18 54.23, and for temple vessels Da 52f Ezr 514 65, and for ornaments Da 57.16.29. †
awhd K, ayEh;D, and ayEh;De Q Ezr 4 . Traditionally a personal name, Sept. , MSS ad loc., and Sept.
9
A
B aWhDi instead of aWhAyDi (→ yDi 2a), that is (Bauer-Leander BArm. 212z; cf. EgArm. whd (
Wadi Hammaµmaµt, cf. Dupont-Sommer RA 41 (1947–48), 105ff). †
qwd: → qqd.
rwd: the same in Heb.; EmpArm., Palm. dwr a walled site; dyr house; Nab. dyr; Hatra dyr a
house and its inhabitants (Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 243 s.v. dwr2, 246 s.v. dyr; Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 57 s.v. rydI); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 93b; Beyer Arm. Texte 547); Sam. (Ben
H\ayyim Gloss. 3b); Syr. daµr (Brockelmann Lexicon 147b); Mnd. DUR (Drower-Macuch
Dictionary 105b); subst. JArm. ar;WD (Dalman Wb. 93b); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 147b),
also monastery, and also NeoSyr. deµra (Maclean Dictionary 65b); Mnd. daura
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 99a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 100, 159): residence, also monastery
> Arb. dair monastery (Fraenkel 275).
pe: impf. rWdT], pl. ÷WrduyÒ Da 49 K, ÷r;duyÒ Q (Bauer-Leander BArm. 200j); pt. pl. ÷yria} D‰; K,
÷yriyÒD‰; Q, cstr. yrea} D‰; K, yreyÒD‰; Q (Bauer-Leander BArm. 51h and j): to live, dwell Da 238 (cf.
Bauer-Leander BArm. 367c; Montgomery Daniel 172f), 331 49.18.32 626. †
Der. rD;, *r/dm], *rd;m], *rydiT], cf. also ar;WD.
ar;WD, Theodotion Dei>ra, i.e. ar;yDi, so one MS Ken.,

see Montgomery Daniel 199; Vulgate, Pesh.
Dura: ar;WD t['q]Bi Da 31, Sept. ejn pedivw/ tou` peribovlou cwvra" Babulwniva"; Plöger KAT
xviii: 59 says that even though there is no certain identification of the place to which the name
refers, it is hardly a made-up name (with reference to Montgomery Daniel 199, and Bentzen
Daniel 34). The place name can easily be linked with the Akkadian appellative duµru(m)
city-wall, a place surrounded by walls (AHw. 178), cf. KBL.
The more recent attempts to identify a location include: —a) Dura is the name of a river which
flows into the Euphrates some seven or eight km. below Hillah; Baumgartner ZAW 44 (1926),
401 (with bibliography) says that this same name applies also to the hilly nature of the
surroundings; see also Montgomery Daniel 197; see further Curt Kuhl “Die drei Männer im
Feuer: Daniel Kap. 3 und seine Zusätze” (BZAW 55 (1930) 5).
—b) We now know through recent excavations of a city called Dur …, which was situated at
modern Tell el-Lah\m, to the east of Eridu and to the sout-east of Ur; see Berger ZA 64 (1975),
220.
—c) The name has been connected with that of the city Dura-Europos, on which see Bentzen
Daniel 34 (with bibliography).
It is the last of these three suggestions (c) that has the least to support it; but deciding which of
the others to adopt must remain open.
vwd: the same in Heb.; JArm., DSS (Dal-man Wb. 94a; Beyer Arm. Texte 548); CPArm.
(Schulthess Lex. 43b); Sam.; Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 148a); Mnd. DUSð, DISð
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 106a; cf. Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 446); NeoSyr. D<Sð (Maclean
Dictionary 59b).
pe: impf. sf. HN"viWdT] (Bauer-Leander BArm. 148h 171e): to tread down, tread under
(object, the earth) Da 723. †
*hw:j} D', pl. ÷w:j} D', Or. dahwaµn: Da 6 19;

a word with an uncertain meaning.
—a) the versions vary, see e.g. Montgomery Daniel 277; Gesenius-Buhl; KBL; Vogt Lexicon
37a; BHS: l[enÒh'Aal; ÷w:j} d'wÒ tw:f] tb;W yhi/md;q‰; Theodotion ejdevsmata oujk ehJ/shvnegkan aujtw`/
= Vulgate cibi and Pesh. meµ<kelaµtaµ, cf. Sept. only kai; hujlivsqh nh`sti" = tw:f] tb;W and he
spent the night without food.
—b) for various other suggestions, includ-ing the Rabbinic ones, see the bibliogra-phy in
Montgomery Daniel 277; Ibn Ezra, musical instruments; Rashi, tables; see also Kraeling Arm.
Pap. 242 under hjd (9: 14; and Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 244 s.v. dh\y; Segert ArchOr
24: 384f); for Rashi cf. MHeb. t/nw:j} D' table-tops (Dalman Wb. 94a; but see now Sokoloff,
DSD 7 (2000), 86); on this see Beyer Arm. Texte 548, a tray of food (?), perfumes, from Arb.
duhÉaµn “smell”, so Rosenmüller (see Gesenius-Buhl; KBL; Vogt Lexicon).
—c) hw:j} D' or aw:j} D' perhaps a woman to sleep with, concubine, with reference to Arb. dah\ay
an outstretched mat, in an obscene sense (Gesenius-Buhl) > subegit feminam, so Levy 1: 388b,
and König Wb. 571b; cf. also KBL.
—d) this uncertain sbst. can be replaced by the cj. ÷n:jel] (→ * hn:jel]), so KBL, and especially
Vogt Lexicon loc. cit.; see also BHS.
It is not easy to decide between the various possibilities; the expressions in Theodotion, Vulgate
and Pesh. (food) representing the sbst. appear to be paraphrases of tw:f], and so the meaning of
the word still remains unknown.
ljd: only Arm.; ? Arb. d_ah\l longing for revenge (Nöldeke ZDMG 40 (1885), 741; 54 (1899),
163); —1. ljz OArm., Zakir (Donner-R. Inschriften 202 A: 13); Sefire (223 C: 6).
—2. ljd EmpArm., Pehl. (Junker Frahang 21: 1); EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar 45,
54); Palm., Hatra (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 73; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 309 s.v. zh\l); Sam.
daal (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 3b s.v. dh\l).
—3. ljeD] JArm., DSS. (Dalman Wb. 94b; Beyer Arm. Texte 548); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex.
44a) and Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 148b); Mnd. DHL pe. pf. dhil (Drower-Macuch Dictionary
103a).
pe: pt. pl. ÷lij} D‰;, pt. passive lyjiD], fem. hl;yjiD]: to fear, with µd'qÕA÷mi Da 519 and 627
parallel with [wz; pt. passive dreadful (Bauer-Leander BArm. 297c); JArm. inscr.
(Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 244); JArm.; CPArm.; Syr. (Heb. ar;/n); Da 231 77.19. †
pa: impf. sf. ynIN"lij} d'ywI (Bauer-Leander BArm. 130e, i) to startle Da 42 parallel with lheB'. †
yDi (Di in → awhd), and yDe in Da 3 15 (so in BHS; in BHK2 and BHK3 as distinct from yDi (→ db[
); the same as Heb. hz², Wz; Arm. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 73–75), DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte
548–552); yz, OArm., Breµdsch 1, 4 (Donner-R. Inschriften 201); Zakir A 1, 16 (202); Zendjirli
(214: 1; 219: 2); Sefire (several times, see Donner-R. Inschriften 3: 32a); Tell Fekherye 1, 5,
11, 15 (relative pronoun), and relative particle “from” 1, 13; “until” 17, 23; see p. 51; on this
see also Bauer-Leander BArm. 82h, and §90; Tell Halaf 69f; EmpArm., Asshur Ostracon 14,
19, 21; Sogd. (E. Benveniste Textes sogdiens (1940), 279); EgArm. (also yd, Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 73–75; cf. Leander §16); Mcheta; Saqqara 3f; Nab. yz and yd; Palm. yd and d;
Hatra and JArm. inscr. (Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 310 s.v. zy); West Arabian dhéÆ (Rabin
Ancient West Arabian 39); yDi and D] JArm. (Dalman Gramm. §18) and Sam.; D] CPArm., Syr.,
Mnd. (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 97; see Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 92f); NeoArm. ti, dhi, dh
(Spitaler 59a-e, and 117c, d, g); NeoSyr. d<, di (Maclean Dictionary 59a); Yemen dheµ (Rabin
Ancient West Arabian 75f); Baumgartner ZAW 45 (1927), 94f = Umwelt 81ff; Rosenthal Palm.
Inschr. 51.
In BArm. originally a demonstrative, and then a relative particle. —1. as with Arb. d_uµ it may
express a genitive relationship (Bauer-Leander BArm. §90); on this construction see now
Muraoka-Porter Grammar of Egyptian Aramaic 228–234, cited by Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 87;
after a determined noun: af;yLiv' aK;l]m'Aydi Da 215, ydi al;k]yhe lt'k] ydi ar;yGIAl[' aK;l]m' Da 55;
after a non-determined noun (Bauer-Leander BArm. 313c): rWn yDi rh'nÒ Da 710; if both nouns
are determined it occurs often with a proleptic suffix (Bauer-Leander BArm. 314j): ah;l;aÔAyDi
Hmev] Da 220 his (that is to say God’s) name, cf. Da 38.26 Ezr 511; to identify the material with
which something is made (Bauer-Leander BArm. 313f) hv;are ab;h} d' yDi Da 238 the head of
gold (cf. Montgomery Daniel 174), 239 31 57 77 Ezr 514 and 65 (Bauer-Leander BArm. 314h, i);
bh'd] yDi Hveare Da 232 its head was made of gold, 233 719.
—2. introducing a relative clause (Heb. rv,a}, v,; Bauer-Leander BArm. §23, 108).
—a) following a noun µl,v]Wrybi yDi al;k]yhe the temple which is in Jerusalem Da 52 Ezr 514.15 65
, cj. 63; as sbj. T]b]h'yÒ … yDi you who have given Da 223, on which see Montgomery Daniel 161 ::
yDi as a conjunction, “for”, see below 3e; cf. NRSV, REB, for you have given me wisdom and
power.
—b) yDi as an explicitly expressed sbj. Da 419 614.
—c) as an object tyz«j} Aydi am;l]j, Da 226; 211.24 46 614 Ezr 410; that which, what: JN:mi
an:y[eb]AyDi what we asked of you (NRSV) Da 223; ydiwÒ and the one who does not know Ezr 725;
yDiAlK; all that which is commanded Ezr 723, yDi hm; (see below 2 d), with a resumptive suffix
(Bauer-Leander BArm. 357j) Hmev]AyDi whose name Da 45; 211 512.23 Ezr 725; yDi an:D;[iB] as soon
as Da 35.15; yDi rt;a} Ezr 63 (→ rt'a}); yDiAlk;B] wherever Da 238; with personal pron. ayhiAyDi
that is Ezr 615 (→ awhd 49); ÷yNIai yDi which are Da 717.
—d) after an interrogative pronoun (Bauer-Leander BArm. 357m-o): yDiA÷m' (→ ÷m') Da 36.11 414.
22.29 521 who; ydi a/hm; (→ hm;) that which Da 228f.45 Ezr 68 718 (Heb. rv,a} ymi, V,Ahm'.
—e. a) hM;t' … yDi Ezr 61 where (with reference to aY:r'p]si tybeB]o); ayhiAHle yDi which are his
Da 220 (the beginning of a posses-sive pronoun yliyDi, Jl;yDi etc. Brockelmann Grundriss 1:
315f; Bauer-Leander BArm. 359t); DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 552, under lyd); Sefire iii: 20
(Donner-R. Inschriften 224: 20) ylyz; Asshur Ostracon 13 (Donner-R. Inschriften 233) ylz who
are mine; Neµrab (Donner-R. Inschriften 225: 20) ûlyz; EgArm. ylyz etc. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire
73, para. A 2), ûlyd once, possibly as a personal name, ylz “the one who is mine” (Kraeling
Arm. Pap. 12: 19); on the pronoun see Leander §13; JArm. yliyDi etc. (Dalman Gramm. §18, p.
119); CPArm. (Schulthess Gramm. §61); Syr. (Nöldeke Syr. Gramm. §69); Mnd.
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 107; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. §233); cf. Heb. lv,; b) al;AyDi
lB'h't]ti indestructible Da 627 714, with inf. (Bauer-Leander BArm. 302g); al;AyDi hy:n:v]h'l]
irrevocable Da 69, → al;F;b'l] al;AyDi without delay Ezr 68; al;AyDi without, see Bauer-Leander
BArm. 359u; JArm., CPArm., Sam. and Syr. dela<, > Late Babylonian sûa laµ (von Soden Gramm
§115s), Ezr 69 722; ÷yId'ybi al;AyDi without the assistance of a human hand Da 234.45 (cf. Heb., Jb
3420 Da 825).
—3. conj. (Bauer-Leander BArm. §79: 109 and 110); it cannot always be distinguished with
certainty from meaning (2), cf. Heb. rv,a} and yKi; see also Vogt Lexicon 40f.
—a) that, after a vb. of knowing Da 28 46 611.26, announcing Da 529 Ezr 416 724, seeing Da 28.45 3
27, hearing Da 514.16, recognising Da 28f 46.14.23 521 Ezr 415, requesting Da 216, ordering Da 29 310
, introducing permission Da 68.16, following dyti[} Da 315; yDi fvoq]A÷mi 247 (→ ÷mi 6) “it belongs
to truth that”, i.e. truly, ydi(wÒ) 241.43 420.23 whereas, yDi lbeqÕAlK; 241.45 forasmuch as.
—b) introducing direct speech, like d{ti (Heb. yKi 7) Da 225 57 66.14.
—c) with a final clause, so that Da 43 515, (alternatively for an inf.) Ezr 610, so that … not, lest
al; yDi Da 218 328 618, and hm;l]AyDi (→ hm;) Ezr 723.
—d) in consecutive clauses: so that Ezr 510 (Leander ZAW 45 (1927), 156).
—e) in causal clauses: for, because Da 220.23.47 415.31.34 624.27.
—f) with prep.: —a) ydiK] (Heb. rv,a} ð'): Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften 224: 24); Asshur
Ostracon (233: 11, 20); Kilikien (261: 4); Pehl.; EgArm. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 74 no. 8); see
Leander p. 124y, yzk; Bauer-Leander BArm. 361f-h: as Da 243 (:: → ahe), when 37 520 611.15; —b
) yDiA÷mi (yzm Sefire), see Jean-H. Dictionnaire 75, no. 9, but completely uncertain, → ÷mi);
Bauer-Leander BArm. 361i-k: after Ezr 423, as soon as, insofar as Da 423, because Da 322
(Bauer-Leander BArm. 266i) Ezr 512; —g) for d/l[' yDi tr'b]Di, → hr;b]Di; for yDiAd[', → d[;
for lbeqÕl; and yDi lbeqÕAlK;, → lbeqÕ.
÷yd: the same in Heb.; see now Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 87; EgArm. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 56;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 246 s.v. dyn1); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 96b; Beyer Arm. Texte
552); changing into ÷wd (Brockelmann Grundriss 1: 614); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 43a); Sam. (
Ben H\ayyim Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 446); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 145b); Mnd.
DUN (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 104b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 250) and NeoSyr. D<N
(Maclean Dictionary 59b).

pe: pt. pl. ÷ynIa} D‰; K, ÷ynIyÒD‰; Q (Bauer-Leander BArm. 51j): to make a judgement Ezr 725. †
Der. ÷yDi, *÷Y:D', hn:ydim], n.m. laYEnID;.
÷yDi: the same in Heb.; EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Saqqara; Ah\iqar 198)
Samaria; Pehl. (Junker Frahang 13: 6); JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 56;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 254 s.v. dn), once ÷yz ! (Kraeling Arm. Pap. 3: 17; but see E.Y.
Kutscher Studies 39, mentioned by Sokoloff DSD 7 (2000), 88); Nab. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire
56); Pehl. (Junker Frahang 13: 6); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 96b; Beyer Arm. Texte 552f);
CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 43a); Sam. den (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 3b); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon
145a); Mnd. dina (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 108a); NeoSyr., see Ritter Gloss. 114a, dino
religion; cf. < Arb. < Persian déÆn religion (Wehr 275b; Handwörterbuch des Islam 98b);
Bauer-Leander BArm. 180k: det. an:yDi.
—1. judgement, with db[ hitpe. and ÷mi, let judgement be strictly executed (NRSV) Ezr 726.
—2. justice parallel with fvoq] Da 434.
—3. l] bhiyÒ an:ydiwÒ Da 722; for the Versions and the various possible interpretations see
especially Montgomery Daniel 310.
—a) there are various ways of rendering MT ÷yDi, and suggestions include: a) judgement is
pronounced in favour of (Gesenius-Buhl; KBL); cf. NRSV, judgement was given for; —b)
power (ZüBi; Bentzen 50); —g) rule (Plöger KAT xviii: 103, 105); —d) decision, judicial
verdict (Montgomery Daniel 308f; TOB; Lebram 87).
—b) cj. for bhiyÒ prop. btiyÒ, and insert (twice) bhiyÒ an:f;l]v;wÒ judgement took place … and power
was given (Bentzen Daniel 50; Vogt Lexicon 43a; cf. BHS, and KBL); see also Beyer Arm.
Texte 554: an:yDi 710.22.26 judicial assembly; similarly for vs.10 and 26, e.g. Gesenius-Buhl; KBL;
Vogt Lexicon; Bentzen Daniel 50, 52; Montgomery Daniel 296, 311. †
*÷Y:D:' ÷yd: the same in Heb.; EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Saqqara); Nab.,
JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 57; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 246 s.v. dyn3); JArm.,
DSS (Dalman Wb. 96b; Beyer Arm. Texte 553); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 43a); Sam. (Ben
H\ayyim Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 449); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 145b); Mnd. daiana
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 99a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 120, 179, 436); NeoSyr. deyana
(Maclean Dictionary 65a); Bauer-Leander BArm. 191c: pl. ÷ynIY:D' judge Ezr 725 (→ ayEn:yDi). †
ayEn:yDi: masc pl. Ezr 4 , tradtionally proper noun; Sept. Dinaiòi, from which Gunneweg KAT
9
xix/1: 82 suggests “the people of Dina”; on this see also p. 84; but rather read aY:n"Y:D' judge, cf.
Sept.L, 3 Ezr (Esdr. A’) 213 oiJ kritaiv …, Meyer Die Entstehung des Judentums 39f; Rudolph
Esra und Nehemia 36; KBL :: Galling ZAW 63 (1951), 70: WnD; “they made a judgement”. †
JDe, fem. JD;; Pehl. ûz and ûd (Junker Frahang 24: 2f); Sogd. ûz (Gauthier-Benveniste 2: 238);
EgArm. (Driver Arm. Docs.) ûz, ykz, ykd, µkz; also Saqqara 8 (Donner-R. Inschriften 266);
and ûnz (Leander §14, e-i and o; Kraeling Arm. Pap. ûd and µkd, both only once; Cowley
Arm. Pap., and Kraeling Arm. Pap. also akd; JArm. inscr. dk (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 76 s.v. ûz
); JArm. JyDe and ykiyDe; DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 553); Arb. d_aµka; Eth. zekuµ; Bauer-Leander
BArm. 83 l, 269e, f: demonstrative pronoun, that; always adj.: JDe rX'B'v]ve Ezr 516; tyBe
Jde ah;l;aÔ 517 (variant yDi Bauer-Leander BArm. 356f, → yDi), cf. BHS; 67f.12 (→ hn:D] 1);
Jd; at;yÒr]qi 413.15f.19.21; Jd; aT;d]ybi[} that work 58; NRSV, this work; REB, the work. †
÷KeD:i Palm. (Rosenthal Palm. Insch. 49f :: Ingholt, Berytus 2: 98; Cantineau, AfO 11: 379a);
EgArm. ûnz (Leander 34n; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 76 s.v. ûzI), µkz (see under ûz and ûd);
Bauer-Leander BArm. 83n, 84o: demonstrative pronoun masc. and fem.: that; masc. Da 231,
fem. 720 (cf. Montgomery Daniel 310), 21. †
I *rkd: Heb. rkz to remember; OArm., rkz Zendjirli (Donner-R. Inschriften 214: 16, 17, 21);
so also EmpArm., EgArm. (Ah\iqar 53 :: together with rkd, Cowley Arm. Pap. 34: 6); rkd
Hatra; Nab. and Palm. mostly dkr; JArm. inscr. dkr (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 76 s.v. rkz;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 321 s.v. zkr1); JArm. (Dalman Wb. 98a; Beyer Arm. Texte 554);
Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 3b); CPArm. dkr (Schulthess Lex. 46a); Syr. etpe. (Brockelmann
Lexicon 154a) and NeoArm. d_kr (Bergsträsser Gloss. 21); NeoSyr. tkr (Maclean Dictionary
66a) < etpe.; Mnd. DKR (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 110).
Der. *÷/rk]Di, *÷r;k]D;.
II rkd: → rk'D].
*rk'D:] II rkd; Heb. rk;zÉ; —a) rkz OArm., Zendjirli, Panammuwa 1 (Donner-R. Inschriften
214: 30, 31); EmpArm.; Pehl. (Junker Frahang 11: 6 and 26: 2, zkl); EgArm. rkz hbqnw
(Kraeling Arm. Pap. 3: 21; 7: 28); Samaria-Sebaste; Mnd. zakra, zikra (Drower-Macuch
Dictionary 159a; cf. Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 43).
—b) rkd: EgArm. hbqnw rkd (Cowley Arm. Pap. 15: 17, 20); Nab., Palm., JArm. inscr.
(Jean-H. Dictionnaire 77 s.v. rkzIII; Hoftijzer-J. 329 s.v. zkr3); Sam. dakar (Ben H\ayyim
Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 456); JArm. (Dalman Wb. 98b) and NeoSyr. ar;k]Di (Maclean
Dictionary 66a); DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 554f); CPArm. dkr (Schulthess Lex. 46a); Syr. dekraµ
(Brockelmann Lexicon 153b) male, male animal; NeoArm. d_ahÉra penis (Bergsträsser Gloss.
20); Bauer-Leander BArm. 220t: pl. ÷yrik]Di: ram Ezr 69.17 717. †
*÷/rk]D:i I rkd; Heb. ÷/rK;zI; Bauer-Leander BArm. 53t, 195y < Canaanite; CPArm. ÷wrk(y)d
(Schulthess Lex. 46a); NeoSyr. (Maclean Dictionary 66a); BArm. hn:/rk]Di record (NRSV),
memorandum (REB); Sept. uJpovmnhma (Bickermann JBL 65: 250ff; W. Schottroff Gedenken
im Alten Orient und im AT (1961), 300ff) Ezr 62 (→ ÷r;k]D;). †
*÷r;k]D:; I rkd; → ÷/rk]Di. —a) ÷rkz: OArm., Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften 222 C: 2f); EmpArm.
, EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap. 32: 1, 2 and elsewhere; see also Jean-H. Dictionnaire 78 s.v. ÷rkz
; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 330 s.v. zkrn).
—b) ÷rkd: Nab., Palm., Hatra, JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 78); JArm., DSS (Dalman
Wb. 98b; Beyer Arm. Texte 554); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 456); Syr.
(Brockelmann Lexicon 153b) and Mnd. dukran, dukrana (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 104a; cf.
Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 136); Bauer-Leander BArm. 195z: pl. det. aY:n:k]D;: memorandum; Sept.
uJpomnhmatismov" ; ˜JD;Arp;s] Ezr 415 record-book(s); NRSV, annals; REB, records
(Bauer-Leander BArm. 310b); cf. Heb. t/nrok]ZIh' rp,se archives (NRSV and REB) Est 61. †
qld: the same in Heb.; JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 99b; Beyer Arm. Texte 555); CPArm.
(Schulthess Lex. 46b); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 155b); Mnd. DLQ (Drower-Macuch
Dictionary 111a).
pe: pt. qliD; (Bauer-Leander BArm. 106d, e, 188k) burning Da 79. †
hmd: the same in Heb.; amd EmpArm.; Pehl. (Junker Frahang 18: 1); Armazi (Donner-R.
Inschriften 276: 10, dm>!) and Palm. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 58; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary
251); JArm. h/amd, DSS hmd (Dalman Wb. 100a; Beyer Arm. Texte 555); CPArm. *dm<
(Schulthess Lex. 46b); Syr. demaµ< (Brockelmann Lexicon 156a); Mnd. DMA (Drower-Macuch
Dictionary 111) and NeoSyr. dm< (Maclean Dictionary 66b); Mcheta 10 [md; substantive tWmD]
(the same in Heb.): OArm. twmd statue (Tell Fekherye 1, 15); EmpArm., EgArm. resemblance,
similarity (Kraeling Arm. Pap. 3: 21; on this see also Vogt Lexicon 44a, s.v. hm;D]); Hatra
(Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 251); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 100b; Beyer Arm. Texte 555,
s.v. wmd, damuµ); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 46b); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 156b, damyuµtaµ);
Mnd. dmu, dmut, dmuta (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 111f; see Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 146)
and NeoSyr. dmuta (Maclean Dictionary 67a).
pe: pt. hmeD;, fem. hy:m]D‰; (cf. Bauer-Leander BArm. 156a-c, 157d): to resemble Da 325 75. †
hn:D:] hnz and ÷z: OArm., Zakir, Zendjirli, Sefire (cf. Jean-H. Dictionnaire, 78 s.v. hnz); EmpArm.
hnz (Nerab), a/hnz and a/hnd; EgArm. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 78; cf. Leander §14; Baumgartner
Umwelt 81ff); Tema ÷z (Donner-R. Inschriften 228 A: 4); Pehl. hnz (Herzfeld Paikuli), also
Sogd. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 78); hnz also a/hnd Dura (Altheim 28), Bauer-Meissner
Pachtvertrag obv. 2; (a)÷t Demotic (Bowman Demotic 225); a/hnd Nab. (once hnz) and
Palm., also JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 78); JArm. an:D], ÷yDe and ÷n:D]; with added → ah;,
JArm. ÷yId'h;; on the various forms of the demonstrative pronoun see also DSS; Beyer Arm. Texte
555f; Mnd. hazin, hadinu (= hazin hu; Drower-Macuch Dictionary §118a; 116b; see Nöldeke
Mand. Gramm. 90); Pehl. (Junker Frahang 25: 5); also JArm. inscr. and Syr.; NeoArm. hanna
(Spitaler 37p); Ph. ÷z (Friedrich §288a); OSArb. (Höfner Gramm. 39ff; Beeston Sabaic
Dictionary 37) and Tham. d_n; Eth. zentuµ; Bauer-Leander BArm. 82h: demonstrative pronoun
masc. (fem. → aD;) this; Bauer-Leander BArm. §73; for further forms see Sokoloff, DSD 7
(2000), 88.
—1. adj. hn:D] laeYnID; Da 64.6.29; ˜d] hzÉr; 218.30.47; ˜d] ab;t;K] 57.15.24; ˜d] am;gÉt]Pi Ezr 611; aP;s]k'B]
˜d] 717; ˜d] at;yÒB' this temple (→ tyIB' 2 and JDe) Ezr 53.9.12f 615–17; hn:D] in front of the sbst. Da 415
(or perhaps see below, 2) Ezr 54.
—2. as a sbst.: this is Da 228 (cf. Bauer-Leander BArm. 330r and Commentaries).36 415 (see
above, 1).21 525f Ezr 411.
—3. usually; —a) hn:d]Ki (Pehl., EgArm. Kraeling Arm. Pap. 5: 3 usually hnzk; see Cowley
Arm. Pap. p. 286a; cf. DSS, Beyer Arm. Texte 556); Sogd. hzk, hnzk; Bowman Demotic 225
antak; Heb. hz²K;, tazœK;/ð]) so Jr 1011 Da 329 Ezr 57, cj. 424 (Rudolph Esra und Nehemia 45 and
47 :: MT, Gunneweg KAT xix/1: 85); ˜d]ki hL;mi something like this Da 210; NRSV, such a
thing; REB, such a demand.
—b) hn:D]Aµ[i hn:D] together with one another Da 243 (Bauer-Leander BArm. 87a).
—g) ˜D]AlK; all this 522 716.
—d) ˜D]Al[' therefore Ezr 414f 611, with reference to this Da 316 (:: Leander §14, hereupon) Ezr 4
22 517.
—e) ˜d] yrej} a' Da 229.45; Da 76f ˜D] rt'aB; = either “after this”, so Sept. (kai;) meta; (de;) tau`ta,
and Vulg. post hoc; or “behind this (animal)”; so Theodotion ojpivsw tou;tou cf. Leander ZAW
45 (1927), 157: hn:D] rt'aB; probably means “after this animal”, not “hereafter”, → lbeqÕ, hm;d]qi
.†
laYEnID,; Or. DanéÆ<el; laynd 4 Q Ps. Dan. (RB 63 (1956), 411f): n.m. Da 2 13-728, see Heb.; see also
LipinŒski, VT 28 (1978), 233. †
qqd: the same in Heb.; JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 104a; Beyer Arm. Texte 557); Syr.
(Brockelmann Lexicon 163a, pa.); NeoSyr. (Maclean Dictionary 159b s.v. mdqdq) and Mnd.
DQQ (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 113a) to crush, crunch; adj. qqd fine: DSS, EmpArm. (Rev.
des Etudes Sem. et Bab. 1942–1945: 71, ostr. 16:3; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 258); cf.
Pun. qd (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 60; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 257).
pe: pf. pl. WqD&;, as qwd (JArm. and Syr., Dalman Gramm. 328), variant WQD&; and WQD&'
(Bauer-Leander BArm. 166d): abs. intransitive, to be crushed into small pieces, ground up
fine (see Heb.; Bauer-Leander BArm. 273j) Da 235, cf. Sept., Theodotion, Vulgate; Bentzen
Daniel 24; ZüBi; Lebram 57; TOB (:: KBL); NRSV, all broken in pieces; REB, all shattered
into fragments. †
haf: pf. 3rd. fem. sg. tq,Deh', variant. tq,D,h' (Bauer-Leander BArm. 166i), pl. WqD‰ih'; impf.
qDiT', Or. taddeq (Bauer-Leander BArm. 30b); sf. hN"qiD]T', variant. ˜DÔT' (Bauer-Leander BArm.
40m); pt. qDeh'm] (Bauer-Leander BArm. 40m and n !, 166i): to crush Da 234.40.44f 625 77.19.23. †
rD;: rwd, on which see Beyer Arm. Texte 547; Heb. r/D; JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 104b; Beyer
loc. cit.); Sam. dwr = dor (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 3b); CPArm. dr (Schulthess Lex. 43b); Syr.
(Brockelmann Lexicon 147a); Mnd. dar, dara (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 100f; cf. Nöldeke
Mand. Gramm. 339, 478); NeoSyr. dora (Maclean Dictionary 63b); Bauer-Leander BArm.
179h: generation rD;Aµ[i rd;wÒ Da 333 431 (parallel with µl'[;) from generation to generation;
Mnd. ldar daria (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 100b, corresponding to Nöldeke Mand. Gramm.
310); cf. Heb. rdol] rDo Ex 315 and r/dw:Ar/D Dt 327, see further r/dl]Ar/D Ps 1454 (see HAL
209a; HALOT 218a, under II r/D, 1). †
vw<y:&r]D:‰; n.m.; see Heb.; Darius, Greek Dareiò"; Old Persian Daµrayava(h)usû “maintaining what
is good”; Babylonian Daµriyawusû, Daµriwusû (Reallexikon der Assyriologie 2: 121a); Arm.
(Rowley Darius the Mede 47f); Bruno-Meissner Pachtvertrag I wrd; EgArm. (cf. Vogt Lexicon
45a) whwyrd, whyrd and wyrd; Mesopotamian whyrd.
—1. Darius the Mede a;yd;m‰; ˜D; (cf. Commentaries; Rowley Darius the Mede 12ff) Da 61f.7.10.26
.29.
—2. Darius I (522–485 BC) Ezr 424 55–7 61.12–15; cf. Reallexikon der Assyriologie 2: 121ff;
Pauly-Wissowa (Kl.) 1: 1390ff; Reicke-Rost Hw. 322. †
*[r'D:] → [r'd]a,; Heb. ['/rzÒ; EgArm. [rd (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 61; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 342, s.v. zr>3); JArm., DSS a[;r;D] and a[;r;d]a, Arm. :: [rda violence, → BArm.
and JArm. [r'd]a, (Dalman Wb. 106a, 8a; Beyer Arm. Texte 558); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex.
48b); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 168a); Mnd. dra (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 114a; Nöldeke
Mand. Gramm. 70); NeoSyr. dr>n< (Maclean Dictionary 70b); NeoArm. d_roµ>a (Bergsträsser
Gloss. 22); Neo-Assyrian duraµ<u (foreign word from Aramaic, see von Soden, Orientalia 46
(1977), 185, corresponding to AHw. 1551b, arm, forearm :: AHw. 177b foot, including the
ankle; CAD D: 190, arm, foreleg; Bauer-Leander BArm. 189p: pl. sf. yhi/[r;D]: arm Da 232. †
tD;: the same in Heb.; loanword from Persian daµta (Hinz Altiranisches Sprachgut 84f; Rosenthal
Gramm. p. 189; Ellenbogen 61); Neo-Assyrian daµtu (see von Soden ZA 44 (1938), 181ff; AHw.
165b); EmpArm., Xanthos (Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 263, s.v. dt1) EgArm. atd (Ah\iqar
177, so Ungnad Arm. Pap. 61: 5, but that is completely uncertain; see Cowley Arm. Pap. p.
218, and especially 246, who reads atr; so also Jean-H. Dictionnaire 284 s.v. ytr;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1088 s.v. rty); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 106b; Beyer Arm. Texte
558); Sam.; Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 169b); the same in the cstr.; det. at;D;, sf. ÷/kt]D;, pl.
cstr. yteD; Ezr 725 (read sg. with Versions, cf. vs.14.26) :: Rendtorff ZAW 96 (1984), 17124; the
sbst. is fem.
—1. (royal) command Da 213.15, ÷/kt]D; the verdict about you 29.
—2. state legislation, public law yd'm;AtD; sr'p;W Da 216 69.13.16 (yd'm;l]); see also below, under
4).
—3. a) aY:m'v] Hl';aÔAydi at;D; the law of the god of heaven, that is to say the god worshipped by
ar;zÒ[,, which can only be taken as meaning hwhy; so in turn at;D; is to be taken as the same as
hr;/T Ezr 712.21; and Jh;l;aÔ ydi at;D; 725, so also Jh;l;aÔ td'B] 714 and Jh;l;aÔ td' y[ed]y”; those
who know the law of your god Ezr 725 (cj., for yteD; rd. tD;, see above).
—b) law as religion: Hhel;aÔ td;B] in connection with the law of his God (NRSV), connected
with his religion (REB) Da 66 (cf. KBL, and Vogt Lexicon 45b).
—4. aK;l]m' ydi at;d;w† Jh;l;aÔAydi at;D the law of your god and the law (meaning “the
regulation”) of the king Ezr 726; Jewish religious practice and Persian state legislation are put in
parallel. †
*at,D:&, Heb. hv,D,; Akk. da<sûum spring, and disûsûu(um) top covering of grass, spring (AHw. 165b;
173b; CAD D: 163 s.v. déÆsûu spring grass, spring pasture); JArm., DSS ha;t]Di (Dalman Wb.
106b; Beyer Arm. Texte 558); Syr. tad<aµ and teµdaµ grass (Brockelmann Lexicon 816b;
Brockelmann Grundriss 1: 277); Bauer-Leander BArm. 228h: det. aa;t]Di grass; yDi aa;t]diB]
ar;b; in the tender grass of the field Da 412.20; REB: among the lush grass. †
*rb't;D:] Persian loanword, (→ tD;); < daµtabara (Hinz Altiranisches Sprachgut 83) someone
versed in the law, lawyer; EmpArm. rbtad (Junker Frahang 13: 3); cuneiform daµtabarra
lawyer (AHw. 165b); for the sbst. see also Ellenbogen 62, and the more extensive older
literature in KBL; see also S. Shaked in Medioiranica (1993), 149, mentioned by Sokoloff,
DSD 7 (2000) 88; JArm. ar;b]t‰;D] (Dalman Wb. 106b): pl. det. aY:r'b]t;D] judge Da 32f. †
h interchanges with → a.
h} h': the same in Heb.; Asshur Ostracon (Donner-R. Inschriften 233: 12, 19; cf. 2: p. 285, 286;
see also Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 960, s.v. s\d<); JArm. only in Targum; DSS (Dalman Wb
. 106b; Gramm. 224; Beyer Arm. Texte 558); Syr. haµ< (rare, see Brockelmann Lexicon 169a);
treated as Heb., Bauer-Leander BArm. 253 g-j, 348 d-g: interrogative particle Da 226; 314 aD;x]h'
is it true? (→ ad;x], cf. Asshur Ostracon 12 aylm ynh adxh hla are these words true?); 621;
al;h} corresponding to Latin nonne. Da 324 427 613. †
ah;: Heb. ahe; OArm., Zendjirli, Bar Rekkub (Donner-R. Inschriften 216: 17f) h< byt klmw lhm
look, they are in possession of the house of Kilamu; EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.;
Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Driver Arm. Docs.; Saqqara; cf. Leander §64, p. 128); Palm. (Rosenthal
Palm. 83; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 62, s.v. ahII; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 267, s.v. h<2);
JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 107a; Beyer Arm. Texte 558); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 48a); Sam. (
Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 4a); Syr. (Brockel-mann Lexicon 169a); Mnd. ha (Drower-Macuch
Dictionary 113a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 81); NeoSyr. (Maclean Dictionary 71a);
Bauer-Leander BArm. 266 c and d: interjection, look!, see! Da 325. †
ahe: interjection JArm. yhe (Dalman Wb. 111b; Levy 1: 463a; but see now Sokoloff, DSD 7
(2000), 88): instead of ydik]Aahe Da 243 probably read yDi Jahe (= Jyhe) just as, just as iron does
not mix with clay, see e.g. Bauer-Leander BArm. 264w; cf. OArm., Sefire yz ûya (Donner-R.
Inschriften 222 A: 35), and yz hkya ah (Donner-R. Inschriften 222 A: 37; Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 11, s.v. ûya); EmpArm.; Sogd.; EgArm. yz ûya (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar 37;
Behistum 52; Saqqara; Leander 118c); Pehl. (Junker Frahang 25: 4; Herzfeld Paikuli 60–62;
Jean-H. Dictionnaire s.v. ûya; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 45); Armazi yz ûyh (Donner-R.
Inschriften 276: 9); Palm. yd ûyh (Rosenthal Palm. 87; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 64;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 278); JArm. yDi Jyhe/ae (Dalman Wb. 15b, 112a); DSS (Beyer
Arm. Texte 561, under hkyh heµkaµ); Tg. J yhe, Jyhe, J ah; (Dalman Gramm. 220, 226f); Sam.
yd ûh (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 4a); CPArm. hyk de (Schulthess Lex. 50a); Syr. <a(y)k de (Nöldeke
Syr. Gramm. §364 B); NeoSyr. (Maclean Dictionary 10a) <yk d; NeoArm. ehÉt (Spitaler 122b;
Bergsträsser Gloss. 47); ûya Dura 19: 3; Mnd. aiak (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 14a; Nöldeke
Mand. Gramm. 209, 453f); see Heb. Jyae, Jyhe; Bauer-Leander BArm. 264w :: BDB. †
*rb'D;h:' etymology and meaning are uncertain; perhaps a Persian loanword < hadabaµra (Hinz
Altiranisches Sprachgut 109); DSS Beyer Arm. Texte 559; cf. Montgomery 216f; Ellenbogen
64: pl. det. aY:r'b;D]h', cstr. yreb]D‰;h', sf. yr'b]D‰;h', yhi/rb]D‰;h': high-ranking royal official (so KBL
and Beyer loc. cit.); somewhat differently Plöger KAT xviii: 58, 161: pl. state counsellors Da 3
24.27 433 68.
†
*µD;h:' JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 109a; Beyer Arm. Texte 559) and Syr. haddaµmaµ< (Brockelmann
Lexicon 172a) piece, limb; Mnd. handama (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 124b; see Nöldeke
Mand. Gramm. 51); denominative in JArm. (Dalman Wb. 109a), and Syr. (Brockelmann
Lexicon 172a), pa. to smash to pieces, dismember; > Arb. hadama to destroy; Persian loanword
(h)andaµma member (P. de Lagarde Gesammelte Abhandlungen (Leipzig, 1868), 3894; Hinz
Altiranisches Sprachgut 109); DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 559; cf. Ellenbogen 65, with reference to
Armenian andam; Hübschmann 98): pl. ÷ymiD;h' limb, piece: dBe[} t]hi ÷ymiD;h' to be dissected, be
hacked to pieces Da 25 329, an oriental form of punishment which causes death by
dismembering; comparable to the practice of quartering in Europe in the Middle Ages, e.g.
Zwingli (see R. Pfister Kirchengeschichte der Schweiz 2 (1974): 65; M. Haas Huldrych Zwingli
und seine Zeit (1969), 278); there are different renderings in Sept. and Theodotion: Da 25 Sept.,
paradeigmatisqhvsesqe you will be placed in the stocks; Theodotion, ehJ/" ajpwvleian e[sesqe
; Da 329 in Sept. and Theodotion = 396: Sept. diamelisqhvsetai who will be hacked to pieces;
Theodotion, ehJ/" ajpwvleian e[sontai; on Sept. for Da 396 cf. especially mevlh poiei`n 2
Maccabees 116; on this question see Montgomery Daniel 146, and Curt Kuhl Die drei Männer
im Feuer: Daniel Kap. 3 und seine Zusätze (BZAW 55 (1930), 496). †
rdh: the same in Heb.; JArm. to stand out (Dalman Wb. 109b, s.v. rdh II); Syr. (Brockelmann
Lexicon 172b); denominative from → rd'h}, Bauer-Leander BArm. 273g.
pa: pf. 2nd. sg. T;r]D‰'h', rd. treD]h'; pt. rD'h'm] Bauer-Leander BArm. 133g: to glorify, parallel
with jB'v' Da 431.34 523. †

Der. *rd'h}.
*rd'h:} rdh; Heb. rd;h;, rd,h,; EmpArm., EgArm. (Ah\iqar 108; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 63;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 270); JArm. ar;d]h', DSS (Dalman Wb. 109b; Beyer Arm. Texte
559); Syr. hedra< (Brockelmann Lexicon 172a); Mnd. hidra (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 141b;
Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 326); Bauer-Leander BArm. 185r: det. a/hr;d]h', sf. yrid]h': majesty Da
427.33 (on vs. 33 cf. Montgomery Daniel 246; BHS; and Vogt Lexicon 46b under 1rd'h}*) 518. †
Der. rdh.
aWh: the same in Heb.; OArm. h< (Zendjirli and Sefire, cf. Degen. Altaram Gr. §35); EmpArm.,
EgArm. hw (Leander §11); Nab. hw and hw<; Palm., Hatra, JArm. inscr. hw (Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 6l; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 264); JArm., DSS (Dalman Gramm. 106;
Beyer Arm. Texte 559); CPArm. (Schulthess Gramm. §56); Syr. (Nöldeke Syr. Gramm. §63);
Mnd. hu (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 133a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 86); NeoArm. huµ
(Bergsträsser Gloss. 32); NeoSyr. (Maclean Dictionary 72b; Brockelmann Grundriss 1: 304);
Bauer-Leander BArm. 70m: personal pronoun he Da 221-724 (11 times), Ezr 58 (or rather a
demonstrative pronoun meaning this); demonstrative, this Da 232 (:: Bauer-Leander BArm.
268e); personal pron. emphasising the subject 617; aWhAhT]nÒa' 238 419 513; as copula
(Bauer-Leander BArm. 267d) 228.47 315; 611 rd. aw:h} (→ I and II ûrb); → fem. ayhi, pl. ÷WNai, ÷yNIai
and ÷/Mhi.
hwh: Heb. hyh, II hwh; ywh; OArm., Zendjirli (Donner-R. Inschriften 215: 2, 5); Sefire
(Donner-R. Inschriften 222 A: 25, 32; 223 A: 4, 6; 224: 22, 24); Tell Fekherye 12: impf./jussive
+ l (lhwy); on this see p. 58f, and Kaufman 124–126; EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.;
Driver Arm. Docs.; Behistun; Ah\iqar; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Saqqara; Hermopolis); Samaria;
Carpentras; Pehl. (Junker Frahang 22: 2 etc.; Herzfeld Paikuli); Armazi (Donner-R. Inschriften
276: 9); cf. Leander 85e and f; Nab. rarely, usually awh; Palm., Hatra, JArm. inscr. (Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 63; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 271); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 110a: aw:h};
Beyer Arm. Texte 560); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 49b); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 173a); Mnd.
HUA (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 133f; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm., passim); also haf.
(Baumgartner ZAW 45 (1927), 112ff = Umwelt 100ff).
pe: pf. hw:h} Da 426 713, aw:h} 519 64.11 (cj. instead of aWh).15 Ezr 511; 3rd. fem. tw"h} Da 235, tw:h}
719 Ezr 424 55 (Bauer-Leander BArm. 154k, l :: Torrey Notes 262f); 2nd. masc. t;yÒw"h;} lst. sg.
tywEh}; 3rd. pl. /wh}.
impf. hwEhÔl, Da 422, awEhÔl, 220.28f.41.45 318 529 63 Ezr 412f 58 69 723.26 (instead of writing y/a/hwhy,
Baumgartner ZAW 45 (1927), 124f = Umwelt 112f; Rowley Aramaic of the OT 92f;
Bauer-Leander BArm. 152d; Rosenthal Arm. Forsch. 173f); 3rd. fem. hwEhÔT, Da 241f, awEhÔT, 240 4
24 723 Ezr 68, pl. masc. ÷/hÔl, Da 243 62f.27 Ezr 620 725, fem. ÷y:wÒh,l, Da 517, Or. lihweµ etc.
impv. /wh} Ezr 66 and /whÔ 422 (Bauer-Leander BArm. 153i): to be.
—1. to happen Da 228f.45.
—2. to exist Da 723, ¹x'q] to arise; with l[' Ezr 723; with l] to become Da 235; with ð] to become
like 235, to turn out to be, be granted that; with l] 424, to belong; with l] 517 meaning to keep for
oneself.
—3. to be, with µ[i Da 422; with B] 241 62; with l[' Ezr 420 55; as copula Da 240.42 41 529 63 719
Ezr 66.
—4. with pt. (see H. Rosén, JSS 6 (1961) 183–203); passive pt., as an expression of the passive
(Bauer-Leander BArm. 296a and b), Da 220.43 318 Ezr 412f 58.11 68f 726; with active pt., as an
expression of the future Da 243 63; or of the past 519 64f.11 (instead of aWh), 713 Ezr 424
(Bauer-Leander BArm. 292i; 293p and q); tywEh} / t;yÒw"h} hz«h; Da 231.34 47.10 72.4.6.7–9.11.21. †
ayhi: the same in Heb.; OArm., ah Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften 224: 12), see Beyer Arm. Texte
560; EmpArm., yh EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap; Hermopolis; Saqqara); see
also Degen-Müller-Röllig Neue Ephemeris 3 (1978), p. 34; Nab., Palm., JArm. inscr. (Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 61; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 264); CPArm. hy (Schulthess Lex. 49a); Syr.
(Brockelmann Lexicon 174b); Mnd. h< (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 151b; Nöldeke Mand.
Gramm. 86); ayh JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 112a; Beyer Arm. Texte 560); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim
Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 450); Bauer-Leander BArm. 70m: personal pronoun fem. (masc.
→ aWh), she Da 244 421 77; as copula (Bauer-Leander BArm. 267d) Da 29.20 427 Ezr 615. †
*lk'yhe: Heb. lk;yhe, loanword from Akk. ekallu, and from Sumerian e-gal (Kauf-man 27);
EmpArm., EgArm. (only Ah\iqar) alkyh; Palm. and Hatra also alkh; JArm. inscr. (Rosenthal
Palm174; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 64; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 278); lkyh JArm., DSS
(Dalman Wb. 112b; Beyer Arm. Texte 562); Mnd. (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 143b), and
NeoSyr. alkyh (Maclean Dictionary 75b); Syr. haykelaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 174b); > Arb.
haikal (Fraenkel 274); > NeoArm. haikla altar, sacred area; Bergsträsser Gloss. 32): the same in
cstr., det. al;k]yhe, sf. ylik]yhe, Hlek]yhe.
—1. palace (as in EgArm., but only in Ah\iqar): Da 41.26 55 619 Ezr 414.
—2. temple (so also in Palmyrene and at Hatra): the temple in Jerusalem Da 52f Ezr 514f 65; the
pagan temple in Babylon 514. †
*Jh: it should be noted —a) that the root Jwh *haµk can be taken as one of the type like *quµm and
*sŒéÆm, so Bauer-Leander BArm. 143a; —b) that it is found as a special form of the vb. Jlh,
from which it has to be separated but to which it is close in mean-ing; for this see especially
Bauer-Leander BArm. 144b; and see further Vogt Lexicon 30f; Beyer Arm. Texte 562; and
Rosen-thal Gramm. §169; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 65; and KBL (with bibliography), where both
verbs are treated together under Jlh.
OArm., Sefire: impf. 1st. sing. <hk (Donner-R. Inschriften 224: 6); 3rd. pl. masc. yhkn (224: 5);
3rd. pl. fem. yhkn (222 A: 24); on this see Degen Altaram. Gramm. §64 (p. 79); EgArm.
(Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Cowley Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar; Saqqara; Leander 61b and d); Nab., Palm.,
JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 65, s.v. ûlhI; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 280); JArm.
(Dalman Wb. 112b); DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 562); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Literary and Oral
Tradition 2: 452); Eth. hoµka (Dillmann 11f).
pe: impf. Jh;y;Ò inf. Jh;m]; pf. and impv. is supplied by → lza.
—1. to go Ezr 713, with l] to go after and µ[i to go with.

—2. to reach (similarly with l]) Ezr 55 (the report reached Darius) Ezr 65 (the temple vessels
returned to the Jerusalem temple). †
Jlh: the same in Heb.; EmpArm., EgArm. (Ah\iqar); Nab., Palm. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 65),
Taxila (Donner-R. Inschriften 273: 10); JArm., see also Beyer Arm. Texte 562; Sam. (Ben
H\ayyim Gloss. 4a); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 51a); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 176b);
NeoArm. (Spitaler 184a); Mnd. (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 148b); note that here, according to
Cantineau Nab. 2: 86b, the vb. means “to perish, die”, (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 65), which would
correspond to Arb. halaka (Wehr-Cowan 1031b), which would suggest that it can be taken as
belonging to the same root; see also *Jh.
pa: pt. JLeh'm], pl. cj. instead of haf. ÷ykiL]h'm] Da 325 434: to walk about Da 426, cj. 325 434. †
haf: pt. pl. ÷ykil]h]m', to be read as pa. (see above, Or. variant; Bauer-Leander BArm. 274n)
÷ykiL]h'm] Da 325 434. †
Der. Jl;h}.
Jl;h:} loanword from Akk. ilku (Ellenbogen 69; Kaufman 58; AHw. 371a; CAD I/J: 73); >
Persian haräka property tax; > JArm. ak;l;h} a type of tax (Dalman Wb. 114a) and agÉr;K] a poll
tax (the vocalisation varies, see Levy 2: 395f, and Dalman Wb. 207a); for these two forms see
Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 88; > Arb. hÉaraµj Bodensteuer (cf. Fraenkel 283; Lexikon der arab.
Welt (1972), 414 :: Hwb. Islam 301b < Byzantine Greek corhgiva); EgArm. (Driver Arm. Docs.
8: 5), Delaporte 73: 3; st. emph. hlk< (Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 283, s.v. hlk4); see also
Streck ZA 18: 198; Herzfeld 246f; Henning Orientalia 4 (1935), 291f; BArm. field-tax, or
produce-tax Ezr 413.20 724, always together with → hD;mi/hD;nÒmi and → /lB] (cf. EgArm, see
Driver Arm. Docs., fragment 8: 1, 2 hdnmw û[lh]). †
/Mhi Ezra, and ÷/Mhi Daniel µhe, hM;he; OArm. µh Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften 222 B: 6) and
wmh Zakir (Donner-R. Inschriften 202 A: 9); EmpArm. EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling
Arm. Pap.; Saqqara) Samaria, and Asshur Ostracon (Donner-R. Inschriften 233: 4, 7, 8, 16) wmh
(cf. Leander §11b, p. 25); µwh Nerab (?, see Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 88); Nab. µh; Palm. ÷nh
Hatra: hnw; JArm. inscr. hmwn (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 61, s.v. ahI; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 264); JArm. (÷)/Mhi (? see Sokoloff loc. cit.) and ÷WNhi/ai (Dalman Wb. 114b; Beyer
Arm. Texte 562, 563); CPArm. (Schulthess Gramm. §56), and Syr. (Nöldeke Syr. Gramm. §63:
1) hennoµn; Mnd. hinum, and hinin, hin<n (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 146b; 147a; Nöldeke
Mand. Gramm. 86); NeoArm. hinn(un) (Spitaler 50ff); Bauer-Leander BArm. 70; Baumgartner
ZAW 45 (1927), 104f = Umwelt 92f: personal pronoun masc. pl., they; nominative (as copula)
Ezr 511 (Bauer-Leander BArm. 268d); accusative (EgArm., Cowley Arm. Pap. 18: 3) 410.23 55.12.
14f 717 Da 234f 322; → ÷WNai.
†
*ûnwmh, det. ak;nIwm]h‰', Or. variant akynwmh, akwnmh, akynmh and aknymh, Q ak;ynIm]h', also h'
ak;ynIm} and ak;ynImÕh;, Or. hamuµnika; Bauer-Leander BArm. 209n, 210p, Persian loanword < New
Persian hamyaµnak (Hinz Altiranisches Sprachgut 114; Ellenbogen 70) small belt; JArm.
ak;ynIm]h', and similarly ak;ynIm], aq;y:nÒmu (Dalman Wb. 115a; 241b) neckband, armband (Krauss 2:
343f); Syr. hamnéÆka chain; > Greek maniavkh", miniavkion and minikion Dura 12: 3, 10, p. 370
neckband and armband; diminutive from Middle Persian ha¬myaµn belt; > JArm. (Dalman Wb.
114b); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 177b) and Mnd. (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 145b) an:y:m]hi;
MHeb. ÷y:m]hi belt; ejmian for Heb. fnEb]a' Josephus. Arch. iii, 7: 2; > Arb. himyaµn (Belot 905b);
Sept. uv maniavkh" < Persian golden neck ornament; again see Hinz Altiranisches Sprachgut
160; and Beyer Arm. Texte 563; BArm. necklace raW:x'Al[' ab;h} d'Aydi ak;nI/m]h' (vbl) Da 57.16
.29, a golden necklace as a sign of respect (Reicke-Rost Hw. 628; the same in Egypt, Pritchard
Pictures 133, 395; Erman-Ranke 132f; G.T. Martin The Memphite Tomb of Horemheb
(Egyptian Exploration Society: 55th Excavation Memoir; London, 1989), scene 72, pp. 87–92,
and plates 99–108 (pp. 106–107), reference given in a personal letter by courtesy of Dr. M.J.
Raven of Leiden; Montgomery Daniel 253f, 256). †
÷he: the same in Heb. µai; OArm., Zendjirli (Donner-R. Inschriften 214: 29); Sefire (222; 223;
224; Degen Altaram. Gramm. §92); EmpArm., Nerab (Donner-R. Inschriften 225: 11); EgArm.
(Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Driver Arm. Docs.; Hermopolis; Ah\iqar 124; Saqqara;
Behistun 58); Samaria, on one occasion ÷yh (Degen-Müller-Röllig Neue Ephemeris 3 (1978),
48 and 53); ÷h Pehl. (Junker Frahang 25: 3, see Schaeder ZDMG 96 (1942), 1ff); Nab., Palm.,
JArm. inscr., Hatra <yn (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 66; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 285 s.v. hn3);
JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 115b, ÷he; Beyer Arm. Texte 563; cf. KBL ÷yhi and ÷yhe rarely); Mnd.
hin (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 146a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 208); ÷a Palm., JArm. (Dalman
Wb. 24b); ÷yai Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 2a); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 12b) and Syr.
(Brockelmann Lexicon 27b) ÷ae: conj. Bauer-Leander BArm. §111.
—1. if Da 26 315.17 (Bauer-Leander BArm. 265b :: others, who take it as an interjection, cf.
Driver Arm. Docs. 12: 3; for ÷he meaning if see also Plöger KAT xviii: 58, 60) 516 Ezr 413.16 517;
al; ÷he if not Da 25 315b, al; … ÷he 29, without a finite vb. 318, without any concluding sentence
315a (Bauer-Leander BArm. 366f), ÷he … ÷he … ÷he whether … or … or Ezr 726 (cf. Palm.).
—2. in a dependent question (→ Heb. µai 6): whether Da 424 Ezr 517b; → II ÷hel;. †
*hq;zÉnÒh,' cstr. tq'zÉnÒh', < inf. haf. qzn (Bauer-Leander BArm. 246n and q; Baumgartner ZAW 45
(1927), 115f = Umwelt 103f; cf. Beyer Arm. Texte 635 s.v. qzn: damage, injury Ezr 422. †
aD;x]h:' Da 3 14 → hd;x].
*rhor]h:' rrh: MHeb. rWhr]hi (impure) fan-tasy; JArm. ar;Whr]h' (Dalman Wb. 119a); Syr.
harhaµraµ< mirage (Brockelmann Lexicon 183a); Mnd. hrara deception, illusion
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 152b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 642); Bauer-Leander BArm. 192i:
pl. ÷yrihor]h' appearances, dream-fantasies Da 42 (parallel with µl,je). †
*rrh: Ug. hrr parallel with h\md dmj (KTU 1, 12:i:38f, corresponding to Gibson Canaanite
Myths and Legends2 p. 134b; Gordon Textbook §19: 797; Aistleitner Wb. 856); Arb. harra to
yap (of a dog), detest; Syr. pe. to quarrel, harhar (palp.) to excite, which are the meanings given
in Brockelmann Lexicon 182b, 183a :: Beyer Arm. Texte 564, to get worked up; MHeb. palp. to
think over, brood, lose oneself in impure thoughts; JArm. palp. to brood (Dalman Wb. 119a) ::
Beyer loc. cit. to have sinful thoughts; KBL, JArm., MHeb., to brood, indulge in fantasies.
Der. *rhor]h'.
hl;h;B]t]h:i inf. hitpe., cf. Beyer Arm. Texte 529 s.v. lhb; Bauer-Leander BArm. 246o;
Baumgartner ZAW 45 (1927), 115f = Umwelt 103f: haste, with B] hastily (Bauer-Leander BArm.
302i) Da 225 324 620. †
*WbD;n"t]h:i bdn, originally inf. hitpa.; Bauer-Leander BArm. 245n, 302i; cf. Beyer Arm. Texte
633 s.v. bdn; Baumgartner ZAW 45, (1927), 115 = Umwelt 103: cstr. tWbD;n"t]hi: gift, donation
Ezr 716. †
w: 1. Proto-Semitic initial w > y in rgy, [dy (?), bhy, *¹sy, dqy, *jr'yÒ, *hk;r]y", bty and ryTiy," but
not → wÒ.
—2. BArm. w corresponds to Heb. y in hwh, to Akk. m/w in ÷w:GÒr]a', wyz, hW:K' (?) and yli/Wlw:n" (?).
wÒ, w: behaves like Heb. wÒ, before shewa W or wi (Bauer-Leander BArm. 21t, 36a-c, 262b-k); Arm.
(Jean-H. Dictionnaire 69); OArm. (Zakir, Zendjirli, Sefire), cf. Degen Altaram. Gramm. §46a;
EmpArm., Uruk u-ma-a< = uma, u = wa; Herzfeld Paikuli 272; on which see Beyer Arm. Texte
564; EgArm.; Nab., Palm., JArm. (Beyer Arm. Texte. 564f); CPArm., Syr., Mnd.
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 155a, with reference to Nöldeke Mand. Gramm.): conjunction,
and (Bauer-Leander BArm. §96).
As in Heb. it joins words and also clauses. When three or more elements are involved it is
placed either between them all Da 26.10 434 511.14.18 Ezr 69, or between the last two Da 237 321, or
irregularly 32.Ezr 49, or not at all Da 227 511b (Bauer-Leander BArm. 350a and b).
Particular uses include: a) and that Da 410 (:: Bauer-Leander BArm. 324h).20 Ezr 68f.
—b) intensifying: and also Da 629.
—c) adversative: but Da 26 36.18 44.15b.
—d) or Ezr 726 (Bauer-Leander BArm. 324j).

—e) explanatory: for Da 422 Ezr 515.
—f) continuous: then, so; often it is best not to render the word at all if following an impv., Da
24.9.24; following an impf. 27; following a pf. in narrative (= Heb. consecu-tive impf.) with pf.
Da 529 62.17, with impf. (Bauer-Leander BArm. 281m) 42, with pt. ÷yrim]a‰;wÒ … /n[} (→ hn[) 27.
—g) as an expression of purpose: with impf. Da 52; with pt. 213; with inf. (Bauer-Leander BArm.
301e) 216.18; cf. Vogt Lexicon 56a sub 9.
—h) two instances where the meaning is uncertain are —a) Da 71a, where there is some dispute
about the words Hveare ywEzÒj,wÒ HbeK]v]miAl['; possible suggestions are: —i. the words constitute a
continuation of the phrase hzÉj} µl,je which makes the meaning more complete, so Theodotion,
Vulgate, Pesh.; more recent interpreters include Montgomery Daniel 283; TOB (but see also
the appended note); NRSV; REB; —ii. the words constitute a separate phrase which must be
restored from 42 or 715, HNEluh} b'yÒ or alternatively HNEluj} d'yÒ; so e.g. ZüBi; Bentzen 48; BHS; cf.
also Plöger KAT xviii: 103; —iii. the words in question are an expansion from vs. 15, and as
such are to be deleted, so Plöger KAT xviii: 101, 103; cf. Sept.; —iv. one of the first two
suggestions seems to be preferable to the third; —v. on ÷yLimi vare Da 71 → vare 2.
—b) Da 720, in the sbst. ÷ynIyÒ['w,Ò delete wÒ following the Versions (see BHS); see also
Bauer-Leander BArm. 324i.
z: —1. in general it corresponds to Proto-Semitic z, Arb. z.

—2. for z corresponding to Proto-Semitic d_ cf. Arb. d_ > → d; > z only in loanwords, *hkz,
WkzÉ and n.m. hy:r]k'zÒ.
÷bz: EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Saqqara; Hermopolis; Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 71 s.v. ÷bzI); Pehl. (Junker Frahang 21: 16; also Herzfeld Paikuli 328; Nyberg
Pahlavi Documents from Avroman 3: 3, 7); Nab., Palm., Hatra, JArm. inscr. (Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 71; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 303); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 123b; Beyer
Arm. Texte 566f); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 53a); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 187a); Mnd. ZBN
(Drower-M. Dictionary 161b); NeoSyr. (Maclean 83a); NeoArm. (> Arb. zbn III); Arm. pe. to
buy, pa. to sell; see Heb. n.m. hn:ybizÒ (Arm. loanword, see Wagner 75]); < Akk. zibaµnéÆtu(m) (
AHw. 1523b; CAD Z: 99b) scale, balance; Late Babylonian also zéÆbaµnu (AHw. 1523b; cf.
Zimmern 16); Mnd. zabanita, pl. zbaniata (Drower-M. Dictionary 156b); for which see
Egyptian dbn weight (Erman-Grapow 5: 438); > El-Amarna ti-ba-an (AHw. 1354a).
pe: pt. ÷ynIb]z;: to buy, metaphorically an:D;[i Da 28 to try to gain time (:: tempus emere
Ephesians 516 = Colossians 45, Montgomery Daniel 151). †
*ryhiz:Ò *rhz: JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 124a; Beyer Arm. Texte 567); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex
54a) and Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 190a); MHeb. (Dalman Wb. 124a) ryhiz;É Mnd. adv.
zahraiit (Drower-M. Dictionary 157b) careful; sbst. zahruta care (Drower-M. Dictionary 157b;
for both see Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 201); Bauer-Leander BArm. 188h: pl. ÷yriyhiz:Ò cautious,
with hwh and inf., to beware of (Heb. rhz nif.) Ezr 422. †
*rhz: Heb. II rhz; EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap. 21: 6; Hermopolis 2: 17; Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 73; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 307); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 124b; Beyer
Arm. Texte 567); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 54a); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 190a, s.v. zhr II);
Mnd. ZHR I pe. and itp. to beware of, pa. and af. to warn (Drower-M. Dictionary 163a;
Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 229, 283).
Der. *ryhiz.Ò
dwz or rather dyz: Heb. = dyz; JArm. af. to behave maliciously, act wantonly (Jastrow 391a, s.v. dyz
); Syr. za<aµd, zaµ<aµd hot (Payne-Smith 1071); Mnd. zida anger, vengeance (Drower-M.
Dictionary 165b, Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 109).
haf: inf. hd;zÉh} (Bauer-Leander BArm. 147z): to act presumptuously (KBL) :: Beyer Arm.
Texte 568: to behave sinfully (see also the special translation of Vogt 57a) Da 520. †
÷wz: the same in Heb.; EmpArm. verb (Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 308, s.v. zwn ), EgArm.
1
(Cowley Arm. Pap.) and Nab. zwn food; Pehl. (Tang i-Sarwaµk inscription (see Altheim-Stiehl)
3: 5; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 308 s.v. zwn2); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 125b; Beyer
Arm. Texte 567f; and Vogt 37a); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 55a); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon
192b); Mnd. ZUN, ZWN (Drower-M. Dictionary 165a) to subsist; Sam. to graze.
hitpe: impf. ÷yzIT]y,I variant Pesh. and Or. Q ÷zÉT]yI (Bauer-Leander BArm. 145 n-q): to live
from, subsist on, with ÷mi Da 49. †
Der. ÷/zm;.
[wz: the same in Heb.; JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 126a; Beyer Arm. Texte 568); CPArm.
(Schulthess Lex. 55a); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 4b); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 193a); Mnd.
ZUA, ZUH, ZHA (Drower-M. Dictionary 164a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 254f); NeoArm.
pe: pt. pl. ÷y[ia} zÉ K, ÷y[iyÒz; Q (Bauer-Leander BArm. 51h and j): to tremble, with µd;qÕA÷mi in
front of Da 519 and 627, parallel with ljd. †
*wyzI: Heb. wzI < Akk. zéÆmu(m) (AHw. 1528; CAD Z: 119b) mostly pl., appearance, face, facial
features, cf. Kaufman 113; JArm. wyzI, DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 568); also fem. at;wÒyzI (Dalman
Wb. 127a; but only in Late Jewish Literary Arm. according to Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 88);
Sam. also byz (Ben H\ayyim Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 545); Syr. zéÆwaµ< (Brockelmann
Lexicon 195a); Mnd. ziu, ziua (Drower-M. Dictionary 166; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 175); adj.,
Syr. zéÆwaµyaµ< bright; Pehl. (Junker Frahang 12: 4; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 75; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 318) ÷wyz respected: sf. ywIz,I variant ywIyzI, HwEyzI; pl. sf. yw"yzI, JyIw"yzI K and Jw:yzI Q
(Bauer-Leander BArm. 77o), yhi/yzI: radiance, brightness Da 231, Sept., Theodotion hJ provsoyi"
, 433, Sept. vs. 36 hJ dovxa radiance as a characteristic of the king, cf. Akk. melammu (<
Sumerian) the terrifying brightness of the (masks of) gods and kings (AHw. 643a and b; CAD
M/2: 9b); pl. (Bauer-Leander BArm. 305e) fresh complexion (JArm., MHeb.); hnv with l[ pe.
or itpa. parallel with lhb meaning to become pale with fear, cf. Heb. I rwj Is 2922 sbj. µynIP;;
Da 56 Sept. hJ d{rasi", Theodotion hJ morfhv, 59 Theodotion hJ morfhv .10.728 hJ e{xi". †
*hkz: the same in Heb., see below under 1 and 2 (Beyer Arm. Texte 569).
—1. vb.: —a) hkz Uruk 10 za-ki-it = zakit I won (KBL), or I was victorious (Beyer Arm. Texte
569; cf. Koopmans 2: 184; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 76 to be clean; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary
320, s.v. zky1); akz JArm. (Dalman Wb. 128a); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex 56a: zky); Syr.
(Brockelmann Lexicon 195b) to be innocent; Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 4b); NeoArm.
(Bergsträsser Gloss. 105) zh\y, and NeoSyr. zk< to be triumphant (Maclean 86a); Mnd.
(Drower-M. Dictionary 168) pe. to be innocent, be triumphant; pa. to acquit, grant victory (see
Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 261).
—b) akd JArm. (Dalman Wb. 97b); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex 45b); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon
152b); Mnd. (Drower-M. Dictionary 109b); NeoSyr. to be clean (Maclean 65b).
—2. adj.: —a) Uruk 10 za-ka-a-a = zakkaµy; EgArm. ykz (Ah\iqar 46; Leander 77f; Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 76, s.v. ûzII clean, innocent; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 321 s.v. zky2); JArm.,
DSS yK'z,¾ so also Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 4b); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 56a); Syr.
(Brockelmann Lexicon 196a); Mnd. (Drower-M. Dictionary 158b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 44);
NeoSyr. innocent, triumphant (Maclean 86b).
—b) dky: EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.); Pehl. (Junker Frahang 26: 4); Palm., Hatra (Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 76, s.v. ûzII; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 321, s.v. zky2); JArm. (Dalman Wb.
98a); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 152b); Mnd. (Drower-M. Dictionary 99b) clean, guiltless.
—3. it will have to remain undecided whether hkz and akd were originally derived from one
and the same root (so HAL 258a, cf. also OSArb.), or whether they are to be treated as two
separate roots (so perhaps KBL 1071b; and perhaps also Beyer Arm. Texte 569).
Der. WkzÉ.
WkzÉ: hkz: —1. JArm. at;WkzÉ justice, law, good deed, act of salvation (Dalman Wb. 128b); for
JPArm. abs. wkz see Sokoloff Dictionary 176 > Arb. zakaµt purity, justice, alms, tax for charity,
cf. Hwb. Islam 821a; J. Horowitz, Jewish Proper Names and Derivatives in the Koran, HUCA
2 (1925), 206 (reprinted Hildesheim 1964: 62); Tg. instead of Heb. hq;d;x]; Syr. zaµkuµtaµ
uprightness, innocence (Brockelmann Lexicon 196a); Mnd. sg. zaku, emph. zakuta, pl. zakawata
(Drower-M. Dictionary 158f; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 163) innocence, purity, victory.
—2. we are dealing here with a loanword that has come either from Akkadian or from
Canaanite; for the Akkadian derivation see KBL; Vogt 57b; and Rosenthal Gramm. 16, 58; for
the Canaanite derivation see especially Bauer OLZ 29: 803; Kaufman 112; and subsequently
Beyer Arm. Texte 569; it would appear that the Canaanite derivation is probably the more likely
of the two; however it is only the Akkadian (zakuÆtu, AHw. 1507b) that supplies the special
meaning “exemption, liberation”.
—3. In BArm. a sbst. (Bauer-Leander BArm. 197g): innocence Da 623. †
hy:r]k'z:Ò n.m. Zechariah, the prophet Ezr 5 1 614 see Heb. s.v. 3 (HALOT 271b). †
÷mz: Heb., MHeb.; EmpArm., Asia Minor (Lidzbarski Ephemeris i, 325: 4; Jean-H. Dictionnaire
78 (?); Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 332 s.v. zmn1); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 130a; Beyer
Arm. Texte 569; Wagner 78); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 4b); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 199b),
and Mnd. ZMN (Drower-M. Dictionary 169) pa. to invite, assemble; denominative from ÷m'zÒ, cf.
BHeb.: to be fixed (of a time).
hitpe: pf. ÷WTnÒmi]zÒh,i Q ÷WTnÒmiD]zÒhi and ˜µ{iD'zÒhi (Bauer-Leander BArm. 32a); K hitpa. ÷WTnÒMiZ¾hi
(Bauer-Leander BArm. 111k; Rosenthal Palm. 56f), or haf. ÷WTnÒmizÒh': to come to an
understanding, agree, (with inf.) Da 29, so e.g. Gesenius-Buhl; ZüBi; similarly Vogt 57b; on
this see also Plöger KAT xviii: 46, who says that the meaning of the vb. corresponds to Heb.
d[y niphal, to agree :: KBL to come to a decision. †
÷m;zÒ Da 2 and ÷m'zÒ 712 (Bauer-Leander BArm. 220 o and p): Heb. ÷m;zÒ < Arm. (Wagner 77, 78).
16
A. The sbst. is attested in various dialects but there are questions about its origin.
—1. ÷mz: EmpArm., EgArm. (Saqqara); Pehl. (Junker Frahang 27: 3; Herzfeld Paikuli); Nab.
÷mz; JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 78; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 332, s.v. zmn2);
i
JArm. ÷m'zÒ, det. an:m]z , DSS (Dalman Wb. 130a; Beyer Arm. Texte 569); Sam. ÷wmyz (Ben H\ayyim
Gloss. 4b); NeoArm. zamoµna (Bergsträsser Gloss. 105; Spitaler Gloss. 96a; cf. Arb. zama/aµn).
—2. > ÷bz (Ruzûicûka 92f); Nab., Palm. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 72, s.v. ÷bzIII;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 305 s.v. zbn3); Sam. azbaón (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 4b); CPArm.
zabnaµ (Schulthess Gramm. §47: 2; Lex. 53b); Syr. zabnaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 187b);
NeoSyr. zaman and zbn<, > zoµnaµ (Maclean 87a; 83a) and NeoArm. zebna (Bergsträsser Gloss.
104; Spitaler 69a); Mnd. zibnaµ (Drower-M. Dictionary 165a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 152); it
may be a loanword, but there is some disagreement about its origin, on which see, as well as
KBL, also Wagner 77–78 (with bibliography), and THAT 2: 375; —a) it may have come either
from Akkadian simaµnu(m) (AHw. 1044b; CAD S: 268; for s > z cf. Brockelmann Grundriss i:
170d) time, a precise point in time; or —b) from Old Persian jðamaµna, and Middle Persian zamaµn
. For the Akkadian see e.g. Zimmern 63; Schaeder ZDMG 95 (1941), 269f; Brockelmann
Lexicon 187b; Bauer-Leander BArm. 33h; Kaufman 91f; for the Persian see Nyberg 2: 251f;
Widengren Iranisch-Semitische Kulturbegebnung 106; Telegdi Essai 242.
B. Within BArm. the sbst. occurs thus: det. an:m]z,I pl. ÷ynIm]z,I det. aY:n"m]zI (Bauer-Leander BArm.
218e, 219f); masc.
—1. a fixed time Da 712.22, pl. 221 (parallel with ÷D;[i), period of grace, respite 216; moment,
HBe an:m]zI at that time Ezr 53 Da 38; at the same time 433; ydik] ˜zIAHBe as soon as 37; sacred
occasion, feast 725 (÷ynIm]zI hy:n:v]h'l] td;w)Ò , on which see Plöger KAT xviii: 103, who shows that
the expression “dates and law” are to be understood differently according to the explanation on
p. 105, where he states that what is meant are the dates in the cultic calendar; on this see also
Lebram VT 25 (1975), 745: “We must not think that ‘times and law’ refers literally to the
Torah of Moses, but rather to the regular timings of the cosmos, which were of fundamental
importance for the effective implementation of cultic practices”; for more details cf. Lebram
91f.
—2. time, turn (JArm., Syr., Heb. t[e Ne 928 µyTi[ t/Br'), ht;l;T] ÷ynIm]zI three times Da 611.14;
cf. ÷ynIm]zI at times Test. Levi (RB 63, (1956), 391f, 4–6). †
Der. ÷mz.
*rmz: Heb. I rmz; Pehl. (Junker Frahang 19: 9f; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 78, s.v. rmzIII;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 332, s.v. zmr1); JArm. (Dalman Wb. 130a); Syr. (Brockelmann
Lexicon 199b); NeoSyr. (Maclean 87a), and Mnd. ZMR (Drower-M. Dictionary 169b; Nöldeke
Mand. Gramm. 221); CPArm.
Der. *rm;zÒ, *rM;z¾.
*rm;z:Ò rmz; JArm. (Dalman Wb. 130b, ar;m]zI); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 56b); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim
Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 490); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 200a); Mnd. zmara
(Drower-M. Dictionary 169a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 115); NeoSyr. (Maclean 87a);
Bauer-Leander BArm. 187d: det. ar;m;zÒ: stringed music, musical instruments Da 35.7.10.15. †
*rM;z:¾ rmz; JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 130b; Beyer Arm. Texte 569); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex.
56b); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 200a); Mnd. zamar (Drower-M. Dictionary 159b; Nöldeke
Mand. Gramm. 183); NeoSyr. (Maclean 87b); Bauer-Leander BArm. 191c: pl. det. aY:r'M;z¾:
musician, singer Ezr 724. †
*÷z¾: the same in Heb.; EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 78 s.v. ÷zII;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 333 s.v. zn1); JArm. (Dalman Wb. 130b); Syr. (Brockelmann
Lexicon 200b); Mnd. zan (Drower-M. Dictionary 159b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 97); NeoSyr.
(grammatically zna la mtah\ma “the infinitive mood”, Maclean 87b); loanword from Persian
zana (Hinz Altiranisches Sprachgut 276; Telegdi Essai 242f; Ellenbogen 71f); Bauer-Leander
BArm. 11y: pl. cstr. ynEz:Ò sort Da 35.7.10.15. †
*ry[ez:Ò *r[z; the same in Heb.; EmpArm., EgArm. (Ah\iqar 106, 114, 145; Behistun 24 for Akk.
mi-i-s\i; Cowley Arm. Pap.) Persepolis; Nab., Palm. also r[z (Palm. z>yr, emph. z>r<, pl. fem.
abs. z>wrn<); JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 79; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 337 s.v. z>r2
); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 131a; Beyer Arm. Texte 570); rw[z Sam. z>wr = zuµr (Ben H\ayyim
Gloss. 4b); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 57a); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 202b); NeoSyr.
(Maclean 88a), and NeoArm. iz>ur (Spitaler 76a; Bergsträsser Gloss. 104); Bauer-Leander
BArm. 190v and w; for bibliography cf. Littmann OLZ 31: 580; Blake 93; Kutscher Tarbiz
22/23: 17f; fem. hr;y[ezÒ small (adj. from ÷r,q,) Da 78. †
q[z: the same in Heb., and also q[x; EmpArm., EgArm. q[z (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 79; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 337); JArm., DSS q[ezÒ (Dalman Wb. 131b;
Beyer Arm. Texte 569f); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 202a), and NeoArm. ze>aq (Bergsträsser
Gloss. 103; Spitaler Gloss. 95).
pe: pf. q[izÒ, Or. ze>eq (Bauer-Leander BArm. 131 l) to shriek Da 621. †
*r[z: the same in Heb., and also r[x; EmpArm. (Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 337 s.v. z>r1);
JArm. r['zÒ, ry[ezÒ (Dalman Wb. 131b); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 57a); Syr. (Brockelmann
Lexicon 202b), and NeoSyr. (Maclean 88a).
Der. *ry[ez.Ò
¹qz: the same in Heb.; Pehl. (Junker Frahang, app. 3; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 79;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 208 s.v. gbh1); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 132a; Beyer Arm.
Texte 570); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 57b); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 204a); NeoSyr. zqp to
crucify (Maclean 88b); Mnd. ZQP (Drower-M. Dictionary 169f) to raise; so also Akk.
zaqaµpu(m) with the meanings to erect, plant, impale (AHw. 1512; CAD Z: 51a); ¹qz to hang
up, hang, crucify, also JArm. and Syr.; according to Zimmern 36, and subsequently KBL, “to
impale” is borrowed from Akkadian; on this question see also G. Kittel ZNW 35 (1936), 283ff;
on impaling in Akkadian literature as a punishment for the living, or alternatively as a shaming
of the dead, see e.g. J. Delitto Die peinliche Strafen der Bab. und Ass. (1913), 41ff; Meissner
Bab. und Ass. 1: 112 etc.; W. Eilers Die Gesetzesstele Chammurabis (AO 31, 3/4: 1932) p. 37,
together with note 4 on §153; cf. Driver-Miles Babylonian Laws 108f, 4963, under zaqaµpu; for
an illustration see Meissner loc. cit., illustrated on plate 66, see further Gressmann Bilder2 132,
141; Pritchard Pictures 362, 373; for further details on this question and bibliography cf. also
HAL 412a, HALOT 431, s.v. [qy; Herodotus iii: 159, ajnaskolopivzw, shows that among the
Persians impaling was also a means of execution.
pe: pt. passive ¹yqiz:Ò impaled, someone who has been impaled, Ezr 611; on this see e.g.
Gunneweg KAT xix/1: 105, 110; also ZüBi; TOB; but it remains uncertain, because in the MT
the pt. ¹yqizÒ precedes the impf. (jussive) expression yhil¿[} ajem]t]yI; this suggests that it should
be translated “a beam … on to which he will be fixed upright”; so Rudolph Esra und Nehemia
58; also Galling ATD 12: 197; so also NRSV and REB. †
lb,B;ruz:Ò n.m., Zerubbabel, Ezr 5 , see HAL 268b; HALOT 279b.

2
†
*[rz: the same in Heb; OArm., Sefire A: 36 (Donner-R. Inschriften 222); Tell Fekherye 19
(twice) impf. jussive lzr> “so let him sow!”, see p. 25 and 34; EmpArm., Bruno-Meissner
Pachtvertrag 3f; Pehl. (Junker Frahang 18: 11); JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 80;
CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 58a); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 4b); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon
207a); Mnd. ZRA (Drower-M. Dictionary 170a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 70); NeoSyr.
(Maclean 89b) and NeoArm. (Bergsträsser Gloss. 106); JArm. also [rd; for the occurrences of
the vb. in the other Semitic languages, and on z/d_r> as the base-form, see under [rz (HAL
270b; HALOT 282a), where there is also a bibliography.
Der. *[r'zÒ.
*[r'z;Ò Heb. [r'z²; OArm., Zendjirli (Donner-R. Inschriften 214: 20); Tell Fekherye 8 zr>h “his
descendants”, cf. p. 52; EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Driver Arm. Docs.; Saqqara;
Ah\iqar 85); Neµrab (Donner-R. Inschriften 225: 11); Teµmaµ (228 A: 12, 14, 22);
Bruno-Meissner Pachtvertrag 4; Pehl. (JA 241: 195); Asia Minor (Donner-R. Inschriften 259:
5); Palm., Hatra, JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 80; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 341);
JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 133b; Beyer Arm. Texte 570); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 58a); Sam. (
Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 4b); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 207a, sowing, descendants); Mnd. zira
(Drower-M. Dictionary 167b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 445); NeoSyr. (Maclean 89b); NeoArm.
(Bergsträsser Gloss. 106); Bauer-Leander BArm. 183e: the same in cstr.: seed, descendants, ˜zÒ
av;n:a} Da 243. †
j: like Heb. j, corresponds to Proto-Semitic h\ and hÉ; cf. Arb. h\ and hÉ (see Beyer Arm. Texte
415).
hl;Wbj}: lbj; JArm. al;WBji/lWBji (Dalman Wb. 134a); Bauer-Leander BArm. 189m: hurtful
act, crime Da 623. †
lbj: for → Heb. III lbj, where there are references to further Semitic languages; EmpArm.,
EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar); Teµmaµ (Donner-R. Inschriften 228 A: 13); Sard. (260 B
: 6); JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 81, s.v. lbjIII; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 344);
JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 135a; Beyer Arm. Texte 571); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 59a); Syr.
(Brockelmann Lexicon 211a); Mnd. HBL, HMBL (Drower-M. Dictionary 129b; Nöldeke Mand.
Gramm. 76); mostly pa.; JArm., Syr., Mnd. also pe.
pa: pf. pl. sf. ynIWàlB]j;' impv. pl. sf. yhiWàlB]j'; inf. hl;B;j'.
—1. to hurt, inflict injury Da 623.
—2. to destroy Da 420 (an:l;yai), Ezr 612 (the temple in Jerusalem). †
hitpa: impf. lB'j't]Ti, lB‰'j't]Ti to be destroyed, perish (Wkl]m') Da 244 627 714. †
Der. lb;j}, hl;Wbj}.
lb;j,} variant lb'j}: JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 135b; Beyer Arm. Texte 571); Syr. (Brockelmann
Lexicon 210b); Mnd. hbala, vari-ant hbila (Drower-M. Dictionary 128b); EmpArm.; Palm.,
JArm. inscr., Mcheta (Donner-R. Inschriften 276: 7; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 345 s.v. h\bl
4); Yemen (Rabin 26) damage, misfortune; see also EgArm. lbjm disloyalty (so Cowley Arm.
Pap. 27: 2, [11], [13]; cf. Leander 32d); or alternatively, blameworthiness, criminality (so
Grelot Documents 101, p. 402; see Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 344, s.v. h\bl1); in JArm.,
JArm. inscr., Palm., Syr. and Mnd. (hbal Drower-M. Dictionary 128b) the sbst. occurs also (or
only) as an interjection “alas!”; on this see Joüon, Syria 19 (1938), 186ff; see further Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 81; Rosenthal Palm. 83; Beyer Arm. Texte 571; see also Donner-R. Inschriften
276: 4; Bauer-Leander BArm. 187d: det. al;b;j}, masc.
—1. hurt Da 325 624.
—2. damage Ezr 422. †
*rbj: for → Heb. II rbj; Palm. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 81; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary
345); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 136a; Beyer Arm. Texte 511); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon
212b); Mnd. HBR (Drower-M. Dictionary 130a) to unite, be a companion.
Der. *rb'j}, *hr;b]j'.
*rb'j:} rbj; Heb. rbej;; OArm., Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften 222 A: 4, but the translation of
the sbst. [r]bj as comrade, ally is completely uncertain (it is marked with (?) in Donner-R.
Inschriften 2: pp. 239 and 244, and 3: p. 33a); on this see Noth Aufsätze zur biblischen Landes-
und Altertumskunde 2: 186; EmpArm., EgArm. (<)h\brwhy, Degen-Röllig-Müller Neue
Ephemeris 3 (1978), 48, text 4, line 2, textual error for wh\brwhy “and his comrades”; on which
see p. 51; Nab., Palm., JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 82 s.v. rbjII; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 346 s.v. h\br2); JArm.; for DSS see e.g. GenAp. xxi: 26 (Dalman Wb. 136a, ar;b]j';
Beyer Arm. Texte 571); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 59a); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 212a); Mnd.
habra (Drower-M. Dictionary 115b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 321); NeoSyr. (Maclean 91b);
Bauer-Leander BArm. 185v, 218b: pl. sf. yhi/r&b]j' companion Da 213.17f. †
*hr;b]j:' rbj, fem. of rb'j}; JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 136a, ar;bej} (rather JPArm. hrbj, det.
htrbj, see Sokoloff Dictionary 186; Beyer Arm. Texte 571, s.v. rbj); Syr. (Brockelmann
Lexicon 212a); Mnd. habarat + sf. (Drower-M. Dictionary 115b); EmpArm., Uruk 16 pl. fem.
hÉa-ba-ra-an (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 82; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 346 s.v. h\br2);
Bauer-Leander BArm. 241p and q: pl. sf. Ht'r;b]j' variant Ht;–; Bauer-Leander BArm. 79s:
female companion, pl. sf. Da 720 its companions, meaning the other horns (÷r,q, is fem.!); for
the meaning cf. JArm., CPArm. and Syr., → Heb. ['re, I tW[r] 2. †
yG¾j,' variant yG:j' (Bauer-Leander BArm. 196d): Heb. n.m., Haggai Ezr 5 1 614, see Heb. †
dj': Heb. dj'a,; OArm., Zendjirli, Sefire, masc. dj, fem. hdj (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 9 s.v. dja IV
; cf. Degen Altaram. Gramm. §43 I); Deir Alla; EmpArm., EgArm. masc. dj, fem. hdj
(Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Driver Arm. Docs.; Ah\iqar, Saqqara); Pehl. (Junker
Frahang 25: 18; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 9; cf. Leander §60); Nab., Palm. masc. dj, fem. hdj
(but occasionally dja Rosenthal Palm. 31); Hatra and JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 9;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 32 s.v. <h\d4); JArm., DSS (Dalman Gramm. 125; Beyer Arm.
Texte 572); CPArm. h\d = h\ad, fem. h\d< = h\edaµ (Schulthess Gramm. §124 A); Syr. h\ad, fem. h\e
daµ< (Nöldeke Syr. Gramm. §148); Mnd. had, fem. hda (Drower-M. Dictionary 116a; Nöldeke
Mand. Gramm. 346); NeoArm. ah\h\ad_ (Bergsträsser Gloss. 34; Spitaler Gramm. 114c; Gloss.
87a); NeoSyr. masc. h\a,µ fem. h\dhaµ (Maclean 92a); Bauer-Leander BArm. 249e: fem. hd;j}: one.
—a) as a numeral Da 416 63 75.16 cj. Ezr 64 instead of td'j} rd. dj.
—b) one and the same, only one (for Heb. see Song 69) Da 29.
—c) the indefinite article Da 231 618 Ezr 48 62.
—d) when counting years (Bauer-Leander BArm. 252y) hd;j} tn"v]Bi in the first year Da 71 Ezr 5
13 63.
—e) as a multiplicative, EgArm. ¹la dj (Cowley Arm. Pap. 30: 3) one thousand times (cf.
Leander §61k; JArm. ÷yrt dj, or alternatively ÷yreT] dj' l[' Tg.o Ex 223.6.8 double (Dalman
Wb. 137a; cf. Beyer Arm. Texte 572); CPArm. (Schulthess Gramm. §166: 1b); Syr. (Nöldeke
Syr, Gramm. §241); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 1a, as in JArm.) in Ex 223.6.8 ÷yrt hdj for
Heb. µyn dja, see Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 89; Mnd. (>)had trin (Drower-M. Dictionary 116a)
double (cf. Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 249); the same in NeoSyr. h\(d) btry (Maclean 92a); Mark 48
.20 ehJ/" … ejn … ejn (Blass-Debrunner Gramm. §248: 3); Brockelmann Grundriss 2: 281;
Bauer-Leander BArm. 323p; Montgomery Daniel 210f; h[;b]vi dj' seven times Da 319; fem.
hd;j} ð' together Da 235 (Pehl., Nyberg 2: 297); Bruno-Meissner Pachtvertrag 6, and EgArm.;
JArm. also hd;j} Ja' (Dalman Wb. 16b; a Syriac form, see Sokoloff loc. cit.); Syr. <akh\edaµ,
<akh\ad (Brockelmann Lexicon 17a); CPArm. hykh\d<; Heb. dj;a,K] (tjak, see Sokoloff loc. cit.).
†
*hdj: the same in Heb., < Arm. (Wagner 83) to rejoice; EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.;
Driver Arm. Docs.; Ah\iqar); Pehl. (Junker Frahang 19: 17; cf. Leander §40f, p. 63f); Hatra;
Asia Minor (Lidzbarski Ephemeris i, 325: 5; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 82; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 349 s.v. h\dy1); JArm. (Dalman Wb. 137a, adj); DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 573);
CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 60a); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 490) and Syr.
(Brockelmann Lexicon 215b) ydij}; Mnd. HDA (Drower-M. Dictionary 130b), pe. pf. hda
(Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 257); h\deya (Rosenthal Arm. Handbook 2: 2, 103b :: h\adi Maclean
92b); NeoArm. eh\d_i (Bergsträsser Gloss. 34).
Der. hw:d]j,.
*hdej:} Heb. hz²j;; Pehl. (Junker Frahang 10: 26 *h\dy<; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 82;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 349 s.v. h\dy5); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 137b; Beyer Arm.
Texte 573); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 60b), and Syr. h\adyaµ< (Brockelmann Lexicon 216a); Mnd.
hadia (Drower-M. Dictionary 116; Nöl-deke Mand. Gramm. 109, cf. 177); NeoSyr. (Maclean
92b) h\idyaµ; (Bauer-Leander BArm. 185p, cf. Ginsberg in Baumgartner Fschr. 71, together with
note 1): pl. sf. yhi/dj} (Bauer-Leander BArm. 305e :: dual Schulthess ZAW 22 (1902), 63f;
whether it is pl. or dual is left undecided by Rosenthal Gramm. §54): breast Da 232. †
hw:d]j:, *hdj; the same in Heb.; Arm. loanword (Wagner 84); JArm. at;wÒd]j,, at;Wdj}; DSS
(Dalman Wb. 137b; Beyer Arm. Texte 573); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 60a); Syr. (Brockelmann
Lexicon 216a), and NeoSyr. (Maclean 92b) h\aduµtaµ; Mnd. haduta, abs. hadua, cstr. haduat
(Drower-M. Dictionary 116a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 155); NeoArm. h\adyuµtha (Bergsträsser
Gloss. 34); Akk. hÉi/eduÆtu(m) (AHw. 344f; CAD Hå: 183a); Bauer-Leander BArm. 243b: joy
Ezr 616. †
*tdj: Heb. vdj pi. to renew (Jenni 232); Akk. edeµsûu(m) to be (become) new, D to renew (
AHw. 186f; CAD E: 30b); Nab., Palm., Hatra (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 83; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 350, s.v. h\dsû1); Syr. h\edet\ to be new; Palm. causative (Brockelmann Lexicon 217b);
JArm. (Dalman Wb. 138a); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 60b), and Syr. (like Akk.) to renew; Mnd.
HDT (Drower-M. Dictionary 132f) to be new, fresh; to renew, be renewed; Sam. d/tdj to
create (Perles OLZ 15 (1912), 218).
Der. td'j}.
td'j:} tdj; Heb. vd;j;; OArm., Tell Fekherye 11 h\ds new; EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.
; Kraeling Arm. Pap.); Palm., Hatra (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 83; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary
351 s.v. h\dsû3); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 138a; Beyer Arm. Texte 573); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex
. 60b); Sam. >aµdaót (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 4b); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 217b); Mnd. hadta
(Drower-M. Dictionary 116b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 107); NeoSyr. (Maclean 93b) and
NeoArm. (Bergsträsser Gloss. 34); Bauer-Leander BArm. 185q: new Ezr 64, cj., for MT td'j} rd.
with Sept. dj, see also BHS. †
hwj: Heb. I hwj; Arm. loanword (Wagner 91/92; Jenni 112ff).

—a) pa: EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Saqqara; Hermopolis; Ah\iqar; Driver Arm. Docs.); Hatra;
Pehl. (Herzfeld Paikuli 356/7; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 84 s.v. ywjII; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary
353 s.v. h\wy1); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 138a, s.v. awj; Beyer Arm. Texte 574); CPArm.
(Schulthess Lex. 61a); Sam., Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 220a s.v. h\wy); Mnd. (Drower-M.
Dictionary 134a); and probably also in Deir Alla (Hoftijzer-van der Kooy Deir Alla 7 (see pp.
179 and 191); cf. H. and M. Weippert ZDPV 98 (1982), 87, 103, <h\wkm “I will announce to
you”).
—b) haf./af.: EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Saqqara; Ah\iqar; Driver Arm. Docs.; Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 84; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 353); JArm., DSS (see above); Mnd.
(Drower-M. Dictionary 134b); Rosenthal Palm. 654; Driver Arm. Docs. viii 5; see also Jenni
112ff.
pa: impf. h/aWEj'a} and aW”ej'n,Ò variant hw”-, (Bauer-Leander BArm. 24 l), sf. ynIN"&WIj'y,Ò HN"WIj'y,Ò
(variant Hn:-, Bauer-Leander BArm. 81z !): something like to show, make known Da 24.24 57.211
with µd;qÕ. †
haf: impf. hw”ej} h'y,Ò hW”ej} h'nÒ (variant hw<- Bauer-Leander BArm. 24 l), pl. ÷/j} h'T], sf. ynIN"&wUj} h'T]
; impv. pl. sf. ynIwOàj} h'; inf. h/ay:w:j} h', Or. hah\waµ<aµ (Bauer-Leander BArm. 160t; otherwise af.,
Baumgartner ZAW 45 (1927), 106f = Umwelt 93f; Bauer-Leander BArm. 91h !), ty"w:j} a' Da 512
(Bauer-Leander BArm. 246n-q).

—1. to make known, see pa. (Bauer-Leander BArm. 274n. 372) Da 26f.9f.16 (Bauer-Leander
BArm. 301e :: Torrey Notes i: 257; cf. also Montgomery 156).27 332 512b.15 (parallel with [d'/h).
—2. to interpret (÷d;yjia}) 512a (Heb. dyGIhi Jdg 1414f). †
fwj or fyj: → Heb. fwj, (HAL 284a; HALOT 296b) with the meaning to sew; it is uncertain
whether it is to be taken as a primary vb., or whether as a denominative from the sbst. fWj
thread; EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap., thread; Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 84; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 353, s.v. h\wt\3); JArm. fwj to sew (Dalman Wb.
139a); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 220a); Mnd. HUT\ (Drower-M. Dictionary 135a); CPArm.
h\wt\ (Schulthess Lex. 61a); see now Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 89, who refers to Akk. hÉaÆt\u to
search, trace (CAD Hå: 161).
pe. or haf: impf. Wfyji&y," cf. Bauer-Leander BArm. 148e, variant Wfyjiy: (in form = ÷WfyjiyÒ ? ::
Vogt 75b, Wfjiy" i.e. yah\h\éHtuµ): Ezr 412, with obj. aY:viau “foundations”, so here the usual meaning
of the vb. does not suffice; it must either be taken as having a special sense, or the MT will
have to be replaced with a cj. emendation; see also KBL for both suggestions; the special sense
of the vb may be.
—a) fwj/fyj to join together, with Syr. h\aµt\, pa. h\ayyat\ and Arb. hÉayyat\a, > to repair
(Schulthess ZAW 22 (1902), 162; so also ZüBi; also Vogt 81, under fwj, and p. 75b, s.v. fjy,
on which see above); NRSV and REB, repairing the foundations.
—b) as a cognate of Arb. h\at\t\a to lay (Torrey Ezra Studies 187); but on the Arb. vb. see also
Wehr-Cowan 185b and Rudolph Esra und Nehemia 38.
—g) to mark out, stake out the foundations, so Galling ATD 12: 195.
—d) Sept. kai; qemelivou" aujth`" ajnu;ywsan and they raised its foundations.
Alternatively from Ezr 516 a conjectural emendation is suggested Wbyhiy,Ò pf. pe. passive, so e.g.
Rudolph Esra und Nehemia 38; cf. BHS; Gesenius-Buhl; KBL; Bauer-Leander BArm. 148e;
Gunneweg KAT xix/1: 82 does not translate the vb. since the meaning of it is uncertain (p. 84);
while we cannot work out the precise meaning the most plausible translation can be taken as to
repair.†
*rwj: Heb. I rwj; Palm. (Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 356); JArm. (Dalman Wb. 140b), and
Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 223a) rw"j} to be white.
Der. rW:ji.
rW:j:i rwj: basic form *h\uwwaµr > Arm. h\iwwaµr (Bauer-Leander BArm. 52n); —a. JArm. ar;W:ji,
DSS (Dalman Wb. 104b; Beyer Arm. Texte 575); CPArm. h\ewwaµr (Schulthess Gramm. §102;
and Lex. 61b, s.v. *h\wr); Syr. h\ewwaµr (Brockelmann Lexicon 223a); Mnd. hiwara, hawara
(Drower-M. Dictionary 142; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 122); NeoSyr. (Maclean 95a); NeoArm.
h\uwwaµr (Bergsträsser Gloss. 39; Spitaler 81a).
—b) EgArm., Driver Arm. Docs. vi: 3 yrwj = h\ewwaµraµy the associated adj., sg. abs. masc.
(Jean-H. Dictionnaire 84; Segert ArchOr 24 (1956), 386f; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 357):
white Da 79. †
hzj: the same in Heb.; < Arm. (Wagner 93–98, see especially 98) :: Ginsberg in Baumgartner
Fschr. 71; similarly Fuhs BN 2 (1967), 7–12: h\zh/h\dy “to see” is in Canaanite
(Hebrew/Phoenician/Ugaritic) and was originally native to Aramaic”; on the cuneiform
hÉa-za-a/a< see Beyer Arm. Texte 575; OArm., Zakir (Donner-R. Inschriften 202 A: 12); Sefire
pe. (Donner-R. Inschriften 222 A: 12, 13; itpe. line 28); cf. Degen Altaram. Gr. §62e; EmpArm.
, Neµrab (Donner-R. Inschriften 226: 5); Asshur Ostracon (233: 14(?), 17, 20); Pehl. ydj (Junker
Frahang 20: 4f; Herzfeld Paikuli 376–381); EgArm., Ostr. pe. (Donner-R. Inschriften 270 A:
2; for etpe. (?), see line 5; Cowley Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar; Driver Arm. Docs.; Saqqara; Hermopolis
; Behis-tun 54); Uruk 6f (ma-ahÉ-zi-ia-a< di-i< hÉa-za-uŒ>-ni-<); Pehl. (Junker Frahang 20: 14;
Herzfeld Paikuli 376; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 84); Palm., also in n.m. yzjlwb Stark Personal
Names 8b, 74b; Hatra, JArm. inscr. (Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 357 s.v. h\zy1); JArm., DSS
(Dalman Wb. 141a, azj; Beyer Arm. Texte 575); CPArm. to dream (Schulthess Lex. 61b); Sam.
(Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 4b); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 224a); Mnd. H\ZA (Drower-M. Dictionary
138f; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 257); NeoSyr. (Maclean 96b); Old Babylonian, Mari n.m.
Håa-a-zu-ila (Noth in Alt Fschr. 152 = Aufsätze zur biblischen Landes- und Altertumskunde 2:
233; see Huffmon 201, where the personal name is read as Håa-a-su-AN, and which could
perhaps be taken from another root such as *h\ws, corresponding to Heb. swj, HAL 286;
HALOT 298a).
pe: pf. a/hzÉj}, 2nd. masc. t;yÒz¾j,} Da 241 ht;-, 1st. sg. tyz«j}, pl. ÷Wtyz«j} (Or. -toµn, JArm.,
CPArm. and Syr.); pt. hz«j;, pl. ÷yIz¾j; (Bauer-Leander BArm. 233g); pt. passive hz«j}; inf. az«jÔm,.
—1. to see: to see something Da 325.27 55 Ezr 414, with yDi Da 245, with yDi d[' Da 234 74.9.11, see
also Beyer Arm. Texte 576, abs. Da 523; to see in visions and dreams Da 417.20, µl,j, Da 226 42.6.
15 71, with double accusative 241.43, abs. (pt. with hw:h}) 231.34 47.10 72.4.6f.9.11.13.21.
—2. to perceive Da 28.
—3. pt. passive proper, customary (JArm., DSS; Beyer Arm. Texte 576); MHeb. yWar;) Da 319.
†
Der. *WzjÔ, traditionally t/zj}.
*Wzj; or * Wzj&:e hzj; for JPArm. wz«j} see Sokoloff Dictionary 194; JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb.
141b; Beyer Arm. Texte 576); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 590); Syr.
(Brockelmann Lexicon 224a); Mnd. hizua (Drower-M. Dictionary 142b; Nöl-deke Mand.
Gramm. 102); NeoSyr. h\izwaµ (Maclean 96b); basic form *h\izw (Or.), Bauer-Leander BArm.
232p-s: det. aw:zÒj,, sf. ywIzÒj, Da 72, Hw"zÒj,, pl. cstr. ywEzÒj.,
—1. apparition, vision Da 72; vare ywEzÒj, Da 228 42.7.10 71.15; vision in the night Da 219 72 (or
alternatively Sept. kaqÆ u{pnou" nuktov" ; Theodotion ejn uvravmativ mou th`" nuktov" ;
Montgomery Daniel 286 prefers the pl. yw"zÒj,, following Sept., so also Plöger KAT xviii: 101) .7.
13; ymil]j, ywEzÒj, Da 46 rd. impv. yzIj} “look on!” so Montgomery Daniel 228 and subsequently KBL
, BHS (Theodotion = 49 a[kouson th;n d{rasin tou` ejnupnivou; NRSV: hear the dream that I
saw; REB: listen to what I saw in my dream) or yWEj'a} (Bauer-Leander BArm. 232r).
—2. appearance Da 720, cf. DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 576).
t/zj}: MT Da 4 . 8 17 referring to a tree: v. 8b: aY:m'v]li afem]yI HmeWrwÒ; v. 8c: ¹/sl] Hte/zj} w" a[‰;r]a'AlK;
; v. 17b is the same; v. 17c reads lK;l] instead of lK; ¹/sl]; and with many mss. as vs. 8; the
etymology of t/zj} is uncertain, and there is some controversy about the meaning of the word;
two opposing interpretations have been suggested.
—1. (traditional!): taking the etymology from hzj, the same as in Heb.; Hte/zj} Bauer-Leander
BArm. 185s; variant, see Vulgate, Pesh., BHS, HteWzj}; Montgomery Daniel 230f; JArm. at;Wzj}
appearance (Dalman Wb. 141b); DSS visibility (Beyer Arm. Texte 577); Syr. h\ezwaµ appearance
(Brockelmann Lexicon 224a); Mnd. (Drower-M. Dictionary 139b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm.
146); Versions: Theodotion 411.20 (e[fqasen) to; ku;to" aujtou` ehJ/" ta; pevrata pavsh" th`"
gh`"; Sept. 411 to; ku;to" aujtou` e{w" tw`n nefelw`n plhrou`n ta; uJpokavtw tou` oujranou` ; 20 hJ
d{rasi" megavlh; Pesh. 411.20 (mt\<) h\zwh lkl swpyh d<r>< sight, appearance; NRSV, it was visible
to the ends of the whole earth; REB, it was visible to earth’s farthest bounds.
—2. There is also the solution offered by Gesenius in the Thesaurus (p. 461a, but without any
etymology!), referring to Sept.V (i.e. Codex Venetus: Griechische Bibelübersetzung sogenannt
Codex Venetus, edited by Oskar von Gebhardt, Leipzig 1875) oiJ o[sdoi (also = o[zoi) pl. of uv
o[zo" = o[sdo" branch, bough (Menge-Güthling, Langenscheidts Grosswörterbuch
Griechisch-Deutsch mit Etym. (Berlin-Zürich 251924), 480a) where the etymology is linked
with German Ast, branch; Kimhi wmk µypn[ Hte/zj} tWzj; ÷r,q, (David Kimhi µyvir;vÕ rp,se.
Radicum liber sive Hebraeorum bibliorum Lexicon, edited by J.H.R. Biesenthal and F. Lebrecht
(Berlin, 1847), 99); Hebrew version ÷ytwrap; and Theodotion to; ku;to" aujtou` (see above
under A, Versions) to; ku;to" hollow, dome (Menge-Güthling op. cit. 412a): branches > crown
of the tree, so also ZüBi.
—3. Even though there is no etymological support (it could perhaps be a loanword from
somewhere else), this suggestion of Gesenius (2) links in better with what precedes than the
traditional interpretation (1). †
afj: the same in Heb.; Pehl. (Junker Frahang, app. 2); Palm. to commit sin (Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 85 s.v. afjI; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 362); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb.
143a; Beyer Arm. Texte 577); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 62a); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon
227a); Mnd. HT\A (Drower-M. Dictionary 140a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 164, 257); NeoArm.
(Bergsträsser Gloss. 41) and in NeoSyr. everywhere y˜l (Maclean 97a).
pa: inf. a;yF;j': ay:F;j' K, ha;F;j' Q: to sin against Ezr 617 with l[' (< Heb. pi., cf. HAL 293a;
HALOT 305b; so with Vogt 63a and Beyer Arm. Texte 577 :: Gesenius-Buhl; KBL;
Bauer-Leander BArm. 192d: sbst. → ay:F;j' K, ha;F;j' Q, see below; Rudolph Esra und Nehemia
62 avoids any choice between the vb. and the sbst., similarly Gunneweg KAT xix/1: 113). †
Der. yf;j}, ? ay:F;j'.
yf;'j:} afj; for JPArm. afej} see Sokoloff Dictionary 195; following the pattern qataµl:
Gesenius-Buhl; Bauer-Leander BArm. 187d; KBL; Beyer Arm. Texte 577 :: af;j}, so Rosenthal
Gramm. §14, and p. 85; Vogt 63a; EmpArm., EgArm. afj (Ah\iqar 50; Jean-H. Dictionnaire
85; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 362 s.v. h\t\<2; cf. Leander 75q: it develops from a qitl form);
JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 143a, ha;f]ji; Beyer Arm. Texte 577); Syr. h\et\aµ< (Brockelmann
Lexicon 227a); CPArm. ayfj (Schulthess Lex. 62a); Mnd. only pl. hat\aiia (Drower-M.
Dictionary 118a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 29): sf. Jy:f;j} K, Ja;f;j} Q (variant, also K): sin Da 4
24 parallel with Jt;y:w:[.}
†
ay:F;j' K, ha;F;j' Q: afj; loanword from Heb. taF;j'; JArm. at;F;j' (Dalman Wb. 144a);
Bauer-Leander BArm. 10u, 192d: fem. (Baumgartner ZAW 45 (1927), 92 = Umwelt 79)
sin-offering Ezr 617, so KBL; but on this see also afj pa. inf., which is probably to be
preferred. †
I yj': hyj: the same in Heb.; OArm., Zendjirli (Donner-R. Inschriften 215: 12); EmpArm., Neµrab
(Donner-R. Inschriften 225: 10); Behistun 1, 6, 11 (Akk. bal-t\u-tuŒ>); EgArm. (Cowley Arm.
Pap.; Hermopolis); Pehl. (Junker Frahang 11: 1); Nab. and JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire
86 s.v. yjI; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 367 s.v. h\y2); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 144a; Beyer
Arm. Texte 578); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 62b); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 5a); Syr.
(Brockelmann Lexicon 228b); Mnd. haia (Drower-M. Dictionary 118b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm.
108); NeoSyr. (Maclean 97b); pl. ÷yj (Neµrab, EgArm., especially Behistun; see Cowley Arm.
Pap., p. 287a): cstr. yj' (Bauer-Leander BArm. 221k; 222u, → II yj'), det. aY:j', pl. det. aY:Y"j:'
living, alive: aY:Y"j' of people Da 230 414, aY:j' ah;l;aÔ the living god 621.27, am;l][; yj' the one who
lives for ever 431, cf. 127.Sir 181, 1 Enoch 51. †
II *yj', tantum plural ÷yYIj:' hyj: the same in Heb.; OArm., Tell Fekherye 7, pl. cstr. h\yy; 14 pl. sf.
h\ywh “his life”; EmpArm., EgArm. also sg., but mostly pl. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar;
Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Hermopolis; Saqqara); Pehl. (Junker Frahang 10: 34); Nab. pl.; Palm. pl.;
Hatra pl.; Tema pl. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 86 s.v. yjII; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 365 s.v. h\y
1); JArm., DSS ÷yyj (Dalman Wb. 144a, aY:j', → I yj, as noted by Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 89;
Beyer Arm. Texte 578); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 62b: ÷yyj); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 5a); Syr.
(Brockelmann Lexicon 229a: h\ayyaµ); Mnd. hiia (Drower-M. Dictionary 143a); NeoArm. h\aiya
and h\ayoµt\a (Bergsträsser Gloss. 34; Spitaler Gloss. 87a); NeoSyr. h\ayi (Maclean 97b): cstr. yYEj:'
life Da 712 Ezr 610. †
hyj: the same in Heb.; Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 89, prefers to cite the root as yyj; EmpArm.,
EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar); Nab., Palm. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 87 s.v. h\yy;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 354, s.v. h\wy2); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 144a; Beyer Arm.
Texte 578); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 62b); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 5a); Syr. (Brockelmann
Lexicon 228b); Mnd. HIA (Drower-M. Dictionary 140; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 268); NeoArm.
(Bergsträsser Gloss. 34; Spitaler §169a); NeoSyr. (Maclean 97b).
pe: impv. yyIjÔ (Bauer-Leander BArm. 153h), Or. h\ayéÆ: to live; yyIjÔ ÷ymil][‰;l] ak;l]m' (→ Heb.
qal 1) Da 24 39 510 67.22. †
haf: pt. ajem' (variant. ajem; pe. pt. active from → hjm, cf. Theodotion e[tupten),
Bauer-Leander BArm. 170k: to let live, restore to life Da 519. †
Der. I, II yj', hw:yje.
hw:yje: hyj; Heb. hY:j'; Asia Minor awyj (Lidzbarski Ephemeris i, 70: 2); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb.
144b, at;wÒyje; Beyer Arm. Texte 578), and CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 62b) hw:yje; Syr. h\ayuµtaµ
(Brockelmann Lexicon 229a); Mnd. haiuta and hiuta (Drower-M. Dictionary 119b and 142a;
Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 22 (hiua), and 23; 101), st. abs. from hiua (Drower-M. Dictionary loc.
cit.); NeoArm. h\iwoµna (Bergsträsser Gloss. 34); Arb. h\ayawaµn; Bauer-Leander BArm. 186y:
cstr. tw"yje, det. at;wÒyje, pl. ÷w:yje, at;w:yje: animal, beast Da 413 73.5–7.11f.17.19.23, collective, animals
411f 521, ar;B; tw"yje the beasts of the field, wild animals 238 49.18.20.22.29. †
*lyj: denominative from lyIj'; pa. to strengthen; JArm. (Dalman Wb. 144b); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim
Gloss. 5a); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 230a); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 63b); Mnd. HIL pa.
(Drower-M. Dictionary 143b).
lyIj:' the same in Heb.; OArm., Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften 222 B: 31, 32); EmpArm., Saq-qara
(Donner-R. Inschriften 266: 7); EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar; Kraeling Arm. Pap.;
Driver Arm. Docs.; Saqqara); Behistun; Asia Minor (Donner-R. Inschriften 265: 1); Palm.
(Jean-H. Dictionnaire 87; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 369 s.v. h\yl2); JArm., DSS (Dalman
Wb. 144b; Beyer Arm. Texte 578f); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 63a); Sam. éÆl strength (Ben
H\ayyim Gloss. 5a); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 229b); Mnd. haila (Drower-M. Dictionary
120a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 100); NeoArm. (Bergsträsser Gloss. 37); NeoSyr. (Maclean
98a); Bauer-Leander BArm. 230z: lyIj‰; (Bauer-Leander BArm. 23d), cstr. lyje, sf. HleyÒj' (Or.
h\eµleµh), Bauer-Leander BArm. 231a.
—1. strength, lyIj‰;wÒ [r;d]a,B] with a strong arm (:: Rudolph Esra und Nehemia 44, by force of
arms; similarly Gunneweg KAT xix/1: 83, with power and might; cf. 2, see below) Ezr 423 ejn
i{ppoi" kai; dunavmei, lyIj'AyreB;GI Da 320, lyIj'b] areq; to cry aloud Da 34 411 57.
—2. army (see Driver ZAW 62 (1950), 223; cf. Arm. loanword in Neo-Bablylonian and Late
Babylonian, hÉi<aµlu, hÉi/ayaµlu a type of soldier, see AHw. 342b) Da 320, aY:m'v] lyje (Heb. ab;x]
µYIm'V;h') 432. †
Der. *lyj.
*µyKij:' µkj; Heb. µk;j;; Deir Alla; EmpArm., EgArm. (Ah\iqar, see Cowley Arm. Pap. 287b);
Uruk 26 hÉa-ki-mi; Asia Minor (Donner-R. Inschriften 264: 5); Pehl. Ps. 130b (Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 87; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 371 s.v. h\km2); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb.
145b; Beyer Arm. Texte 579); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 64a); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 5a);
Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 231a); Mnd. hakima, st. abs. ha-kim (Drower-M. Dictionary 120b;
Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 124); NeoArm. h\kéÆma physician (Bergsträsser Gloss. 36); NeoSyr. >
Arb. h\akéÆm (Horowitz Koran Untersuchungen (1926), 72 :: Maclean 99a: NeoSyr. h\akim with
the meaning “to be complete” < Arb.); Palm. n.m. (Stark Personal Names 163); Greek Acim
(Wuthner Semitischen Menschennamen 31); Bauer-Leander BArm. 192e: pl. ÷ymiyKij', det.
aY:m'yKij', cstr. ymeyKij': wise, wise man, Da 221, pl. the council of wise men in Babylon Da 212–14.
18.24.27.48 43.15 57f.15.
†
*µkj: the same in Heb.; EmpArm., EgArm. (Ah\iqar, Jean-H. Dictionnaire 88;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 371 s.v. h\km1); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 146a; Beyer Arm.
Texte 579); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 5a); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 230b); Mnd. HKM, pf.
hkum “they knew” (Drower-M. Dictionary 147f; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 218), NeoArm. to
give medical treatment (Bergsträsser Gloss. 36).
Der. *µyKij', hm;k]j;.
hm;k]j,; Or. h\uµkmaµ: µkj; the same in Heb.; OArm., Zendjirli (Donner-R. Inschriften 215: 11);
EmpArm., EgArm. (Ah\iqar, Jean-H. Dictionnaire 88; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 371);
JArm. at;m]k]j;/ju, DSS (Dalman Wb. 146a; Beyer Arm. Texte 579); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex.
63b), and Syr. h\ekmetaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 230b); Mnd. hikumta, variant of hukumta
(Drower-M. Dictionary 143b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 103); Bauer-Leander BArm. 243b: cstr.
tm'k]j;, det. at;m]k]j;: wisdom Da 220f.23.30 511.14 Ezr 725. †
*µlj: the same in Heb. (see HAL 307b; HALOT 320b); EmpArm.; Pehl. (Junker Frahang 19:
19) to sleep (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 89; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 375 s.v. h\lm1); JArm.,
DSS (Dalman Wb. 149b; Beyer Arm. Texte 579); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 64a); Syr.
(Brockelmann Lexicon 234b); NeoSyr. (Maclean 100a) also to sleep.
Der. µl,j,&.
µl,j,e& Or. h\ lem: µlj; Heb. µ/lj}; OArm., Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften 222 A: 25); EmpArm.,
e
EgArm. (Elephantine, Donner-R. Inschriften 270 A: 1); Saqqara; Hatra (Jean-H. Dictionnaire
89; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 375 s.v. h\lm3); JArm. am;l]j,/ji, DSS (Dalman Wb. 149b;
Beyer Arm. Texte 580); for JPArm. µlej} see Sokoloff Dictionary 203; CPArm. (Schulthess Lex
. 64b) and Syr. h\elmaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 234b); Mnd. hilma (Drower-M. Dictionary 144b);
NeoSyr. (Maclean 100a) h\ilmaµ; NeoArm. h\elma (Bergsträsser Gloss. 37); Bauer-Leander BArm.
224h-i: det. am;l]j,, sf. ymil]j,, Jm;l]j,, pl. ÷ymil]j,, Or. h\ilm- (Bauer-Leander BArm. 225r): dream
Da 24–7.9.26.28.36.45 42–6.15f 512 71. †
¹lj: Heb. I ¹lj; OArm., Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften 224: 22): the explanation is uncertain; it
can either be taken as a sbst. ¹lj “change”, or as a vb. pe./pa. + 3rd. person sf. “to replace
him”; on this see Donner-R. Inschriften 2: p. 270; EmpArm., EgArm. pe. (with l]) to succeed
someone as the scribe (Ah\iqar 18; Cowley Arm. Pap. 71: 14, but unclear); haf. to exchange,
give in ex-change (Saqqara; Sabb. Ostr. 5; see Grelot Documents, p. 370; cf. Vogt 65a); JArm.
inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 89; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 376 s.v. h\lp1); JArm., DSS
(Dalman Wb.149b; Beyer Arm. Texte 580); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 64b); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim
Gloss. 5a); Syr. (Brockel-mann Lexicon 235b); Mnd. HLP, pe. pf. hlip (Drower-M. Dictionary
149a; Nöl-deke Mand. Gramm. 219); NeoSyr. mh\lp (= mh\alip, Maclean 169a) and msûh\lp (=
(m)sûah\lip, Maclean 202a); preposition ¹l;j} instead of, EgArm. (Driver Arm. Docs.; Ah\iqar;
Cowley Arm. Pap.; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 89 s.v. ¹ljIII; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 377 s.v.
h\lp4); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 149b; Beyer loc. cit.); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 64b); Syr.

pe: impf. ÷Wpl]j]y", Or. yih\-; Bauer-Leander BArm. 128b-c: to pass over (÷D;[i) with l[' of the
person Da 413.20.22.29. †
*qlj: Heb. II qlj to divide, apportion; EmpArm.; Pehl. (Junker Frahang 21: 8); Nab. (Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 90; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 378 s.v. h\lq1); Asia Minor to divide, with
object <rq (the) field, (see Naveh WdO 6 (1971), p. 44, under C); JArm. to apportion, divide,
DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 580); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 237b); Mnd. HLQ to divide
(Drower-M. Dictionary 149b).
Der. ql;j}.
ql;j:} qlj; —a. it should be noted that, according to Beyer Arm. Texte 580, the vocalisation of
the MT follows the pattern qutaµl, i.e. a diminutive of ql,je (:: Bauer-Leander BArm. 187d, who
takes it as following the pattern qataµl); those instances which are unvocalised (EgArm. etc.)
could also be taken as following the pattern qitl.
—b) instances in BArm. and from the Arm. dialects: EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.;
Kraeling Arm. Pap.); Bruno-Meissner Pachtvertrag 11, and Nab., Palm., JArm. inscr. (h\wlq,
Jean-H. Dictionnaire 89f; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 378 s.v. h\lq3); JArm. aq;l;j}; DSS
(Dalman Wb. 150b; Beyer Arm. Texte 580); JArm. also aq;l]Wj (this is the vocalisation of the
sbst. given in Levy 2: 66a :: Dalman Wb. 150a, aq;L]ju, which is followed in KBL) with
reference to Dt 1427, but this reading is not corroborated by Tg.o; Tg.o reads h\uµlaµq (ql;Wj); so
also JArm. inscr. (see above), which also corresponds to CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 65a), and
Sam. “part” (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 5a); JArm. aq;l]j, field < a part of the cultivated land (Dalman
Wb. 150b); Syr. h\elqaµ = fatum < what has been apportioned as one’s lot (Brockelmann Lexicon
237b); Mnd. hilqa lot, share, luck (Drower-M. Dictionary 145a); Yemen, luck (Rabin 27): sf.
Hqel;j}: share Da 420, with B] in Da 412 Ezr 416 (NRSV, you will have no possession; REB, you
will be denied a footing). †
am;j; Da 3 , hm;j} 3
19 13:µjy; Heb. hm;je, OArm., Zendjirli amj (Donner-R. Inschriften 214: 33);
EmpArm., EgArm. atmj (Ah\iqar 140; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 90; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 381 s.v. h\mh2); JArm. aT;m]ji, indet. am;j}, cstr. tm'j} (Dalman Wb. 153a); DSS
(Beyer Arm. Texte 581); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 65b) and Syr. h\emtaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon
238a); Mnd. himta anger, poison (Drower-M. Dictionary 146a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 111);
Bauer-Leander BArm. 40n, 179g, 242y and a: fem.: fury Da 313.19. †
*rmj: Heb. II rmj to ferment, on which see especially CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 66b, s.v. rmj
II); JArm. (Dalman Wb. 152b; Jastrow 480a); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 241b); Mnd. HMR II
(Drower-M. Dictionary 150a); Sam. rym[ (Ben H\ayyim Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 602),
and outside Arm., Tigr. h\amra (Littmann-Höfner Wb. 60a), and Arb. hÉamara (Wehr-Cowan
261a, to cover, ferment); see also Levy 2: 76.
Der. rm'j}.
rm'j:} rmj; Heb. rm,j,: —a) it should be noted that, following KBL (p. 312b), rm,j, has to be
distinguished in meaning from ÷yIy" as “wine which is still foaming with fermentation”, a
distinction taken up also in HAL 317a (HALOT 330b) “wine which is still fermenting”, cf. also
Galling Bibl. Reallexicon2 362, and Reicke-Rost Hw. 2150. But in Arm. this special meaning of
the sbst. is suppressed, and it has become the normal appellative noun for “wine”, and as such
has superseded the sbst. ÷yIy," which is more usual in BHeb. and the other dialects.
—b) for the cognate languages and BArm. cf. Akk. hÉimrum a fermented drink (a foreign word,
Canaanite; see AHw. 1561a); EmpArm.; Pehl. (Junker Frahang 5: 5); EgArm. (Cowley Arm.
Pap.; Ah\iqar; Driver Arm. Docs.); Palm. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 99; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 383 s.v. h\mr5); Tell Cheleµfe (BASOR 80 (1940), 7f; 82 (1942), 15f); JArm., DSS
(Dalman Wb. 152b; Beyer Arm. Texte 581); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 66b); Syr. (Brockelmann
Lexicon 241b); Mnd. hamra (Drower-M. Dictionary 123b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 29);
NeoArm. (Bergsträsser Gloss. 38); NeoSyr. (Maclean 102a); Bauer-Leander BArm. 183e: det.
ar;m]j': wine Da 51f.4.23 Ezr 69 722. †
*hf;nÒj:i Heb. hF;ji; OArm., hfj Zendjirli (Donner-R. Inschriften 214: 6; 215: 6, 9); EmpArm.,
Mesopotamia atfnj; EgArm. afnj, and hfj (Cowley Arm. Pap., Ah\iqar); Palm. af(y)j (?
pl., see Rosenthal Palm. 76); JArm. inscr. pl. ÷yfnj (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 85 s.v. hfj;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 363, s.v. h\t\h); JArm. at;f]nÒji and at;F]ji, DSS (Dalman Wb.
153b; Beyer Arm. Texte 582, s.v. hfnj); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 62a), and Syr. h\et\te\ taµ
(Brockelmann Lexicon 227a); NeoArm. h\t\t\ (Bergsträsser Gloss. 41); Mnd. ht\ita, pl. hit\ia
(Drower-M. Dictionary 140b, 143a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 172, as pl.; cf. HAL 294b (
HALOT 307a), as sg. and pl.); NeoSyr. h\it\éÆ (Maclean 97b); Bauer-Leander BArm. 240f: pl. (as
everywhere, formed as masc., cf. Michel Grundlegung pp. 36 and 40f): ÷yfinÒji: grain of wheat
(Bauer-Leander BArm. 305h-i) Ezr 69 722. †
*Jnj: the same in Heb.; to dedicate (cf. Reif VT 22 (1972), 495–501); Palm. (Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 92; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 388 s.v. h\nk1); JArm. (Dalman Wb. 154a).
Der. *hK;nUj}.
*hK;nUj:} Jnj: loanword from < Heb.; JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 154a; Beyer Arm. Texte 582);
Palm. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 92; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 388); Bauer-Leander BArm.
187b: cstr. tK'nUj}: dedication: am;l]x' tK'nUj} Da 32f, ah;l;aÔAtyBe tK'nUj} Ezr 616f. †
÷nj: Heb. I ÷nj; JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 154a; Beyer Arm. Texte 582); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex.
67a); Syr. adj.: Palm. st. emph. h\nn< gracious, kind (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 92;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 389, s.v. h\nn3); NeoSyr. (Maclean 103a); sbst. OArm., Zendjirli
(Donner-R. Inschriften 217: 8); EmpArm., EgArm. (Ah\iqar 132; cf. Leander 71w;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 386, s.v. h\n1); JArm. ÷je (Dalman Wb. 153a).
pe: inf. ÷j'mi (Bauer-Leander BArm. 166f): to show mercy Da 424. †
hitpa: pt. ÷N"j't]mi (poor variant ÷NEj'-, Bauer-Leander BArm. 166h): to implore Da 612. †
Der. hy:nÒn"j.}
hy:nÒn"j:} n.m. Hananiah: Da 2 17, see Heb. Da 16f (HAL 322a; HALOT 335b). †
rySij:' rsj; Heb. rsej;; ? EgArm. ry[sj] (Ah\iqar 131); Uruk 15 (fem. det. hÉa-as-si-ir-ta-a);
Palm. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 93; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 394, s.v. h\sr2); JArm., DSS
(Dalman Wb. 155a; Beyer Arm. Texte 584); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 68a); Syr. (Brockelmann
Lexicon 248b); Mnd. hasir (Drower-M. Dictionary 125b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 124);
NeoSyr. (Maclean 104a); Bauer-Leander BArm. 192e: wanting, deficient Da 527. †
÷sj: the same in Heb.; EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Saqqara; Driver Arm. Docs.;
Kraeling Arm. Pap.); Samaria; Pehl. (Junker Frahang 21: 3; Herzfeld Paikuli; Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 93; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 391, s.v. h\sn1); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb.
155b; Beyer Arm. Texte 583); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 469, wynsa);
Syr. to be strong (Brockelmann Lexicon 247b); Sam. ÷js (Kahle Textkritische and lexikalische
Bemerkungen zum Sam. Pentateuch-targum (1898), 33f; also JPArm. and CPArm., see
Sokoloff Dictionary 372) and Syr. (h)af. to take possession of, occupy (Brockelmann Lexicon
248a); adj. EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Driver Arm. Docs.; Saqqara) ÷sj and ÷ysj
(Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 393 s.v. h\sn6); JArm., DSS (see Beyer loc. cit., and Dalman Wb.
155a) and Syr. ÷ySij' (Brockelmann Lexicon 248a) stong, adv. very much.
haf: pf. pl. Wns&ijÔh,, Or. hah\-, Bauer-Leander BArm. 128f; impf. ÷Wns]j]y:" to take possesion of,
occupy Da 718.22 (at;Wkl]m'). †
Der. *÷sejÔ.
*÷sej; or * ÷sej:} ÷sj; Heb. ÷s,jo; in Arm. formed on the pattern qutl as well as on the pattern qitl,
on which see Beyer Arm. Texte 583.
—a) sg. EmpArm., EgArm. ÷sj (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Driver Arm. Docs.; Saqqara) force, as in
the expression ÷sjk with force (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 93; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 393
s.v. h\sn4).
—b. a) sg. and pl. JArm. an:s]ju, sg. power, justice, pl. stores, fortress (Dalman Wb. 156a); DSS
(Beyer Arm. Texte 583); Syr. h\esnaµ, pl. h\esneµ, h\esnawaµtaµ fortress (Brockelmann Lexicon 247b;
cf. also the element H\isn in place names).
—b) sg. (but in all cases the pl. is perhaps also possible): Syr. h\usnaµ bravery (Brockelmann
Lexicon 247b), but it is noteworthy that in Jb 2810 it is the rendering for Heb. t/rWx (→ I rWx);
CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 61b) h\zn (= h\iznaµ) fortress, and denominative pt. pa., fortified.
—c) pl. OArm., Zakir stat. det. aynsj fortifications (see Donner-R. Inschriften 202 B: 8; also 2:
p. 210); in EgArm. also fortifications, see Cowley Arm. Pap. 27: 11; in this instance the
translation can either be as in Donner-R. Inschriften 2: p. 210., so also Grelot Documents 101
(p. 403); or it can be stores (see Cowley Arm. Pap. 27: 11, p. 100); cf. Jean-H. Dictionnaire 93,
s.v. ÷sjIII; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 393, s.v. h\sn3; and KBL; Bauer-Leander BArm. 183j:
det. an:s]ji, sf. ynIs]j,i Or. h\u-: might aP;q]t;wÒ an:s]ji Da 237; ynIs]ji ¹q't]Bi, so BHK (BHK3 with
variant ¹qot]Bi; on this see Bauer-Leander BArm. 184n, 187d), but ynIs]ji ¹q't]Bi BHS (with
variant … ¹qot]Bi) by my mighty power (NRSV; REB), literally “in the strength of my might”,
so e.g. ZüBi., with Plöger KAT xviii: 69, 72, Da 427. †
¹s'j:} JArm. inscr. clay (Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 393 s.v. h\sp ); JArm. aP;s]j', DSS
2
(Dalman Wb. 156a; Beyer Arm. Texte 583; see Sokoloff Dictionary 211) and aB;x]j' (JBabArm.,
see Jastrow Dictionary 494); MHeb. bx;j; (Dalman Wb. 157b); CPArm. h\sp earthenware,
pottery, and h\sb an earthenware pot (Schulthess Lex. 68a and 68b); Syr. h\es\paµ, h\ezbaµ and h\es\baµ
(Brockelmann Lexicon 225a, 251a and b), > Arb. h\azaf earthenware vessel, sherd, Fraenkel
169); Mnd. haspa clay, potsherd, clay pot (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 125b); Yemen h\asûaf
thick clay (Rabin 27); Eth. s\aµhe\ b earthenware vessel (Dillmann 1265); loanword < Akk.
hÉas\bu(m) (AHw. 332a; CAD Hå: 132a) potter’s clay, sherd (cf. Zimmern 33; Kaufman 54);
Bauer-Leander BArm. 224g: ¹s‰'j}, the same in the cstr.; det. aP;s]j' moulded clay (Montgomery
167; Kelso 7, terra cotta; cf. Reicke-Rost Hw. 2005f) Da 233–35.42.45; → ¹s'j} rj'p,AyDi (= Syr.)
pottery 241, an:yfi ¹s'j} earthenware 241.43. †
*rsj: the same in Heb.; to be missing, lack; EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Driver
Arm. Docs.); Palm. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 94; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 394 s.v. h\sr1);
JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 156a; Beyer Arm. Texte 583); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 68a); Syr.
(Brockelmann Lexicon 248a); Mnd. HSR (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 151; Nöldeke Mand.
Gramm. 408); NeoSyr. (Maclean 103b).
Der. rySij'.
¹xj: EmpArm., EgArm. (Ostr. 16: 3) of salt, coarse :: qqd fine, cf. Jean-H. Dictionnaire 95;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 400); Syr. to be bold (Brockelmann Lexicon 251b); Arb.
(perhaps a homonymous root) h\as\ufa (see Wehr-Cowan 182a) to have sound judgement, be
judicious, be discriminating; MHeb. hif., and JArm. to behave insolently (Dalman Wb. 158a);
CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 69a) and Syr. af. to dare (Brockelmann Lexicon 251b); JArm. and Syr.
h\us\paµ insolence (Dalman Wb. 158a; Brockelmann Lexicon 251b); Mnd. huspa
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 136b) shamelessness, insolence (cf. Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 44).
haf/af: pt. fem., probably pt. passive (Bauer-Leander BArm. 129q-s; cf. Vogt 67a) hp;x]j]h'm]
Da 215, hp;x]j]m' 322, on both occasions variant hP;x'- (Bauer-Leander BArm. 45i, 129r, 130u), 322
variant also ˜j'm]: harsh (tD;, hL;mi) Da 215 322. †
brj: Heb. I brj; —a) as vb., to lie waste, be desolate (pe.); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 159a;
Beyer Arm. Texte 585); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 69b); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 254a); Mnd.
HRB (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 152f; see especially Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 219, becomes
desolate); NeoArm. (Bergsträsser Gloss. 39) and NeoSyr. (Maclean 105a).

—b) vb. to devastate, lay waste: —a) pe: JArm. (Dalman Wb. 159a) and CPArm. (Schulthess
loc. cit.) and NeoArm. (Bergsträsser loc. cit.); —b) af: Nab., JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire
95; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 402); JArm. (Dalman Wb. 159a), Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon
254b) and NeoArm.; —g) pa., af.: Mnd. (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 152).
—c) adj. pl. fem. Zendjirli tbrj (Donner-R. Inschriften 215: 4; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 95;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 403 s.v. h\rb6).
hof: pf. 3rd. fem. sg. tb'r]j;h‰;, Bauer-Leander BArm. 115r, 129j: to be laid waste Ezr 415. †
µfor]j,' Or. -t\um, Bauer-Leander BArm. 221d; the same in Heb.: loanword < EgArm. h\r(y)-tp
(Erman-Grapow 3: 140, the title of a state offical), also Neo-Assyrian h\ar-t\i-bi (AHw. 328b;
CAD Hå: 116b); DSS wmfrj fortune telling (Beyer Arm. Texte 585); on the meaning of the
sbst. in Egyptian and for a bibliography see HAL 339a, HALOT 352–353; on this see further
H.-P. Müller UF 1 (1969), 83; H.-P. Müller VTSupp. 22 (1972), 2714, and TWAT 3: 138; Görg
BN 11 (1980), 9; Beyer Arm. Texte 585: pl. ÷yMifur]j', det. aY:m'fur]j' (:: Bauer-Leander BArm.
221e, variant aY:M'fu-): magician Da 210.27 44; br' ÷yMifur]j' chief magician 46 511. †
Jrj: the same in Heb.? (I Jrj, HAL 339b; HALOT 353b): MHeb., JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb.
160b; Beyer Arm. Texte); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 256a); Mnd. HRK (Drower-Macuch
Dictionary 153a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 40); NeoArm. hÉrh\ (Bergsträsser Gloss. 46) and
NeoSyr. (Maclean 106b) to burn, singe; Arb. h\araqa to singe, roast; on this also cf. Ug. h\rk
(Aartun UF 12 (1980), 1, 5).
hitpa: pf. Jr'j;t]hi (Bauer-Leander BArm. 130h): to be singed Da 327 (vare r['c]). †
*År'j:} Heb. dual µyIx'l;j}; so also MHeb.; JArm.; so also in the Targum Job from Qumran
(parallel with Q Tg. Job) as a Hebraism (on this see Beyer Arm. Texte 585; but see now
Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 90, line 3ff, who disagrees) ûyxlj your loins; JArm., DSS (Dalman
Wb. 161b; Beyer Arm. Texte 585) and Sam. ÷yxlt (Ben H\ayyim Literary and Oral Tradition 2:
466); CPArm. h\irs\< > h\irs< (Schulthess Gramm. §36a; Lex. 70a :: Sokoloff loc. cit.); > (::
Sokoloff, loc. cit.) Arb. hÉas\r; Mnd. hals\a, has\a (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 122a; Nöldeke
Mand. Gramm. 54); Syr. h\as\s\aµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 250b); NeoSyr. back, loins (Maclean
104b); NeoArm. h\as\s\aµ back (Bergsträsser Gloss. 40f); Bauer-Leander BArm. 185p; basic form
h\als\ (Nöldeke loc. cit. :: Brockelmann Grundriss 1: 246); sf. Hxer]j': hip ˜j' yref]qi his hip-joints
Da 56. †
bvj: the same in Heb.; for Akk. hÉasûaµbu to consider, calculate, see AHw. (supplement) p. 1560a,
where two occurrences (Neo-Assyrian and Late Babylonian) are listed; see also AHw. p. 332b
for a third instance, but cf. CAD, s.v. hÉasûaµpu, where no mean-ing is given; Deir Alla; EmpArm.
; Nab., Palm.; Hatra (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 97; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 409); JArm., DSS
(Dalman Wb. 162b; Beyer Arm. Texte 586); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 70b); Syr. (Brockelmann
Lexicon 260b); Mnd. HSðB (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 154a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 215);
NeoArm. (Bergsträsser Gloss. 41, to think); NeoSyr. (Maclean 107b); EgArm. (Cowley Arm.
Pap.) and Palm.; JArm. inscr. ÷bj account (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 97; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 411 s.v. h\sûbn1).
pe: pt. passive pl. ÷ybiyvij'} to consider, respect, take for, pt. passive with hl;K] (variant,
Codex Cairensis, and many mss. alk, → al;; also in JArm., see Beyer loc. cit., to be
accounted for nothing) Da 432. †
*J/vj}: Jvj; Heb. Jv,jo; Deir Alla; EmpArm., EgArm. akwj (Ah\iqar 125); Palm. possibly h\sûkk<
(Jean-H. Dictionnaire 98; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 411 s.v. h\sûk2); JArm. ak;/vj}, indet.
J/vj} (Dalman Wb. 163a), DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 586f); Syr. h\esûsûokaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon
262b); Mnd. hsûuka (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 154; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 118); <esûsûuµkaµ
(Drower Mandaeans of Iraq and Iran 321); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 71b) and Syr. h\wsûk< (
h\usûkaµ); JArm. and Syr. also ak;v]j,; perhaps Canaanite, see Bauer-Leander BArm. 188g: det.
ak;/vj} darkness Da 222. †
jvj: Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 261b) and NeoSyr. (Maclean 107b), to be necessary, be fit
(NeoSyr. also to be worthy, deserve); CPArm. isûtaf. to use (Schulthess Lex. 71b); cf. Akk.
hÉasûaµhÉu(m) (AHw. 332b; CAD Hå: 134b-136a) to need, desire; it is uncertain whether the Arm.
vb. is a loanword from Akk., but on this see Zimmern 70; Kaufman 54; Rosenthal Gramm.
§188 (p. 58) :: Vogt 67, who takes it as derived from Akk.; see below, b).
pe: —a) pt. pl. ÷yjiv]j‰; (Bauer-Leander BArm. 176x), variant ÷yjiv]j': to be in need of, with l]
and inf. Da 316.
—b) according to KBL ÷yjiv]j' is to be taken as a poor variant :: Vogt 67, who says the sg. *jvij'
and the fem. *hj;v]j' (= *tj'v]j') correspond to the Akk. hÉasûihÉ (3rd. sg. stative) “it is needed”;
see CAD Hå 135a, line 3, for the citation from an Old Babylonian letter; also hÉa-sûe-ehÉ “he is
desiring” (to purchase his brother’s property), cited from the Laws of Eshnunna in AHw. 332b,
s.v. hÉasûaµhÉu G, line 9; cf. CAD Hå: 135a, s.v. hÉasûaµhÉu 2, line 5.
These two suggestions have to be considered together; probably an older and later form of the
participle are exemplified in the second (b). †
Der. *hj;v]j', *Wjv]j'.
*hj;v]j:' jvj; Syr. h\esûah\taµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 262a). —a) MT pl. fem. ÷j;v]j' Ezr 69,
Bauer-Leander BArm. 185s, and especially Rosenthal Gramm. §44, a necessity; similarly KBL,
need, what is needed; similarly also Galling ATD 12: 196; TOB; Gunneweg KAT xix/1: 104.
—b) cj., for MT prop. pt. ÷yjiv]j‰; what they need; so e.g. Torrey Ezra Studies 194; ZüBi;
Rudolph Esra und Nehemia 56, 57; Vogt 67b.
Deciding whether to choose (a) or (b) as a solution is not easy, and the question can probably
remain open. †
*Wjv]j:' jvj; Syr. h\asûh\uµtaµ use (Brockelmann Lexicon 262a; see also Vogt 67b, who says that
the Heb. sbst. is a loanword from Akk. hÉisûihÉtu need, necessities (see CAD Hå: 204a; cf. AHw.
349a, hÉisûi/ehÉtu(m); but the evidence from Syr. argues against this special derivation);
Bauer-Leander BArm. 245g: cstr. tWjv]j': need Ezr 720. †
*Jvj: the same in Heb., to be dark; JArm. J/vj} (Dalman Wb. 163a; with it Levy 2: 123 also
has Jv'j}); DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 586); CPArm. h\sûk (Schulthess Lex. 71b); Syr. h\esûek
(Brockelmann Lexicon 262a); Mnd. HSðK (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 154b), pf. pe. *hsûik (see
Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 219); NeoSyr. (Maclean 108a).
Der. *J/vj}.
lvj: on the meanings of the vb. in the Arm. dialects see DSS, Beyer Arm. Texte 587: —a) JArm.
pe. (Dalman Wb. 163b); MHeb. pi. to crush, destroy; so also Akk. hÉasûaµlu(m) (AHw. 333a; CAD
Hå: 137a), cf. ? Arb. h\asala to push, repudiate, pound (Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 1352).
—b) JArm. (Dalman Wb. 163b); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 263a); Mnd. HSðL
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 154b) to hammer, forge, harden; on JArm. see also Levy 2: 124a,
and on Syr. see Brockelmann Lexicon 263a, with details of other meanings.
—c) the corresponding expression in EgArm. is lj to contribute, pay taxes, so Driver Aram.
Docs.2 101a; see Arm. Docs. 8: 6; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 98; in Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary
412 it is said that the meaning is unknown).
pe: pt. lvej;: to crush Da 240. †
µtj: the same in Heb.; —a) vb. EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap. 21: 9); Samaria; Pehl.
(Junker Frahang 23: 2; Herzfeld Paikuli; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 98 s.v. µtjI;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 413 s.v. h\tm1); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 164b; Beyer Arm.
Texte 587); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 71b); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 264a); Mnd. HTM
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 154b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 278); NeoSyr. (Maclean 108b).
—b) sbst. seal: EmpArm., EgArm. µtwj (Cowley Arm. Pap. 76: 1), µtj (Driver Arm. Docs. p.
41 and Saqqara); JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 98 s.v. µtjII; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 413 s.v. h\tm2); JArm. am;t;/j (Dalman Wb. 141a); Syr. h\aµtmaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon
264a); CPArm. h\tym< (Schulthess Lex. 71b); inscription h\aµt\imaµ (Schulthess Gramm. §91, p.
45); Mnd. hatma (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 128b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 112).
pe: pf. sf. Hm't]j', variant Hm;- (Bauer-Leander BArm. 81z, see BHK): to seal Da 618. †
f: —1. in assimilation and dissimilation f interchanges with t in lfq, rfq (?), fq.
—2. f corresponds to Proto-Semitic z\ (Brockelmann Grundriss 1: 128), and is preserved as z\ in
Arb.; for OArm. z\ see Sokoloff DSD 7 (2000), 90, who refers to Degen Altaram. Gr. 32; Heb. Å
; > Arm. f in rWf, II llf, *rp'f], f[y and hf;(y)[e, fyIq'.
baf: → bfy; Heb. bwf and bfy; EmpArm., EgArm. byf (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar; Kraeling
Arm. Pap.); Xanthos baf (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 100; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 421,
415); JArm. pe., only pt. byyEf; and baef;, DSS (Dalman Wb. 166b s.v. bwf; Beyer Arm. Texte
588/9); Syr. t\eµ<b (Brockelmann Lexicon 265a); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 5a) and CPArm. bwf
(Schulthess Lex. 72b); NeoArm. t\yb and t\by (Bergsträsser Gloss. 98); Mnd. T\AB, T\UB and YT\B
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 171f; 192a).
pe: pf. baef] (as Syr., following vaeB], Bauer-Leander BArm. 141g), Or. t\e<ob (Bauer-Leander
BArm. 102v, see BHK3), to be good, with l[' it is good for him, meaning he is glad Da 624. †
Der. bf;.
bf;: baf, bwf; Heb. b/f (see Beyer Arm. Texte 589): OArm. Tell Fekherye line 5: t\bh (on which
see p. 47, adj. fem. sg., Akk. t\aµbu); Zendjirli (Donner-R. Inschriften 216: 16); Sefire
(Donner-R. Inschriften 222 B: 6; 224: 3, 22); Ram. Pehl. (Junker Frahang 13: 12; Herzfeld
Paikuli 447), Bori bt (the inscription from Bori, see Altheim. Litt. and Gesellsch. im …
Altertum ii (1950), 46ff; Nyberg ii: 289); Neµrab (Donner-R. Inschriften 226: 3); EgArm.
(Cowley Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar; Driver Arm. Docs.; Saq-qara 8; Donner-R. Inschriften 266);
Bauer-Meissner Pachtvertrag 5; Uruk 34, fem. pl. sf. t\a-ba-ti-ia; t\b meaning “what is good”,
substantival adj. (see Naveh WdO 6 (1971), 44 D: 5; Aramaic inscr. from Armenia, Mcheta,
Donner-R. Inschriften 276: 9); Nab., Palm., Hatra, JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 98f;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 415 s.v. t\b2); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 165a; Beyer Arm. Texte
589); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 73a); Sam. t\ob (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 5a); Syr. (Brockelmann
Lexicon 269a) and NeoSyr. (Maclean 109b), NeoArm. toµb (Bergsträsser Gloss. 98; Spitaler
§5c); Mnd. t\ab, t\aba (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 172); Akk. t\aµbu(m) (AHw. 1377f); for the
forms in Amorite see Huffmon 37a, 207; Bauer-Leander BArm. 179h: good, bf; bh'D], Heb. Gn
212, Ug. ksp t\b, pure gold Da 232; ÷he bf; aK;l]m'Al[' if it pleases the king Ezr 517, cf. l[ ÷h
bf yarm (Driver Arm. Docs. iii: 5, p. 15b; cf. Cowley Arm. Pap. 27: 21; see also Sokoloff
DSD 7 (2000) 90, who refers to a Hebrew calque in Est 73). †
*jbf: the same in Heb.; JArm. to slaughter, cook (Dalman Wb. 165a); Syr. pe. (?) to sprinkle
(Brockelmann Lexicon 266a); Mnd. T\BA (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 176a) to cook, roast, dry.
Der. *jB;f'.
*jB;f:' jbf; the same in Heb., see Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 90 referring to 2 Ki 258 and
LipinŒski, VT 28 (1978), 235; OArm., EmpArm., Palm. butcher (Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 419); JArm. (Dalman Wb. 165a); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 266a) butcher, cook;
Mnd. t\abahia pl. (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 172b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 64) cook, which
is the only meaning in Mandaean; Bauer-Leander BArm. 191c: pl. det. aY:j'B;f': executioners,
bodyguards (swmatofu;lake" Josephus Antiquities x, 10: 3; Montgomery 155; Sept.,
Theodotion ajrcimavceiro") aY:j'B;f'Abr' “chief of the cooks, slaughterers” > executioner (→ br
2) Da 214. †
*hwf: Syr. t\waµ< to fast (Brockelmann Lexicon 269a); also in Arb. (cf. Beyer Arm. Texte 388 s.v.
ywf). On many occasions this vb. is distorted by the Semitic root t\-w-éÆ; Heb. to spin, bring
together (see HAL 357a; HALOT 372b; Brockelmann Lexicon 269a), but that is completely
uncertain, and the Akk. vb. t\awuÆm, t\amuÆ has only the meanings “to spin, twist” (AHw. 1382b).
Der. tw:f].
rWf: Heb. rWx; in personal names in cuneiform -t\u-ri-(i) Tallqvist Assyrian Personal Names
286a; EmpArm., Pehl. Sðapur I (AD 244–272) Ka>ba-i Zardusût line 2 (see E. Honigmann and A.
Maricq Recherches sur les res gestae Divi Saporis, in Académie Royale de Belgique, Classe
des lettres: Mémoires; xlvii/4 (Brussels, 1953), p. 40; P. Gignoux Glossaire des inscriptions
pehlevies et parthes (1972), 65; see Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 90, note 95); EgArm. (Ah\iqar 62);
Nab. (:: Cantineau 2: 101, on which see Jean-H. Dictionnaire 100 s.v. rwfII); JArm. inscr.
(Jean-H. Dictionnaire 100 s.v. rwf 1; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 974 s.v. s\r1); JArm., DSS
(Dalman Wb. 168a; Beyer Arm. Texte 588; for JPArm. t\awr (Arwwf) see Sokoloff Dictionary
222); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 73b); Sam. t\or (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 5a); Syr. (Brockelmann
Lexicon 272a); Mnd. t\ur, t\ura (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 178b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm.
105); NeoArm. (Bergsträsser Gloss. 99) and NeoSyr. (Maclean 110b) “mountain”; JArm.,
CPArm. (Schulthess loc. cit.) and Old Syr. (Black 216) also “field”; for this meaning in
EmpArm. see Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 90, note 96; Bauer-Leander BArm. 180 l: det. ar;Wf
mountain Da 234 (cj.).35.45. †
tw:f:] hwf; JArm. to fast (Dalman Wb. 168a) and Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 269a, sbst. *hwf) in
st. abs. with retained t, which has an adverbial sense (on which see Beyer Arm. Texte 444, 588;
Nöldeke Syr. Gramm. §155a; cf. also Brockelmann Grundriss 1: 493 :: Bauer-Leander BArm.
185s, 377f, sbst., a fast; but in view of the ending the adverbial meaning is to be preferred (as in
KBL): hungrily tw:f] tB; he spent the night fasting (NRSV; REB) Da 619. †
*÷yf: denominative pa., Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 274a) and NeoArm. (Bergsträsser Gloss. 99):
to besmear with → ÷yfi.
÷yfi: Heb. fyfi; EmpArm., Pehl. (Junker Frahang 2: 4); Sardes (Donner-R. Inschriften 260 B: 8)
earth (together with µym water, Donner-R. Inschriften 2: p. 308; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 100;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 421); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 169a; Beyer Arm. Texte 589);
Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 5a); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 74a); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon
274a); NeoArm. (Bergsträsser Gloss. 99); Mnd. t\ina (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 179b) clay;
denom., Syr. and NeoArm., see above *÷yf; > Arb. t\éÆn (Fraenkel 8), denominative t\yn II to daub
or coat with clay (Wehr-Cowan 580b); Bauer-Leander BArm. 180j: det. an:yfi: wet clay (Kelso
5f); ˜fi ¹s'j} earthenware Da 241.43, added to the bare word ¹s'j} for more precision :: ˜j} as a
word on its own 233–35.42; rj'p,AyDi ¹s'j} vs. 41a (Montgomery 177). †
*lf': the same in Heb.; > denominative I llf; JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 169b; Beyer Arm. Texte
589f); Sam. llf (Ben H\ayyim Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 539); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex.
75a s.v. lf III); Syr. t\allaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 275b); Mnd. t\ala (Drower-Macuch Dictionary
174a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 306); NeoSyr. t\luµlaµ (Maclean 112a); Bauer-Leander BArm.
222n: the same in cstr.; dew, aY:m'v] lf' Da 412.20.22.30 521. †
I *llf: denominative from lf'; Sam. to drop dew; MHeb. lWlf; damp (Dalman Wb. 169b); sy.
af. to trickle down (Brockelmann Lexicon 275b); it is not to be muddled up with Gen. Ap. xix:
16, llfb “with the help of”, cf. Fitzmyer 101 and Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 423 s.v. t\ll2).
II llf: Heb. III llx; for the cognate languages cf. —a) JArm. pa. and af., DSS (Dalman Wb.
170b; Arm. Texte 590); Palm. pa. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 101 s.v. llfII; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 423 s.v. t\ll1); Syr. pa. and af. (Brockelmann Lexicon 275b); CPArm. af. (Schulthess
Lex. 74b); Mnd. T\LL pa. (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 180a). In the idioms referred to (cf.
Beyer Arm. Texte 590) the meaning of the vb. is to overshadow, cover, make a roof over.
—b) denominative from Heb. sbst. lxe; Akk. s\illu and s\uluµlu (AHw. 1101a, 1111a; CAD S|
189, s\illu shadow, covering, and s\ullulu A to roof, provide shade), but according to von Soden
(see KBL Supplement, p. 201b) these two substantives are to be separated from each other; Arb.
z\ill, z\ilaµl and z\uluµl; JArm. aL;Wf, DSS (Dalman Wb.; Beyer loc. cit.); OArm., Sefire
(Donner-R. Inschriften 222 B: 42) and EmpArm. t\ll shade, protec-tion; EgArm. (Cowley Arm.
Pap.; Leander 71v; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 101; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 423 s.v. t\ll2);
JArm.; CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 74b); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 539)
and Mnd. t\ula (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 177a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 20, 105;
Montgomery Aramaic Incantation Texts from Nippur) and NeoSyr. t\l< (= t\ilaµ) shade (Maclean
111b; also t\ilanéÆtaµ, Maclean 112a); JArm. al;l;f] (Dalman Wb. 170b); EgArm. (Leander 80z);
JArm., CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 74b) and Mnd. t\lala (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 180a;
Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 115); Syr. t\elaµlaµ< (Nöldeke Syr. Gramm. §116); CPArm. t\lwl< (see
above); Mnd. t\ulala (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 177a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 123).
haf: impf. llef]T' (Bauer-Leander BArm. 167j) Da 49, sbj. ar;B; tw"yje; the various
possibilities of translating the vb. include: —a) traditionally, with Sept. ejskivazon to search for
shade, find shade (Bauer-Leander BArm. 274m; Syr. af.).
—b) with Theodotion katwv/koun, Vulgate habitant, cf. CPArm. af. and Luke 1319, to dwell,
seek protection Da 49 parallel with ÷n:K]v]yI (→ ÷kv) 418.
KBL supports the second idea, albeit a little hesitantly; however it is preferable to adopt the
first suggestion, which has the support of the Septuagint and gives more prominence to the
sense of the root of the vb. †
µ[f: the same in Heb.; EmpArm., EgArm. (Ah\iqar 105, 209) to taste, eat (Leander §33); Asshur
Ostracon 8 (Donner-R. Inschriften 233, but the context is fragment-ary and the exact meaning
is uncertain, see 2: p. 284; cf. Jean-H. Dictionnaire 102; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 426 s.v.
t\>m1); JArm. µy[ef] (Dalman Wb. 172b); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 76b) and Syr. t\>m
(Brockelmann Lexicon 283a); Mnd. T\AM (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 174b; Nöldeke Mand.
Gramm. 256); NeoArm. (Bergsträsser Gloss. 97); NeoSyr. (Maclean 113a) to taste, eat.
pa: impf. ÷Wm[} f'yÒ; sf. HNEWm[} f'yÒ (Bauer-Leander BArm. 130g and i, 131j, 123m): to give to
eat Da 422.29 521, cj. 412 (20) (Montgomery 235; cf. BHK3 and BHS) :: ZüBi; Bentzen 34; Plöger
KAT xviii: 68; TOB follows MT. †
Der. µ[ef].
µ[ef:] µ[f; Heb. µ['f'; EmpArm., Palm. atm[f food (Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 428);
decision, command: EgArm. (Hermopolis; Cowley Arm. Pap.; Driver Arm. Docs.; Saqqara)
Samaria; Nab. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 102, causative, Cantineau Nab. 2: 102;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 427 s.v. t\>m2); JArm. µy[ef], am;[]f' (Dalman Wb. 172b); Syr.
t\a>maµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 283a); Mnd. t\ama (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 174b; Nöldeke
Mand. Gramm. 16); NeoSyr. taste, (correct?) behaviour (Maclean 113a); taste, understanding (
JArm., Syr., NeoSyr.); decision (Nab., see Jean-H. Dictionnaire 102, and especially Cantineau
Nab. 2: 102); Bauer-Leander BArm. 224g; Rowley The Aramaic of the OT 117); the same in
cstr., also µ['f', µ[ef] Da 52 Ezr 614; in 614 vr,/K µ[ef] occurs together with Hl;aÔ µ['f'; the latter
is to be found also in Ezr 723.
The reason for the difference in vocalisation is not clear, but possibilities include: —a) a
Massoretic construction, so Bauer-Leander BArm. 228f; —b) µ['f' (like µl,x, Da 35) simply a
Hebraism, so Bauer-Leander BArm. 228f; —c) Gunneweg KAT xix/1: 112 says that perhaps
the different vocalisations of µ[f may be an attempt by the Massoretes to decide about
differentiating between the word of God and human instructions.
—det. am;[]f', Or. t\a>emaµ (Bauer-Leander BArm. 45f).
—1. understanding: µ[ef]W hf;[e bytih} Da 214 (→ bwt), he responded with prudence and
discretion (NRSV); he made a direct and tactful approach (REB); ˜f] µyci l[' to pay attention
to, heed Da 312 614.
—2. —a) command (< Akk. t\eµmu AHw. 1385b; Kaufman 109); Hl;aÔ µ['f'A÷mi (see above)
according to the command of God Ezr 614 723 :: vr,/K µ[eF]mi Ezr 614 (see above), µ[ef] µyci (
EgArm.) Da 310 Ezr 421 53.9.13 61.3.12, passive Da 329 43 627 Ezr 419 517 68.11 713.21; µ[ef] l[eB]
(see below, 4).
—b) ar;m]j' µ[ef]Bi Da 52 either “under the influence of the wine” (KBL; NRSV; REB), or
rather “at the tasting of the wine, through the flavour of the wine, with the enjoyment of the
wine”, following Semitic t\a>m taste (AHw. 1385b).
—3. advice, report (< Akk., Kaufman 109), cf. t\eµma turru to bring back a decision, return a
report (AHw. 1334, 8c, s.v. taÆru, D turru; see also p. 1387a, s.v. t\eµmu(m) 9e: with l] Jlh
“until the report had reached Darius” Ezr 55; ˜f] bh'yÒ to give an account Da 63.
—4. ˜f]Al[eB] together with ar;p]s‰; Ezr 48f.17 chancellor, chief government official (so with e.g.
KBL; Beyer Arm. Texte 534 :: traditionally commander, commanding officer); cf. EgArm. l[b
µ[f (Cowley Arm. Pap. 26: 23, see p. 97; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary p. 183, s.v. 2), “the
instigator of a command” < Akk. beµl t\eµmi, see Zimmern 10, who translates the sbst. as
“commander” or “reporter”; this last translation corresponds to the function of the Akkadian
reporter of omens from sacrifices, on which see E. Georg Klauber Politischrelig. Texte aus der
Sargonidenzeit (Leipzig, 1913), pp. xxiv and 161; cf. AHw. 1387b s.v. t\eµmu(m) 10, the
representative for presenting formulations for requests and answers (?). According to Schaeder
97, EmpArm. µ[f l[b is the same as ˜f] l[eB], and its “pattern” beµl t\eµmi is to be taken as the
rendering of the title of a Persian state-official; on the whole question see also Kaufman 109,
especially together with note 390; for further bibliography see Sokoloff DSD 7 (2000), 91. †
*rp'f:] Heb. ÷r,Poxi; TgArm., JBabArm. arpwf; JPArm. rpf*, pl. ÷yrpwf (see Sokoloff, DSD 7
(2000), 91; Beyer Arm. Texte 591); CPArm. (Schulthess Gramm. p. 135b) and NeoSyr. t\ipraµ
(Maclean 113b); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 286b) and NeoArm. t\epraµ (Bergsträsser Gloss.
98); JArm. t\upraµ (Dalman Wb. 174a); Mnd. tupra (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 178; Nöldeke
Mand. Gramm. 18); Akk. s\upru(m) (AHw. 1113) and t\upru < Arm. hoof (AHw. 1395b); Arb.
z\ufr/z\ifr; basic form z\ifr; Bauer-Leander BArm. 183g: pl. sf. yhi/rp]fi, Or. t\ofr-, Da 430 Hr'p]fi 719
Q, K Hy"ro'p]fi: Bauer-Leander BArm. 75c.
—1. nail Da 430.
—2. claw 719. †
drf; the same in Heb.; JArm. (Dalman Wb. 175a); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 77a); Sam. (Ben H\a
yyim Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 447); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 288a); Mnd.
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 182b); NeoSyr. (Maclean 114a).
pe: pt. pl. ÷ydir]f‰É; pf. passive (Bauer-Leander BArm. 104b-e!) dyrif]: to drive away, with l]
of the personal obj. (→ l] 11) and ÷mi Da 422.29; passive 430 521. †
*yl;P]r]f,' pl. det. ayEl;P]r]f' (Bauer-Leander BArm. 196d, 204 l; Rosenthal Gramm. §191) Ezr 49:
possible interpretations include: —a) Septuagint Tarfallaiòi, Vulgate Terphalae, someone
who lives in the city of Tripolis; but for reservations about this see Rosenthal loc. cit.
—b) an official of the Persian chancellery of Ebirnari in Tripolis, so Galling ZAW 63
(1951/52), 71; so also also Galling Studien zur Geschichte Isr. 48, and see also 1913.
—c) a general term, “class of officials” (KBL); “official title” (Rudolph Esra und Nehemia 36;
cf. also Eilers 39f).
Of these three suggestions probably the second (b) is the one to be preferred. For proposals
about the name of the city see Galling VT 4 (1954), 418–422 and Studien zur Geschichte Isr.
1913.
y: —1. interchanges with → a (→ ty:), with w in hwh.

—2. derives from initial → w.
lby: the same in Heb.; Deir Alla; OArm., Zendjirli (Donner-R. Inschriften 215: 6, 14, 21); Tell
Fekherye 11; EmpArm., Pehl. (Junker Frahang 20: 21; Herzfeld Paikuli 460–462).
—1. pe.: EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap., Ah\iqar, Saqqara, Hermopolis) lby impf. active,
corresponding to *lBiyI, and inf. lbwm, so Vogt 69f; cf. Leander §38d; Jean-H. Dictionnaire
103; passive, corresponding to *lB'yU Hermopolis, Nab., Palm., JArm. inscr. (Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 103; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 431).
—2. pa.: JArm. and Syr.
—3. af.: JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 179a; Beyer Arm. Texte 592; see also HAL 366b, HALOT
383a, s.v. I lby); CPArm. <ybl and <wbl (Schulthess Lex. 78a); Syr. <aubel (Brockelmann
Lexicon 293b); Mnd. YBL, af. pf. auil (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 188; Nöldeke Mand.
Gramm. 49); the same as NeoArm. aupel (Bergsträsser Gloss. 12; Spitaler 171c); NeoSyr. laµbil
(Maclean 144b).
haf: pf. lbeyhe; inf. hl;b;yhe (Bauer-Leander BArm. 50b, 141e): to bring Ezr 514 65 715. †
saf: (Brockelmann Grundriss 1: 526; Bauer-Leander BArm. 92k; Rosenthal Gramm. §130,
188); alternatively from Akk. sûuµbulu, Assyrian sûeµbulu (von Soden Gramm. §103w; AHw.
1452b) from (w)abaµlu; traditionally → lbs po. pt. pl. ÷ylib]/sm]: to offer Ezr 63 (cj., for yhi/Vau
prop. hY:V'ai or yhi/Va, (see under *÷yViau :: Rudolph → lyk). †
*vby: the same in Heb.; JArm. (Dalman 179b); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 78a); Syr.
(Brockelmann Lexicon 294b); Mnd. YBSð, >BSð (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 188b; Nöldeke
Mand. Gramm. 244); NeoSyr. (Maclean 115b); ? NeoArm. (Bergsträsser Gloss. 16); adj. vyBiy;"
JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 179a; Beyer Arm. Texte 592), CPArm., Syr.; Mnd. iabusûa, iabisûa
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 184a).
Der. *hv;B]y".
*hv;B]y:" vby; Heb. hv;B;y"; Palm. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 103; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 433);
JArm., DSS (Dalman 179b; Beyer Arm. Texte 592); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 5b); CPArm. by
and hby (Schulthess Lex. 78a); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 294b, 295a); NeoSyr. masc.
(Maclean 115b); Mnd. iabsûa (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 184a) drought, dry land; fem., JArm.
aT;v]B'y"; CPArm. yabbesûtaµ (Schulthess Gramm. p.135b; Lex. 78a); Syr. yabbisûtaµ;
Bauer-Leander BArm. 41s, 191a, 199d, ? < Heb.: det. aT;v]B,y": dry land: the earth Da 210. †
*rg¾yÒ: JArm. ar;gÒy" (Dalman Wb. 179b) and Syr. heap of stones (Brockelmann Lexicon 295a; see
also Sokoloff DSD 7 (2000), 91 and note 98 for a reference to a fragment of the Palestinian
Targum); DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 593); EmpArm., Nab. argw stele, grotto, rock-tomb (Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 69; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 296; most likely a loanword from Arb., see
Sokoloff loc. cit.); OSArb. wgr stone monument (BASOR 102 (1946), 5; Beeston Sabaic
Dictionary 158, s.v. wgr II, to stone); Eth. wagr hill (Dillmann 937), wagara to throw stones
(Dillmann 936); Tigr. and Amharic to throw (Littmann-Höfner Wb. 448a); Arb. wajr cave,
cavern, grotto (Wehr-Cowan 1050a); Bauer-Leander BArm. 28p, 182x: the same in the cstr.:
heap of stones, at;Wdh} c‰; rg¾yÒ Gn 3147 corresponding to Heb. d[el]G¾. †
*dy"; Heb. dy:: Semitic, see Nöldeke Neue Beiträge 113–116; for Arm. specifically see Beyer Arm.
Texte 593; also Sokoloff DSD 7 (2000), 91; Deir Alla; OArm., Zakir (Donner-R. Inschriften
202 A:12); Zendjirli (Donner-R. Inschriften 214); Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften 222, 223, 224);
Tell Fekherye 18 (twice), with sf. ydh, for which see p. 47; EmpArm.; Pehl. (Junker Frahang
10: 30; Herzfeld Paikuli 464); Asshur Ostracon (Donner-R. Inschriften 233: 5, 9, 12); EgArm.
(Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Driver Arm. Docs.; Ah\iqar, Saqqara, Hermopolis);
Persepolis; Nab., Palm., JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 103f; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 433); det. ad;yÒ: JArm. (Dalman Wb. 180a); DSS (Beyer loc. cit.); often éÆdaµ; CPArm.
(Schulthess Lex. 78b; Gramm. §85p); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 295a s.v. <éÆdaµ); Mnd. >da
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 341a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 184; see also Nöldeke Neue
Beiträge 114); NeoSyr. (Maclean 9a s.v. <yd<) and NeoArm. (Bergsträsser Gloss. 19); cstr. yad,
in CPArm. but only with a preposition byd, lyd (Schulthess Lex. 78b; cf. Gramm. §85p); bid
(see Cumont Fouilles de Doura-Europos (1926), “Les inscriptions”, p. 367, 11); Bauer-Leander
BArm. 178c; the same in the cstr.: det. ad;yÒ, Da 55 hd;yÒ, dual ÷yId'&y,Ò sf. ydiy,Ò Jd;y,Ò HdeyÒ, µhod]y<
(Bauer-Leander BArm. 81y), pl. sf. yd‰;yÒ Da 315 (Bauer-Leander BArm. 23d, variant ydiy)Ò , fem.
—1. hand: —a) of a person Da 234.45 55 dy" (→ sP'), 55.24 Ezr 58.
—b) the hand of God Da 432 (metaphorically → aj;m]).
—c) paw of a lion Da 628 (TOB :: others who take it as 2 below, so ZüBi, Bentzen; so also
Vogt 71b); dy" jl'v] to stretch out the hand towards something, meaning to put one’s hand on
something, to misappropriate something for oneself, to take a chance on something (as in Heb.)
Ezr 612.
—2. might, power, with B] human power Da 238 725 Ezr 512 714.25 (for vs. 25 Jd;ybiAyDi cf. dyl yz
Driver Arm. Docs. iv: 1 to be at the disposal of, see Driver p. 49), the power of God Da 523,
with ÷mi of people Da 315.17, see on Da 628. under 1 above. †
hdy: the same in Heb.; to praise, Palm. ady af. in e.g. pt. adwm, sbst. adw, see M. Ingholt and J.
Starcky “Recueil des Inscriptions”, in D. Schlumberger La Palmyrène du Nord-Ouest (1951),
139–147 (cf. Suppl. xxvii, recto 52ter A 3, B 3; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 296 s.v. wd<; but
see now also Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 91 for a different opinion); af. EmpArm. (Samaria),
Palm., JArm. inscr. (Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 439 s.v. ydy1, to respect, confess); CPArm.
(Schulthess Lex. 78b) and Syr. af. and esûtaf. <awdéÆ, <estawdi (Brockelmann Lexicon 296a); Sam.
udi to confess; JArm. pa. and itpa., DSS (Dalman 180a, to confess, praise; Beyer Arm. Texte
565 s.v. ydw); Mnd. af. (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 189a: pf. audia, Nöldeke Mand. Gramm.
215).
haf: pt. ade/hm] Da 223 > ade/m 611 (Baumgartner ZAW 45 (1927), 107 = Umwelt 94);
Bauer-Leander BArm. 169i: to praise Da 223, with µd;qÕ 611. †
[dy: the same in Heb.; Deir Alla; OArm., Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften 223 C: 8); EmpArm.,
EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Driver Arm. Docs.; Ah\iqar, Saqqara, Hermopolis; see also
Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 91 regarding the dissimilation of nun); Pehl. (Junker Frahang 23: 8;
Herzfeld Paikuli 466/7); Palm., JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 104f; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 439); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 180a; Beyer Arm. Texte 593); CPArm. (Schulthess
Lex. 79a); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 296b); Mnd. YDA, >DA (Drower-Macuch Dictionary
188f; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 245); NeoArm. (Bergsträsser Gloss. 19); NeoSyr. (Maclean
115b).
pe: pf. [d'yÒ (Or. éÆda>, Bauer-Leander BArm. 13c), T;[]d'yÒ, t[ed]yI (Or. yad-); impf. [D'nÒTi, [D'nÒai
, pl. ÷W[D]nÒy;I impv. [D'; pt. [d'y:, pl. ÷y[id]y”,; cstr. y[ed]y,”; pt. passive ['ydiy,Ò Bauer-Leander BArm.
§45d, i, j.
—1. to know, with yDi Da 28f 46 616, with acc. 222 522, hn:yBi 221, ah;l;aÔ tD; Ezr 725.
—2. to learn, with yDi Da 611 Ezr 415.
—3. to understand, with acc. Da 230, with yDi 414.22f.29 521, abs. 523.
—4. awEhÔl, ['ydiyÒ let it be known Da 318 Ezr 412f 58, cf. hwhy [ydy (Driver Arm. Docs. iv: 3, see
Driver p. 49f). †
haf: pf. [d'/h, an:[]d'&/h, sf. J[;d]/h, an”;T,&[]d'/h, ynIT'&[]d'/h Da 223 (variant an:T;&-, Or. -taŒnaµ,
Bauer-Leander BArm. 53r); impf. [d'/hyÒ, pl. ÷W[d]/hyÒ, ÷W[d]/hT], sf. ynIN"&[id]/hyÒ/T], HNE[id]/ha},
ynINà'[ud]/hyÒ/T]; inf. h[;d;/h, sf. ynIt&'W[/ynIt&'[ud;/h, Jt;W[d;/h; pt. pl. ÷y[id]/hm]: to make known,
communicate (parallel with hwj pa. haf.) Da 25.9.15.17.23.25f.28–30.45 43f.15 58.15–17 716 Ezr 510, with
yDi Ezr 416 724 (÷y[id]/hm]): pt. pl. masc. indicates an impersonal sbj. and substitutes for a passive
construction, on which see Rosenthal Gramm. §181; cf. Bauer-Leander BArm. 333d and KBL;
an:[]d'/hwÒ an:j]l'v] (cf. EgArm. Cowley Arm. Pap. 30, 29, cf. Pul-i-D. 8) Ezr 414, to instruct 725. †
Der. [D'nÒm'.
bhy: the same in Heb.; in later Arm. it is mostly a replacement for the pf. of ÷tn cf. Degen
Altaram. Gramm. §60, note 73 (for the forms of bhy preserved in cuneiform see AHw. 1450a);
OArm., Tell Fekherye 10 bhy (3rd. person jussive), see p. 49; Zendjirli (?) (Donner-R.
Inschriften 214: 12); Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften 222 B: 38; cf. 2: p. 256); EmpArm., EgArm.
(Cowley Arm. Pap.; Driver Arm. Docs.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar, Saqqara, Hermopolis),
Mesopotamian, Asshur Ostracon (Donner-R. Inschriften 233: 27); Tema (?) (Donner-R.
Inschriften 228 A: 15); Samaria, Xanthos, Tell Arad; see further Donner-R. Inschriften 3: p.
34b (text 236 rev. 7); Pehl. (Junker Frahang 21: 10; Herzfeld Paikuli 503–06); EgArm.,
ostracon from Elephantine (Donner-R. Inschriften 271 B: 6); Nab., Palm. (Rosenthal Palm. 36b
); Hatra, JArm. inscr. > (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 105; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 442); JArm.,
DSS (Dalman Wb. 180b; Beyer Arm. Texte 595); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 79b); Sam. (Ben
H\ayyim Gloss. 5b); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 298a); Mnd. YHB, >HB, AHB (Drower-Macuch
Dictionary 189f; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 61, 245); NeoArm. (Spitaler §171, 184); NeoSyr. yhbl
= yaµ-wil (Nöldeke NSyr. Gramm. 255f; Maclean 116a); impf. in OArm. (Sefire), Pehl., Nab.
(Jean-H. Dictionnaire 105), Syr. and Mnd.
pe: pf. bh'yÒ (Or. éÆhab, Bauer-Leander BArm. 13c), T]b]h'yÒ (variant T;-, Bauer-Leander BArm.
101e :: Birkeland 15f), Wbh'ywI; impv. bh' (the same in Heb., Bauer-Leander BArm. 141i; EgArm.
, Cowley Arm. Pap.; Driver Arm. Docs.; see Jean-H. Dictionnaire 105; GenAp xxii: 19, see
Fitzmyer Gen. Ap. and Beyer loc. cit.); pt. bhey:, pl. ÷ybih} y”;; pf. pas-sive (Bauer-Leander BArm.
104b-e!, see also Vogt 72a; Rosenthal Gramm. p. 62) b(y)hiy,Ò 3rd. fem. tb'yhiyÒ, Da 712 tb'yhi&yÒ
(Bauer-Leander BArm. 24p), Wbyhi&ywI; impf. is replaced by → ÷tn (JArm., CPArm.): to give Da 2
21.23.37.48 517–19, passive 528 74.6.12.14.22 (perhaps after an:yDi insert an:f;l]v;wÒ btiyÒ, so also ZüBi;
Bentzen; Vogt 73a :: MT; see e.g. Plöger KAT xviii: 103, 105 an:yDi = “rule”), vs.27, Ezr 514; dy"B]
Da 238 Ezr 512; am;v]GI to surrender Da 328, passive to be given 711; → am;[]f' to make a report 63
, aY:V'au (Nab., JArm., CPArm., see Schulthess ZAW 22 (1902), 162f) to lay foundations (cf.
Akk. usûsûeµ naduÆ, AHw. 707a, 1442a; see also CAD N/1; 82b-83 s.v. naduÆ vb., 2b, 1˜) Ezr 516, cj.
412 (→ fwj). †
hitpe: impf. bhiyÒt]yI, bh‰e/bh‰iyÒt]Ti, pl. ÷Wbh} y"t]y;I pt. bheyÒt]mi, fem. hb;h} y"t]mi, pl. ÷ybih} y"t]mi: to
be given Da 413 Ezr 420 719, dy"B] Da 725, costs to be defrayed, funds to be raised (at;q]p]nI) Ezr 64.
8f.
†
dWhyÒ: Heb. hd;WhyÒ; cuneiform Ya-a-hÉu-du and Ya-ku-du (R. Dussaud Mélanges Syriens (
Festschrift), 2: 926); also Yaudu (Ya-u-du), on which see HAL 376 and HALOT 394a (with
bibliography) on Heb. hd;WhyÒ; EgArm. dwhy (Cowley Arm. Pap. 30: 1; 31: 18); JArm., CPArm.,
Syr. d(w)hy on coins and jar-handles (for a bibliography see Beyer Arm. Texte 396); the name of
the territory (the topographical name) is a back-formation from → yd;WhyÒ, Bauer-Leander BArm.
189n: Judah, Judaea Da 225 513 614 (:: collec-tive, the Jews, see Marti §68b, cf. yd'm;), Ezr 51.8 7
14.
†
*yd;WhyÒ: Heb. ydiWhyÒ; EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.) sg. (a)ydwhy, pl. ÷ydwhy,
aydwhy; JArm., DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 595) ha;d;WhyÒ > ha;d;Wy; CPArm. yhwdy > ywdy
(Schulthess Lex. 80b); Syr. and NeoSyr. éÆhuµdaµyaµ (Maclean 116b); NeoArm. uµday (Bergsträsser
Gloss. 19); cuneiform Ya-a-hÉu-da-a-a, Ya-u-da-a (R. Dussaud Mélanges Syriens (Festschrift),
2: 925, 927): pl. ÷yaid;WhyÒ K, ÷yId;WhyÒ Q and det. ayEd;WhyÒ, Bauer-Leander BArm. §13k-m: someone
coming from Judaea, a Jew Da 38.12 Ezr 412.23 51.5 67f.14. †
µ/y: the same in Heb.; OArm., Tell Fekherye 7 hwmwy the length of his days, pl. with 3rd. pers.
masc. sf., see p. 47; Zendjirli (Donner-R. Inschriften 214: 9, 10, 12; 215: 8, 9, 10, 18): 214 pl.
with sf., with the sbst. written defectively, ymybw “and in my days”; 215: 9 written fully hymwyb
“in his days”; see line 10 ymwy(w) pl. cstr. “and in the days of”; see also line 18 with 1st. person
sf. “in my days”; Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften 222 A: 12; B: 31; C: 15; 223 B: 12; C: 17, cf.
Degen Altaram. Gramm. p. 46); EmpArm., Pehl. (Junker Frahang 27: 3, 8; Herzfeld Paikuli
471) here also pl. with fem. ending tmwy in Grafitto Dura (see Parola del Passato 31: 311);
Asshur Ostracon (Donner-R. Inschriften 233: 16, but uncertain); Nerab (Donner-R. Inschriften
226: 3, 4); Tema (Donner-R. Inschriften 228 A: 4); EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm.
Pap.; Driver Arm. Docs.; Saqqara, Ah\iqar); Nab., Palm., Hatra, JArm. inscr. (Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 107f s.v. µyII; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 448); am;/y JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb
. 181a; Beyer Arm. Texte 596f; for JPArm. µ/y and µm;yai see Sokoloff Dictionary 237, 50);
CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 81b); NeoArm. (Bergsträsser Gloss. 55) and NeoSyr. yoma/yum(a)
(Maclean 117b); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 5b); Mnd. (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 190b;
Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 175); Syr. yaumaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 299b); am;m;yÒ JArm. (Dalman
Wb. 184b); Syr. <imaµmaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 303a); Mnd. >umoma (Drower-Macuch
Dictionary 344a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 140, and Neue Beiträge 133; Brockelmann Grundriss
1: 474); Bauer-Leander BArm. 182a: det. am;/y, pl. ÷ymi/y, aY:m'/y, yme/y Da 511 and tm;/y Ezr 45.19 (
fem. pl., also Syr. Bauer-Leander BArm. 201j, cf. Heb.): sf. ÷/hyme/y: day Ezr 615 Da 68.13, am;/yB]
three times a day Da 611.14, µ/yB] µ/y day by day Ezr 69; pl. reign Da 244 511; lifetime: qyTi['
aY:m'/y, ÷ymi/y ˜[ very old Da 79.13.22; aY:m'/y tx;q]li at the end of this period 431, → tm;/y ÷mi
am;l][‰; since ancient times Ezr 415.19; in eschatological expressions → aY:m'/y tyrij} a'B] (Heb.) at
the end of the days Da 228; µ/y jr'yli ht;l;T] on the third day of the month Ezr 615,
Bauer-Leander BArm. 252y. †
qd;x;/y: n.m. Ezr 5 , Jozadak, the father of Joshua, the high-priest; on the meaning of the
2
personal name → Heb. qd;x;/hyÒ. †
*bzy: → bzIyve.
*÷zy: → *anEzÒamo.
*µjy: the same in Heb.; to be on heat; Arm. only JArm. pa. to make hot (Dalman Wb. 182b).
Der. hm;j}.
bfy: the same in Heb.; pe., OArm., Tell Fekherye 15 bfyt (3rd. fem. jussive), see also p. 49; bfy
JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 183a; Beyer Arm. Texte 589); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Literary and Oral
Tradition 2: 496) and CPArm. (Schulthess Gramm. §151: 2, p. 75); (h)af., OArm., bfyh
Zendjirli (Donner-R. Inschriften 215: 9; 216: 12; cf. Degen Altaram. Gramm. §60, p. 75) and
EmpArm., EgArm. bfwh (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Saqqara; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 106,
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 454); Sam., CPArm. (Schulthess Gramm. §151, 4, and Lex.
82b); NeoArm. (Bergsträsser Gloss. 98); bfwa JArm., DSS (Beyer loc. cit.; for bf(y)ya in
Middle Western Aramaic dialects see Sokoloff Dictionary 239); Syr. (ettaf., Brockelmann
Lexicon 301a) and Mnd. YT\P, af. <aut\ip (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 192a; Nöldeke Mand.
Gramm. 279); → baf.
pe: impf. bf'yyE (cf. JArm.; Bauer-Leander BArm. 141f :: Brockelmann ZDMG 94 (1940),
252: it is pleasing, it is wished for, with l[' Ezr 718; → baf, which serves as the pf. †
haf: pt. *bfiyhem] (Bauer-Leander BArm. 141e) in the personal name laeb]f'yhem] (→ HAL
523b; HALOT 552). †
lky: the same in Heb.; the root interchanges with → lhk, or the one is a by-form of the other;
Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 91 refers to Folmer The Aramaic Language in the Achaemenid Period
(1995), 41; EmpArm., EgArm. (Hermopolis, Cowley Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar, Kraeling Arm. Pap.;
cf. Leander §38d, e); Nab. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 107; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 456);
Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 5b); JArm. pe. pf. lkeyÒ; impf. l/KyI (Dalman Wb. 183b); DSS (Beyer
Arm. Texte 597); CPArm. yekol (see Schulthess Gramm. §137, 2c; Lex. 83a; Sokoloff loc. cit.
says that the thematic vowel is e, not o); NeoArm. awkel (Bergsträsser Gloss. 49).
pe: pf. lkiyÒ (Or. yekol, cf.? Bauer-Leander BArm. 102v), T;l]k&eyÒ; impf. lKuyI Da 329 and lKuTi 5
16Q (Or. tikol), in error lk'Wy Da 210 and lkwt 516K (a Hebraism! Bauer-Leander BArm. 142j,
k), the last form is also in EmpArm. (RÉS 1973: 10f; see Jean-H. Dictionnaire 107); pt. lkiy:,
fem. hl;k]y”;, pl. ÷ylik]y”.;
—1. to be able, with l] and inf. Da 210.27.47 317.29 415.34 516 65.21.
—2. to prevail against, defeat (Heb., HAL 393a; HALOT 410; JArm., DSS (Beyer loc. cit.);
NeoArm. af.) Da 721 with l] of the person. †
*µy": Heb. µy:: Arm.; EmpArm., Pehl. (Junker Frahang 3: 2); EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar,
Saqqara); Palm., JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 107 s.v. µyI; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary
458); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 184a; Beyer Arm. Texte 597); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 84a);
Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 303a); Mnd. iama (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 186a; Nöldeke
Mand. Gramm. 100); NeoSyr. (Maclean 120b); > Arb. yamm (Fraenkel 231); Bauer-Leander
BArm. 221e: det. aM;y": sea Da 72f. †
¹sy: the same in Heb.; OArm., Zakir haf. [t]¹swt 1st. pf. (Donner-R. Inschriften 202 B: 4/5), cf.
Degen Altaram. Gr. §60, p. 74; EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Driver Arm. Docs.;
Saqqara) haf. impf. (Leander 60j); Nab. af. <wsp; Hatra (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 109;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 462); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 185a; Beyer Arm. Texte 598)
and CPArm. af. ¹se/a (Schulthess Lex. 85a); Syr. <ausep (Brockelmann Lexicon 304b); Sam.
usef (Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 91 refers to Macuch Gramm., where forms with zayin and
samekh are mentioned); Mnd. YZP ettaf. <tauzap to be added, joined (Drower-Macuch
Dictionary 191b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 173, 315, 343, 347).
hof: pf. 3rd. fem. tp's]Wh (variant BHK1 tp's} Wh, cf. Bauer-Leander BArm. 40m!);
Bauer-Leander BArm. 141h: to be added Da 433. †
f[y:Heb.Å[y;EmpArm.,EgArm.pt.f[ycounsellor (Ah\iqar; cf. Leander 82j; Jean-H. Dictionnaire

110 s.v. Å[y; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 464), sbst. hf[ advice (Ah\i-qar, Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 206; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 880 s.v. >s\h); JArm. (see now Sokoloff, DSD
7 (2000), 92: only Late Jewish Literary Arm.) pa., (h)itpa., DSS (Dalman Wb. 185b; Beyer Arm.
Texte 599) and Å[y pe., itpe.
pe: pt. pl. sf. yhi(/)fo[} y: (variant, Baumgartner in Eissfeldt Fschr. (1947) 48f): to advise, pt.
sbst. (EgArm.) counsellor Ezr 714f. †
itpa: (Baumgartner ZAW 45 (1927), 108f = Umwelt 95f); Bauer-Leander BArm. 110g, 140b
Wf['&y:t]ai, see also 130g: to take counsel together Da 68. †
Der. hf;[e.
*axy: the same in Heb.; axy, axwm Sam.; a[y Pehl. (Junker Frahang 20: 4; Jean-H. Dictionnaire
110); JArm., DSS y[y “branches” (Dalman Wb. 185b; Beyer Arm. Texte 599); Syr. yi>aµ
(Brockelmann Lexicon 304b), and Mnd. Y<A (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 393a; Nöldeke Mand.
Gramm. 246f) to allow to sprout; sbst., OArm., Zendjirli aqwm the east (Donner-R. Inschriften
215: 13, 14); EmpArm., EgArm. h/a[wm with the same meaning as OArm., but more often
linked in a construct-chain ˜wm m (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Saqqara, Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 164 s.v. axmII; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 604 s.v. mws\<); Syr. yaµ>éÆtaµ plant(s),
mau>éÆtaµ sprouting, plant, grass (Brockelmann Lexicon 305a); Bauer-Leander BArm. 26c;
Baumgartner ZAW 45 (1927), 100f = Umwelt 88f; see now Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 92.
Der. ayxiyve.
bxy: the same in Heb.; bxy Sam.; JArm. pe. bxeyÒ to stand, pa.: 1. to secure, substantiate; 2. to
speak the truth, say what is certain Da 719; so Levy Wb. 2: 256b on this vb. (see now Sokoloff,
DSD 7 (2000), 92: a printing error; for abyxy rd. hbyty); Dalman Wb. 186a gives only the pa.,
and subsequently also KBL; Beyer Arm. Texte 599 for pa. cites only Da 719, but besides this
mentions the sbst. hbxy (yas\baµ) “certainty”; EgArm. (Kraeling Arm. Pap.) ys\b legitimate
(Jean-H. Dictionnaire 110 s.v. bxyII; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 465 s.v. ys\b2); also EgArm.
(Kraeling Arm. Pap.) pa. pt. ys\b, first meaning; cf. Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 6a); otherwise
Arm. has bxn to set out, plant (on which see HAL 408a, 674f; HALOT 427, 714, s.v. I bxn);
OArm., Zendjirli (Donner-R. Inschriften 214: 10); Nab., Palm. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 184 s.v.
bxnI; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 750 s.v. ns\b3 stele, and 749 s.v. ns\b 1 to erect); JArm.,
DSS (Dalman Wb. 186a, bxy to secure, substantiate, and 275b, bxn to plant, insert; Beyer Arm.
Texte 640); CPArm. ns\b (Schulthess Lex. 127b); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Literary and Oral
Tradition 2: 475); Syr.; Mnd. NS\B (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 305; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm.
239); NeoArm. (Bergsträsser Gloss. 64); NeoSyr.
pa: inf. ab;X;y" (on the variant ab;(y)Å{iy" see Montgomery Daniel 309) to make certain, with
l[', denominative from byXiy" (Bauer-Leander BArm. 273g): l[' ab;X;y"l] tybix] Da 719; Plöger
KAT xviii: 105, the literal sense of the form is “to substantiate the truth”, for which see p. 102,
“to find out precise details”; cf. ZüBi, “I longed to discover precise information”; cf. also Beyer
Arm. Texte 599, “to reach a certain conclusion”, and Vogt 76b, certa cognoscere; NRSV: then I
desired to know the truth concerning the fourth beast; REB: then I wished to know what the
fourth beast really signified. †
Der. byXiy".
dxy: → adx.
byXiy:" MHeb., JArm. certain, true, irrefutable (Dalman Wb. 186a); Sam. yis\s\ob (Ben H\ayyim
Gloss. 6a); EmpArm., EgArm. bxy valid (Kraeling Arm. Pap. 10: 17, arps; Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 110 s.v. bxyII; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 465 s.v. ys\b2); JArm., 1. definite,
valid, true; 2. ancestral, especially the ancestral Israelite, so Levy 2: 256f. Reasoning from Ex 12
19, where Heb. jr'zÒa, is rendered by Tg. as ab;yXiy", Dalman Wb. 186a suggests the translation
o
“native”, which is probably not too generalising; it is then taken up by KBL, where the meaning
is applied also to Samaritan; Bauer-Leander BArm. 192e: det. and fem. ab;yXiy" well established
(corresponding to Heb. ÷m;aÔn<) HL;mi Da 613, am;l]j, 245; fem. reliable information Da 716, literally
“what is certain, what is reliable” vs.19, variant ab;X;y"l] inf. pa. → bxy; adv. byXiy"A÷mi
(Bauer-Leander BArm. 255s) surely Da 28; ab;yXiy" (det. or fem. Bauer-Leander BArm. 254p,
336d, on p. 337) positive, affirmative; yes of course 324. †
dqy: the same in Heb.; OArm., Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften 222 A: 35, 37); EmpArm., EgArm. (
Ah\iqar 103); JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 110; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 466);
JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 186b; Beyer Arm. Texte 599); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 86a); Syr.
(Brockelmann Lexicon 306b); Mnd. YQD (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 193a; Nöldeke Mand.
Gramm. 244); NeoSyr. (Maclean 121b).
pe: pt. fem. det. aT;d]qiy: (Bauer-Leander BArm. 241t), Or. yaµqeµdtaµ: to burn ˜y: ar;Wn Da 36.11.
15.17.20f.23.26.
†
Der. *hd;qeyÒ.
*hd;qey:Ò dqy; JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 186b; Beyer Arm. Texte 599); shows influence of
Canaanite, Bauer-Leander BArm. 186y :: Brockelmann ZDMG 54 (1900), 252f (→ hr;z«GÒ), cstr.
with l], td'qeyli: burning, td'qeyÒ aV;a, firebrand Da 711. †
*ryQiy:" rqy: the same in Heb.; EmpArm., Pehl. (Junker Frahang 26: 8: ykl); EgArm. (Ah\iqar;
Jean-H. Dictionnaire 110; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 466); JArm. (Dalman Wb. 186b);
CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 86b); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 488); Syr.
(Brockelmann Lexicon 308a); Mnd. iaqir, iaqira (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 187a; Nöldeke
Mand. Gramm. 124); NeoSyr. (Maclean 121b); NeoArm. iqqer (Bergsträsser Gloss. 70);
Bauer-Leander BArm. 192e: det. ar;yQiy", fem. hr;yQiy".
—1. difficult Da 211.
—2. honourable Ezr 410. †
*rqy: the same in Heb.; Arm. to be dear, be costly, be esteemed: EmpArm., EgArm. haf. rqwh (
Ah\iqar); Palm. af. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 110 s.v. rqyI; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 467 s.v.
yqr1); Mnd. YQR (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 193a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 149 af.), pe. and
pa. in Mnd.; JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 187a; Beyer Arm. Texte 599); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex.
86a); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 6a); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 307b) pe. and pa., af., also itpa.
/etpa.
Der. *ryQiy" and *rq;yÒ.
*rq;y:Ò rqy; the same in Heb.; < Arm., Wagner 121 (p. 63f); EmpArm., Pehl. (alky Ps.); Palm.,
Hatra, JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 110; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 467 s.v. yqr2);
JArm. ar;q;yÒ/yai (Dalman Wb. 187a, 16b); DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 599f); CPArm. (Schulthess
Lex. 86b); Sam. <yqr (éÆqaór) (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 6a); Syr. <éÆqaµraµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 307b);
Mnd. >qar, >qara (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 356a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 115); NeoSyr.
iqaµraµ (Maclean 11a); Bauer-Leander BArm. 187d: with wÒ, rq;ywI Da 714, cstr. with l], rq;yli 427.33
(thus, with variant instead of rq'yli), det. with wÒ, ar;q;ywI 237 518, hr;- 520 (Hre- variant Sept.L,
Pesh., Vulgate): dignity, honour Da 26.37 427.33 518.20 714. †
µl,v]WryÒ, variant µle-, the same in Heb., JArm. and CPArm.; EgArm. µlwry (Cowley Arm. Pap.
30: 18); Nab. µlrwa; Syr. <u/<orisûlem; Mnd. >urasûlam (µalarw[, Drower-Macuch Dictionary
346a): place name Jerusalem Da 52f 611 Ezr 48-719 (22 times); see Heb. (KBL; HAL 417b;
HALOT 437). †
*jr'y:Ò Heb. jr'y<; EmpArm., Pehl. (Junker Frahang 27: 1; Herzfeld Paikuli 510); Bauer-Meissner
Pachtvertrag 1; EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Saqqara, Behistun) Xanthos,
Hatra, Nab., Palm., JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 111 s.v. jryII; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 469 s.v. yrh\2); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 188a; Beyer Arm. Texte 600); CPArm.
(Schulthess Lex. 87a; Gramm. §86); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 309a); Mnd. iahra
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 185a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 66, 170); NeoSyr. yerh\aµ (Maclean
122a); NeoArm. (Bergsträsser Gloss. 75); Bauer-Leander BArm. 224g: cstr. with l], jr'yli, pl.
÷yjir]y:" month Da 426 Ezr 615. †
*Jry; Akk. warka: after, behind (AHw. 1467b; CAD A/2: 271).
Der. *hk;r]y".
*hk;r]y," Or. yi-: Jry; with the same meaning in Heb. Jrey;: JArm., Targ. aK;r]yI/y", DSS (Dalman
Wb. 188a; Beyer Arm. Texte 600); fem. thigh and *hk;reyÒ back, Heb. in form *hk;reyÒ (sic!); Akk.
(w)arkatu(m) back part, rear, remnant (AHw. 1467b; CAD A/2: 274); Arb. warik hip; basic
form *warikat; Bauer-Leander BArm. 186y: pl. sf. Htek;r]y": thigh Da 232, the thighs of a statue. †
laer;c]y:I place name, Israel Ezr 5 1 → Heb. (HAL 422, HALOT 442). †
['WvyE: n. masc. Jeshua/Jesus Ezr 5 ; → Heb. I ['WvyE.

2
†
*÷vy: the same in Heb., to sleep; Arm. has only the sbst. → *hn:v.]
ty:: Heb. I tae. —a) ta (see Cross-Freedman Early Hebrew Orthography 26); OArm., Zakir
(Donner-R. Inschriften 202 B: 5–27); Sefire (222 B: 32; 223 C: 5; 224: 11, 13(?); Degen
Altaram. Gramm. §47b, <yt); EmpArm., Asshur Ostracon 6 (?).
—b) ty: EgArm. (Kraeling Arm. Pap. 3: 22); Nab., Palm., JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire
28 s.v. taI; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 47 s.v. <yt3); JArm. (mostly Targumic, see Dalman
Gramm. 110); DSS (Dalman Wb. 189a; Beyer Arm. Texte 601); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 88a;
Gramm. §58 and 62: 3); Sam.; Syr. (Nöldeke Syr. Gramm. 2171; Rosenthal Arm. Forsch. 201f,
also sbst. essentiae); for further bibliography see Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 92.
—c) Zendjirli (Donner-R. Inschriften 214: 28); also Pehl. (Herzfeld Paikuli); Nab. (Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 28, see above); also in → tw:l] and tw:K], EgArm. (a)twk (Ah\iqar; Driver Arm.
Docs.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.), and then later twk “as, so” (Rosenthal Palm. 86f); EgArm. (Ah\iqar
, Driver Arm. Docs.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Hermopolis, Cowley Arm. Pap.; Aimé-Giron Textes
araméens); Nab., Palm. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 117; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 495); JArm.
, DSS (Dalman Wb. 195b; Beyer Arm. Texte 601); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 92a); Syr. (also
<akwaµt, haµkwaµt Brockelmann Lexicon 17a, 175b); Mnd. akuat, kuat (Drower-Macuch
Dictionary 16a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 195, 363); NeoArm. (Spitaler 128h; hÉwoµt\ Bergsträsser
Gloss. 48); Brockelmann Grundriss 1: 314 <iyyaµ< = fem. -t :: Bauer-Leander BArm. 258j (on
which see also R. Meyer Elliger Fschr. 137–142, especially 138): sf. ÷/ht]y”;: a mark of the
accusative (but see R. Meyer loc. cit.): the Jews ÷/ht]y: t;yNIm' yDi whom you have appointed Da 3
12.
†
bty: Heb. bvy; bvy: OArm., bsy Deir Alla; Tell Fekherye 5, 16 (ysb pt. pe., cf. p. 49); by
Zendjirli (Donner-R. Inschriften 214: 8, 15, 20, 25; 215: 4; 216 passim); Sefire (224: 6, 7, 17);
bty EmpArm., Pehl. (Junker Frahang 20: 1f; Herzfeld Paikuli 479); EgArm. (Cowley Arm.
Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Behistun 22; Saqqara), Uruk 13, 38 (ia-a-ti-ib-a-a-<i-i = yaµtibaihéÆ, pt.
pl. sf. 3rd. masc.); Palm., JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 112; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 473 s.v. ysûb1); JArm. byteyÒ, DSS (Dalman Wb. 189b s.v. byteyÒ; Beyer Arm. Texte
601); Sam. yateb (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 6a); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 88b) and Syr. éÆteb
(Brockelmann Lexicon 311a); Mnd. YTB (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 193b; Nöldeke Mand.
Gramm. 244, pf. pe. byt[; NeoSyr. (Maclean 122b); Yemen wathaba (Rabin 28); sbst. bm
Zendjirli (Donner-R. Inschriften 214 and 215, see 3: 37b; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 169); EmpArm.
, btym Teµma (Donner-R. Inschriften 229: 1); Nab. mwtbh, Palm. mytbh (Jean-H. Dictionnaire
150; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 697 s.v. msûb1); JArm. (Dalman Wb. 229a, ab;t]/m; Arm.
Texte 601); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 311b); Mnd. and NeoSyr. mwtb<, counsel (also seat,
dwelling place, but only in ecclesiastical and literary speech, see Maclean 165b).
pe: pf. btiyÒ, bt‰iyÒ; impf. bTiyI (Bauer-Leander BArm. 142j); pt. pl. ÷ybit]y”.;
—1. to be seated, take one’s place Da 79, an:yDi Da 710.26, cj.22 → bhy (cf. Akk. Codex
Hammurabi vi: 28, 30: itti dayyaµnéÆ ina déÆnim ul usûsûab “he does not sit any more in judgement
with the judges”, see also AHw. 1481a, under (w)asûaµbu(m); CAD A/2: 390b, s.v. asûaµbu 1 d 2´;
Kraeling Arm. Pap. 13: 3 of the king at the beginning of his reign).
—2. to dwell, reside Ezr 417. †
haf: pf. bte/h, Bauer-Leander BArm. 140d (JArm. also byteyÒa', cf. Dalman Gramm. 312);
CPArm. (Schulthess Gramm. §151: 4a; Lex. 89a): to allow to dwell, allow to settle Ezr 410. †
ryTiy:" rty; EmpArm., EgArm. adverb (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Driver Arm. Docs.), Uruk 17 fem.
emph. ia-ti-ir-ta-< (iatirta); Palm., JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 113; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 481 s.v. ytr3); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 189b; Beyer Arm. Texte 602); CPArm.
(Schulthess Lex. 89a); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 481) and Syr.
remaining, exceeding, adv. very much (Brockelmann Lexicon 313a); Mnd. iatir, iatira
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 181f; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 124) much, too much, excessive;
Bauer-Leander BArm. 192e: fem. hr;yTiy" and Da 322 64 77 ar;yTiy".

—1. extraordinary Da 231 433 512 64.
—2. fem. adverb, Bauer-Leander BArm. 254p, 337d; EgArm. arty (Ah\iqar 96): exceedingly
Da 322 77.19. †
*rty: the same in Heb.; OArm., Tell Fekherye 15 pf. haf. hwtr; Zendjirli pa. (?) (Donner-R.
Inschriften 214: 11, 12); EmpArm., Pehl. (Junker Frahang 27: 3); Hermopolis 4, 5; Dura
(Altheim 18f); Ashoka Inscription (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 113; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary
481 s.v. ytr1); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 190a; Beyer Arm. Texte 602); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex.
89a); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 552); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon
312b); Mnd. YTR pe.; pf. >tar, tar (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 194b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm.
29, 249); the basic meaning of the vb. is to be excessive (pe.); for the (h)af. and pa. see
especially Beyer loc. cit.; otherwise, according to KBL, there is the meaning to shoot up, be
surplus in the sbst. >wtl< summer (Pehl., Junker Frahang 27: 11; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary
835 s.v. >wtr); see also Syr. tautaµraµ surplus (Brockelmann Lexicon 313a); Akk. taµtu(r)ru(m),
tattu(r)ru surplus, profit (AHw. 1340b).
Der. ryTiy."
k: outside BArm. it alternates with q, cf. fyq, lfq.
K]: the same in Heb.; OArm., Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften 222 A: 25); EmpArm., EgArm.
(Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Driver Arm. Docs.; Saqqara); Asshur Ostracon
(Donner-R. Inschriften 233: 16), see Jean-H. Dictionnaire 113f; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary
482; JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 190a; Beyer Arm. Texte 602); NeoSyr. (Maclean 123a); in
CPArm., Sam., Syr., Mnd. and NeoArm. only in compound expressions (JyIa,' dK', tw:K] etc.); it
is to be treated like B]; Bauer-Leander BArm. 258k, 265x-a´.
—1. as Da 235.40 432 (→ al;) 511 74.6.8f.13 (someone like).
—2. as a preposition (Bauer-Leander BArm. 258k).
—a. according to, corresponding with Da 45 69 Ezr 69.18 718.25.
—b. with numerals and expressions of time, approximately, about h[;v;K] hd;j} Da 416, rb'K]
÷ynIv] 61 (→ II rB').
—3. as a conjunction: with inf.: as soon as 621 (variant B]).
—4. compound expressions: ydiK], hn:d]Ki, hd;j} ð' and hm;K] (→ yDi, hn:D] etc.) :: → ÷['K], tn<[,K],
t[eK].
*bdk: Heb. bzk, to lie; EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Behistun;
Ah\iqar); Pehl. (Junker Frahang 10: 6; see Jean-H. Dictionnaire 115; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 496 s.v. kzb1); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 192b; Beyer Arm. Texte 603); Syr.
(Brockelmann Lexicon 318a); Mnd. KDB I (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 203f; Nöldeke Mand.
Gramm. 370) pa.
Der. hb;d]Ki.
hb;d]K,i Or. ka-: bdk; Heb. bzÉK;; EgArm., Behistun, Ah\iqar sg. cstr. tbdk, sf. 3rd. masc. htbdk
, emph. atbdk (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 115; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 488); cf. Syr.
kaddaµbta (Brockelmann Lexicon 318a); JArm. ab;d]K'/Ki (Dalman Wb. 192b); Mnd. kadba
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 195; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 106); BArm. hb;d]Ki sbst. fem.;
Bauer-Leander BArm. 185s: lie, ˜ûi hL;mi Da 29 deceitful word, in apposition, see Bauer-Leander
BArm. 318g! :: 319e, a substantive construed as an adjective; it is also taken as a sbst. by Beyer
Arm. Texte 603 :: Vogt 79b s.v. *bd'K] (kadab), who takes it as an adj.; so also Rosenthal
Gramm. 87; but against this see KBL, “the adj. (cf. ht;yjiv]W) would be bD;K'; JArm., Syr., Mnd.
”†
hK;: Heb. hKo so, here; OArm., hk Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften 222 C: 1), hkl Uzziah 1 (
BASOR 44 (1931), 8f); EmpArm., ak Asshur Ostracon 8 (Donner-R. Inschriften 233); ak Nab.
, Palm.; hk JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 114; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 489 s.v. kh1
, and 483 s.v. k<2); ak JArm. “here” (also hK; Dalman Wb. 190b); DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 602);
CPArm. k< “here” (Schulthess Lex. 90a); Mnd. ka (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 194a; Nöldeke
Mand. Gramm. 204, ak); Syr. in haµrkaµ<, lekaµ< etc. (Nöldeke Syr. Gramm. §155 B); NeoArm.
hoµhÉa (Spitaler 188a; Bergsträs-ser Gloss. 32); Bauer-Leander BArm. 252a: adverb, here, hK;Ad['
as far as here Da 728. †
lhk: OArm., Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften 222 B: 25, 33; 223 B: 6); EmpArm., EgArm.
(Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar; Saqqara; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 115;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 489); JArm. lh'K] and lyheK] (Dalman Wb. 193b); Eth. kehela
(Dillmann 812); Tigr. kahala (Littmann-Höfner Wb. 389a); Arb. kahila (Nöldeke ZDMG 59
(1905), 417, and Gesenius-Buhl); OSArb. khlt ability (Conti Rossini 167b; Beeston Sabaic
Dictionary 77); → lky.
pe: pt. lheK; (Bauer-Leander BArm. 131 l), pl. ÷ylih} ð;: to be able, be capable, with l] and
inf. Da 226 415 58.15. †
*÷heK:; Heb. ÷heKo; Deir Alla; EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap., see Vogt 81b); Nab; JArm.
inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 116; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 490); JArm., DSS (Dalman
Wb. 193b; Beyer Arm. Texte 603); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 91a); Sam. kaµ<en (Ben H\ayyim
Gloss. 6b); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 319a); Mnd. kahna (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 195b;
Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 61); Bauer-Leander BArm. 190y: det. an:h} ð‰; (variant hn:-), pl. aY:n"h} ð;,
sf. yhiwOành} ð; (poor variant ˜h} ð', Eissfeldt Fschr. 1947, 48ff): priest Ezr 69.16.18 712f.16.21.24. †
*hW:K:' EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.) hwk once ÷wk = kawwaµn
(Kraeling Arm. Pap. 12: 21), pl. ÷(y)wk and Nab. pl. emph. aywk (Cantineau 2: 106a), but see
Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 93; sf. ûtwk a gnostic text (Dupont-Sommer La doctrine gnostique de
la lettre ÒWawÓ d’après une lamelle araméenne inédite (Paris, 1946); cf. Jean-H. Dictionnaire
116 s.v. wk and hwk; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 492 s.v. kwh); JArm. at;WÒK' pl. ÷ywk (the
fem. pl. at;W:K' is uncertain, Dalman Wb. 195b), DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 603f); CPArm.
(Schulthess Lex. 91b s.v. wk) and Syr. kawetaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 320a); NeoArm. hÉaut\a
(Bergsträsser Gloss. 48 s.v. hÉww); Mnd. sbst. masc. sg. kaua (Drower-Macuch Dictionary
196a); pl. formed as masc.; Mnd. pl. kauia (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 196a; Nöldeke Mand.
Gramm. 172); > Arb. ka/uwwat (Fraenkel 13); etymologically uncertain, but hardly a loanword
from Akk. kamaµtu outer districts, environs (fem. pl. from the adj. kawuÆm, kamuÆ outer, AHw.
466b; CAD K: 126b, kamð A), cf. Zimmern 32: pl. (Bauer-Leander BArm. 180o) ÷yWIK' fem.:
window Da 611. †
vr,/K: n.m.: Cyrus II, Cyrus the Great, the king of Persia 559–529 (Pauly-Wissowa (Kl.) iii:
417–419; Reicke-Rost Hw. 1035) Da 629 Ezr 513f.17 63.14 (cf. Heb. vr,/K; HAL 445; HALOT
466b, also for etymology). †
cj. lyk: Heb. lwk, in Arm. also interchanges with lwk, and in Arm. the meaning is to measure;
EmpArm., Pehl. (Junker Frahang 19: 1); Palm. af. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 116 s.v. lwkI;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 493 s.v. kwl1); Nab. kyl< one who measures land, surveyor
(Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 498 s.v. kyl2; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 118); JArm. lwk pe., af.,
itp. (Dalman Wb. 194 s.v. lwkI); CPArm. lyk af. (Schulthess Lex. 92b); Syr. passive, ittaf.
(Brockelmann Lexicon 325b); Mnd. pe. KUL and KIL (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 206b;
Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 250, 241); NeoSyr. (Maclean 123b); sbst. measure, JArm. (Dalman
Wb. 197a) and Syr. al;yÒK' (Brockelmann Lexicon 325a); Mnd. kila, variant ka>la, ki>la
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 212b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 5).
itpe. (Bauer-Leander BArm. 145n!): pt. pl. ÷yliykiT]mi, to be fixed Ezr 63, cj., instead of
÷ylib]/sm]; so Rudolph Esra und Nehemia 54, “and its dimensions (yhi/jv]miW) are to be
measured”; see also BHS, but the text is corrupt and the meaning remains uncertain, which is
why Gunneweg KAT xix/1: 103, 104 avoids giving any rendering of the word; see again lbs;
NRSV: burnt-offerings are brought; REB: fire-offerings are brought, both of which follow MT.
†
*rK'K:' Heb. rK;Ki, Or. (Kahle Text des AT 73) and Jerome (Sperber HUCA 12/13 (1937/38),
230) *kakkar; El-Amarna kakkaru round silver disc (Letter 41: 42; see AHw. 422a; CAD K:
49b; EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.) rknk, pl. ÷rkk, ÷rknk and ÷yrknk; Nab., Palm.,
JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 118; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 500 s.v. kkr); JArm.,
DSS (Dalman Wb. 197b; Beyer Arm. Texte 604); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 326a) and
NeoSyr. ar;K]K' (Maclean 131b); Mnd. kakria pl. (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 197a); in
Mandaean the meaning is always “talent(s)”; JArm. at;yriK;K' honeycomb, honey in the comb
(Levy 2: 326a; see also Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 93); cf. Dalman Wb. 197b; CPArm. krkry
(Schulthess Lex. 98a) and Syr. kakkaµréÆtaµ honeycomb (Brockelmann Lexicon 326b); basic form *
karkar, Ruzûicûka 7f; Brockelmann Grundriss 1: 245; Bauer-Leander BArm. 192h: pl. ÷yriK]K',
variant ˜JK' and ˜ð]Ki (Bauer-Leander BArm. 216r; Blake 94’); ? fem. (Syr., Mnd.,
Bauer-Leander BArm. 198b) :: Leander 90e: talent (Galling Bibl. Reallexikon 174ff;
Reicke-Rost Hw. 1928; de Vaux Inst. 1: 309ff = Lebensordnungen 327–331) Ezr 722. †
*lKo: llk; the same in Heb.; Deir Alla; OArm. lk totality, all, whole (Donner-R. Inschriften 3:
p. 35a); Zakir (text 202); Zendjirli (text 216); Sefire (texts 222, 223, 224; Degen Altaram.
Gramm. §67b p. 87f); Tell Fekherye *lk, sf. masc. pl. µlk 4, sf. fem. pl. ÷lk 3, 5; cf. p. 52;
EmpArm. lk (for syntax see Fitzmyer, Biblica 38 (1957) 170–184; occasionally also lwk
especially Hatra); EgArm. emph. alk and forms with sf. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm.
Pap.; Driver Arm. Docs.; Hermopolis; Saqqara; Ah\iqar); Saqqara (Donner-R. Inschriften 267
A: 1); Elephantine (270 B: 2); Pehl. (Junker Frahang 25: 26, kr<; Herzfeld Paikuli 535, kl<); see
Leander pp. 38–40; Uruk 14 kul; Tema (Donner-R. Inschriften 228 A: 19); Nab., Palm., Hatra,
JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 119; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 500); JArm. al;Ko, DSS
(Dalman Wb. 197b; Beyer Arm. Texte 604–606); CPArm. kl and kwl (Schulthess Lex. 93a); Syr.
(Brockelmann Lexicon 326b); Mnd. kul (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 206b; Nöldeke Mand.
Gramm. §226); NeoSyr. kul (Maclean 132a); NeoArm. hÉull (Spitaler 62h; Bergsträsser Gloss.
44); Bauer-Leander BArm. 87g, the same in the cstr., Da 212 32f.5.7.15 43 58.19 68 714.27, otherwise
AlK; Or. kol with-out maqqeph aL;Ko Da 49.18.25, aL;Ko‰ 240 Ezr 57, cj. hL;Ko (= aL;Ko) insert after
Jh;ywI Ezr 65 (Rudolph Esra und Nehemia 56; BHS, cf. Gunneweg KAT xix/1: 103), det., or
fossilised accusative, Bauer-Leander BArm. 88h; Leander 39n :: -aµ< adverbial ending as Driver
Arm. Docs. viii: 2; xxii: 6f; Avr. 3: 3 (Driver Arm. Docs. p. 27a on viii: 2); sf. ÷/hL]K; Da 238 719
K (Q ÷yhe-) Bauer-Leander BArm. 32k: the whole; it is generally placed before the word with
which it is associated in the cstr. state; it may follow the associated word (Bauer-Leander BArm.
318e, EgArm., Leander 39: l; Hatra 23: 1, corresponding to Donner-R. Inschriften 244; Heb. 3,
with suffix) aL;ko am;l;v] all peace Ezr 57.
—1. before determined sg. the whole Da 235.39 331 48.17 626 723, cf. Da 248 62.4.27 727 Ezr 420 617 7
16.25.
—2. —a. before determined pl. all Da 212.30.44.48 32f.5.7.10.15.31 43.15.32.34 58.19.23 68.25f 77.14.23 Ezr
721.24f; with sf. ÷/hL]K; all of them Da 238 719K, ÷yLeaiAlK; all these 240.
—b. before collective sbst. all ar;c]BiAlK; 49, ¹s'K] lKo (abs.! Bauer-Leander BArm. 308k) Ezr 7
16, aL;Ko (see above) all Ezr 57 all these 425 (Heb. lKoh' Jos 2145), aL;kol] for all Da 49.18, hn:D]AlK;
all this 522 716, yDiAlK; all that which Ezr 721.23, yDiAlk;B] over all that which Da 238
(anacolouthon :: wherever Bauer-Leander BArm. 367c, see Commentaries).
—3. with indet. sg., every Da 329 616, vn:aÔAlK; 310 57 613 Ezr 611, with pt. 713, yDiAlK; everyone
who Da 68 Ezr 726, yDi vn:aÔAlK; Da 613, AlK; (nomen regens before the sbst.) any (Nab., JArm.,
Syr.) Da 210 68.13, Jl,m,AlK; al; … 210 no king, cf. 235 46 65.16.24, … al; Alk; 66, Alk;l] … al; 3
28, lbeqÕAlK; → lbeqÕ.
†
llk: → Heb. llk qal to bring to completion, finish, no further stem formations; JArm., DSS
(Dalman Wb. 199b; Beyer Arm. Texte s.v. llk 708); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 206a s.v. sûkll)
and Syr. sûaf and i/esûtaf. (Brockelmann Lexicon 327b); Mnd. sûaf. (Drower-Macuch Dictionary
217a); it appears to be possible to take the vb. as a loanword from usûaklil, passive usûtaklil (so
Zimmern 70; KBL; Beyer Arm. Texte 708; Bauer-Leander BArm. 92i; and Vogt 166a; cf. also
AHw. 1264b, under sûuklulu(m)); see also CAD ð/3: 221 but this is not completely certain, see
Kaufman 104.
šaf (Bauer-Leander BArm. 92i): pf. sg. ll'k]v', pl. Wlli&k]v' Ezr 416 and 412Q (K prop.
correction ÷Wll]k]v'yÒ, so e.g. BHK3; Gunneweg KAT xix/1: 84:: Rudolph Esra und Nehemia 38;
cf. BHS aY:r'Wv wyriv; hl;l;k]v'l]), sf. Hlel]k]v'; inf. hl;l;k]v' to finish Ezr 412 (see above) 53.9,
llik]v'wÒ hn:B] to finish building 511 614. †
hištaf. (Bauer-Leander BArm. 93m): impf. pl. ÷Wll]k]T'v]yI to be finished Ezr 413.16. †
hm;K:] → hm;.
÷Ke: the same in Heb.; OArm., Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften 222); Tell Fekherye line 10 (p. 24),
<h\r kn with the translation “in the future”, probably “later”; EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm.
Pap.; Driver Arm. Docs.; Ah\iqar; Behistun 37, Akk. ki-a-am); Saqqara (Donner-R. Inschriften
267 A: 3); Asia Minor, Arebsun (264: 3, 4); Pehl. (Junker Frahang 25: 33; Herzfeld Paikuli
538); JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 122; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 516 s.v. kn4);
JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 201a; Beyer Arm. Texte 607); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 94b); Syr.
(Brockelmann Lexicon 333a); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 6b); Mnd. kin (Drower-Macuch
Dictionary 213b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 207: ÷yk, ÷[k, as a variant also ÷y[k); CPArm., Syr.
and Mnd. then; Hatra 6: 1 ÷yka (? :: Jean-H. Dictionnaire 117 s.v. ÷wkII); Syr. <aken; Mcheta 8
(Donner-R. Inschriften 276; Armazi, Altheim-Stiehl Arm. Sprache 268; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 279 s.v. hkyn); Syr. kaµkan, kaµkanna “thus, so” (Nöldeke Syr. Gramm. §155c): A÷Ke
Ezr 62: adverb, thus, so, with rma, and Ezr 62 with btk, always anticipatory, Da 224f 411 67 75.
23 Ezr 53 62.
†
am;n&eK] and am;n”eK:] EgArm., Saqqara µn[û]; Kraeling Arm. Pap. 11: 2; and Asoka 5 (Donner-R.
Inschriften 279); see Jean-H. Dictionnaire 123; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 519; the
derivation is not certain but possibilities include: —a) K] + am;ynE < rm'anE (JArm., but see
Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 93, for a different opinion). —b) ÷Ke + hm; (Bauer-Leander BArm.
253d, 372). —c) keµn “thus, so” + affix -aµm + adverbial ending -aµ (Beyer Arm. Texte 607).
Of these three possibilities it is the last two (b and c) that come into consideration (in KBL it is
the second of them, b); DSS (Beyer loc. cit.); adv. thus, so; anticipatory with btk Ezr 48, with
rma 54.9.11; resumptive with db[ 613, see Segert ArchOr. 24 (1956), 387f. †
vnk: Heb. snk vb. to assemble; EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap., and Behistun itp.); cf.
Uruk 12 (pt. passive masc. pl. sf. ka-ni-sûa-a-a[-<i-i] → bty); Palm. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 123;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 520 s.v. knsû1); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 202b; Beyer Arm.
Texte 607); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 95a); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 335a); Mnd. KNSð
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 220a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 382); NeoSyr. to wipe (Maclean
136a); ? NeoArm. (Bergsträsser Gloss. 45 s.v. hÉnsû I); sbst. assembly; Pehl. (Junker Frahang
12: 9 aynk; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 123; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 520 s.v. knsû3); JArm.
aT;v]ynIK], aT;s]nIK], DSS (Dalman Wb. 202b; 202a; Beyer Arm. Texte 607); Ostracon from Eilat
hnk tyb (BASOR 82 (1941), 9f; 84 (1941), 4f); Syr. also kensûaµ and kenuµsûtaµ (Brockelmann
Lexicon 335 a and b); Mnd. knisûta (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 219; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm.
117); Arm. > Late Babylonian kinisûtu (AHw. 480b; CAD K: 386) and Arb. kanéÆsat (Fraenkel
275).
pe: inf. vn"k]mi to assemble Da 32. †
hitpa. (<itpe./<itpa.: JArm., CPArm., Syr., Mnd.): pt. pl. ÷yviNÒK't]mi, variant ÷yvinÒK-' (hitpa. or
hitpe., cf. the dialects where it is attested, and Bauer-Leander BArm. 216s) to gather together
Da 33.27. †
*tn:K:] the same in Heb., < Arm. (Wagner 128); EmpArm., EgArm. (Ah\iqar, Cowley Arm. Pap.;
Saqqara, Driver Arm. Docs.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.); Samaria, Xanthos (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 123
s.v. tnkI; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 520 s.v. knt1); for JPArm. pl. ÷wwnk see Sokoloff
Dictionary 264; CPArm. kn< (Schulthess Lex. 95a s.v. hnk); Syr. kenaµtaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon
334a); loanword from Akk. kinattu(m), kinaµtu associate, colleague (AHw. 479f; CAD K: 381a);
for the wider meaning of the sbst. as well as these dictionaries see also Fritz Rudolph Kraus
Vom mesopotamischen Menschen der altbabylonischen Zeit and seiner Welt (Amsterdam and
London, 1973), 60; it is also taken as a loanword from Akk. by Zimmern 46; see Bauer-Leander
BArm. 201j; Kaufman 64; Wagner 128; KBL; Beyer loc. cit.; see also Ellenbogen 88; pl. sf.
Htew:n:K], ÷/ht]w:n:K] masc.: associate, colleague Ezr 49.17.23 53.6 66.13. †
*yD;s]K:' → yD;c]K'.
*¹sk: Heb. I ¹sk to break off, cut; Akk. kasaµpu to cut into pieces (Driver WdO 2: 25f; Eilers
WdO 2: 322f; CAD K: 241b) :: traditionally as KBL ¹sk corresponds to Heb. II ¹sk (HAL
467a; HALOT 490) to be colourless, be pale; but ¹s'K] is rather from I ¹sk to cut, break off; cf.
also the etymolgy of Heb. I ¹s,K, (HAL 467a; HALOT 490), where both “to be pale” and “to
break off” are suggested.
Der. ¹s'K].
¹s'K:] Heb. I ¹s,K,; the etymological derivation of the sbst. is uncertain; the more recent proposals
are given under I ¹s,K, (HAL 467a; HALOT 490); perhaps it is a primary noun; OArm.,
Zendjirli (Donner-R. Inschriften 215: 11; 216: 10–11); EmpArm., Nerab (Donner-R. Inschriften
226: 7; 227: obverse 2); EgArm., Abydos (Donner-R. Inschriften 263; Cowley Arm. Pap.;
Driver Arm. Docs.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Hermopolis; Saqqara); Bauer-Meissner Pachtvertrag
12; Tell Arad; Samaria, Xanthos; Pehl. (Junker Frahang 16: 2); then there is the occupation
ypsk silversmith, so Cowley Arm. Pap. 13: 18–19; but against this see Leander 88q, who offers
a different opinion, “someone who has something to do with the control of mo-ney” (Kraeling
Arm. Pap. 158 in text 3: 2; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 526 s.v. kspy); Nab., Palm., JArm.
inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 124; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 524 s.v. ksp2); JArm., DSS
(Dalman Wb. 204a; Beyer Arm. Texte 608; JPArm. abs ¹seK], det. aP;s]K', see Sokoloff, DSD 7
(2000), 93, and Dictionary 265); Sam. kaµsep (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 6b); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex.
96a); Syr. kespaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 338b); Mnd. kaspa (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 199b)
and NeoArm. (Bergsträsser Gloss. 47 s.v. hÉsf); Bauer-Leander BArm. 224g: ¹s‰'K], det. aP;s]K':
silver.
—1. as a material for processing Ezr 715f.18.22 (others as under 2); for making representations of
the gods Da 232.35.45 54.23; for equipment for the temple Da 52, cj. 53.Ezr 514 65.
—2. silver used as money Ezr 717.22 (see above). †
÷['K,] Da 315, variant ÷[eK]; this temporal adverb, like → tn<[,K], t[,K], is to be connected with Heb.
t[e and hT;[', but the etymological derivation is uncertain, on which see THAT 2: 370f. Most
probably it is to be taken from the root y>d (w>d), as with THAT loc. cit. (with bibliography);
see also AHw. 16b s.v. adaµnum; CAD A/1: 97b, s.v. adannu; OArm., Sefire (Donner-R.
Inschriften 224: 24, k>t); EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Driver
Arm. Docs.; Saqqara, Hermopolis; see THAT 2: 371); Elephantine (Donner-R. Inschriften 270
A: 1; B: 1), see Leander 120m; Pehl. (Junker Frahang 25: 23; Herzfeld Paikuli 541; Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 125; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 526 s.v. k>n4); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb.
204b; Beyer Arm. Texte 661 s.v. n[); Bauer-Leander BArm. 255u: now Da 223 315 434 512.15f 69
Ezr 413f.21 517 66, is always at the beginning of a sentence: ÷['K]Ad[' until now Ezr 516. †
tn<[,K,] Ezr 4 712 and t[,K] 417; OArm., t[k Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften 224: 24); EmpArm.,
10f
t[k Asshur Ostracon (Donner-R. Inschriften 233: 20); EgArm. k>nt (Cowley Arm. Pap.; see
THAT 2: 371), Hermopolis t[k and tn[k (Driver Arm. Docs. t[k, see Leander 120m); Pehl.
→ ÷[k (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 125 s.v. ÷[kI; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 526 s.v. k>n4; see
also ÷['K]); DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 661 s.v. hn[); fem. of → ÷['K]; the word belongs to letters,
epistolary style; in the MT it always occurs with W and at the end of a sentence, which is why it
was taken earlier to mean “etc.”; but, like ÷['K], it is rather a link into what is to follow, and
marks the transition to the real point of concern in a letter; see Lidzbarski Ephemeris 2: 229f;
Heb. hT;['wÒ; kai; nu`n 2 Maccabees 16: and now; delete in Ezr 410. †
t[,K] → tn<[,K].
tpk: JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 206b; Beyer Arm. Texte 609); MHeb.; CPArm. (Schulthess Lex.
97a); Syr. and Mnd. KPT (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 222a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 85): pe.
and pa. to bind; Akk. kapaÆtu(m), D kupputu (AHw. 443b) to bring together, fasten together; cf.
CAD kupputu A, to compress, and B, to assemble; Arb. kafata to gather.
pe: pf. passive (Bauer-Leander BArm. 104b-e, 289d) Wtp&iK], Or. Wtyp&iK]: to be bound Da 321.
†
pa: inf. ht;P;K'; pt. passive pl. ÷ytiP]k'm] (Bauer-Leander BArm. 112t): to bind Da 320, passive
323f. †
*rKo: the same in Heb.; EmpArm., Mesopotamian rk, pl. ÷rk (Delaporte); EgArm. ark (?
Cowley Arm. Pap. 37: 13); Nab., Hatra (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 126 s.v. rkI; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 533 s.v. kr1); JArm. ar;/K (Dalman Wb. 195a); Syr. koµr and koµraµ (Brockelmann
Lexicon 342a), also kuµraµ (Payne Smith 1713); Mnd. kura (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 209a); >
Arb. kurr (Fraenkel 207); kovro" (Lewy Fremdwb. 116), loanword < Akk. kurru(m) (AHw.
511b; CAD kurru A; < Sumerian gur), on which see e.g. Zimmern 21; AHw. 511b; KBL;
Kaufman 65: pl. ÷yriKo: measure of capacity, for dry goods Ezr 722. †
*hl;B]r]K:' MHeb. hl;B;r]K' cock’s comb (Dalman Wb. 206b, but see now Sokoloff, DSD 7
(2000), 93); EmpArm., EgArm. sg. abs. hlbrk, pl. abs. ÷lbr[k] (Cowley Arm. Pap. 55: 11;
57: 2) a head-dress, probably a particular type of cap (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 126;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 534); this meaning (as well as the “cock’s comb”) is also in
JArm. (Dalman Wb. 207a; Jastrow 464a) and Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 343a); at;l]B;r]K', this
is the vocalisation of the sbst. in Dalman Wb. 207a and Brockelmann Lexicon 343a, for JArm. ::
Levy 2: 395 at;l]B'r]K'. It is a loanword from Akk. (Standard Babylonian) karballatu cap (AHw.
449a; CAD K: 215b, a loanword of unknown origin in Akk), on which see Kaufman 63. The
sbst. indicates the high-pointed caps of the Cimmerians, the kurbasiva of the Persians, cf.
ojrqokorubavntioi Herodotus iii: 92 (Streck in Sachau Fschr. (1915), 3991; Montgomery 211;
Zimmern 36): pl. sf. ÷/ht]l‰;B]r]K': cap (the caps of the three men in the fiery-furnace) Da 321;
Sept, Theodotion and Vulgate tiara, Pesh. sûarbaµlaµ (sûarbalaihoµn), → BArm. lB;r]s'; the way the
sbst. is rendered Brockelmann Lexicon 806b is sarabala; according to K. E. Georges
Lateinisch-Deutsches Handwörterbuch 2 (1880), 2226 saraballa is equivalent to sarabaµra, and
this is used for “the long white leg-wrappings of the Persians, pantaloons”. †
hrk: Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 342a) and NeoSyr. to be short (Maclean 138a), to suffer; Mnd.
KRA I (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 222) to be sorry (Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 365); JArm.
ay:r]K' suffering (Dalman Wb. 207b; for JBabArm. ahyrk sick person, see Sokoloff, DSD 7
(2000), 93); Akk. karuÆ(m) (AHw. 452b; CAD K: 229a, s.v. karuÆ (vb.)) to be (become) short,
become impoverished; the sbst. kuµru I (AHw. 512; CAD K: 570, s.v. kuµru A) daze, depression
may perhaps be associated with the vb. kaÆru(m) II to be bemused, be dazed (AHw. 452a; CAD
K: 240, s.v. kâru B); this same development of meaning can be seen in Heb. rxq (→ II rxq
HAL 1051f; HALOT 1126f); cf. the comparable root in JArm. Hr'K] (Dalman Wb. 207a), Syr. ke
rah (Brockelmann Lexicon 343b), NeoSyr. to be sorry (Maclean 138a); Arb. kariha to detest;
Eth. kuarha (Dillmann 833) to be averse, detest, IV to be unwilling.
itpe. (Baumgartner ZAW 45 (1927), 108f = Umwelt 96): pf. 3rd. fem. tY"riK]t]a,/ai,
Bauer-Leander BArm. 159r, 333f: to be distressed (j'Wr) Da 715. †
*z/rK;: MHeb. zWrK] public announcement, proclamation (Jastrow 664b; Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000),
94 vocalises z/rK;); Nab. krwz (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 126; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 534);
JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 207a; Beyer Arm. Texte 609); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 97b s.v. zrk
); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 598; ZA 16 (1902), 9916); Syr. kaµroµzaµ
(Brockelmann Lexicon 344a); Mnd. kaluza (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 197a; Nöldeke Mand.
Gramm. 55, who says that in Mandaean it does not mean “caller” but “voice”; NeoSyr.
(Maclean 139a); NeoArm. (Bergsträsser Gloss. 50); MHeb.; as a loanword it does not come
from kh`rux (Bauer-Leander BArm. 191z), but from Old Persian hÉrausa caller (Schaeder Iran.
Beiträge 56; Eilers 19f :: Telegdi 1981); Pehl. hÉroµs; for further bibliography on the etymology
see Sokoloff loc. cit.; BArm. det. azÉ/rK; herald Da 34. †
Der. zrk (denominative).
zrk: denominative < z/rK; (Bauer-Leander BArm. 274m); (h)af. JArm. (Jastrow 665b); CPArm.
(Schulthess Lex. 97b); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 344a); NeoSyr. (Maclean 177b s.v. mkrz)
and NeoArm. (Bergsträsser Gloss. 50); Sam. pe. krz to proclaim (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 6b);
MHeb. qal and hif; > Arb. karaza to preach, announce (Wehr-Cowan 820a, karaza 2).
haf: pl. sf. Wzrik]h' to make a proclamation Da 529. †
*aser]K,; Or. kurseµ; Heb. aSeKi; OArm., asrk Zendjirli (Donner-R. Inschriften 216: 7); Sefire
(224: 17), yashk, probably a mistake for yasrk “my throne”; Tell Fekherye 13 krs<h, with
3rd. masc. sf. “his throne”; EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.): emph. aasrk (Ah\iqar
133), with 3rd. masc. sf. hasrk (Cowley Arm. Pap. 6: 2); Pehl. aysk (TiS 1: 1); JArm. inscr.
(Jean-H. Dictionnaire 127; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 537); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb.
209a, ay:s]r]Ku; Beyer Arm. Texte 610); CPArm. ysrwk (Schulthess Lex. 98a); Syr.
(Brockelmann Lexicon 348a); NeoSyr. kursi (Maclean 129a); Mnd. kursia (Drower-Macuch
Dictionary 209; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 166); NeoArm. korsa (Bergsträsser Gloss. 50); > Arb.
kurséÆ; > Tigr. kursi (Littmann-Höfner Wb. 399a; Leslau 27); loanword < Akk. kussuÆ(m), Old
Akkadian and Assyrian kusséÆum (AHw. 515; CAD K: 587b-593a), < Sumerian guza
(Brockelmann Grundriss 1: 245; Zimmern 8 :: Bauer-Leander BArm. 2331; Beyer loc. cit., “a
loanword of unknown origin”; the same in the cstr.: sf. HyEs]r]K;, pl. ÷w:s;r]K; (JArm., Syr., Mnd.)
Bauer-Leander BArm. 233i.
—1. seat Da 79.
—2. throne, for a king 520, for a god 79. †
yD;c]K:' Heb. µyDic]K' (HAL 477b; HALOT 502a): cuneiform Kal-da-a (Tallqvist Names 111a);
Palm. aydlk Chaldaean, astrologer (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 121; see now Sokoloff, DSD 7
(2000), 94) and aydlka Lidzbarski Ephemeris 1: 197; Corpus Inscr. Sem. 2: 4358, 4359);
JArm. ha;d;s]/c]K', DSS (Dalman Wb. 203a, 210b; Beyer Arm. Texte 610); Syr. Kaldaµyaµ
(Brockelmann Lexicon 329a); the same as Mnd. Kaldaia (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 197a),
from which comes the Syr. denominative vb. kaldéÆ and <akled (Brockelmann Lexicon 329a);
Mnd. KLDA (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 216b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 89, “to enchant,
practise magic”); Syr. sbst. kaldaµyuµtaµ a Chaldaean practice, a magical procedure (Brockelmann
Lexicon 329a); JBabArm. laydsk the angel of the Chadaeans: det. a;yD;c]K' Da 530, i.e. K ay:D;-,
Q ha;D;- (Bauer-Leander BArm. 51k) and similarly a;yD;s]K' (Bauer-Leander BArm. 27h) Ezr 512;
pl. ÷yaiD;c]K', det. ayED;c]K' Da 25 K and Or., Q yaeD;-, Bauer-Leander BArm. 204 l.
—1. proper name, Chaldaean, one who comes from Chaldaea Da 38 (or to be taken as under
2, see Bentzen 35) 530 Ezr 512.
—2. a Chaldaean, one who is an astrologer; Palm., (Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 510);
Herodotus, Strabo, Diodorus etc., Pauly-Wissowa 3: 2055ff; Pauly-Wissowa (Kl.) 1: 1123; see
Reallexikon für Antike und Christentum 2: 1006ff; cf. also Beyer loc. cit.; Reicke-Rost Hw.
296); Da 25.10 44 and 57.11. †
btk: the same in Heb.; OArm., Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften 222 C: 1[?], 2); EmpArm., Asshur
Ostracon (233: 9, 12); Pehl. (Junker Frahang 23: 1f; Herzfeld Paikuli 481); Bauer-Meissner
Pachtvertrag 17; EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Saqqara, Hermopolis);
Samaria, Xanthos, Nab., Palm., Hatra (Donner-R. Inschriften 245: 1; 256: 7; Pul-i D, 7); JArm.
inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 128 s.v. btkI; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 540 s.v. ktb1); JArm.
, DSS (Dalman Wb. 211a; Beyer Arm. Texte 610); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 98b); Sam. (Ben
H\ayyim Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 493); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 351b); Mnd. KTB
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 225; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 42) and KDBII (Drower-Macuch
Dictionary 204a); NeoArm. (Bergsträsser Gloss. 48 s.v. hÉtb); NeoSyr. (Maclean 142a).
pe: pf. bt'K], pl. Wbt&'K]; impf. bTuk]nI; pt. fem. a/hb;t]K‰;, pl. fem. ÷b;t]K‰;, passive (or pf.
passive? < Bauer-Leander BArm. 173o) bytiK]: to write Da 55 626 71 Ezr 48 510, passive Ezr 57 62
.†
Der. bt;K].
bt;K:] btk; the same in Heb., < Arm.; Nab.; Palm. painting (Dura Inv. 15); JArm. inscr.;
EmpArm. hbtk, and Xanthos, Hatra, JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 129 s.v. btkII;
CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 98b); Sam. aktaób (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 6b), and Syr. (Brockelmann
Lexicon 351b); ? > Arb. kitaµb (Fraenkel 249); Eth. ketab (Dillmann 852); so also Tigr.
(Littmann-Höfner Wb. 414b); Mnd. kdaba (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 203b); Bauer-Leander
BArm. 189r; the same in the cstr.: Ezr 618 poor variant bt'K] (BHK1.2); det. ab;t;K], Da 57 and 15
hb;t;K].
—1. writing, inscription Da 57f.15–17.24f.
—2. document, and the contents of that document Da 69–11, instruction, rule Ezr 618, salt
˜J al;AyDi (→ yDi 2c) that is without any instruction > an unrestricted supply of salt Ezr 722, see
Rudolph Esra und Nehemia 70, unlimited, literally “without anything in writing”; cf. Syr. delaµ
h\usûbaµn without measure, without charge (on delaµ see Nöldeke Syr. Gramm. §328 F). †
*ltk, Or. koµtal (Bauer-Leander BArm. 224k, l): Heb. *lt,Ko; Palm. ltk (Jean-H. Dictionnaire
129; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 547); JArm. al;t]Ku (Dalman Wb. 211b); DSS (Beyer Arm.
Texte 611); so also CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 99a); Syr. (BrockelmannLexicon352b);Mnd.
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 211a); NeoArm. hÉotla (Bergsträsser Gloss. 48); > Arb. kaut\al,
kaut\all (Fraenkel 223, with some scepticism). Perhaps the Heb. sbst. has been taken over from
the Arm., where it seems to be deeper rooted (on which see Wagner 142 and Kaufman 65). An
association may also be made with the Akk. kutlu(m), something like a side-wall (AHw. 518b;
CAD K: 610, “rail, fence”); but there does not appear to be any connection with the sbst.
kutallu(m), which is a Sumerian loanword (AHw. 517f; CAD K: 603, “back of the head, rear”),
although this was accepted in the past (see Zimmern 32, 45, and then subsequently KBL); on
this see now HAL 480b (HALOT 505a), where for Akkadian a reference is made only to kutlu
and no longer to kutallu. It remains uncer-tain whether Arm. al;t]Ku as a loanword is to be
directly linked with Akk. kutlu; perhaps an old and reliable heritage can be traced through
cognate etymology in both languages (as also perhaps in Hebrew): the same in the cstr.; pl. det.
aY:l't]Ku: wall Da 55 Ezr 58. †
l: —1. l is a prefix for the impf. of hyh (Bauer-Leander BArm. 152d), which is used in Western
Aramaic to avoid the same consonantal spelling as the divine name; but in Mandaean the prefix
l is also used with other verbs (Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. §166), and it occurs also in dialects of
Maghrebi Arabic; for Tell Fekheriye, Mesopotamia, Hatra and JBabArm. see Sokoloff, DSD 7
(2000), 94.
—2. it is assimilated in qls, cf. Jlh.
—3. it occurs as r in År'j} :: Heb. ql,j,.
l]: the same in Heb.; cuneiform la (Arm. loanword) see AHw. 520a; CAD L: 1; for OArm. see the
instances in Degen Altaram. Gramm. §45, 2a (p. 61): l with sf. yl, hl, µhl; Tell Fekherye l
p. 82, and once with sf. hl; also once ÷[ml; EmpArm., Nerab (Donner-R. Inschriften 225: 14,
ûl “to you”); Tema l (228: 3, 12, 17); Asshur Ostracon (233: 11 l; 8, 13 yl; 19 ûl; 8 hl);
EgArm. (for the forms with suffixes see Leander 123 i); for EmpArm. qt\yl-l see Sokoloff DSD
7 (2000), 94; Pehl. (Junker Frahang 24: 1; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 130; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 549 s.v. l5); the Semitic preposition la/li (also in the rest of the Arm. dialects (Palm.,
Nab., Hatra) with or without suffix); JArm., DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 611ff); CPArm.
(Schulthess Lex. 99a); Syr.; Mnd. (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 226a); NeoArm. (Bergsträsser
Gloss. 51), cf. Jean-H. Dictionnaire and Heb. HAL 482f (HALOT 507f); Bauer-Leander BArm.
258 l-p: sf. yli, Jl;, Hle, Hl' and an:l'& (variant Hl;, hn:l;&, Bauer-Leander BArm. 79s, t; 81z); µkol] (
EgArm.) Ezr 53.9 724, ÷/kl] Da 34, µ/hl] Jr 1011, µhol] (Zendjirli and EgArm.) Ezr 53f.9f 69, ÷/hl]
(Palm.) Da 235 314 63 712 Ezr 420 52, ÷hol] (EgArm. variant ÷/hl]) Da 721: preposition,
corresponding in general to Heb. l], but also to Heb. la, and l['.
—1. to express the direction or purpose of an action: with lza Da 217, hta 32, I ll[ 611, lybeyhe
Ezr 514, hmr Da 617, ÷ynIyÒ[' lf'nÒ 431, ûlh (am;[]f' a report reached someone) Ezr 55 (:: others,
who take it as a genitive, see below paragraph 10).
—2. in temporal expressions: tx;q]li near, literally near the end of a period of time Da 426.31,
÷ymil][‰;l] for evermore Da 24.
—3. to specify purpose: as, for Da 427 Ezr 69 719, with hwh to become as (Bauer-Leander BArm.
341x) Da 235.
—4. with inf. after verbs of going, send-ing, speaking, ordering, deciding, writing, becoming
etc.: to, in order to Da 29.12.14 32.16.32 64f.8 Ezr 422 714 and in other places.
—5. with inf. after al; to express a prohibition (Bauer-Leander BArm. 302g, h; Megillath Ta>
anith, Dalman Aram. Dialektproben (Leipzig, 1898), 1f): hy:n:v]h'l] al; to formalise an edict that
must not be changed Da 69.16, → al;F;b'l] al; with no delay Ezr 68.
—6. with a personal object: to, for: to tell to Da 24, without any vb., at the start of a letter Da 331
Ezr 57 712, to write to Da 626, to give to 216, passive Ezr 68, to offer to 610, to donate to 715f (→
bdn hitpa. 2.), to explain to Da 215, with ['ydiyÒ 318, yliG€ 219.
—7. dative of advantage: for Da 49.23 Ezr 610 (intercession), with passive 723.
—8. dative of possession: to belong to, meaning to have Da 616 74.6f.20, to be relevant to (of the
significance of a dream) 416, Hle 523 (:: others, who join it together with T;r]D'h', see below
paragraph 11), Hle yDi his, his own (→ yDi 2c), with hwh 424 517, with tyai Ezr 416, with lpn 720,
with jK'v]h' to try to find a reason against someone Da 65f (Heb. Dt 2214), passive 235 (:: others,
who take it as under 10 see below).
—9. used to express other relationships: to resemble something Da 75, corresponding to ÷y:nÒmil]
Ezr 617 (Heb. l] 19).
—10. as a periphrasis for the genitive (Bauer-Leander BArm. 315e, f; Heb. l 14): Ezr 55 (see
above, under 1).
—11. in dates: jr'yli … µ/y (for EgArm. see e.g. Cowley Arm. Pap. 1: 1): Ezr 615, tn"v] l] …
(for EgArm. see e.g. Cowley Arm. Pap. 2: 1, fwml tn in a year of tottering Dura, Altheim 9: 1)
Da 71 Ezr 424 513 63.
—12. it takes the place of the accusative marker with personal objects (Brockelmann Grundriss
2: 315ff; Bauer-Leander BArm. §100 q-z): in Old Aramaic only rarely; EmpArm., Tema
(Donner-R. Inschriften 228 A: 21f); EgArm. (see Baumgartner ZAW 45 (1927), 1171 (on p.
118) = Umwelt 1051; Rowley The Aramaic of the OT 102f; Rosenthal Palm. 683;
Ingholt-Seyrig-Starcky Rec. Palm. 151), det. Da 212.14.19.25 32.27 422.33 523 Ezr 52 67 (on which
see also below under 13) 725, with non-personal objects Da 234f 319 52.23 72 Ezr 412
(Bauer-Leander BArm. 341u), indet. Da 210.
—13. to introduce an apposition with em-phasis: that is to say all those who know the laws of
your God Ezr 725, in continua-tion of another construction (Bauer-Leander BArm. 324k) Ezr 67
(perhaps corrupt, but see also Rudolph Esra und Nehemia 56, who takes l] as a marker of the
accusative, see above paragraph 12), 714, see Rudolph 68.
—14. as an element in compound expressions: with a/G, hm;, d[', lbeqÕ.
al;, Da 4 hl: Heb. al¿; OArm. Al (Sefire), see Degen Altaram. Gramm. §47a; EmpArm., l
32
Nerab (Donner-R. Inschriften 226: 4, 6, 8); Asshur Ostracon (233: 8); al Tema (228 A: 21);
EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Driver Arm. Docs.; Kraeling Arm. Pap. 11: 8, d[lw stands for
d[ alw, see p. 283); Pehl. (Junker Frahang 25: 7; Herzfeld Paikuli 573); Sogdian
(Gautier-Benveniste 2: 222; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 133 s.v. al1; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary
558 s.v. l<1); al so also JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 212a; Beyer Arm. Texte 615); Sam. (Ben H\a
yyim Gloss. 6b); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 100a); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 354a); Mnd. la-,
from time to time also l-, li-, l<- (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 227a); NeoSyr. laµ (Maclean
143a-b); NeoArm. la, la< (Spitaler 2f, 124b and c; Bergsträsser Gloss. 52); → II ÷hel;;
Bauer-Leander BArm. §104a-c: not.
—1. negating a verbal sentence: Jr 1011 Da 25-714 (25 times) Ezr 413.21 55.16 726, with yDi and
impf., so that not (→ yDi 3c); to express a prohibition, only in Ezr 421 (→ la'); with pt. Da 227.43
312.16 (→ jvj) 44.6.15 58.15.23, with adj. Ezr 414 724; → yt'yai al; (corresponding to Heb. ÷yIa',
Late BibHeb. vyE aol Jb 933) Da 210f 314.18.25.29 432 (rd. with Codex Cairensis al;K], BHS) Ezr 416
; used elliptically al; ÷hewÒ and if not Da 318.
—2. negating a word: hm;k]j;b] al; Da 230, ÷ybiyvij} hl;K] 432 like people of no account,
Bauer-Leander BArm. 297c (bvj, cf. Theodotion wJ" oujde;n ejlogivsqhsan; similarly Vulgate
and Pesh.; rd. with Codex Cairensis al;K], BHS), al; … Jl,m,AlK; no king Da 210, cf. 235 46 65.16
.24 AlK; … al;, 66 al; yDi without (→ yDi 2 e b); with l] and inf. yDi hy:bn:v]h' al; irrevocable Da
69, al; yDi al;F;b'l] Ezr 68 without interruption, on which see Rudolph Esra und Nehemia 56;
also Gunneweg KAT xix/1: 104 (→ l] 5); cf. REB: so that the work may not be brought to a
standstill :: ZüBi, NRSV: without delay; al;h}, → h}; KBL: unlimited. †
Jal: the same in Heb.; in Arm. it is only the sbst. Ja'l]m' (and its derivatives) that comes from
this root (→ *Jal HAL 488a; HALOT 513a).
Der. Ja'l]m'.
*ble: the same in Heb.; EgArm. hblb? in his heart (Cowley Arm. Pap. 71: 6); Asia Minor,
Arebsun ybl ttna (?) the wife of my heart (Donner-R. Inschriften 264: 8/9, but see also 2: p.
311); JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 134; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 561); JArm., DSS
(Dalman Wb. 212b; Beyer Arm. Texte 616 s.v. bbl); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 6b); CPArm.
(Schulthess Lex. 100b); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 354b); Mnd. liba (Drower-Macuch
Dictionary 234b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 77); NeoSyr. libaµ (Maclean 144a) and NeoArm.
(Bergsträsser Gloss. 52 s.v. lpp); Bauer-Leander BArm. 221e: sf. yBili: heart Da 728. †
Der. *bbl.
*bbl: the same in Heb.; denominative from ble and bb'l]; Syr. pa. (Brockelmann Lexicon 355a),
and Sam. (Kahle Bem. 25; Ben H\ayyim Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 499) palp.; Mnd. LBB
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 228) to encourage > to drive on; also occurs in the pa. with this
latter meaning; CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 100b); Syr. i/etpa. to encourage oneself, to take
courage (Brockelmann Lexicon 355a).
*bb'l:] Heb. bb'le; OArm., Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften 223 B: 5; 224: 14, 15, 16); EmpArm.,
EgArm. (Hermopolis, Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar); Pehl. (Junker Frahang
10: 35; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 134; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 562); JArm., DSS (Dalman
Wb. 212b ab;b]li; Beyer Arm. Texte 616); Mnd. lbab, st. abs. and cstr. from liba
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 228b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 78); Bauer-Leander BArm. 186z:
the same in the cstr.; sf. Jb;b]li, Hbeb]li, Bauer-Leander BArm. 218c: heart Da 230 413 520–22 74. †
Der. bkl.
*vWbl]: vbl; the same in Heb.; Deir Alla; EmpArm., bl Nerab (Donner-R. Inschriften 226: 7);
EgArm. (w)bl (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Saqqara; Ah\iqar); Pehl. (Junker
Frahang 8: 1; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 135; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 565 s.v. lbsû2); JArm.,
DSS (Dalman Wb. 213a; Beyer Arm. Texte 616f); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 101a); Sam. lbwsû =
leµbosû (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 6b); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 358a); Mnd. (Drower-Macuch
Dictionary 228f; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 301) and NeoSyr. (Maclean 144b); JArm. (Dalman
Wb. 214a) and Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 358a) also vb;l]; NeoArm. labsûa (Bergsträsser Gloss.
52); Bauer-Leander BArm. 189o, a loanword from Canaanite, or from Akkadian, subsequently
noted in KBL; but this is very unlikely, for clearly the sbst. is pure Hebrew and has the same
formation as Akk. lubuµsûu(m) clothing (AHw. 561b; CAD L: 236a), cf. von Soden Gramm. §55l
(no. 17 a II): sf. HveWbl], pl. sf. ÷/hyvebul]: garment Da 321 79. †
vbl: the same in Heb.; EmpArm., pt. labisû(u) Uruk 20, 24; af. pf. 1st. sg. sf. al-bi-isû-te-e Uruk
31; EgArm. (Hermopolis, Cowley Arm. Pap.; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 135 s.v. vblI;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 565 s.v. lbsû1); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 213b vbel]; Beyer
Arm. Texte 616); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 101a) and Syr. vbel] (Brockelmann Lexicon 357b);
Sam. labasû (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 6b); NeoSyr. (Maclean 145a); Mnd. LBŠ (Drower-Macuch
Dictionary 229).
pe: impf. vB'l]yI, vB'l]Ti: to be clothed with Da 57.16. †
haf: pf. pl. WvyB&il]h' (variant BHK1, bet-ter WvBil]h', with short i, see Bauer-Leander BArm.
114h and j): to clothe someone Da 529. †
Der. *vWbl].
hl;: → al;.
I ÷hel:; the same in Heb.; EmpArm. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 136 s.v. ÷hlII; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 567 s.v. lhn2); Tema ÷hl (Donner-R. Inschriften 228 A: 8.10); < *la-hinna;
therefore; a loanword < Heb. or Canaanite, Bauer-Leander BArm. 256v, x :: Driver AnOr 12
(1935), 65f; Montgomery 150f: therefore Da 26.9 424. †
II ÷hel:; MHeb.; EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar; Saqqara);
Nab. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 135 s.v. ÷hlI; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 566 s.v. lhn1); JArm.
÷hl (laµ “not” + hen “if”; Dalman Wb. 214b); DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 564); cf. with KBL aL;ai
and ÷yhel;aÔ; Sam. ala, ÷ala (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 1b); CPArm. ala (Schulthess Lex. 8b) and
Syr. <ella (Brockelmann Lexicon 20a); Mnd. >la (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 350; Nöldeke
Mand. Gramm. 208); NeoSyr. ilaµ (Maclean 12a s.v. <l<); NeoArm. illa if not, except, only, but
(Bergsträsser Gloss. 51 s.v. <l); Arb. <illaµ; Eth. <alaµ (Dillmann Gramm. §168b); Heb. al¿ µai; <
al; and ÷he, Bauer-Leander BArm. 264q, 366e see already above, under JArm. (:: Brockelmann
Grundriss 2: 482f = I ÷hel;).
—1. conj. except, as an introduction to a sentence (cf. al; ÷he Bauer-Leander BArm. 366d) Da 66
; as an element within a sentence Da 211 328 68.13.
—2. adversative particle (also EgArm.) but, yet Da 230 Ezr 512. †
*yw:l:e gentilic; Heb. ywIl,e Heb. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 136); JArm. ha;w:yle, DSS (Dalman Wb.
217a; Beyer Arm. Texte 617); for JPArm. abs yywwyl see Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 94; CPArm.
(Schulthess Lex. 101b) and Syr. lewaµyaµ; Bauer-Leander BArm. 196d: pl. det. K ayEw:l,e Q yaew:le
Bauer-Leander BArm. 51k: Levite Ezr 616.18 713.24 (de Vaux Inst. 2: 213–231, 253–263 passim =
Lebensordnungen vol. 2 passim, especially 192–334; Reicke-Rost Hw. 1077–79). †
*tw:l:] Pehl. (Junker Frahang 25: 36); Palm. (Rosenthal Palm. 85; cf. Jean-H. Dictionnaire 29 s.v.
taI; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 47 s.v. <yt3, cf. p. 49 s.v. 6; Gawlikowski, Semitica 23
(1973), 115, lines 2, 5); Asia Minor, Lidzbarski Ephemeris 1: 170, 1 and 3; JArm., DSS
(Dalman Wb. 216a; Beyer Arm. Texte 601 s.v. ty); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 102a; Gr. §134:
1); Sam.; Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 362b); Mnd. luat (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 232;
Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 194) and NeoSyr. (Maclean 147a); not from Heb. hwl (JArm., CPArm.
and Mnd., Kautzsch Gr. 1281) but from l] and tw: (→ ty), Bauer-Leander BArm. 259s:
preposition, near, beside, with ÷mi (JArm. tw:L]mi, cf. Beyer loc. cit.; Syr. men lewaµt, Nöldeke
Syr. Gramm. §156; Heb. µ[ime) and sf. Jt;w:l]A÷mi coming from you to here Ezr 412. †
µjl: —a) Heb. I µjl, on which see HAL 500a; HALOT 526a; CPArm. pt. (Schul-thess Lex.
102b); Syr. pa. to join together (Brockelmann Lexicon 363b); Mnd. sûaf to threaten
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 467b); the basic meaning is to be packed together > to come to
blows, probably to be related to Heb. µj,l, and Arm. µj,l] (cf. KBL and HAL).
—b) Heb. II µjl: denominative from the principal substantives.
µj,l,] variant µjel]: µjl: Heb. µh,l,; µj,l] (cstr.); OArm., Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften 222 A:
24; B: 38, 39; 224: 5, 7); Tell Fekherye 22: µjl, sf. lines 17 and 18 hmjl; EmpArm., EgArm.
(Cowley Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar; Saqqara); Pehl. (Junker Frahang 4: 10); Palm., JArm. inscr.
(Jean-H. Dictionnaire 137; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 572 s.v. lh\m4); JArm., DSS (Dalman
Wb. 216b; Beyer Arm. Texte 618), abs. µjel], det. am;j]l;; for JBabArm. amjn see Sokoloff,
DSD 7 (2000), 94; JArm.; Sam. lem (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 7a); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 102b)
and Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 364a); Tg.B am;j} l';Mnd.lahma(Drower-MacuchDictionary
227; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 54), and NeoSyr. lah\ma and lih\ma (Maclean 147b); CPArm.(with
sf.) and NeoArm. leh\ma(BergsträsserGloss.53;SpitalerGloss.89a);Bauer-Leander BArm. 182x:
bread, meal (with the latter meaning also in Syr., see Brockelmann Lexicon 364a, lah\maµ s.v. 2)
Da 51. †
*hn:jel:] A. EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Aimé-Giron); Kraeling
Arm. Pap. 12: 2 ahla why yz hnjl :: 12: 1 why yz ÷jl manservant, maidservant of the god
Yahu (cf. p. 144; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 137 s.v. ÷jl; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 537);
MHeb. hn:yjel] maid (Dalman Wb. 216a; but see Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 94: a literary
borrowing from Aramaic, with a reference to Jastrow 703); JArm. atnyjl: 1. maid; 2.
concubine (see Dalman Wb. 216a), variant ÷njyl (F. Lexa, ArchOr 9 (1937), 8; B. Hrozny,
ArchOr 7 (1935), 2); Targ. at;nÒyjel]forHeb.hm;a;andvg²l,yPi;Mnd.lihania (adj. from liha net) net
spirits, some type of evil spirits, originally succubae (Montgomery 252; Drower-Macuch
Dictionary 235b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 139); loanword from Akk. lahÉhÉinatu a woman who
has duties in a session of the court (AHw. 528a) and alahÉhÉinatu a woman with an official
position in the court of the queen (CAD A: I 294a); for the question of the loanword cf. also
Kaufman 66, and in particular Landsberger in Baumgartner Festschrift (1967), 198–204,
especially 198 and 204, “the woman who has duties in a session of the court”; the ten-dentious
way in which the holder of this office has been disparaged is the result of later tradition, see p.
204; JArm., Mnd.
B. older meanings: prostitute (W. Baum-gartner, ZAW 45 (1945), 90; Lewy, Orien-talia 19
(1950), 34f); from Akk. lahÉannu vessel, cf. skeuò" 1 Thessalonians 44.1 Peter 37, and
Strack-Billerbeck Kommentar 3: 632f; Lidzbarski Johannesbuch 2: 1278; < lahÉinnatu the
miller’s wife, female singer (Couroyer VT 5 (1955), 83 and 88).
C. Bauer-Leander BArm. 186y: pl. sf. Jt;n:jel], Hten:jel]: concubine Da 52f.23, also in the
sequence hn:jel]W lg¾ve, Theodotion paravkoitoi.
Cj. —a) Da 619 for ÷w:j} D' prop. hn:jel], ? cf. 52.
—b) Pr 313 for t/jm]l' prop. t/jmol] to those women who destroy (pt. pl. fem.) or t/nj} l'l], cf.
Da 52, see BHS :: Plöger KAT xviii: 369 MT: but kings also destroy 371. †
*yleyle: Heb. lyIl'; OArm., Zendjirli alyl (Donner-R. Inschriften 214: 24); Sefire hlyl (222 A:
12) = laileµ (AfO 8 (1932–3), 5 :: Cross-Freedman Orthography 27, leµlaµh, with an acc. with the
ending -i); cf. Beyer Arm. Texte 618, who also links with this sbst. the personal name La-a-a-li-e
(= Layleµ, or alternatively LaialeÆ, so Borger p. 56b, line 72b), the king of the land of Yadi<; the
personal name is listed also in Tallqvist Names 119b; EmpArm., Pehl. (Junker Frahang 27: 4);
aylyl Nab., JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 138 s.v. ylyl; Hoftijzer-Jean Dictionary 574
s.v. lylh and lyly); JArm., DSS hlyl (Dalman Wb. 217a s.v. ay:l]yle; Beyer Arm. Texte 618); for
JPArm. abs. yleyle see Sokoloff Dictionary 282; Sam. léÆli (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 7a); CPArm. ylyl
(Schulthess Lex. 103b); Syr. abs. layleµ< and laylay (Nöldeke Syr. Gramm. §146; cf.
Brockelmann Lexicon 366a); Mnd. lilai (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 236a; Nöldeke Mand.
Gramm. 127, lelyaµ); NeoArm. leµlya (Bergsträsser Gloss. 53); JArm. and CPArm. also al;yle
(but see Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 95); NeoSyr. leµléÆ or léÆléÆ (Maclean 148a); the basic form is *
laylay, Bauer-Leander BArm. 192h: det. ay:l]yle, masc. night, as the time for a vision Da 219 72.7.
13, ay:l]yleB] HBe in the same night Da 530.
†
*÷vl: the same in Heb.; JArm. af. to slander (Dalman Wb. 221b), denominative, loanword < →
Heb. ÷vol;. → BArm. ÷V;li.
÷V;l:i Heb. ÷/vl;; Deir Alla; OArm., ÷l Zendjirli (Donner-R. Inschriften 214: 9); Sefire (224 C:
17/18, 21); EmpArm., Uruk 5, 8, 9 li-i-sûa-an; EgArm., Ah\iqar; Pehl. (Junker Frahang 10: 22);
OArm. and EmpArm., tongue, word; JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 140;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 584); JArm. an:V;li tongue, language (Dalman Wb. 221b); DSS
(Beyer Arm. Texte 619); for JPArm. abs. ÷V;l, see Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 95; CPArm.
(Schulthess Lex. 105b) and Syr. lesûsûaµnaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 371a); Mnd. lisûana
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 273a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 122) with the same meanings as in
JArm.; cf. NeoSyr. lisûaµnaµ (Maclean 151a) and NeoArm. lisûsûoµnaµ (Bergsträsser Gloss. 54);
Bauer-Leander BArm. 189p; Littmann, OLZ 31 (1928), 580; Gordon, AfO 12 (1937–9), 117: pl.
det. aY:n"V;l,i masc.: tongue, language (Heb. s.v. 4); together with µ[' and hM;au in sg. Da 329, pl.
34.7.31 519 626 714: language group, people, cf. Is 6618 and Standard Babylonian. (Achaemenid),
referring to Darius I, sûar maµtaµte sûa naphÉar lisûaµnu gabbi the king of the lands of all the people
together (see AHw. 556a, s.v. lisûaµnu(m) 3c; CAD L: 214a and c). †
m: —1. within BArm. it interchanges with n in (n)/Mh' :: ÷WNai (Bauer-Leander BArm. 70i); outside
BArm. in µr'B], ÷he, hM;T'.
—2. it interchanges with p only outside BArm.: apn > amn; OArm., EmpArm., Nab., Hatra and
Palm. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 183; Cantineau Gr. p. 39).
am;: Ezr 6 8 → hm;.
ha;m:] Heb. ha;me; OArm., Tell Fekherye m<h, lines 20, 21, 22, cf. p. 47; Zendjirli (Donner-R.
Inschriften 214: 28); EmpArm., EgArm. ham (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Leander §60, 116n and o,
117q); Nab., Palm., JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 140; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary
586); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 221a; Beyer Arm. Texte 619); for JPArm. see Sokoloff, DSD 7
(2000), 95; Sam. maµ (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 7a); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 106a); Syr.
(Brockelmann Lexicon 372b: maµ); Mnd. ma (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 238a; Nöldeke Mand.
Gramm. 189); NeoSyr. maµ (Maclean 151a); NeoArm. em>a (Bergsträsser Gloss. 55; Spitaler
115m); Bauer-Leander BArm. 250q: dual ÷yIt'am; (corresponding to Heb. µyIt'ame; JArm. ÷t'am;,
see Dalman loc. cit.; see now Sokoloff loc. cit.); CPArm. ÷ytam, see Schulthess loc. cit.); Sam.
pl. maµ<baµn (Ben H\ayyim loc cit.); dual maatem/n, cf. Leander 117q; Bauer-Leander BArm.
250q; cf. Vogt 96a: hundred Da 62 Ezr 617 722; dual, two hundred Ezr 617. †
*anEzÒamo: root wzn, see Leander 85za; Vogt 98b; Heb. µyIn"zÒamo; EgArm. anzwm (Cowley Arm. Pap.
15: 24; Kraeling Arm. Pap. 7: 26); Pehl. anzm (Junker Frahang 19: 4; cf. Jean-H. Dictionnaire
144 s.v. ÷zwm; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 587 s.v. m<zn1); JArm. ay:nÒz¾/m, DSS (Dalman Wb.
227a; Beyer Arm. Texte 565 s.v. ÷zwm); JArm. also an:d]/m, pl. ÷ynId]/m (Dalman Wb. 226b);
CPArm. mwzny< (Schulthess Lex. 5a, s.v. <zn), the same as Mnd. muzania (Drower-Macuch
Dictionary 261a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 148); loanword < Heb., sg. with w as a
back-formation from dual, Bauer-Leander BArm. 234 l; Leander 85a: det. ay:nÒz¾amo, variant pl.
aY:n"zÒmo (on this form see Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 95): balance Da 527. †
*rm'ame: rma; Heb. rm;a} µ'; Arm. loanword (Wagner 149); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 222a;
Beyer Arm. Texte 515) ar;m]ame (for JPArm. rm'yme see Sokoloff Dictionary 305) the same as Syr.
(Brockelmann Lexicon 26b); Mnd. mimra (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 267a; Nöldeke Mand.
Gramm. 129); Bauer-Leander BArm. 194s; the same in the cstr.: word, command Da 414 Ezr 69
.†
*÷am;: Heb. ynIaÕ and hY:nIa;Õ Canaanite anayi (El-Amarna 245: 28; CAD A/II: 106a); Ug. <nyt and
(?) <ny, all of which have the meaning ship; Akk. unuµt(m) and (rarely) enuµtu(m) equipment (
AHw. 1422b); Arb. <inaµ< receptacle, eating dish; the underlying root of the sbst. is uncertain; it
could be Heb. II hna (Vogt 96b), cf. Bauer-Leander BArm. 194r with the meaning “to grasp,
contain”, or perhaps even *<uµn “to be strong, be massive” (Beyer Arm. Texte 620!); OArm., Tell
Fekherye 16, p. 47 m<ny< (pl. emph.) the items of equipment, corresponding to Akk.: ú>-nu-te;
EmpArm., ÷am Nerab (Donner-R. Inschriften 226: 6); EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling
Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar; Saqqara); Pehl. (Junker Frahang 5: 7); JArm. inscr. receptacle (Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 141; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 588); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 222a, an:am;;
Beyer loc. cit.); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 106a); Syr. ma(<)naµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 373a);
Mnd. mana (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 246; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 129); Bauer-Leander
BArm. 194r; pl. ynEam;, aY:n"am;, variant ˜÷'m;: receptacle, vessel Da 52f.23 Ezr 514f 65 719. †
hL;gIm:] llg; the same in Heb.; a loanword from Arm. in Late Babylonian and Arabic; EmpArm.,
Pehl. (Junker Frahang 15: 4, mglt<; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 593); JArm. (Dalman Wb.
223b, at;L]gIm]; cf. Beyer Arm. Texte 644); Syr. megalletaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 115b); Mnd.
magalta (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 238b); also Akk. magallatu scroll (CAD M/1: 31; see
Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 95); Bauer-Leander BArm. 194u: scroll Ezr 62. †
rgm: the same in Heb. (HAL 518a; HALOT 546a), < Arm. (Wagner 150); EmpArm., EgArm.
(Cowley Arm. Pap. 30: 14; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 594 s.v. mgr1); JArm. (Dalman Wb.
224a); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 374a).
pa: impf. rG¾m'yÒ (Bauer-Leander BArm. 132c): transitive, to overthrow Ezr 612. †
*jB'd]m:' jbd; Heb. j'BezÒmi, Or. ma-, Sperber HUCA 12/13 (1937/8), 235; EmpArm., EgArm.
mdbh\< (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 146; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 607 s.v.
mzbh\); JArm. aj;B]d]m', the same as DSS (Dalman Wb. 224b; Beyer Arm. Texte 546); CPArm.,
Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 138b); NeoSyr. (Maclean 158a) and NeoArm. (Bergsträsser Gloss.
20); Sam. medbah\ (Ben H\ayyim Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 506); Mnd. madba and madbha
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 239a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 43; cf. Zeu;" mavdbaco" (Baudissin
Kyrios 3: 506 note); basic form *madbih\(Bauer-Leander BArm. 194t; W. Baumgartner ThZ 9
(1953), 155): det. hj;B]d]m': altar Ezr 717. †
hD;mi Ezr 4 68 and hD;nÒmi 413 724: Heb. II hD;mi: < Arm. (Wagner 151) < Akk. ma(d)dattu(m),
20
mandattu (AHw. 572; CAD M/1: 13a); in Late Babylonian specifically for a payment (AHw.
572b; see Driver on Arm. Docs. 10: 3; Segert, ArchOr 24 (1956), 389; as a loanword from Akk.
, see also Zimmern 9; Ellenbogen 98; Kaufman 69; EmpArm., EgArm. hdnm (Cowley Arm.
Pap.; Driver Arm. Docs.; see also Jl;h}; Kraeling Arm. Pap. 5: 7; Saqqara; Jean-H. Dictionnaire
158; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 656 s.v. mndh1); JArm. aT;a]D'm' tribute, hD;nÒmi tax
(Dalman Wb. 224b, 240b; on both forms see now Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 95); DSS adm
(Beyer Arm. Texte 627); Syr. madda<taµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 374b); Bauer-Leander BArm.
29x, 50e: cstr. tD'mi: contribution, tax Ezr 68; together with Jl;h} w" /lB] 413.20 724. †
*r/dm] and Da 211 * rd;m:] rwd; MHeb. r/dm; (Dalman Wb. 225a); JArm. ar;/dm] and ar;d;m]
(Dalman Wb. 225a.b); DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 548); Syr. medyaµraµ (Brockelmann Lexicon
147b); Mnd. mdurta (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 258a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 130), variant
mda-, mdi-; Bauer-Leander BArm. 194r, 42 times: sf. Hre/dm] Da 521, Jr;dom] 422.29, ÷/hr]d‰;m]
(variant ˜r/dm]) 211: abode, dwelling Da 211 422.29 521. †
yd'm:; the same in Heb.; Arm. name of a territory, Behistun 12, 26 ydm (Cowley Arm. Pap. pp.
251f); Mnd. madai (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 239a) Media :: name of a people; Old Persian
cuneiform Maµda; Akk. Madaia; adj. ydm Median, the Medes (Kraeling Arm. Pap. 5: 17): det.
ay:d;m; K, ha;d;m; Q (Bauer-Leander BArm. 51k).
—1. Media Ezr 62.
—2. collective the Medes Da 528 69.13.16, always together with sr'p;W; sg. det., of Darius, the
Mede Da 61. †
*hn:ydim:] ÷yd, originally a town or district with its own court of justice; > Heb. (Wagner 152);
EmpArm., EgArm. sg. abs. h/anydm, det. atn(y)dm (Driver Arm. Docs.; Cowley Arm. Pap.;
Saqqara); Tell Arad, Samaria; Pehl. (Junker Frahang 2: 7); Nab., Palm. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire
143; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 597); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 225a; Beyer Arm. Texte
553); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 43a); Sam. emdinta; Mnd. mdinta (Drower-Macuch Dictionary
258) > mdin (Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 1553); Syr. (K, Brockelmann Lexicon 145b) and
NeoArm. mdéÆncða (Bergsträsser Gloss. 56); medittaµ Nab., also Palm., Syr. (Q) and NeoSyr.;
province EgArm.; city Pehl., Nab. (?), Palm., Sam., NeoSyr. (Maclean 158b) and NeoArm.;
both meanings are attested in JArm., Syr., Mnd. (Tor-rey, Harvard Theological Review 17
(1924), 83ff); Bauer-Leander BArm. 194u: cstr. tn"ydim], det. aT;nÒydim] (Bauer-Leander BArm.
204i), pl. ÷n:ydim], det. at;n:ydim], pl. ÷n:dim].
—1. satrapies, the administrative divisions of the Persian Empire (Sept. cwvra) Da 32f Ezr 414;
aT;nÒydim] dWhyÒ 58, ˜µ] yd'm; 62.
—2. city, cf. Sept., Theodotion (but see Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 95: province) tn"ydim] lb,B; Da
248f 31.12.30 Ezr 716 (cf. Palm., J. Cantineau, Syria 12 (1931), 122: 3f). †
*rd;m:] → *r/dm].
hm;, Ezr 68 am;: Heb. hm;.

A. outside BArm.: —1. interrogative pronoun: —a) what? OArm., hm Sefire (Donner-R.
Inschriften 222 B: 26); m: hna hzjm what did I see? Nerab (226: 5); EmpArm., hm Ah\iqar 79,
165 (Leander §16, 17); Nab. hm (Cantineau Nab. 2: 115a, also ÷m); am JArm., DSS (Beyer
Arm. Texte 620f) and Sam., together with hm (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 7a); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex
. 105); Syr. (Nöl-deke Syr. Gramm. §68); Mnd. ma (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 237a; Nöldeke
Mand. Gramm. 94); NeoSyr. maµ (Maclean 151a s.v. m<); NeoArm. moµ (Bergsträsser Gloss. 55).
—b) how? Ah\iqar 151, 160.
—2. interrogative and relative pronoun, “that which”: OArm., Zendjirli laa hm what I
requested (Donner-R. Inschriften 214: 12; cf. Degen Altaram. Gr. §41, 42); Sefire tbtk hm
what I have written (Donner-R. Inschriften 222 C: 1–2), yny[b bf hm what seems best to me
(224: 3); EgArm. [dy al bblb hm ya no-one knows what is in my heart (Ah\iqar 163, cf.
177; cf. Leander 36d).
—3.) *yd hm > zm Zendjirli (Donner-R. Inschriften 214: 3, 22); Palm. ydm (Rosen-thal Palm.
52; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 144; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 599 s.v. mh2).
B. BArm.: Bauer-Leander BArm. 86a, 357/8m-o: —1. interrogative pronoun, what? Da 432.
—2. interrogative and relative pronoun, “that which” Da 222 Ezr 69.
—3. yDiAhm; (cf. Bauer-Leander BArm. 86a) Da 228.29a.45, ydiAhm; Da 229b Ezr 718, ydi am; Ezr 68
→ yDi 2.
—4. hm with a preposition: —a) hmk, JArm. a/hmk (= kamaµ, see Beyer Arm. Texte 621);
CPArm.; Syr. kemaµ, akmaµ; Mnd. kmaµ > hakmaµ Drower-Macuch Dictionary 218a; Nöldeke
Mand. Gramm. 206, 438); Heb. hM;K' how! Da 333 (Bauer-Leander BArm. 348c).
—b) hml (EgArm., Driver Arm. Docs. 12: 8) Ezr 422 and hm;l]AyDi (JArm. and CPArm. amld);
Syr. dalmaµ; Mnd. >dilma (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 341b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 209; >
Heb. hM;l' rv,a} and hm;L;v') Ezr 723 for what purpose > lest (Bauer-Leander BArm. 265c, 363w
:: hm; cf. Arb. maµ not, lest), ydi am;l] a decree about what you will do Ezr 68 (Bauer-Leander
BArm. 358n).
—c) hm;Al[' why? Da 215. †
*twm: the same in Heb.; OArm., Zendjirli (Donner-R. Inschriften 215: 16); Sefire pe. (224: 16),
haf. (224: 11, 15, 16), cf. Degen Altaram. Gr. §61 (p. 75 for pe., and p. 76 for haf.); EmpArm.,
Nerab pe. (Donner-R. Inschriften 225: 2, see Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 707 s.v. mt5; 226:
4); EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar; Saqqara; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Hermopolis); pe.
Hermopolis 5, 8; Saqqara (Donner-R. Inschriften 266: 9, atmk; it is uncertain whether the
form belongs to twm, on which see 2: p. 314); Armazi (276: 11); Pehl. (Junker Frahang 22: 5);
Nab., Palm., Hatra, JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 145; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 605
s.v. mwt1); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 235a s.v. tymi; Beyer Arm. Texte 621); CPArm.
(Schulthess Lex. 107b); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 7a); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 378a s.v. méÆt
); Mnd. (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 263b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 248); NeoArm.
(Bergsträsser Gloss. 60); NeoSyr. (Maclean 165b) myete (Polotsky Gr. 100b).
Der. t/m.
t/m: *twm; Heb. tw<m;; Deir Alla; OArm., Se-fire (Donner-R. Inschriften 222 B: 30?); EmpArm.,
Nerab (225: 10); EgArm., Saqqara 9 (see above under twm), sbst. (a)twm, also with sf. (Cowley
Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.); Nab., Palm., Hatra (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 146;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 607 s.v. mwt2); (a)twm JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 229a; Beyer
Arm. Texte 621); Sam. muµtaó (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 7a); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 107); Syr.
mautaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 378a); Mnd. muta (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 263b; Nöldeke
Mand. Gramm. 337); NeoArm. (Bergsträsser Gloss. 60) and NeoSyr. motaµna (Maclean 175a).
—a) Akk. muµtaµnu(m) (AHw. 687b; CAD M/2: 296a) epidemic, plague; JArm. an:t;/m; Pehl.,
Dura (Altheim 2, 4); JArm. ÷twm, DSS (Dalman Wb. 229a; Beyer Arm. Texte 621); CPArm.
mwtan (Schulthess Lex. 107); Syr. mutaµnaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 378a); Mnd. mutana
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 263b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 22 and 136).
—b) according to Zimmern 49 the Western Semitic sbst. was borrowed from Akk., but that is
uncertain; on this see Kaufman 74, who suggests an Amorite origin for the sbst.
—c) on the ending aµnu (muµtaµnu) cf.? von Soden Gramm. §56r “a particular death which is
unexpected or cruel”. Bauer-Leander BArm. 182a: death Ezr 726. †
÷/zm;: ÷wz; the same in Heb.; JArm. hn:/zm] (Dalman Wb. 229b; but see Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 95,
who regards this form as barbarous); CPArm. mzwn (Schulthess Lex. 55a); Syr. maµzoµnaµ
(Brockelmann Lexicon 192b); cf. EgArm. ÷wz (Cowley Arm. Pap. 10: 10, 17); Nab. food,
sustenance (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 73; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 308 s.v. zwn2); Mnd.
zawana (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 157b) breadwinner (nominal active pe., root ZWN
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 165a); Bauer-Leander BArm. 194r: nourishment, food Da 49.18. †
ajm: Heb. Åjm, as also in Akk. and Ug., on which see Wagner 160a; but Sokoloff, DSD 7
(2000), 96 disagrees, following Greenfield, JAOS 82 (1962) 290 note 7; the basic form of the
root is *mhÉh;É an Arm. loanword in Heb. I ajm and II hjm (Wagner loc. cit.); for a < [ < Å see
Leander 17h and Wagner loc. cit.; ajm (a consonantal); on the form of the root with original a
in Arm., see especially Degen Altaram. Gr. p. 42; OArm., Zakir (Donner-R. Inschriften 202 A:
15, 16); Sefire (222 A: 42); EmpArm., EgArm. (Ah\iqar, Saqqara); Bauer-Meissner Pachtvertrag
9 y[m]h\nk (there is some controversy about the restoration, cf. Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary
); Pehl. yjm (Junker Frahang 21: 4; see also Jean-H. Dictionnaire 147 s.v. yjm;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 610 s.v. mh\<); ajm JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 230a, I ajm;
Beyer Arm. Texte 621); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 108a); Sam. mh\h (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 7a);
Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 380a); Mnd. MH\A (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 258b; Nöldeke
Mand. Gramm. 373); NeoSyr. (Maclean 167b) and NeoArm. (Bergsträsser Gloss. 56).
pe: pf. 3rd. fem. tj;m], variant tj'm] (→ hwh, Bauer-Leander BArm. 161a) to strike Da 234f;
ajem; 519 variant (→ hyj haf., Bauer-Leander BArm. 170k and l).
pa: impf. ajem'yÒ: to strike, dy"B] (JArm. pa., > MHeb. pi.); cf. Arb. hÉaraba >alaµy yadihi
(Montgomery 246) to strike on the arm, hinder Da 432. †
hitpe: impf. *[a; l[' ajem]t]yI to be impaled on a stake Ezr 611; for the details see Rudolph
Esra und Nehemia 58 and Gunneweg KAT xix/1: 110; see also Vogt 99a. †
*hq;l]j]m:' qlj to divide; Heb. tq,l¿j} µ', JArm. hq;l¿j} µ', at;q]/lj} µ' (Dalman Wb. 231b; but
Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 96, takes these forms as Late JLitArm.); DSS only vb. (Beyer Arm.
Texte 580); Bauer-Leander BArm. 194v; pl. sf. ÷/ht]q‰;l]j]m': section, division of the Levites Ezr 6
18.
†
÷j'm:i → ÷nj.
afm: Heb. axm; EmpArm. afm; Pehl. (Junker Frahang 23: 4; Herzfeld Paikuli 483–490) and
EgArm., Behistun 8 (= Akk. ka-sûa-du); Saqqara (Donner-R. Inschriften 266: 4); Aswan (J.
Hempel, ZAW 47 (1929), 150f), see Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Driver Arm. Docs.
; on this see Leander §40b and f; Hermopolis; Palm., JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 148;
CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 108b); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 7a); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon
381b); Mnd. MT\A (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 264; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. §190); NeoSyr.
(Maclean 171a) and NeoArm. (Bergsträsser Gloss. 60) mostly changed into y˜l.
pe: pf. afm Da 425, hfm 713.22, 3rd. fem. tf;m], variant tf'm] (→ hwh) 419.21 and tyfm 421K
(corresponding to EgArm. and CPArm. ty"f]mi or ty"fim], Bauer-Leander BArm. 155r; Leander
64f and l), pl. /fm]; impf. afemiyI.
—1. to reach to (with l]) Da 48.17.19, to attain to 625, to come upon (with d[') 713; to come
over, affect Da 421, with l[' of the person, sbj. ay:L;[i tr'z«GÒ a decree of the Most High has come
upon my lord the king (NRSV); a decree of the Most High which affects my lord the king
(REB); to come over, happen to 425, sbj. aL;Ko all this came upon (NRSV; REB: befell) King
Nebuchadnezzar.
—2. abs. to occur, happen (an:m]z,I cf. Cowley Arm. Pap. 10: 7) Da 722; NRSV: the time arrived;
REB: the time came. †
laev;ymi: the same in Heb.; n.m.; Sept. Misahl, Mizahl (Wuthnow 76); DSS lyaym (Beyer
Arm. Texte 735) Da 217 → 17 and HAL 547b, HALOT 578a. The meaning of this personal
name is still generally uncertain, on which see Noth Personennamen 80. Some later suggestions
are mentioned in HAL and HALOT loc. cit., but the position remains now as it was for Noth:
“The derivation of laev;ymi is still uncertain; it is vocalised like laek;ymi but no cj. should be
attempted based on that personal name because in the Versions s-sounds are transmitted
reliably.” †
Jv'yme: Babylonian name for laev;ymi (Da 1 ) 2

7 49 312–30 (13 times), → HAL 548a; HALOT 578b);
DSS ûym and also ûm (Beyer Arm. Texte 735); the personal name has not been explained
satisfactorily, but for suggestions see especially Reicke-Rost Hw. 1196; Interpreter’s
Dictionary of the Bible 4: 302f; P.R. Berger, ZA 64 (1975), 225 proposes to translate the
personal name as “I am thought little of”, which appears to embody the Akk. vb. meÆsûu(m) to
crush, trample (AHw. 649; CAD M/2: 35b), but this is not convincing. †
alm: Heb. alem;; OArm., Zendjirli (Donner-R. Inschriften 215: 4); Tell Fekherye 22; EmpArm.,
EgArm. (Hermopolis 1, 6; Cowley Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar); Pehl. (Junker Frahang 25: 5; Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 151; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 627 s.v. ml<1); EmpArm., Asshur Ostracon
(Donner-R. Inschriften 233: 19f); Uruk 4, 7 pt. ma-li-e; JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 236b; Beyer
Arm. Texte 623 s.v. ylm); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 111a); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 7a); Syr.
(Brockelmann Lexicon 388a); Mnd. MLA (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 272); NeoSyr. (Maclean
178a); NeoArm. (Bergsträsser Gloss. 56); sbst. atalm Bauer-Meissner Pachtvertrag 9
(Jean-H. Dictionnaire 151; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 628 s.v. ml<h1).
pe: pf. 3rd. fem. tl;m], variant tl'm] (→ hwh), tal;m] and tal'm], Bauer-Leander BArm.
154m: to fill Da 235. †
hitp: pf. ylim]t]hi, Bauer-Leander BArm. 159q: to be filled with, with acc. Da 319, obj. am;jÔ. †
*Ja'l]m:' ûal to send; → Heb. Ja;l]m'; OArm., Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften 224: 8) envoy,
messenger; EmpArm., JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 151; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary
629 s.v. ml<k1); angel JArm. (Dalman Wb. 236b; Beyer Arm. Texte 616); CPArm. (Schulthess
Lex. 160b); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 354b); Mnd. m(a)laka (Drower-Macuch Dictionary
243b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 1291; NeoSyr. malaµkaµ (Maclean 178b) and NeoArm.
(Bergsträsser Gloss. 57); ? Palm. in the name of the deity lbklm Malacbh`lo", see Otto
Eissfeldt, “Tempel and Kulte syrischer Städte in hellenistisch-römischer Zeit”, in AO 40
(1941), 86ff :: Stark Personal Names 95b lb ûlm “Beµl is the king”; Bauer-Leander BArm.
194q, 217a: sf. Hkea} l]m' angel, messenger from God Da 328 623. †
hL;m:i llm; the same in Heb., loanword < Arm. (Wagner 172). OArm., Sefire (Donner-R.
Inschriften 222 B: 8, 41; C: 17, 19; 224: 2; Degen Altaram. Gr. §33, p. 52); EmpArm., Nerab
(Donner-R. Inschriften 226: 4); Asshur Ostracon (233: 12); Bauer-Meissner Pachtvertrag 12;
Samaria; Pehl. (Junker Frahang 10: 23, mry<; Herzfeld Paikuli 637); EgArm. (Cowley Arm.
Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Driver Arm. Docs.; Ah\iqar; Saqqara); Uruk 4, 7 pl. mi-il-li-ni; Nab.,
Hatra, JArm. inscr. word, matter (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 152; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary
630); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 239a; Beyer Arm. Texte 625); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 110b);
Sam. milla½ (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 7a); Syr. melletaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 386b); Mnd. milta,
minilta (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 268b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 54, 184); NeoSyr. milta
(Maclean 180b); ? > Arb. millat “religion” (Hw. Islam 505b); Bauer-Leander BArm. 181u,
199h, 238r: cstr. tL'mi, det. at;L]mi, pl. as everywhere ÷yLimi, yLemi, aY:L'mi (cf. ? Michel Grundlage
40).
—1. a) word; a word that is spoken Da 25.8 322.28 428 510 613 711.25 (with lLim') → hL;mi hb;d]ki 29
; the word of God which threatens punishment (with the root ¹ws) 430.
—b) a word that is written 515.26, pl. ÷yLimi (→ vare) narrative 71; others take this instance with
paragragh 2b; omitted in Theodotion; so also TOB.
—2. a) matter, affair (cf. Heb. rb;D;) Da 210f.15.17.23 615.
—b) the content or object of a vision, the thing that is seen Da 71 (:: 1b above).28, pl. 716 (cf.
Vogt 101a, under 2 :: Plöger KAT xviii: 102f), at;L]mi vs.28 meaning an event, pl. aY:L'mi vs.16,
events. †
jlm: Heb. II jlm; denominative from jl'm]; JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 237b; Beyer Arm. Texte
623); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 390b) and NeoSyr. to salt (Maclean 179a); Syr. itpa. with >am
(Brockelmann Lexicon 391a) to be intimate with, savour with salt > to enjoy intimate contact,
really to be bound together with (tiniv), cf. F. Passow Handwörterbuch der griech. Sprache (5th
edition; Leipzig, 1857), 1666b.
pe: pf. 1st. pl. an:j]l'm] to eat salt (already in Gesenius Thes. 790b), cf. Pesh. Ps 1414
<etmallah\ >amhoµn min melh\a: al;k]yhe jl'm] an:j]l'm] Ezr 414 to eat the salt of the palace, be under
an obligation of loyalty to the king, so e.g. ZüBi; Galling ATD 12: 195; TOB and especially
Gunneweg KAT xix/1: 83, 84, 91 with reference to the expression “salt-covenant”, or
alternatively “a covenant of salt” (jl'm, tyriB] - tyriB] jl'm, Lv 213 Nu 1819 2C 135).
There is probably no need for a cj., such as has been proposed by Rudolph Esra und Nehemia
40, and then by Vogt 101b: instead of the vb. an:j]l'm] it is much better to read the sbst. with sf.
an:j'l]mi “the salt of the palace is our salt”. †
jl'm:] denominative jlm; Heb. II jl'm,; OArm., Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften 222 A: 36);
EmpArm., EgArm. (Ah\iqar 111; Saqqara); Pehl. (Junker Frahang 16: 12); Palm. (Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 152 s.v. jlmII; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 632 s.v. mlh\2); JArm., DSS
(Dalman Wb. 237b; Beyer Arm. Texte 623), see Tg.o Lv 213 aj;l]mi, so also NeoSyr. (Maclean
179a); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 390b); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 112b) and NeoArm. melh\aµ
(Bergsträsser Gloss. 57); Mnd. mihla (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 266a); Bauer-Leander BArm.
183g; the same in the cstr.: salt Ezr 414 (→ jlm); in the sequence wheat, salt, wine, oil 69, and
wheat, wine, oil, salt 722. †
I *Jlm: Heb. I Jlm; (denominative from Jl,m,?) to rule as king; OArm. pe. to rule Zendjirli
(Donner-R. Inschriften 214: 25); pa. (215: 7); Sefire (222 A: 25; B: 6, 22); haf. Zakir (202 A: 3,
13); EmpArm. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 152; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 633); JArm. pe. and
af., DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 625; Dalman Wb. 238a); CPArm. pe. (Schulthess Lex. 112b); Syr.
(Brockelmann Lexicon 392b) to reign as king; cf. Heb. hof. (Da 91) :: cj. Jylim]hi, so e.g.
Montgomery 360f; Plöger KAT xviii: 131, 135, see also BHS.
Der. Jl,m,, hK;l]m', Wkl]m'.
II *Jlm: to advise, take counsel together JArm. (Dalman Wb. 238a s.v. Jl'm]II); CPArm.
(Schulthess Lex. 112b); Syr.; to promise EmpArm. (Driver Arm. Docs. 12: 4); Palm.
(Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 634 s.v. mlk2) and Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 391b).
Der. Jl'm].
Jl,m:, I Jlm: the same in Heb.; Deir Alla; OArm., Bredsch, Barhadad. (Donner-R. Inschriften
201: 3); Zakir (202 A: 1 and elsewhere; B: 3, 17); Hama (text 203); Zendjirli (texts 214; 215;
216; 217: 1; 219: 3); Sefire (texts 222–224); ? Sefire 227: 5; Tell Fekherye 6, 7, 13; EmpArm.,
Tema (228 A: 1, 9); Asshur Ostracon (233: 4 etc.); EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar;
Behistun; Driver Arm. Docs.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Donner-R. Inschriften 271 B: 7; Saqqara);
Bauer-Meissner Pachtvertrag 12; Xanthos; Samaria; Armazi = Mcheta (Donner-R. Inschriften
276: 3, 5); Pehl. (Junker Frahang 12: 2; Herzfeld Paikuli 545, 632ff); Sogdian
(Gauthier-Benveniste 2: 223); Hatra; Nab., Palm., JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 153); for
Arm. inscriptions from Armenia see WdO 6 (1971), 44f; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 634
s.v. mlk3); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 238a; Beyer Arm. Texte 624); for JPArm. abs Jylem] see
Sokoloff Dictionary 310, as also in Mnd.; CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 112b); Syr. (Brockelmann
Lexicon 391b); Mnd. malka (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 244b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 151,
Jylem]); NeoSyr. malkaµ (Maclean 179b) and NeoArm. (Bergsträsser Gloss. 57); Bauer-Leander
BArm. 223f: the same in the cstr.: det. aK;l]m' (Da 24 i.e. vocative), 211 hK;l]m', pl. ÷ykƒil]m',
erroneously µykil]m' Ezr 413 (Bauer-Leander BArm. 201f: µ scribal error for ÷, so also Gunneweg
KAT xix/1: 84 :: Rudolph EsraundNehemia39:rd.yKil]m',soalsoBHS); pl. det. aY:kƒ'l]m': king Da 2
4-724 and Ezr 48-726; aY:K'l]m' Jl,m, (Bauer-Leander BArm. 312i) Da 237 (the king of lb,B;), Ezr 712
(the king of sr'P;), a royal titulary, cf. sûar sûarraµni (AHw. 1189b; for sûarru see also CADŠ/2:
76ff), Palm. mlk mlk< the title of the king of Palmyra (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 153, s.v. JlmII no.
4; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 634 s.v. mlk3, p. 637); THAT 1: 912, cf. also Bentzen on Da 2
37; an epithet for the God of Israel when referred to by king Nebuchadnezzar ÷yKil]m' arem; Da 247
(→ arem;), cf. aY:m'v] Jl,m, Da 434 (→ ÷yIm'v)] ; aK;l]m' tyBe Ezr 64 (→ tyIB').
Da 717 ÷ykil]m' kings; the exact meaning is disputed, but possible interpretations include: —a)
MT: “the kings represent the kingdoms”, so Plöger KAT xviii: 105, similarly Montgomery
305f, “each king can stand for his own kingdom”; cf. Vogt 102b: kings, or successions of kings.
—b) cj.: —i) for ÷yKil]m' rd. with Sept., Theodotion, Vulgate and one ms. ÷w:k]l]m' kingdoms; —ii)
for MT rd. ÷yKil]m;, sg., cf. Heb. Jl,mo, Arb. mulk; Ug. pun. (Ginsberg 1) cf. BHS; such cj. as
these (i and ii) are probably not necessary.
*Jl'm:] II Jlm; Heb. cj. III Jl,m,; Hatra (Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 644 s.v. mlk10); JArm.
aK;l]m'/µi, DSS (Dalman Wb. 238b; Beyer Arm. Texte 624); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 112b); Syr.
melkaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 392a); Mnd. milka (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 267a); basic
form *milk (Bauer-Leander BArm. 183j): sf. yKiil]mi, Or. ma-: counsel Da 424. †
*hK;l]m:' I Jlm, fem. from Jl,m,; the same in Heb.; EmpArm.; Pehl. (Junker Frahang 12: 11);
Hermopolis 4: 1 (Vogt 102a); Bowman Demotic ix: 5, pl. cstr. takalam ; Nab., Palm., JArm.
inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 153; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 634 s.v. mlk3); JArm., DSS
(Dalman Wb. 238b; Beyer Arm. Texte 624); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 113a); Syr. malketaµ
(Brockelmann Lexicon 391b); Mnd. malakta (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 243b; Nöl-deke
Mand. Gramm. 101); NeoSyr. malktaµ (Maclean 179b); NeoArm. (Bergsträsser Gloss. 57);
Bauer-Leander BArm. 243a: det. at;K]l]m': queen, i.e. the queen-mother Da 510. †
Wkl]m:' I Jlm; Heb. tWkl]m'; OArm., Sefire tklm (Donner-R. Inschriften 222 A: 25); EmpArm.,
EgArm. atwklm (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar 95), and this is probably also to be read for
atkwlm (Cowley Arm. Pap. 6: 1), on which see Leander 80y; Samaria; Pehl. (Junker Frahang
12: 2); JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 152, 154; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 644); JArm.
, DSS (Dalman Wb. 238b; Beyer Arm. Texte 624); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 113a); Sam. (Ben
H\ayyim Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 556); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 392a); Mnd. malkuta
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 245a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 144); NeoArm. (Bergsträsser Gloss.
57); Bauer-Leander BArm. 197g: cstr. tWkl]m', det. at;Wkl]m', Da 244 428 724.27 ht;-, sf. ytiWkl]m',
Jt;Wkl]m', HteWkl]m', pl. (Bauer-Leander BArm. 245c and d) cstr. tw:k]l]m', det. at;w:k]l]m'.
—1. kingship, sovereignty Da 237.44 428.33a 518 61 714a.18.22.27a, Wkl]m' tyBe residence (Babylon) 4
27, at;Wkl]m' lk'yhe royal palace 426, ˜µ' aser]K; royal throne 520.
—2. reign Da 629 Ezr 424 615.
—3. kingdom, realm, not particularly easy to distinguish from meaning 1 above in Da 423 526 65
; also in Da 239–42.44 333 415.23.33b 57.11.16.26.28f 62.4f.8.27 Ezr 713.23; the kingdom of men a;yL;[i (
ah;l;aÔ) fyLiv' yDi [dy av;n:a} tWkl]m'B] Da 414.22.29 521; the kingdom of God 333 431 714b.27b. †
llm: Heb. III llm < Arm. (Wagner 171): OArm., Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften 224: 2);
EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar 178; Saqqara); Pehl. (Junker Frahang 18: 3;
Herzfeld Paikuli 492–495); JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 154; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 644), Pul-i D. 7; JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 238b; Beyer Arm. Texte 625); CPArm.
pa. (Schulthess Lex. 111a); Syr. pa. (Brockelmann Lexicon 387a); Mnd. MLL (Drower-Macuch
Dictionary 273b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 253).
pa: pf. lLim'; impf. lLim'yÒ; pt. hl;LÔm'm], lLim'm], variant h/al;L]m'm] (Bauer-Leander BArm.
166g): to speak Da 78.11.20.25, abs. µ[i 622. †
Der. hL;mi (:: denominative vb. Bauer-Leander BArm. 273g).
÷m', variant Da 3 . and 422 ÷m;: Heb. II ÷m; what? (but see now Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 96) and cj.
6 11
÷m' who? (HAL 564b; HALOT 597a): who, whosoever, cf. Degen Altaram. Gr. §41, p. 60);
OArm., Zakir (Donner-R. Inschriften 202 B: 16, 18, 21); Zendjirli (214: 15); Sefire (222–224
passim); Tell Fekherye 10, 16 (p. 53); EmpArm., Nerab (225: 5; 226: 8); EgArm. mn, mnzy
(Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar; cf. Leander §16: 17); Asia Minor; Pehl.
(Junker Frahang 25: 6 and Nyberg 2: 297 wnm (from *man-huµ); Herzfeld Paikuli 641); Uruk 19f
man-nu; Nab., Palm., Hatra, JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 157 s.v. ÷mII;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 648 s.v. mn4); JArm., DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 625f; cf. also
Dalman Wb. 240a, and KBL); CPArm. mn (man) (Schulthess Lex. 113a), later myn (men)
(Schulthess Gr. §64); Syr. man who? (Brockelmann Lexicon 393b); Mnd. man
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 246; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 94); NeoSyr. man (Maclean 181b);
NeoArm. moµn and mannu/e (Spitaler 57a-e; Bergsträsser Gloss. 57); Bauer-Leander BArm. §24.
—1. interrogative pron. who? Ezr 53.9, yDi Hl;aÔ aWhA÷m' Da 315 who is a god who …?, meaning
which god will …?, th;m;v] ÷WNai ÷m' Ezr 54 what are the names? (→ µvu) also Old Syr. (Black
219) and Mnd. (Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 3412); cf. Bauer-Leander BArm. 268d, and Lande 39 ::
Montgomery 208.
—2. relative pron. yDiA÷m' (Bauer-Leander BArm. 358n, → yDi 2b): who Da 36.11, yDiA÷m'l] to
whomsoever 414.22.29; whomsoever 521. †
÷mi: the same in Heb.; OArm., Zakir, Zendjirli, Sefire (Degen Altaram. Gr. §45a); Tell Fekherye ÷m
from, since (lines 16, 17, 18, 22, 23), mnh (lines 9, 11, 19), cf. p. 53; EmpArm., Nerab, Tema
(see Donner-R. Inschriften 225: 8, 10; 228: 18); Asshur Ostracon (233: 9, 15, 16); Uruk mi-in;
EgArm. (Leander §62: 9); Pehl. (Junker Frahang 25: 6; Herzfeld Paikuli 638/9); Bowman
Demotic 227 vii 3f; Hatra (Donner-R. Inschriften 247: 5?; 257: 3); Asia Minor (264: 6); Nab.
(Cantineau Nab. 2: 115a); Palm. (Cantineau Gr. 138); see further Donner-R. Inschriften 3: p.
37b; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 155ff; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 649 s.v. mn5); JArm., DSS
(Dalman Wb.; Gr. 47: 2; Beyer Arm. Texte 626); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 113b); Syr.
(Brockelmann Lexicon 393b); Mnd. mn, with sf. always min- (Drower-Macuch Dictionary
273b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 10, 193); NeoArm. m(u-) (Spitaler 129p; Bergsträsser Gloss.
57); Bauer-Leander BArm. 259t-w: sf. yNIm,i JN:m,i HNEmi, hN:mi (variant HN:mi, Bauer-Leander BArm.
73o and p; 81z), ÷/hNÒmi K and ÷(y)heNÒmi Q Da 233.41f; ÷ is only rarely assimilated ar;WFmi Da 245,
a[;r]a'me Jr 1011 (Bauer-Leander BArm. 259u): preposition.
—1. with spatial significance: —a) out of, from Da 235 (Bauer-Leander BArm. 316h).45 52f.13 6
24 73f.24 Ezr 611; down from Da 410.20 520, away from 411.22.28.30 521 Jr 1011, hM;T'A÷mi from there
Ezr 66; linked with → a/G, → tw:l], → dx'; → µd;qÕ and → t/jT].
—b) particular instances: with → bzy to save dy"A÷mi Da 315, *÷mi dbe[} t]mi an:yDi let judgement
be executed upon them (NRSV; REB), → ÷yDi s.v. 1, Ezr 726, ÷mi h[;B] to make a request from
Da 216.23.49 613 (→ h[b 2), av;n:a} A÷mi Hbeb]li ÷/Nv'yÒ (→ hnv pa.) 413, on which see Marti Das
Buch Daniel (KHC xviii, 1901), 29: bb'l] av;n:a} A÷mi an expression for ã} bb'l] ÷mi the human
mind; let his mind be changed from that of a human (NRSV); his mind will cease to be human
(REB): for ÷mi in its usage as a periphrasis for the genitive cf. Arb.; the human mind, cf.
Bauer-Leander BArm. 316i; to defray expenses from Ezr 64 720.
—2. with temporal significance: since Ezr 415.19; d['wÒ … ÷mi Da 220 Ezr 516; hn:D] tm'd]Q'mi
previously Ezr 511; yDiA÷mi conj. since, because (→ yDi 3 f b) Da 322.
—3. in making comparisons: different from Da 73.7.19.23f, superior to 230; used comparatively
(Bauer-Leander BArm. 319h) ÷mi a[;r]a' less than, inferior to Da 239 (→ a[;r]a' 2); ÷mi hL;[e
superior to them 63.
—4. partitive: of, from Da 225 513 63.14 78.16 (÷mi dj') Ezr 713; at;B]x]nIA÷mi some of the firmness
Da 241, cf. Rosenthal Gr. §80; ÷/hnÒmiW…÷/hnÒmi233.41ftheywerepartlythis… partly that (cf.
Brockelmann Grundriss 2: 360, 397), HN"miW … tx;q]A÷mi 242 a bit of this … and a bit of that (cf.
Vogt 104a, 3b; cf. also CPArm., Schulthess Gr. §168: 6 :: Brockelmann Grundriss 2: 361f).
—5. to show the author or cause of something: yNImi Da 25.8 (Bauer-Leander BArm. 316h, → dza
), lF'mi 422.30 521 (= B] 412.20), to approach from 49, with ÷wz hitpe.; because of, as a consequence
of 519 711 (:: Montgomery 301f).

—6. to express the norm: according to, corresponding to (Palm. aswmn ÷m accord-ing to the
law, Jean-H. Dictionnaire 179, ady[ ÷m according to usage, cf. Rosenthal Palm. 85; Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 207; Cantineau Gr. 138); µ['f'A÷mi according to the command Ezr 614 723 (on this
see under µ[ef], adv., Bauer-Leander BArm. 255s, or as 4); byXiy"A÷mi as is certain Da 28; fvoq]A÷mi
yDi it is in accordance with the truth that, meaning indeed, truly 247. †
anEm] Da 525f: there is some controversy about the meaning. —1. it may be taken as a sbst., mina;
Heb. hn<m;; loanword from Akk. manuÆ(m), from Sumerian mana (see Zimmern 20f; AHw. 604a;
CAD M/1: 219b, s.v. manuÆ A; Kaufman 69); Sept. and Pseudo Theodotion Da 525f together
with mna` and also manh (Beyer Arm. Texte 129); EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.), pl. ÷(y
)÷m (cf. Leander 15c); Mesopotamia hnm; Xanthos, Samaria, Palm., Hatra, JArm. inscr.
(Jean-H. Dictionnaire 158 s.v. hnmII; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 658 s.v. mnh2); JArm.,
DSS (Dalman Wb. 241a; Beyer Arm. Texte 628) y/anEm]; JArm.; Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon
394a); NeoSyr. (Maclean 183a) ay:nÒm,' the same as Mnd. mania (Drower-Macuch Dictionary
275a); Bauer-Leander BArm. 234o.
—2. alternatively it may be taken as a vb., pt. passive, from → hnm. †
hD;nÒm:i → hD;mi.
[D'nÒm:i [dy; Heb. [D;m'; EgArm. [dnm (Ah\iqar 53), the precise meaning is uncertain, on which
see Cowley Arm. Pap. p. 232; JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 158; Leander 37d; Ginsberg
in Pritchard Texts 428a; Vogt 106b; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 656 s.v. mnd>1); JArm., DSS
(Dalman Wb. 240b, 225b; Beyer Arm. Texte 594) manda>, madda>; CPArm. [dm (Schulthess
Lex. 79), and Syr. madde>aµ knowledge, understanding, insight (Brockelmann Lexicon 297a);
Mnd. manda (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 247 knowledge, recognition, gnw`si"; Nöldeke
Mand. Gramm. 75; see also Rosenthal Arm. Forsch. 244; Akk. (from Arm.) mandeµtu the result
of recognition, what has become known (AHw. 602a; CAD M/1:208); the derivative µ[dnm
something, comes from madda>-maµ “something that is known”, with the indefinite particle -maµ
as suffix; EmpArm.; Pehl. (Junker Frahang 16: 9; Herzfeld Paikuli 640); EgArm. (Cowley
Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar; Behistun; Hermopolis; Saqqara µ[d(÷)µ; cf. Leander §18d especially p. 38,
and Beyer Arm. Texte 594f); Sardes (Donner-R. Inschriften 260 B: 6; 8 htm[dnm fem. with
sf.); so also Carpentras (269: 2); Nab., Palm., Hatra, JArm. inscr. ÷/µ[dnm (Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 158; Rosenthal Palm. 52; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 598 s.v. md>m); JArm.
µ['D;mi and yDemi (Dalman Wb. 225a and b); DSS [dnm (Beyer Arm. Texte 594); Syr. meddem
(Brockelmann Lexicon 375b); NeoSyr. mi(n)di (Maclean 182a); Mnd. mindam
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 267b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 186, cf. p. 50); NeoArm. mette
(Bergsträsser Gloss. 59) :: Akk. mindeµ(ma) (Torczyner Entst. 47ff; Landsberger, OLZ 26
(1923), 73; but on this see also von Soden Gramm. §121e, and AHw. 655a; CAD M/2: 83b;
minde, midde, also manda (< méÆn éÆde “what I know”) perhaps; a later form of the particle is
mindeµma. An etymological connection can certainly be made with Arm., but questions remain
about whether it can be taken as a loanword from Akk. (Babylonian). Bauer-Leander BArm.
194r: det. a[;D]nÒm', sf. y[iD]nÒm' understanding Da 221 431.33 512. †
hnm: the same in Heb.; pi. < Arm. (Wagner 174); EmpArm., EgArm., Ah\iqar (Cowley Arm. Pap.
pe., and more often pa.; Ah\iqar; Saqqara; Driver Arm. Docs. pu.); Pehl. (Junker Frahang 23: 6);
Nab., JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 159 s.v. ynm; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 660 s.v.
mny); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 240b, anm; Beyer Arm. Texte 628 s.v. ynm); CPArm.
(Schulthess Lex. 114a); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 538); Syr.
(Brockelmann Lexicon 394a); NeoSyr. (Maclean 181b s.v. mn<); Mnd. MNA, etpe./etpa. >tminiit
“I will be counted” (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 274a and 247b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 284).
pe: pf. hn:m]; pt. passive anEm] (Bauer-Leander BArm. 147i): to count Da 525f; pt. passive hnEm]
counted (Kautzsch Gr. 10f), → sreP] and lqeT] and Commentaries; see especially BLK ad loc.
(pp. 58f); see further Eissfeldt, ZAW 63 (1951), 105–114 (= Kl. Schr. 3: 210–217) :: → anEm].
pa: pf. yNIm,' tyNIm'; impv. yNIm,& (Bauer-Leander BArm. 159p) to install, appoint (EgArm.,
Cowley Arm. Pap.; Driver Arm. Docs.; pu., JArm.) Ezr 725 (with acc. of the person) over l[' (
EgArm. µ[) Da 249 312, with inf. and l] 224. †
Der. anEm] (?), ÷y:nÒm.i
hj;nÒm:i loanword from Heb.; EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 159; Vincent Rel.
185ff; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 659 s.v. mnh\h1); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 241a; Beyer
Arm. Texte 627f) at;j;nÒmi; Bauer-Leander BArm. 244d: pl. sf. ÷/ht]j‰;nÒmi: offering Da 246, on
which see Martin, ZAW 85 (1973), 81), specifically grain-offering (Heb., MHeb., JArm.) Ezr 7
17.
†
*÷y:nÒm:i hnm; EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Saqqara); Nab., JArm.
inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 159; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 661); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb
. 241b; Beyer Arm. Texte 628); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 114b); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Literary
and Oral Tradition 2: 560); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 394b); NeoSyr. miniaµnaµ (Maclean
183a); Mnd. miniana (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 268a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 176, 179);
Bauer-Leander BArm. 195z: the same in the cstr.: number Ezr 617. †
*db;[} µ': db[; the same in Heb.; JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 244b; Beyer Arm. Texte 651) and
Syr. ma>ebaµdaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 505b); Mnd. mabada (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 238a;
Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 130); Syr. magic; Bauer-Leander BArm. 195w: pl. sf. yhi/db;[} µ': work
Da 434. †
*h[em:] Heb. *h[,me; MHeb. h[,me, pl. µy[ime, dual µy[ime, µyI['me, ÷yI['me (Dalman Wb. 245a; Levy 3:
184b), entrails, belly; JArm. a[;m], pl. det. aY:['me (Dalman Wb. 244b; Levy 3: 185a; but see
Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 96); DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 629 s.v. ÷y[m) me>eµn belly; CPArm. pl.
sf. m>wy (Schulthess Lex. 115a); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 397b) and NeoSyr. ma>yaµ
(Maclean 187b), pl. me>ayyaµ; Mnd. mia pl., variant maia, m>ia, m>iia (Drower-Macuch
Dictionary 265b, 242a and 276b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 109, ay[m, pronounced something
like meÆyaÆ) entrails; Bauer-Leander BArm. 186z, 305e: pl. sf. yhi/[&m]: belly (Heb. Song 514) Da 2
32.
†
*l[;m:, ll[; Late Babylonian (from Arm.) manhÉalu (AHw. 603a; CAD M/1: 211b) entrance;
Nab., Palm. (Rosenthal Palm. 44f; Cantineau Gr. 79f); JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 161;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 669 s.v. m>l1); JArm. the exact form of the sbst is uncertain (see
Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 96), but possibilities include:
—1. al;[;me (Dalman Wb. 246a, and subsequently KBL).
—2. yle[} µ'/yle[} µe (Levy 3: 193a).
—3. l[m ma>>aŒl (DSS, Beyer Arm. Texte 658); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 146a) and Sam. lw[m
; Syr. ma>>elaµ, ma>>altaµ, pl. cstr. ma>>aµlay (Brockelmann Lexicon 524b, 525a); Mnd. mala
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 243a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 129); basic form. *ma>>aµl;
Bauer-Leander BArm. 195w: pl. cstr. yle[;,m,, variant yle[;me and yle[} µ', Or. ma>aleµandm>aleµ
(Bauer-Leander BArm.45f): av;m]vi yle[;,m, sunset Da 615, cf. EgArm. [÷m] am br[m (Cowley
Arm. Pap. 21: 8; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 162) and Heb. vm,V,h' a/bm] (HAL 514a; HALOT 541b,
s.v. a/bm; 3). †
*arem:; in Egyptian syllabic transcription ma-ru-<i/u (Albright Vocalization 43); Old Sinaitic. mr< (
W. F. Albright, BASOR 110 (1948), 21); cuneiform ma-ri-i< (Tallqvist Names 134b, on which
see also Beyer Arm. Texte 629), partially shortened > maµr (Tallqvist Names 135a); OArm.,
Arslan Tasû (Donner-R. Inschriften 232); Breµdsch (Barhadad) (201: 3); Zendjirli (texts
215–218); Sefire (224: 21, 22); Tell Fekherye lines 6, 16, mry line 17 (see p. 53); forms with
suffix.: mry, mrh, mr<n, mrkm (see in Degen Altaram. Gr. p. 56); mr on a seal from Assyria
(Beyer Arm. Texte 630); EmpArm., Asshur Ostracon (Donner-R. Inschriften 233: 6) with 1st.
sg. suffix. yrm; EgArm. arm, (Hermopolis, Saqqara, Ah\iqar); for forms with suffixes see
Cowley Arm. Pap. p. 298a; Leander 22e and 107k; here there are also writings without a, yrm
and ÷rm, see Kraeling Arm. Pap. yarm text 13: 1 and 9; the same form is in Driver Arm. Docs.
3: 3, 5; 4: 2; 10: 1–2 µhyarm 7: 4, 5; Pehl. (Junker Frahang 1: 1; 13: 5; Herzfeld Paikuli 651);
Taxila-Sirkap, Pakistan (Donner-R. Inschriften 273: 9, 12); Nab., Palm., Hatra, JArm. inscr.
(Jean-H. Dictionnaire 166; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 682); ar;m; JArm. (for JPArm. yrem;
see Sokoloff Dictionary 329), DSS hrm; this writing is repeated in DSS (Dalman Wb. 251a;
Beyer Arm. Texte 629f), often together with arm, on which see also KBL 1096a; CPArm.
(Schulthess Lex. 115b); Sam. mr = ma½r (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 7b); Syr. (Brock-elmann Lexicon
401a); Mnd. mara, maria (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 251; Nöldeke Mand.Gramm.184);
NeoSyr. maµra (Maclean 197a) and NeoArm. moµra (Bergsträsser Gloss. 58 s.v. mwr); n.m.
Palm. ayrm (Benz Personal Names 97a); Yemen maµriyyun (Rabin 28); Baumgartner, ZAW 45
(1927), 104 = Umwelt 91f; Rowley The Aramaic of the OT 111ff; Schaeder 41f; Rosenthal Palm
. 30; Arb. imraµ< and imru< (with the article al-mar<); OSArb. mr< (Conti Rossini 180b; Beeston
Sabaic Dictionary 87, man); Bauer-Leander BArm. 190y: the same in the cstr.; sf. yair]m‰; K, yrim;
Q, Bauer-Leander BArm. 60k :: Gordon, BASOR 78 (1940), 10f: lord.
—1. of the king: yair]m‰;/yrim; my lord Da 416 (ZüBi: O lord); aK;l]m' yair]m‰;/yrim;, with afm + l['
to come upon my lord the king Da 421; of the king, the Pharaoh ÷yklm ˜µ Saqqara (Donner-R.
Inschriften 266: 1, 6).
—2. of a god (for its use as a divine name see Baudissin Kyrios 357ff).
—a) aY:m'v]Aarem; Da 523.
—b) ÷ykƒil]m' arem; Da 247; cf. µklm ÷da the lord of kings (Donner-R. Inschriften 14: 18);
comparable to the attributes of deities: Akk. beµl sûarraµni, meaning Marduk, see Tallqvist
Epitheta 54; beµl beµleµ, sûar sûarri (Tallqvist op. cit. 42, 237); cf. Donner-R. Inschriften 2: p. 23:
Da 247, see above under 2a. †
*drm: the same in Heb.; EgArm. (Driver Arm. Docs.; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 167;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 690 s.v. mrd1); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 252a; Beyer Arm.
Texte 629); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 116b); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 402b); Mnd. MRD
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 278).
Der. dr'm], *dr;m;.
dr'm:] drm; Heb. dr,m,; JArm. aD;r]mi Tg.(2K 1114) see Dalman Wb. 252a; Syr. merdaµ
J
(Brockelmann Lexicon 403a); Mnd. mirda (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 270a; Nöldeke Mand.
Gramm. 102); basic form *mird ? :: Bauer-Leander BArm. 183e: *mard: rebellion Ezr 419. †
*dr;m;; drm, basic form of the adj. *mar-raµd (Bauer-Leander BArm. 191c; Leander 82n);
EmpArm., Cowley Arm. Pap.; Behistun passim, st. emph. pl. aydrm, Akk. ni-ik-ru-tu (Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 167; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 690 s.v. mrd2); JArm. ad;r;m;, pl. ÷ydir;m;
(Dalman Wb. 252a); Syr. marréÆdaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 403b): fem. ad;r;m‰;, > aT;d]r‰;m;
(Bauer-Leander BArm. 16z), fem. st. emph. aT;d]r;m‰;: rebellious Ezr 412.15.†
frm: the same in Heb.; EmpArm., EgArm. etpe./etpa. abkb frmtm … arm[ “the wool
(from the sheep) is (will be) pulled out by thorns” (Ed. Sachau Arm. Pap. p. 233, no. 76: i: A, 4;
Jean-H. Dictionnaire 168; the translation is taken from the Latin render-ing in Vogt 108b;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 693); JArm. (Dalman Wb. 253b); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon
404a); NeoSyr. (Maclean 199a).
pe: pf. passive (Bauer-Leander BArm. 104b-e), pl. Wfyri&m]: to pluck out (of ÷yPiG¾ the wings
of an eagle) Da 74. †
hv,m:o n.m. Moses Ezr 6 18 (→ HAL 607; HALOT 642). †
I *jvm: Heb. I jvm to anoint; OArm., Se-fire (Donner-R. Inschriften 222 A: 21); EmpArm.,
EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.); JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 169; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 699 s.v. msûh1\ ); Dura Europos (Beyer Arm. Texte 631); JArm. (Dalman Wb. 256b);
Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 593); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 117a); Syr.
(Brockelmann Lexicon 407 s.v. msûhII\ ); Mnd. MSðA, MSðH (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 279a;
Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 235); NeoSyr. (Maclean 201b).
Der. I jv'm].
II *jvm: Heb. II jvm to measure; EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap. 71: 17?; Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 170 s.v. jmIV; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 699 s.v. msûh2\ ); JArm., DSS
(Dalman Wb. 256b; Beyer Arm. Texte 631); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 117b); Syr.
(Brockelmann Lexicon 406b s.v. msûhI\ ); Mnd. MSðA I (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 279a) to
measure, stretch out; cf. Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 66, to measure.
Der. cj. II *jv'm].
I jv'm:] I jvm; OArm., Zendjirli (Donner-R. Inschriften 215: 6); EmpArm., EgArm. (Hermopolis
; Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Saqqara); Delaporte 76; Mesopotamia (Corpus Insc.
Sem. 2: 44); Pehl. (Junker Frahang 7: 19); Palm. jm and ajm, on the latter see still
Gawlikowski, Semitica 23 (1973), 115 line 5 (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 170; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 699 s.v. msûh3\ ); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 256b, ah;v]miI; rather JPArm. jv'm], see
Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 96; Beyer Arm. Texte 631); jvm and ajvm also NeoSyr. misûh\a
(Maclean 201b); CPArm. m(y)sûh\(<) (Schulthess Lex. 117a); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 407a)
and NeoArm. mesûh\aµ (Bergsträsser Gloss. 59); Mnd. misûa (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 270b;
Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 64); basic form? misûh\ :: Bauer-Leander BArm. 183e masûh:\ oil for
anointing Ezr 69 722 (for jv'm] ÷yTiB' rd. ÷yTiB' jv'm]). †
cj. II *jv'm:] II jvm; EgArm. tjm (Cowley Arm. Pap. 9: 4; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 170 s.v. tjm; Hoftijzer-JongelingDictionary700);JArm.IIaj;v]miand at;j} v]mi
(DalmanWb.256b);DSS(Beyer Arm. Texte 632, ajm, mesûh\aµ measure, dimension); CPArm.
msûwh\ (Schulthess Lex. 117b); Syr.mesûuh\taµand muµsûhe\ taµ (BrockelmannLexicon 406b); Mnd.
masûihta (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 255b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 461): pl. sf., cj. (Rudolph
Esra und Nehemia 54) yhi/jv]mi measure Ezr 63; it should be remembered that because the text
is corrupted it is very uncertain, and this means that the cj. that has been mentioned is also
uncertain, on which see Gunneweg KAT xix/1: 104. †
*bK'v]m:i bkv: Heb. bK;v]mi, Or. ˜µ' (Kahle Text des AT 70; Masoreten des Ostens 197); Deir
Alla; Nab. abkm place of rest, meaning grave (?Jean-H. Dictionnaire 170 s.v.bkmI;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 701 s.v. msûkb1); JArm. ab;K]v]mi (Dalman Wb. 257a) :: DSS
(Beyer Arm. Texte 707 bkm masûkãb (maqt\aŒl)); CPArm. msûkwby, sf. msûkwbyth (Schulthess Lex.
205b); Syr. masûkebaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 775b); Mnd. sûkibta resting, lying down (Nöldeke
Mand. Gramm. 177, ûabkyym “your lying”; Drower-Macuch Dictionary 465b; also 465a s.v.
SðKB pe. inf.); basic form *misûkab or *masûkab (Bauer-Leander BArm. 194q; ThZ 9 (1953),
155): sf. ybiK]v]mi, Jb;K]v]mi, HbeK]v]mi, Da 228f, Or. ma-: bed Da 228f 42.7.10 71. †
*÷K'v]m:i ÷kv; Heb. ÷K;v]mi, Or. ma- (Kahle Text des AT 70); EmpArm., Hermopolis; Palm. (J.
Cantineau, Syria 17 (1936), 353: 9); Hatra (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 170; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 702 s.v. msûkn3); JArm. an:K]v]mi (Dalman Wb. 257a); DSS ÷km masûkãn (Beyer Arm.
Texte 709); Sam. mesûkan (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 11b s.v. sûkn); CPArm. *msûkn (Schulthess Lex.
206a tabernaculum); Syr. masûkenaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 776b); also NeoSyr. (Maclean 202b);
Mnd. masûkna (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 255b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 129); basic form *
misûkan (Bauer-Leander BArm. 194q) or rather masûkan (ThZ 9 (1953), 155): sf. HnEK]v]mi, variant
˜µ': abode (the abode of God, meaning Jerusalem) Ezr 715. †
*yqi/rv]m:' qrv; Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 810a, masûroµqéÆtaµ), and NeoSyr. masûruqita
(Maclean 204b); Mnd. masûrukta (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 256a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm.
130f); Canaanite (Bauer-Leander BArm. 10t, 195w, 197f): det. at;yqi/rv]m' at;yqirov]m', Da 310:
pipe (Kolari 35f), Sept., Theodotion su;rigx, Vulgate fistula Da 35.7.10.15, on the renderings in
Sept., Theodotion and Vulgate see also Grelot, VT 29 (1979), 26–28. †
*aTev]m:i htv; Heb. aT,v]mi, Or. ˜µ' (ThZ 9 (1953), 156); JArm. emph. ay:T]v]mi; indet. yTev]mi
(Dalman Wb. 258b); DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 720: htm masûteµ); Mnd. misûitia = misûtia, inf. from
SðTA drink (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 270b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 129); CPArm. mesûteµ
drink (Schulthess Gr. §111; cf. Lex. 216b); Syr. masûteyaµ beverage, banquet (Brockelmann
Lexicon 811b); JArm. at;WTv]mi meal, wedding-feast (Dalman Wb. 258b), cf. nuptiae
wedding-feast, nuptials; CPArm. emph. msûtwt< (Schulthess Lex. 216b), the same as Syr. mesûtuµtaµ
(Brockelmann Lexicon 811b); NeoArm. masûcðuta wedding-feast (Bergsträsser Gloss. 88);
Bauer-Leander BArm. 194s; ThZ 9 (1953), 156: det. ay:T]v]mi, Or. misûtiyaµ (Bauer-Leander BArm.
38a): drinking, banquet, ˜µi tyBe banqueting hall Da 510. †
*hn:T]m:' ÷tn; Heb. ÷T;m', I hn:T]m'; EmpArm. (Ed. Sachau Arm. Pap. 75 ii: 7, 11; Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 172 s.v. ÷tmII; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 709 s.v mtn2); cuneiform
mat-ta-na-at (Uruk, Coogan Personal Names 77), on which see Beyer Arm. Texte 643; JArm.
aT;nÒT'm' (Dalman Wb. 259b; for TgArm. a÷~tµ~ see Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 96); DSS (Beyer
loc. cit.); CPArm. mat-tuµnaµ (Schulthess Lex. 129b); Bauer-Leander BArm. 194r: pl. ÷n:T]m', sf.
Jt;n:T]m', fem. gift Da 26.48 517. †
÷
÷: —1. interchanges with → µ; cf. (÷)/Mhi.

—2. is assimilated to a following consonant (Bauer-Leander BArm. 34k): bG¾ (?), µD;h' and z[e,
qzn, lpn and rjn.
—3. is not assimilated, or alternatively the doubling from assimilation is resolved
(Bauer-Leander BArm. 50e :: Leander 18j): for instances of assimilation cf. *¹n"a} ,' hT;nÒa', ÷WTnÒa
and *af;nÒji, in qpn, ÷tn; for instances of dissimilation of the consonant doubled with ÷
(Bauer-Leander BArm. 50d) cf. → [dy, qls, and ll[ haf.: l[enÒh' :: rP'xi and ryPiv'!
abn: together with its derivatives, a loan-word from Heb. abn (?); pa. Syr., itpa. JArm. (Dalman
Wb. 260b); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 118a); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 411b); Mnd. af. and
ettaf. (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 287a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 265); itpa. NeoSyr. (Maclean
181b).
hitpa: pf. yBin"t]hi, Q variant ayBin"- (Bauer-Leander BArm. 168a): to act as a prophet,
prophesy Ezr 51. †
Der. *ha;WbnÒ, *aybinÒ.
*ha;WbnÒ: abn; < Heb.; JArm. (Dalman Wb. 260b; but see Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 96; for
JPArm. WbnÒ see Sokoloff Dictionary 339); CPArm. nbyw (Schulthess Lex. 118a; Gr. §73); Syr. n
ebéÆyutaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 411b); Bauer-Leander BArm. 189m: cstr. ta'WbnÒ: prophecy Ezr 6
14.
†
rX'n<d]k'WbnÒ: Da 2 (25 times), Ezr 512.14 65, ˜ÆbunÒ Da 314 511.18: n.m. Nebuchadnezzar II
28-52
(604–562 B.C.), king of Babylon, cf. also Pauly-Wissowa (Kl.) 4: 36, → HAL 624a; HALOT
660a; cf. Berger, ZA 64 (1974), 224f. †
hB;zÒbin:Ò Da 2 , variant
6
Secunda ˜b'nÒ: Tg. pl. ÷B;zÒbinÒ and ÷y:B]zÒbin;Ò etymology is uncertain, perhaps to be
related to Akk. (Neo-Assyrian and Neo-Babylonian) nibzu (AHw. 786a; CAD N/2: 206a;
Kaufman 77) clay tablet, document, and also the goods mentioned in the document; EmpArm.,
EgArm. zbn receipt (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 173; cf. Cowley Arm. Pap. 11: 6, p. 34;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 711); Tg., Sam. azÉb]nI (Ben H\ayyim Literary and Oral Tradition
2: 547) Lev 168–10 for BHeb. lr;/G, cf. Levy 3: 325b and CPArm. *zbn (Schulthess Lex. 118b)
lot; Mnd. nibza (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 296) translated in KBL 1097 as part of the liturgy;
cf. Arb. nubd_a small section, tractate; for older suggestions about the derivation of this sbst. cf.
Gesenius Thes. 842a; Zimmern 19; and Montgomery 150; more recent ones are noted in
Rosenthal Gr. §190: pl. sf. Jt;y:B]zÒb‰;nÒ Da 517, variant ˜b'nÒ and ˜binÒ (Bauer-Leander BArm. 244k and
l).
The cj. emendations for this sbst. (which, according to Bauer-Leander BArm. and Rosenthal for
example, should be left in the form in which it has been transmit-ted) include: —a) Jt;yÒB' tB'zÒbinÒ
, as with Theodotion kai; th;n dwrea;n th`" ohJ/kiva" sou and with Vulgate et dona domus tuae,
so also BLK 58.
—b) Jt;zÉb]nI (Joüon, Biblica 8 (1927), 183) with Jt;y:B]zÒb'nÒ (KBL, both forms from hzÉb]n,I see
above): present Da 26 517, together with hn:T]m'. †
*aybin:Ò abn; < Heb. aybin:; JArm. (Dalman Wb. 261a); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 118a); Syr.
(Brockelmann Lexicon 411b) and NeoSyr. nwéÆyaµ (Maclean 209a); Mnd. nbiha/>nbiha
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 288a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 432): det. ha;ybinÒ K, aY:binÒ Q, pl.
aY:a'ybinÒ K, aY:Y"binÒ Q (Bauer-Leander BArm. 210o, 212z): prophet Ezr 51f 614. †
*hv;r]b]n,< Or. nab-, MHeb. tv,r,b]nI, JArm. aT;v]r'b]n" (Dalman Wb. 261b; see now Sokoloff, DSD
7 (2000), 97); Syr. nabresûtaµ, denominative nabresû to kindle (Brockelmann Lexicon 412b); >
Arb. nibraµs (Fraenkel 95f); Persian loanword (Hinz 175), so already Scheftelowitz 2: 333, and
in this respect he follows Ellenbogen 110: Avestan braµzaiti (braµz meaning to shine) < Old
Persian nibraµza burning brightly, lamp, cf. Hinz :: Montgomery 255, who finds a Semitic
etymology in the root b-r-r “to be clear, be bright” > sbst. mabrart > nabrart > nabralt >
nabrasût; the derivation from Persian is probably (surprisingly!) to be preserved; for details, see
Kelso no. 61: hv;r]b]n< corresponds to Heb. hr;/nm]; Sokoloff loc. cit. refers to Millard, Maarav 4
(1987) 87–92; Bauer-Leander BArm. 41t: det. aT;v]r'b]n<: candlestick Da 55. †
dgn: the same in Heb.; EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap. 26: 4, 8); the meaning of the vb., if
a vb. lies behind both these instances, is uncertain; it is questionable whether the forms in
EgArm. belong to the same verb (cf. Jean-H. Dictionnaire 174 s.v. dgnI; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 713 s.v. ngd1); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 262a; Beyer Arm. Texte 632f, where it can
mean to pull, break out, spread); CPArm. to pull; intransitive: to flow (Schulthess Lex. 119a);
Syr. to pull, lead, flow (Brockelmann Lexicon 413a); Mnd. to drive, stretch out, lead, pull
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 288; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 224); Eth. nagada to wan-der
through (Dillmann 693); JArm. aD;gÒnI river (Dalman Wb. 262a); CPArm. flow of blood
(Schulthess Lex. 119a); OArm., Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften 224: 10) officer; EmpArm.,
Saqqara 8 ? (Donner-R. Inschriften 266: 8; see vol. 2: p. 314; for Saqqara see also Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 174 s.v. dgnII; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 713 s.v. ngd3); JArm. (Dalman Wb.
262a), and Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 413b) ad;/gn: leader; CPArm. nagoµd (Schulthess Lex.
119a); Arb. najd and NeoArm. negùta (Spitaler 2b) plateau; Tg. aD;gÒnI for Heb. µyyIp;v;] Nöldeke
Neue Beiträge 197f.
pe: pt. dg«n: to flow, gush Da 710. †
Der. dg²n.<
dg²n:< dgn; the same in Heb.; sbst. > preposition (Bauer-Leander BArm. 260x, ? < Heb., Rowley The
Aramaic of the OT 130): in the direction of, towards (→ l[' 4) Da 611. †
*Hgn: the same in Heb.; JArm. (Dalman Wb. 262a: to become dark; Jastrow 872b to brighten;
JPArm. to shine at dawn, see Sokoloff Dictionary 340); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 119b); Syr.
(Brockelmann Lexicon 414a: to brighten); Mnd. NGA and NHG (Drower-Macuch Dictionary
288a and 290f; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 235 and 365): always the meaning is to be light, shed
light, brighten, dawn.
Der. *Hg¾n.Ò
*Hg¾nÒ (Leander, ZAW 45 (1927), 158): hgn, Heb. Hg¾n;œ JArm. (Dalman Wb. 262a) and Syr. noghaµ
and nughaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 414a); Mnd. nihga (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 297a;
Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 102) break of day; Bauer-Leander BArm. 184n: det. ah;gÒn:, Or. na- (in
error Bauer-Leander BArm. 32i): brightness, ˜÷;B] at daybreak Da 620 (Montgomery 279). †
( a) /gnÒ: → (a)/gnÒ dbe[}.
bdn: the same in Heb.; JArm. etpa. to be willing, DSS to donate (Dalman Wb. 263b; Beyer Arm.
Texte 633); Palm. n.m. labdn (Stark Personal Names 99a); Arm. sbst. with 3rd. masc. suffix
hbdn (Zendjirli, Donner-R. Inschriften 214: 33, on which see 2: p. 222; Jean-H.Dictionnaire
174 s.v. bdnII;Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 716 s.v. ndb2).
hitpa: pf. pl. WbD&'n"t]hi; pt. bD'n"t]mi, pl. ÷ybiD]n"t]mi; inf. cstr. tWbD;n"t]hi; Bauer-Leander BArm.
246n.
—1. pt. agreeable, willing with l] and inf. Ezr 713.
—2. to donate Ezr 715f (concerning vs.16 see Bauer-Leander BArm. 339n); substantivised inf.
(Bauer-Leander BArm. 302i), donation, gift 716. †
Der. *WbD;n"t]hi.
JB;d]n:I MHeb. Jb;d]nI and JB;d]mi (see Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 97); JArm. ak;B;d]nI (Dalman Wb.
263b; cf. Beyer Arm. Texte 633, nadbaµk layer of stones) > Arb. midmaµk (Ruzûicûka 127;
Fraenkel 12); loanword from Akk. natbaµku(m); Neo-Assyrian and Late Babylonian also
nadabaµku, which can mean a course of bricks (AHw. 766a; CAD N/2: 118b); on the sbst. as an
Akk. loanword see again Kaufman 76, and Ellenbogen 111: pl. ÷ykiB;d]nI: stratum, layer of
stones, or wood, Sept. 2Esdras kai; dovmoi livqinoi krataioi; trei`", kai; dovmo" xu;lino" ei|" ,
Vulgate ordines de lapidibus impolitis tres et sic ordines de lignis novis Ezr 64. †
ddn: the same in Heb.; → I ddn; JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 174; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 716); JArm. (Targumic) to flee, but see Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 97; JArm.
(Galilean) to flee, of sleep (see Dalman Wb. 263; Jastrow 878a); DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 632
s.v. ddn to sway, and 633 s.v. dwn to flee, but see Sokoloff loc. cit.); CPArm. pa. to shift, shake
the head (Schulthess Lex. 119b); Sam. has the root dndn to sway, move about; Syr. af. to drive
away (Brockelmann Lexicon 415b); Mnd. (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 220a) to shift, flee; Late
Babylonian nadaµdu to deviate, perhaps a foreign word from Arm. (AHw. 700b; CAD N/1: 41,
but meaning uncertain); → by-form dwn.

pe: pf. 3rd. fem. tD'n", Bauer-Leander BArm. 166d: to flee, yhi/l[} HTenÒvi (→ l[2) Da 619. †
*÷d'nÒ or hn<d]n;I Heb. I ÷d;n:; < Arm. (Wagner 183); JArm. hn:d]n,I hn:d;nÒ sheath (Dalman Wb. 264a, but
see Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 97); loanword from Persian (Sanskrit nidhÉaµna container; see
Nöldeke, in Göttinger Gelehrter Anzeiger (1884), p. 1022) *nidaµni, Middle Persian niyaµm,
sheath for a sword, scabbard (Hinz 175; cf. Beyer Arm. Texte 633).
Da 715 hn<d]nI a/gB] … yjiWr tY"rik]a,: traditionally HnEd]nI (with sf.) is read for hn<d]n.I The meaning
is controversial but possible interpretations include.
—A. sheath: GenAp ii: 10 ahndn wgl ytmn my soul is in their sheath (cf. Fitzmyer Gen. Ap.
78); Bab. Talmud Sanhedrin 108a (ed. L. Goldschmidt 7: 482): ÷tmn aht al hndnl trzwj
that their soul should not return to its sheath; cf. also Pliny Nat. Hist. 7: 52/3 donec cremato eo
inimici remeanti animae velut vaginam edemerint; Codex Venetus of the Sept. reads ejn tw`/
kolew`/ in the sheath; Theodotion has ejn th`/ e{xei mou (e{xi" = hY:wIGÒ body in Jdg 149, so already
Gesenius Thes. 854b; Lebram has covering).
—B. cj. :: Sept. ejn tou;toi", Vulg. in his corresponding to Arm. hn:D] wg¾B] or hn:d] /gB] (see
Plöger KAT xviii: 102–104) “about that”, so ZüBi; —a. similarly hn:D] ÷ygI/g«B] (cf. JArm. ÷yGI/G«
protection), ÷ygIB] preposition (see Schäder OLZ 41 (1938), 593ff :: Brockelmann, OLZ 42
(1939), 666) “on account of that” (on which see BHS; Bauer-Leander BArm. 219k; Bentzen 50).
—b. hn:D] ÷/gB], cf. JArm. ÷w"G;Ò Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 611); Syr.
gawnaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 109a); NeoSyr. gaµwaµ (Maclean 45a-b); Mnd. gauna colour, sort,
coming from Persian (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 75a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 152). The
meaning of the prepositional phrase hn:D] ÷/gB] is “for that reason”.
The correct interpretation must be the first one (A), sheath, meaning covering, meaning body;
NRSV: as for me my spirit was troubled in me (margin: troubled in its sheath); REB: my spirit
within me was troubled. The cj. is not necessary. †
*r/hnÒ: I rhn; Heb. hr;h;nÒ. —a) r/hnÒ JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 264b; Beyer Arm. Texte 634);
CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 119b); Syr. (cstr.!) (Brockelmann Lexicon 418a, 417b s.v. nuhraµ), and
Mnd. nhura, anhura (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 291a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 118;
Bauer-Leander BArm. 188g); r/hnÒ Canaanite :: Schulthess Gr. §38: 2a.
—b) ar;h]Wn: JArm. (Dalman Wb. 265a); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 418a); NeoSyr. (Maclean
210a); NeoArm. (Bergsträsser Gloss. 62): det. Q ar;/hnÒ, K ar;yhinÒ (→ *ryhin)Ò : light Da 222. †
*ryhin:Ò I rhn; ryhn ¸alm. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 175, s.v. rhnII; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary
720 s.v. nhr4); ryhn JArm. ar;yhinÒ an allegorical name for the Messiah (Jastrow 882, see
Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 97 :: DSS, Beyer Arm. Texte 634 s.v. nahhir); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim
Gloss. 7b, giving light, naµr light), and CPArm. adj. (Schulthess Lex. 120a); Syr. (Brockelmann
Lexicon 417b); NeoSyr. (Maclean 210b), and Mnd. nahira (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 281b;
Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 155, atryhan lucida adj.); Syr. also sbst.; Bauer-Leander BArm.
188k: det. K ar;yhinÒ; Q → arwhn: light Da 222. †
Wryhin:" I rhn pa.; DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 634); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 120a); Sam. (Ben
H\ayyim Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 518); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 418, nahéÆruµtaµ);
Bauer-Leander BArm. 198g: illumination, of the mind Da 511.14 together with Wnt;l]k]c; and
hm;k]j;. †
I *rhn: Heb. rwn (< Arm., Wagner 184) and II rhn; in Arm. gnostic writing: af. to illuminate;
Palm. adj. illuminated, corresponding to Greek lamprovtato" (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 175 s.v.
rhnI; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 720 s.v. nhr1 and 4; cf. Beyer Arm. Texte 591; on the waw
cf. A. Dupont-Sommer, La doctrine Gnostique de la lettre ÒWaµwÓ (Paris, 1946); JArm. (Dalman
Wb. 265a s.v. rhnI); Syr. nehar (Brockelmann Lexicon 417a); Mnd. NHR (Drower-Macuch
Dictionary 291b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 61): pe. pf. nhar, nhura; Sam. ryhn (Ben H\ayyim
Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 518) and CPArm. nhwr (Schulthess Gr. §137: 1c; cf. Lex. 119b)
to shine; pa. JArm., Syr.; af. Mnd. to illuminate.
Der. *r/hnÒ, *ryhin,Ò Wryhin."
II *rhn = Heb. I rhn to flow; JArm. itpa. (Dalman Wb. 265a s.v. rhnII, but see Sokoloff, DSD 7
(2000), 97); → rh'nÒ.
rh'n:Ò II rhn; Heb. rh;n:; OArm. nhr “watercourse” (Tell Fekherye 4; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 720 s.v. nhr2); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 265a; Beyer Arm. Texte 633); CPArm.
(Schulthess Lex. 120a); Sam. nhrh = naµraó (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 7b); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon
417a); Mnd. nahra (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 281b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 107); NeoSyr.
nahraµ (Maclean 210a); NeoArm. (Bergsträsser Gloss. 62); Bauer-Leander BArm. 185p: det. ÷'
hr;h}, Ezr 416 ar;h} ÷': stream, rWnAyDi ˜÷] Da 710, especially of the River Euphrates rb'[} - (→ ÷'
hr;h}) Ezr 410-725 (14 times). †
dwn: in Heb. the form is the same but there is a distinction in the meaning; according to Vogt 110b
vagari; JArm. to flee, get mov-ing, shake; DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 634; cf. Dalman Wb. 265a);
CPArm. to shake the head (Schulthess Lex. 120b); Syr.; Mnd. NUD (Drower-Macuch
Dictionary 293a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 248) to shake, tremble, shudder; Syr. also to flee
(Brockelmann Lexicon 418b): → ddn).
pe: impf. dnUT], variant dWnT]: to flee Da 411. †
*jwn: the same in Heb.; EmpArm., Pehl. (Frahang 21: 12); JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire
176 s.v. jwnI; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 721 s.v. nwh\1); jyn EmpArm., EgArm. (Ah\iqar);
Nab., Palm. rest, quiet-ness (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 178; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 729);
hjyn Palm., JArm. inscr. resting place (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 178; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 730); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 265b, jwn to come to rest, settle down, die; jynI
gentle and jy:nÒ rest, p. 269b; Beyer Arm. Texte 634); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 120b); Sam. (Ben
H\ayyim Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 518); Syr. nyh\ to rest (Brockelmann Lexicon 419a);
Mnd. NUH (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 293; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 254b, a secondary
formation jn"t]a' (anta), see p. 84; see now Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 97); NeoSyr. n<h\ to rest
(Maclean 208a); NeoArm.
Der. *j'/jynI.
Wlw:nÒ Ezr 6 11, yliw:nÒ Da 25 329; JArm. at;yliw:nÒ dunghill (Dalman Wb. 266a; Beyer Arm. Texte 634
with the translation rubbish-heap, “a loanword for which the origin is unknown”); see now
Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 97; denominative > MHeb. lw"n;: JArm. lw"nÒ to become ugly (Dalman
Wb. 265b): tyIB' (with hitpe. db[, µy and hitpe. hwv) a dump for waste and refuse is pulled
down and turned into a waste tip as a punishment or for punishment (cf. the temple of Baal,
which was turned into a latrine (REB: privy) as a profanation 2K 1027); for the practice of
destruction as punishment, see A. Coulin, Zeitschr. für vergleich. Rechtswissenschaft 32
(1914), 326ff; K. Meuli, Schweizer Volkskunde (1951), 15ff; Montgomery 148f; P. Grelot, RB
78 (1971), 602; L. Zehnder “Volkskundliches in der älteren schweizerischen Chronistik”,
Schriften der schweizerischen Gesellschaft für Volkskunde 60 (1976), 409.
*rwn: the same in Heb.; in Arm. there is only the sbst. rWn and its denominative vb. with this root;
DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 635); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 8a); Syr. pa. and etpa. (Brockelmann
Lexicon 422a); → I *rhn.
Der. rWn.
rWn: *rwn; the same in Heb.; Akk. nuµru (AHw. 805a; CAD N/2: 347), and Arb. nuµr light; so also
in Palm. personal names (see Lidzbarski Handbuch 322; and Stark Personal Names 99a); in
Arm. it usually means fire; EmpArm., Pehl. (Junker Frahang 1: 4; nwl< Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 723 s.v. nwr2); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 266b; Beyer Arm. Texte 635); CPArm.
(Schulthess Lex. 121a); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 502); Syr.
(Brockelmann Lexicon 421b); Mnd. nura (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 294b; Nöldeke Mand.
Gramm. 105, 159); NeoSyr. nura (Maclean 211b); NeoArm. (Bergsträsser Gloss. 64); mostly
fem., but also masc. (only masc. in NeoSyr., Maclean 211b); Bauer-Leander BArm. 180 l, 200j:
det. ar;Wn, fem. Da 36, masc. 79: fire aT;d]qiy: ar;Wn ÷WTa' Da 36.11.15.17.20.21.23.26; otherwise 321.22.
24.25.27 79f.
†
qzn: Heb. qzn, qz²n,E variant qz²n,< < Arm. (Wagner 186); Ph. yif. (Kilamuwa i: 14 = Donner-R.
Inschriften 24: 14; see Friedrich Gr. §151 :: Landsberger Sam<al (1948), 52f, but on this see
Donner-R. Inschriften 2: p. 34); EmpArm., EgArm. qzn (Cowley Arm. Pap. 37: 14), the
translation is not certain; according to Cowley (Cowley Arm. Pap. 37: 14) it means “to inflict
damage”, but according to Grelot Documents p. 97 “to suffer loss”; JArm. inscr. (Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 176; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 724 s.v. nzq1); JArm., DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte
635) pe., itpe. and (h)af., to suffer loss (cf. hq;zÒnI loss, Dalman Wb. 267a; see also Sokoloff,
DSD 7 (2000), 97); Akk. nazaµqu(m) (AHw. 712; CAD N/2: 136a) to become irritated, to be
concerned, Š to annoy, cause trouble; sbst. niziqtu(m) (AHw. 799a; CAD N/2: 303a)
annoyance, trouble, grief.
pe: pt. qzIn: to come to grief (Versions, to be bothered) Da 63. †
haf: impf. qzInÒh'T]; inf. cstr. tq'zÉnÒh'; pt. fem. cstr. tq'zÒnÒh'm]: to damage Ezr 413 :: intransitive to
suffer harm (Bauer-Leander BArm. 372 l, on p. 274), for µykil]m' rd. ÷ykil]m'; (there is no need
for any further change to the MT; cf. Rudolph Esra und Nehemia 39, and subsequently KBL,
prop. hof. qz¾nÒh;m] or qz¾nÒT'mi; cf. BHS; vs.22 so that the damage should not become great (greater)
to the detriment of the kings (÷ykil]m' tq'zÉnÒh'l], on which see ZüBi; Rudolph Esra und Nehemia
44; and Gunneweg KAT xix/1: 83; on the ending -at instead of -uµt see Bauer-Leander BArm.
246n. †
vj;n:Ò Heb. hv;WjnÒ and tv,jonÒ: EmpArm. bronze, and smith, Nerab (Donner-R. Inschriften 226: 7);
EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar; Saqqara); Palm., Nab., JArm. inscr.
(Jean-H. Dictionnaire 177 s.v. jnI and jnII; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 726 s.v. nh\sû2); JArm.
(Dalman Wb. 268a); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 122a); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Literary and Oral
Tradition 2: 519); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 424a); Mnd. nhasûa (Drower-Macuch Dictionary
290b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 315); NeoSyr. nh\aµsûaµ (Maclean 212b), and NeoArm. (nhoµsûa,
also fem. nhoµsûcða, Bergsträsser Gloss. 63); cf. Heb. I vjn; Nab. jn coppersmith, or fortune-teller
(Cantineau Nab. 2: 120a; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 726 s.v. nh\s3û ); Syr. naµh\sûaµ
fortune-teller (Brockelmann Lexicon 424a); Mnd. fortune-teller (Drower-Macuch Dictionary
281b; cf. Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 120); Bauer-Leander BArm. 190t: det. av;j;nÒ copper, bronze
Da 232.35.39.45 412.20 54.23 719. †
tjn: the same in Heb., coming from Arm. (Wagner 187); OArm., Tell Fekherye 2: pt. haf. mhnh\t
to tip out, throw down; EmpArm., EgArm. pe. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.); haf.
(Cowley Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar 122, 123; Saqqara; Hermopolis) inf. + sf. with prefix µ (see
Leander 112g and h); Uruk 3 [a]hÉ-hÉi-te-e af. pf. 1st. sg. sf.; Pehl (Junker Frahang 21: 15;
Herzfeld Paikuli 408); Nab., Palm. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 177; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary
726); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 268a; Beyer Arm. Texte 636); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 122a);
Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 8a); Syr. neh\et (Brockelmann Lexicon 424b); Mnd. NHT, 3rd. pf. nhit
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 293a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 219); NeoSyr. (Maclean 212b);
NeoArm. (Bergsträsser Gloss. 63 s.v. nhÉc)ð .
pe: pt. tjin:: to come down (from heaven) Da 410.20. †
(h)af. (Baumgartner ZAW 45 (1927), 106f = Umwelt 93f; Bauer-Leander BArm. 135a and
b): impf. tjeT'; impv. tjea}, variant tjea' (Dalman Gr. 295f; Bauer-Leander BArm. 137p); pt. pl.
÷ytij} h'm] (JArm. tyjm, tyjnm; Dalman Gr. 296): to deposit (Pehl., Uruk) Ezr 515 61; 65 for
tjeT' rd. hof. tj'nÒy: :: Gunneweg KAT xix/1: 103, 104, 108: MT: “you should deposit it!” (cf.
also ZüBi). †
hof: pf. tj'nÒh; (Or. hu-), cj. tj'nÒy: Ezr 65 (h)af. (Bauer-Leander BArm. 115r): to be deposed,
aser]K;A÷mi Da 520; to be deposited, cj. Ezr 65. †
lfn: the same in Heb.; EmpArm., EgArm., Ah\iqar 169, object yny[ “I have lifted up my eyes to
you”, with tlfn; Hatra (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 178; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 728); JArm.
, DSS (Dalman Wb. 268b; Beyer Arm. Texte 636), and Syr. to raise, raise up, also to
predominate; adj. nat\t\éÆl heavy (Brockelmann Lexicon 425b).
pe: pf. 1st. sg. tlef]nI, Or. nä- (? Bauer-Leander BArm. 41t); pf. passive (Bauer-Leander
BArm. 104c) tl'yfinÒ: to lift up, ÷ynIyÒ[' Da 431, passive to be lifted up a[;r]a'A÷mi 74 (:: Ginsberg
Studies in Daniel 657; cf. Bentz 48 and Plöger KAT xviii: 101, 104). †
rfn: Heb. rxn, also < Arm. rfn (Wagner 189); cuneiform. (Murasûsûu 77) -na-t\a-ri (see Beyer
Arm. Texte 636); OArm., Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften 22 B and C, *ys\r); EmpArm., mostly
rfn, EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar; Driver Arm. Docs.; Saqqara); cf. Junker Frahang 20:
7; Herzfeld Paikuli 700–702 nt\r and nt\l; Nerab (Donner-R. Inschriften 225: 12f: y/tns\r); Nab.;
Palm. (Dura Inv. 39: 3; 40: 2); Hatra; JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 178;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 754 s.v. ns\r); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 269a; Beyer loc. cit.);
426b); Mnd. NT\R (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 295b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 143); NeoSyr.
(Maclean 213a), and NeoArm. (Bergsträsser Gloss. 65); > Arb. nt\r (:: nz\r), naµt\uµr (Fraenkel
138); Safaitic nt\r (Littmann Safaitic Inscriptions 138b); Sabaic nz\r to supervise, watch over
(Beeston Sabaic Dictionary 162).
pe: pf. 1st. sg. tref]nI to keep, aB;l¿iB] Da 728 cf. Luke 219. †
*j'/jynI: jwn; Heb. I jwn; loanword from Heb. j'/jynI j'yre the smell of appeasement; JArm.
(Jastrow 904a), DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 634; but see now Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 98);
Bauer-Leander BArm. 193 l: pl. ÷yjijoynI, ÷yji/jnI: offerings, in particular offerings of incense; so
HAL and HALOT → j'/jynI; see also Beyer loc. cit., but the meaning of the sbst. is probably
more general, with ˜÷i meaning simply offering (Vogt 112); on this see Rudolph Esra und
Nehemia 58, and Martin, ZAW 85 (1973), 81f: offering, sacrifice, with Jsn pa. Da 246, with
brq haf. Ezr 610 (Heb. Lv 614 Nu 157). †
*skn: EmpArm., Pehl. (Junker Frahang 22: 3; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 179 s.v. sknII;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 731 s.v. nks1); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 270b; Beyer Arm.
Texte 637); CPArm. asykn sacrificial animal (Schulthess Lex. 124a); Syr. nekas (Brockelmann
Lexicon 429a); Mnd. NKS (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 301a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 240);
Palm. skn sacri-ficial animal (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 179 s.v. sknIII; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 731 s.v. nks3); JArm. at;s]k]nI (Dalman Wb. 270b); DSS hskn slaughtering (Beyer
Arm. Texte 637); Syr. neksetaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 429b); Mnd. n(i)kusta, n(i)kista
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 298a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 353) slaughtering, sacrificial
animal; Akk. nakaµsu(m) (AHw. 720; CAD N/1: 171b) to sever, cut off the head.
Der. *sk'nÒ (?).
*sk'n:Ò Heb. µysik;nÒ; EmpArm., EgArm. ÷(y)skn, ayskn (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar; Saqqara;
Driver Arm. Docs.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.); Pehl. (Junker Frahang 16: 1); for Palm. see Syria 19
(1938), 170 ÷(y)sykn; JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 179 s.v. sknI; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 731 s.v. nks3); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 270b; Beyer Arm. Texte 637); ÷yskn (ne
kasin property), corresponding to Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 429a) and CPArm. (Schulthess
Lex. 124b) neksaµ; < Akk. nikkassu(m) (AHw. 789; CAD N/2: 223b s.v. nikkassu A), see
Kaufman 77: Sumerian loanword nig-gaz, on this cf. the instances mentioned in HAL 660b (
HALOT 699 a-b), s.v. µysik;nÒ “account, wealth, property” :: traditionally skn wealth of cattle, cf.
GenAp xxi: 6 yhwskn “his herds”, and GenAp xxi: 3 (passim, 15 times) ayskn “herds” (see
Fitzmyer Gen. Ap. 236), cf. Vogt 112b > property, Latin pecunia: pl. ÷ysik]nI, cstr. ysek]nI treasure,
riches, aK;l]m' ysek]nI the royal treasury Ezr 68, ÷ysik]nI (→ ) vn:[} fine 726. †
rm'n:Ò Heb. rmen:; OArm. Sefire hrmn fem. (Donner-R. Inschriften 222 A: 31; 223 A: 9); EmpArm.,
EgArm. armn (Ah\iqar 118, 119); Pehl. (Junker Frahang S2: 99; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 179;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 733 s.v. nmr1); Deir Alla i: 17; JArm. ar;m]nI, (for JPArm. fem.
see Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 98) DSS (Dalman Wb. 271b; Beyer Arm. Texte 637); Sam. hrmn
fem. (P. Kahle ZA 16 (1902), 9720); Syr. nemraµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 431b); Mnd. nimar and
namar (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 298b and 283b); Bauer-Leander BArm. 185u, 218a:
panther Da 76. †
jsn: the same in Heb.; EmpArm., Nerab (Donner-R. Inschriften 225: 9); Tema (228 A: 14);
EgArm. (Ah\iqar 156, 211; Cow-ley Arm. Pap.; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 180; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 734 s.v. nsh\1); JArm. (Dalman Wb. 272a); Mnd. NSA II (Drower-Macuch Dictionary
302a).
hitpe: impf. js'nÒt]yI, Bauer-Leander BArm. 132c: to be pulled out Ezr 611. †
Jsn: Heb. I Jsn; OArm., Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften 222 A: 26; B: 38; 224: 5, 7) pe. to pour
out, tip out, provide for (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 180 s.v. ûsnI; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary
735); JArm. pe., pa. to donate, bestow (Dalman Wb. 272b); DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 638); Syr.
pe. to pour, pour out, bestow (Brockelmann Lexicon 433b).
pa: inf. hk;S;n"; Bauer-Leander BArm. 111n, 136k: to offer, with obj. ÷yjijoynIwÒ hj;nÒmi Da 246. †
Der. *Js'n.Ò
*Js'nÒ or Jsen:Ò Jsn; Heb. Js,n/< ÷e; EmpArm., Pehl. (Junker Frahang 19: 13; Jean-H. Dictionnaire
180 s.v. JsnIII; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 736 s.v. nsk2); JArm. aK;s]nI (Dalman Wb. 272b);
Bauer-Leander BArm. 183j: pl. sf. ÷/hyKes]nI (Bauer-Leander BArm. 226z, cf. Heb.): libation Ezr
717. †
lpn: the same in Heb.; EmpArm., EgArm. (Ah\iqar 184, 186); Pehl. (Junker Frahang 20: 6;
Herzfeld Paikuli 688); Nab., Palm. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 181; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary
741 s.v. npl1); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 274b; Beyer Arm. Texte 638); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim
Gloss. 8a); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 126b); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 436b); NeoSyr.
(Maclean 216b), and Mnd. NPL (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 303a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm.
226, 238); JArm. and CPArm. l/PyI; Sam. yippalu; Syr. neppel; Mnd. lypyn (Nöldeke Mand.
Gramm. 238).
pe: pf. lp'nÒ, Wlp'&nÒ Da 720K, Q hl;p'&nÒ (Brockelmann Grundriss 1: 574f; Bauer-Leander BArm.
370 (on p. 101k) :: Ginsberg 3f: K -éÆ is as CPArm., Sam. and in part Syr., but Nab. -uµ); impf.
lPeyI, AlP,yI (Bauer-Leander BArm. 136e), pl. ÷WlP]Ti; pt. pl. ÷ylip]n”.;
—1. a) to fall Da 323 (as a consequence of being thrown, wymir] vs.21 :: to be thrown).
—b) to fall off (aY:n"r]q') Da 720; to come down (aY:m'v]A÷mi lq;) 428.
—2. to fall down yhi/PnÒa'Al[' Da 246.35–7.10f.15.
—3. to fall to, be incumbent on (CPArm. and Palm.; Rosenthal Palm. 513) with l] of the
person and l] with inf. Ezr 720. †
qpn; OArm., Sefire pe. (Donner-R. Inschriften 222 A: 28); EmpArm., Tema haf. (?) (228 A: 21);
EgArm. pe. to go out and haf. to lead out (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar; Kraeling Arm. Pap.;
Driver Arm. Docs.; Saqqara; Hermopolis 5: 2f (h)af., see Vogt 114a; Aimé-Giron 428); Pehl.
(Junker Frahang 21: 9); Nab., Palm., Hatra, JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 181;
438b); Mnd. NPQ (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 304; pe., af., Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 238f);
NeoSyr. (Maclean 216b) and NeoArm. (Bergsträsser Gloss. 61); > MHeb. Jp'n,: but see
Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 98; cf.? Arb. nafaqa to be easily sold, IV to give out, to squander
money; OSArb. nfq official decree, public proclamation (Conti Rossini 189b).
pe: pf. qp'nÒ, 3rd. fem. tq'p]n< (Bauer-Leander BArm. 41t), Or. nefaqãt and nafqat
(Bauer-Leander BArm. 136h, 29z), Wqp&'nÒ K, hq;p&'nÒ Q (for K the same as Q → lp'nÒ pe. pf. pl.);
impv. WqPu& (Bauer-Leander BArm. 135c); pt. qpen:, pl. ÷yqip]n”:; to go out Da 214 326 710, to come
forth 55 (÷[;B]x]a,), to be issued 213 (at;D;), cf. OSArb. (also Luke 21). †
haf: pf. qPenÒh', WqP&inÒh' (cf. qpa/h in EgArm., Leander §21e and f): to take out Da 52f Ezr 514
65. †
Der. *hq;p]nI.
*hq;p]n:I qpn; EmpArm., hqpn EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Saqqara); Nab., Palm. expense, cost
(Jean-H. Dictionnaire 182; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 743); JArm. at;Wqp]n" cost (Dalman
Wb. 275a); for JPArm. and JBabArm. see Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 98; Syr. nefaqtaµ cost, outlay
(Brockelmann Lexicon 439b); ? > Arb. nafaqat (Schwally, ZDMG 52 (1898), 133);
Bauer-Leander BArm. 238p: det. at;q]p]nI: cost Ezr 64.8. †
*bxn: the same in Heb., see especially hif.; Deir Alla; OArm., Zendjirli pe. to stand up,
reestablish (Donner-R. Inschriften 214: 10); EmpArm., Nab., Palm. to erect (Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 184 s.v. bxnI; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 749); cuneiform na-sa-bã-bi,

Tallqvist Names 23a; see Beyer Arm. Texte 640 “to plant”; so also JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb.
275b; Beyer loc. cit.); CPArm. to plant (Schulthess Lex. 127b); Sam. to plant (Ben H\ayyim
Gloss. 8a); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 442a); Mnd. NS\B (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 305;
Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 239); NeoSyr. (Maclean 217a); NeoArm. (Bergsträsser Gloss. 64).
Der. *hB;x]nI.
*hB;x]n:I bxn; OArm., ns\b Zakir and Sefire; Barhaddad (Donner-R. Inschriften 201: 1), Zakir
(202 A: 1; B: 14, 18, 19); Sefire (222 C: 17); EmpArm., ns\b EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.)
planting; Nab. cultic image (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 184 s.v. bxnII; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary
750 s.v. ns\b2); ns\bh EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.) planting (Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 751 s.v. ns\bh1); Nab., Palm. stele (Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 751 s.v. ns\bh2);
JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 275b, at;B]x]nI planting; Beyer Arm. Texte 640); CPArm. ns\b< plant,
ns\b pillar (Schulthess Lex. 127b); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 442b, nes\betaµ plant); Mnd.
nis\(u)bta, nis\bta (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 299; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 103); Sam. (Ben
H\ayyim Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 525) plant, planting; NeoArm. ns\éÆba what is ordered for
someone by fate (Bergsträsser Gloss. 64 s.v. ns\b, especially 65); Bauer-Leander BArm. 224h:
det. at;B]x]nI firmness, hardness (al;zÒr]p' yDi) Da 241. †
jxn: the same in Heb.; —1. verbal: JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 275b; Beyer Arm. Texte 640); Sam.
(Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 8a, to wage war); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 127b) pe., pa. to overpower, be
victorious; Syr. also to shine (Brockelmann Lexicon 442b).
—2. adjectival: jxn EmpArm., Mcheta 3 (Donner-R. Inschriften 276: 3); EgArm. itp. (Cowley
Arm. Pap.; Behistun 60; Driver Arm. Docs.) to distinguish oneself :: Driver Arm. Docs. p. 102b
and p. 65, to demonstrate activity, demonstrate strength (on Behistun 60 see again Segert
ArchOr 24 (1956), 389f; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 184 s.v. jxnI and adj. jyxn; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 751 and 752 s.v. ns\h1\ and ns\yh\).
hitpa: pt. jX'n"t]mi, Or. jx'nÒt]mi hitpe. (Bauer-Leander BArm. 133g): to distinguish oneself,
with l[' Da 64. †
lxn: the same in Heb.; EmpArm. (h)af. to snatch away, save; Pehl. (Junker Frahang 21: 13);
EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Saqqara; Ah\iqar); Bauer-Meissner
Pachtvertrag 14 lxa; Xanthos (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 185; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary
753); JArm. (h)af., DSS (Dalman Wb. 276a, to save; Beyer Arm. Texte 640f); Syr. af. to release,
save (Brockelmann Lexicon 443a).
haf: (÷ assimilated, as Bauer-Meissner loc. cit., JArm. and Syr.) Bauer-Leander BArm. 135a:
inf. hl;X;h', sf. HteWlX;h'l] (Bauer-Leander BArm. 246n); pt. lXim' to save.
—a) of God Da 329 628.
—b) of people 615. †
aqen:Ò hqn; Heb. yqin;: EmpArm., “Waw” nq< meaning clean, pure (Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary
756 s.v. nq<2) and nqy clean, pure (Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 757 s.v. nqy4); JArm. ay:q]n,"
indet. yqenÒ (Dalman Wb. 277a); DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 641) aqn; CPArm. (Schulthess Lex.
128a) and Syr. neqeµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 444b); Arm. fem. name NaqéÆ<a Zakuµtu, the wife of
Sennacherib and the mother of Esarhaddon (Levy, JNES 11 (1952), 272ff); Bauer-Leander
BArm. 186x: clean, pure Da 79 (rm'[} ð') ? :: Beyer loc. cit. s.v. hqn neqeµ < Akk. néÆquµ
sacrificial sheep (Kaufman 77): aqenÒ rm'[} ð' “as white as the wool of a sheep”; see also
Sokoloff JBL 95 (1976), 277–279. †
*hqn: the same in Heb.; EmpArm. pa. —1. to clean, purify: Bauer-Meissner Pachtvertrag 10f:
hqna (Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 757 s.v. nqy1) “I will purify”, but the concrete meaning is
not quite certain; either —a) “to rid oneself of any claims”, so Koopmans 1: p. 98; or —b) to
clean grain, so e.g. Baumgartner KBL, Supplement p. 204b; sbst. EgArm. hyqn purification, or
(as 2) libation (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 186 s.v. yqnI and hyqn; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 758
s.v. nqyh1); JArm. pa. causative, “to cleanse, purify”; also DSS (Dalman Wb. 277a s.v. yqn;
Beyer Arm. Texte 641); Sam.; CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 128a).
—2. < Akk. naquÆ(m) (AHw. 744b; CAD N/1: 336a) to pour out, make an offering (on the vb.
see also Zimmern 67f and Kaufman 77); EmpArm., Pehl. (Junker Frahang App. 26) to pour;
Jean-H. Dictionnaire 186 s.v. yqnII); CPArm. yqwn (SchulthessLex.128a);Syr.pe.andpa.to donate,
make an offering (Brockelmann Lexicon 444b); cf. Mnd. niqia variant naqia “offering”?
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 299b); Syr. neqyaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 444b) and Mnd.
Der. aqenÒ.
vqn: Heb. vqn as by-form from vqy and vwq (HAL 682b; HALOT 723a); it is completely
uncertain whether there is any connection between the Heb. and the Arm. verbs, see Nöldeke
Neue Beiträge 192, who says that any connection with the Arb. root nqs\ etc., which just about
corresponds or can be taken as similar, is, to say the least, not very likely; JArm., DSS (Dalman
Wb. 278a; Beyer Arm. Texte 641); CPArm. (only af.), also “to shake” (Schulthess Lex. 128b);
Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 448a); NeoSyr. (Maclean 218a); Mnd. NQSð (Drower-Macuch
Dictionary 306b; Nöldeke Neue Beiträge 188) to beat, knock.
pe: pt. pl. fem. ÷v;q]n:”; intr. ad;l] aD; to strike one another (HteB;Kur]a', his knees knock
together in terror) Da 56; cf. Targ.; —a) Ezk 313 ÷v;q]n”; at;y:r]bi yPiG;¾ —b) Qoh 123 ydi am;/yB]
J[;r]d]a, ÷WvQ]n"t]yIwÒ Jt;b]Kur]a' ÷W[WzyÒ on the day when your knees will shake and your arms will
twitch. †
acn: the same in Heb.; in Arm. it is suppressed by lfn, bsn, lbs, lqv; OArm., Zakir
(Donner-R. Inschriften 202 A: 11); Sefire (222; 223; 224); EmpArm., EgArm. (Ah\iqar; for
Saqqara see Leander 67a, and Vogt 115); Uruk I 27, 32 na-sûã-a-a-tu corresponding to nasûayt
(1st. sg. pf.); Tell Arad; Bauer-Meissner Pachtvertrag 13 (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 186;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 760 s.v. nsû<1); JArm. asn (cf. bsn, Dalman Gr. 292); DSS
(Dalman Wb. 271b s.v. as;nÒI; Beyer Arm. Texte 642); Sam. nsh (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 8a); sbst.
Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 396a s.v. massa<taµ and NeoSyr. massa<taµ balances, scales (Maclean
184b).
pe: pf. ac;n;Ò impv. ace (Bauer-Leander BArm. 135c, 60h).

—1. to take Ezr 515.
—2. to carry away Da 235 (aj;Wr'). †
hitpe: (? < Heb.): pt. fem. ha;C]n"t]mi: to rise up against, with l[', Ezr 419. †
*÷yvin:Ò Heb. µyvin;: OArm., Tell Fekherye 21, 22: pl. abs. nsûwn, cf. p. 47; Sefire pl. cstr. yn
(Donner-R. Inschriften 222 A: 41); EmpArm., Uruk 37: ni-sûe-e (pl. with 1st. suffix); EgArm.
emph. ayn, abs. ÷n, cstr. yn (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Driver Arm. Docs.; Saqqara;
Hermopolis; Leander 92f, 69g); Arebsun (Donner-R. Inschriften 264: 2, 8), Armazi = Mcheta
(276: 3); Pehl. (Junker Frahang 11: 5 hyn); Nab., Palm., Hatra, JArm. inscr. (Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 26 s.v. vaI; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 115 s.v <sû1, especially 117f); JArm.,
DSS (Dalman Gr. §40, p. 197; Beyer Arm. Texte 518; constructed as a back-formation, once in
the sg. av;nÒ Dalman Gr. 200; see now Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 98); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex.
14a s.v. ata; on CPArm. see also Schulthess Gr. §85: 3o) and Sam. nisûéÆn (Ben H\ayyim
Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 520); Syr. nesûsûeµ< (Brockelmann Lexicon 450a); Mnd. >nsûia
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 354a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 183); NeoSyr. insûi (Maclean 16a
s.v. <nsû<); sg. *htna, det. attna after EgArm. Bauer-Leander BArm. 179f; sg. *aT;nÒa' (Heb.
hV;ai): sf. ÷/hyven:Ò women Da 625. †
*µvn: the same in Heb.; JArm. DSS (Dalman Wb. 279b; Beyer Arm. Texte 642); Sam. (Ben
H\ayyim Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 579); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 451a) and Mnd.
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 307a) pe. to breathe; etpe. JArm. and CPArm. (Schulthess Lex.
129a) to recuperate (really to breathe out); Palm. personal name nsû(w)m (Stark Personal Names
100); Arb. nasama to blow gently; Yemen tanassama to blow (Rabin 28).
Der. *hm;v]nI.
*hm;v]n:I µvn; Heb. hm;v;nÒ; CPArm. nsûm< (Schulthess Lex. 129a); Sam. nasema (Ben H\ayyim
Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 518); Palm. nsûmh (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 187); JArm. at;m]v]nI
breath of life, soul (Dalman Wb. 279b); DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 642); Syr. (Brockelmann
Lexicon 451a) and NeoSyr. nesûamtaµ, also nisûimta (Maclean 219a); Mnd. nisûimta
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 300; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 109); st. abs. nisûma
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 300; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 307); Bauer-Leander BArm. 238p:
sf. Jt;m]v]nI breath, breath of life Da 523. †
rv'n:Ò Heb. rv,n;< Deir Alla; Nab. and Hatra rn (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 188; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 765 s.v. nsûr2); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 529); JArm., DSS
(Dalman Wb. 279b; Beyer Arm. Texte 642, vulture); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 129a); Mnd. nisûra
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 300b); Syr. nesûraµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 451b); basic form, Arm.
nisûr; Bauer-Leander BArm. 182x; pl. ÷yriv]nI eagle Da 430 74. †
*÷w:T]v]n:I the same in Heb.; EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap. 17: 2 anwtn); Taxila hwnsûtwn
(Donner-R. Inschriften 273: 8; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 188; Wagner 193; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 766) < Old Persian ni-sûto-vaµna decree, order (Mayrhofer Handbuch des
Altpersischen 135; Hinz 176; Ellenbogen 116; In der Smitten BiOr 28 (1971), 309ff): det.
an:w:T]v]n:I official document, decree Ezr 418.23 55. †
*÷ytin:Ò ÷tn; Heb. ÷ytin;: EmpArm., cuneiform, Murasûsûu na-ti-in (Coogan Personal Names 124;
Beyer Arm. Texte 643); EgArm. n.m. (Cowley Arm. Pap. 53: 2; 81: 90; Kornfeld 63); Hatra
(Jean-H. Dictionnaire 188; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 766); JArm. (Dalman Wb. 280a; cf.
Beyer Arm. Texte 643, “someone handed over to the king or to the temple as a slave”); see
Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 98: a Hebrew loanword in BArm.; cf. Hatra (Donner-R. Inschriften
243: 1 anytn aklm, see also Jean-H. Dictionnaire 188); Bauer-Leander BArm. 188h: det. pl.
aY:n"ytinÒ someone handed over, someone who has been given, slave of the temple Ezr 724. †
÷tn: the same in Heb.; in Arm. the pf., impv. and pt. are early and often replaced by bhy (see
Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 98). For forms of natan in cuneiform see Beyer Arm. Texte 642;
OArm., pf. Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften 224 passim); Tell Fekherye 2; impf. Zendjirli
(Donner-R. Inschriften 214: 4, 23); EmpArm., EgArm. pf. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Hermopolis;
Ah\iqar; Kraeling Arm. Pap.), also in n.m. ÷ytn (Kornfeld 63); impf. ÷tny etc. and less frequently
÷ty (Leander 56c and Driver Arm. Docs.; see further Cowley Arm. Pap. and Kraeling Arm. Pap.
); Samaria; Bauer-Meissner Pachtvertrag, pf. 2 and 11; impf. 10; Tell Halaf: pf. 1 and 4; impf.
71 rv. 2; Herzfeld Paikuli 498, 502; Nab. yntn; Palm. ytn; JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire
188; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 766); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 280b; Beyer Arm. Texte
642); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 8a); CPArm. ytn (etten) and <tl (ettel) (Schulthess Lex. 129 and
Gr. §147, p. 68); passim in Syr. natan with l], nettel, inf. nettal (Nöldeke Syr. Gramm. §183 p.
128, see above bhy; Brockelmann Grundriss 1: 291); Mnd. NTN (Drower-Macuch Dictionary
307f), pe. impf., see Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 238f.
pe: impf. A÷TenÒyI (variants A÷TinÒyI and A÷T,nÒy)I , ÷TenÒTi, ÷WnT]nÒy,I sf. HN"nIT]y" (variant Hn:A,
Bauer-Leander BArm. 79s); inf. ÷T'nÒmi (Bauer-Leander BArm. 135b); all the other forms are
replaced by → bhy: to give (÷m;zÒ) Da 216: ÷m'l] HN"nIT]yI aBex]yI yDi 414.22.29; to provide funds,
defray costs (Wjv]j') Ezr 720; to pay (taxes) Ezr 413. †
Der. hn:T]m', ÷ytin.Ò
rtn: Heb. I rtn (HAL 695b; HALOT 736b); MHeb. rvn, rtn; EmpArm., EgArm. haf. to
remove (Cowley Arm. Pap. 15: 35, Saqqara); ? Nab. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 189;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 771 s.v. ntr1); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 280b; Beyer Arm. Texte
643); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 452b); Mnd. NTR (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 308; Nöldeke
Mand. Gramm. 239) to fall off; JArm., Syr. af. to let fall; Arb. nat\ara to fall down (of leaves,
stones, cf. Wehr-Cowan 943a, to scatter); in Tg. very often corresponds to Heb. I lben:
(Gesenius Thes. 930b).
af. (Bauer-Leander BArm. 113b, 370 on p. 62, q and r): impv. pl. WrT'&a', Bauer-Leander
BArm. 42v: to shake off (ypi[Õ) Da 411, cf. Theodotion kai; ejktinavxate ta; fu;lla aujtou` . †
s: —1. = Proto-Semitic s, Arb. s, Heb. s, in rsa, dgs, ¹ws, qls etc.

—2. interchanges with the older phoneme sŒ = c, Arb. sû, in yD;c]K', ak;B]c', agc, ayGIc' and
rf'c], and replaces it, as generally in later Arm. (Bauer-Leander BArm. 26e-k; Baumgartner
ZAW 45 (1927), 101ff = Umwelt 89ff) in rbs (Arb. sbr), II rts, spr (Arb. rfs).
—3. outside BArm. it interchanges with Å in ¹s'j}.
—4. = Assyrian s (Babylonian sû) in *lbe/s (? → lbs) and *÷gs.
ak;B]s:' Da 3 5 → ak;B]c'.
lbs: the same in Heb.; EmpArm., EgArm., pe. Ah\iqar 90 to carry :: Leander 49e; pa. Kraeling
Arm. Pap. and Ah\iqar 48, 72f, 204 to support, care about; sbst. Ah\iqar 74; Cowley Arm. Pap.
support; Behistun 63; Hermopolis 1: 5 (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 189f; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 774 s.v. sbl1 and 775 s.v. sbl2); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 281b; Beyer Arm. Texte
643); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 130a); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 8b); Syr. (Brockelmann
Lexicon 454b); Mnd. SBL, SWL (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 316b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm.
220).
po: pt. passive pl. ÷ylib]/sm]: Ezr 63 with yhi/Vau (→ *va), uncertain; pt. passive, maintained,
of foundations which have to be maintained (Bauer-Leander BArm. 297d!); others, to offer (→
lby with yhi/Va,, → aV;a,) “its fire-offering should be presented”; or yhi/jv]mi, pl. sf. on *jv'm],
vb. ÷yli(y)ûiT]mi (ettaf.) from lyk, “its measurements are to be determined” (→ *÷yViau 2). †
rbs: Heb. rbc; < Arm. (Wagner 292, 293): to think, hope; EmpArm., EgArm. (Cow-ley Arm.
Pap.); Palm. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 190 s.v. rbsI and II; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 775 s.v.
sbr1 and 2) to think; JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 282a; Beyer Arm. Texte 643); Sam. (Ben
H\ayyim Gloss. 8a); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 130b); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 456a);
NeoSyr. to trust (Maclean 220b); Mnd. SBR to learn, believe, be convinced (Drower-Macuch
Dictionary 326f); sbst. arbws hope; Pehl. (Junker Frahang 26: 1); JArm., DSS rbs = sábar
(Dalman Wb. 285a: ar;b]/s, Beyer loc. cit.), st. indet. rb's] (Dalman Wb. 282a s.v. ar;b]si, ar;b]su
, st. emph.); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 456b) and NeoSyr. sabraµ hope (Maclean 220b).
pe: impf. rB's]yI (Bauer-Leander BArm. 132c): to intend, with l] and inf. Da 725. †
ags and ayGIs' → agc and ayGIc.'
dgs: the same in Heb.; < Arm. (Wagner 195); EmpArm., EgArm. (Ah\iqar 13); sbst. Pehl. hdgs([
) (Junker Frahang 19: 8; Ps. 141b, prosthetic </>, see Bauer-Leander BArm. 44a and a 8;
Jean-H. Dictionnaire 190 s.v. dgsI and III; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 775 s.v. sgd1); adgsm
EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.); Nab. adgsm, adgm (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 160;
CPArm. (Schulthess Gr. §137: 1b, p. 60; Lex. 132a); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 8a); Syr. seged,
sbst. masgedaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 458b); so also Mnd. SGD, pf. sgid, and sbst. masgda
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 318a; 249a; and Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 219; 129); Arb. masjid.
pe: pf. dgIs], Or. seged; impf. dG¬s]yI (Brockelmann Grundriss 1: 549; Bauer-Leander BArm.
98s), ÷WdGÒs]y,I ÷WdGÒs]Ti, dG¬s]nI; pt. pl. ÷ydigÒs‰;: to pay homage to, with l] to God, and to idols Da 35–7.
10–12.14f.18.28 (312.14.18.28 parallel with jlp), to people 246.
†
*÷g¾s] or *÷g«s] (Leander 103b): Heb. *÷g²s, or *÷gÉs; (HAL 701a; HALOT 742b); for MHeb. cstr. ÷g¾s]
see Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 98; EmpArm., EgArm. ÷gs (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm.
Pap.; Saqqara); Samaria; Persepolis (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 190 s.v. ÷gsI; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 777); JArm. ÷gÉs; (Jastrow 955b), DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 644); Mnd. singiania pl.
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 328a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 76); loanword > Late Babylonian
sagaµnu (AHw. 1002b; CAD S: 21b) < sûaknu(m) (AHw. 1141) office holder, representative,
governor (Zimmern 6; Kaufman 75f); see also Ernst Klauber Ass. Beamtentum (1910), 100;
never a spiritual title; deputy, often a provincial governor (Reallexikon der Assyriologie 1: 454f,
462): pl. ÷ynIgÒs,i aY:n"gÒs:i prefect, governor: in a series of titles of officials Da 32f.27 68; ÷ynIgÒsiA(→)
br chief prefect Da 248 (cf. 46). †
rgs: A. Heb. I rgs; JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 283b; Beyer Arm. Texte 644; see also GenAp xxii:
17 ûdyb ûyan rgs yd; cf. Heb. I rgs pi.); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 132a) and Syr. to shut,
close up (Brockelmann Lexicon 459b); sbst. OArm., Zendjirli rgsm/hrgsm, pl. trgsm prison
(Donner-R. Inschriften 215: 4, 8; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 160; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 663
s.v. msgr(h)); EmpArm., EgArm. args[µ], see G.R. Driver Fschr. 53, 582 prison.
B. for the synonym see Heb. I rks; OArm., Sefire (haf. Donner-R. Inschriften 224: 2, 3);
EmpArm., EgArm. pe. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 193; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 786 s.v. skr1); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 291a, rks; Beyer Arm. Texte 646);
CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 136b); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 475a); Mnd. SKR
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 331; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 225); NeoArm. (Bergsträsser Gloss.
86).
pe: pf. rg¾s} W (Bauer-Leander BArm. 263j), Or. wisgar: to shut (at;w:y:r]a' µPu, Theodotion
ejnevfraxen to close up) Da 623. †
a/hy:nÒPom]Ws: Da 3 . vs.10 hy:nÒPoYs: hy:nÒPoysi K, ˜¸oWs Q and variants, Cairo Geniza ˜¹mys, a
5 15,
musical instrument; loanword from sumfwniva (Sept., Theodotion), Polybius 26, 10:5; 31, 4:8;
JArm. a/hy:nÒ/Pm]Ws and ˜µ]ysi (Dalman Wb. 294a, ˜Ws; Jastrow 982b, ˜ysi; see Beyer Arm. Texte
644; see also Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 99); MHeb. ÷/Pm]si (Dalman Wb. 294a s.v. ÷/Pm]siI); Syr.
(Brockelmann Lexicon 635a), and NeoSyr. s\eppoµnyaµ; Late Latin symphonia; in Romance
languages > zampogna which can mean bagpipe (KBL), but that is uncertain; for further
suggestions see Ellenbogen 122, and Kolari 81. What is most likely is the well-founded
suggestion of Grelot, VT 29 (1979), 36–38; Sokoloff loc. cit. refers to Mitchell and Joyce in
D.J. Wiseman Problems in the Book of Daniel (1965), 25; and Coxon, ibid., 32–34:
double-barrelled flute, sackbut, so also Beyer loc. cit.; cf. also Vogt 118a. †
¹ws: the same in Heb.; JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 286a; Beyer Arm. Texte 645); Sam. (Ben
H\ayyim Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 486); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 133b); Syr.
(Brockelmann Lexicon 465a); Mnd. SUP (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 323a; Nöldeke Mand.
Gramm. 249); NeoSyr. to cease, come to an end, perish.
pe: pf. 3rd. fem. tp's;&, Bauer-Leander BArm. 144g: to be fulfilled (at;L]mi, cf. Heb. hl;K; qal
2), with l[' of the person Da 430. †
haf: impf. 3rd. fem. ¹yseT;, variant ¹seT;, Or. teseµf, Bauer-Leander BArm. 148c: to put an
end to something, completely annihilate Da 244. †
Der. *¹/s.
*¹/s: ¹ws; the same in Heb.; EmpArm. and JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 196 s.v. ¹sII;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 796 s.v. sp2); JArm. ap;/s (Dalman Wb. 286b); DSS (Beyer
Arm. Texte 645); Syr. saupaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 465a); Mnd. saupa (Drower-Macuch
Dictionary 311a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 150): the same in cstr.; det. ap;/s: end.
—1. with spatial significance (AlK;) ¹/sl] a[;r]a' as far as the end of the whole earth Da 48.19 cj.
17.
—2. with temporal significance … HteWkl]m' ap;/s d[' HnEf;l]v;wÒ his kingdom and his rule will
last for ever (referring to the God of Daniel) Da 627; ap;/sAd[' hd;b;/hl]W hd;m;v]h'l] and in the
end to destroy it and to annihilate it (referring to HnEf;l]v;) Da 726.
—3. in general: at;L]miAydi ap;/s hK;Ad[' here is the end of the announcement Da 728. †
ay:nÒpoWs and ay:nÒpoysi: → ay:nÒPom]Ws.
rf's:] → rf'c].
qls: the same in Heb.; OArm., Sefire qsy (Donner-R. Inschriften 224: 14, 15, 16), ÷qsy (222 A:
5; 222 C: 4), on which see also Degen Altaram. Gr. §64g and l, p. 78; EmpArm., EgArm. qls
(Cowley Arm. Pap. 81, 15), inf. mslq, qsn[µ] (Kraeling Arm. Pap. 9: 15; 6: 10 and 13); Beer
Sheba 5: 2; Nab. (Vincent, RB 61 (1954), 13s); Palm., Hatra, JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire
193; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 788); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 292a; Beyer Arm. Texte
646); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 137a), and Syr. seleq (Brockelmann Lexicon 477a); Sam. (Ben
H\ayyim Gloss. 8b); Mnd. SLQ I (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 332; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm.
238); NeoArm. isleq (Bergsträsser Gloss. 81); NeoSyr. af. <sq (Maclean 17b); Arb. slq V to
ascend, mount, climb, scale (Wehr-Cowan 423b); af. specifically to offer; JArm., DSS, CPArm.
(Schulthess Lex. 137b); Sam. and Syr.; Neo-Babylonian (Arm. loanword) salaµqu II, seleµqu (
AHw. 1014b; CAD S: 93a, s.v. salaµqu B) to climb up.
pe: pf. 3rd. fem. tq'l]si Da 720.78 rd. thus for tq;l]si; Or. salqat, variant tq'les] and tq,l,s]
(Bauer-Leander BArm. 137e; 29z!; 102r!, 139g!); Montgomery 295 tq'l]s‰;; see also BHS,
mixed formation from tq'- and hq;l]s‰;; pl. 3rd. masc. Wql&is]; pt. pl. fem. ÷q;l]s‰;: to go up, come
up Da 73 (of animals), Ezr 412 (of people), aY:n"r]q' Da 78.20, ÷ynI/y[]r' Da 229 (→ lB;). †
haf: pf. (1st. sg. tqsa GenAp xxi: 20: al[ yhwl[ tqsaw jbdm , cf. Fitzmyer Gen. Ap.
156; and Heb. hl[ hif. 3d) 3rd. pl. WqSi&h' (Bauer-Leander BArm. 137a); inf. hq;s;nÒh'
(Bauer-Leander BArm. 137c): to take up Da 322, to lift up (aB;G¬A÷mi) 624. †
hof: pf. qS'hu (Bauer-Leander BArm. 137a): to be lifted up (aB;G¬A÷mi) Da 624. †
d[s: the same in Heb.; OArm., Zendjirli (Donner-R. Inschriften 214: 15, 21); EmpArm., EgArm.
ynd[s (Behistun 2; Cowley Arm. Pap. 301b); > Babylonian issidanni (Xerxes, Persepolis;
Herzfeld Altpersischen Inschriften 341f; Rössler 33); Neo-Babylonian and Late Babylonian vb.
seÆdu (< Arm.) (AHw. 1034a; CAD S: 206) to help, support (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 195;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 795); EgArm. personal name td[s (Degen-Müller-Röllig Neue
Ephemeris 2 (1974): 68); JArm. to aid, pa. to help (Dalman Wb. 296b), sbst. d[s help; DSS
(Beyer Arm. Texte 647); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 543); CPArm. (sbst.
s>dwn help, Schulthess Lex. 138b); Nab. n.m. yhlad[ (Lidzbarski Ephemeris 2: 73A;
Cantineau Nab. 2: 153a); Palm. ady[ (LP, Ingholt-Seyrig-Starcky Recueil) benevolent.
pa: pt. pl. ÷ydi[} s‰;m], variant ÷ydi[} s'm]; Bauer-Leander BArm. 58p, 130g!: to aid, support
Ezr 52. †
*rps: Heb. I rps: to count, write, denominative from rp's]; Sam. pe. and pa. (Ben H\ayyim
Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 534); Syr. pe. to narrate (Brockelmann Lexicon 493a); Mnd. SPR
I to write, describe etc. (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 335a); → *rp's], rp's;.
*rp's:] Heb. I rp,se; OArm., Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften 222; 223; 224) “inscription”;
EmpArm., Bauer-Meissner Pachtvertrag rv. 2, 4 (Koopmans 2 (p. 23), 17 and 19); EgArm.
(Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Saqqara; Hermopolis); Padua 2, 5; Pehl. (Shapur AJSL
57 (1940), 332); Palm., JArm. inscr.; JArm. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 196 s.v. rpsIII;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 799 s.v. spr3), DSS (Dalman Wb. 298b, ar;p]si; Beyer Arm.
Texte 647); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 139a s.v. rps II), and NeoSyr. sifraµ< (Maclean 229b); >
Arb. sifr book (Fraenkel 247); Syr. sepraµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 493a); Sam. asfaór (Ben
H\ayyim Gloss. 8b); Mnd. aspar, <spaµr, sipra (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 29a and 329a;
Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 102, 151); loanword from Akk. sûipru(m) (AHw. 1245b; CADŠ/3: 73a)
mission, message (Zimmern 19; Kaufman 29), cf. Bauer-Leander BArm. 224i; see also Late
Babylonian sipru II (AHw. 1049b; CAD S: 304; Arm. loanword) document; BArm., the same
in cstr.; pl. ÷rip]si, det. aY:r'p]si: book Da 710, hv,mo rp's] Ezr 618, aY:n"r;k]D; ˜s] record books
(Bauer-Leander BArm. 310b) 415, aY:r'p]si tyBe archives (cf. arps tyb Aimé-Giron no. 71;
Akk. béÆt t\uppaµti(m) (AHw. 134b paragraph 35) tablet store, archive, school; cf. Driver Semitic
Writing 64); read aY:r'p]si ydi aY:z¾nÒGI tyBe Ezr 61 “in the treasury where the records are deposited”
(→ *zn"G)Ò , and cf. Gunneweg KAT xix/1: 103. †
Denominative vb. rps.
*rp's:; → rp's]; Heb. rpe/s; OArm., Mesopotamia (Lidzbarski Handbuch; Lidzbarski Urkunden
no. 4: 13); Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften 227: rv. 6); EmpArm., Asshur Ostracon (Donner-R.
Inschriften 236: 6); EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar; Driver Arm. Docs.); Saqqara
(Donner-R. Inschriften 266: 9); Pehl. (Herzfeld Paikuli 732); Dura (Altheim 205); Hatra arp
(Donner-R. Inschriften 249: 3); JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 196 s.v. rpsII;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 798 s.v. spr2); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 299b; Beyer Arm.
Texte 648); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 139a s.v. rps II); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 493a);
NeoSyr. (Maclean 229b); Bauer-Leander BArm. 215k and m; loanword from Akk. sûaµpiru(m) 1.
official, 2. ruler (AHw. 1172f; CADŠ/1: 453a); for the first meaning see especially paragraph 6;
Neo- and Late Babylonian “representative”; but Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 99 prefers to take Akk.
sepéÆru, scribe writing alphabetic script (CAD S: 226–227) as a loanword from Arm.; for the
high status of this official cf. Reallexikon der Assyriologie 1: 445a; see further p. 456b,
sepéÆru/sepirru supervisory scribe, chief clerk (cf. AHw. 1036b; CAD S: 225a); Syr. seféÆraµ
(Brockelmann Lexicon 493a; but see Sokoloff loc. cit.), possibly a loanword from Western
Semitic (Ebeling ZA 50 (1952), 212; Lewy HUCA 25 (1951), 201ff); the same in cstr.; det.
ar;p]s‰;, cj. pl. ÷yrip]s‰;, with Sept. grammatei`" for ÷yfip]v‰; (BHS); see also Gunneweg KAT
xix/1: 128, 129 Ezr 725: scribe, clerk, Sept. grammateu;", secretary of the hj;P, Ezr 48f.17.23, cj.
725 (see above); Ezra as aY:m'v] Hl;aÔAyDi at;D; rp's; 712.21 a description of the sphere of duty,
rather than the earlier idea of learned scribe or author. †
*lB;r]s,' pl. sf. ÷/hyleB;r]s' Da 321.27, an item of clothing, trousers or coat (see now Sokoloff,
DSD 7 (2000), 99); Sept. iJmatismov" (su;n tw`/ iJmatismw`/ aujtw`n ), Theodotion sarabavra (su;n
toi`" saravbaroi" aujtw`n ); saÆ e[sqh" Parsikhv (Suidas), also saravballa, saravpara,
Pauly-Wissowa 2: R I 2: 2386, Symmachus ajnaxurivdh", Vulgate braccae: long, baggy,
oriental trousers (perhaps the sbst. has a Scythian origin), foreign word.; EmpArm., Pehl.
(Junker Frahang 15: 12 ayl[y]brs shirt; but see Sokoloff loc. cit.); EgArm. qlbrs (Cowley
Arm. Pap. 42: 9, for q see p. 144; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 197; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary
802 s.v srblwn; Sokoloff loc. cit. prefers to read Åljrs); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 300a:
al;B]r]s', Beyer Arm. Texte 648 s.v. lbr; but see Sokoloff loc. cit.); MHeb. lB;r]s' coat,
trousers (Dalman Wb. 300a); denom. JArm. lBer]s' to wrap up; MHeb. pt. passive lB;r]sum]
wrapped up, corpulent (Dalman Wb. 300a; but see Sokoloff loc. cit.); > Arb. sirbaµl coat
(Fraenkel 47f with important notes); cf. also Syr. sûarbaµlaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 806b); > Latin
sarabala, sarabara, “a type of Persian pantaloon” (Lokotsch 1849); Mnd. sûaruala
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 445b); NeoSyr. sûarwaµl and sûarwaµr; Neo-Persian sûirwaµl and sûalwaµr
trousers; on the Persian sbst. see especially Vogt 120a; see further Jean-H. Dictionnaire 197;
Fraenkel; Commentaries. †
*Jr's]: JArm. ak;r]s‰; (Tg. for Heb. rfe/v), DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 648) and an:K;r]s' commander,
chief (Dalman Wb. 302a), but see now Sokoloff DSD 7 (2000), 100; DSS also order (Kuhn
Konkordanz 152f) and mar-shal: twnjmh ykrws the marshal of the army, so Lohse3 194, 195;
and Maier 1: 131; loanword from Persian saµraka “to stand at the ready” (Hinz 221); cf.
EmpArm. aykwrs (Sardes = Donner-R. Inschriften 260 B: 4, and Donner-R. Inschriften 2: p.
307; see Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 802 s.v. srwky: possibly from Hittite sûarkusû
(Kahle-Sommer, Kleinasiatische Forschungen 1 (1930), 55f :: Arb. sûarika to be a comrade (G.
Behrmann Das Buch Daniel (1894), 38): pl. ÷ykir]s‰;, yker]s‰;, aY:k'r]s‰;: high official (of the king),
Sept. hJgou;menoi, Theodotion taktikoiv, Vulgate principes, Da 63–5.7f. †
I rts: Heb. rts; JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 303b, s.v. rts I; Beyer Arm. Texte 648); Syr.
(Brockelmann Lexicon 502b); Mnd. STR pa. to hide (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 338b); sbst.:
EmpArm., EgArm. rts “hiding place”
(Cowley Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar 88, 175); Palm., JArm. inscr. to conceal (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 198
s.v. rtsI to conceal; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 805 s.v. str1: to hide, s.v. str2 to conceal);
JArm. ar;t]si, DSS (Dalman Wb. 303b; Beyer loc. cit.); Syr. setraµ (Brockelmann Lexicon
502b); Mnd. sitara (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 330a).
pa: pt. passive fem. pl. det. at;r;T]s'm], Bauer-Leander BArm. 112t: hidden things Da 222. †
II rts: Heb. rtc; EmpArm., EgArm. rt (Ah\iqar 125) to break into, destroy (Jean-H.
Dictionnaire s.v. rtI; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1200 s.v. sûtr1); JArm. rts II (Dalman
Wb. 303b); DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 720); CPArm. str (Schulthess Lex. 140b); Sam.; Syr.
(Brockelmann Lexicon 503b), and Mnd. STR II (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 339).
pe: pf. sf. Hret]s', Bauer-Leander BArm. 126b: to destroy, demolish Ezr 512. †
[: —1. Proto-Semitic > corresponding to Arb. >, in db[, rb[, ÷yI[', l[' etc.
—2. Proto-Semitic g³ (as in Arb.) becomes > (Bauer-Leander BArm. 28n), Heb. [, in h[b, ll[.
—3. Proto-Semitic t\© > t\ (as in Arb.) —a) OArm. becomes q (already in Tell Fekherye; BArm.
<rq and <r>), mostly also in EmpArm., EgArm.
—b) later t\© becomes >, as earlier in EgArm., always in Nab. and Palm. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire
25 s.v. Åra), as also in the later dialects of Arm. (cf. Bauer-Leander BArm. 26c and d; Beyer
Arm. Texte 419): BArm. → [a' (see paragraph 4), [/qra, [l'[}, rm'[}, r[', h[r (?).
—4. [ before another [ in the same syllable is dissimilated to a (Bauer-Leander BArm. 50c) in
[a;.
—5. [ < t\© occurring after h\ has become a in Arm., cf. BArm. ajm (Leander 17h); but see
now Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 100.
db[: the same in Heb.; Deir Alla; OArm., Zendjirli (Donner-R. Inschriften 214: 7); Sefire (222;
223; 224); Tell Fekherye 15; EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar; Behistun
(corresponding to Akk. epeµsûu); see Driver Arm. Docs.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Memphis
(Donner-R. Inschriften 268: 2–3); Hermopolis; Saqqara); Sarai-din (Donner-R. Inschriften 261:
5); Limyra (text 262); Carpentras (269: 2); Xanthos; Samaria; Persepolis; Armazi = Mcheta
(276: 4); Pehl. (Junker Frahang 18: 7; Herzfeld Paikuli 742–55); Nisa; Nab., Palm., Hatra,
JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 198; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 806); JArm., DSS
(Dalman Wb. 303b; Beyer Arm. Texte 649); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 140a, also >byd); Sam. (
Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 8b); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 504a); Mnd. ABD (Drower-Macuch
Dictionary 2b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 241); NeoSyr. (Maclean 233b).
pe: pf. db'[}, T]d]b'[}, variant (a)t;-, tdeb][' (Or. >abadéÆt Da 315; JArm., Dalman Gr. §60: 1),
pl. Wdb'&[}; impf. pl. ÷Wdb]['T' (variant ˜[]T', Bauer-Leander BArm. 129j); inf. dB'[]m, (Or. ma¬>äbad
Ezr 718); pt. dbe[;, fem. a/hd;b][‰;, pl. ÷ydib][‰;.
—1. to do, abs. Da 432b 611 Ezr 613 718, to treat, with B] Da 432a, NRSV: he does what he wills
(REB: what he pleases) with the host of heaven; with µ[i Ezr 68, NRSV: what you shall do
(REB: what you are to do) for these elders of the Jews.
—2. to make, with God as subject, ÷ytia; ÷yhim]tiwÒ Da 332 628; the gods aY:m'v] aq;r]a'wÒ Jr 1011
(with al;); people µlex] Da 31.15, rWDT'v]a, Ezr 415, hK'';nUj} 616, at;D; to comply with the law 726,
Wlv; 422 to act carelessly, hl;Wbj} Da 623 to commit an offence, µj,l, to arrange a feast Da 51,
br;q] to wage war 721. †
hitpe: impf. dbe[} t]yI Da 329 Ezr 611 723, db‰i- Ezr 612 721, ÷Wdb]['t]Ti; pt. dbe[} t]mi, db,[}-
(Bauer-Leander BArm. 31d), fem. hd;b]['t]mi.
—1. to be made, be performed: hd;ybi[} Ezr 58, µ[ef] 612 721.23, hn:yDi with ÷mi 726, rWDT'v]a, 419,
÷ymiD;h' Da 25 (see Sokoloff, DSD7 (2000), 100.
—2. to be turned into Da 25 329 Ezr 611. †
Der. *dbe[}, *hd;ybi[}, *db;[} µ', n.m. /gnÒ dbe[.}
*dbe[:} db[; Heb. db,[,; OArm., Zendjirli (Donner-R. Inschriften 216: 3; 217: 4); Sefire (224:
13); EmpArm., Asshur Ostracon (233: 13); EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Driver Arm. Docs.;
Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar; Saqqara; Memphis (Donner-R. Inschriften 268: 2, 3); Hermopolis
); Samaria; Pehl. (Junker Frahang 13: 1); Nab., Palm., JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 201
s.v. db[II; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 816 s.v. >bd2); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 304a;
Beyer Arm. Texte 650); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 140b); Sam. (>aóbdaó, Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 8b);
Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 504b); Mnd. abda (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 3a; Nöldeke Mand.
Gramm. 100); NeoSyr. (Maclean 233b s.v. >bd<); NeoArm. >apta slave (Bergsträsser Gloss. 2 s.v.
>bt); Bauer-Leander BArm. 47x, the same in the cstr.; pl. sf. Jyd;b][', K JyId'b][', Q Jd;b][' (Ezr 4
11 variant JyID'b][' and JD;b][', so BHK , Bombergiana, and subsequently Bauer-Leander BArm.
1
226z, and KBL :: BHK3 and BHS, Leningradensis, who by contrast do not suggest the form
with dagesû); Bauer-Leander BArm. 74z, 77o, sf. yhi/db][': slave, servant of the king, Da 24.7
Ezr 411, of God Da 326.28 621 Ezr 511; → n.m. /gnÒ dbe[.} †
/gnÒ dbe[,} Da 3 29 a/gnÒ ˜[}, Or. >aµbed: the Babylonian name of hy:r]z¾[} (cf. Da 16f) 249 312–20; for an
explanation of the personal name see HAL 733a, HALOT 776 (with bibliography); Sokoloff,
DSD7 (2000), 100 refers to LipinŒski VT28 (1978), 235. †
*hd;ybi[:} db[; Heb. hd;bo[}; EmpArm., EgArm. hdyb[ (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar; Driver
Arm. Docs.); Nab., Palm., JArm. inscr., Hatra >bd building, construction (Jean-H. Dictionnaire
202 s.v. db[III; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 819 s.v. >bdh and s.v. >bd3); JArm. hdyb[, DSS
(Dalman Wb. at;d]ybi[} 304b and ad;b;/[ 307a; Beyer Arm. Texte 650, also db[); CPArm. >bd
(Schulthess Lex. 140a); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 504b s.v. >ebaµdaµ); Mnd. >bidata, pl.
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 340b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 465); Bauer-Leander BArm. 188j,
>byd< 141a: cstr. td'ybi[}, det. at;d]ybi[} (Bauer-Leander BArm. 16z).
—1. a) work on the ah;l;aÔ tyBe Ezr 424 58 67.
—b) service (Driver Arm. Docs. v: 9) Ezr 618 insert with Sept.L, Pesh. tyBe (ah;l;aÔ tyBe), so
with KBL; BHS; Rudolph Esra und Nehemia 62; Gunneweg (KAT xix/1: 113).
—2. administration Da 249 312. †
*rb[: the same in Heb.; OArm., Zendjirli, Panammu II (Donner-R. Inschriften 215: 18); Sefire
(224: 17); EmpArm., EgArm., Ah\iqar; Pehl. (Junker Frahang 22: 6f; Herzfeld Paikuli 756);
Hatra (Donner-R. Inschriften 256: 7); JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 202;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 821 s.v. >br1); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 304b; Beyer Arm. Texte
651); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 141b); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 8b); Syr. (Brockelmann
Lexicon 507b); NeoSyr. (Maclean 234b); Mnd. (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 4b; Nöldeke
Mand. Gramm. 131, 270); NeoArm. (Bergsträsser Gloss. 1).
Der. *rb'[}.
*rb'[:} rb[; Heb. I rb,[e; JArm. ar;b][i (so Dalman Wb. 305a, cf. rb[ >eŒbar; so also Beyer Arm.
Texte 651); CPArm. *>br, emph. >br< the opposite bank (Schulthess Lex. 142a); Sam. (Ben
H\ayyim Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 546); Syr. >ebraµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 508a); Mnd.
>bra (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 340b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 102 = >ebraµ); basic form *>ibr,
Bauer-Leander BArm. 183i: the same in cstr.: the opposite bank; ar;h} ÷'Arb'[} Ezr 410f.16f.20 53.6
66.8.13 721.25; on coins from Cilicia Lidzbarski Handbuch 336; Heb. rh;N:h' rb,[e; cuneiform
eber naµri (AHw. 181b; CAD E: 8, far bank, Beyond the River Euphrates); pevran tou`
Eujfravtou the inscription of Gadatas (Meyer Die Entstehung des Judentums 19f), the land to
the west of the River Euphrates, “Transpotamia”, Syria (see Streck VAB vii: 782; Eilers 31ff). †
d[': Heb. III d['; OArm., Zendjirli, Sefire; EmpArm., EgArm.; Mesopotamia, Gözne (Donner-R.
Inschriften 259: 1); Pehl. (Junker Frahang 25: 3; Herzfeld Paikuli 757; Jean-H. Dictionnaire
203 s.v. d[I; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 825 s.v. >d7); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 306a;
Beyer Arm. Texte 652); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 143a); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 9a); Syr.
(Brockelmann Lexicon 510b); Mnd. ad (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 6a; Nöldeke Mand.
Gramm. 209).
—1. preposition up to: —a) with spatial significance: even to Da 713, aK;Ad[' hitherto 728, on
which see Bauer-Leander BArm. 353f, and subsequently Plöger KAT xviii: 103, 105; used
quantitatively, as much as Ezr 722 (÷yriK]K' ¹s'K]Ad[ ha;m]).
—b) with temporal significance: until Da 615 712.25 Ezr 424 615, → ap;/sAd[' Da 627 726, with
µl'[; Da 718, ÷['K]Ad[' until now Ezr 516; d[' during, within Da 68.13, → ÷yrejÕa;Ad[' at last Da 45
, → tr'b]DiAd[' Da 414, rd. thus for ˜DiAl[' (BHS; KBL).
—2. conjunction (Heb. III d[ B; Leander §63f; Brockelmann Grundriss 2: 550) until, cf.
OArm., Zendjirli (Donner-R. Inschriften 214: 17); Sefire (224: 6); EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley
Arm. Pap.; Driver Arm. Docs.; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 203 s.v. d[I 2): —a) d[' with impf. Ezr 421
55.
—b) yDi d[' (EgArm. yz d[), with impf. Da 29 420.22.29, with pf. Da 234 430 521 74.9.11.22; yDi d['
… al; with pf., not until …, meaning hardly 625. †
hd[: Heb. I hd[, probably < Arm., but on this see Wagner 214; EmpArm., EgArm. haf. to
remove, take away (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar; Aimé-Giron 5: 3; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Driver
Arm. Docs.) Daskyleion 4 (Gibson Syrian Semitic Inscription 2: 37: 4); Herzfeld Paikuli 758
(Jean-H. Dictionnaire 204 s.v. yd[I; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 829 s.v. >dy1); pe. to pass
by, go away: JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 306a, ad[; Beyer Arm. Texte 651); CPArm.
(Schulthess Lex. 143b); and Mnd. ADA, <DA (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 6a; Nöldeke Mand.
Gramm. 257); Syr. to come upon; (h)af.: JArm., DSS (see above); Syr. to allow to reach
(Brockelmann Lexicon 511b); Mnd. to allow to pass by (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 6b;
Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. §192); etp. passive to be taken away: EgArm. (Driver Arm. Docs.; see
Jean-H. Dictionnaire loc. cit.).
pe: pf. 3rd. fem. td;[} (Bauer-Leander BArm. 154 l); impf. hDe[]y<, hDe[]T,, Or. ti-,
Bauer-Leander BArm. 128c: to go.
—1. to touch with B] Da 327 :: cf. Theodotion Da 394 kai; ojsmh; puro;" oujk h\n ejn aujtoi`" ; Sept.
oujde; ojsmh; tou` puro;" h\n ejn aujtoi`" , or better: B] meaning ÷mi → Heb. B] s.v. 13; not even the
smell of smoke (NRSV: fire) came from them (Lebram 61).
—2. to go away meaning to be taken 428 (Wkl]m' with ÷mi), abs. to vanish 714 parallel with
lB'j't]Ti, to be annulled 69.13. †
haf: pf. wyDi[]h, Da 712 and WyDi[]h, 520 (Bauer-Leander BArm. 128f, 156w!); impf. ÷/D[]h'yÒ; pt.
hDe[]h'm] to take away Da 520 (with ÷mi), 712.26 (÷f;l]v;), to remove 221 (÷ykil]m'). †
a/D[i: the same in Heb.; n.m., the father of the prophet hy:r]k'zÒ Ezr 5 1 614, see HAL 746b,
HALOT 790b for a linguistic explanation of the personal name. †
*÷D;[:i root w>d, Heb. d[y, Bauer-Leander BArm. 196z note; EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm.
Pap.; Ah\iqar, Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Donner-R. Inschriften 270 A: 3, Saqqara); Pehl. (Junker
Frahang 27: 9; Nyberg Pahlavi Documents from Avroman 3: 4 tyrja; and[ Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 204; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 830 s.v. >dn2); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb.
306b; Beyer Arm. Texte 653); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 143b); Sam. iddaón (Ben H\ayyim Gloss.
9a); Syr. >eddaµnaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 511a); Mnd. >dana (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 341;
Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 136); NeoSyr. daµnaµ and >idaµnaµ (Maclean 253b); > Arb. >iddaµn
(Nöldeke Neue Beiträge 44); Eth. >edmeµ (Dillmann 1010). The Akk. sbst. (>)adaµnum, adannu (
AHw. 10b; CAD A/1: 97, adannu) and (>)edaµnu(m) (AHw. 184b; see CAD loc. cit.) are also to
be derived from the root w->-d; and this means that these sbst. have an etymological connection
with Arm. *÷D;[i, but that is not to say that it can be taken as a loanword from Akk. For
expressions of time in the Semitic languages see especially Nöldeke loc. cit.): det. an:D;[i, pl.
÷ynID;[i (pl. for dual, Bauer-Leander BArm. 306 l !), aY:n"D;[i.
—1. time Da 28f, together with ÷m;zÒ 221 712, yDi an:D;[iB] (Bauer-Leander BArm. 363s) when, as
soon as 35.15.
—2. = year (JArm., Syr., Heb. d[e/m) Da 127, Sept. e[to" Da 416.32.34, Josephus Antiquities xii
7: 6 :: Vulgate tempus/tempora, so also Sept. kairov"/kairoiv 725 127; ÷ynID;[i h[;b]vi Da 413.20.22.29
, ÷D;[i gl'p]W ÷ynID;[iwÒ ÷D;[i d[' 725 meaning three and a half years (Bentzen 34, 67; Plöger KAT
xviii: 105; see also 115f, 143). †
*dw[: the same in Heb.; the basic form is still preserved in Arb. >aµda to turn back, cf. Eth. >oµda to
go around, encircle; sbst. Palm. >yd (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 207; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary
838); Arb. >aµdat (Hwb. Islam 14b); Syr. >eyaµdaµ habit, custom (Brockelmann Lexicon 515a);
denominative vb. (?) Syr. pe. to become accustomed, and af. to accustom.
Der. d/[.
d/[: dw[; the same in Heb.; EmpArm., EgArm. dw[ and d[, see Leander 119i (Cowley Arm.
Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Hermopolis); Nab. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 203 s.v. d[II;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 831 s.v. >wd5); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 307b; Beyer Arm.
Texte 653); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 143b and 144a); Sam.; Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 515a);
Bauer-Leander BArm. 254o: still Da 428. †
*hw[: the same in Heb.; JArm. aw:[} to deviate, af. to err (Dalman Wb. 307a).
Der. *hy:w:[.}
*hy:w:[:} hw[; JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 307b, ay:w:[;} Beyer Arm. Texte 653); cf. ? Nab. hyw[
(Cantineau Nab. 2: 128a; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 205, a sbst. with unknown meaning;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 832); Bauer-Leander BArm. 187f: pl. sf. Jt;y:w:[:} iniquity Da 424
parallel with Jy:F;j'. †
*¹w[: the same in Heb.; OArm., Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften 222 B: 33 [?]: ÷p[y they fly, on
which see also Donner-R. Inschriften 2: p. 256; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 205 :: Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 833); JArm. (Dalman Wb. 308b; Beyer Arm. Texte 653).
Der. ¹/[.
¹/[: ¹w[; the same in Heb.; JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 308b; Beyer Arm. Texte 653), and CPArm.
(Schulthess Lex. 144a) ap;/[; Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 570); Syr.
>aupaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 517a); Bauer-Leander BArm. 182a; the same in cstr.: bird Da 76,
collective, birds aY:m'v] ¹/[ 238. †
rW[: JArm. (Dalman Wb. 309a); Syr. >uµraµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 517b); Arb. >uwwaµr speck of
dust in the eye, cf. Mattthew 73; Belot 533b; A. Barthélemy-H. Fleisch Dictionnaire
Arabe-Francais (Paris, 1994), 562; Bauer-Leander BArm. 180 l: chaff Da 235. †
*z[e: the same in Heb.; EmpArm., EgArm. zn[ (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar); Pehl. (Junker
Frahang 7: 11); Palm. z[ (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 206 s.v. z[III; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary
875 s.v. >nz); JArm. aZÉ[i (Dalman Wb. 309a; Beyer Arm. Texte s.v. zn[); Sam. az; Syr. >ezzaµ,
cstr. >nez (Brockelmann Lexicon 535b); CPArm. *>nz, *>z, pl. >zyn (÷yZI[,i Schulthess Lex. 149b
s.v. >nz); NeoSyr. >izaµ (Maclean 237b); NeoArm. >ezza (Bergsträsser Gloss. 8 s.v. zz[); basic
form *>anzu or rather *>inzu, on which see HAL 760b, HALOT 804b; Bauer-Leander BArm.
29x, 182c, 198b: pl. ÷yZI[:i goat; ÷yZI[i yreypix] billy goats (with the pl. expressed twice) Ezr 617. †
qz[: the same in Heb., to dig over, break up; Akk. es/z/sûeµqu to carve, engrave an image (AHw.
249a; CAD E:331, eseµqu, to incise a relief).
Der. *hq;zÒ[i.
*hq;zÒ[:i qz[; EmpArm., EgArm. hqz[ (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 206;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 836); JArm. at;q]zÒ[i and hq;zÒji ring, fetter; DSS (Dalman Wb.
309b, at;q]zÒ[i; p. 142a, aq;zÒji band, ring; Beyer Arm. Texte 654, hqz[, >ezqaµ); CPArm.
(Schulthess Lex. 144b); Syr. >ezqetaµ and >ezaqtaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 519b); Mnd. >zqta =
>sqta (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 348a, 354b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 46, 109); NeoSyr.
>izuqta, >iziqthaµ, siqthaµ ring, fetter, traditionally from qz[ (Maclean 237b); rather a loanword
from Akk. iz/isûqaµtu (Zimmern 35; Kaufman 61; see further Vogt 125a) :: Akk. < Arm.
ring-fetters (AHw. 408b); Bauer-Leander BArm. 244f, g: sf. Hteq]zÒ[i, Or. >izqateh, pl.
(constructed as fem. in NeoSyr. and Mnd. >sqta; by contrast masc. in JArm., CPArm. and Syr.)
cstr. tq;zÒ[i: signet-ring Da 618. †
ar;zÒ[:, n.m. Ezra, Ezr 7 12.21.25, → Heb. †
hy:r]z¾[:} n.m. Da 2 17 = /gnÒ dbe[} 17, → Heb. hy:r]z¾[} s.v. 5. †
hf;[:e f[y; Heb. hx;[e; Deir Alla; EmpArm., EgArm. hf[, only Ah\iqar (Jean-H. Dictionnaire
206; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 880 s.v. >s\h); JArm. at;f]y[e and (< Heb.) at;x]y[e (Dalman
Wb. 311a, b); DSS hf[ >et\aµ (Beyer Arm. Texte 599 s.v. f[y); CPArm. >ys\t< (Schulthess Lex.
85b s.v. y>s\); Bauer-Leander BArm. 179g: advice, counsel, bytih} µ[ef]W hf;[e (→ bwt haf.) Da 2
14.
†
*÷yI[:' the same in Heb.; Deir Alla; OArm., Zendjirli (Donner-R. Inschriften 214: 30, 32); Sefire
(222 A: 13; 224: 3); EmpArm., Nerab (226: 5); EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar); Pehl.
(Junker Frahang 10: 13; 25: 46; Herzfeld Paikuli 594); Nab., Palm., JArm. inscr. (Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 207; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 839 s.v. >yn2); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb.
311b; Beyer Arm. Texte 654); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 145a); Sam. éÆn (Ben H\ayyim Gloss.
9a); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 522a); Mnd. aina (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 15a; Nöldeke
Mand. Gramm., see e.g. 100, 157, 170); NeoSyr. >ainaµ (Maclean 238b); NeoArm. (Bergsträsser
Gloss. 4); Bauer-Leander BArm. 182z, 203d, e: cstr. ÷y[e, pl. (for dual, Bauer-Leander BArm.
203d, e, 306 l, m) ÷ynIyÒ[,' cstr. ynEyÒ[,' sf. yn"yÒ[,' fem.: eye Da 431 78.20, of God Ezr 55. †
*ry[: Heb. II rw[; OArm., Sefire rw[ pe. (Donner-R. Inschriften 223 B: 4 ?, on which see 2: p.
260f; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 205 s.v. rw[I :: but it is not mentioned in Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary, for it is very uncertain); ry[ JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 308b s.v. rw[; Beyer Arm.
Texte 655, ry[); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 581); CPArm. (Schulthess
Lex. 145a); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 523); Mnd. AUR, >UR towake up (Drower-Macuch
Dictionary10b), pe. (missing in JArm.) and the derived stems, especially causative; secondary
forms < ettaf. rat[ Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 84, and NeoSyr. taµ>ir (Maclean 324b); for
JBabArm. r[t see Sokoloff, DSD7 (2000), 100.
Der. ry[i.
ry[i: ry[ corresponding to Theodotion (e)ir; Heb. r[e; MHeb. ry[i (Jastrow 1075a, watcher,
angel); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 311b; Beyer Arm. Texte 655) awake, > angel; CPArm.
(Schulthess Lex. 145a), watchful, clever; Syr. >éÆraµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 523a); and Mnd. aiar
awake, watchful (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 14b s.v. aiar3); NeoSyr. >iraµ clever, intelligent
(Maclean 239a); Syr.: 1. wakening; 2. angel (Brockelmann Lexicon 523a); Bauer-Leander
BArm. 180j!: pl. ÷yriy[i: awake > watcher meaning angel Da 410.14.20; Sept. a[ggelo",
Theodotion eir (TheodotionRA ir), Aquila, Symmachus ejgrhvgoro", in the title of Codex
Chisiani a[grupno", Vulgate vigil (Montgomery Daniel 231ff; Bentzen Daniel 43); Sokoloff,
DSD7 (2000), 100 refers to Murray, Orientalia 53 (1984), 303–317. †
l[': the same in Heb.

A. The word also includes the meaning of Heb. la,, which occurs only on occasions; OArm.
, Tell Fekherye 14, 15; Donner-R. Inschriften 3: p. 28a s.v. la1; EmpArm., EgArm. and Tell
Halaf 4: 2 (Leander 122b); Mnd. ala2 (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 18b; Nöldeke Mand.
Gramm. 193); no longer in JArm. and BArm.
B. l[ OArm., Zendjirli (Donner-R. Inschriften 214: 34); Sefire (222 B: 26; 224: 9), Zakir (202
A: 4, 15); EmpArm., Asshur (texts234;235;236);EgArm. (Leander 123m; Cowley Arm. Pap.;
Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Driver Arm. Docs.; Hermopolis; Saqqara); also ywl[ (Cowley Arm. Pap.;
Ah\iqar; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 211; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 852); cf. further Pehl.
(Junker Frahang 24: 3; Herzfeld Paikuli 581, 761–767; Nyberg Pahlavi Documents from
Avroman, 214f); Dura (Altheim 17: 1 and 66: 3); Sogdian (Gauthier-Benveniste 1: 12; 2: 236a);
Hatra, Nab., Palm.; see further Sardes (Donner-R. Inschriften 260 B: 3, 4); Arebsun (264: 7);
la[ Bowman Demotic 225 (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 208; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 844 s.v.
>l7); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 313a; Beyer Arm. Texte 655); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 146a s.v.
yl[); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 9a); Syr. (Nöldeke Syr. Gramm. §250); Mnd. >l
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 349b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 193; cf. Nyberg 215); NeoSyr. >al,
>ul (Maclean 239b); NeoArm. >al (Bergsträsser Gloss. 2; Spitaler 125a).
C. Bauer-Leander BArm. 260a, c: sf. yl'[}, JyIl'[} K (EgArm.), Jl;[} Q Or. (Tg., Dalman Gramm.
229), yhi/l[}, Hy"l'[} K (EgArm.), Hl'[} Q Or. (Tg.), an:yl,[} (Bauer-Leander BArm. 260c, as
Heb.), variant an:yle[}, µhoyle[} (EgArm. also µwh-; Nab., see Cantineau Nab. 1: 56), ÷/hyle[}.
D. preposition: —1. a) upon, answering the question “where?”: Da 210.28f 426 76 Ezr 515 717;
about Da 57 (HreaWÒx'Al['), with jK'v]h' in 65.
—b) answering the question “whither?”: Da 234.46 55 611 (→ I Jrb).18 74 Ezr 55 611 724.
—2. a) over: with hw:h} Ezr 420 without a vb. 51b, with yNIm' Da 249 312, with µyqeh} 414 62, with
fliv]h' 248, with ÷q't]h; 433.
—b) with af;m], to happen to someone: 421.25, with ¹lj 413 (÷D;[i), with ddn 619 (hn:v)] and with
hnv itpa. 728 (= dat. incommodi, Syr.), with yBin"t]hi pa. Ezr 51 (to fortell, with dative, to
prophesy for).
—3. against: Da 319.29 523 Ezr 419 723.
—4. towards, with verbs of motion (→ dg²n,< Heb. la,): Da 224 431 67 716 Ezr 411f.18.23, a stylistic
feature of letters (EgArm. la) 411.17.
—5. relating to the mind: with µ[ef] µyci Da 312 614 and with lB; µyci 615; with Åjr hitpe. 328;
to please someone 424 624 Ezr 517 (with l] with inf.) 718.
—6. concerning (with l[' of the person or of the thing): Da 218 514.29 613.15 716.20 Ezr 48.14, on
behalf of 617; hm;Al[' why? Da 215, hn:D]Al[' therefore Ezr 415 611; in this matter Ezr 422 517 Da 3
16 (→ hr;b]Di).
—7. comparatively, above: Da 64, yDi l[' more than 319.
aL;[:e hl[; EmpArm., EgArm. l[ (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.), al[ (Cowley Arm.
Pap.; Ah\iqar; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Saqqara), hl[ (Kraeling Arm. Pap.); with l: yl[l (Ah\iqar
); with d[ (Cowley Arm. Pap.); with ÷m (Cowley Arm. Pap., and Kraeling Arm. Pap. under al[
; see also Leander §47b); Nab., Palm. (a)l[; Palm. also l(y)[l, and JArm. inscr. (Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 210 s.v. l[II; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 842 s.v. >l1); JArm., DSS (Dalman
Gr. 229: 4; Beyer Arm. Texte 656, al[ >ellaµ, also with l, ÷m and d[) and writings with y, ly[,
aly[ and l(y)[l ÷m; CPArm. l>l and l>yl (Schulthess Lex. 146b); Syr. le>el (Brockelmann
Lexicon 369a), and Mnd. l>l, l>il, >l, >il and even l>iil (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 226a; Nöldeke
Mand. Gramm. 203); NeoArm. el>el (Spitaler 118a; and Bergsträsser Gloss. 2); NeoSyr. lulul,
lilil, lilaµl (Maclean 150a s.v. l>wlwl); OSArb. l>l (Conti Rossini 173b); Eth. laµ>la (Dillmann
56f); Tigr. la>aµl, fem. la>aµléÆt “superior” (Littmann-Höfner Wb. 45f); Bauer-Leander BArm.
254o; over, ÷mi aL;[e above Da 63. †
aL;[i Da 6 , hL;[i 6 ; JArm. hl[ >ellaµ ground for complaint, reason for accusation (Dalman Wb.
6 5
313b s.v. hL;[i); DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 657); CPArm. >l< and >yl< (Schulthess Lex. 145b); Syr.
>eletaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 524a), and NeoSyr. >iltaµ cause (Maclean 240b), pretext; NeoArm.
>ellt\aµ mistake (Bergsträsser Gloss. 3); root >ll to enter, > Arb. >illat (Schulthess Homonyme 44 ::
Köbert, Orientalia 14 (1945), 280): cause, reason, pretext; the etymology is uncertain, but
possibilities include: —a) I ll[, Arb. >alla II to justify, explain, V and VIII to make an excuse,
offer a pretext (Wehr-Cowan 632b, >alla 3); —b) Arb. g³alla, Arm. ll[ (see II ll[) to go out.
There is no doubt that the first suggestion (a) is to be given precedence. Versions, Sept. a[gnoia
error, lapse, guilt; Theodotion provfasi" pretext, spurious reason, cause: cause, (like ahJ/tiva
Matthew 2737), reason for making a complaint, pretext Da 65f. †
hl[: the same in Heb.; JArm. al[ itpa. to be exalted (Dalman Wb. 313a); Syr. (Brockelmann
Lexicon 527a s.v. >ly), and NeoSyr. etpa. to raise, elevate (Maclean 239b).
Der. l[', aL;[e, *hwl[, *yL;[i, *yLi[i, *÷/yl][,.
*hwl[ (*hw:l][', *hw:l;[}), a back-formation from the pl. ÷wl[ ?, so also Beyer Arm. Texte 657 for
the form hwl[ >al(a)waµ; Or. >alaµtaµ (Kahle Masoreten des Osten 19, Jos 2223, hl[); Heb. hl;(/)
[o; EgArm. hwl[ (Cowley Arm. Pap.) burnt-offering (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 211 s.v. hwl[;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 851 s.v. >lwh); Palm. >lt< altar (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 211;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 851 s.v. >lh1); JArm. ht;l;[}, DSS (Dalman Wb. 315a; Beyer
Arm. Texte 657) burnt-offering; Sam. >aµla; CPArm. >l< burnt-offering (Schulthess Lex. 147a);
Syr. >laµtaµ burnt-offering, altar (Brockelmann Lexicon 526b); Bauer-Leander BArm. 187f: pl. (cf.
Palm., JArm., CPArm., Syr.) ÷w:l;[}: burnt-offering (Vincent 147ff) Ezr 69. †
*yL;[:i hl[; Heb. *yLi[i; OArm., Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften 222 A: 6, yl[; cf. 222 C: 23f,
htyl[[l] htytjt make its lower part its upper part, so Gibson Syrian Semitic Inscriptions 2:
p. 35; cf. Donner-R. Inschriften 2: p. 242); EmpArm., EgArm. yl[, fem. atyl[ as adj. with
÷yrxm Upper Egypt (Driver Arm. Docs. p. 103a) :: atytjt ˜µ Lower Egypt (Driver Arm. Docs.
p. 104b); cf. hytjt d[ hyl[ ÷m from below to the top (Kraeling Arm. Pap. 4: 6); hyl[
upper part (Cowley Arm. Pap.); Driver Arm. Docs. on atyl[ (÷yrxm) Upper Egypt; Palm.,
Nab. yl[, adv. al[, emph. and adj. fem. atyl[ Hatra, JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 211
s.v. yl[III and 212 s.v. hyl[; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 853 s.v. >ly2 and >lyh); JArm. yl[/
yL'[i (:: Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 100: JPArm. yyly[; JBabArm. haly[, see Jastrow 1069), DSS
(Dalman Wb. 313b; Beyer Arm. Texte 656f), det. ha;L;[i; Syr. >ellaµyaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon
527a); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 541); Mnd. >laia (Drower-Macuch
Dictionary 350b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 141); NeoSyr. >ilaµyaµ (Maclean 240a); NeoArm. >illoµ
< >ellaµyaµ (Bergsträsser Gloss. 3; Spitaler 91b); Bauer-Leander BArm. 196d, det. Q ha;L;[i; K
ay:L;[i, Bauer-Leander BArm. 51k: superior, highest: ˜[i ah;l;aÔ God most high Da 326.32 518.21,
˜[i only with this meaning in 414.21f.29.31 725; cf. n.m. Nab. layl[, Palm. l[byl[ (Stark
Personal Names 44f; cf. Baudissin Kyrios 3: 811); → ÷/yl][,. †
*yLi[:i hl[; the same in Heb.; Canaanite loanword, meaning the same as Arm. → yL;[i
(Bauer-Leander BArm. 197f); fem. sbst. meaning the same as Heb. hY:li[}; Palm. atyl[
(Jean-H. Dictionnaire 212 s.v. hyl[ no. 2; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 853 s.v. >lyh); JArm.
at;yLi[i (so Tg.O for Jdg 323f, see Dalman Wb. 314b); for JPArm yl[ (abs.) see Sokoloff, DSD 7
(2000), 100; DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 657, hyl[ >elliyaµ); CPArm. a dining room on the upper
storey (Schulthess Lex. 147a); Syr. >elléÆtaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 527a) > Arb. >ulléÆya (cf.
Fraenkel 20f); > NeoArm. >ulléÆt\a (Bergsträsser Gloss. 3; cf. Mark 1415 to; ajnavgaion): sf. HteyLi[i
: roof-chamber Da 611. †
*÷/yl][:, hl[; ? loanword < Heb., see HAL 787f, HALOT 832b (with bibliography); OArm.,
Sefire divine name >lyn (Donner-R. Inschriften 222 A :11; cf. 2: p. 246); JArm., ÷wyl[ DSS
(Beyer Arm. Texte 657); Bauer-Leander BArm. 196c; pl. ÷ynI/yl][:, the most-high, ÷ynI/yl][, yveyDiq'
Da 718.22.25.27 (a doubled plural, or taken over from Heb. µyhil¿aÔ, see Bauer-Leander BArm.
305g; Montgomery Daniel 307f) the holy ones (the saints) of the Most High. †
I ll[: → hL;[i s.v. a).
II ll[: Heb. II ll[, < Arm. (Wagner 219–220); Deir Alla; OArm., Sefire (Donner-R.
Inschriften 222 A: 6; B: 35; cf. Degen Altaram. Gr. p. 7267); EmpArm., Uruk 4: 29, hÉa-al-li-tu;
EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Driver Arm. Docs.) pe. and haf. (also l[nh);
cf. Leander 66b, g; Bowman Demotic 225; Palm., Hatra, JArm. inscr., Nisa (Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 212; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 855 s.v. >ll1); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 314a;
Beyer Arm. Texte 657); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 9a); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 145b); Syr.
(Brockelmann Lexicon 524a); Mnd. all I etc. (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 20; Nöldeke Mand.
Gramm. 253f); NeoArm. (Bergsträsser Gloss. 3); > Akk. hÉalaµlum I (AHw. 309b; CAD Hå: 33,
hÉalaµlu A, to creep, slink).
pe: pf. l[', Or. >aµl (JArm., Dalman Gramm. 328, as w˜[), fem. Q tL'[', K tl'l} [' or tl'l'[}
(Bauer-Leander BArm. 166d, e); pt. pl. Q ÷yLi[;, K ÷ylil][‰; (Bauer-Leander BArm. 17e, 54x): to
go in, enter for an audience with the king, cf. Heb. awb, Da 216 44 58, with µd;qÕ 45, with l['
(Brockelmann Grundriss 2: 391) 224 (delete (?), cf. Commentaries and BHS), with l] of place (
EgArm.) 510 611. †

haf: pf. l[enÒh' Da 225 619 (EgArm., see above) < *ha>>el; JArm. (mostly forms with
gemination dissimilated, on which see Dalman Gramm. §71: 4, p. 328; for further bibliography
see Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000) 100); forms with doubled >ain in CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 146a);
Syr. (Nöldeke Syr. Gramm. §178 E); Mnd. (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 20; Nöldeke Mand.
Gramm. 253f); Bauer-Leander BArm. 50d, 57f, 166i: impv. sf. ynIl][eh' 224; inf. hl;[;h‰, 57 and
hl;[;nÒh' 43: to bring in, introduce 57, with l] of the personal object; so also with µd;qÕ 224f 43 619
; with l] of the personal object, 225 43; with acc. of the personal object, 224 619. †
hof: pf. l['hu, WL['&hu (Bauer-Leander BArm. 57h, 167k): to be brought in Da 513.15 (with
µd;qÕ vs.13 and ym'd;q‰; vs.15. †
Der. *l[;m,.
µl'[:; Heb. µl;/[; —a. for its first meaning, duration, eternity, see Deir Alla; OArm., Zendjirli
(Donner-R. Inschriften 214: 1); Sefire (222 B: 7?; 224: 24, 25); EmpArm., with similar
meaning, Taima l>lm for ever (Degen-Müller-Röllig Neue Ephemeris 2: 87, line 7); EgArm.
(Cowley Arm. Pap. sg.; Kraeling Arm. Pap. sg. and pl.; Saqqara); Samaria; Pehl. (Junker
Frahang 27: 14); Nab., Palm., Hatra, JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 213 s.v. µl[II;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 859 s.v. >lm4); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 314b; Beyer Arm. Texte
658); Sam. aµlaóm (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 9a); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 147a); Syr. (Brockelmann
Lexicon 527b); NeoArm. (Bergsträsser Gloss. 3); NeoSyr. (Maclean 240a).
—b. for its second meaning, world, see Palm.; JArm. (Beyer Arm. Texte 659 s.v. 2); Sam. (Ben
H\ayyim Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 498); CPArm.; Syr.; Mnd. alma I (Drower-Macuch
Dictionary 20b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 112, 479); and NeoSyr. (Maclean 240a); OSArb.
(Conti Rossini 207a; Beeston Sabaic Grammar 15); Arb. >aµlam world, universe, cosmos
(Wehr-Cowan 636a); and Eth. (Dillmann 951); see especially also the epithet for God (Palm.
for Baal, Nab. for Dusares, and in Qumran) aml[ h/arm the lord of the world (Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 214 µl[II s.v. 2; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 862 s.v. >lm4 no. 2; and BibHeb.
µl;/[ (HAL 755b; HALOT 799b) s.v. 5, with bibliography).
—c. for its third meaning, people, see Syr., Mnd., NeoArm., NeoSyr., OSArb., Arb.;
Bauer-Leander BArm. 190x; for JBabArm. see Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 100.
—d. the same in the cstr.; det. am;l][‰;, pl. ÷ymil][‰;, aY:m'l][‰;: remote time, eternity (cf. BibHeb.
µl;/[); referring to the past: tm;/yA÷mi am;l][; Ezr 415.19; referring to the future, often pl.
(Bauer-Leander BArm. 306j; also Pehl., EgArm., Nab., JArm., CPArm.); used when greeting
the king yyIjÔ ÷ymil][‰;l] Da 24 39 510 67.22; referring to God: hm;l][‰; yj' the one who lives eternally
(Lebram 68; cf. also Theodotion 434 tw`/ zw`nti ehJ/" to;n ahJ/w`na; cf. Gesenius Thes. 1036b; →
Heb. yj' B 1) meaning the eternal one (ZüBi; NRSV: one who lives forever; REB: the
Everliving One) Da 431; µl'[; tWkl]m' 333 727; µl'[; ÷f;l]v; 431 714; am;l][‰; d['wÒ am;l][‰; ÷mi 220;
÷ymil][‰;l] 627 and aY:m'l][‰;l] 244b (on the use of the article, see Bauer-Leander BArm. 308j) for
ever; ÷ymil][‰;l] al; 244a never; aY:m'l][‰; µl'[; d['wÒ am;l][‰; d[' 718 (Bauer-Leander BArm. 312i;
similarly Nab., JArm., CPArm.) for ever and evermore, to all eternity. †
*ym;l][:e name of a people, from *µl;[e, → Heb. µl;y[e; Akk. elamuÆ (AHw. 156f; CAD E: 76a);
Bauer-Leander BArm. 196d: pl. ayEm;l][e (Bauer-Leander BArm. 204 l): Sept. ÆHlamaiòi, Acts 29
ÆElami`tai: Elamites Ezr 49. †
*[l'[:} Heb. [l;xe, cf. Arb. hÉil>; EmpArm., EgArm. cstr. pl. y[l[ (Ah\iqar 106); Pehl. (Junker
Frahang 10: 4, >lkt<; cf. Jean-H. Dictionnaire 214; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 863); JArm.
a[;l][i (Dalman Wb. 314b; but see now Sokoloff, DSD7 (2000), 100), see Gn 222 (Tg.O); Sam.
hl[ < *[l[, and fem. htl[ < ht[l[ (Ben H\ayyim Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 570);
Syr. <el>aµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 22a); CPArm. >l>< (Schulthess Lex. 147b; Gramm. §49: 2a);
NeoArm. >al>a (Bergsträsser Gloss. 3); Bauer-Leander BArm. 26c, 186z: pl. ÷y[il][i, fem.
(Brockelmann Grundriss 1: 422b): rib Da 75. †
µ[': the same in Heb.; OArm., Sefire people, populace (Donner-R. Inschriften 222 A: 29, 30; B:
5, 11; 223 B: 3; C: 16; 224: 5, 10 (aym[), 13, 21); EmpArm., EgArm., only Ah\iqar 94, 162
amm[ the peoples, the nations (Leander 102d); Nab. µ[ people; Hatra, JArm. inscr. (Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 216 s.v. µ[II; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 864 s.v. >m1); this is the primary
meaning also in JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 315a; Beyer Arm. Texte 660); also in CPArm.
(Schulthess Lex. 147b); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 9a); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 529a); Mnd.
ama I (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 21; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 100); NeoSyr. >uma, >ama
(Maclean 240b); Bauer-Leander BArm. 180n: the same in cstr.; det. aM;[' Ezr 716, hM;[' 512 713.25
, pl. det. aY:m'm][' (cf. EgArm., JArm., on which see Leander 102d for the ending -eµ; CPArm.; for
Syr. see Nöldeke Syr. Gramm. §23); Bauer-Leander BArm. 221h: nation, people.
—a) of Israel Ezr 512 713.16.25, so probably also in the expression yveyDiq' µ[' ÷ynI/yl][, Da 727 (→
÷/yl][,), so e.g. with KBL, and now especially Plöger KAT xviii: 118 :: Noth Ges. Stud.2 284,
who takes µ[' to mean a crowd.
—b) of non-Israelites Da 244 Ezr 612, together with hM;au and → ÷v;l] sg. Da 329, pl. 34.7.31 519 626
714. †
µ[i: the same in Heb.; OArm., Zakir, Zen-djirli, Sefire; EmpArm., Nerab (Donner-R. Inschriften
226: 6, 7); Asshur Ostracon (Donner-R. Inschriften 233: 2f, 7); Bauer-Meissner Pachtvertrag 4;
EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Behistun; Ah\iqar; Driver Arm. Docs.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.);
Samaria, Kesecek Köyü (Donner-R. Inschriften 258: 4); Nab., Palm., JArm. inscr. (Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 215 s.v. µ[I; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 867 s.v. >m4); JArm., DSS (Dalman
Wb. 315a; Beyer Arm. Texte 695f); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Literary and Oral Tradition 3/2: 137);
CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 147b); Syr. >am (Brockelmann Lexicon 529a); Mnd. >m
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 351f; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 193f); NeoArm. (Bergsträsser
Gloss. 4), and NeoSyr. >im (also >um, Maclean 240b): Bauer-Leander BArm. 260d: sf. yMi[i, JM;[i
, HMe[i, ÷/hM][i: together with.
—1. with spatial significance: with Da 218 713 Ezr 52 713.16; near Da 211.22 412.20.22.29 521;
specifically with lLim' Da 622, with br'[;t]mi 243, with br;q] db'[} 721, with yWIv' 521, with db'[} to
work for someone, work towards (Syr. etc., see Montgomery Daniel 234) 332, to do for
someone, treat someone Ezr 68.
—2. with temporal significance (cf. Heb. 3; Syr., see Brockelmann Lexicon 529a: >am s.v. 4):
ay:l]yleAµ[i in the night Da 72 (:: Charles), rd;wÒ rd;Aµ[i (→ rD;) 333 431. †
*qyMi[,' variant qymi[}: qm[; Heb. qmo[;; JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 315b; Beyer Arm. Texte 660);
CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 148b); Syr. >amméÆq (Brockelmann Lexicon 531b); Mnd. >muq
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 352b); and NeoSyr. >umuµqa (Maclean 241a); Brockelmann
Grundriss 1: 362; Bauer-Leander BArm. 192e (!), 188h, j: pl. fem at;q;yMi[': deep, pl. deep,
unfathomable ideas (Bauer-Leander BArm. 319c, d; cf. Michel Grundlegung 70f; see further
Heb. qmo[;); Akk. emqu(m), El-Amarna em-qú> wise, clever, experienced, skilled (AHw. 215a;
CAD E: 151); BArm. Da 222 parallel with at;r;T]s'm]. †
*qm[: Heb. I qm[ to be deep; OArm., Zakir (Donner-R. Inschriften 202 A: 10, haf. wqm[h);
JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 217; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 872 s.v. >mq1); Mnd.
(Drower-Macuch Dictionary 352b) >mq pe.; JArm. af. (Dalman Wb. 316a); Syr., pe., pa. and af.
(Brockelmann Lexicon 531a).
Der. *qyMi['.
rm'[:} Heb. I rm,x,; Proto-Semitic ahÉmr; EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap., rmq
together with rm[; and Hermopolis rm[; see Fitzmyer in Albright Fschr. (1971), 153);
Saqqara qmr; Palm. >mr< (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 217; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 873 s.v. >mr
7); JArm. ar;m][' (Dalman Wb. 316b); Sam. rm[ (Ben H\ayyim Literary and Oral Tradition 2:
576); Syr. >amraµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 533a); Mnd. aqamra (Drower-Macuch Dictionary 33b;
Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 72); NeoSyr. >umraµ (Maclean 240a); Bauer-Leander BArm. 26c, 182x:
wool, aqenÒ rm'[} ð' Da 79. †
*÷[': → ÷['K].
I hn[: Heb. I hn[; Deir Alla; OArm., Zakir (Donner-R. Inschriften 202 A: 11; on the impf.
consecutive which occurs here, and also A: 15, see Degen Altaram. Gramm. pp. 114–116);
EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar); Herzfeld Paikuli 768; Palm., JArm. inscr.
(Jean-H. Dictionnaire 218 s.v. yn[I; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 875 s.v. >ny1); JArm., DSS
(Dalman Wb. 316b, an:[}; Beyer Arm. Texte 661); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 9a); CPArm.
(Schulthess Lex. 149b); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 533b); NeoSyr. (Maclean 241b); Mnd.
ANA, >NA (Drower-M. Dictionary 24a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 284).
pe: pf. 3rd. fem. tn:[} Da 510, variant tn"[} (Bauer-Leander BArm. 154k, l), pl. /n[}, Or. >anoµ;
pt. hnE[;, pl. ÷yIn"[; (Bauer-Leander BArm. 233g); always together with rm'a;wÒ hnE[; rma, Da 25-72
(23 times), ÷yrim]a‰;wÒ ÷yIn"[; 324, /n[} ÷yrim]a;wÒ 27.10 39.16 614, tr,m,a} wÒ tn:[} 510; cf. EgArm. lst. sg.
trmaw tyn[ (Ah\iqar 14f, 45), pl. wrmaw … wn[ (Ah\iqar 121, cj. 58, 67); cf. Syr. >naµ waµ<mar
(Nöldeke Syr. Gramm. §274); CPArm. (Schulthess Gramm. §173: 4; cf. Torrey Notes 264f;
Bauer-Leander BArm. 295u, v; Montgomery Daniel 147).
—1. to answer Da 25.7f.10.27 316.24f 416 517 613f.
—2. to commence talking, begin to speak (EgArm., Syr.) Da 215.20.26.47 39.14.19.24.26.28 416.27 57.
10.13 617.21 72. †
II *hn[: Heb. II hn[; JArm. itpe. to become poor (Dalman Wb. 316b); pa. to afflict (Dalman loc.
cit.; and DSS, Beyer Arm. Texte 662); itpa. (Syr., Brockelmann Lexicon 534b, < Heb.) to fast,
humble oneself.
Der. *hnE[}.
*hnE[:} II hn[; Heb. ynI[,; wn:[;; —1. Arm. a) adj. JArm. ay:nÒ[' (Dalman Wb. 317b), DSS (Beyer Arm.
Texte 662); Mnd. ania I (Drower-M. Dictionary 26b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 124).
—b) sbst. poverty: EmpArm., EgArm. hwn[ (only Ah\iqar 105; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 218;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 874); JArm. hwn[ >anwaµ (Beyer loc. cit. :: Dalman Wb. 317b);
ay:nÒ[,; as well as at;WynÒ[' (Dalman loc. cit.); Mnd. aniuta 1 (Drower-M. Dictionary 26b) poverty,
lowliness (Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 14b).
—2. humble: OArm., Zakir (Donner-R. Inschriften 202 A: 2; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 218;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 874 s.v. >nh2); JArm. an:w:nÒ[' (Dalman Wb. 317a); Syr. >anwaµyaµ
(Brockelmann Lexicon 535a); humility, CPArm. >anwaµnuµtaµ (Schulthess Lex. 149b); Syr.
>anwaµyuµtaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 535a); Bauer-Leander BArm. 186x: pl. ÷yIn:[} (Bauer-Leander
BArm. 233h): miserable Da 424. †
÷yIn:[:} → hnE[}.
*÷n:[:} Heb. I ÷n:[;; JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 317b; Beyer Arm. Texte 662); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim
Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 546); CPArm. emph. >nn< (Schulthess Lex. 149a); Syr. >naµnaµ
(Brockelmann Lexicon 533a); Mnd. anana (Drower-M. Dictionary 24; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm.
115, 159); Bauer-Leander BArm. 187c :: Sarauw 117f; pl. cstr. ynEn:[:} cloud Da 713. †
*¹n"[:} Heb. ¹n:[;; JArm. ap;nÒ[' (Dalman Wb. 318a); CPArm. *(a)¹n[ (Schulthess Lex. 149b); Syr.
>naµfaµ (Sarauw 117; Brockelmann Lexicon 535b); Bauer-Leander BArm. 185p: pl. sf. yhi/pnÒ['
bough, branch Da 49.11.18; 49 with B] rwd, vs.18 with B] ÷kv the birds that live in its branches. †
*vn[: the same in Heb.; Palm. af. to stipulate repentance, impose a fine (Jean-H. Dictionnaire
219 s.v. n[I; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 877 s.v. >nsû1); sbst. Palm. (w)wn[ the office of
Treasurer (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 218; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 875); JArm. pe. (Dalman
Wb. 318a; also Levy 3: 672b, to punish).
This vb. is probably to be taken as denominative from the sbst. *vn:[} (so KBL).
Der. *vn:[.}
*vn:[:} ? denominative vn[; Heb. vn<[;o JArm. vn:[,} emph. av;n:[} (Dalman Wb. 318a; but see
Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 100, who says these forms do not exist); Bauer-Leander BArm. 187d,
the same in the cstr.: penalty, fine, ÷ysik]nI vn:[} financial penalty Ezr 726; NRSV: confiscation of
property; REB: confiscation of goods. †
*tn<[:, → tn<[,K].
*hp[: EmpArm., EgArm., Ah\iqar 140? (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 219; Hoftijzer-Jongeling

Dictionary 879 s.v. >py1); pe., Syr. >paµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 538a); Mnd. APP, <PP
(Drower-M. Dictionary 32a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 399); JArm. (Dalman Wb. 318b; but this
is not accepted by Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 100), and Syr. pa. to wrap up (Brockelmann Lexicon
538b); Arb. >afaµ to let the hair grow (Belot 508b).
Der *ypi[Õ.
*ypi[:Õ hp[; the same in Heb., < Arm. (Wagner 223); JArm. ay:p][; foliage (Dalman Wb. 318b);
Syr. >ufyaµ flowers, grass (Brockelmann Lexicon 538b); Mnd. aupa I (Drower-M. Dictionary
10b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 100, 450): foliage; for instances which are somewhat removed in
meaning from Akk. and Arb. see HAL 814b; HALOT 860b; Bauer-Leander BArm. 184o: sf.
HyEp][;: foliage Da 49.11.18. †
*bx[: Heb. II bx[; JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 319a; Beyer Arm. Texte 662) ipe. to be sad, be
troubled about, grieve; on this vb. (with sbst.) see Kottsieper UF 18 (1986), 218.
Der. byxi[}.
byxi[,} variant Secunda byXi[': bx[; JArm. (Dal-man Wb. 319b) Bauer-Leander BArm. 188h, 192e!:
troubled, sad (lq;) Da 621. †
rq[: the same in Heb.; EmpArm.; JArm. inscr. (Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 882 s.v. >qr ); 1
JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 321a; Beyer Arm. Texte 663); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 543b);
NeoSyr. (Maclean 243a); Mnd. AQR, >QR (Drower-M. Dictionary 34; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm.
275) to pluck out, root out.
itpe. (JArm., Syr., CPArm. (see Schulthess Lex. 151b); Baumgartner ZAW 45 (1927), 108f
= Umwelt 95f): pf. wr;q'[} t]a, K Wrq'&[} t]a,, Q hr;q&'[}- (3rd. pl.: Bauer-Leander BArm. 134r ::
Ginsberg 3rd. fem., → lpn), variant WrQ&'['t]a, etpa. (Syr.): to be plucked out Da 78. †
Der. *rQ'[i.
*rQ'[,i variantBH rq;[e: rq[; OArm., Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften 222; 223; 224) rq[
descendants (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 220; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 883 s.v. >qr2); JArm.,
ar;Q;[i DSS (Dalman Wb. 321a; Beyer Arm. Texte 663); Sam. aµqaór (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 9a);
Syr. >eqqaµraµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 543b); and Mnd. >qar(a) (Drower-M. Dictionary 356;
Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 123); NeoSyr. >iqraµ root (Maclean 243a); the same in the cstr.: root,
yhi/vr]v; rQ'[i main root, tap-root Da 412.20.23 (for rQ'[i rd. rQ;[i, so with Bauer-Leander BArm.
192f; BHS :: Sarauw 118). †
*r[': rr[: Heb. II rx'; Deir Alla; OArm., Zendjirli rx (Donner-R. Inschriften 214: 30; Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 247 s.v. rxII; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 974 s.v. s\r2); JArm. (a)r;[;
oppressor, opponent, adversary (Dalman Wb. 321b; cf. Levy 3: 690a, hater, persecutor); fem.
Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 544b), and NeoSyr. >ertaµ rival wife, cf. Heb. hr;x; (Maclean 244b);
Bauer-Leander BArm. 180n: sf. Jyr‰;[:; Q Jr;[;, K JyIr'[;; Bauer-Leander BArm. 77o: adversary
Da 416 parallel with anEc.; †
br[: Heb. II br[; EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap. 2: 5) :: sbst., Palm. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 162 s.v.
br[mII; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 671 s.v. m>rb2); JArm. pa. (Dalman Wb. 322a); Syr.
pe., pa. and af. (Brockelmann Lexicon 546a); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Literary and Oral Tradition
2: 464); Mnd. ARB II (Drower-M. Dictionary 35b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 242, 244): pe. and
pa. (?) to mix; Syr. passive, etpe.; JArm. and Mnd. etpa.
pa: pt. passive (EgArm.) br'[;m]; Bauer-Leander BArm. 130h: to mix Da 241.43. †
hitpa: pt. br'[;t]mi, pl. ÷ybir][‰;t]mi: to mingle Da 243. †
*dr;[:} Heb. d/r[; and n.m. I dr;[}; EmpArm., EgArm. (only Ah\iqar) fem. ? hdr[ (Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 221; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 887 s.v. >rd1); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb.
322b; Beyer Arm. Texte 664); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 152b); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon
547a s.v. >eraµdaµ2); Mnd. arada (Drower-M. Dictionary 35a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 115);
Bauer-Leander BArm. 187c: pl. det. aY:d'r;[}: wild ass Da 521. †
*hr[: the same in Heb.

It should be first noted that the basic meaning of the vb. (the root) according to Akk. and Arb.
(see HAL 834; HALOT 881) is “to be naked”, and from this there develops the causative idea
of “to uncover, pour away, empty out”, and in the adj. and sbst. also the idea of cold and
coldness.
—1. JArm. ar[ af. to empty out (Dalman Wb. 321b); Sam. yr[ to be naked (Ben H\ayyim
Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 546); Syr. adv. >aryat naked (Brockelmann Lexicon 548a); Mnd.
>RA to pour out, mix, mingle (Drower-M. Dictionary 356f); cf. OArm., Sefire (Donner-R.
Inschriften 222 A: 41, passive; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 890 s.v. >rr2).
—2. adj: EgArm. adj. fem. hyr[ cold, freezing (Ah\iqar 118), so with Cowley Arm. Pap. 224;
Jean-H. Dictionnaire 221 s.v. yr[II; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 887 s.v. >ry2); DSS (Beyer
Arm. Texte 664).
Der. *hw:r]['.
*hw:r][:' hr[; Heb. hw:r][,; —1. JArm. at;yÒr][, nakedness, shame (Dalman Wb. 323b); Sam. hwr[
(irbaµ).
—2. Syr. >aryaµ coldness (Brockelmann Lexicon 545a); Bauer-Leander BArm. 183f: cstr. tw"r][':
nakedness, shame, aK;l]m' tw"r][' Ezr 414. †
*rr[: Heb. II rrx; EgArm. yrw[ (Cowley Arm. Pap. 8: 27) to instigate a legal case (Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 222; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 889 s.v. >rr1, to encourage); JArm. pa. to
argue against, oppose (Dalman Wb. 325a s.v. rr[II); cf. Beyer Arm. Texte 665 to raise an
objec-tion; CPArm. >r to be angry, be opposed to (Schulthess Lex. 152a).
Der. *r['.
*bc'[:} Heb. bc,[e; like the root of the Akk. vb. esûeµbu to grow luxuriantly (AHw. 253b; CAD E:
352); Palm. >sûb (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 222; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 890, herbage,
greenery); JArm. aB;s][i, aB;c][i, DSS (Dalman Wb. 325a, 318a; Beyer Arm. Texte 665); Sam.
bs[ (esew), see Ben H\ayyim Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 541; CPArm. >sb (Schulthess Lex.
149b); Syr. >esbaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 536a); Bauer-Leander BArm. 40n, 202m, 225p: the
same in the cstr.; det. aB;c][i: collective plants, grass, herbage Da 422.29f 521, bc'[} a[;r]a' 412. †
rc'[,} (Or. >asar) and hr;c][': Heb. rc,[,, hr;c;[}; OArm., Zakir r[ (Donner-R. Inschriften 202 A:
5); EmpArm., EgArm. r[, fem. hr[, atr[ (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.); Pehl.
(Junker Frahang 29: 10); Nab. and Palm. r[; Hatra; JArm. inscr. fem. hr[ (Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 223; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 893 s.v. >sûr5); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb.
325b; Beyer Arm. Texte 665), and Sam. rc'[} and rs'[} (Ben H\ayyim Literary and Oral
Tradition 2: 545); JArm. denominative vb. pa. (Dalman Wb. 325b); so also CPArm. >sr/>sûr
(Schulthess Lex. 150a), and Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 537a), >sar, >esraµ, rarely in Syr. *>sûr, cf.
>usûraµ one-tenth (Brockelmann Lexicon 553a; Rosenthal Arm. Forsch. 177); Mnd. asra
(Drower-M. Dictionary 30a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 188); NeoSyr. >israµ (Maclean 242a), and
NeoArm. >esar (Bergsträsser Gloss. 7); Bauer-Leander BArm. 250 l: cardinal number, ten, rc'[}
with fem. Da 77.20.24, hr;c][' with masc. 724; rc'[} AyreT] (Bauer-Leander BArm. 250n) twelve Da
426 Ezr 617; → ÷yric][,. †
÷yric][:, rc'[}; Heb. µyric][,; EgArm. ÷r[ (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.); Nab. ÷yr[;
Palm. ÷yrs[ and ÷yr[; JArm. inscr. >sûryn (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 223 s.v. µr[;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 894 s.v. >sûrm); JArm. ÷(y)r[ (also with s Dalman Wb. 325 s.v.
rc'[}, and 318 s.v. rs'[}); DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 665); CPArm. >sryn (Schulthess Lex. 150a s.v.
rs[); Syr. >esréÆn (Nöldeke Syr. Gramm. §148, p. 93); Sam. isûrm (Ben H\ayyim Literary and
Oral Tradition 2: 545); Mnd. asrin, >srin, srin (Drower-M. Dictionary 30a; Nöldeke Mand.
Gramm. 189); NeoArm. (Bergsträsser Gloss. 7), and NeoSyr. >isr(i) (Maclean 242a);
Bauer-Leander BArm. 250o: cardinal number, twenty Da 62. †
tv[: Heb. I tv[; < Arm. (Wagner 225); OArm., Sefire to think (Donner-R. Inschriften 223 B:
5, t[t, 2nd. sing. masc. impf. pe., you think; see also Degen Altaram. Gramm. p. 68);
EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Driver Arm. Docs.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar) pe. to
plan, intend; also itpa. Xanthos (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 223; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 895
s.v. >sût1); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 326a; Beyer Arm. Texte 666) itpa. to plan, decide.
pe: tyvi[}, Or. >asûéÆt, not a pf. intransi-tive (E. Kautzsch Grammatik des
Biblisch-Aramäischen (1884), 371), but passive pt. in an active sense (cf. Syr., Nöldeke Syr.
Gramm. §280; see further Bauer-Leander BArm. 90k; see also 297e: tyvi[} Da 64 can also be an
adj. with the sense “thought of, concerned about”; variantSecunda tyvi[; = tvi[; pt.
(Bauer-Leander BArm. 215g): to intend, with inf. Da 64. †
*t[,, → t[,K].
*dt[: the same in Heb.; EmpArm., EgArm. pa. to breed, of cattle (Cowley Arm. Pap. 9: 5); Nab.
pa. pf; (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 224; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 897 s.v. >td1); JArm.
(Dalman Wb. 326a); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 153b); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 9b); Syr. pa. to
prepare (Brockelmann Lexicon 553a); Mnd. ATT and >TT to prepare (Drower-M. Dictionary
44b).
Der. *dyti[}.
*dyti[:} Or. >atéÆd; dt[; Heb. dyti[;; EmpArm.; JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 224;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 897 s.v. >tyd); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 326b; Beyer Arm. Texte
666); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 469); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 153b);
Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 553a); Mnd. >tit, >tita (Drower-M. Dictionary 358b; Nöldeke Mand.
Gramm. 117); NeoSyr. ready, future; Bauer-Leander BArm. 188h, 192e: pl. ÷ydiyti[}: ready for,
with → yDi (3a) and impf. Da 315. †
*qyTi[:' qt[; the same in Heb., but this is disputed by Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 100; EmpArm.,
EgArm. qyt[ (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap., where qyf[ occurs twice; Nisa; Palm.
qyt[ (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 224; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 898); JArm., DSS (Dalman
Wb. 326b; Beyer Arm. Texte 666); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 154a); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Literary
and Oral Tradition 2: 483b); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 553b), and Mnd. atiqa (Drower-M.
Dictionary 43a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 71); NeoArm. >acðcðeq (Bergsträsser Gloss. 2, s.v. >cðq);
NeoSyr. >utiqaµ (Maclean 245a); cf. also Heb. qyta, a by-form (!); Bauer-Leander BArm. 192e:
the same in the cstr.: old; ÷ymi/yAqyTi[' (Syr., see Payne Smith 3011), aged Da 79.13.22. †
*qt[: the same in Heb.; JArm. (Dalman Wb. 326b); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 154a); Syr.
(Brockelmann Lexicon 553b); NeoSyr. to become old; Syr. also to advance; cf. Akk. eteµqu to
pass along, pass by, go beyond (AHw. 260b; CAD E: 384).
Der. *qyTi['.
p: outside BArm. p interchanges with → b, cf. pn > OArm. bn (Tell Fekherye), lz²r]P', and with →
µ, cf. Palm. amn < apn (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 183).
µWP: → µPu.
*hj;P:, the same in Heb.; Akk. loanword: péÆ/aµhÉaµtu responsibility (Neo-Assyrian and Late
Babylonian; AHw. 862b, s.v. 5), shortened from beµl péÆhÉaµti (paµhÉaµti) representative,
superintendent, governor (AHw. 120a, beÆlu(m) s.v. 18; cf. CAD B: 198b, beµlu s.v. 2e; see also
Kaufman 82; Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 100 refers to Kutscher Studies 359–363); EmpArm.,
EgArm. (Saqqara hjp, Donner-R. Inschriften 266: 9; Cowley Arm. Pap.; Behistun 18);
Samaria, Padua 1, 4 pl. ph\wt< (cf. Gibson Syrian Semitic Inscriptions 2: text 28, p. 144); Nisa
330b; Beyer Arm. Texte 667, but Sokoloff loc. cit. notes that these references are to EmpArm.
or BArm., not JArm. or DSS); Bauer-Leander BArm. 201j, 237m, 238t: cstr. tj'P', pl. at;w:j} P' (
cf. Padua 1, 4): a governor under the Babylonian and Persian empire (O. Leuze Die
Satrapieneinteilung in Syrien und im Zweistromland (1935), 18ff) Da 32f.27 68, specifically of
ar;h} ÷'Arb'[} Ezr 53.6 66.13, of Judaea 514 67. †
rj'P:, —a) potter: JArm. (Dalman Wb. 330b; see also Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 101); CPArm. ph\r
(Schulthess Lex. 155b); Syr. pah\h\aµraµyaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 563a), and NeoSyr. pah\aµraµ
(Maclean 249b); Mnd. pahara (Drower-M. Dictionary 360a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 120).
—b) clay, pottery: JArm. rj'P], ar;j} P' (Levy 4: 23a) and, a form which has clearly been
confused with (a) above, ar;j;P, (Dalman Wb. 330b); CPArm. ph\r (Schulthess Lex 155b); Syr.
pah\h\aµraµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 563a); Mnd. pahra (Drower-M. Dictionary 360a); NeoSyr.
pih\aµraµ (Maclean 249b); > Arb. fah\-h\aµr pottery, potter (Fraenkel 257; Lidzbarski ZDMG 72
(1918), 189ff; A. Fischer ZDMG 72 (1918), 328ff); > NeoArm. fahÉhÉoµra clay (Bergsträsser
Gloss. 25; Spitaler 79a); denominative, Syr. itpa. to be shaped (Brockelmann Lexicon 563a);
loanword from. Akk. pahÉaµru(m) potter < (pre-)Sumerian bahÉar (AHw. 810a; see further
Salonen Hausgeräte 11; Kaufman 79; and Ellenbogen 132); Ug. phÉr (Margalit UF 13 (1981),
144); Bauer-Leander BArm. 191c: potter, → ˜¹,AyDi ¹s'j} (:: Montgomery 178, clay
corresponding to an:yfi ¹s'j} 241.43) Da 241. †
*vyfp, pl. sf. ÷/hyveyf]P', Q ÷/hyveF]P', variantSecundum ˜f]P', Or. pat\esûeµhoµn, pisûteµhoµn
(Bauer-Leander BArm. 46m; 220x, y), K ÷/hyveyFiP' or ˜fiP]; JArm. av;yfiP] trousers, cf. Dalman
Wb. 331b, though it is usually the same as Heb. vyFiP' meaning “hammer”, the same as JArm.
av;yFiP' (Dalman Wb. 331b); on this see Beyer Arm. Texte 667, where the translation “an item of
clothing” is given; see also Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 101, who says it never means
“undergarment” in JArm.; Syr. pet\sûaµ head covering, also trousers, or wrappings over the legs,
leggings; see Brockelmann Lexicon 566a; Payne Smith 3098); pesûéÆt\aµ shoe; uncertain etymology,
perhaps a loanword from Persian *patyusûe garment, with ÷/hyveWbl] as a gloss, see Nyberg, Le
Monde Oriental 25, 178ff; on the Persian see also Hinz 188, where it is said to be an item of
clothing which cannot be precisely identified; occuring together with hl;B]r]K' and lB;r]s', which
both fit the idea of being bound up (tpk): dress or trousers, cf. Sept., Theodotion tiavra;
Codex Venetus ajnaxurivde" (trousers); cf. still Montgomery 212, → lB;r]s'. Da 321. †
glp: the same in Heb.; EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.); Bauer-Meissner Pachtvertrag 4,
6; Palm. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 227; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 911); JArm. pe., pa. and af.
to divide (Dalman Wb. 334a); DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 668); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Literary and
Oral Tradition 2: 462); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 569b); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 157a);
Mnd. PLG (Drower-M. Dictionary 373b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 37); NeoArm. (Bergsträsser
Gloss. 25 s.v. flgù); NeoSyr. (Maclean 252a).
pe: pt. passive fem. hgÉyliP]: to divide, pt. passive divided, not in one piece Da 241 cf. vs. 43. †
Der. *gl'P], *hG:luP].
*gl'P:] glp; Heb. I gl,P, man-made water course, canal; EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.;
Kraeling Arm. Pap.); Xanthos; Pehl. (Junker Frahang 30: 39, prg; Herzfeld Paikuli 814);
Nyberg Avroman 3: 2; Nab., Palm. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 227 s.v. glpIII; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 912 s.v. plg3); JArm. aG:l]Pi, DSS (Dalman Wb. 334b; Beyer Arm. Texte 668);
CPArm. plg (Schulthess Lex. 157a); Syr. pelgaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 570a), and NeoSyr. pelgaµ
(Maclean 252a); NeoArm. felka half (Bergsträsser Gloss. 26); for ÷glp → *hG:luP];
Bauer-Leander BArm. 183e: the same in the cstr.: half Da 725. †
*hG:luP;] variant hgÉluP]; glp; Heb. hG:luP]; EmpArm. ÷glp: Bauer-Meissner Pachtvertrag 3;
Koopmans 2: 96, lease; EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 228;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 914 s.v. plgn); JArm. at;GÒluP] (Dalman Wb. 334b, section); Mnd.
plugta (Drower-M. Dictionary 374): —a) division, separation; —b) with liba (= Heb. ble)
doubt (so Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 119); Bauer-Leander BArm. 241p, q: pl. sf. ÷/ht]G;luP]:
section, division of the priests Ezr 618, cf. 2C 355. †
jlp: in Heb. meaning to split (cf. Latin colere); —a. vb. EmpArm., EgArm. (Kraeling Arm. Pap.
; and Ah\iqar 17); Carpentras, to serve God (Donner-R. Inschriften 269: 4); Pehl. (Junker
Frahang 18: 5; Ps 132b); Palm., Hatra to serve God (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 228;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 914 s.v. plh\1); JArm., DSS to cultivate the land (Dalman Wb.
334b; Beyer Arm. Texte 668); cf. GenAp xii: 13), to serve; Syr. to cultivate the field, serve a
person, serve God (Brockelmann Lexicon 572a); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 157b); Mnd. to
cultivate, serve, venerate (Drower-M. Dictionary 374a).
—b. sbst.: JArm. aj;l]P‰; servant, labourer (Dalman Wb. 335a); Sam. pl>nh work (Ben H\ayyim
Gloss. 9b s.v. plh\); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 572b), and NeoSyr. fallaµh\aµ, > Arb. fallaµh\
(Fraenkel 126); NeoArm. falloµh\aµ agricultural labourer (Bergsträsser Gloss. 25); Palm. palh\<
(Jean-H. Dictionnaire 228); CPArm. *plwh\ (Schulthess Lex. 157b), and NeoSyr. palaµh\aµ worker
(Maclean 252b).
—c. for the meaning “to venerate” cf. Akk. palaµhÉu to fear, respect, venerate (AHw. 812a,
especially 813a IIc; Zimmern 65).
pe: impf. ÷Wjl]p]yI; pt. jl'P;, pl. ÷yjil]P‰;, cstr. yjel]P‰;: to serve God (cf. EgArm., Corpus Inscr.
Sem. ii: 141, 4) parallel with dgs, with acc. Da 317, with l] 312.14.18.28 617.21 714.27; pt. servant,
ah;l;aÔ tyBe yjel]P‰; Ezr 724. †
Der. *÷j;l]P;.
*÷j;l]P:; jlp; MHeb. ÷j;l]Pu, < Arm.; JArm. (Dalman Wb. 335b, also divine service, worship);
CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 158a); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 572b, also ritual), and NeoSyr.
pulh\aµn/pulh\aµnaµ/pilh\aµnaµ (Maclean 248a); Mnd. puhlana (Drower-M. Dictionary 367b; Nöldeke
Mand. Gramm. 66, 418, work, service, worship); Bauer-Leander BArm. 195z; the same in the
cstr.: service, ritual observance, Jh;l;aÔ tyBe ˜P; Ezr 719. †
µPu, variant µPo, see BHS on Da 4 Or. pom (Bauer-Leander BArm. 221d); Heb. hP,; OArm., µp
28;
Tell Fekherye 10, 14; Zendjirli (Donner-R. Inschriften 214: 29–30); Sefire (222 A: 30/31; 223
A: 9); yp (215: 11, on which see 2: p. 227, a by-form of the conjunction p, ap (?); so also
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 898 s.v. p1 :: KBL); EmpArm., µp Nerab (Donner-R. Inschriften
226: 4); Bauer-Meissner Pachtvertrag 18; EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar; Kraeling Arm.
Pap.; Saqqara); Pehl. hmwp (Junker Frahang 10: 18; and Nyberg 2: 298); Uruk 21, 24, 32, 34
pu-um-mi-e 3rd. masc. sf. his mouth; Nab. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 229; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 916); JArm. µWp and µ/p, aM;Pu, DSS (Dalman Wb. 329a, 337b; Beyer Arm. Texte
669; see further Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 101, who refers to Kutscher Galilean Aramaic 22 for
the vocalisation); CPArm. pym = pem (Schulthess Lex. 158b); Sam. fem. (Kutscher, Tarbiz
22/23, p. 66), and fa/em (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 9b); Syr. pummaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 577a);
NeoSyr. puµmaµ (Maclean 248a); Mnd. puma (Drower-M. Dictionary 368a; Nöldeke Mand.
Gramm. 97); NeoArm. themma (Spitaler 65m); Nöldeke Neue Beiträge 177; Bauer-Leander
BArm. 178b; the same in the cstr.; sf. HM'Pu, variant hm'WP.
—1. mouth Da 428 623 75 820.

—2. entrance, opening, mouth (of aB;G¬, the den of lions, cf. JArm., Syr.) Da 618. †
*sP': the same in Heb.: —1. part, share, lot, tax: EmpArm., EgArm. sp part, share (Kraeling
Arm. Pap. 10: 7, 9; 12: 9, 18), always together with tr, but the meaning is unclear; for the
phrase tr sp see p. 253, under text 10: 7, “a share that remains over as extra”; Nab. (Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 230 s.v. spI; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 921 s.v. ps1); MHeb. sP' piece, tax
(Dalman Wb. 339a); JArm. aS;Pi piece, bite to eat, lot (Dalman Wb. 339a); Syr. pessaµ, pessetaµ
lot (Brockelmann Lexicon 580b); CPArm. ps and pst< tax (Schulthess Lex. 159b).
—2. palm of the hand, sole of the foot; JArm. at;s]Pi. (Dalman Wb. 341b); see Bauer-Leander
BArm. 180n; the same in the cstr.: Da 55, det. aS;P; Da 524; Sept., Theodotion davktuloi ceirov"
, vs. 24 Theodotion ajstravgalo" ceirov" , with h/ad;yÒ, (vs. 5 with h, vs. 24 with a); traditionally
the palm of the hand, but rather the back of the hand (Bentzen), or the whole hand below the
wrist (Montgomery 253, 255); cf. also Plöger KAT xviii: 82, the knuckles of the hand,
especially noticeable for their width (cf. Theodotion 524). †
÷yrifenÒs'P] Da 37 and ÷yriTenÒs'P] 35.10.15; JArm. ÷yrifenÒs'P] loanword from yalthvrion > psalterium
(Ruzûicûka 58; Dalman Wb. 340b; Krauss 1: 4; 2: 473); > Arb. sant\uµr, sant\éÆr (Vollers, ZDMG
51, 298, stringed instument, triangular in shape, rather like a dulcimer, harp; see further S. R.
Driver Daniel (1900), 38f; Kolari 78ff; Grelot VT 29 (1979), 33–36; Ellenbogen 135; Coxon,
Transactions of Glasgow University Oriental Society 25 (1973–74), 31–32). †
lz²r]P:' Heb. lz²r]B'; EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; and Kraeling Arm. Pap.) lzrp; JArm. inscr.
pwrzyl (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 235; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 936); JArm. lzrb and lzrp
(Dalman Wb. 64b and 347a); DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 670); Syr. parzelaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon
594a), and Mnd. (Drower-M. Dictionary 364a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 128); Sam. bersel;
CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 162a) and Syr. purzelaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 594a); NeoSyr. prizlaµ
(Maclean 257a); > Arb. firzil (Fraenkel 153); Bauer-Leander BArm. 42w: lz,r]P', det. al;zÒr]P',
masc.: iron (Forbes, Jaarbericht … Ex Oriente Lux, 9: 207) Da 233–35.40–43.45 412.20 54.23 77.19. †
srp: the same in Heb. to divide, separate; JArm. (Dalman Wb. 350b s.v. sr'P] ); Syr.I
(Brockelmann Lexicon 599a); NeoSyr. (Maclean 258b) to divide; JArm. at;s]r]P' cloven hoof
(Dalman Wb. 351b).
pe: pf. passive (Bauer-Leander BArm. 104c) 3rd. fem. ts'yriP]: to divide, passive Da 528.
Der. (?) *sreP].
*sreP:] ? srp; OArm., Tell Fekherye 19 prys, cf. p. 34f and note 1, one-third of a kor, or
one-third of a h\omer; Zendjirli (Donner-R. Inschriften 215: 6) measure of capacity (see 2: p.
226); Akk. paréÆsu one-half of a kor (AHw. 833b s.v. paréÆsu II); see also Donner-R. loc. cit.,
where it is stated that in the Boghazköy texts parisi stands for one-half of or one part of a shekel
; so also with reference to Friedrich WZKM 49 (1942), 174 no. 1; EmpArm., Bauer-Meissner
Pachtvertrag 5, part of a Heb. rm,jo, one-half of a mina (Koopmans 2: 96); EgArm. srp (sg.
Cowley Arm. Pap.; Hermopolis; pl. ÷ysrp Kraeling Arm. Pap. 7: 20 :: → ys;r]P'; 11: 3); pl.
size, Hermopolis 1: 8; Padua 1: 3, 4, 6 wages, part, payment; Kraeling Arm. Pap. 11: 3 p. 262,
one-half of a Persian ardab (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 236 s.v. srpI; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary
940 s.v. prs2); JArm. (Dalman Wb. 350b s.v. as;r]P'II), and Syr. peraµsaµ (as;r;P], Brockelmann
Lexicon 600a s.v. perasI) ration; JArm. and MHeb. sr;P] half a mina (Dalman Wb. 350b);
according to Zimmern 21, this sbst. is to be taken as a loanword from Akk. parsu; so also KBL
:: Kaufman 80, prs > sreP] a development originating in Aramaic; an Aramaic loanword
short-lived in Akk.; for Akk. parsu see AHw. 830b s.v. parasrab = parsu rabuÆ greater part;
BArm. sreP], pl. or dual ÷ysir]P' Da 525 (Sept. preceding 51; Pseudo-Theodotion; Vulgate; and
Josephus Antiquities x 11: 3, sg. fare" (fares), unit of size and weight; traditionally one-half
of a mina, rather one-half of a shekel; see Eissfeldt ZAW 63 (1951), 109ff; according to
Eissfeldt ÷ysir]P' is not to be taken here as pl., but as dual, “two half-shekels”. But the traditional
treatment as a plural still remains possible, and it is perhaps to be preferred; on this see Plöger
KAT xviii: 83, 89, sg., one-half of a shekel Da 525.28; on the explanation of sreP] as a verb in
the word-play in vs. 28, → anEm] and lqeT]. †
sr'P,; sr‰;P; (Bauer-Leander BArm. 23d); the same in Heb.; EmpArm., EgArm. srp, and
cuneiform parsu (Cowley Arm. Pap. pp. 255f); Behistun 22, 24, 26, 36, Persia; 26 ydmw srp
Persia and Media.; Syr. paµres; Mnd. pars (Drower-M. Dictionary 364b); Neo-Persian paµrs:
Persia, the Persians Da 528 69.13.16 Ezr 424 614; → *ys;r]P'. †
*ys;r]P:' gentilic from sr'P;; Heb. ysiir]p‰;, vari-ant ˜P'; EmpArm., EgArm. (Behistun) ysrp, det.
aysrp (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Behistun passim); pl. abs. ÷ysrp (Kraeling Arm. Pap. 7: 20; see
Beyer Arm. Texte 671); cuneiform parsayya (VAB 3: 152); also parsaÆ (Cowley Arm. Pap. p.
255; 18; Tallqvist Personal Names 180); Syr. parsaµyaµ/paµresaµyaµ (?); Mnd. parsaia (Drower-M.
Dictionary 364b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 141); Bauer-Leander BArm. 196d: det. a;ys;r]P'; K
ay:s;r]P', Q ha;s;r]P' (Bauer-Leander BArm. 51k): Persian, a Persian Da 629; → ayEs;r]p'a}. †
qrp: the same in Heb.; ? < Arm. (Wagner 237); —1. to destroy: OArm., Sefire prq (Donner-R.
Inschriften 222 B: 34; 2: p. 256; Degen Altaram. Gramm. p. 15 and §§57, 84); JArm. inscr.
(Jean-H. Dictionnaire 237 s.v. qrpI; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 943 s.v. prq1).
—2. to loosen, save: EmpArm., Nab. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 237 s.v. qrpIII; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 943 s.v. prq2): JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 352b; Beyer Arm. Texte 671; Tg. for lag,
on which see Montgomery 242); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 163b); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon
605b); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 9b), and Mnd. PRQ to loosen, commute, remove, ransom,
deliver (Drower-M. Dictionary 380; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 372); Sam. to separate; NeoSyr.
to finish (Maclean 259a).
pe: impv. qruP], Or. peroq (Bauer-Leander BArm. 99c): to remove, wipe away sins, Da 424 (
Sept. lu;trwsai; Vulgate redime :: Montgomery 239f, 242, to break up). †
vrp: the same in Heb.; EmpArm., EgArm. to separate (Cowley Arm. Pap.); —a) pe. pt. passive
hyrp different (Ah\iqar 208); —b) blameless pt. ÷yrp (Cowley Arm. Pap. 27: 10); inf. mprsû to
explain (Cowley Arm. Pap. 17: 3); cf. Pehl. to decide (Junker Frahang 18: 8, plsûwn); Nab., pe.
pt. pl. active masc. prs lyly< mn ymm< the one who divides the night from the day (possibly an
epithet of the god Dusûara (Haussig Wb. Myth. 1: 433; Hoftijzer RA 189; Jean-H. Dictionnaire
237 s.v rp1; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 944 s.v. prsû1); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 353b;
Beyer Arm. Texte 671); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 164a); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Literary and Oral
Tradition 2: 566); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 607a); Mnd. PRŠ to separate, distinguish
(Drower-M. Dictionary 381; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 221, 222); EgArm., JArm., Syr., pa. also
to explain; Mnd., pe. also to understand; af. to explain.
pa: pt. passive vr'p;m] (Bauer-Leander BArm. 130h!): to separate; pt. passive (cf. EgArm.)
Ezr 418 traditionally separated, i.e. to be read clearly, word by word, Sept.L safw`", Vulgate
manifeste :: sicut, Heb. vr;pom] Neh 88 translated section by section, corresponding to Heb.
µG:r]tum] Ezr 47 (Schaeder Esra 6ff; Messina 22ff; for the Persian background see Polotsky, Le
Muséon 45 (1932), 273–283). †
*÷g²v,r]P:' Heb. ÷g²v,t]P'; JArm., DSS (Dal-man Wb. 354a; Beyer Arm. Texte 672) an:gÒv'r]P'/t]P'; Syr.
parsûagnaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 609a); Mnd. parsûigna (Drower-M. Dictionary 365; Nöldeke
Mand. Gramm. 41); Sept. ajntivgrafon Est 48; Pesh. for Heb. hn<v]mi Dt 1718; Persian loanword;
the Persian form which is at the base of this sbst. has not been identified with certainty; for the
possibilities see KBL: either Old Persian *paticðayana copy (Hübschmann Armenische
Grammatik 1: 224; S. Telegdi Essai 253), Old Persian paticðagna answer (Benveniste JA 226
(1935), 253; Hinz 186); or Old Persian *paticðagna repetition, reproduction (KBL “answer”),
Benveniste JA 225 (1934), 180ff; BArm. ˜rP' is formed in imitation of Persian words beginning
with pari-; the same in the cstr.: copy, aT;r]G¾ai ÷g²v,r]P' Ezr 411 56, an:w:T]v]nI ˜P' 423 711; cf. Sept. 411
diatagh; th`" ejpistolh`" , 423 forolovgo", 56 diasavfhsi" ejpistolh`" . †
rvp: Heb. root rp, → rv,Pe and rtp; —a) rtp also MHeb. and JArm. (Dalman Wb. 357b).
—b) rp Sam. to release (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 9b); EmpArm., psûr EgArm. haf. (?) to pay a debt
(see Cowley Arm. Pap. 63: 14); Nab.; JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 238;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 946 s.v. psûr1); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 355b; Beyer Arm.
Texte 672), and Syr., pe. and pa. (Brockelmann Lexicon 614a.b); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex
165a), pa. to solve, interpret (Eissfeldt ZAW 63 (1951), 105ff; Elliger Habakukkommentar
123ff; Wagner 239); Mnd. PSðR (Drower-M. Dictionary 383a) pe., pa., af. to melt, dissolve,
solve; to exorcise, drive out; > Arb. psr (Fraenkel 286); Akk. pasûaµru(m) to slacken, release (
AHw. 842b); sûutta(m) pasûaµnu to interpret, explain a dream (AHw. 842b, s.v. b; cf. Zimmern 68.
pe: inf. rv'p]mi Da 516, cj. 512: to interpret, with ÷yriv]Pi 512.16 to give an interpretation
(Bauer-Leander BArm. 336c). †
pa: pt. rV'p'm] (Bauer-Leander BArm. 133g): interpreter (Akk. paµsûir, mupasûsûir sûunaµti as an
epithet for gods, see Tallqvist Götterepitheta 155) Da 512, rd. with Vulgate rv'p]mi → pe. ::
Plöger KAT xviii: 80, 82, who follows MT, “as one who interprets dreams…”. †
Der. *rv'P].
*rv'P:] Heb. rv,Pe, < Arm. (Wagner 239); in JArm. ar;v]Pi it may mean “meaning” (DSS, see
Dalman Wb. 355b; Beyer Arm. Texte 672); Akk. pisûru(m) interpretation, solu-tion, meaning; cf.
pisûertu(m) which may mean magical solution (AHw. 868b); Syr. pesûaµraµ may mean solution,
explanation (Brockelmann Lexicon 614b); CPArm., pl. *psûwryn explanation (Schulthess Lex.
165a); Mnd. pisûra exorcism (Drower-M. Dictionary 372b); Sam. (Cowley Samaritan Liturgy 2:
lxvii; see also Wagner 239); Bauer-Leander BArm. 183j; the same in the cstr.: det. ar;v]Pi.
—a) ar;v]Pi Da 224f.30 415 517.
—b) arev]Pi 415f 58, for arev]Pi rd. with K ar;v]Pi, with Q Hrev]Pi, see BHS on 415.
—c) Hr'v]Pi Da 27 (variant Hrev]Pi) and 512; sf. Hrev]Pi 26.7 (variant) and elsewhere; see further
with Q 415f 58; for these last two instances instead of K arp (see KBL) it is much better to
adopt a cj. Hr'v]Pi, but a reading following Q Hrev]Pi is to be preferred; pl. ÷yriv]Pi interpretation
Da 24–7.9.16.24–26.30.36.45 43f.6.15f.21 57f.12.15–17.26 716. †
µgÉt]P,i variant µG:t]Pi the same in Heb.; for fricative g see Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 101; loanword
(Wagner 241); EmpArm., EgArm. µgtp (Driver Arm. Docs. 4: 3; 7: 9; Saqqara); JArm. inscr.
355b; Beyer Arm. Texte 672), and NeoSyr. pitgaµmaµ (Maclean 261a)i; Syr. petgaµmaµ
(Brockelmann Lexicon 616a); Mnd. pug-dama (Drower-M. Dictionary 367a; Nöldeke Mand.
Gramm. 32); loanword from Old Persian patgàm message (on which see Hinz 186; also Hinz
ZA 61 (1971), 310; cf. also Segert, ArchOr 24 (1956), 390; for further bibliography see KBL
and Wagner 241): det. am;gÉt]Pi.
—1. word, ˜Pi bytih} to respond, give an answer Da 316 (Syr., Heb. with byh Sir 511 89) Ezr 511
(also Da 316, see Montgomery), ˜Pi jlv to submit a report Ezr 417 57.
—2. decree Da 414, with hnv haf. Ezr 611. †
*htp: Heb. II htp; Arm. loanword (Wagner 242); JArm. (Dalman Wb. 355b, to be wide ::
Beyer Arm. Texte 673, ytp to stretch out, run along); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Literary and Oral
Tradition 2: 561); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 615b), and NeoSyr. pt< to be wide (Maclean
261a); CPArm., itpa. and af. (Schulthess Lex. 165a).
Der. *yt;P].
jtp: the same in Heb.; OArm., jtp Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften 224: 8/9); also → jqp, Sefire
(222 A: 13; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 234; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 933 s.v. pqh\1); EmpArm.
, EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.); Nab., Palm., JArm. inscr. (Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 238; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 948 s.v. pth\1); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb.
356a; Beyer Arm. Texte 673); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 9b); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 616a);
CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 165a); Mnd. PTA (Drower-M. Dictionary 383b; Nöldeke Mand.
Gramm. 234); NeoArm. (Bergsträsser Gloss. 28 s.v. ft\h\; Spitaler Gloss. 85b) and NeoSyr.
(Maclean 261a).
pe: pf. passive (Bauer-Leander BArm. 104c) Wjyti&P]; pt. passive pl. fem. ÷j;ytiP]: to open,
books Da 710, a window (÷yWIK)' 611, on which see Plöger KAT xviii: 94, who agrees that the
reference is to a window, but rather the shutter or the grid on the window that can be opened (::
Montgomery 274, to cut out); cf. EgArm. ÷jytp ÷ywk (Cowley Arm. Pap. 25: 6), and hnwk
jytp (Kraeling Arm. Pap. 12: 21, “his window (3rd. masc. sf.) is open”; or “the window”,
taking the form as a stat. emph. (see Jean-H. Dictionnaire 238), → hW:K'; Palm. jytp yd arpwt
(Jean-H. Dictionnaire 325 s.v rpwt; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1207 s.v. twpr). †
*yt;P:] htp; EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.); Persepolis (Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 239; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 951 s.v. pty3); JArm., adj. ay:t]P' (Dalman Wb.
356b with reference to Tg.o Ex 38), sbst. ay:t]Pu (Dalman Wb. 356b); but for further details of
JArm. forms see Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 101; DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 673, ytp poŒtéÆ), on the
pattern qutl; so also CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 165a), and also Mnd. putia (Drower-M.
Dictionary 369b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 105); Syr., adj. patyaµ, sbst. petwaµ, putyaµ, petaµyaµ
(Brock-elmann Lexicon 615b); NeoSyr. pitwaµ (Maclean 261a); Bauer-Leander BArm. 187d: sf.
HyEt;P]: breath Da 31 Ezr 63. †
Å: —1. corresponding to Proto-Semitic s\, Arb. s\, Heb. s\ (Å), in hbx, [bx, qdx, jlx etc.; → f, [
and q.
—2. rarely interchanges with s, so in ¹s'j}.
hbx: Heb. II *hbx; EmpArm., EgArm. ybx (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar; Kraeling Arm. Pap.;
Hermopolis); Pehl. (Junker Frahang 18: 2; Herzfeld Paikuli 508/9); Palm., Nab., JArm. inscr.
(Jean-H. Dictionnaire 241; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 957); JArm. ab;x]/ybix]; (Dalman Wb.
357b); DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 673 s.v. ybx); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 165a); Syr.
(Brockelmann Lexicon 619a); Mnd. S\BA I (Drower-M. Dictionary 388b; Nöldeke Mand.
Gramm. 258); cf. NeoSyr. s\b< to decorate (with feathers, Maclean 262a); NeoArm., s\yb
(Bergsträsser Gloss. 83).
pe: pf. 1st. sg. tybix] (Bauer-Leander BArm. 155q); impf. aBex]yI, Da 521 a/hBex]yI, (for the
ending a/h see BHK3 ad loc.; Bauer-Leander BArm. 151b); inf. with sf. HyEB]x]mi (Bauer-Leander
BArm. 234k); pt. abex;.
—1. to desire, with l] and inf. Da 719.
—2. to wish for, like, (Heb. Åpej; 3) Da 414.22.29 519.21, HyEB]x]miK] according to his will Da 432 (on
which cf. Hurvitz VT 32 (1982), 262f). †
Der. Wbx].
Wbx]: hbx; EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap. 54: 13 uncertain; Driver Arm. Docs. 4: 2;
Saqqara); Pehl. (Junker Frahang 16: 8 (?); Herzfeld Paikuli 888); Palm. wish, matter; JArm.
Wb. 358a; Beyer Arm. Texte 674; see also Rosenthal, Tarbiz 40 (1971), 31–32); Syr.
(Brockelmann Lexicon 619a); Mnd. s\bu (Drower-M. Dictionary 389b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm.
146, 301), and NeoSyr. s\wuµtaµ wish, concern (Maclean 262a); cf. Akk. s\ibuµtu(m) (AHw. 1099a;
CAD S\: 167, s\ibuÆtu, need, want, request, purpose, enterprise); cf. Heb. Åp,je 4; Arb. sûai<
(Wehr-Cowan 495b); Bauer-Leander BArm. 197g: matter, concern, thing, Wbx] … al; nothing
(Pehl.; Bauer-Leander BArm. 349d) Da 618. †
[bx: the same in Heb.; EmpArm., EgArm. s\b> pt. passive [bx for [ybx, on which see Leander
48f, 80v (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.) dyed (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 241;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 958 s.v. s\b>1); JArm. to immerse, dye, wet (Dalman Wb. 358a;
DSS; Beyer Arm. Texte 674, sbst); Sam. to wash (Ben H\ayyim Literary and Oral Tradition 2:
603); CPArm. to immerse, pa., af. to baptise (Schulthess Lex. 166a/b); Syr. to moisten,
immerse, dye (Brockelmann Lexicon 620a); NeoArm. (Bergsträsser Gloss. 84), and NeoSyr. to
dye (Maclean 262a); Mnd. S\BA II (Drower-M. Dictionary 388b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 235,
237) pe. to baptise, immerse, dye; af. to baptise; etpe. passive; Arb. s\bgù VIII also to be baptised
(Wehr-Cowan 502a).
pa: pt. pl. ÷y[iB]x'm]: to moisten, wet, with ÷mi Da 422. †
hitpa. (JArm., Syr.): impf. [B'f'x]yI, variant [b'f]x]yI hitpe. (Bauer-Leander BArm. 32a, 55a)
to become moist, wet Da 412.20.30 521 with ÷mi or B]. †
*dx': ddx; the same in Heb.; JArm. ad;d]xi (Dalman Wb. 358b; Sokoloff Dictionary 458 says
only ayddx (pl.) is attested); Mnd. s\ida side > preposition (Drower-M. Dictionary 339a);
EmpArm.; Pehl. dxl and txl < *tdxl (Junker Frahang 25: 37; Herzfeld Paikuli 596f;
Jean-H. Dictionnaire 242 s.v. dxII; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 959 s.v. s\d2); JArm. dx (s\ed
), dxl, dxm, also dyxe(l]) and tyxel] (Dalman Gramm. p. 232; Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000) 101
recognises only the form t/dyxl); Tg. s\eµd; Sam. tyx and d[sl (Ben H\ayyim Literary and
Oral Tradition 3/2: 13862); Syr. s\eµ<d and s\eyd at the side of, near, by (Brockelmann Lexicon
627a); Bauer-Leander BArm. 180n, 262p; the same in the cstr.: side, preposition
(Bauer-Leander BArm. 262p) dx'l] against Da 725 (Heb. dg²n<l] Da 1013, l[' 1136); Montgomery
315f); dX'mi from the side of, concerning 65. †
ad;x,] with → h} interrogative (Bauer-Leander BArm. 237n): adxh Asshur Ostracon (Donner-R.
Inschriften 233: 12, see also 2: p. 28; see further Baumgartner ZAW 45 (1927), 89 = Umwelt
76f; Rowley Aramaic of the OT 132; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 242; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary
s.v. s\d<1); Arb. was\ada to be firm, stand firmly (Montgomery 207; Wehr-Cowan 1072a;
Bauer-Leander BArm. 371); see also DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 566 s.v. dxw : hdx s\edaµ): fem.
truth: aD;x]h' really, in truth; is it true that …? Da 314. †
*ddx: the same in Heb.; ddx has been taken as a denominative vb. from → dx', and this
appears to be possible though it re-mains uncertain; JArm. pa. (Dalman Wb. 358b), and Syr. to
avert one’s gaze, turn one’s eyes to the side (Brockelmann Lexicon 621a).
*qdx: the same in Heb.; OArm., Zendjirli (Donner-R. Inschriften 215: 11, 19; 216: 4f) qdx
upright behaviour, loyalty (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 243 s.v. qdxII; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary
962 s.v. s\dq2); EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 243 s.v. qdxI; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 961 s.v. s\dq1); JArm., DSS
(Dalman Wb. 359a; Beyer Arm. Texte 674); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Literary and Oral Tradition 2:
466, 467); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 167a) :: qdz EmpArm., Pehl. (Junker Frahang 10: 6);
Palm. correct (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 72; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 963 s.v. s\dq3); Syr.
(Brockelmann Lexicon 189a), and NeoSyr. (Brockelmann Grundriss 1: 166 §59 ab); Mnd. ZDQ
to be correct, be just, be right (Drower-M. Dictionary 162a).
Der. hq;d]xi.
hq;d]x:i qdx; Heb. hq;d;x]; EmpArm., Nerab (Donner-R. Inschriften 226: 2); Tema (228 A: 15);
EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.); Nab. concession, donation (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 243;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 964); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 359b; Beyer Arm. Texte 674)
aT;q]d'x]; Sam. s\idqaó (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 10a); Syr. zedqetaµ charity (Brockelmann Lexicon
189a); CPArm. s\dq (Schulthess Lex. 166a); Mnd. zidqa also charity (Drower-M. Dictionary
165b); Bauer-Leander BArm. 236d: correct practice, charity parallel with ÷yIn”;[} ÷j'mi Da 424
(Montgomery 239f; Bentzen 36). †
*raW"x;' Heb. raW:x'; the etymology is questionable; the common base form is probably *
s\awar/s\aur :: < s\aw<ar, a qawtal formation from rwx (cf. KBL, where it is given a separate
entry); probably a primary noun, for there is no probable verbal derivation to suggest otherwise;
EmpArm., Pehl. (Junker Frahang 10: 29) s\wr (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 244 s.v. rwxII;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 965 s.v. s\wr2); and Sogdian (“I”, Benveniste Textes Sogdiens
(1940), 251, hrwx; Nyberg 2: 298, hlwx); JArm. ar;WÒx', ar;aW:x' and ar;wÒx'; DSS (Dalman Wb.
360a, 361a; Beyer Arm. Texte 675, 1061); CPArm. rwx = ar;WÒx' (Schulthess Lex. 169a); Syr.
s\awraµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 625a); Mnd. s\aura (Drower-M. Dictionary 386a); Bauer-Leander
BArm. 193m; sf. Jr;aWÒx', HreaWÒx': neck hr;aWÒx'Al[' ab;h} d'Aydi ak;nIwm]h‰' Da 57.16.29. †
hlx: —1. to lean, bend, pe.; JArm., DSS (but see Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 101; see also Dalman
Wb. 363a, al;x]; Beyer Arm. Texte 676); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 628a); and Mnd. S\LA I
(Drower-M. Dictionary 395a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 372); NeoSyr. to go down (Maclean 265
s.v. s\l<).
—2. to pray, pa.; EmpArm. ylx, EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap. 30: 26; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 245;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 967); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 363a, al;x] pa.; Beyer loc. cit.);
Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 10a); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 170b); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon
628b, pa.); NeoArm. to pray, marry (Bergsträsser Gloss. 85), and Mnd. (Drower-M. Dictionary
loc. cit.) to pray; < Akk. s\ulluÆ to pray, implore, beseech (AHw. 1110; CAD S, s.v. sulluÆ A; cf.
Zimmern 65); as a sbst. in OArm. ts\lwt prayer (Tell Fekherye 5, 9; see Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 1227 s.v. ts\lw); JArm. at;/lx], DSS (Dalman Wb. 363b; Beyer Arm. Texte 676);
CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 170a); Sam. s\eµluµtaó (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 10a); Syr. (Brockelmann
Lexicon 628a); Mnd. s\(a)luta (Drower-M. Dictionary 387b; NöldekeMand. Gramm. 1112);
NeoArm. (Bergsträsser Gloss. 85); and NeoSyr. prayer s\lutaµ (Maclean 265a s.v. s\lwt<); > Arb.
vb. s\allaµ (s\lw) to perform the salat, pray, worship (Wehr-Cowan 524a); sbst. s\alaµt (Hwb. Islam
636a); Eth., vb. s\alaya, sbst. s\aloµt (Dillmann 1262, 1263); OSArb. s\lwt (Conti Rossini 224a;
Beeston Sabaic Dictionary 143).
pa: pt. yLix'm], variant aLex'm], pl. ÷yIL'&x'm] (Bauer-Leander BArm. 233g !): to pray Da 611.Ezr 6
10 with l] for.
†
jlx: the same in Heb. —1. to split: EmpArm., EgArm. pa. (Ah\iqar 125; Jean-H. Dictionnaire
245; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 967 s.v. s\lh\1); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 363b; Beyer Arm.
Texte 676); Syr. pe. and pa. (Brockelmann Lexicon 629b s.v. I s\elah\); CPArm. pe. and pa.
(Schulthess Lex. 171a).
—2. to prosper, have success: JArm. af.; Syr. af. (Brockelmann Lexicon 629b s.v. II s\elah\);
CPArm. af. (Schulthess Lex. 171a); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 10a).
haf. pf. jl'x]h'; pt. jl'x]m', ÷yjil]x]m': to cause someone to prosper Da 330; to make progress
with a task Ezr 614, to proceed 58 (Bauer-Leander BArm. 330o), to fare well Da 629, cf. 64 Sept.
ejuodou;meno" (Charles 150f). †
*µlx: Heb. I µlx.

—a) Arb. s\alama to cut, cut off, hew, carve.
—b) pa. denominative from µlex]: JArm., pa (Dalman Wb. 363b); Syr., pa. (Brockelmann
Lexicon 630a) to provide with sculpture.
Der. µlex], from the first meaning above, see THAT 2: 556.
µlex:] µlx a; Heb. µl,x,; OArm., Tell Fekherye 12, 16; EmpArm., Pehl. (TiS 1: 1); Nerab
(Donner-R. Inschriften 225: 3, 6, 12; 226: 2); Nab., Palm., Hatra s\lm, s\lm<, s\lmt<; Palm. also
salma (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 245; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 968 s.v. s\lm1); JArm. hm;l]x'
(for JPArm. see Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 102), DSS (Dalman Wb. 364a; Beyer Arm. Texte
676); Tg. amlx; Sam.; CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 171a); Syr. s\almaµ, s\elemtaµ (Brockelmann
Lexicon 630a); Mnd. s\ilma (Drower-M. Dictionary 393b); Bauer-Leander BArm. 228c-g; the
same in the cstr. Da 319, µl,x, 35–18 (an artificial distinction, Strack Grammatik des
Biblisch-Arm.6 (1921), §8c, p. 22 :: Bauer-Leander BArm. 228f: as Heb.), Or. s\elem; det. am;l]x',
Or. s\ilmaµ, masc.: statue Da 231f.34f 31–3.5.7.10.12.14f.18, µlex] yhi/PnÒa' Da 319 facial features. †
*rypix:] Heb. rypix;, Arm. loanword (Wagner 248); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 367a; Beyer Arm.
Texte 677) ar;ypix]; Sam. rypx, fem. hrypx (Ben H\ayyim Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 595);
Syr. s\epraµyaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 635b); NeoSyr. s\upurtaµ nanny goat (Maclean 266b);
Bauer-Leander BArm. 188h: pl. cstr. yreypix] billy goat, ÷yZI[i yreypix] (Bauer-Leander BArm. 305g
!) male goats Ezr 617. †
*rpx: Heb. II *rpx; JArm. to whistle (Dalman Wb. 367a; but Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000) 102,
says it does not mean “to whistle” in JArm.); Syr. s\ebar to chatter (Brockelmann Lexicon 620b).
Der. *rP'xi.
*rP'x:i Heb. I r/Pxi and rPoxi; EmpArm., EgArm. s\npr (Ah\iqar 98, 199); Pehl. (Junker Frahang
8: 1; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 246; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 973 s.v. s\pr1); Palm. y/arpx n.
m. and fem. (Stark Personal Names 109b); JArm. rP'xi, at;r]P'xi, DSS (Dalman Wb. 367a;
Beyer Arm. Texte 677); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 635b, s\epperaµ), and CPArm. s\eppar
(Schulthess Lex. 172a, s.v. rpxII); Mnd. s\ipra (Drower-M. Dictionary 394; Nöldeke Mand.
Gramm. 119, 157); NeoSyr. s\ipra (Maclean 267a), mostly fem. :: Mnd., on which see Nöldeke
Mand. Gramm. 157; Arm. basic form *s\ippar (Schulthess Gramm. §99 :: Bauer-Leander BArm.
191b :: Brockelmann Grundriss 1: 360 :: Montgomery 231): pl. ÷yriP]xi, yreP]xi, aY:r'P]xi; fem. Da
49Q, 18, masc. 49K; Bauer-Leander BArm. 200j: bird Da 49.11.18.30. †
q: —1. corresponds to Semitic q.

—2. corresponds to Proto-Semitic hÉ, equivalent to Arb. hÉ; —a) in the oldest Arm. > q
(Brockelmann Grundriss 1: 134; Bauer-Leander BArm. 26c), → BArm. qr'a}.
—b. a) in the later dialects > > (Brockelmann Grundriss; Bauer-Leander BArm., see above) →
BArm. [r'a}; —b) or the changes are mixed (Beyer Arm. Texte 420).
—3. outside BArm. it alternates: —a) with → û assimilated and dissimilated (Brockelmann
Grundriss i: p. 239, §88b) in lfq, rfq, fyIq', hxq], *År'q, fvoq].
—b) in Mnd. sometimes with g and with û in initial position (Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 38f).
lbq: the same in Heb.; Wagner 251 suggests that this old Hebrew vb. was suppressed by jql
and was then brought back into use under the influence of Arm.
A. to instigate a legal action against, accuse, with >ly, pe.; OArm., Tell Fekherye 12 qblh (root
q-b-l, to accuse) his accuser, adver-sary, parallel with Assyrian Text beµl déÆni (AHw. 119b; CAD
D: 155b; see Abbou Assaf-Bordreuil-Millard Tell Fekherye p. 33; EmpArm., EgArm. qbl >ly to
instigate a legal action against someone, accuse someone (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm.
Pap.; Driver Arm. Docs. p. 32a; Hermopolis 2: 10; Saqqara); Samaria; Herzfeld Paikuli 628,
629; JArm. inscr., (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 248; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 979); GenAp xx:
14; JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 369b s.v. lb'q]II; Beyer Arm. Texte 677); Syr. (Brockelmann
Lexicon 640b, 3b); Mnd. (Drower-M. Dictionary 404a).
B. to receive, pa.: Akk.: qubbal (corresponding to qabbel), he received (AHw. 925b; see CAD Q
: 292a, qubbulu A, where it is explained as an Arm. loanword; git\t\u sûa mahÉéÆri … qubbal, he has
accepted the parchment of sale); EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.); Nab., Palm., Pehl.
(Junker Frahang 21: 12; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 248; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 979); JArm.
, DSS (Dalman Wb. 369b s.v. lb'q]I; Beyer Arm. Texte 677); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 173b);
Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 10a); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 641b; also to resist, beseech a god
or a judge; Mnd. (Drower-M. Dictionary 404b); NeoArm. (Bergsträsser Gloss. 67); NeoSyr.
(Maclean 269a); cf. af. to be opposite, Palm. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 248); Syr. (Brockelmann
Lexicon 642a).
pa: pf. lBeq', variant lBiq' (Bauer-Leander BArm. 111 l); impf. ÷WlB]q'ywI, ÷WlB]q'T]: to receive:
—a) rq;ywI hB;zÒbinÒW ÷n:T]m' Da 26.
—b) at;Wkl]m' (Sept., Theodotion, Vulgate; Syr. qabbel and lebak (Brockelmann Lexicon 356a,
2a); Montgomery 267; Rowley Darius the Mede 51f) 61 718. †
Der. lbeqÕ.
lbeq,Õ variant, and Or. q beµl; really a sbst. “that which is in front, in full view, opposite, the front”,
e
cf. Heb. dg²n;< so with Vogt 144a; Syr. qubaµlaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 642a no. 6); > preposition:
EmpArm., EgArm. µhlbq in front of them (Cowley Arm. Pap. 38: 6) lbql (26: 7), lbql
corresponding to, lbql hnz in agreement with (26: 23 and 27: 10); yz lbql just as, in
accordance with (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar 52, 68; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Driver Arm. Docs.
104a); see further Sardes 5: 5 (Donner-R. Inschriften 260 B: 5); lbql Asia Minor (text 263);
lbq Bauer-Meissner Pachtvertrag 5, 9; Samaria; lbq(l) (yd) Nab., Palm., JArm. inscr.
(Jean-H. Dictionnaire 249; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 981 s.v. qbl3); JArm. lbq, DSS
qobal/qobol, Arm. lbwq (Beyer Arm. Texte 678); also lybeqÕ (˜l;) (Dalman Wb. 369a; Gramm.
231: 7), sf. ylib]qil] and ylib]Wql]; Sam. lqbl (alqaóbaólaók Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 10a); CPArm.
(Schulthess Gramm. §38, la; Lex. 173a) lequbal > luqubal > luqubel; Syr. luqbal (Brockelmann
Lexicon 641a); Mnd. qbal (Drower-M. Dictionary 404a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 196);
NeoSyr. sf. lquµ(b)leh (Maclean 271b s.v. q<bl<); NeoArm. luqbel (Spitaler 128m, n; Bergsträsser
Gloss. 67); OSArb. (l)qbl (Conti Rossini 228b); basic form *qubl Brockelmann Grundriss 1:
353, A 3; Bauer-Leander BArm. 48a, 260f, with l]: lbeqÕl;, sf. Jl;b]q;l], Or. lequblaµk: preposition.
—1. for Da 231 33 51; over against 55; because of 510, hn:D] lbeqÕl; … ÷he if … then;
consequently Ezr 416; yDi ˜qÕl; just as 613.
—2. with AlK; (JArm.), see also Beyer Arm. Texte 678, not < lKo, but < ð] + l], Bauer-Leander
BArm. 262q; cf. Heb. tM'[uAlK; Koh 515; hn:D] lbeqÕAlK; (EgArm. has the same, see above, and
also yz lbkl) correspondingly Ezr 714; thereupon Da 212.24 37 (delete 8) 610; yDi ˜q;AlK; (see
above, under 1); forasmuch as, because Da 28.10.40f.45 329 415 512 64f.11.23 Ezr 414 714; although
Da 522; yDiA÷mi hn:D] ˜qÕAlK; just because 322; for this expression see now Wesselius, VT 38
(1988), 195–204.
vyDiq:' vdq; Heb. v/dq;; EmpArm., EgArm. ÷dq l[b Ah\iqar 95 (holiness? see Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 254); Nab., Palm., Hatra, JArm inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 253 s.v. vdqIII;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 995 s.v. qdsû3); GenAp passim (Fitzmyer 215); JArm., DSS
(Dalman Wb. 371a; Beyer Arm. Texte 680); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 175b); Sam. fem. det.
qdysûth (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 10a); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 649b); Mnd. qadisûa (Drower-M.
Dictionary 399a); NeoArm. qatteµsû (Spitaler 83a; Bergsträsser Gloss. 72); Bauer-Leander BArm.
192e: pl. ÷yviiyDiq,' cstr. yveyDiq:' holy, of gods ÷yviyDiq' ÷yhil;aÔ j'Wr Da 45f.15 511; sbst. meaning
angels parallel with ÷yriy[i 414, vyDiq'wÒ ry[i 410.20 (→ wÒ 2a); ÷yviyDiq' meaning Israel 721, →
yveyDiq' ÷ynI/yl][, 718.22.25 and ˜[, ˜q' µ[' 727; cf. Noth Ges. Stud. 274ff. †
*µdq: the same in Heb.; EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap. 82: 6); Pehl. (Junker Frahang
20: 2); Nab. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 251 s.v. µdqI; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 986 s.v. qdm1
); JArm. pe., pa. and af. to go before; to do in advance; to do early; to anticipate; to go to meet
(Dalman Wb. 371a); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 557); CPArm.
(Schulthess Lex. 174b); Syr., NeoSyr. (Maclean 270a); and Mnd. QDM (Drower-M. Dictionary
405a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 444).
Der. µd;qÕ, *hm;d]q', ym;d]q'.
µd;q:Õ Aµd'qÕ Da 2 10.36, Or. qed_aµm (Bauer-Leander BArm. 261g): originally sbst., front; preposition
“in front”; OArm., Tell Fekherye 15, 15 before, in front; with local significance, Zakir
(Donner-R. Inschriften 202 B: 13); Zendjirli (215: 21, 23; 217: 8, 9); Sefire (222 A: 8, 9, 9/10,
11, 12); EmpArm., with spatial and temporal significance; Nerab (226: 2); Pehl. (Junker
Frahang 25: 1; Herzfeld Paikuli; Dura); EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.;
Driver Arm. Docs.; Ah\iqar; Saqqara); Uruk 11, 14, 36, 39 qu-da-am; Asshur Ostracon
(Donner-R. Inschriften 233: 7, 9, 13?); Asshur µdwq and µwdq (Sitzungsberichte der
Preussi-schen Akademie der Wissenschaften, Berlin (1919), 1045); Samaria; Persepolis
(Herzfeld Paikuli 898); Nisa; Nab., Palm., Hatra, JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 251;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 988 s.v. qdm3), also qdwm; GenAp µdwq xix: 25; xxi: 3, local;
JArm. qdm (qodam), also µdwq, DSS (Dalman Wb. 371a; Beyer Arm. Texte 679f), and µd;q]li;
Sam. µd(w)q (Ben H\ayyim Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 557); CPArm. qwdm preposition and
conjunction, before, in front (Schulthess Lex. 174b); Syr. qedaµm, luwqdaµm (Brockelmann
Lexicon 647a, b); Mnd. qudam (Drower-M. Dictionary 406a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 194);
NeoArm. iqdum (Spitaler 120; Bergsträsser Gloss. 68); basic form *qudaµm (Bauer-Leander
BArm. 261g, h); contracted forms: Mesopotamia µq (Delaporte 105; Messina 29f); JArm. yMeq',
yMequ (Dalman Wb. 381b); CPArm. lqwm< (Schulthess Lex. 175a; Schwally Idioticon 83); Mnd.
qam, variant aqam (Drower-M. Dictionary 401a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 33, 34 hmaq(a)
before him); NeoSyr. qaµm (Maclean 270a); NeoArm. qomm (Bergsträsser Gloss. 69) < *qadm (
JArm., Syr., Mnd. and NeoSyr. hm;d]q'); Heb. µd,q,, → hmdq and *qudm; sf. ym'd;q;, variant ˜qÕ
and ˜q], ym‰;d;qÕ (Bauer-Leander BArm. 23d), Jm;d;q; Q, JyIm'd;q; K (Bauer-Leander BArm. 77o),
yhi/md;q; Da 713 yhi/md;q]W, with sf. fem. Q Hm'd;q;, K hymdq, Or. qedaµmayaµh (Bauer-Leander
BArm. 79s); Hymi/yhi/m&/ym'd;qÕA÷mi, ÷/hymed;qÕ: preposition, before.
—1. with temporal significance Da 77.
—2. with spatial significance, in front of the king Da 29.11.24f.27.36 313 43.5 513.15.17.23 613.19 Ezr 4
18; the king in front of the assembled people Da 44 Ezr 423; before God Da 611f 710.13 Ezr 719; in
the sight of Da 623, ˜qÕ rp'v] Da 332 62, see Driver Arm. Docs. 1: 1 and note.
—3. µd;qÕA÷mi before, with wr;q'[} t]a, (sc. to make way for him, Montgomery Daniel 295) Da 78;
with wl;p;nÒ Da 720; with ÷ylij} D‰; to be afraid in God’s presence (Heb. yInEp]Limi) 519 627b; on the part
of (Heb. ynEP]m)i the king Da 26.15 627a and Ezr 714; of God Da 218 524; of the aged 710. †
*hm;d]q:' µdq; Heb. *hm;d]q', *hm;d]qi; originally sbst.; OArm., Zendjirli previous situation,
earlier time (Donner-R. Inschriften 215: 9; see also 2: p. 227); sg. cstr. tmdq before (temporal)
> preposition; EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar; Behistun; Hermopolis); Pehl.
(Nyberg Avroman 3: 4; Messina 31); Herzfeld Paikuli 899; JArm inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire
252; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 991 s.v. qdmh1); GenAp xxi: 23; JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb.
371b; Beyer Arm. Texte 679); Bauer-Leander BArm. 243b, 256v; cstr. (as EgArm.) tm'd]q', Or.
qi-, earlier time; with ÷mi > preposition hn:D]Atm'd]q'A÷mi (JArm., tmdq hnz EgArm.) Da 611, and
hn:D] tm'd]Q'mi Ezr 511 adverb, formerly. †
*ym;d]q:' µdq; EmpArm., EgArm. ymdq (Driver Arm. Docs.); Nab., Palm., JArm inscr. (Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 253; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 992); JArm. ha;m;d]q' first, old, DSS ymdq
first (Beyer Arm. Texte 679; and Dalman Wb. 371b), y(a)µdq, hamdq and yM'q' (Dalman
Gramm. 100); but for JPArm. see Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 102; CPArm. qmy (Schulthess Lex.
175a); Syr. qadmaµyaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 646b); Mnd. qad-maia (Drower-M. Dictionary
399b; Nöl-deke Mand. Gramm. 191); NeoSyr. qaµmaµyaµ (Maclean 270b); Bauer-Leander BArm.
196d: pl. det. ayEm;d]q' (Bauer-Leander BArm. 204 1), fem. sg. at;yÒm‰;d]q': first Da 74 (Sept.
prw`to", Theodotion 74 prw`to"): earlier, former 78.24 (Theodotion uv e[mprosqen). †
*vdq: the same in Heb.; EmpArm., pa.: Palm., JArm inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 253;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 993); JArm., DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 680); Sam., pa. to sanctify,
declare as holy; af. to consecrate (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 10); Syr., pa. (Brockelmann Lexicon
649b); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 176a); Mnd. (Drower-M. Dictionary 405) to sanctify,
consecrate; NeoArm. qtsû itpa. (Spitaler 161; Bergsträsser Gloss. 72).
Der. vyDiq'.
µwq: the same in Heb.; Deir Alla; OArm., Zakir (Donner-R. Inschriften 202 A: 3); Zendjirli (214:
1, 2, 3, 14, 28, 30; 215: 2, 6, 8, 18); EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.
; Ah\iqar; Behistun; Hermopolis;Saqqara); Asshur Ostracon(Donner-R. Inschriften 233: 9);
Bauer-Meissner Pachtvertrag 10f; Uruk 18 impv. qu-um, 17, 42 pl. fem. qu-u-mi-ni; Samaria;
Pehl. (Junker Frahang 20: 2f; Herzfeld Paikuli 411); Nab., Palm., Hatra, JArm. inscr. (Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 254; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 997 s.v. qwm1); cuneiform
qa(a)-ma/e/u-ta-qu-um (Tallqvist Personal Names 304a; Beyer Arm. Texte 681); Syr.
(Brockelmann Lexicon 652a); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 176b); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 10a);
JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 373a; Beyer Arm. Texte 681); Mnd. QUM pe. and the forms derived
from the stem (Drower-M. Dictionary 407–408; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 248ff); NeoArm.
(Bergsträsser Gloss. 69); NeoSyr. (Maclean 268a).
pe: pf. µq;, Wmq;&; impf. µWqyÒ, ÷WmquyÒ Da 724, variant ÷WmWqyÒ, see BHK3; impv. fem. ymiWq; pt.
µaeq;, pl. ÷ymia} q‰; K, ÷ymiyÒq‰; Q (Bauer-Leander BArm. 51h-j), det. aY:m'a} q‰;.
—1. to rise Da 324 620 75, to arise (Jl,m, Wkl]m'), 239 717.24; to set about wyriv;wÒ … Wmq;& Ezr 52.
—2. to stand Da 231 (am;l]x'), 33 (lbeqÕl; am;l]x'), 710.16 (an angel before God).
—3. to endure (Wkl]m') 244b. †
pa. (Bauer-Leander BArm. 146r): inf. hm;Y:q' to set up, µy:q] to establish a statute Da 68 (see
haf. 4; Bauer-Leander BArm. 274n, 311g). †
haf. (Bauer-Leander BArm. 147v, x, y, 149o-q): pf. µyqeh}, Da 62 µyqih} w", 3rd. fem. tm'qihÔ,
variant 75 (→ hof.); 2nd. person T;m]yqeh}, 1st. person tm,yqeh}; Or. haqeµmit (Bauer-Leander BArm.
149o, p :: Birkeland 3), pl. Wmyqi&h}, sf. HmeyqihÔ, Da 31 Hmeyqia} af. (Bauer-Leander BArm. 148f,
370); impf. µyqiyÒ, µyqeh;yÒ Da 521 (16, see Bauer-Leander BArm. 149o), µyqiT]; inf. with sf.
HteWmq;h}; pt. µyqeh;m] (Bauer-Leander BArm. 147a).
—1. to set up (µle[]) Da 31–3.5.7.12.14.18.
—2. to found, subject God (Wkl]m') 244.
—3. to appoint (÷ykil]m' and the officials) Da 221, with accusative 511, with two accusatives and
B] Ezr 618, with accusative and l[' Da 414 521 62.4.
—4. to establish (the law, see pa.) Da 69.16. †
hof. (Bauer-Leander BArm. 94s, 147b :: Ginsberg 2f): Da 74 tm'yqihÕ, 75 tm'qihÕ, Or. hoqéÆmat,
variant tm'qihÔ/h} (Bauer-Leander BArm. 40n, o): to be set up Da 74f. †
Der. µy:q], µY:q'.
lfq: the same in Heb., as an Arm. loanword (Wagner 254 s.v. lf,q,; cf. Brockelmann Grundriss
1: 154; Eissfeldt Fschr. (1958), 54f).
A. ltq: Old Babylonian qataµlum to kill a sacrificial animal (AHw. 907a; CAD Q: 162); Arb.
qatala to kill (Wehr-Cowan 742b); OSArb. qtl (Conti Rossini 235a); Mnd. qtl (Drower-M.
Dictionary 417b); Eth. qatala (Dillmann 439); OArm. qtl, Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften 222;
223; 224); Zendjirli (Donner-R. Inschriften 215: 8).
B. > lfq, cf. Heb.: originally t > t\, → f; Bauer-Leander BArm. 33d; Moscati Comparative
Grammar 56 :: originally t\ > t (Friedrich 10b; for further bibliography on both cf.
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1006); EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar; Behistun
, corresponding to Akk. *daµku, to kill, AHw. 152a; CAD D: 35); Nerab 11 lfk (Donner-R.
Inschriften 225); Pehl. (Junker Frahang 22: 4); Hatra, JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 257;
CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 178a); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 10b); Syr., NeoSyr. (Maclean
276b); NeoArm. (Bergsträsser Gloss. 73); Mnd. qt\l (Drower-M. Dictionary 83b; Nöldeke
Mand. Gramm. 39); basic form *qtl.
pe: pf., see pa.; pt. lfeq;, pf. passive (Bauer-Leander BArm. 93o) lyfiq], 3rd. fem. tl'yfiq]: to
kill Da 519, passive 530 711. †
hitpe: inf. hl;f;q]t]hi; pt. pl. ÷ylif]q't]mi: to be killed Da 213a.b. †
pa: pf. lFiq', Or. qet\ol and qet\el (pe., Bauer-Leander BArm. 102u, v); inf. hl;F;q': to kill Da 2
14 322.
†
hitpa: pt. pl. ÷yliF]q't]mi (Bauer-Leander BArm. 177, 293o) Da 213: to be killed. †
*rfq: Heb. II rfq and I rxq; to tie, bind, JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 376a s.v. rfqII; Beyer
Arm. Texte 683b); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 178b); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Literary and Oral
Tradition 2: 583f); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 661b); NeoSyr. (Maclean 277a); and NeoArm.
(Bergsträsser Gloss. 73); NeoSyr. also rtk and rtq (Maclean 277a); Mnd. GT\R to bind, make
secure (Drower-M. Dictionary 88a s.v. GT\R 1; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 225); basic form *qz\r
(Bauer-Leander BArm. 33d).
Der. rf'q].
rf'q:] rf'q]: EmpArm., Uruk 1, 27 ki-t\a-ri knot (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 257; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 1007); JArm. ar;f]qi knot, joint (Dalman Wb. 376a); NeoSyr. qitraµ (Maclean 287b
s.v. qtr<); NeoArm. qut\t\ora bond (Bergsträsser Gloss. 73); Syr. qet\raµ also amulet, and qet\artaµ
also joint (Brockelmann Lexicon 662b); Mnd. gut\ra = git\ra bond, knot, amulet (Drower-M.
Dictionary 75b, 89b); Akk. kis\ru knot, accumulation, joint (AHw. 488b; CAD K: 436); see
Bauer-Leander BArm. 183e: pl. ÷yrif]qi, cstr. yref]qi, masc.: knot.
—1. joint Da 56, Hxer]j' yref]qi the joints of his hips; NeoSyr. qit\raµ dh\oµrs\aµ back (Maclean
277a); Akk. kis\ir es\ens\eµru vertebra (AHw. 488b s.v. 3; cf. CAD K: 439b, s.v. kis\ru 4a, end of
paragraph).
—2. difficult task (Syr., see Payne-Smith 3591); cf. further Montgomery 259, 261 :: Plöger
KAT xviii: p. 80, who translates: and the muscles of his hips weakened; cf. NRSV: his limbs
gave way; REB: the strength went from his legs :: ? a magical knot (Charles 130; Beek
Danielbuch (1935), 11f) Da 512 with hrv pa. pt., 16 with rvp pe. inf. †
fyIq:' Heb. ÅyIq' once Jb 8 cj. fyIq' < Arm. (Wagner 265); OArm., Zendjirli kys\ (Donner-R.
14,
Inschriften 216: 19; Brockelmann Grundriss 1: 239); JArm. inscr. qyt\ (Jean-H. Dictionnaire
262 s.v. ÅqI; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1020 s.v. qs\I); JArm., DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 683)
af;yÒq', af;yqe (Dalman Wb. 376b); CPArm. qeµt\aµ (Schulthess Lex. 179a); Syr. qayt\aµ
(Brockelmann Lexicon 664a); Mnd. gait\a, variant git\a (Drower-M. Dictionary 76a; Nöldeke
Mand. Gramm. 38) summer; see Bauer-Leander BArm. 182z: summer: fyIq' yreD]a' Da 235. †
µy:q,] Or. qiyaµm (Bauer-Leander BArm. 38a; Tg.; Drower-M. Dictionary 165; and Sam.): µwq;
EmpArm., EgArm. (Saqqara; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1008 s.v. qym1 contract);
Bauer-Meissner Pachtvertrag 13, contract (see Koopmans 1: 98) :: Jean-H. Dictionnaire s.v.
µwqI; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 997 s.v. qwm1 p. 998, active participle); JArm., DSS
(Dalman Wb. 377a, contract; Beyer Arm. Texte 682); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 176b); Sam.
qy<m (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 10b); Syr. qyaµmaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 653a no. 5); Bauer-Leander
BArm. 187d; the same in the cstr.; ? Da 68 (Bauer-Leander BArm. 311f, g :: Montgomery 273):
statute Da 68.16. †
µY:q:' µwq pa.; EmpArm.; Nab. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 257 s.v. µyq ; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
I
Dictionary 1008 s.v. qym2); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 376b; Beyer Arm. Texte 682); CPArm.
(Schulthess Lex. 177a); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 654a); Mnd. qaiam(a) (Drower-M.
Dictionary 400a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 120); NeoSyr. (Maclean 278a); NeoArm. (Spitaler
Gloss. 91b); Bauer-Leander BArm. 191c, fem. hm;Y:q': enduring, ˜q' Jl; Jt;Wkl]m' your kingdom
will remain as yours Da 423; as a divine epithet hY:j' ah;l;aÔ ÷ymil][‰;l] µY:q'wÒ the living God,
enduring for ever 627 (JArm., Sam.; Montgomery 279). †
srtyq, s/rt]yq' Da 3 5 Q (in variant also K), Q srot]q'; Krauss 1: 193; 2: 573; K srot]yqi or
srot;yqi or srit;yqi; JArm. s/rt]qi/s/rT]q' (Dalman Wb. 394b); CPArm. artyq kiqavra
(Schulthess Lex. 186b); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 705a); and NeoSyr. qéÆtaµraµ (Maclean 278b);
Greek kivqari", Sept., Theodotion kiqavra (Pauly-Wissow (Kl.) 3: 1581) zither; (Kolari 76ff;
Ellenbogen 148; Grelot VT 29 (1979), 28–30; cf. BHH 647 s.v. harp): zither Da 35.7.10.15; see
now Coxon, Transactions of Glasgow University Oriental Society 25 (1973–74), 30–31. †
lq;: Heb. l/q; Deir Alla; OArm., Breµdsch, Barhadad (Donner-R. Inschriften 201: 4–5); Sefire
rnk lq (222 A: 29); EmpArm., EgArm. (Ah\iqar 107); Pehl. (Junker Frahang 10: 24); Palm.
(Jean-H. Dictionnaire 258; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1010 s.v. ql1); JArm., DSS (Dalman
Wb. 377b, al;q;; Beyer Arm. Texte 683); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 176b s.v. lwq); Sam. qaµl (
Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 10a); Syr. qaµlaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 651b); Mnd. qala (Drower-M.
Dictionary 400b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 108); NeoSyr. qalaµ (Maclean 279a); Bauer-Leander
BArm. 179h: the same in the cstr.; masc.
—1. voice aY:m'v]A÷mi lq; Da 428, the voice of the king byxi[} lq; 621.
—2. sound aY:L'mi lq; 711, the sound of a musical instrument 35.7.10.15. †
hnq; the same in Heb., hnq; see HAL 1038; HALOT 1111, where the separation of I hnq “to
acquire, buy” from II hnq “to create” is dispensed with (as distinct from KBL); and this
includes the exceptional and uncertain instance of this vb. at Hatra (see Donner-R. Inschriften
3: 41b, referring to text 244: 3); so also in Arm. it appears that only I hnq was in use; on this
see the instances mentioned in HAL (HALOT) loc. cit.; EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.;
Ah\iqar; Saqqara); Palm., Hatra, JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 260 s.v. ynqII;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1015 s.v. qny1); Palm., Hatra (Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary
1015); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 382b, an:q]II; Beyer Arm. Texte 684); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex.
181a s.v. anqII); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 580); Syr. (Brockelmann
Lexicon 674b); Mnd. QNA I (Drower-M. Dictionary 413b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 258);
NeoSyr. sbst. qinyaµnaµ (see Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 102; Maclean 282a), prop-erty; EmpArm.,
EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 260;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1017); anqm Old Arm., Sefire property, posses-sion (Donner-R.
Inschriften 222 B: 27; see Jean-H. Dictionnaire 165; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 680).
pe: impf. anEq]Ti: to buy an animal, food and drink for sacrifice) Ezr 717. †
hxq: Heb. I hxq; EmpArm., Uruk 17 adj. fem. det. ka-s\a-ta-<? incomplete, deficient, faulty
(Jean-H. Dictionnaire 262 s.v. ÅqII; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1021 s.v. qs\3), :: sbst. tx;q]
(Landsberger AfO 12 (1937–39), 256); Sam. to cut off; JArm. to break off, such as breaking off
bread (Dalman Wb. 387a); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 182b); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 687a),
and NeoSyr. to break bread (Maclean 283 s.v. qs\<); → Åxq.
Der. *tx;q].
¹xq: Heb. I ¹xq; Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 687a); and Mnd. GS\P (Drower-Macuch Dictionary
96; see JRAS (1938), 3, 525) to be angry.
pe. pf. ¹x'q]: to get furious Da 212. †
Der. ¹x'q].
¹x'q:] ¹xq: Heb. I ¹x,q, (Rowley The Aramaic of the OT 130); EmpArm., EgArm. ¹xk anger (A
h\iqar 101; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 126; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 532); Syr., adj. qes\éÆpaµ sad
(Brockelmann Lexicon 687b), qes\aµpaµ sadness; Bauer-Leander BArm. 183e: wrath of God Ezr 7
23.
†
Åxq:the same in Heb.; JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 387b; Beyer Arm. Texte 685); Syr., pe. and pa.
to cut away, cut down (Brockelmann Lexicon 686 a, b); Sam. (Memar Marqah (ed. MacDonald)
109); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 182b), and Syr. to decide (Brockelmann Lexicon 686a); Mnd.
QS\S\ (Drower-M. Dictionary 414b) to cut off; NeoArm. (Bergsträsser Gloss. 72).
pa. impv. WxXiq': to cut off Da 411. †
*tx;q,] Or. qas\at: hxq; the same in Heb.; < Arm. (Wagner 268, 269); EmpArm., EgArm.
(Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; cf. ÷m and txq ÷m txq “a part of”; Hermopolis 2:
7; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 262; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1023 s.v. qs\t1); JArm. (but see
Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 102); DSS (Dalman Wb. 388a; Beyer Arm. Texte 684) part; an
associated sbst. in Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 687a); NeoSyr. bread, piece of bread, the host
(Maclean 284a); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 182b); Sam., pl. qaós\s\ot from the sg. qis\s\aó (Ben
H\ayyim Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 463); Bauer-Leander BArm. 237f, h: the same in the
cstr.; fem.
—1. end ÷yjir]y/" ÷ymi/y tx;q]li (→ l] s.v. 2) Da 426.31.
—2. with ÷mi (EgArm. txq ÷m) > Heb. and MHeb. tx;q]mi; JArm. atxqm (Dalman Wb. 250b):
part, with gen. … at;Wkl]m' tx;q]A÷mi HN"miW part of the kingdom … and a part, meaning the
kingdom shall be partly strong and partly brittle (NRSV, REB) Da 242. †
arq: the same in Heb.; vb. alternates from a˜l > (as in EmpArm.) h˜l, y˜l (Bauer-Leander
BArm. 151a, 152e; cf. Brockelmann Grundriss 1: 594); OArm., Zendjirli qrny, Hadad
(Donner-R. Inschriften 214: 13); EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar; Saqqara);
Asshur Ostracon (Donner-R. Inschriften 233: 12); Nisa; Pehl. (Junker Frahang 23: 5, klytwn;
Nyberg Avroman 3: 2; Herzfeld Paikuli 543, klytn); Nab., Palm., Hatra, JArm. inscr. (Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 263; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1025 s.v. qr<1); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb.
388a; Beyer Arm. Texte 687); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 183a); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 10b);
Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 689b); Mnd. QRA (Drower-M. Dictionary 414b; Nöldeke Mand.
Gramm. 257ff); NeoArm. (Bergsträsser Gloss. 70).
pe. pf. passive yriqÔ (Bauer-Leander BArm. 156u); impf. hreq]yI, areq]a,, Or. <iqre
(Bauer-Leander BArm. 152e), ÷/rq]yI; inf. areq]mi; pt. areq;.
—1. to shout Da 34 411 57.
—2. to read 57f.15f.17, passive Ezr 418.23. †
hitpe. impf. yreq]t]yI (Bauer-Leander BArm. 158k, 171d; Leander OLZ 33 (1930), 774): to be
called Da 512. †
brq: the same in Heb.; to draw near, approach; OArm., Zendjirli, Barrekub (Donner-R.
Inschriften 219: 2) fragmentary text, meaning —a) qrbn as a vb., we have sacrificed (Degen
Altaram. Gramm. §57a, p. 70); or by contrast —b) qrbn as a sbst., offerings (Donner-R.
Inschriften 2: 237; cf. Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1031); EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm.
Pap.; Ah\iqar; Driver Arm. Docs.); Tema (Donner-R. Inschriften 229: 1); Nab., Palm., Hatra
(Degen-Röllig-Müller Neue Ephemeris 3 (1978): 89, no. 292: 4); Nimrud ivory
(Degen-Röllig-Müller Neue Ephemeris 2 (1974): 50; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 264;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1028); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 388b; Beyer Arm. Texte 685),
and Sam. br'q] and breq] (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 10b); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 183b); Syr.
(Brockelmann Lexicon 691b); Mnd. qereb (Drower-M. Dictionary 415b; Nöldeke Mand.
Gramm. 219); NeoArm. (Bergsträsser Gloss. 71); NeoSyr. (Maclean 284a and b); meaning to
offer in Zendjirli; Tema; EgArm., Nab., Palm., Hatra brq = e[dwken (Donner-R. Inschriften
257: 2); pa. in JArm., CPArm. and Syr.; af. in JArm.; haf. in EgArm. (Driver Arm. Docs.).
pe. pf. breq], 1st. sg. tber]qi, pl. Da 38 Wbri&q], 613 variant is better instead of Wbyri&q], Or. qe
rabuµ; inf. sf. Hber]q]mi, Or. miqirbeµh (Bauer-Leander BArm. 45j): to approach, abs. Da 38 613,
with l] of place 326 621, with l[' of the person 716. †
pa: impf. breq;T] (Bauer-Leander BArm. 130h): to offer (→ haf.) Ezr 717. †
haf: pf. Wbri&q]h', sf. yhiWb&r]q]h'; pt. pl. ÷ybir]q]h'm]: to bring near, allow to enter (Driver Arm.
Docs.), with µd;qÕ Da 713 (see pa. Bauer-Leander BArm. 274n; EgArm., Palm.
(Ingholt-Seyrig-Starcky Recueil 141 161f) Ezr 610.17. †
Der. br;q].
br;q:] brq; the same in Heb.; Arm. loanword (Wagner 270); cf. Bauer-Leander BArm. 187e. In
Arm. br;q] may be taken as a loanword from Akk. qaraµbu (Neo-Assyrian), so Zimmern;
Bauer-Leander BArm. 187e; Wagner 270/1; Bauer-Leander Heb. 470 1a; KBL 1120b :: taking
Akk. qaraµbu as a loanword from Arm. (AHw. 901b; CAD Q 125b; Kaufman 30). EmpArm.,
Behistun, corresponding in the Akk. section to s\aµltu (AHw. 1079a; CADŠ: 86, s\altu, quarrel,
battle) except for 2 and 10, where the corresponding word is taµhÉaµzu (AHw. 1301a); see Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 265; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1030 s.v. qrb3; JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb.
388b: at;b]r;B]r;q' (!, see Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 102); Beyer Arm. Texte 686); CPArm.
(Schulthess Lex. 184a); Syr. qeraµbaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 691b); Mnd. qraba (Drower-M.
Dictionary 415a); denominative, to wage war; Syr., pe. and af.; Mnd. pe. qariba (Drower-M.
Dictionary 402b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 431): war, conflict; for the semantic questions, cf.
the etymology of Heb. hm;j;l]mi from I µjl): war, µ[i br;q] db'[} to make war with Da 721, cf.
Behistun 12 (Arm.) >bd qrb< >m (Cowley Arm. Pap. p. 252); Babylonian s\altum epeµsûu (Cowley
Arm. Pap. p. 255), Heb. hc;[; tae hm;j;l]mi Gn 142. †
hy:r]qi Ezr 410, ay:r]qi 415; Heb. hy:r]qi; OArm., hyrq Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften 222 B: 36; 224:
12); EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Saqqara); Bauer-Meissner Pachtvertrag 3, and
Palm. hyrq; Nisa (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 266; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1033); JArm.,
DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 686) at;yÒr]qi (Dalman Wb. 390b), hy:r]qi (Jastrow 1419b); Sam. qaryaµ (
Ben H\ayyim Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 545); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 183b s.v. qr< II);
Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 695b), and NeoArm. qeréÆt\aµ (Bergsträsser Gloss. 70 s.v. qry);
Bauer-Leander BArm. 182b: det. at;yÒr]qi fem. village, town meaning µl,v]WryÒ Ezr 412f.15f.19.21;
as pl. collective (Bauer-Leander BArm. 313g reads hy:r]qu; Syr.; Rudolph; BHS Hy"r]quB] (so auch
BHK3) :: Bewer Ezra 52 reads pl. at;y:r]qi) Ezr 410. On this word see now Sokoloff, DSD 7
(2000), 102, who refers to Goldenberg, Biblica 77 (1996) 79–83. †
÷r,q:, the same in Heb.; Arm., Palm. corner (as Akk., JArm., Syr., Mnd., NeoArm.; Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 266; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1034); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 391a, an:r]q'
; Beyer Arm. Texte 687); CPArm. Schulthess Lex. 185a); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 697a);
Mnd. horn, lock of hair (Drower-M. Dictionary 403a); NeoSyr. qanaµ and qarna (Maclean 286a
s.v. qrn<); NeoArm. qornta (Bergsträsser Gloss. 71); Bauer-Leander BArm. 182x: det. an:r]q',
dual Da 77 ÷yIn"r]q' (of more than one; Or. qarnin, Bauer-Leander BArm. 200b, 306 l and m); pl.
det. aY:n"r]q', fem. (as everywhere): horn.
—1. of an animal Da 77f.11.20 (for ÷Kedi an:r]q' rd. ÷yIn”'r]q,' see Montgomery; BHS) .21.24.
—2. musical instrument (Syr., CPArm., Mnd., NeoSyr.; Sept. savlpigx corresponding to Heb.
rp'/v) Da 35.7.10.15, see Grelot VT 29 (1979), 24ff. †
*Årq: the same in Heb.; JArm. to pinch (Dalman Wb. 392a; see now Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000),
103: rare in JArm., only in JBabArm.); Syr. to prick, hurt (Brockelmann Lexicon 699b);
NeoArm., pa. to divide dough into loaves of bread (Bergsträsser Gloss. 71); NeoSyr. to stretch
(Maclean 286a and b); Syr. qrs\ (Brockelmann Lexicon 699b), and Mnd. krs\ to give a sign
(Drower-M. Dictionary 224a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 39, to wink at; Sokoloff loc. cit.
mentions also Mnd. grs\ to sting, Drower-M. Dictionary 97); cf. Schulthess Homonyme 40, and
Syr. qrt\ to gnaw off (Brockelmann Lexicon 694b); Arb. q-r-t\ to cut into small pieces, chop,
mince (Wehr-Cowan 757b); Akk. karaµs\u to pinch off; clay, break off wood (AHw. 447b; CAD
K: 209), which is perhaps etymologically related; JArm. Åyriq] and aT;x]yriq] the early morning,
morning twilight, really daybreak, the first break of sunlight (Dalman Wb. 390b; see now
Sokoloff loc. cit.); CPArm. atxyrq (Schulthess Lex. 185a; see also Sokoloff loc. cit.); Syr.
sbst. qars\uµtaµ frost, qars\aµ/éÆnaµ hoarfrost (Brockelmann Lexicon 699b); denominative vb., JArm.
År'q] to do in the morning, start off early (Dalman Wb. 392a); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 10a),
and CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 185a): cf. Heb. Årq and qrq; qrq; Deir Alla; OArm., Sefire
(Donner-R. Inschriften 224: 4, 19) to flee; for OArm. qrq see Sokoloff loc. cit.; EmpArm.,
Asshur Ostracon (233: 9, 13, 16, 17, 18) to flee (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 266 :: Donner-R.
Inschriften 233 to accuse); EgArm., Behistun 30 (corresponding to Akk. hÉalaµqu); Driver Arm.
Docs. 3: 5; Saqqara to flee), Pehl. (JunkerFrahang20: 12, >lykwn); JArm.inscr. → qr[ (Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 222; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1035 s.v. qrq1).
Der. År'q].
År'q:] Årq; Akk. kars\u something pinched off > accusation; pl. aµkil kars\i accuser (AHw. 450b,
s.v. 1b; CAD K: 222, s.v. kars\u, calumny, unfounded accusation); cf. also k/gers\u (AHw. 468a;
CAD K: 411, s.v. kirs\u, pinched off, unformed matter, like clay or dough); EmpArm., EgArm.
Årk accusa-tion; Carpentras (Donner-R. Inschriften 269: 2): trma al ya yxrkw she has not
uttered any accusation against anyone at all; JArm. ax;r]q'/qi/Wq piece (Dalman Wb. 392a; for
further details see Sokoloff DSD 7, (2000), 103); Syr. qars\aµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 17a, s.v.
<ekal 6; see Sokoloff loc. cit., also for Mnd.); NeoSyr. pt., accuser (Maclean 286b);
Bauer-Leander BArm. 182x: pl. sf. yhi/xr]q' (Or. qi-, Bauer-Leander BArm. 30z), ÷/hyxer]q': piece
: yxer]q' lk'a}, with sf. and genitive (on the syntax see Bauer-Leander BArm. 314j) to take legal
proceedings against someone, accuse; loanword from Akk. kars\i akaµlu to accuse (Old
Babylonian (Mari); see AHw. 450b; CAD K: 222b; cf. also Kaufman 63); at El-Amarna akaµlu
(once qabuµ) with kars\i (El-Amarna Letter 1447); n.m. Kars\i (Jean, Studia Mariana (1950),
84b); so also Ug. <kl parallel with qrs\ (Gordon Textbook 75:i:11); JArm. ÷yxir]qu/ax;r]qu lk'a} to
accuse (Dalman Wb. 392a); Syr. <ekal qars\aµ to accuse, complain against (Brockelmann Lexicon
17a, s.v. <kl 6); Arb. <akala lah\mahu to disparage, decry (Qor<aµn Sura 49: 12); cf. Latin rodere
, English to backbite; to accuse Da 38 625 (for 38 Sept. katamarturhvsante", Theodotion
diabalovnta"; for 625 Sept. and Theodotion dievbalon; cf. Marti Daniel 21; Montgomery Daniel
204f, Plöger KAT xviii: 57, 60, to denounce). †
*fvq: the same in Heb.; EmpArm., EgArm. haf. (Cowley Arm. Pap.), and Asoka Inscription
(Donner-R. Inschriften 279: 1); Palm. pa. to have success, be legitimate; haf. to treat correctly
(Jean-H. Dictionnaire 266; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1038 s.v. qsût\1); JArm. to trim, fit up
(Dalman Wb. 393b); fk af. to behave well (Dalman Wb. 210b); NeoSyr. to justify; Mnd. KST\
(Drower-M. Dictionary 224a) to be true, be upright; JArm., DSS pa. fvq to fit out (Beyer Arm.
Texte 688); JArm., DSS fyViq' truthful (Dalman Wb. 394a; Beyer loc. cit.; see further Sokoloff,
DSD 7 (2000), 103); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 185b); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Literary and Oral
Tradition 2: 571); NeoSyr. true (Rosenthal Arm. Forsch. 245).
Der. fvoq].
fvoq:] fvq: Heb. f]v]qo truth; EmpArm.; Palm. afq justice, truth, privilege; also afsq (Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 267 s.v. fqII; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1038 s.v. qsût\2); JArm. f/vq], det.
af;v]qu, DSS (Dalman Wb. 393b; Beyer Arm. Texte 687; see further Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000),
103); CPArm. afq and atwq truth (Schulthess Lex. 185b); Sam. qasûta (Ben H\ayyim Literary
and Oral Tradition 2: 571); Syr. qusûtaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 704a); Mnd. kusût\a (Drower-M.
Dictionary 209b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 39); > Arb. qst\ (Fraenkel 206); Bauer-Leander BArm.
184n, 224j: truth Da 434 fvoq] yhi/db;[} µ' parallel with ÷yDi; fvoq]A÷mi (+ yDi) Da 247 is it true? >
adverb, in very truth (cf. ÷m 6 to express the norm, also in accordance with, as in Palm., JArm.,
CPArm.). †
srot]q:' → srot]yqi.
r: —1. within and apart from Arm. r interchanges with l, in År'j}, and also with ÷ in lg¾r].
—2. it is assimilated in rK'K'.
*har: the same in Heb.; rare in Arm. (Brockelmann Grundriss 1: 3241); it is suppressed by →
hzj and amj; JArm. am;j} (Dalman Wb. 151a; see now Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 103); CPArm.
h\m< (Schulthess Lex. 65b); Syr. h\emaµ< (Brockelmann Lexicon 239 s.v. h\m< II); NeoArm. h\my
(Bergsträsser Gloss. 37).
Der. Wra}, wre.
vare: Heb. varo; Deir Alla; OArm., Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften 224: 11) r<sû; EmpArm.,
EgArm. r(<)sû (Leander 22e !; see Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Behistun, for Akk.
qaqqadu); Samaria 1: 1 (D. M. Gropp The Samaria Papyri from WaÆdi ed-DaÆliyeh (Harvard
University, 1986); rysû Xanthos 136: 15, see Fouilles de Xanthos, vol. 6 (Paris, 1979); Pehl.
(Herzfeld Paikuli 926, r<sû and l>ysû; Junker Frahang 10: 7, l>ysû); Nab. r</ysû; Palm. adj. ayyar
(Cantineau, Syria 17 (1936), 353: 6); JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 269;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1042 s.v. r<sû1); JArm., DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 689), av;are and
av;yre (Dalman Wb. 395b and 403b; see further Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 103); Sam. yr (Ben
H\ayyim Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 589); CPArm. ar, yr (Schulthess Lex. 186a); Mnd. réÆsû
(Drower-M. Dictionary 434a); NeoArm. raisûa (Bergsträsser Gloss. 77); NeoSyr. risûaµ (Maclean
296a s.v. rsû<); basic form ra<sû > *ri<sû > vare (Bauer-Leander BArm. 60f and 182y; 29x; §59e;
also Leander 72c) :: < *ri<sû (Friedrich, Orientalia 12: 18f), cf. Greek rJh" (Sept. for Ps 118153);
the same in the cstr.: det. av;are Da 238; sf. yviare, Jv;are, Hv'are 720 (variant Hv;are,
Bauer-Leander BArm. 79s), ÷/hv]are 327 (variant ÷/hyveare), pl. ÷yviare, sf. µhoyvear; Ezr 510
(Bauer-Leander BArm. 75f, 247f, variant ãre; Sokoloff loc. cit. notes that this form is a
Hebraism), masc.
—1. head: —a) of a µlex] Da 232.
—b) Nebuchadnezzar as the head 238.
—c) vare r['c] hair of the head 327 79.
—d) an animal’s head 76.20.
—e) vare ywEzÒj, (apart from 715 with bK'v]miAl[') Da 228 42.7.10 71.15 (Da 228 42 71 parallel with
µl,je).
—f) metaphorical, µhoyvear;B] at the head of those building the temple Ezr 510 (? rd. sg.,
Rudolph Esra und Nehemia 50; and Gunneweg KAT xix/ 1: 99).
—2. ÷yLimi vare Da 71 (omitted in Theodo-tion and ZüBi; also NRSV (see margin)) beginning
of the words (Montgomery 283f; REB and NEB: and here his account begins, cf. atwklm ar
beginning of the kingdom, Cowley Arm. Pap. 6: 1; cf. Vogt 153a; Bentzen 48; Lebram 85) ::
others, who understand it to mean the main content (summa rerum, cf. Gesenius Thes. 1251a;
Plöger KAT xviii: 101, 103); cf. Heb. Ps 119160.13917 òyr,/òr]b‰;D] varo Sept. Ps 118160 ajrch;
tw`n lovgwn, or complete instructions. †
br': the same in Heb., much; Arm. great; OArm., Tell Fekherye 6 great, mr’ rb corresponding to
Akk. beµli rabéÆ; Sefire mlk rb (Donner-R. Inschriften 222 B: 7); pl. sf. rbwh his grandees (222:
39, 40; 223 B: 3 and C 15); EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar
; Behistun 45, for Akk. rabuÆ); Uruk 36 (Akk. rabeÆ); Pehl. (Junker Frahang 12: 3, lb’; Herzfeld
Paikuli 916/7, rb’/lb’; Sogdian (Gauthier-Benveniste 2: 231); Nab., Palm., Hatra, JArm. inscr.
(Jean-H. Dictionnaire 270; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1045 s.v. rb2); JArm., DSS (Beyer
Arm. Texte 289); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 187b); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 10b); Syr.
(Brockelmann Lexicon 706a); Mnd. (Drower-M. Dictionary 417a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm.
184f); NeoArm. (Bergsträsser Gloss. 74); NeoSyr.; Bauer-Leander BArm. 220a: det. aB;r', fem.
at;B]r'; pl. masc. ÷ybir]b]r', fem. ÷b;r]b]r', at;b;r]b]r' (Brockelmann Grundriss 1: 439f); cf. also
OArm., pl. masc. Zendjirli (Barrekub 1: 10, 13 = Donner-R. Inschriften 216); Sefire (223 A: 7);
EmpArm. pl. masc., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap. 31: 9; Uruk 11, for Akk. rab rabeÆ); Palm. pl.
fem. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 274); JArm., DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 690); Sam.; CPArm.
(Schulthess Lex. 187b); rarely Syr. raurebeµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 706a; Nöldeke Syr. Gramm.
§146); Mnd. rurbia (Drower-M. Dictionary 431b); NeoArm.; → ÷ynIb;r]b]r'.
—1. great Da 231.35 333 73.7.17; at;B]r' lb,B; 427; br' µj,l] a great, splendid banquet 51; aB;r' aM;y"
72 the Great Sea, cf. Heb. l/dG:h' µY:h' the Mediterranean Ocean; br' Jl,m, Da 210 Ezr 511;
aB;r' rP'n"s]a; 410; br' Hl;aÔ Da 245; tyBe aB;r' ah;l;aÔ the temple in Jerusalem Ezr 58; lq;
at;b;r]b]r' aY:L'mi Da 711, Sept., Theodotion fwnh; tw`n lovgwn tw`n megavlwn; lLem'm] µPu ÷b;r]b]r'
78.20 (Bauer-Leander BArm. 319d), Sept., Theodotion stovma lalou`n megavla, a mouth
speaking greatness; with a positive meaning, greatly, grandly (ZüBi, Lebram 85/6) :: or with a
negative meaning, insolently (Gesenius Thes. 1255a; Bauer-Leander BArm. 319d; KBL; TOB;
ZüBi Da 720; Plöger KAT xviii: 104, speaking boastfully, bragging; cf. 1 Macc 114: kai;
ejlavlhsen uJperhfanivan megavlhn); JArm., DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 690 no. 7, blasphemously).
—2. with genitive pl., to designate the holder of an office (cf. Heb. II br'; rc' I(A)/3; also rc' II(
B)/3 (HAL 1259b and 1260a; HALOT 1351b and 1352a; see also Jean-H. Dictionnaire 271, brI
s.v. 4; and 272 s.v. hbr): chief of …, supervisor of …: aY:j'B;f' br' Da 214, aY:m'fur]j' br' 46,
÷ymifuA 511, ÷ynIgÒsiAbr' 248. †
*bbr: the same in Heb. I bbr to be numerous; Arm. to be (become) great; EmpArm., Nab.,
Deir >Alla (Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1051); JArm. pe>al (Dalman Wb. 396a, rather
itpalpal; see Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 103); Sam. also hbr (Ben H\ayyim Literary and Oral
Tradition 2: 592); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 706a); pa>el Sam.; palp. JArm., DSS (Beyer
Arm. Texte 691); Syr., also rwrb (Nöldeke Syr. Gramm. §180.7; §27; Brockelmann Lexicon
707a); Mnd. RWRB (Drower-M. Dictionary 431b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 130); western
variant of hbr.
Der. br', */Bri, * ÷ynIb;r]b]r' .
hbr: Heb. I hbr to become numerous; Arm. to become great, grow tall; EmpArm. (Cowley
Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar; cf. Leander §40d, f; Ah\iqar 18 to become adult; Cowley Arm. Pap. to
increase); Nab. (Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1053); Palm. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 272), and
mrbyn educator, teacher (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 167; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 690); JArm.
, DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 691); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 188a); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss.
10b); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 707b); Mnd. RBA (Drower-M. Dictionary 422a; Nöldeke
Mand. Gramm. 260); Neosyr. (Maclean 288b); NeoArm. (Bergsträsser Gloss. 74); western
variants, 1. → bbr; 2. bry; CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 86b); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 308b);
NeoArm. (Bergsträsser Gloss. 74; Spitaler Gloss. 92a).
pe: pf. 3rd. masc. hb;r], 3rd. fem. tb;r] (variant tb'r], → hwh), 2nd. masc. tyb'r], K t;yÒb'r]
Da 419 (Q, poorly, tb'r]; Bauer-Leander BArm. 161a :: Torrey Notes 271): to become great,
grow up, of a tree Da 48.17, of the king 419; to become long, of the hair and the nails 430. †
pa: pf. yBir' to make great, make high Da 248, Sept., Theodotion megalu;nw; the same as
Luke 146; cf. CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 188a). †
Der. Wbr].
/Bri: bbr; the same in Heb., < Arm. (Wag-ner 275); EmpArm., Sogdian (Gauthier-Benveniste 2:
232) rybw and similar; Palm. wbr (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 272; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary
1052 s.v. rbw3); JArm., DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 691); CPArm. rbw, pl. rbwn (Schulthess Lex.
188a); Sam. hbbr, pl. rbwÕn (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 10b); Syr. rebbuµ, pl. rebbewaµtaµ
(Brockelmann Lexicon 707a); NeoSyr. réÆbuµ, pl. réÆbwaµn (Maclean 288b); Mnd. ruban
(Drower-M. Dictionary 428a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 190); > Arb. ribbéÆyuµn (Qur<aµn (ed.
Flügel) Sura 3: 140; R. Paret Der Koran, Kommentar and Kon-kordanz (Stuttgart, 1971), 82);
Canaanite loanword, Bauer-Leander BArm. 196e :: Rosenthal Arm. Forsch. 513; the same in the
cstr., pl. ÷w:b]ri, Q ÷b;b]ri (Heb. !), K ÷w:B]ri or ÷w:b]r' (Bauer-Leander BArm. 251q :: Ruzûicðka 108):
a great quantity, ten thousand: ÷w:b]ri /Bri (Bauer-Leander BArm. 251r, 312i) many, ten
thousand Da 710. †
Wbr]: hbr: EmpArm.; ? Hatra 16: 1 (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 272); “Waw” rbw(n) majesty,
highness, lordship, see J. Naveh and S. Shaked, Amulets and Magic Bowls (Leiden, 1985), 6, 8;
cf. Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1052); JArm., DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 691); Sam. (Ben
H\ayyim Gloss. 10b); JArm., with the same meaning at;WBr' (bbr) (Dalman. Wb. 396b);
CPArm. rbw (Schulthess Lex. 187b); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 706b); Mnd. rabuta
(Drower-M. Dictionary 417b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 10); Bauer-Leander BArm. 197g: det.
at;Wbr], sf. Jt;Wbr]; fem. greatness Dn 419.33 518f 727. †
*y[;ybir:] Heb. y[iybir]; JArm., DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 521); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 188b);
Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 591); Syr. rebéÆ>aµyaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon
709a); NeoSyr. (Maclean 288b-289a); NeoArm. reµbe> (Bergsträsser Gloss. 74; Spitaler Gloss.
92a); Mnd. arbiaia (Drower-M. Dictionary 36a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 192); Bauer-Leander
BArm. 251u: masc. det. Da 325 a;y[;ybir]: K ay:[;ybir], Q ha;[;ybir]; fem. abs. Da 240 77 hy:[;ybir]: K
hy:[;ybir], Q ha;[;ybir], det. 719 at;yÒ[‰;ybir]: fourth 240 325 77.19.23. †
*÷ynIb;r]b]r;' bbr, br' pl. → br: OArm., Zendjirli, Barraµkib ˜r ÷yklm great kings (Donner-R.
Inschriften 216: 10, 13); Sefire (223 A 7) fragmentary; EmpArm., EgArm. ˜r ÷[rt great
supports (Cowley Arm. Pap. 31: 9); Uruk 11 qu-da-am ra-ab-ra-bi-e (= ybrbr cstr. pl.) for the
adults (Koopmans no. 56; cf. Beyer Arm. Texte 690 no. 2); Palm. npqn rbrbn great costs
(Cantineau-Starcky Palmyre x: 44, 6; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 274); JArm. inscr.
(Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1058); cf. also anbr (rab + -an); pl. cstr., EmpArm., EgArm.
ynbr (Cowley Arm. Pap. 3: 11), and Palm. rbny, Seyrig-Starcky Tessères de Palmyre, 37, 38; in
EgArm. meaning officer, and in Palm. chief (see Cantineau-Starcky Palmyre; Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 273; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1055); JArm. an:B;r' important personage,
lord, commander (Dalman Wb. 397a), DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 690); for JPArm. and CPArm.
÷brbr (sg.) see Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 103; Syr. rabbaµnaµ physician (Brockelmann Lexicon
707a); Mnd. rabania (pl. of rba) teachers (Drower-M. Dictionary 417b, 422b; Nöldeke Mand.
Gramm. 184); JArm., DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 690); CPArm. greatness (Schulthess Lex. 187b);
Syr. prince, magnate, leader (Brockelmann Lexicon 706a no. 2); Mnd. rurbia (Drower-M.
Dictionary 431b); see also Brockelmann Grundriss 1: 451; 2: 701; Bauer-Leander BArm. 196b:
pl. sf. yn"b;r]b]r'; Da 523 Jyn:b;r]b]r', K JyIn-" , Q Jn:- (Bauer-Leander BArm. 74z); yhi/n&b;r]b]r'; tantum
pl.: lords, magnates at the Babylonian and Persian courts Da 51–3.9f.23, sometimes in a series of
dignitaries, 618, yn"b;r]b]r'wÒ yr'b]D;h' 433. †
zgr: the same in Heb.: to tremble, be angry; EmpArm. (Uruk 19, 23 pe. pt. sg. masc. ra-gi-zu;
itpe. pt. sg. masc. mi-it-ra-ag-ga-zu to be angry; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 274; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 1059 s.v. rgz1); JArm., DSS zg«r/] zg¾r] (Dalman Wb. 397b; Beyer Arm. Texte 691; see
further Sokoloff, DSD7 (2000), 103); CPArm. regez (Schulthess Lex. 189b); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim
Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 584); Syr. regez (Brockelmann Lexicon 711b); Mnd. regaz
(Drower-M. Dictionary 424a; Nöl-deke Mand. Gramm. 220); causative, JArm., CPArm. and
Syr. af.; Mnd. also sûaf (Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 138, 212).
haf: pf. WzgIr]h:' to irritate (ah;l;aÔ) Ezr 512. †
Der. zg¾r.]
zg¾r]: zgr; Heb. zg²r;o OArm., Zendjirli, Panammuwa 1 zgrb (Donner-R. Inschriften 214: 23, 26)
anger; EmpArm., Uruk 20 and 24 pl. emph. ru-ga-zi-e, sf. 3rd. sg. masc. ru-ga-za-a-<i-[i] anger;
Palm. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 274; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1059 s.v. rgz2); JArm., DSS (*
qutl) azÉgÒru anger (Dalman Wb. 397; Beyer Arm. Texte 692); CPArm. rwgz/rgwz (Schulthess Lex.
189b); Syr. rugzaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 711b); Mnd. rugza (Drower-M. Dictionary 428a;
Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 104); NeoSyr. rugzaµ (Maclean 290a s.v. rwgz<); basic form *rugz
(Bauer-Leander BArm. 224k): anger, zg¾r]Bi hm;j} w" in anger Da 313; cf. Plöger KAT xviii: 59: in
impassioned anger; ZüBi: in furious anger; NRSV, REB: in furious rage. †
*lgr: denominative from *lg¾r]; the same in Heb.; JArm. lgr af., meaning 1. to bow down low;
2. to accustom, tempt (Dalman Wb. 398a); Syr. to tread, etpe.; and also NeoSyr. to dismount
from a horse ((Maclean 197b s.v. mrgl; Brockelmann Lexicon 712b); Mnd. pe. to shackle, chain
(Drower-M. Dictionary 424b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 74).
*lg¾r] or lg«r]: Heb. lg²r,; OArm., Zendjirli, Panammuwa 2 (Donner-R. Inschriften 215: 16) dual
cstr. lgry, metathesis (Friedrich 42); EmpArm., EgArm. ltrty rgly< (pl. emph.) for the second
time (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar; Behistun 1; Saqqara); Pehl. hlgl (Junker Frahang 10: 41;
Herzfeld Paikuli 643/4, pl. ngryn); Palm. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 274; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 1060 s.v. rgl2); JArm. al;gÒri, pl. ÷yligÒr', DSS (Dalman Wb. 398a; Beyer Arm. Texte
692; see further Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 103); CPArm. lgr (Schulthess Lex. 189b); Syr. reglaµ
(Brockelmann Lexicon 712a); Mnd. ligra (Drower-M. Dictionary 235b), and nigla (see
Brockelmann Lexicon 712a s.v. reglaµ); NeoArm. regãla (Bergsträsser Gloss. 75) and regãraµ a
person’s foot, the foot of a mountain (Spitaler Gloss. 92a; and Bergsträsser Gloss. 75); NeoSyr.
<aqla(Polotsky Gloss. 105a; Ruzûicðka 53); basic form *rigl; Bauer-Leander BArm. 225s: dual
÷yIl'gÒr' (Or. rigléÆn Bauer-Leander BArm. 306 l !), det. aY:l'gÒr', sf. yhi/l&gÒr' (variant ˜ri Da 233),
Hyl'gÒr' Da 77.19, Q Hl'gÒr', K HY"l'gÒr' or HylegÒr', Or. -ayaµh (Bauer-Leander BArm. 49e, 79s), fem.:
foot, the feet of iron and clay of the µlex] Da 233f.41f, the feet of an animal 74.7.19. †
Der. *lgr
vgr: the same in Heb.; EmpArm., EgArm., Ah\iqar 29 to be angry (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 275;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1061); JArm. to be uneasy (Dalman Wb. 398b); Tg. for Heb.
hmj, vgr, hav; Syr. to be excited (Brockelmann Lexicon 713a); Mnd. to start a rebellion,
disturb; margusû disturbance, uprising (Drower-M. Dictionary 425a; 252b; Nöldeke Mand.
Gramm. 130); NeoSyr. (Maclean 289b), and NeoArm. rksû (Bergsträsser Gloss. 76) to wake up;
pe. in Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 713a, no. 3) and NeoSyr.; af. in JArm. (Dalman Wb. 398),
CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 190a) and Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 713b); cf. MHeb. hif., to
notice, feel.
haf: pf. WvGIr]h' to enter in a crowd, JLeai aY:r'b]G¬ Da 612, with l[' 67.16, aK;l]m'Al[' WvGIr]h'
aY:k'r]s;' … satraps 67, Sept. proshvlqosan, Theodotion parevsthsan, Pesh. qrbw, Vulgate
subripuerunt, 616 Sept.V parevsthsan, Pesh. 615 <rybu (af. from root rwb, Brockelmann Lexicon
718a) to enter in a crowd (ZüBi) :: to come by agreement (Montgomery 272f) :: to seek to
influence (Schulthess, ZNW 21 (1922), 245ff) :: Charles 152ff to come in a hurry (Lebram 78f),
to hasten (Bentzen), to rush (TOB); see Plöger KAT xviii: 92/94); NRSV, the presidents and
satraps conspired and came to the king; REB, the ministers and satraps, having watched for an
opportunity to come to the king. †
*wre: har; JArm., DSS aw:yre (Dalman Wb. 403a; Beyer Arm. Texte 692; for JPArm. wyre (abs.) see
Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 104); < Ca-naanite (Bauer-Leander BArm. 184k and l): sf. HwEre; masc.,
appearance: lyjiD] HwEre (referring to µlex]) its appearance was frightening Da 231; yDi HwEre
÷yhil;aÔArb'l] hmeD; a;y[;ybir] (Bauer-Leander BArm. 314j) the appearance of the fourth man was
like that of a heavenly being Da 325. †
*jwr: Heb. jw"r;. —1. jw"r] to be wide: EmpArm. and Palm. af. to widen (Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 1062); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 400a; Beyer Arm. Texte 693); Sam. to liberate (
Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 11a); Syr. pa. to widen, expand (Brockelmann Lexicon 719a); NeoSyr.
(Maclean 290b); Mnd. af. (Drower-M. Dictionary 428b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 2472).
—2. denominative from j'Wr: Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 718b); Sam. to breathe (Ben H\ayyim
Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 590).
—3. denominative from j'yre: JArm., DSS af. jyra (Heb. hif.) to smell (Dalman Wb. 400a. s.v.
jwr; Beyer Arm. Texte 693); also CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 193b); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon
727b); Mnd. RHA (Drower-M. Dictionary 425b).
On the confusion of the two roots jwr and jyr see Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 104, who refers to
Brockelmann Lexicon 723, 727.
? Der. j'Wr, j'yre.
j'Wr, Or. ruµh\, from jwr meaning 2; the same in Heb.; OArm., Sefire he looked for his breath of
life (his nose > his breath of life > security, sanctuary (Donner-R. Inschriften 224: 2, and 2: p.
266; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 39 s.v. y[b); EmpArm., EgArm., Ah\iqar 168; Palm., Nab., JArm.
inscr., wind, breath, spirit > soul; spirit, demon; also JArm. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 276 s.v. jr;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1065, s.v. rh\1); JArm., DSS also direction (Dalman Wb. 400a;
Beyer Arm. Texte 692; cf. GenAp xxii: 8); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 190b); Syr. ruµh\aµ
(Brockelmann Lexicon 718a), and NeoSyr. ruh\aµya soul, and ruµh\o wind, spirit, soul (Polotsky
Gloss. 110a; and Ritter Gloss. 118a); Sam. ruh\a (Ben H\ayyim Literary and Oral Tradition 2:
590); Mnd. ruh(a) (Drower-M. Dictionary 428b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 63, 159); NeoArm.
ruµh\a spirit, soul, réÆh\a wind (Bergsträsser Gloss. 75); mostly fem., Bauer-Leander BArm. 207b:
the same in the cstr.; det. aj;Wr, sf. yjiWr, HjeWr, pl. cstr. yjeWr, ÷yjiWr also JArm., CPArm. and
Syr., as well as ÷j;Wr, fem. (Da 235, Bauer-Leander BArm. 333g !).
—1. wind Da 235; aY:m'v] yjeWr [B'r]a' the four winds of heaven Da 72 (from the four wind
directions, the four points of the compass; cf. GenAp xxii: 8; and Beyer Arm. Texte 693 no. 1).
—2. spirit of a person, mind Da 520 715; ar;yTiy" j'Wr Sept. pneu`ma a{gion, Theodotion
pneuma perissovn an extraordinary spirit Da 512 64.
—3. ÷yhil;aÔ j'Wr the spirit of a god: j'Wr JB;/HBe (÷yviyDiq') ÷yhil;aÔ in whom (in Daniel) is the
spirit of the holy God Da 45f.15 511.14 (cf. Gn 4138 of Joseph) meaning of the gods :: of god, so
Montgomery 225. †
µwr: the same in Heb.; OArm., Zakir (Donner-R. Inschriften 202 A: 10) haf. pf. 3rd. pl. wmrh;
Sefire (224: 5, 6) haf. impf. 2nd. sg. masc. µrht; EmpArm., EgArm. (Ah\iqar 139) itp. impf.
3rd. sg. masc. ytrwm (Leander 61a); JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 275;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1063); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 400b; Beyer Arm. Texte 695
s.v. µyr); JArm. developing into µar); GenAp xxii: 20 lal ydy ana µyrm a gesture for an
oath; CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 191a); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 11a); Syr. (Brockelmann
Lexicon 720a); NeoSyr. (Maclean 288a s.v. r<m); Mnd. af. (Drower-M. Dictionary 430a s.v.
RUM I; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 251).
pe: pf. µri, Or. reµm (Bauer-Leander BArm. 145j, 149j) to rise up: bb'l] to be arrogant Da 520
. †
pol: see Bauer-Leander BArm. 91d, 146t; JArm.,CPArm.(SchulthessLex.191b);Sam.; JArm.

(Dalman Wb. 400b); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 721b) palp.: pt. µme/rm], Or. -mam
(Bauer-Leander BArm. 147u), to praise Da 434. †
hitpol: for EgArm. see above; JArm., CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 192a); Sam.; Syr.
(Brockelmann Lexicon 721a), and Mnd. (Drower-M. Dictionary 430a haf.): pf. T;m]m'/rt]hi, to
rise up, with l[' against Da 523. †
haf: pt. µyrim;, variantSecunda µrem;, Bauer-Leander BArm. 148g: to elevate, raise someone
Da 519 sbj. God raised Nebuchadnezzar.
Der. µWr.
µWr: µwr; substantival inf. (Bauer-Leander BArm. 180m); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 400b; Beyer
Arm. Texte 695); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 191b); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 720b), and Mnd.
rauma (Drower-M. Dictionary 420a): sf. HmeWr; masc.: height, µlex] Da 31, tree 47, temple in
Jerusalem Ezr 63; height > highest point meaning the crown of a tree, aY:m'v]li afem]yI HmeWrwÒ … (
÷l;yai) its top stretches up to heaven (ZüBi; similarly NRSV, REB); summit (Lebram); height
(Bentzen; TOB; Plöger KAT xviii: 68) Da 48.17 (Da 48 Sept. (411) hJ korufhv, Theodotion to;
u{yo"; Da 417 Theodotion (= 420) to; u{yo"). †
zr;: MHeb. only Sir 8 18; Dam. iii: 18 yzrb la walp God in his wonderful secrets; EmpArm.,
EgArm. (? Ah\iqar 14, rd. ÷y[zr], cf. Cowley Arm. Pap. p. 243); JArm. inscr.
(Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1065); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 401a; Beyer Arm. Texte 693);
CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 192b), and Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 11a); Syr. (<)raµzaµ (Brockelmann
Lexicon 722b; Nöl-deke Syr. Gramm. §51), and NeoSyr. raza (Maclean 20a s.v. <rz<); Mnd.
raz(a) (Drower-M. Dictionary 420a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 248) loanword from Avestan
razah-, Middle Persian raµz, New Persian raµz (Scheftelowitz 2: 311f; Telegdi JA 226 (1934),
254f; Ellenbogen 163; Hinz Altiranisches Sprachgut 203): det. hzÉr; Da 218f.27; azÉr; 230; pl. ÷yzIr,;
aY:z¾r;; masc.: secret Da 218.27 46; revealed in a vision in the night azÉr; ay:l]yleAyDi aw:zÒj,B] ylig] 219;
30; ÷yzIr; hlegÉ aY:m'v]bi hl;aÔ God in heaven reveals the secrets 228.47, aY:z¾r; hleG: ; I. Willi-Plein
29
VT 27 (1977), 66ff and 77ff (Qumran); Plöger KAT xviii: 43; for fur-ther examples of this
phrase in JPArm. see Sokoloff Dictionary 129. †
µWjr]: µjr: n.m.; the same in Heb. (HAL 1132b; HALOT 1214a). EmpArm., EgArm. (Kraeling
Arm. Pap. 16: 19; 11: 14; 12: 34): Ezr 48f.17.23. †
*qyjir:' variant qyjir]; root qjr; Heb. q/jr;; EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling
Arm. Pap.); Pehl. (Junker Frahang 25: 4); Nab. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 279 s.v. qjrII;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1074 s.v. rh\q3); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 401b; Beyer Arm.
Texte 695) distant, future; CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 193b); Syr. rah\éÆqaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon
725b); Mnd. rahiq(a) (Drower-M. Dictionary 419a); NeoSyr. rixqe and rih\qa (Polotsky Gloss.
102a; Maclean 292a); Bauer-Leander BArm. 192e, 188h!: pl. ÷yqiyjir': far; hM;T'A÷mi /wh} ÷yqiyjir'
keep yourselves at a distance from there (Gunneweg KAT xix/1: 103 and 109) :: to withdraw a
complaint (F. Rundgren ZAW 70 (1958), 213f) Ezr 66. †
*µjr: the same in Heb.; EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar, 11, 51, 153; Kraeling
Arm. Pap.); Nab., Hatra, JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 277 s.v. µhrI; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 1068 s.v. rh\m 1), to love, wish for, desire; JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 401b; Beyer
Arm. Texte 693); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 192b); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 11a); Syr. reh\em
(Brockelmann Lexicon 723b); Mnd. RHM (Drower-M. Dictionary 426b); NeoSyr. (Maclean
292a; Ritter Gloss. 118a); NeoArm. (Bergsträsser Gloss. 75) to love, have compassion; friend:
OArm., Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften 224: 8); EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar
176), Nab., Palm., Hatra, JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 277 s.v. µjrIII;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1069 s.v. rh\m4); Yemen rah\ima (Rabin 27).
Der. µWjr], ÷ymij} r'.
÷ymij} r': µjr; Heb. µymij} r'; abstract pl., see JArm. µjer], am;j]r' womb (Dalman Wb. 402a),
and Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 724a); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 402a; Beyer Arm. Texte 694;
see further Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 104, also for Mnd.); Sam. rh\mym = reµmmem (Ben H\ayyim
Gloss. 11a); CPArm. rh\myn (Schulthess Lex. 192b); cf. Syr. rah\maµ uterus, also mercifulness;
Bauer-Leander BArm. 182x, 305e: compassion Da 218. †
Åjr: Akk. rahÉas\u II to trust, entrust (AHw. 943a); Arb. rahÉus\a to be benevolent, rhÉs\ II to
permit, allow (Wehr-Cowan 332a); JArm., DSS Åj'r] to trust (Dalman Wb. 402a; Beyer Arm.
Texte 694; Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 104 remarks that it occurs only as a passive participle or in
the itpe>el stem); CPArm. pe. and itpe. (Schulthess Lex. 193a); Mnd. RHS\ pe. and itpe. to trust
(Drower-M. Dictionary 427a); Sam. etpe. to trust (Ben H\ayyim Literary and Oral Tradidition
2: 474); JArm. hn:x;j]Wr trust, certainty (Dalman Wb. 402a); Sam. rh\s\, rh\s\wn, reµsson trust (Ben
H\ayyim Gloss. 11a); CPArm. rh\s\wn trust (Schul-thess Lex. 193a); Mnd. ruhs\ana (Drower-M.
Dictionary 429a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 61); Heb. cj. Lam 318 yxij]r' my trust, instead of yjxn
(*Åj,r, !, see Rudolph Esra und Nehemia 231).
hitpe: pf. pl. Wxj&ir]t]hi: to trust in, with l[' Da 328, Sept. 395 tou;" ejlpivsanta" ejpÆ aujtovn ,
Theodotion o[ti ejpepoivqeisan ejpÆ aujtw`/ . †
*qjr: the same in Heb.; to be distant; EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm.
Pap.); Palm. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 278; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1072); JArm., DSS
(Dalman Wb. 402a; Beyer Arm. Texte 694); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 193a); Syr. rh\q
(Brockelmann Lexicon 725a pa.); NeoSyr., Urmia rih\qa distant (Maclean 292a); Zakho rh\aµqa
to be distant, go away (Polotsky Gloss. 102a, 110a); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Literary and Oral
Tradidition 2: 615); Mnd. RHQ (Drower-M. Dictionary 427a;cf.Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 447
toflee).
Der. *qyjir'.
j'yre: jwr: the same in Heb.; JArm. aj;yre, DSS (Dalman Wb. 403a; Beyer Arm. Texte 693);
CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 193b); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Literary and Oral Tradidition 2: 590); Syr.
réÆh\aµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 727a); Mnd. riha (Drower-M. Dictionary 432b; Nöldeke Mand.
Gramm. 108); NeoSyr. rih\a and reh\a (Polotsky Gloss. 102a; Maclean 292b) everywhere masc.;
NeoArm. réÆh\t\a (Bergsträsser Gloss. 75); ? Heb. loanword, Bauer-Leander BArm. 186w: the
same in the cstr.; fem. (congruence!, unless td;[} refers to the preceding rWn): smell: rWn j'yre
smell of burning Da 327; Plöger KAT xviii: 59, and there was not a smell of fire that reached
them :: Bauer-Leander BArm. 349d, with al;, not the tiniest trace of burning. †
*bkr: the same in Heb.; EmpArm. (Ah\iqar; Behistun 30; Driver Arm. Docs.; Saqqara); Palm.
(Jean-H. Dictionnaire 279 s.v. bkrI; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1075); JArm. (Dalman Wb.
403b); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 194a); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 11a); Syr. (Brockelmann
Lexicon 730b); NeoSyr. raµkaµwa (Polotsky Gloss. 110a; Maclean 293a); Mnd. RKB (Drower-M.
Dictionary 435a); sbst. chariot: OArm., Panammuwa 2 (Donner-R. Inschriften 215: 3, 10)
bkr yl[b; Zakir (202 B: 2; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 280 s.v. bkrII; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 1076 s.v. rkb6); JArm. ab;Wkr] waggon (Dalman Wb. 404a); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim
Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 494); horseman: EmpArm., EgArm. (Driver Arm. Docs. 9: 2
bkr; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 280 s.v. bkrI; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1075 s.v. rkb1);
JArm. ab;K;r' (Dalman Wb. 404a); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 731a).
Der. aB;kur]a'.
hmr: Heb. I hmr; EmpArm., EgArm. (Driver Arm. Docs. 6: 3, adj. rmy inferior;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1078 s.v. rmy3); Xantos; Pehl. (Junker Frahang 20: 16, lmytwn;
Herzfeld Paikuli 929/30, r/lmy); Palm. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 280 s.v. ymrI; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 1077); JArm. amr, DSS (Dalman Wb. 404a; Beyer Arm. Texte 696); GenAp xxii: 8
rm< >l to trip over (Fitzmyer p. 152); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 194b); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim
Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 595); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 732b); Mnd. RMA
(Drower-M. Dictionary 435b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 257); NeoSyr. (Maclean 293b s.v. rm<).
pe: pf. pl. /mr], an:ymir]; inf. amer]mi, pf. passive wymir] Da 321 (Or. remiyuµ, Bauer-Leander
BArm. 156w, → hd[ haf., 159r).
—1. to throw, with l] of place Da 320 617.25, with a/gl] 324, passive 321.
—2. to place thrones, passive Da 79 (Tg. Jr 115, for Heb. ÷tn); Syr. remeµ lying, and tarméÆtaµ
(Brockelmann Lexicon 733b) katabolh; (kovsmou); Akk. sûubta/parakka/isûdaµ ramuÆ (AHw 953a,
s.v. ramuÆ; → Heb. I hry qal 2, Montgomery 299; Plöger KAT xviii: 102, to be placed upright).
—3. to impose a tax, with l[' Ezr 724. †
hitpe: impf. amer]t]yI (Or. yitirmeµ, Bauer-Leander BArm. 45j), pl. ÷/mr]t]Ti (variant ÷Wm-,
Bauer-Leander BArm. 158o): to be thrown, with l] of place Da 36.11.15 68.13. †
*h[r: Heb. I hxr; JArm. a[;r] to like, desire, wish (Dalman Wb. 406a); CPArm. h[r III to
reconcile, placate (Schulthess Lex. 196a); Sam. qal and af. with the same meaning (Ben H\ayyim
Literary and Oral Tradition 3/2: p. 182; Gloss. 11a); Syr. etpa. to think (Brockelmann Lexicon
738a s.v. re>yaµnaµ II) to be content, pa. to reconcile, placate (Brockelmann Lexicon 738a, b, s.v.
III re>eµ<); Mnd. RAA III (Drower-M. Dictionary 417a).
Der. *W[r], *÷/y[]r'.
*W[r]: h[r: Heb. II tW[r], from III h[r, Arm. loanword (Wagner 284); JArm. inscr. r>w free
will (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 281; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1079); Sogdian y[r (Schaeder
37f); JArm., DSS at;W[r], aw:[} r' satisfaction, will (Dalman Wb. 406a; Beyer Arm. Texte 696;
see further Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 104); Old Syr. atw[ra, ar>uµtaµ (Black 216; but see
Sokoloff loc. cit. for additional bibliography); Sam. atwjyr will, mercy (Ben H\ayyim Gloss.
11a; Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 528); Bauer-Leander BArm. 197g: cstr. tW[r]: will, decision
.
—1. of the king Ezr 517.
—2. of a god 718. †
*÷/y[]r,' Or. ri>yoµn: h[r; the same in Heb.; Arm. loanword; JArm., DSS an:/y[]r/' an:y:[]r' attitude,
thought (Dalman Wb. 406a; Beyer Arm. Texte 697; but see Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 104);
CPArm. will (Schulthess Lex. 196 s.v. h[r III); Syr. re>yaµnaµ will, thinking (Brockelmann
Lexicon 738a); Mnd. ruiana thought (Drower-M. Dictionary 429b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm.
137); Bauer-Leander BArm. 195y: pl. cstr. ynE/y[]r,' sf. yn"/y[]r,' Jn:/y[]r' Da 229 510, variant, with
Codex Leningradensis and K JyIn"/y[]r' (Bauer-Leander BArm. 74z, 75a), yhinœyœ[]r;' masc. thought
: [D'nÒTi Jb;b;l] ynE/y[]r' Da 230, Theodotion tou;" dialogismou`" th`" kardiva" sou gnw`/" , Sept.
a} uJpevlabe" th`/ kardiva/ sou ejn gnwvsei; with Wqlis] 229; with lhb pa. impf. sf. 416 56.10 728. †
*÷[r: the same in Heb.; not found in other dialects of Arm.

Der. ÷n"[} r'.
÷n"[} r': *÷[r; Heb. ÷n:[} r': ? Heb. loanword (Black 95; Bauer-Leander BArm. 193k): in full leaf;
of people, (cf. Ps 9215) flourishing, prospering (cf. TOB and NRSV; REB and NEB: in the
luxury of my palace), Nebuchadnez-zar Da 41, Sept., Theodotion Da 44: Sept. eujqhmw`n,
Theodotion eujqalw`n, cf. Gesenius Thes. 1298b de homine secundis rebus florente, ZüBi,
Plöger KAT XVIII 68: happy, fortunate. †
[[r: Heb. Åxr and Arm. II [[r; [[r JArm. (Dalman Wb. 406b); Sam. pe. and pa. (cf. Ben
H\ayyim Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 473b); CPArm. palp. (Schulthess Lex. 195b); Syr.
(Brockelmann Lexicon 737a).
pe: impf. 3rd. fem. ['roTe, Or. teµroµ> (Bauer-Leander BArm. 165b): to crush Da 240. †
pa: pt. [['r;m], Bauer-Leander BArm. 130g: to crush Da 240. †
spr: Heb. s/cpr; JArm. to tread, stamp (Dalman Wb. 407a); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 741b);
NeoSyr. (Maclean 295b); Mnd. RPS (Drower-M. Dictionary 437a).
pe: pt. fem. hs;p]r‰;: to tread down: ar;a;v] hs;p]r‰; Hyl'gÒr'B] Da 77.19. †
µvr: the same in Heb., from Arm. (Wagner 291); OArm., Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften 223 C;
3) ?y[r]sûmm; cf. Degen Altaram. Gramm. §57a, p. 69 (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 284).
—1. vb. µvr: JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 409a; Beyer Arm. Texte 698) to make a sign, signify,
record 1QH 16: 10, qal pf. 2nd. sg. masc. htmr (Lohse 168); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon
745b); NeoSyr. (Maclean 297a), and Mnd. RSðM (Drower-M. Dictionary 437b; Nöldeke Mand.
Gramm. 228).
—2. sbst. hm;v]Wr sign, trace: JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 409a; Beyer Arm. Texte 698); CPArm.
(Schulthess Lex. 197b); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 745b); NeoSyr. (Maclean 297a); Mnd.
rusû(u)ma (Drower-M. Dictionary 432a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 32); > Arb. rusam wooden
stamp (Fraenkel 137); Safaitic, to write, writing (Texte und Untersuchungen zur Geschichte der
altchristlichen Literatur 187b); OSArb. name of a people rsûm (Conti Rossini 245b).
pe: pf. µv'r], T;m]v'r]; impf. µvur]Ti, Or. tirsûom (Bauer-Leander BArm. 31g); pf. passive µyvir]
: to write: sbj. Darius, rs;aÔ and bt;K], interdict and document Da 69.10.13.14 (Bentzen; Lebram;
Plöger KAT xviii: 92, in written form; REB, NEB: put in writing :: to sign, give legal authority
to a prohibition; see Gesenius Thes.; BDB; Charles; TOB; NRSV); passive to be written, the
writing on the wall Da 524f, to be signed 611. †
c: —1. on the whole still preserved, as it is in older Arm.: bc;, rc'B], ac;n,Ò bc'[}, rc'[Ô, etc.
—2. apart from BArm. it interchanges with sû; in Uruk acn, and in Heb. hl;m]ci.
—3. it interchanges with and is sup-pressed by → s (Bauer-Leander BArm. 26e-k; Baumgartner
ZAW 45: 101ff (see Umwelt), as in yD;c]K', ak;B]c' etc.; cf. also Leander 10p, q; for Qumran see
Sokoloff Tg. Job 15.
*bc;: byc: EmpArm., EgArm. (Ah\iqar 6, 17, 35; Kraeling Arm. Pap. 9: 17); JArm. inscr.
(Jean-H. Dictionnaire 288; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1099); JArm., DSS ab;s; (Dalman
Wb. 281a; Beyer Arm. Texte 706); CPArm. sb (Schulthess Lex. 130a); Syr. saµbaµ< (Brockelmann
Lexicon 469b); NeoSyr. saµwaµ (Maclean 220); Mnd. saba (Drower-M. Dictionary 308b;
Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 108); NeoArm. soµba (Bergsträsser Gloss. 79 s.v. swb; Spitaler Gloss.
92b); Bauer-Leander BArm. 186w: pl. cstr. ybec,; emph. aY:b'c;: someone with grey hair, pl. the
elders (= Heb. ÷qezÉ; Gunneweg KAT xix/1: 94f), ayEd;WhyÒ ybec; Ezr 55, Sept. ejpi; th;n
ahJ/cmalwsivan Iouda, Pesh. >l sûbyt< dyhwd< (= ybic] those in exile, cf. Rudolph Esra und
Nehemia 48; Gunneweg KAT xix/1: 94f), Ezr 67f.14; cf. 59. †
*Jbc: Heb. Jbc and Jbs: ? EmpArm. ûbs (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 189; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 774); MHeb., JArm. ûbs to entwine, pa. to beguile (Dalman Wb. 281b); Syr. to
adhere, cleave (Brockelmann Lexicon 454b); Mnd. SBK to weave together, mingle (Drower-M.
Dictionary 316a).
Der. ak;B]c'.
ak;B]c:' Da 3 .
7 10.15(variant ˜s') and ak;B]s' 35 (variant ˜c'): Jbc; Heb. hk;b;c]; MHeb. hk;b;s], and
JArm. aK;b]si, ak;B]si aT;k]b's] , a net for a woman’s hair, thicket (Dalman Wb. 281b; Heb. Jb's],
Jbos]); Syr. sebakaµ< net-veil (Brockelmann Lexicon 454b); EmpArm.; Pehl. (Junker Frahang 15:
4) akbw (Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1115); Levy 161f; Lidzbarski Eph. 2: 137 :: sambu;kh
(Masson 91) < sa(m)buµcus elder-tree (Gressmann Musik and Musikinstrumente (1903), 26f;
König); occurring in BArm. in a series of musical instruments, Da 35.7.10.15, Sept. sambu;kh,
Latin sam-buµca a four-stringed musical instrument, triangular in shape, with a bright tone, a
four-stringed harp (Grelot VT 29 (1979), 30ff); so also Plöger (KAT xviii: 60); Su;rwn eu{rhma
, cf. Reicke-Rost Hw. 1258; Pauly-Wissowa 2: 2124f; Pauly-Wissowa (Kl.) 4: 1532. †
agc: Heb. h/agc, Arm. loanword (Wagner 294); EmpArm., EgArm. ag (Ah\iqar 137; Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 290; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1108 s.v. sûg<1); JArm. ygs to become greater,
cf. DSS ag/s (Dalman Wb. 282b; Beyer Arm. Texte 702); Sam. hgs (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 8a);
CPArm. sg< (Schulthess Lex. 131b); Syr. sagéÆ/aµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 457b); Mnd. SGA II
(Drower-M. Dictionary 317b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 257); GenAp ag xxii: 29, 32; xxi: 13 (cf.
Fitzmyer 134).
pe: impf. aG«c]yI Da 331, variant aG«s]yI (Bauer-Leander BArm. 26g): to become great Ezr 422 (
al;b;j}); aG«c]yI ÷/km]l‰;c] used when greeting someone Da 331 626. †
Der. ayGIc.'
ayGIc:' agc; the same in Heb., < Arm.; ag EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar;
Behistun 51 (for Akk. ma-a-du), 60; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Driver Arm. Docs.); Arebsun
(Donner-R. Inschriften 270 A: 4); Nisa; Nab., Palm. ag/s; JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire
291 s.v. agIII; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1108 s.v. sûg<3); JArm. ayGIs', DSS ayg/s (Dalman
Wb. 282b; Beyer Arm. Texte 702; Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 104: ygs); CPArm. sgy much, many
(Schulthess Lex. 131b); Syr. saggéÆ much, many (Brockelmann Lexicon 458a); and NeoSyr. sagi
(Maclean 221a); Mnd. sagia (Drower-M. Dictionary 309a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 124);
GenAp. xix: 25; Bauer-Leander BArm. 207d, pl. fem. ÷a;yGIc,' variant ˜s'; Bauer-Leander BArm.
26g.
—1. great Da 26.31 (unless to be understood with paragraph 3; cf. Sept.).48 47.
—2. much, many, with sg. collective HBenÒai ayGIc' Da 49.18, ˜c' rc'B] 75 (Bauer-Leander BArm.
304b); pl. ÷a;yGIc' ÷ynIv] Ezr 511.
—3. adv. very much (Bauer-Leander BArm. 254p, 337d; Leander 120k) Da 212 59 615.24 728 (
ayGIc' but not 212, exceptional, often in EgArm.); 231 (see above, paragraph 1), adv. from br. †
*dhc: Heb. dhec;, loanword < Arm. (Wagner 295); Arm. —1. sbst. sûahed witness: OArm., Sefire
(Donner-R. Inschriften 222 A: 12) ÷dh witnesses; EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.;
Ah\iqar 140; Kraeling Arm. Pap.); Lidzbarski Urk. (see e.g. Donner-R. Inschriften 234–6);
Bauer-Meissner Pachtvertrag 15; Pehl. (Herzfeld Paikuli 952; Nyberg Pahlavi 3: 5); cf. ?
adhst (Cowley Arm. Pap. 71: 10; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 332; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary
1224); Palm.; Tell Halaf (Degen-Müller-Röllig Neue Ephemeris 1: p. 51, obv. 3); JArm. inscr.
—2. verb: EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap. 82: 6); Palm. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 292 s.v.
dhI; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1112 s.v. sûhd1, 1113 s.v. sûhd2); JArm. dh/s to bear
witness, testify, DSS dh wit-ness (Dalman Wb. 410a, 284b; Beyer Arm. Texte 703); CPArm.
shd vb., also witness (Schulthess Lex. 132b); Syr. shd vb., also witness (Brockelmann Lexicon
461b); Mnd. vb. SHD (Drower-M. Dictionary 319b); sahda witness (Drower-M. Dictionary
310b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 61); Sam. sa-ed (Ben H\ayyim Literary and Oral Tradition 2:
543); NeoSyr. sa(h)da (Maclean 221a).
Der. *Wdh} c‰.;
*Wdh} c‰:; dhc: Nab. (Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1113); JArm. at;Wdh} c;/s;, DSS /s
(Dalman Wb. 410a, 284b; Beyer Arm. Texte 703); CPArm. ˜s (Schulthess Lex. 133a); Syr. saµhe
duµtaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 461b); NeoSyr. (Maclean 221a); Mnd. sahduta (Drower-M.
Dictionary 310); Sam. sa-edu (Ben H\ayyim Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 543);
Bauer-Leander BArm. 197g: det. at;Wdh} c;: witness, testimony (parallel with Heb. d[e!) Gn 31
47.
†
*rfc: denominative from rf'c]: MHeb. rf's; to strike with the palm of the hand; JArm. I to
destroy, II to spread out (Dalman Wb. 288a); Talmud and Mishnah rfs to box the ears; Syr. af.
st\r to set on the side (Brockelmann Lexicon 468b); CPArm. mast\ur a box on the ears (Schwally
62, 122); Arb. sûat\ara denominative, to halve, divide into two equal parts (Wehr-Cowan 471a);
Mnd. ST\R to go to the side (Drower-M. Dictionary 324a).
rf'c:] variant rf's] (Bauer-Leander BArm. 26g): rfs; probably a primary noun. EmpArm.,
EgArm. sût\r (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Driver Arm. Docs.); Pehl. (Junker Frahang 2: 11, 14; Herzfeld
Paikuli 767); Palm. rf/s (cf. Rosenthal Palm. 85); JArm. inscr. rfs (Jean-H. Dictionnaire
296; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1124 s.v. sût\r3); JArm. ar;f]si, DSS rfs (Dalman Wb.
288a; Beyer Arm. Texte 706), and JArm. ar;f]xi (Dalman Wb. 361b); CPArm. st\r (Schulthess
Lex. 134b); Sam. rfs(ya), rfxya (Ben H\ayyim Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 570); Syr. set\raµ
(Brockelmann Lexicon 468b); Mnd. sit\ra, s\it\ra, sit\ar (Drower-M. Dictionary 326a; 393a;
325b); NeoArm. sat\ra (Bergsträsser Gloss. 83); Arb. sûat\r division, halving (Wehr-Cowan
471b); EmpArm., EgArm. ÷m rf “except” (Driver Arm. Docs.); Palm. (Jean-H. and
Hoftijzer-Jongeling loc. cit.); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 468b); basic form sat\r, see
Bauer-Leander BArm. 183e, on the pattern qat\l :: Beyer Arm. Texte, on the pattern qit\l; masc.
side: dj' rf'c]li on one side Da 75 (perhaps rd. Href]c]li, Ginsberg 3); Plöger KAT xviii: 104,
109. †
Der. *rfc
*byc: the same in Heb.; Palm. wbys old age (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 192; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 784); EmpArm., EgArm. b/s old man (Ah\iqar; Kraeling Arm. Pap.); JArm. inscr.
(Jean-H. Dictionnaire 288; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1099); JArm. bys to be old, ab;s;
old age, hb;yce, at;b]yse and at;Wbse aged man (Dalman Wb. 281a, 288a/b, 410b); DSS (Beyer
Arm. Texte 706); CPArm. s<b (Schulthess Lex. 130a); Syr. se<b and saµbaµ< (Brockelmann Lexicon
453b and 469b); NeoSyr. (Maclean 220a); Sam. syb, shb = sa½b greyness (Ben H\ayyim Gloss.
8b); Mnd. SAB, saba, and siba 3 aged man; sibuta old age (Drower-M. Dictionary 308a; 308b
and 324b; 324b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 144); Syr. saybuµtaµ old age (Brockelmann Lexicon
469b); NeoSyr. (Maclean 220a).
Der. *bc;.
µyc: the same in Heb.; OArm. µy, Zendjirli, Panammuwa 1 (Donner-R. Inschriften 214: 29);
Panammuwa 2 (215: 1, 4, 10, 20); Tell Fekherye 1, 11, 12, 16; Bredsch (201: 1); Zakir (202 A:
1, 7, 9; B: 6, 13); Sefire (222 B: 6; C: 3, 19, 23); EmpArm. µy; Nerab (226: 3, 6, 7); EgArm.
(Cowley Arm. Pap.; Driver Arm. Docs.; Ah\iqar; Behistun 35; Saqqara); Tema (228 A: 4);
Asshur Ostracon (233: 7); Pehl. (Junker Frahang app. 10, symwn; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 297;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1126); Dura µys and µws (Altheim 19f., rv. 5, edge 1); JArm.,
DSS µy, µys, µw, µws (Dalman Wb. 410a, 286a; Beyer Arm. Texte 707); Sam. µw and µy (Ben
H\ayyim Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 507); CPArm. sym (Schulthess Lex. 134b; af. 135a);
Syr. sym (Brockelmann Lexicon 469b s.v. saµm); Mnd. sw/ym (Drower-M. Dictionary 321b;
Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 278); NeoSyr. (Ritter Gloss. 118b).
pe: pf. µc; Da 512, t;m]c&‰; 310, variant ˜c' (Bauer-Leander BArm. 145i), and T]m]c;/c', tm,c;, Ezr 6
12 (Bauer-Leander BArm. 144h), sf. Hmec;; impv. pl. Wmyc&;i pf. passive (Bauer-Leander BArm.
145k) µyci (EgArm., see Driver Arm. Docs.), 3rd. fem. tm'cu Da 618 (on the form cf. West
Arabian suµt\a, Rabin 159 :: Bauer-Leander BArm. 145k): to place, lay; passive ÷b,a, Da 618, cf.
GenAp xxii: 10 ÷wblj qmrd lam l[ amy yd; specifically to put in as, appoint as, with two
accusatives Ezr 514; µ[ef] µyci (EgArm., Cowley Arm. Pap. 26: 22, 23, 25, [27: 21]; Driver
Arm. Docs. 1: 3; 3: 7), to give an order Da 310 (Plöger KAT xviii: 57, to approve an order) Ezr
421 53.9.13 61.3.12; passive Da 627 Ezr 517; µ[ef]i µyci yNImi Da 329 43 Ezr 419 68.11 713.21; µ[ef] µyci
l[' to be concerned about, have regard for Da 312 614 (Plöger KAT xviii: 58, 60, not to
observe; Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 104 refers to Kutscher Studies 87–89); µyci l] lB; to set the
mind on Da 615 (Plöger KAT xviii: 92, 94, to endeavour; µcu µyci with genitive, to give a name
to Da 512 (Heb., Da 17 Jdg 831 Neh 97 :: to sign, in Syr., Pehl., Dura (see Altheim 20, rv. 1f). †
hitpe: impf. µc;T]yI (Cowley Arm. Pap. 27: 21; Driver Arm. Docs. 5: 8); JArm. (Dalman Wb.
286a); variant µciT]yI, EgArm. µyty, pl. ÷Wmc;T]yI, pt. µc;T]mi; Bauer-Leander BArm. 145n-q: to be
put: [a; Ezr 58; to be turned into, with l] Da 25, to be given (µ[ef], see pe.) Ezr 421 (Driver Arm.
Docs.). †
lkc: Heb. I lkc; EmpArm., EgArm. itp. impf. 2nd. sg. masc. tstkl (Ah\iqar 147) to think about,
consider, regard (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 192; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 785 s.v. skl1); JArm.
, DSS lk/s (Dalman Wb. 290b, af. to instruct; 410b to be understanding; Beyer Arm. Texte
708); Syr. skl pa. to instruct (Brockelmann Lexicon 473b); itpe., JArm., DSS lks to become
perceptive, consider (Dalman Wb. 290b; Beyer Arm. Texte 708); CPArm. to consider
(Schulthess Lex. 136b); Syr. to be understanding (Brockelmann Lexicon 473b).
hitpa: pt. lK'T'c]mi (Bauer-Leander BArm. 55a): to consider, have regard for, with B] Da 78.
†
Der. Wnt;l]k]c'.
Wnt;l]k]c,; Or. sukal-: lkc; JArm. an:T;l]k'cu/su understanding, at;Wnt;l]k]su insight (Dalman Wb.
410b, 290b); Syr. adj. sakultaµnaµ perceptive, sakultaµnuµtaµ insight (Brockelmann Lexicon 473b);
Bauer-Leander BArm. 198o, fem.: insight Da 511f.14. †
cj. *hL;c:i Da 329 for hluv; (Baumgartner ZAW 45 (1927), 90 = Umwelt 77; but see Sokoloff,
DSD 7 (2000), 104–105, who prefers v): loanword < Akk. sûillaµtu insolence, shamelessness,
blasphemy, with verbs of speaking, unashamed (AHw. 1236a s.v. sûillaµtu I, 2; CADŠ/2: 445a;
see also 446a, paragraph b, < sûil<atu, from the verb sûalaµ<u; AHw. 1147b; CADŠ/1: 241a; and
the verb sûaluÆ, AHw. 1152a s.v. sûaluÆ II; CADŠ/1: 272 s.v. sûaluÆ A to whirl up; cf. Lambert
Babylonian Wisdom Literature 100 rv. 28 and 312; Kaufman 102); Heb. I hls; JArm. als af.
to despise (Dalman Wb. 291a; but see Sokoloff loc. cit.); Syr. slh etpe. to be despised
(Brockelmann Lexicon 475b); Mnd. SLA (Drower-M. Dictionary 331b), and NeoSyr. (Maclean
185b s.v. msl<); Pehl. yls (Nyberg 2: 297; but see Sokoloff loc. cit.) bad; with rma, insolence,
rebellion (as also in Akk. with qibuµ, see above, to speak unashamedly); cf. Heb. hr;s; rBeD', →
II hr;s; 2): Da 329? to utter abuse (Bentzen; Lebram), to speak with impudence (TOB; NRSV:
utters blasphemy; REB, NEB: speaks blasphemy); Sept. 396 o}" h]n blasfhmhvsh/ , Theodotion o}
h]n ei[ph/ blasfhmivan; who always has something to say (ZüBi); Gesenius Thes. 1412,
delictum, impium aliquid (Plöger KAT xviii: 59, to speak insolently). †
anc: the same in Heb.; OArm. an, pt. pl. masc. with sf., enemy, Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften
224: 10, 11, 12; 222 B: 26; 223 B: 14); Deir Alla an; EmpArm., EgArm. l an for formal
separation, divorce (cf. Cowley Arm. Pap. p. 28; Kraeling Arm. Pap. p. 148; Ah\iqar 174,
perhaps for ÷a rd. an; but see Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 105, with further bibliography); Guzne 3
hlnsy (Driver, AnOr 12: 50); Palm. an pt. pl. ÷yn (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 311;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1169); JArm., DSS yn/s (Dalman Wb. 411a, ha;nÒc‰; enemy; see
also 295a, ha;nÒs‰; enemy; Beyer Arm. Texte 716); Sam. pt. (a)÷s (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 8f: sny);
CPArm. ans (Schulthess Lex. 138a); Syr. sn< (Brockelmann Lexicon 483a), and NeoSyr., Urmia
sneye to hate (Polotsky Gloss. 102b; Maclean 227b); Mnd. SNA (Drower-M. Dictionary 333b;
Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 71); NeoArm. sny (Bergsträsser Gloss. 82); for forms and writings of
an see Fitzmyer in Albright Fschr. (1971), 162; for OArm. see Degen Altaram. Gramm. 47, 72,
119.
pe: pt. pl. sf. Jya;nÒc,‰; K JyIa'nIc,‰; Q Ja;nÒc‰; (Bauer-Leander BArm. 77o): to hate, pt. enemy (
Arm. passim, see above; Heb. anc, cf. GenAp xxii: 17 ûyan your enemy): Da 416. †
*r[c: Heb. to be hairy, denominative from r['c]; Syr. pa. and af. to grow hair, produce hair
(Brockelmann Lexicon 489a); sbst., barley; OArm., ? Tell Fekherye 19, 22 (::
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1180 s.v. s>r6 unit of measurement); Zendjirli, Panammuwa 1
(Donner-R. Inschriften 214: 5) pl. yr[; Panammuwa 2 (Donner-R. Inschriften 215: 6, 9) sg. abs.
hr[; EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Hermopolis; Saqqara), Lidzbarski Urk.
(Donner-R. Inschriften 236: 15); Tell Halaf 1, 4, 6; Bauer-Meissner Pachtvertrag 13; JArm.
inscr. pl. abs. s>ryn (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 315; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1180); JArm.
at;r][‰;s], pl. ÷yri[;s], DSS (Dalman Wb. 411a, at;r][oc], and 297a at;r][‰;s]; Beyer Arm. Texte
717); CPArm. pl. s>ryn (Schulthess Lex. 138b); Syr. se>aµret\aµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 489a); Mnd.
sara 2 (Drower-M. Dictionary 315a; NöldekeMand. Gramm. 115); NeoSyr. saréÆta, sarta, sartéÆta
(Maclean 228b); NeoArm. (Bergsträsser Gloss. 78; Spitaler Gloss. 92b); Heb. hr;[oc].
*r['c:] Heb. r[;ce; denominative r[c; probably a primary noun; EmpArm.; Pehl. (Junker
Frahang 10: 3, 5; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 315); JArm., DSS ar;[} c'/s' (Dalman Wb. 411a, 296b;
Beyer Arm. Texte 717); CPArm. r[s (Schulthess Lex. 138b); Syr. sa>raµ (Brockelmann Lexicon
488b); NeoSyr. sara (Maclean 228b); Mnd. sara 1 (Drower-M. Dictionary 315a); pl. saria
(Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 172); NeoArm. sa>ra (Bergsträsser Gloss. 78); Bauer-Leander BArm.
182x: the same in the cstr.; sf. Hre[]c', var-iant Hre[} c', Or. sŒ>areµh (Bauer-Leander BArm. 45f),
masc.: hair, collective Da 430; r['c] vare hair of the head Da 327 79, GenAp xx: 3. †
v: —1. equivalent to Heb. v when it corresponds to Proto-Semitic sû and Arb. s; as in lav, rav,
[b'v] etc.
—2. when v corresponds to Proto-Semitic t\ and Arb. t\, then it occurs in BArm. as → t.
—3. corresponds to Babylonian sû (Assyrian s) in rX'av'l]Be, rX'av'f]l]Be.
lav: the same in Heb.; OArm., Panammuwa 1 (Donner-R. Inschriften 214; 4, 12, 23); EmpArm.
, EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Driver Arm. Docs.), Saqqara
(Donner-R. Inschriften 266: 2); Hermopolis 1: 3; 6: 7; 8: 7 (Degen-Röllig-Müller Neue
Ephemeris 1: 11); Aimé-Giron 52: 4; Asshur Ostracon (Donner-R. Inschriften 233: 12); Nab.,
Palm. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 286; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1095); JArm., DSS (Dalman
Wb. 412a; Beyer Arm. Texte 698); Sam. sûwl (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 11b); CPArm. (Schulthess
Lex. 198a; Gramm. §145); Syr. sûeµ<l (Brockelmann Lexicon 748a; see also Sokoloff, DSD 7
(2000), 105); Mnd. ŠAL (Drower-M. Dictionary 441b; Nöldeke Mand.Gramm. 255); NeoArm.
sû>l (Bergsträsser Gloss. 87; Spitaler Gloss. 93b); also NeoSyr.
pe: pf. laev] Da 210, variant laev;, pl. an:l]aev]; impf. sf. ÷/knÒl,a} v]yI (Bauer-Leander BArm.
41t); pt. laev;.
—1. to require, with accusative of the thing Da 211; with l] of the person 210; with two
accusatives Ezr 721.
—2. to ask, with l] of the person Ezr 59; with accusative of the thing *µvu 510, zr; Da 227. †
Der. *hl;aev], n.m. laeyTil]a'v].
*hl;aev:] lav; the same in Heb.; Deir Alla 2: 15, 16 (Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1098);
JArm. at;l]aev] (Dalman Wb. 412a); CPArm. s<l< and sûyl< (Schulthess Lex. 198b); Syr. sûe<letaµ
(Brockelmann Lexicon 748a); Mnd. sûulta 1 (Drower-M. Dictionary 454b; Nöldeke Mand.
Gramm. 110); Bauer-Leander BArm. 186y, Canaanite: det. at;l]aev], variant aT;-, Bauer-Leander
BArm. 16z: request, question Da 414 parallel with hm;G:t]Pi decision (see Montgomery Daniel
236f; Plöger KAT xviii: 68 :: others, who take it as meaning matter, affair; see Bauer-Leander
BArm. 16z; ZüBi; Bentzen; Lebram, “arrangement”; TOB; NRSV: decision is given; NEB ::
sentence is rendered; REB: the sentence pronounced :: the issue has been determined). †
laeyTil]a'v;] the same in Heb.; Ezr 5 , var-iant ˜lv' (as Heb. Hg 1

2 22); Sept. Salaqihl,
12.14
Josephus Salaqivhlo" (Schalit Namenwörterbuch 104); Western Semitic.; Neo-Babylonian

Sðal-ti-ilu (i.e. AN), see Tallqvist Namenbuch 187; for an explanation cf. Heb.; n.m., the father
of lb,B;ruzÒ. †
*rav: Heb. rav; EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Sachau Arm. Pap
. 76, i: B, 7; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 287; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1098 s.v. sû<r1); JArm.
(Dalman Wb. 412b), and CPArm. itpe., to remain over; also ittaf. (Schulthess Lex. 199a); JArm.
pa. to leave over.
Der. *ra;v].
*ra;v:] rav; the same in Heb.; EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; see Donner-R.
Inschriften 270 B: 5; Saqqara 38: 20; 48: 3); Palm., JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 287;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1098 s.v. sû<r2); tyra EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling
Arm. Pap.; Saqqara); Nab. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 288; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1099);
JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 412b; Beyer Arm. Texte 699); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 198b); Syr.
(Brockelmann Lexicon 774a); Bauer-Leander BArm. 187d: the same in the cstr., det. ar;a;v]:
rest, remains (collective).
—1. hs;p]r‰; Hyl'gÒr'b] ar;a;v]W Da 77.19.
—2. with genitive: —a) of people Da 218 Ezr 49.17 616; —b) of animals Da 712; —c) of a place
Ezr 410; —d) of silver and gold Ezr 718;—e) of requirements Ezr 720. †
*bbv: the same in Heb.; Akk. sûabaµbu, something like to glow, or to dry up (see AHw. 1118a; cf.
CADŠ/1: 2, sûabaµbu A, to roast, burn); sûibbatu burning (AHw. 1226b; cf. CADŠ/2: 375a, and
then Š/3: 9, sûimtu paint, mark, branding iron); Arb. sûabba to set light to, kindle a fire
(Wehr-Cowan 451a).
Der. *bybiv].
jbv: Heb. I jbv, < Arm. (Wagner 299); Akk. sûubbuhÉu (D), to praise God (Neo-Babylonian;
AHw. 1256b, Arm. loanword; cf. CADŠ/3 sûubbuhÉu, vb., less certainly, with a reference to von
Soden, Orientalia 46: 195); Arm. pa., as in EmpArm., Palm., Hatra, to praise
(Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1100); cf. Palm. adverb tyjyb (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 288;
751a); NeoSyr. sukh\a praise (Maclean 300b); Mnd. SðBH, SðHB (Drower-M. Dictionary 447a;
450; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 143, 236).
pa: pf. T;j]B'v', tjeB]v', variantSecunda tjiB'v' (JArm.), pl. WjB'v', Or. sûibbih\uµ (Bauer-Leander
BArm. 133k, 134s); pt. jB'v'm], Or. masûabbeh\ (Bauer-Leander BArm. 133i-k): to praise: Daniel
praises his God Da 223, Nebuchadnezzar praises the God of heaven 431.34, Belshazzar praises his
own gods of wood and stone 54.23. †
*fbv: the same in Heb.; EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.) fyb
tightly woven web (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 288; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1101); JArm.
inscr. to beat with a stick (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 288; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1100 s.v.
sûbt\1); JArm. to strike, beat (Dalman Wb. 413a); Syr. pa. to emboss, produce work in relief
? Der. *fb'v].
*fb'v] or *fbev] (Bauer-Leander BArm. 183g): fbv, or a primary noun; Heb. fb,ve; OArm., Tell
Fekherye 23 sûbt\ zy nyrgal staff, rod for punishment (cf. Heb. fb,ve 1e), plague; Akk. sûibt\u
plague, epidemic (AHw 1228a; CADŠ/2: 387, sûibt\u A; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1100 s.v.
sûbt\2); JArm., DSS af;b]vi and af;b]vu (but see Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 105) tribe (Dalman Wb.
413b; Beyer Arm. Texte 700); CPArm. sûobt\a rod, and tribe (Schulthess Lex. 200a); Syr. sûabt\aµ
rod, plague, tribe (Brockelmann Lexicon 751b); NeoSyr. sûoµt\aµ; Mnd. sûibt\aµ staff, rod, disease
(Drower-M. Dictionary 459a); metaphorically punishment, affliction; cf. Akk. sûibtu (Schulthess
ZA 24: 57); JArm., Syr. and Mnd. also tribe; Bauer-Leander BArm. 183g: pl. cstr. yfeb]vi: tribe (
cf. Heb., s.v. 2; HAL 1293a; HALOT 1389b) laer;c]yI ˜vi Ezr 617. †
*bybiv:] bbv; Heb. bybiv;; Akk. Standard and Late Babylonian sûibuµbu spark (perhaps < Arm.;
AHw. 1229b; CADŠ/2: 399b); JArm. ab;ybiv] flame (Dalman Wb. 413b); Syr. (Brockelmann
Lexicon 750a); Mnd. sûambibia pl. (Drower-M. Dictionary 443a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 76);
originally strip, tongue (cf. Heb. ÷/vl; 2); Bauer-Leander BArm. 188h: det. ab;ybiv], pl. ÷ybiybiv]:
flame, yDi ˜v] ar;Wn Da 322, rWn yDi ÷ybiybiv] 79, cf. bwhl ybyb (= Heb. bh'l', Sukenik Megillot
Genuzot 2 (1950), viii: 13; also cf. Job 185; Sir 810 4519; see Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 105). †
*[b'v:] Heb. [b'v,; OArm., masc. Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften 222 A: 21–24, 27; 223 A: 1, 5,
6); fem. sûb>[t] Zakir (202 A: 8); EmpArm., EgArm. masc. and fem. (Kraeling Arm. Pap.); Pehl.
(Junker Frahang 29: 7); Nab., Palm., JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 289 s.v. [bI;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1102 s.v. sûb>6); JArm. a[;b]vi/vu, DSS (Dalman Wb. 414a; Beyer
Arm. Texte 700; see further Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 105); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 200a, sûwb>
and sûbw>; see also Gramm. 51); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 11b); Old Syr. sûwb>< (Black 219); Syr.
sûaba>aµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 752b); NeoSyr. (Maclean 299a); Mnd. sûuba (Drower-M.
Dictionary 452b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 18); NeoArm. sûob>a (Bergsträsser Gloss. 88; Spitaler
Gloss. 93b); basic form *sûab>; Bauer-Leander BArm. 250k: fem. h[;b]vi, Or. sûub>aµ, cstr. t['b]vi:
cardinal number: seven Da 413.20.22.29 Ezr 714, h[;b]vi (→ Adj') seven times Da 319. †
qbv: Heb., in personal names: → n.m. qbe/v, qB;v]yI; Arm., EmpArm., EgArm. (Ah\iqar 82, 90,
162, 171, 175f, 193; Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Driver Arm. Docs.; Hermopolis 2:
15; 3: 4, 10; Saqqara; Donner-R. Inschriften 266: 7); Xanthos 136: 18; Pehl. (Junker Frahang
21: 6; Herzfeld Paikuli 945/6); Nab., Hatra, JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 289;
GenAp. xxii: 25; CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 200b); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 11b); Syr.
(Brockelmann Lexicon 753a); NeoSyr. (Maclean 299a); Mnd. SðBQ to let, leave behind,
abandon (Drower-M. Dictionary 447b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 218); Matthew 2746
sabacqanei (TWNT 1: 5087).
pe: impv. pl. Wqb&uv]; inf. qB'v]mi: to leave behind Da 412.20.23; ah;l;aÔAtyBe td'ybi[} l' Ezr 67
to leave alone, or to give a free hand to; Gunneweg KAT xix/1: 103; GenAp xx: 10: pe.
passive. †
hitpe: impf. qybiT]v]Ti, Or. -beq (Bauer-Leander BArm. 107d): to be left, pass on to Da 244 (
GenAp xxii: 20 pt. passive pl.). †
vbv; MHeb. pu. to become entangled, be put into disorder (Dalman Wb. 414b); JArm. (Dalman
Wb. 414b): vbvI to persuade, tangle; vbvII to produce tendrils; av;b]vi tendril (cf. bveb]v' to
produce tendrils, Dalman loc. cit.); CPArm. sûw(b)sûb< tendril of the vine (cf. JArm. aT;b]v,/v
twig, Dalman Wb. 418b; see Schulthess Lex. 201a, Ruzûicûka 108; but see Sokoloff, DSD7
(2000), 105); Syr. sûebéÆsûtaµ tendril (Brockelmann Lexicon 754); Mnd. SðBSð to entangle; and SðWSð
to entangle, pa. to beguile, bewitch (Drower-M. Dictionary 448a; 457b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm.
49, 272); > Arb. sûwsû II to muddle, confuse, confound (Schulthess Homonyme 90; Wehr-Cowan
493a; Fraenkel 250); Akk. sûabas/sûu to be angry (AHw. 1118b; CADŠ/1: 4a); for CPArm. sûbsû to
hasten, see Schulthess Lex. 201a; and for Syr. sûbsû pa. to flatter, see Brockelmann Lexicon 754b.
hitpa: pt. pl. ÷yviB]T'v]mi (Bauer-Leander BArm. 55a): to become perplexed Da 59,
Theodotion ejtaravcqh to be terrified, become anxious (ZüBi; Bentzen; Lebram; Plöger KAT
xviii: 80; NEB: his nobles were perplexed; REB: were in a state of confusion; NRSV: his lords
were perplexed). †
*lgv: Heb.; ? denominative from → *lg¾ve: not attested in Arm.
*lg¾v:e → Heb. II lgv; loanword < Akk. sûa ekalli queen (AHw. 193a s.v. 2; CAD E: 61f).
Landsberger in Baumgartner Festschr. (1967) 198–204; for the phonetic difficulties in this
borrowing see Kaufman 97 note 335; Palm. in n. fem. < divine name lg (Stark Personal Names
50, 193a); Bauer-Leander BArm. 186a: pl. sf. Htel;gÒve, Jt;l;gÒve, concubine, of the king; cf.
MHeb. ÷/lgÒvi concubine (Dalman Wb. 415a, but see Sokoloff DSD 7 (2000), 106); Theodotion
aiJ pallakaiv: rival wife, concubine Da 52f.23, always with hn:jel]; the negative meaning occurs
first in later sources (Landsberger op. cit. 204). †
rdv: EmpArm., EgArm. (pa. Ah\iqar 165); Saqqara (:: itpe. Cowley Arm. Pap. 38: 4 s.v. sûdr ); 2
Pehl. (Junker Frahang 23: 3; Herz-feld Paikuli 950); Palm., JArm. inscr.: to send (Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 292; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1112 s.v. sûdr1); JArm. (Dalman Wb. 416a s.v.
rdIII; Beyer Arm. Texte 703); Sam. rds (Ben H\ayyim Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 549); Syr.
(Brockelmann Lexicon 759a); Mnd. SðDR (Drower-M. Dictionary 450a; Nöldeke Mand.
Gramm. 221); NeoSyr. to send (Maclean 201a s.v. msûdr); NeoArm. sûattar (Bergsträsser Gloss.
93: Spitaler Gloss. 94a); MHeb. hitp. to exert oneself (Dalman Wb. 461a); JArm. itpa. to be
opposed to (Dalman Wb. 416a s.v. rdvI); contrast Arb. sdr to untie the hair (Nöldeke ZDMG
40: 735); cf. jlv.
hitpa: pt. rD'T'v]mi (Bauer-Leander BArm. 55a): to strive, with l] and inf. Da 615; :: Willi, in
Zimmerli Fschr. 543f, from root rrd sûaf †
Jr'd]v:' for the origin and meaning of the name see the same form in Heb., where reference is
made to the derivation of Zadok from Old Persian; the Babylonian name of hy:nÒn"j} (Da 16f): Da 2
49 312–30 (cf. Nyberg in Bentzen 17), see Reicke-Rost Hw. 1640.
†
hwv: Heb. I and II hwv to make the same, lay, lie down; Arm. to be the same, be worthy;
EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.); Arebsun (Donner-R. Inschriften
264: 7) to turn into; Palm., JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 293; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 1116 s.v. sûwy1); Nab. to lay, set (Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1117 s.v. sûwy3); to
stretch out, lay, set; pa in JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 416b s.v. awvI; Beyer Arm. Texte 704 s.v. yw
2); CPArm. sûw< (Schulthess Lex. 202b); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 11b); Syr. (Brockelmann
Lexicon 761b); NeoSyr. (Maclean 300b); to make the same, turn into, be worthy; JArm., DSS
(Dalman Wb. 416b s.v. awvI pa.; Beyer Arm. Texte 704 s.v. sûwy1); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Literary
and Oral Tradition 2: 543; Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 760b); NeoSyr. (Maclean 300b);
NeoArm. (Bergsträsser Gloss. 86; Spitaler Gloss. 93b); Mnd. ŠWA (Drower-M. Dictionary
451b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 260f); etpa. to be laid down, be made the same, become the
same; JArm. (Dalman Wb. 416b s.v. aw I); Syr. to be made (Brockelmann Lexicon 761b); Mnd.
(Drower-M.Dictionary 452b; NöldekeMand. Gramm. 369).
pe: pf. passive yWIv:' K ywIv] or ywIv,, Or. sûawéÆ (Bauer-Leander BArm. 156s): to be the same,
passive to be made the same, with µ[i Da 521 :: Q, see pa. †
pa: pf. pl. yÒWIv:' Q wyWIv' (Bauer-Leander BArm. 159r); for K see pe.; to make the same, with
accusative and µ[i Da 521. †
hitpa: impf. hWET'v]yI to be made, with two accusatives Da 329. †
*rWv: the same in Heb.; OArm., Zakir (Donner-R. Inschriften 202 A: 10, sg. abs. sûr, 17 emph.
sûwr<); EmpArm., EgArm., abs. sg. sûwr, emph. sûwr< (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Saqqara); Hatra
(Jean-H. Dictionnaire 319 s.v. sûrII; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1190 s.v. sûr1); ? Palm. in
the personal name sûwyr<, Greek Sewira (Stark Personal Names 51a, 113b); JArm., DSS
(Dalman Wb. 418b, ar;Wv; Beyer Arm. Texte 705); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 204a); Syr. sûuµraµ
(Brockelmann Lexicon 766a); Mnd. sûura 3 (Drower-M. Dictionary 456b; Nöldeke Mand.
Gramm. 105); NeoSyr. sûura (Maclean 302b); NeoArm. suµra (Spitaler Gloss. 93a);
Bauer-Leander BArm. 212x: pl. det. Ezr 412 Y:r'Wv, Q aY:r'Wv (K yrwv, → llk sûaf and hrv
pa.), 413 h/aY:r'Wv and vs.16 hY:r'Wv rd. sf. Hyr'Wv (Bauer-Leander BArm. 79s, 371 on p. 212x),
masc.: wall Ezr 412f.16. †
*yk;nÒv'Wv: Heb. II *÷v'Wv, pl. det. ayEk;nÒv'Wv; for the ending see Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 106:
place name + Persian adjectival k + Arm. gentilic; cf. EmpArm., EgArm. ÷knws (Cowley Arm.
Pap. 33: 6, cf. p. 82; 67: 3; 22: 33 from ÷wEs] (→ Heb. hnEwEs)] Aswan; Schaeder 221, 72; Telegdi
243; Eilers 40; Bauer-Leander BArm. 196d, 212x: resident of Susa (Driver Arm. Docs. 9: 1
÷vwv) Ezr 49. †
tjv: the same in Heb.; OArm., Zendjirli, Panammuwa 1 (pa. Donner-R. Inschriften 214: 27, 28,
31, and haf. in line 29, to destroy); EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar 19, 155 haf.;
Jean-H. Dictionnaire 295 s.v. tjI; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1122); JArm., DSS (Dalman
Wb. 420b to mutilate, maim; Beyer Arm. Texte 705); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 772a); cf. fjv
, but see Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 106; OArm., Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften 222 A: 32) hitpe.
fjt[y] to be ruined (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 295 s.v. tj; but see Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary,
under root ffj); Syr. pa. to spoil (Brockelmann Lexicon 768a); cf. Eth. sah\at\a; Mnd. SðHT\ to
have a miscarriage, abandon (Drower-M. Dictionary 450b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 233).
pe: pt. passive fem. ht;yjiv]: to spoil, pt. passive, corrupted, bad Da 29, fem. sbst.,
something like “wickedness, mischief” (JArm. at;yjiv], Sir 3011 pl. sf. wytwtyj; see Dalman Wb.
419b, attyj; see also Sokoloff loc. cit.); DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 705) Da 65, perhaps also 29 (
→ hbzk). †
bzIyve: loanword < Akk. sûuµzubu, usûeµzib, pt. musûeµzib, sûaf from ezeµbu (AHw. 268b; CAD E: 416),
corresponding to Heb. bz[ (Zimmern 69; Kaufman 105); EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm.
Pap.; Ah\iqar 46; Aimé-Giron 32: 1) Tema; Nab., Palm. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 296;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1119) in personal names; see Sachau Arm Pap.; Aimé-Giron;
Tema bz µlx (Gib-son Syrian Semitic Inscriptions p. 149: 11); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb.
421b, bz«yve; Beyer Arm. Texte 706); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 203b, sûwzb); Syr. (Brockelmann
Lexicon 762b, sûwzb); Mnd. (Drower-M. Dictionary 454a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 132, 138,
212); personal name bzl tyb Hermopolis, Heb. laeb]zÒyvim] and ÷B;zÒv'WbnÒ; Bauer-Leander BArm.
142m.
pf. bzIyve Da 328, byzIyve 628, variant byzIv;e impf. bzIyvey,Ò sf. JN:bizÒyvey,Ò ÷/knÒbizÒyvey,Ò inf. sf. Jt;WbzÉyve,
Hte-, an:t&e- (variant an:t&;-, Bauer-Leander BArm. 73r !); pt. bzIyvem] (variant byzI-) to rescue,
someone Da 317.28 615.17, with ÷mi 317 621, with dy"A÷mi 315.17 628b, abs. 628a. †
ayxiyve: loanword < Akk. sûuµs\uµ, usûeµs\éÆ to cause to go out, sûaf. from (w)as\uµ (AHw. 1478a; CAD
A/2: 356; Zimmern 70; Kaufman 104; but rather from Northwest Semitic, see Sokoloff, DSD 7
(2000), 106), corresponding to Heb. ax;y:; EmpArm., Pehl. (Junker Frahang 20: 4, app. 38;
Jean-H. Dictionnaire 317); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 422a, yxiyve to finish; Beyer Arm. Texte
707); CPArm. sûws\y to annihilate (Schulthess Lex. 205 s.v. sûys\y); sbst., JArm. haxy (Dalman
Wb. 422a); CPArm. sûys\wy< end (Schulthess Lex. 205a); JArm. and Syr. a[y (Dalman Wb. 185b;
Brockelmann Lexicon 305a); Mnd. Y>A II (Drower-M. Dictionary 193a).
pf. axiyve K, yxiyve Q (Bauer-Leander BArm. 169j): to complete, finish Ezr 615 rd. with Sept. and
Vulgate pl. wyxiyve. †
*bkv: the same in Heb.; EmpArm., EgArm. impf. <sûkb; Pehl. (Junker Frahang 19: 18; Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 299; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1132); JArm. bk'v] and bkev, DSS (Dalman
Wb. 423a; Beyer Arm. Texte 707); CPArm. pt. sûkyb (Schulthess Lex. 205b); Syr. sûekeb
(Brockelmann Lexicon 775a); Mnd. SðKB (Drower-M. Dictionary 465; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm.
219).
Der. * bK'v]mi.
jkv: Heb. I jkv to forget; Arm. to find; Ug. (Aistleitner Wb. 2863; Gordon Textbook §19:
2412); Akk. sûekuµm (AHw. 1210a :: CADŠ/2: 268a, and then 28a, where this vb. is taken quite
differently to mean “to allow to irrigate”, s.v. sûaquÆ B, 4b); EmpArm., EgArm. haf. (Cowley
Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar 34, 76; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Driver Arm. Docs.; Hermopolis; Aimé-Giron
88: 7); Uruk 16, 41 àsû-ka-hÉi-i; Nisa itp. jkta (Cowley Arm. Pap. 27: 2, 13); Nab. and Palm.
(Brockelmann Grundriss 1: 268); Pehl. af. (Junker Frahang 20: 13); Nab., Palm. (Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 299; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1132); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 423a; Beyer
Arm. Texte 707); CPArm. esûkeh\ (Schulthess Lex. 205b; Gramm. 43); Sam. jka (Kahle Bem.
24); Syr. <esûkah\ (Brockelmann Lexicon 775b); Mnd. SðKA/H (Drower-M. Dictionary 464b,
465b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 234); NeoArm. sûch\ (Bergsträsser Gloss. 88; Spitaler Gloss. 94a:
sûcðh)\ ; NeoSyr. (Maclean 202b s.v. msûkh\); itp. also JArm., CPArm., Syr. and Mnd. (see above).
hitpe: pf. jk'T]v]hi, 3rd. fem. tj'k&'T]v]hi Da 511, 2nd. masc. T]j'k&'T]v]hi 527 (Bauer-Leander
BArm. 133f.i, m, n; see also Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 106, who refers to his article in
Leshonenu 34 (1970), 230): to be found, with B] Da 511f.14 624 Ezr 62, with l[' Da 65, with l] (
CPArm., Syr., see Bauer-Leander BArm. 338 1) 235 (→ l] 8) 623; to be found to be 527. †
haf: pf. 1st. sg. tj'k&'v]h', pl. WjK&'v]h', h/an:j]K&'v]h'; impf. jK'v]h'T], jK'v]h'nÒ; inf. hj;K;v]h';
Bauer-Leander BArm. §41c, i, j, w; to find someone, with accusative Da 225, with l] 612; to find
something, with l] (→ hitpe.) 65f (66 pf., Bauer-Leander BArm. 287n), with yDi to discover that
Ezr 415.19; to get (EgArm., Syr.) 716. †
llkv: → llk
÷kv: the same in Heb.; EmpArm., EgArm. (Kraeling Arm. Pap. 12: 2: by ÷k ahla why); JArm.
Wb. 423b, ÷ykev]; Beyer Arm. Texte 708); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 776a); Sam. sûakan, af.
causative in Sam. and Syr. (see above); Mnd. pe. (Drower-M. Dictionary 466a; Nöldeke Mand.
Gramm. 215).
pe: impf. 3rd. pl. fem. ÷n:K]v]y:I to dwell (aY:r'P]xi) Da 418. †
pa: pf. ÷Kiv': to cause to dwell (God Hmev], see Heb. pi.) Ezr 612. †
Der. *÷K'v]mi.
*hlv: the same in Heb.; Akk. sûeluÆ IV to become careless < Arm. (AHw. 1211a; CADŠ/2: 274,
sûeluÆ A to be negligent, careless, inattentive); OArm. sûly, Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften 224: 5;
Jean-H. Dictionnaire 302; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1142); hl;v], JArm. (Dalman Wb.
424a s.v. alvII); Sam. yl (Ben H\ayyim Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 566); CPArm.
(Schulthess Lex. 206); Syr. sûly (Brockelmann Lexicon 778b); JArm., CPArm., Syr., NeoSyr. to
be negligent, rest (Maclean 306b); JArm. and Sam. to err, forget; Mnd. ŠLA I (Drower-M.
Dictionary 446b).
Der. hlev], Wlv;, hw:lev].
hlev:] Or. sûaµleh, so also Codex Cairensis; variant (see BHS p. xlviii and critical apparatus
Secunda
for Da 41): hl, Heb. wlev;; CPArm. sûl< (Schulthess Lex 206b); Syr. sûeleµ (Brockelmann Lexicon
778b); Mnd. sûalia (Drower-M. Dictionary 442; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 164); Bauer-Leander
BArm. 186x: calm, at ease Da 41. †
hluv:; Da 3 29; traditionally with Q, equivalent to → Wlv;, or rd. hlev; < hl;aev]; rather adopt cj., →
*hL;ci. †
Wlv;: hlv; Heb. Wlv&; masc., and hw:l]v'; Akk. sûéÆluÆ/éÆtu negligence; loanword < Arm. (AHw. 1237a;
CADŠ/2: 453b sûiluÆtu; Beyer Arm. Texte 710); JArm. ay:h} l]v' and at;ywIl]v', at;wÒl]v' rest
(Dalman Wb. 424b; Sokoloff DSD 7 (2000), 107); Syr. sûalyaµ, sûelyuµtaµ rest (Brockelmann
Lexicon 778b), sûulaµyaµ cessation (Brockelmann Lexicon 779a); JArm. at;Wlv; mistake, error;
Bauer-Leander BArm. 245e: wl‰v; Ezr 69 (poor variant Wlv‰,; Bauer-Leander BArm. 24m), pl. sf.
Jt;w:l]v,‰; poor variant Da 424 for Jt;wÒlev:] fem.: negligence Da 65 Ezr 422 69. †
*hw:lev:] hlv; Heb. hw:l]v'; EmpArm., EgArm. (Ah\iqar 130) *sûlyh, pl. sûlyn calm (Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 302; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1142); JArm. at;ywIl]v', at;wÒylev] calm
(Dalman Wb. 424b, 425b); Canaanite, Bauer-Leander BArm. 186y; sf. Jt;wÒlev,] variant
Theodotion, Pesh., Vulgate Jt;w:l]v,‰; → Wlv;: prosperity Da 424. †
jlv: Heb. I jlv; OArm., Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften 222 A: 3, 30; B: 25, 34, 37; 223 B: 6;
224: 8, 17, 21); Zakir (202 B: 21); EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Behistun 25, 38;
Ah\iqar 62, 201; Driver Arm. Docs.; Hermopolis; Saqqara 7); Asshur Ostracon 13, 19f; Uruk 30:
aŒsû-làhÉ-te-e; Pehl. (Herzfeld Paikuli 964); JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 300;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1137); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 224b; Beyer Arm. Texte 709;
see also Sokoloff, DSD7 (2000), 107 for the use of pa>>el in the western dialects); CPArm.
(Schulthess Lex. 207a); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 11b); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 780b);
Mnd. SðHL II (Drower-M. Dictionary 450; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 270); cf. rd; for jlv to
skin, strip off, see Heb.; Arb. sûlhÉ; JArm., Syr., Mnd. (see above), NeoSyr. (Maclean 306b);
CPArm. h\lsû (Schulthess Lex. 65a).
pe: pf. jl'v], pl. Wjl&'v], ÷WTj]l'v], an:j]l&'v]; impf. jl'v]yI; pf. passive j'yliv].
—1. to send (of God) Ja'l]m' Da 328 623, a letter, a report Ezr 411.17f 56f.17, ad;yÒAydi aS;P' Da 524
sent from the presence of God; abs. (EgArm.) to send an order Ezr 613, followed by a finite vb. (
→ [dy haf.) 414; with l] and inf. Da 32; passive j'yliv] (Cowley Arm. Pap. 21: 3) Ezr 714 (cj.
T;j]yliv] Ehrlich).
—2. used metaphorically, dy" jl'v] with l] and inf, to stretch out the hand (Donner-R. Inschriften
222 B: 34; see Heb.; Gunneweg KAT xix/1: 104) meaning to dare Ezr 612. †
flv: the same in Heb.; EmpArm., EgArm. to rule, make oneself master (Kraeling Arm. Pap. 4:
20); Nab., Palm. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 302; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1142); JArm., DSS
(Dalman Wb. 425a; Beyer Arm. Texte 709); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 11b) and CPArm. fl'v]
(Schulthess Lex. 207b, to make oneself master); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 781a, to rule,
suppress); Mnd. SðLT\ (Drower-M. Dictionary 468a, to rule; pa. to appoint; Nöldeke Mand.
Gramm. 356).
pe: pf. flev], pl. Wfl&iv]; impf. fl‰'v]yI, fl'v]Ti.
—1. to rule over, with B] Da 239, to have power over, with B] 327; abs. 57.16 (parallel with aw:h}
fyLiv' 529, cf. Bauer-Leander BArm. §81i-q).
—2. to make oneself master of, with B] 625. †
haf: pf. sf. Jf;l]v]h', Hfel]v]h', Or. hasûilt\-: to make someone the ruler over, with B] Da 238,
with l[' 248. †
Der. *÷/fl]vi, ÷f;l]v;, fyLiv'.
*÷/fl]v:i flv; the same in Heb.; EmpArm., Nab. sûltwn command (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 302;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1142, both s.v. ÷flv); JArm. an:/fl]vi ruler (Dalman Wb. 425a);
DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 710); CPArm. prefect (Schulthess Lex. 207b); basic form *sûult\aµn (→
÷f;l]v;); Canaanite, Bauer-Leander BArm. 10t, 195z: pl. cstr. ynEfol]v:i official of high standing,
at;n:ydim] ˜vi provincial administrators Da 32f. †
÷f;l]v:; Or. sûult\aµn Da 4 sûilt\aµn 76: fl: EmpArm., EgArm. (Degen-Röllig-Müller Neue
31,
Ephemeris 3, 48: 12, emph. sûlt\n<); Palm. emph. sûlt\n< might (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 302;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1142); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 425a, an:f;l]v; dominion,
power, ruler; Beyer Arm. Texte 710); Syr. sûult\aµnaµ< might, dominion (Brockelmann Lexicon
781a); Mnd. sûul-t\ana (Drower-M. Dictionary 454b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 136); > Arb. sult\aµn
(Lokotsch no. 1945; Littmann Morgenländische Wörter 69); NeoArm. sûult\oµna (Bergsträsser
Gloss. 90); Bauer-Leander BArm. 195z: the same in the cstr., det. an:f;l]v;, sf. Jn:f;l]v,; ÷/hnÒf‰Él]v;,
pl. det. aY:n"f;l]v;: dominion Da 333 419.31 627b 76.12.14 (cj. 22, cf. vs. 10 and 14).26f; ˜v; ytiWkl]m' 627a;
pl. powers, empires 727. †
fyLiv:' the same in Heb.; EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Driver
Arm. Docs.), Samaria Papyri; Pehl. (Junker Frahang 12: 1; sûlyt\<; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 302;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1143); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 425b, af;yLiv' powerful,
mighty, ruler; Beyer Arm. Texte 710); GenAp xxii: 24; Sam. sûellet\ (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 11b);
CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 207b); Syr. sûalléÆt\aµ< (Brockelmann Lexicon 781b); Mnd. sûalit\(a)
(Drower-M. Dictionary 442b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 124); NeoSyr. (Maclean 307a);
powerful, mighty, ruler, authorised (EgArm., Palm. (Corpus Ins. Sem. 2: 4214), Syr.);
Bauer-Leander BArm. 192e: det. af;yLiv', pl. ÷yfiyLiv' Ezr 420, ÷fiLiv' Da 423.
—1. powerful, mighty Da 210 (Sept. sbst.), with B] (÷ykil]m') Ezr 420; the lord over (with
reference to God, with B]) tWkl]m'b] a;yL;[i fyLiv av;n:a}: Da 414.22.29 521; abs. (aY:m'v]) 423; sbst.
officer 215, ruler 529 (parallel with flev] 57.16).
—2. with l] and inf. (Bauer-Leander BArm. 328h) it is permitted (CPArm.) Ezr 724. †
µlv: the same in Heb.; OArm., Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften 222 B: 24); EmpArm., EgArm.
(Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Driver Arm. Docs.); Samaria Ostraca 1: 9; 8: 10;
Palm., JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 303 s.v. µlI; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1144);
JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 426a, µl'v], µylev]; Beyer Arm. Texte 711); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex.
207b); Syr. sûleµm (Brockelmann Lexicon 782a); Mnd. SðLM (Drower-M. Dictionary 468a);
NeoSyr. to be complete, be intact, be peaceful (Maclean 307a); af. causative in JArm., Syr. and
Mnd. to deliver up.
pe: pf. µl‰iv] (poor variant µyl‰iv], Bauer-Leander BArm. 103w): to be finished Ezr 516. †
haf: pf. sf. Hm'l]v]h', variant Hm;- (Bauer-Leander BArm. 81z); impv. µlev]h': to make
complete, deliver completely Ezr 719, to pay out (Montgomery Daniel 262f, 265) Da 526 ::
others who take it to mean to make an end of, finish, or to abandon (so hif. Heb. µyliv]hi Is 3812f
). †
Der. µl;v].
µl;v:] µlv; Heb. µ/lv;; OArm., Tell Fekherye 8 (Akk. sûulum); Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften
224: 8; Fitzmyer Sefire p. 111); EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.;
Driver Arm. Docs.; Ah\iqar 110, 120); Hermopolis passim; Elephantine (Donner-R. Inschriften
270 A: 7); Pehl. (Junker Frahang 26: 5, sûrm<); Nab., Palm., JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire
303 s.v. µlII; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1146 s.v. sûlm2); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 426a,
am;l;v]; Greek selam, salam; Beyer Arm. Texte 711 s.v. µl sûalaµm); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex.
208a); Sam. sûeµlaóm (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 11b); Syr. sûelaµmaµ< (Brockelmann Lexicon 782b); Mnd.
sûlam(a), also sûlum (Drower-M. Dictionary 467a, 467b); NeoSyr. sûlama (Maclean 307a);
Bauer-Leander BArm. 187d: det. am;l;v], sf. ÷/km]l‰;v]: welfare, health, hail! (used in greetings)
Ezr 417 57, aG«c]yI ÷/km]l‰;v] Da 331 626: ? also µl;v]Bi Ezr 47 (Schaeder 16f :: Bergsträsser OLZ 35
(1932), 204f; Rudolph Esra und Nehemia 34, he is thinking µlev;WryBi :: Gunneweg KAT xix/1:
83: masc. proper name). †
*µvu: Heb. I µve; primary noun, Semitic; OArm., Zendjirli, Panammuwa 1: (Donner-R. Inschriften
214: 16, 21); Tell Fekherye 11f, 16; Zakir (202 C: 2); Sefire (222 C: 25; 223 B: 7, µa);
EmpArm., EgArm. (Cow-ley Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar 85, 116, 141, 170; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Driver
Arm. Docs.; Hermopolis 1, 6); Nerab (Donner-R. Inschriften 225: 10; 226: 3); Asshur Ostracon
(233: 12); Behistun 2, 12 (for Akk. sûumu); Tema (228: 14, 22); Samaria, Nisa, Asia Minor
(Lidzbarski Eph. 1: 323); Pehl. (Junker Frahang 30: 41; Herzfeld Paikuli 966); Nab., Palm.,
Hatra, JArm. inscr., Dura (Altheim 1f, µw; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 306; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 1155–9); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 427a, am;v] and µ/v; Beyer Arm. Texte 712: pl.
÷hm, cstr., and before sf. thm); Sam. sûam (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 11b); CPArm. sûm and sûym
(Schulthess Lex. 209a; Gramm. §42, 2A: 1); Syr. sûemaµ and *sûem (Brockelmann Lexicon
784b); Mnd. sûuma and >usûma, >sûuma (Drower-M. Dictionary 454b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 33,
161); NeoArm. e/usûma (Bergsträsser Gloss. 90 s.v. sûm; Spitaler Gloss. 94a); NeoSyr. sûima,
isûmaµ (Maclean 307b); Bauer-Leander BArm. 179f, 248g: the same in the cstr., sf. Hmev], pl. cstr.
th;m;v], sf. µ/ht]h‰;m;v] (thus the fem., and with h also in EgArm., JArm., CPArm., Syr., Mnd.; sûe
maheµ, sûemaµheµ Syr. and NeoSyr.; masc. without h, Mnd. and NeoArm.); masc.: name.
—a) the name of a person Hmev] yDi laYEnID; rX'av'f]l]Be Da 226 45.16; rX'av'f]l]Be Hmev]Aµc;
aK;l]m'AyDi laYEnID; 512; aY:r'b]G¬ th;m;v] ÷WNai ÷m' what are these men called? Ezr 54; µ/hl] an:l]aev]
µhot]h‰;m;v] we asked them their names 510; Hmev] with a personal name, “whose name was”,
“known as”; Hmev] rX'B'v]ve somebody called Sheshbazzar 514; so also Akk. sûumsûu which occurs
after personal names in Late Babylonian (CADŠ/3: 258, s.v. b 3´; Rössler 40); cf. Job 11 b/Yai
/mv]; for the Persian background to this syntagm see Kutscher Studies 71, referred to by
Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 107; EmpArm., EgArm. (Driver Arm. Docs. iii: 1, and see also above,
where it is suggested that there is a possibe influence through Iranian :: Bauer-Leander BArm.
358g); Syr., Mnd. (Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 460, §303a and note 2); NeoSyr. (Nöldeke NSyr.
Gramm. 35a; Bauer-Leander BArm. 358p).
—b) the name of God: ah;l;aÔAyDi Hmev] hwEhÔl, Jr'b;m] Da 220; hM;T' Hmev] ÷Kiv'AyDi ah;l;aÔ Ezr 612
; laer;c]yI Hl;aÔ µvuB] Ezr 51. †
dmv: the same in Heb.; pa. JArm. (MHeb. pi.) (Dalman Wb. 427a, to force into apostasy); DSS
(Beyer Arm. Texte 713); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 785a s.v. I sûmd) to mock, curse,
excommunicate; JArm. (Lidzbarski Eph. 1, 100: 7, 13; Dalman Wb. 429b) tMev', and Mnd. SðMT
(Drower-M. Dictionary 470b) to banish, denominative from *sûammadtaµ; JArm. aT;M'v'
banish-ment (Dalman Wb. 429b); cf. Schulthess ZA 19 (1905/6), 1331; Nab. pl. abs. sûmdyn
curse, fine (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 307; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1160 s.v. sûmd2).
haf: inf. hd;m;v]h': abs. to annihilate Da 726. †
*÷yIm'v:] Heb. µyIm'v;; OArm., Zakir ÷]ym yhla qra y[hlaw (Donner-R. Inschriften 202 B: 25);
Sefire (222 A: 11, qraw ÷ym; 26 ÷ymbw qrak; B: 7 ÷ym); Tell Fekherye 2 sûmyn w<rq; EmpArm.,
EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; ? Ah\iqar 94; Saqqara, Donner-R. Inschriften 266: 2; Hermopolis
4: 1); Pehl. (Junker Frahang 1: 2); Nab., Palm., JArm. inscr.; Deir Alla 1: 8; (Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 308; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1160); JArm. (only aY:m'v], Dalman Wb.
428a); DSS (Beyer Arm. Texte 713); Syr. also sûeméÆn; in non-Biblical literature sg. masc. and
fem.; Sam. aymw, sûuµmayyaó (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 11b); CPArm. sûwmyn (Schulthess Lex. 209b,
also sg.); Mnd. [>]sûumia 2 (Drower-M. Dictionary 455b; sg. fem., Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 33,
159); NeoSyr. sûmeµya and sŒmaµyo fem. (Maclean 308b; Ritter Gloss. 118b); NeoArm. sûmoya sg.
masc. and fem. (Bergsträsser Gloss. 90 s.v. sûmy; Spitaler Gloss. 94a, sûmoµ); Bauer-Leander
BArm. 187c, 305b: det. aY:m'v]: heaven, sky Da 410.20.28 727; ˜v] ¹/[ 238, ˜v] yreP} Åi 49.18, ˜v] lf' 4
12.20.22.30 521; ˜v] yjeWr 72; ˜v] ynEn:[} 713; ˜v] lyje (= Heb. ˜V;h' ab;x]) 432; aq;r]a'wÒ ˜v] Jr 1011a, ˜v]
a[;r]a'wÒ Da 628 (cf. Saqqara 2; Zakir B: 25f; Sefire 1 A: 11, see above); a[;r]a' parallel with ˜v] Jr
1011b Da 48.17.19; as God’s dwelling place Da 228 431; ˜v] Hl;aÔ (EgArm., Cowley Arm. Pap. 30:
2, 28; 32: 3f; 38: 3, 5 as an epithet of YHW; cf. Vincent 100; Heb. µyIm'V;h' yhel¿aÔ) Da 218f.37.44
Ezr 511f 69f 712.21.23; ˜v] Jl,m, Da 434, arem; ˜v] 523 (Bowman Demotic vii: 17 ÷ym rm; Safaitic
÷ms l[b, see Littmann Thamud und Safa 155b; ÷ym/µm l[b, see Eissfeldt ZAW 57 (1939),
1ff = Kl. Schr. 2: 171ff; Bentzen1 22, 56); aY:m'v] meaning God (as in the New Testament, for
example hJ basileiva tw`n oujranw`n , Strack-Billerbeck 1: 862ff; Bentzen1 36; TWNT 5: 510,
521f) Da 423. †
µmv: the same in Heb.; JArm. itpo. to be absent minded (Dalman Wb. 428a); CPArm. itpe. and
itpa. to be startled, be frightened, shudder (Schulthess Lex. 209a; Gramm. §149, 6b A); ? <
Heb. (Charles 94).
itpo: (Baumgartner ZAW 45 (1927), 108f = Umwelt 95f) pf. µm'/Tv]a,, Bauer-Leander
BArm. 166h: to be appalled Da 416. †
[mv: the same in Heb.; Deir Alla 1: 15: pf. and impv. sûm>w; OArm., Barhadad (Donner-R.
Inschriften 201: 4); Sefire (222 A: 29; B: 21; 223 B: 2–4); Tell Fekherye 9: inf. msûm>; EmpArm.
, EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Driver Arm. Docs.; Ah\iqar 29, 59, 70, 93; Kraeling Arm. Pap.);
Pehl. (Junker Frahang 23: 7, >sûmhn; Herzfeld Paikuli 156, 158, 159, <sûm>yw); Palm., Hatra,
(Dalman Wb. 428b; Beyer Arm. Texte 714); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 209b); Syr.
(Brockelmann Lexicon 786b); Mnd. ŠMA (Drower-M. Dictionary 469a); Palm. pt. sûmy>< (
Corpus Ins. Sem. 2: 41001); CPArm. sûmy>/sûmw> obedient (Schulthess Lex. 210a); Syr.
(Brockelmann Lexicon 786b); NeoSyr. itpe. to obey (Maclean 308b); OArm., Sefire (Donner-R.
Inschriften 222 A: 29: ytsûm>!); Mnd. masûtimana obedient (Drower-M. Dictionary 256b;
Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 138).
pe: pf. [m'v], t[em]vi; impf. [m'v]yI, pl. ÷W[m]v]Ti; pt. pl. ÷y[im]v‰;: to hear, abs. Da 523; something
35.7.10.15 615; with l[' to hear a person and yDi 514.16. †
hitpa: impf. pl. ÷W[M]T'v]yI, variant ÷W[m]T'v]yI (? hitpe., Bauer-Leander BArm. 275q) to obey,
with l] Da 727. †
÷yIr&'m]v:‰; poorly ÷yIr‰;m]v‰; Bauer-Leander BArm. 23d; Heb. ÷/rm]vo; EmpArm., EgArm. ÷yrm (Cowley
Arm. Pap. 30: 29); Bauer-Leander Heb. 5193; Syr. sûameréÆn (Montgomery-Gehman 290): the
city and the province of Samaria Ezr 410.17. †
vmv: MHeb. pi. to serve (Dalman Wb. 492a); EmpArm.; Palm. pa.; Hatra itpa. (Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 310 s.v. mII; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1168 s.v. sûmsû1); JArm., DSS (Dalman
Wb. 429a; Beyer Arm. Texte 715); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 210b); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Literary
and Oral Tradition 2: 542); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 788a); NeoSyr. (Maclean 309a); av;M;v'
servant, JArm. (Dalman Wb. 249b); Sam. sûammesû (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 12a); CPArm. sûmysû
(Schulthess Lex. 210b); Syr. sûammaµsûaµ servant, deacon (Brockelmann Lexicon 788b); Mnd.
sûamasûa deacon (Drower-M. Dictionary 443a); NeoSyr. sûemesûe deacon (Polotsky Gloss. 102b);
vymiv]T' use; MHeb. (Dalman Wb. 450b); Palm. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 336; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 1235); JArm., DSS at;v]/av;ymiv]T' (Dalman Wb. 450a; Beyer Arm. Texte 715,
service); CPArm. mt and fem. amt service (Schulthess Lex. 211a); Syr. tesûmesûtaµ service,
diaconate (Brockelmann Lexicon 788b); NeoSyr. (Maclean 328a); uncertain etymology, Arb.
samsama to run (Levy 4, 58: 1); or denominative from vM;v' (Ruzûicðka 75); or < *vm'v] as Arb.
sûammasa (Bauer ZDMG 71 (1917), 411); or loanword from Egyptian sûmsŒy to follow, serve,
sûmsŒw corresponding to Coptic sûemsûe servant (Erman-Grapow 4: 482ff; Crum 567a); the last
explanation is probably the most likely one.
pa: impf. pl. sf. HNEWvM]v'y:Ò to serve Da 710. †
*vm'v,] or vmev]; probably a primary noun, (cf. HAL 1468b; HALOT 1589a); Heb. vm,v,; OArm.,
Zendjirli Panammuwa 2 (Donner-R. Inschriften 215: 13f); Sefire (222 C: 5); EmpArm., EgArm.
(Cowley Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar 138; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; once in Kraeling Arm. Pap. 5: 9, smsû<);
Pehl. (Junker Frahang 1: 11, sûmsy<, by dissimilation; see Ruzûicûka 179; Jean-H. Dictionnaire
310 s.v. mI; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1168 s.v. sûmsû2); Palm. (Cantineau-Starcky
Inventaire viii, no. 6, Sami"-, Semi"-, see Buisson Inventaire 45, 93: 3); JArm., DSS (Dalman
Wb. 429a, av;m]vi; Beyer Arm. Texte 715); CPArm. also sûemsû< (Schulthess Lex. 210b s.v. mI);
Syr. sûemsûaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 788a); Mnd. sûamis and sûamsûa (Drower-M. Dictionary
443a, b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 32f); NeoSyr. sûimsûaµ (Maclean 309a); NeoArm. sûemsûa
(Bergsträsser Gloss. 91); JArm., Syr., Mnd. and NeoSyr. also fem.; NeoArm. only fem.;
Bauer-Leander BArm. 182x: det. av;m]vi: sun, av;m]vi yle[;m‰, d[' until the going down of the sun
Da 615. †
yv'm]v:i the same in Heb.; JArm. yv'm]v;' Syr. sûemsûay (Payne-Smith 4225), yw (The Babylonian
Expedition of the University of Pennsylvania 8, 1: 89); Babylonian sûamsûia, sûamsûaia, Assyrian
samsaia, samsia, sûamsûua (Tallqvist Personal Names 191, 215; Eilers 37f); cf. HAL 1472a;
HALOT 1593a: n.m. ar;p]s‰; yv'm]vi Ezr 48f.17.23. †
*÷ve: Semitic; the same in Heb.; probably a primary noun, but it is unlikely that it is to be derived
from the root ÷n (→ HAL 1472b; HALOT 1593b); JArm. aN:vi masc. (Dalman Wb. 429b;
Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 107 points out that in JPArm. the word is fem., as in BArm.); CPArm.
sûyn< masc. and fem. (Schulthess Lex. 211a); Syr. sûenaµ fem. (Brockelmann Lexicon 789a); Mnd.
sûina fem. (Drower-M. Dictionary 462a; NöldekeMand. Gramm. 157f); mostly fem., NeoSyr.
sûina (Maclean 309b) masc.; NeoArm. sûanna fem. (Bergsträsser Gloss. 91 s.v. sûnn I);
Bauer-Leander BArm. 181t; dual ÷yIN"v,i sf. HyN"vi Da 75.19, Q HN"v,i K HY"N"v,i Or. sûinnayaµh
(Bauer-Leander BArm. 49e, 79s): fem. tooth dual, originally two rows of teeth, Da 75.7.19. †
hnv: Heb. I hn:v; to change; EmpArm., EgArm. (itp. Ah\iqar 201); pa. Samaria; Nab., JArm. inscr.
(Jean-H. Dictionnaire 313 s.v. yn; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1175 s.v. sûny1); JArm., DSS
(Dalman Wb. 429b, an:v;] Beyer Arm. Texte 716); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 789b); Mnd. SðNA
(Drower-M. Dictionary 471a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 257, 260; pe. to change); Syr., NeoSyr.
(Maclean 304b s.v. sûyn<), and Mnd. to go away (cf. already Ug., see de Moor UF 11 (1979),
647; see HAL 1476a; HALOT 1597b), be mentally deranged; pa. and af. to change, remove;
etpa. passive :: Heb. I hnv.
pe: pf. pl. /nv] , sf. yhi/nv] Da 56 (= yhil¿&[} ÷yIn&'v; vs.9, Bauer-Leander BArm. 154n, 341w); impf.
anEv]y,I anEv]Ti, pt. fem. h/ay:nÒv,‰; variant hy:nÒv' (Eissfeldt Fschr. (1947), 49), pl. ÷yIn"v,; fem. ÷y:nÒv.;
—1. to be different Da 73.19.23f.
—2. to be changed Wbx] Da 618, clothing changed by the fire 327 (Plöger KAT xviii: 71; he
considers the reference is to a kind of animal madness), wyzI 56 (cf. Plöger, then his face changed
colour; so also NRSV), with sf. (see above) with l[' 59. †
pa: pf. pl. ÷yNIv' (? 3rd. pl. sf. ywyn Saqqara, Donner-R. Inschriften 266: 9; but now read rwdn
(personal name Sindur), see Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1176, and Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000),
107); impf. ÷/Nv'y;Ò pt. passive fem. hy:NÒv'm,] variant hy:nÒv'm] (Bauer-Leander BArm. 160v).
—1. to change, bb'l], with ÷mi (→ ÷mi 1 b; Akk. sûunnuÆ t\eµma to afflict with insanity, cf. Akk.
musûennuÆ a fickle person, inconsistent, AHw. 681a; for sûanuÆ cf. CADŠ/1: 398b; see also
Sokoloff loc. cit. for t\eµmsûu isûanni (G-stem), CADŠ/1: 405, and later Aramaic parallels) Da 413;
pt. passive with ÷mi, different from (→ pe. 1) 77.
—2. to violate an order 328. †

itpa. (Baumgartner ZAW 45 (1927), 108f = Umwelt 95f): pf. Da 39 wyNIT'v]a,, Q yNIT'v]a/, ai, K
pl. wNIT'v]a, or /NT'- (Bauer-Leander BArm. 159s, 334m); impf. aNET'v]y,I pl. ÷/NT'v]y,I jus-sive /NT'v]yI
(Bauer-Leander BArm. 89d; cf. pt. yntm GenAp ii: 2): to be changed, ÷D;[i Da 29, yhi/P&nÒa' µlex] 3
19, wyzI 510 728.
†
haf. (see pa., Bauer-Leander BArm. 274n): impf. anEv]h'y;Ò inf. hy:n:v]h,' variantSecunda ha;n:v]h'
(Bauer-Leander BArm. 160 !); pt. anEv]h'm].
—1. to alter, rs'aÔ Da 69.16 (→ yDi 2 c), ÷D;[i, an:m]z,I tD; 221 (of God, who changes times and
seasons), and 725.
—2. to violate am;G:t]Pi Ezr 611, abs. 612. †
I *hn:v:] Heb. hn:v;; OArm., Zendjirli, Panammuwa 2 (Donner-R. Inschriften 215: 1); Sefire (222
A: 27; 223 A: 5, 6, pl. abs. sûnn); Arslan-Tash (232, cstr. sg. sûnt); Tell Fekherye 8, pl. sf. sûnwh,
corresponding to Akk. sûanatisûu); EmpArm. sg. abs. sûnh, cstr. sûnt and sût; pl. abs. sûn(y)n,
EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Saqqara); Tema (for example Donner-R.
Inschriften 228 A: 20 hnb hn year after year, every year); Ostracon from Beer Sheba;
Bauer-Meissner Pachtvertrag (Koopmans no. 19; Donner-R. Inschriften 279: 1); Xanthos;
Pehl. (Junker Frahang 27: 1 and elsewhere; Herzfeld Paikuli 971); Dura-Europos; Samaria,
passim; Nab., Palm., Hatra, JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 312; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 1170 s.v. sûnh2); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 436a, abs. an:v,] emph. aT;v', pl. aY:n"v;]
Beyer Arm. Texte 715); CPArm. sg. emph. sût< = sûattaµ > sûettaµ = sûyt<, pl. sûnyn (Schulthess Lex.
211b); Syr. sûnt< > sûattaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 789b); NeoSyr. also sûéÆtaµ (Maclean 309b); Mnd.
sûitta (Drower-M. Dictionary 460b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 185, cstr. sûnat), sûita (Drower-M.
Dictionary 464a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 98, 185); NeoArm. esûna (Bergsträsser Gloss. 91 s.v.
sûn; Spitaler Gloss. 94a); pl. sûnn (Donner-R. Inschriften 223 A: 56; Bauer-Meissner
Pachtvertrag 5, 6; Kraeling Arm. Pap.); Nab. sûnyn; NeoArm. sûnoµtha (Nöldeke Neue Beiträge
125); Bauer-Leander BArm. 178d, 304a: cstr. tn"v,] pl. ÷ynIv] fem.: year Da 61 Ezr 511; for
specifying a date, ÷yTer]T'/hd;j} tn"v]Bi, with l] Da 71 Ezr 424 513 63.15 (Bauer-Leander BArm.
252y; EgArm.; Nab.; Dura; Altheim 12). †
II *hn:v:] ÷vy; Heb. hn:v;e OArm., Zendjirli, Panammuwa 1 (Donner-R. Inschriften 214: 24;
Jean-H. Dictionnaire 313; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1175, s.v. sûnh3); JArm., DSS
(Dalman Wb. 422a, at;nÒyvi; 430b, at;NÒvi; Beyer Arm. Texte 716; see further Sokoloff, DSD7
(2000), 107); CPArm. sûynt< (Schwally Idioticon 95); Syr. sûentaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 789b);
Mnd. sûinta (Drower-M. Dictionary 462b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 111); NeoSyr. sûintaµ
(Maclean 310a); Bauer-Leander BArm. 179g: sf. HTenÒvi, variant HteNÒvi and HtenÒvi (Bauer-Leander
BArm. 199d, 241t, u), fem.: sleep, with ddn Da 619. †
h[;v:; EmpArm., Palm. emph. sû>t< hour, time (Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1178 s.v. sû>h); JArm.
, DSS (Dalman Wb. 331b, at;[} v; 1. short time; 2. time, hour; Beyer Arm. Texte 716, moment,
short time, hour); CPArm. sûa>taµ moment, hour (Schulthess Lex. 311b; Gramm. §27: 2); Syr. sûaµ>e
taµ moment, hour (Brockelmann Lexicon 764b); Mnd. sûita 3, hour (Drower-M. Dictionary
464b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 16, 110); NeoArm. sûa>t\a (Spitaler Gloss. 93b; Bergsträsser
Gloss. 87 s.v. sûw>); NeoSyr. sûet\a (Maclean 310a); Canaanite pl. sûeµti (El-Amarna letter 138: 76,
see VAB 2: 1548); Arm. > Arb. saµ>tu (Wehr-Cowan 441b); Eth. sa>at and saµ>at (Dillmann 389);
Nöldeke Neue Beiträge 44; Bauer-Leander BArm. 199d, 241v; Brockelmann ZDMG 94 (1940),
353f; uncertain etymology; h[v to look, cf. Heb.; or Akk. sûe>uµ (Montgomery Daniel 203f); or <
Akk. *sûattu duration (Meissner 2: 69f :: Landsberger ZA 41 (1933), 232f; von Soden Gramm.
§41c): det. at;[} v' Da 36 430; ht;[} v' 315 55; 36 variantSecunda and 55 Or. ˜v;: fem.: moment, a
short space of time (Pirqe Abot iv: 17; and THAT 2: 372): at;[} v' HB' at the same moment, at
once Da 36.15 430 55; h[;v;K] hd;j} (variant ˜v;B]) for a moment 416. †
fpv: the same in Heb.; EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar 104; Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 316 s.v. fpI; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1181 s.v. sûpt\1); DSS fpm masûpat\
law (Beyer Arm. Texte 717); Sam.; Canaanite loanword (Rosenthal Arm. Forsch. 541).
pe: pt. pl. ÷yfip]v‰;: to judge, pt. judge: ÷ynIY:d'wÒ ÷yfip]v‰; Ezr 725. †
ryPiv:' rpv; OArm., Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften 224: 29); EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm.
Pap.; Ah\iqar 108, 159; Hermopolis 2: 12); Arebsun (Donner-R. Inschriften 264: 6); Armazi
(216: 9); Palm., Hatra sûpyr, sûnpyr; Pehl. (Junker Frahang 26: 2, sûpyl<; Herzfeld Paikuli 972, sûpyl
; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 317 s.v. rpII; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1184 s.v. sûpr4); ? Ug. sûpr
(see Ugaritica 5: p. 551 no. 22: 10; Ugaritica 7: 111); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 432a, ar;ypiv]
fair; Beyer Arm. Texte 718; see further Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 107); Acts 51 n.fem. Sapfeira
; GenAp xx: 2, 4, 6; CPArm. helpful, fair (Schulthess Lex. 213b s.v. sûpr I); Syr. (Brockelmann
Lexicon 797a); Mnd. sûapir(a) (Drower-M. Dictionary 444b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 200);
NeoSyr. s\«piyr« and sûapiara (Polotsky Gloss. 102b; Maclean 310b); Bauer-Leander BArm.
192c: fair, HyEp][; Da 49.18. †
lpv: the same in Heb.; EmpArm., EgArm. (Ah\iqar 150, haf.); Pehl. (Junker Frahang appendix
7, haf.) (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 317; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1183); JArm., DSS haf.
(Dalman Wb. 432b, lp'v], lypev]; Beyer Arm. Texte 717); Syr. sûefeµl (Brockelmann Lexicon
795a); NeoSyr.; Mnd. SðPL (Drower-M. Dictionary 472a).
haf: pf. T]l]Pev]h', variant T;l]P&ev]h' (Bauer-Leander BArm. 101e); impf. lP‰iv]h'yÒ; inf. hl;P;v]h';
pt. lyPiv]m' Da 519, rd. with var-iant lP‰iv]m' (Bauer-Leander BArm. 115 q !): to humiliate Da 434
519 724; with bb'l] to humble oneself 522. †
Der. *lp'v].
*lp'v:] lpv; Heb. lp;v;; JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 432b, al;p]v' humble; Beyer Arm. Texte 717;
from Tg. Prov., see Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 107); CPArm. sûpl, emph. sûwpl sluggish
(Schulthess Lex. 213a); Syr. sûefel, Nestorian sûefal (Brockelmann Lexicon 795b, humble); Mnd.
sûapula (Drower-M. Dictionary 444a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 152, sûaféÆl = sûafal wretched);
wretched, humble, lazy; Bauer-Leander BArm. 185q: the same in the cstr.: low, µyvin:a} lp'v] the
lowest of men Da 414. †
rpv: the same in Heb.; EmpArm., Palm. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 317 s.v. rp ; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
I
Dictionary 1184 s.v. sûpr to please; with l ] to show oneself obliging); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb.
1
433a; Beyer Arm. Texte 717); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 213a, to please); Syr. (Brockelmann
Lexicon 797, to be fair); Mnd. SðPR I to please, be fair (Drower-M. Dictionary 472b; Nöldeke
Mand. Gramm. 218); NeoSyr. to please (Maclean 310b).
pe: pf. rp'v], Or. sûefer; impf. rP'v]yI: to please, seem good, with l[' Da 424 (yKil]mi), with µd;qÕ
I am pleased to, followed by l] with inf. 332, followed by pf. with wÒ 62. †
Der. ryPiv', *rP;r]p'v].
*rP;r]p'v:] rpv; Arb. safara to shine (dawn); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 433a, ar;P;r]p'v] dawn;
Beyer Arm. Texte 718); CPArm. (Schulthess Gramm. §107); Syr. sûafraµ and sûuµferaµ aurora
(Brockelmann Lexicon 797a); Bauer-Leander BArm. 193j: det. ar;P;r]p'v], with either small or
large p (Albrecht ZAW 39 (1921), 164, 168; Montgomery Daniel 279), Or. ar;P; rp'v]:
daybreak, dawn Da 620. †
*qv;: Heb. q/v; JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 433a, aq;v;; Beyer Arm. Texte 718); Syr. sûaµqaµ
(Brockelmann Lexicon 765b); Mnd. sûaqa (Drower-M. Dictionary 445a); NeoSyr. sûaqa
(Maclean 311a); Bauer-Leander BArm. 179h: dual sf. yhi/q&v:; shin, leg (→ hK;r]y") Da 233. †
hrv: Heb. I hrv; sry: OArm. pe., Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften 224: 18 to let loose); EmpArm.,
EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap. 71: 7); itp. Saraïdin (Donner-R. Inschriften 261: 6); Pehl. (Junker
Frahang 21: 7, sûlytwn); Nab. and Palm. pa.; Hatra, JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 319;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1192 s.v. sûry 1); y/arv JArm., DSS, I: to loosen, consent, begin
(Dalman Wb. 434b); II: to dwell (p. 435a; see also Beyer Arm. Texte 718, to untie, loosen,
interpret, permit, settle down, tremble, commence); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 214b); Sam. sûrh
to commence (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 12a); Syr. sûeraµ< (Brockelmann Lexicon 803b); Mnd. SðRA
(Drower-M. Dictionary 474a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 216, 286); NeoSyr. to loosen itpe.
(Maclean 311b); Syr. also itpa., reflexive and passive; pa. in JArm., CPArm., Sam., Syr. and
Mnd., to begin; Akk. sûurruµ also to initiate; pe. in JArm., Sam., Syr. and Mnd., to unsaddle a
beast for riding, or a pack animal; > to settle down, dwell.
pe: inf. arev]mi Da 516 and rd. instead with variantSecundum and also Vulgate 512 arev;m] (pt.
pa.), Bauer-Leander BArm. 89i; pt. passive arev], pl. ÷yIr&'v] (Bauer-Leander BArm. 233g).
—1. to loosen, with ÷yrif]qi Da 512 (cj.), and 16 parallel with rp, pt. passive, liberated from
fetters, free 325.
—2. to dwell, pt. passive (Bauer-Leander BArm. 297e); JArm., Syr., Mnd. (Nöldeke Mand.
Gramm. 259f; MHeb. yWrv;) Da 222; cf. GenAp xx: 3, 4 to camp; xxii: 8, pt. ÷yr to dwell. †
pa: pf. 3rd. pl. wyriv; (Bauer-Leander BArm. 130h !, 159r); pt. arev;m] Da 512, seepe.: to
commence, with l] with inf. Ezr 52, cj. 412 (→ rWv), cf. GenAp xii: 13. On the question of the
link between the meanings of pa>>el and pe>al see Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 107–8. †
hitpa: pt. pl. ÷yIr&'T;v]mi (Bauer-Leander BArm. 130h !): to be loosened, shake, shudder (
Hxer]j' yref]qi) Da 56. †
*qrv: the same in Heb.; JArm. (Dalman Wb. 435b, pe.); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 810a, sûrq II
af.); NeoSyr. af. (Maclean 204b s.v. msûrq); Mnd. SðRQ I to play a pipe, whistle, hiss (Drower-M.
Dictionary 476a, pe.).
Der. *yqirov]m'.
*vrv: denominative from *vrv]; the same in Heb.; JArm. pa. (Heb. pi.) to strike roots (Dalman
Wb. 436a); JArm. pa., and Syr. af. and sûarsûéÆ to root out (Brockelmann Lexicon 810b).
Der. *vrv], wvrv.
*vrv], or vrev], or vr'v]; Heb. vr,vo; OArm., Zakir (Donner-R. Inschriften 202 B: 28); Sefire
(222 C: 24f); see Jean-H. Dictionnaire 321; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1195 s.v. sûrsû2;
JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 436a, av;r]vi/vu; Beyer Arm. Texte 719); CPArm. sûwrsû (Schulthess
Lex. 216a); Syr. sûersûaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 810b); Mnd. sûarsûa and sûirsûa (Drower-M.
Dictionary 446a, 463b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 20); NeoSyr. sûirsûaµ (Maclean 313a-b);
NeoArm. sûersûa (Bergsträsser Gloss. 93); Bauer-Leander BArm. 184m: pl. sf. yhi/vr]v,; Or. sûursû-
(Bauer-Leander BArm. 225t): root Da 412.20.23; → vrv. †
wvrv: wvirov,] K Wvrov,] Q yvirov:] vrv; (Bauer-Leander BArm. 197f, 198g): rooting out, i.e.
banishment (Vulgate in exilium) or exclusion from the community, Ezr 726 in lists of
punishments; Gunneweg KAT xix/1: 128, 13914; Rundgren, VT7 (1957), 400–404. †
rX'B'v]v:e n.m. Ezr 5 14.16, see Heb. †
tve: Heb. vve; EmpArm. masc. sût; fem. sûth: EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Saqqara); Nab., Palm. (
fem. sût<); Hatra, JArm. inscr.; Pehl. (Junker Frahang 29: 6, fem. sût<; see also Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 321 s.v. I; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1196 s.v. sûsû3); JArm., DSS (Dalman
Gramm. 125, masc. tyve, fem. at;(y)vi(a}), aT;v]a,; Wb. 422b and 45a; Beyer Arm. Texte 720; see
further Sokoloff, DSD7 (2000), 108); CPArm. sûyt<; masc. sûet, fem. sûittaµ (Schulthess Gramm.
§124); Syr. sûet, (<)sûetaµ (Nöldeke Syr. Gramm. §148); Mnd. sûit and sûita (Nöldeke Mand.
Gramm. 187); NeoSyr. isûtaµ (Maclean 226 s.v. <sût<); NeoArm. sûet\, secðcða (Bergsträsser Gloss.
88); Brockelmann Grundriss 1: 486; Bauer-Leander BArm. 250j: tv‰i cardinal number, six Da 31
Ezr 615; cf. ÷yTivi. †
htv: Heb. II htv; OArm., Zendjirli, Panammuwa 1 (Donner-R. Inschriften 214: 9, 22);
EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar 93); Pehl. (Junker Frahang 19: 15, >sûthn;
Herzfeld Paikuli 12, 22, 162, <sûtywn; 163 >sûth; for the prosthetic > and < → a 8); Palm., JArm.
inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 322 s.v. ytI; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1198 s.v. sûty); cf.
also Deir Alla 1: 12 sûtyw h\mr; Dura Ostracon 1, 2 *hyt[ (Altheim-Stiehl Hunnen 9); JArm.,
DSS (Dalman Wb. 436a s.v. atv I, at;v], ytiv,] yTiv]ai; Beyer Arm. Texte 720); CPArm. *<sûty
(Schulthess Lex. 216b s.v. sûty; Gramm. §150); Syr. sûetaµ and <esûtéÆ (Brockelmann Lexicon 811b);
Mnd. SðTA (Drower-M. Dictionary 476b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 257); NeoArm. sût\y and iscð(i)
(Bergsträsser Gloss. 88 s.v. scy; Spitaler Gloss. 93 s.v. sûcðy, and 94b s.v. sût\y); NeoSyr. sûaµtéÆ
(Maclean 313b; Polotsky Gloss. 110, sûtaµya and 103a, sRteye; and Ritter Gloss. 119, sty).
pe: pf. pl. with a added (→ a 8; Bauer-Leander BArm. 155q) wyTiv]ai Da 53f, variantSecunda
W”ytiv]ai (Bauer-Leander BArm. 156w !); impf. ÷/Tv]y;I pt. htev;, pl. ÷yIt&'v;; Bauer-LeanderBArm.
233g:todrinkDa51.4; with B] (like Heb.) to drink out of 52.3.23. †
Der. *atev]mi.
÷yTiv:i tve; Heb. µyViv;i EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap. 26: 12); Nab. sûtyn; Palm. sûtyn;
JArm. inscr. sûtyn (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 321 s.v. µ; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1197 s.v. sûsûm
); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 45a s.v. aT;v]a,: ÷yTiv]a,, ÷yti(y)via}; Beyer Arm. Texte 720); CPArm.
sûytyn and <ysûtyn (Schulthess Lex. 216a); Syr. <esûtéÆn (Brockelmann Lexicon 811a); Mnd. sûitin
(Drower-M. Dictionary 404b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 189, 14); NeoArm. sûicci (Bergsträsser
Gloss. 88 s.v. sûcc); NeoSyr. isûtéÆ (Maclean 226 s.v. <sûty); Bauer-Leander BArm. 250o: cardinal
number: sixty Da 31 61 Ezr 63. †
yn"zÒ/B rt'v:] n.m. Ezr 5 .66.13; with Versions, Sept. Saqarbouzana, rd. ˜Br]t'v]; = ÷zwbrt ?
36
Aimé-Giron 15, rv. 3 (Bowman AJSL 58 (1941), 312) :: Eilers 34, 1033, who takes it as a
contaminated form from Egyptian Aramaic ÷zrbt (Cowley Arm. Pap. 5: 16; cf. p. 15, masc.
personal name; so also Gunneweg KAT xix/1: 94); cuneiform Sðatabarzana, Satibarzavnh"
and U/Isûtabuzana (Babylonian Expedition of the University of Pennsylvania 9: 71; 10: 53); →
Heb. rt've (HAL 1541b; HALOT 1671b-1672); for etymology see Schaeder 73; J.H. Kramer in
I.J. Koopmans Aramese Grammatica (1949), 123. †
t: —1. corresponding to Proto-Semitic t (= Heb. t), unchanged in Arm., as in ¹qt, Hwt, t/jT],
Hmt, ÷qt.
—2. corresponding to Proto-Semitic t\ (> Heb. v), which becomes —a) sû in OArm. (Degen
Altaram. Gramm. §11); —b) mostly t from EmpArm., as in yt'yai, rt'a}, at,D], td'j}, bty, rbt,
bwt, r/T, gl'T], tl;T], hM;T', ÷y:nÒT,i ÷yreT], [r'T]; cf. Bauer-Leander BArm. 25b; Rowley Arm. 26f;
Schaeder 44f; Brockelmann Grundriss 1: 128, §46.
rbt: corresponds to Heb. I rbv to break: 1. sûbr: OArm., Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften 222 A:
38) pe. impf. ysûbr; pe. passive impf. tsûbr; 2. rbt: EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.;
Ah\iqar 106, 190); Pehl. (Junker Frahang 21: 5, tblwn; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 290;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1106 s.v. rbv); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 438a; Beyer Arm.
Texte 721); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 218a); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 815a); Mnd. TBR
(Drower-M. Dictionary 482b); NeoSyr. (Maclean 315b); NeoArm. cðbr (Bergsträsser Gloss. 17;
Spitaler Gloss. 85a); GenAp. pe., xxi: 32; etpe., xxii: 9.
pe: pt. passive fem. hr;ybiT]: to break, pt. passive breakable, fragile (Bauer-Leander BArm.
297c) Da 242. †
*rydiT:] rwd; MHeb. rydiT;; JArm. inscr. pl. abs. fem. ÷rydt persistent, continual, regular
(Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1204) JArm., DSS ar;ydiT] also fem. at;r]ydiT] (Dalman Wb.
438b; Beyer Arm. Texte 548 s.v. rwd); originally sbst., duration; MHeb. denominative rdt hif.
to last (Levy 4: 627–8); Bauer-Leander BArm. 195x: det. ar;ydiT] (fem. abs., Strack): encircling,
duration, ar;ydit]Bi adv. (JArm., Bauer-Leander BArm. 255s) continually; hT]nÒa' yDi Jh;l;aÔ
ar;ydit]Bi HleAjl'P‰; Da 617.21. †
bwt: Heb. bWv to return; —1. bw OArm., Sefire (pe., Donner-R. Inschriften 224: 25; haf. 224: 6,
20, 24).
—2. bwt EmpArm., EgArm. pe., haf. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar 12(6); Driver Arm. Docs.;
Saqqara); Asshur Ostracon (Donner-R. Inschriften 233: 11); Samaria; Nab., JArm. inscr.
(Jean-H. Dictionnaire 293; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 111(4) s.v. sûwb); JArm., DSS
(Dalman 493a; Beyer Arm. Texte 721); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 218b); Sam. twb to regret (
Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 12b); Syr. twb to do penance (Brockelmann Lexicon 817b); Mnd. TWB
(Drower-M. Dictionary 483a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 250); adv., as in EmpArm., EgArm.
(Cowley Arm. Pap.; Driver Arm. Docs.); Pehl. (Junker Frahang 29: 2); Nab. (Cantineau 2:
155a); Palm. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 324; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary s.v. twb5); JArm., DSS
(Dalman Wb. 439a; Beyer Arm. Texte 722, hbwt); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 219a); Syr. tuµb
(Brockelmann Lexicon 817b); NeoSyr. Maclean 314b s.v. t<b).
pe: impf. bWtyÒ: to return, with l[' y[iD]nÒm', Da 431.33a yl'[} bWtyÒ my senses (my reason)
returned to me; 33b yl'[} bWtyÒ ywIzIwÒ yrid]h' my majesty and my splendour came back again to me;
cf. GenAp xxi: 19, 30; xxii: 29. †
(h)af: pf. bytih}, pl. sf. an:Wbytih}; impf. ÷Wbytih} y" (Bauer-Leander BArm. 147w) Ezr 65,
÷WbytiyÒ (af., Bauer-Leander BArm. 148c) 55; inf. with sf. Jn:Wbt;h}: to give back, bring back:
equipment for the temple Ezr 65 (cf. GenAp xx: 29; xxi: 3; xxii: 12, and especially 24); to send
back an:w:T]v]nI / µG:t]Pi bytih} to answer (Heb. rb;D; byvihe), with acc. of the person Da 316 and Ezr
511; µ[ef]W af;[e ˜h} with l] of the person, to address oneself to someone with wise and prudent
words (Bentzen) Da 214. †
Hwt: Heb. Hmt and II Hwt: Deir Alla sûmh fright (Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1160); JArm.,
DSS (Dalman Wb. 439b, Hw"T]; Beyer Arm. Texte 722); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 818a); Arb.
tyh to get lost, wander about; II to mislead, confuse (Wehr-Cowan 100b); sbst. JArm. aw:h]Ti
anxiety, fear, horror (Dalman Wb. 439b); CPArm. emph. tywht< (Schulthess Lex. 219a); Syr.
tamhetaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 818a); Mnd. tihua (Drower-M. Dictionary 485b; Nöldeke
Mand. Gramm. 66) astonishment, horror; cf. MHeb. hh;T; to be petrified; and JArm. ah;T] to
regret (Dalman Wb. 439a); CPArm. th< to regret (Schulthess Lex. 218a); Heb. WhTo, and JArm.
aw:T] to regret (Dalman Wb. 439a); Syr. tewaµ to regret (Brockelmann Lexicon 817a).
pe: pf. Hw:T] (Bauer-Leander BArm. 151v): to be amazed, be frightened, be horrified
(Plöger KAT xviii: 58) Da 324. †
*r/T: Heb. r/v; ox, bull; —1. rw/s: OArm., swr cow Tell Fekherye 20, parallel to Akk. laµtu =
léÆtu cow (AHw. 557b; CAD L: 217a, s.v. littu A); sûwrh Zendjirli (Donner-R. Inschriften 215: 6,
9); Sefire (222 A: 23): fem. hrw cow (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 294; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary
1118 s.v. sûwr4).
—2. rwt: EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.); Pehl. (Junker Frahang 7: 2 twr/l<); Xanthos
13617 = Greek bou`n (Fouilles de Xanthos vol. 6: “La stèle bilingue de Letôon” (Paris, 1979);
Palm. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 325; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 118 s.v. sûwr4); Nab. personal
name twr</w (Cantineau Nab. 2: 155a; Nöldeke Beiträge 83); JArm., DSS ar;/T (Dalman Wb.
440a; Beyer Arm. Texte 722); GenAp xvii: 10 arwt rwf ox-mountain (Fitzmyer Gen. Ap. 59;
Taurus, Greek tau`ro" o[ro"); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 219b); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 12b,
tor); Syr. tauraµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 819b); Mnd. taura (Drower-M. Dictionary 478a;
Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 100); NeoSyr. toµraµ (Maclean 318a); Bauer-Leander BArm. 182a: pl.
÷yri/T: ox, bull: ÷Wm[} f'yÒ Jl; ÷yri/tk] aB;c][i Da 422.29.30 (with lka) 521; as an animal for
sacrifice, with brq pa., haf. Ezr 617, with hnq 717; ÷yri/t ynEB] (cf. Sam. br twryn = bar tuµren
calf, Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 12b, → II rB') young ox Ezr 69. †
t/jT] and Da 4 11 *tj'T'; Heb. tj'T'; OArm., Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften 222 A: 6) µra yl[
htjtw Upper Aram and Lower Aram; Deir Alla 2: 11; EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.;
Kraeling Arm. Pap.); twjt Uruk 3, 25, 33, cuneiform tihÉuµtu; Nab. th\t; Palm. (Rosenthal Palm.
27), and JArm. inscr. th\(w)t (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 326; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1209
s.v. th\t); adj. ytjt EmpArm., EgArm. (Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 326;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1211); sbst. hytjt OArm., Sefire (Donner-R. Inschriften 222
C: 36); EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Driver Arm. Docs.;
Jean-H. Dictionnaire 327; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1211); JArm., DSS t/jT] and yti/jT],
t/T, at;j]T' (Dalman Wb. 441a; 440b; 441a; Beyer Arm. Texte 723); CPArm. twjt (Schulthess
Lex. 219); Sam. te/at (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 12b, th\wt); Syr. teh\eµt, teh\oµt, letah\t (Brockelmann
Lexicon 821a, b); Mnd. tit, (a)tutia (Drower-M. Dictionary 487a; 43a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm.
194, 203); NeoSyr. th\uth, (t)h\eµth and iltih\ (Maclean 319a); NeoArm. cðuh\cð (Bergsträsser Gloss.
18); Bauer-Leander BArm. 261i; Montgomery Daniel 235; basic form *tah\t, *tih\aµt, as yre/ja} (
JArm.): yhi/tjoT], yhi/Tj]T' Da 411: preposition under Da 49.18 727; with ÷mi (Uruk 33, adverb;
EgArm., Kraeling Arm. Pap. 213f) away from under Da 411 Jr 1011. †
gl'T:] Heb. gl,v,; JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 442b; Beyer Arm. Texte 723); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex.
220b); Syr. talgaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 825a); Mnd. talga (Drower-M. Dictionary 478b);
NeoSyr. telgaµ (Maclean 321a); NeoArm. t\elka (Bergsträsser Gloss. 101); Bauer-Leander BArm.
182x: snow Da 79, clothing as white as snow. †
*yt;yliT:] tl;T]; Heb. yviyliv;] JArm. inscr. sg. fem. emph. tlytyt< (Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary
1154 s.v. sûlysûy); JArm., DSS ytiyliT] (Dalman Wb. 443a; Beyer Arm. Texte 724); CPArm.
(Schulthess Lex. 220b); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Literary and Oral Tradition 2: 601); Syr.
(Brockelmann Lexicon 826a); Mnd. tliataia (Drower-M. Dictionary 487b); NeoSyr. tliyteye
(Polotsky Gloss. 103a; Maclean 321b); Bauer-Leander BArm. 251u, v: fem. a;yt;yliT]: K ay:t;yliT]
, Q aa;t;yliT] ordinal number: third Da 239, → aT;l]T'. †
*tlt: denominative from tl;T]; Heb. vlv; JArm., DSS to divide into three parts (Dalman Wb.
443b; Beyer Arm. Texte 724); Syr. pa. and etpa. (Brockelmann Lexicon 826b); Mnd. pa. to do
for a third time (Drower-M. Dictionary 487b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 444).
tl;T:] with masc. a/ht;l;T]: Heb. v/lv;; 1. l, Deir Alla sûlsh II 34; 2. tlt, EmpArm., EgArm.
(Cowley Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar 39, 92; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Driver Arm. Docs.) fem. cstr. sûlsût ! (
Corpus Ins. Sem. 2: 3b); Pehl. (Junker Frahang 29: 3); Nab., Palm., Hatra; JArm. inscr. “Waw”
(Jean-H. Dictionnaire 305; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1153 s.v. sûlsû); JArm., DSS (Dalman
Wb. 443b; Beyer Arm. Texte 723); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 220b); Sam. tlth: taµlaµtaó (Ben
H\ayyim. Gloss. 12b); Syr. tlaµtaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 826a); Mnd. tlata (Drower-M.
Dictionary 487b); NeoSyr. tlata (Maclean 322a); NeoArm. t\loµt\a, et\lat\ (Bergsträsser Gloss. 101;
Spitaler Gloss. 95b); Bauer-Leander BArm. 249h: sf. ÷/htel;T] Da 323 (Brockelmann Grundriss
1: 487f; for BArm. see Rosenthal Palm. 81f); JArm. (Dalman Gramm. 130); Syr. (Nöldeke Syr.
Gramm. 94 §149); Bauer-Leander BArm. 249h: cardinal number: three Da 78.20, in front of the
word that is counted 75.24, behind the word 324 63.11.14 Ezr 64; ht;l;T] µ/ythe third day Ezr 615
(Rudolph Esra und Nehemia 59 reads with Sept. Esdras (3 Ezra) the twenty-third day :: M:
Gunneweg KAT xix/1: 113); ÷/htel;T] the three of them (the three men) Da 323; → ÷ytil;T]. †
aT;l]T:' Da 5 16.29, and yTil]T', variant aT;l]Ti 57; tl;T]; EmpArm., Nab. tlt(yn) (Corpus Ins. Sem. 2,
213: 3f) one-third (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 329; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1216); JArm.,
DSS yTil]Tu/Ti/T' (Dalman Wb. 443b; Beyer Arm. Texte 724); CPArm. tlwty (Schulthess Lex.
221a): traditionally a triumvir, a man of the third rank, Theodotion tristavth"; or the ruler of
the third part of the empire; Da 57.16, Sept. ejxousiva tou` trivtou mevrou" th`" basileiva" ,
Theodotion trivto" ejn th`/ basileiva/ , cf. Pesh. twlt< bmlkwt<, and Josephus Ant. x, 11: 2;
probably a loanword from Akk. sûalsûu (AHw. 1150b; CADŠ/1: 266b, sûalsûu one-third; cf.
Salonen Hippologica 216); Plöger KAT xviii: 82, 86, the title of an official, originally the third
person (Klauber 111ff), → Heb. III vyliv;; Commentaries; Rowley, JTS 32: 183; Kaufman. †
÷ytil;T:] pl. from tl;T]; Heb. µyvil¿v]; —1. sûlsûn, OArm., Zendjirli, Barrakub (Donner-R. Inschriften
219: 3); —2. tltyn, EmpArm., EgArm. (Kraeling Arm. Pap. 8: 8); Nab., Palm., JArm. inscr.
(Jean-H. Dictionnaire 306; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1155 s.v. sûlsm); JArm., DSS
(Dalman Wb. 443b; Beyer Arm. Texte 724); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 221a); Syr. (Brockelmann
Lexicon 826a); NeoSyr. tlayéÆ (Maclean 322a); Mnd. tlatin (Drower-M. Dictionary 487b);
Bauer-Leander BArm. 250o cardinal number: thirty: ÷ytil;T] ÷ymi/yAd[' within thirty days Da 68.13
.†
*Hmt: the same in Heb.; JArm. inscr. (Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1219); JArm., DSS
(Dalman Wb. 444a; Beyer Arm. Texte 724); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 221a); Syr. (Brockelmann
Lexicon 827a); Old Syr. (Black 220); Mnd. TMA (Drower-M. Dictionary 487b; Nöldeke Mand.
Gramm. 64), THM (Drower-M. Dictionary 483a) to be amazed, be astonished; → Hwt.
Der. *Hm'T].
*Hm'T:] Hmt; JArm., DSS ah;m]Ti (Dalman Wb. 444a; Beyer Arm. Texte 724); CPArm. hymt
(Schulthess Lex. 221b); Syr. temhaµ (Brockelmann Lexicon 827a); Mnd. tuhma (Drower-M.
Dictionary 483a); Bauer-Leander BArm. 184j: pl. ÷yhim]Ti, aY:h'm]Ti, sf. yhi/h&m]Ti, variantSecunda ˜T',
masc.: miracle: Hm't]W ta; Da 332 628, parallel with 333. †
hM;T:' Heb. µv;, hM;v;; —1. sûm(h): Deir Alla 1: 8 sûm; OArm., Zendjirli sûm Panammuwa 1
(Donner-R. Inschriften 214: 8); Sefire sûm (224: 6; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 307 s.v. µvII;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1159 s.v. sûm4).
—2. tmh: EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Saqqara; Driver Arm.
Docs.; Ah\iqar 48, 72); Pehl. (Junker Frahang 25: 3, 45; Herzfeld Paikuli 1000); Nab. (Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 330 s.v. hmtI; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1219 s.v. tmh3); JArm., DSS
(Dalman Wb. 444a, µT; there; Beyer Arm. Texte 724, there); Mnd. tam there, and tum then
(Drower-M. Dictionary 479a; 483a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 204); NeoSyr. tama there
(Polotsky Gloss. 103a; Maclean 322a).
—3. ÷M;T' there: JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 331; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1222);
JArm. (Dalman Wb. 444b); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 222a); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 12b);
and Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 827b).
—4. hnt: EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.; Driver Arm. Docs.;
Saqqara; Hermopolis); Asia Minor (Donner-R. Inschriften 259: 1; 261: 5; Jean-H. Dictionnaire
331; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1223); but see Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 108.
—5. ÷nt: EmpArm. (Sumer 20: 13: 4; 15: 5); Palm. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 332;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1224); Syr. (Rosenthal Palm. 82f); Bauer-Leander BArm. 253b:
adverb hM;T' there Ezr 517 61.12; ˜T'A÷mi from there 66; ˜T' … yDi where 61; but see Sokoloff loc.
cit. †
*hnt: Heb. II hnv to repeat (:: I hnv to change, → BArm. hnv) and hnt; —1. ynv: EmpArm. to
make different, EgArm. (Ah\iqar 201, itp. to alter); Samaria 2: 6 pa.; Nab., JArm. inscr. (Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 313; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1175 s.v. sûny); Sam. sûnh (Ben H\ayyim
Gloss. 12a).
—2. hnt to repeat, narrate; JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 445a, ant; Beyer Arm. Texte 725); Sam.
tnh (Ben H\ayyim Gloss. 12b); CPArm. tny pa. to narrate (Schulthess Lex. 222a); Syr. to report
(Brockelmann Lexicon 828b); NeoSyr. tenuyi to narrate (Polotsky Gloss. 103a; Maclean 323a);
Mnd. TNA I to repeat (Drower-M. Dictionary 488b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 444).
? Der. *÷y:nÒT,i tWny:nÒT,i ÷yreT].
*÷y:nÒT:i ÷yreT], hnt; EmpArm. tnyn (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Jean-H. Dictionnaire 331;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1223 s.v. tnyn2); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 445b, an:y:nÒT;i Beyer
Arm. Texte 725); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 222a); Sam. (Ben H\ayyim Literary and Oral
Tradition 2: 610); Mnd. tiniana (Drower-M. Dictionary 486a); Syr. tenyaµnaµ repetition; adj.
second, and terayaµnaµ second (Brockelmann Lexicon 829a; 835a); NeoSyr. tray(y)ana second
(Polotsky Gloss. 103a); Bauer-Leander BArm. 196a: fem. hn:y:nÒT:i second Da 75. †
Der. tWny:nÒT.i
*tWny:nÒT:i *÷y:nÒT;i *hnt; JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 445b, tWny:nÒTi for the second time; Beyer Arm.
Texte 725; but see Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 108); CPArm. tnynw repetition (Schulthess Lex.
222a); Syr. tenyaµnuµtaµ yet again (Brockelmann Lexicon 829a); GenAp xxi: 1 ynaynt for the
second time, again (Fitzmyer Gen. Ap. 128); Bauer-Leander BArm. 254o :: §5b: for the second
time, once again, adverb Da 27. †
*yT;p]T:i EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap. 27: 9), pl. emph. aytpt (between aynyd and
aykwg) listener, ta; basilevw" w\ta (cf. Jean-H. Dictionnaire 327; Hoftijzer-Jongeling
Dictionary 1212); < Persian (Schaeder Iran. Beiträge 2631; Eilers 126); pl. aeyT;p]Ti: K ayET;p]Ti, Q
yaet;p]Ti; Bauer-Leander BArm. 51k: police officer, or magistrate (Montgomery Daniel 200; B.
Porten Archives from Elephantine (Berkeley, Los Angeles, 1968) p. 50, no. 83; Hinz
Altiranisches Sprachgut 236) Da 32f (Plöger KAT xviii: 59, following Marti 19, who emends to
aytpnd religious leader. †
*¹yQiT:' ¹qt; the same in Heb.; EmpArm., Nab. adj. legitimate, valid; sbst. a document which is
legally valid (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 333; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1229); JArm., DSS
strong, impressive (Dalman Wb. 447a; Beyer Arm. Texte 727); GenAp. ii: 8 Åljb ¹yqt;
CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 223b); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 833b); Bauer-Leander BArm.
192e: fem. ap;yQiT' Da 77, a/hp;yQiT' 240.42; pl. ÷ypiyQiT'.
—1. strong: hw:yte Da 77, hp;yQiT' Wkl]m' al;zÒr]p'k] 240.42, ÷ykil]m' Ezr 420.
—2. mighty ÷yhim]Ti Da 333. †
lqt: Heb. lqv; Akk. sûaqaµlu to hang up, to weigh, weigh out, pay (AHw. 1178a; CADŠ/2: 1);
Ram., EgArm. lqt (Semitica 23: 95, sûqlw; Cowley Arm. Pap. tql; Pehl. (Junker Frahang 19:
3); tklwn (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 318 s.v. lq1; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1187 s.v. sûql1);
JArm. (Dalman Wb. 447a s.v. lq'T] II); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 222b s.v. lqt I); Syr. tql, and
sûql (Brockelmann Lexicon 831a; 798; cf. no. 20); Mnd. TQL I (Drower-M. Dictionary 489a;
Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 271) to weigh, suspend :: lqv JArm. to assess (denominative from
lq,v,; see Dalman Wb. 434a, s.v. lq'v] I); on this, and the confusion of two roots, see Sokoloff,
DSD7 (2000), 108.
pe: pf. passive (Bauer-Leander BArm. 104b, c): 2nd. masc. hT;l]yqiT], variant a/hT;l]qiT] and
a/hT;l]qeT] (Bauer-Leander BArm. 105f, g): to weigh, passive, to be weighed: ay:nÒzÒamob] hT;l]yqiT]
Da 527. †
Der. lqeT].
lqeT:] lqt; Heb. lq,v, :: better loanword from Akk. sûiqlu weight of metal, money (AHw. 1248a;
CADŠ/3: 96ff, especially 97: 2; Zimmern 21; Kaufman 29, but sometimes with Arm. t).
—1. lq: OArm., Zendjirli, Panammuwa 2 (Donner-R. Inschriften 215: 6; Atti del I Congresso
Internationale di Studi Fenici e Punici 1979, vol. 1 (Rome, 1983), p. 763: dual cstr. sûqly).
—2. sûql and tql: EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap., as for example sûql 15: 12 :: tql 10: 5;
sûql Kraeling Arm. Pap.; pl. sûqln (Cowley Arm. Pap. 10: 2; Kraeling Arm. Pap. 1: 2 :: tqln
Kraeling Arm. Pap. 2: 8; tql Bauer-Meissner Pachtvertrag 10); JArm. inscr. lqt (Jean-H.
Dictionnaire 318 s.v. lqII; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1187 s.v. sûql3); Syr. sûeqlaµ burden,
tribute; teqlaµ burden; tequlaµ burden, tribute (Brockelmann Lexicon 799a; 831a; 831b; but see
Sokoloff, DSD7 (2000), 108).
—3. tql: JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. al;q]Ti 447a; Beyer Arm. Texte 726); Mnd. mitqal
measurement (Drower-M. Dictionary 271 :: Sokoloff loc. cit.); CPArm. mtql staqmov"
(Schulthess Lex. 222b); shekel, unit of measurement, and of weight (de Vaux Lebensordnungen
1: 327–31; Reicke-Rost Hw. 1166f and 1249–55; also Bibl. Reallexikon2 93f) Da 525.27; ˜T]
understood as a verb in word-play = *lyqiT]; → lqt pf. passive (cf. anEm] and sr'P]). †
÷qt: Heb. ÷qt and ÷kt; ? < Arm. (Wagner 328); Akk. taqaµnu (AHw. 1323b); EmpArm., Palm.,
(Dalman Wb. 447b, where it may mean to fasten, reinforce; Beyer Arm. Texte 726, haf. to
establish); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 223a); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 831b-833a); Mnd.
TQN, taqun location (Drower-M. Dictionary 489a, 480b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 218, 414);
NeoSyr., NeoArm. t\qn (Bergsträsser Gloss. 102; Spitaler Gloss. 95b).
hof: pf. 3rd. fem. tn"q]t]h; rd. with vari-ant tnEq]t]h;, Or. hut-, 1st. sg. (Bauer-Leander BArm.
115u, v); to be re-established, with l[' Da 433; perhaps a textual corruption; proposed
solutions include: —a) ytiWkl]m' l[' tnEq]t]h; I was established again over my kingdom
(Bauer-Leander BArm. 283q; Bentzen1 38; ZüBi);—b) tn"q]t]h; ytiWkl]m' yl'[} my royal authority
was established again for me (Bauer-Leander BArm. 115v; cf. Plöger KAT xviii: 72). †
¹qt: the same in Heb.; JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 447b, to be strong; Beyer Arm. Texte 726);
CPArm. tqf strong (Schulthess Lex. 223b); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 833a); Sam. tqf pa. (Ben
H\ayyim Gloss. 12b); Mnd. TQP (Drower-M. Dictionary 490a); GenAp xx: 18; xxi: 25 to
become strong (Fitzmyer 56).
pe: pf. ¹qiT], 3rd. fem. tp'q]Ti, variant tp'q} Ti (Bauer-Leander BArm. 103w, 46m), Or. taqfat
(Bauer-Leander BArm. 29z, → qpn, qls); 2nd. masc. T]p]qeT], variant T;- (Bauer-Leander BArm.
101e): to be (become) strong Da 48.17.19; to grow hard, become arrogant, become
overbearing: j'Wr 520, with l] and inf. †
pa: inf. hp;Q;T': to become strong, make stringent, enforce (obj. ar;s;aÔ) Da 68 parallel
with hm;Y:q', cf. Montgomery Daniel 273. †
Der. *¹yQiT', *¹qoT] and *¹q;T].
*¹qoT:] ¹qt; Heb. ¹q,To; EmpArm., Nab. adj. and sbst., lawful, legitimate, authentic, legal
authority (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 333; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1229 s.v. tqp1); JArm.,
DSS (Dalman Wb. 448a, ap;q]Tu power, strength; Beyer Arm. Texte 726); CPArm. tqyfw strength
(Schulthess Lex. 223b); Syr. tequµfa might (Brockelmann Lexicon 833a); Mnd. tuqpa
(Drower-M. Dictionary 483b); GenAp xx: 14, ¹qtb with power, might; xxii: 31 ¹qt strength;
Bauer-Leander BArm. 224k; det. aP;q]T;: strength Da 237; Sokoloff, DSD7 (2000), 108–9 takes
this word together with ¹q;T]. †
*¹q;T:] ¹qt, variant ¹q'T], Or. teqoµf (Bauer-Leander BArm. 187d); the same in the cstr.: strength
Da 427. †
÷yreT,] fem. ÷Ter]T': hnt; Heb. µyIn"v;] EmpArm., EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Kraeling Arm. Pap.;
Driver Arm. Docs.; Ah\iqar; Saqqara; Behistun cstr. trty); Pehl. (Junker Fra-hang 19: 2); Nab.,
Palm., Dura Inv. 51: 1, qarqhn; Hatra, JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 334;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1231); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 449a; Beyer Arm. Texte 727;
GenAp. tryn, trtyn xx: 8; xii: 10; see further Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 109); Sam.; CPArm.
(Schulthess Lex. 223); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 834b); Mnd. trin (Drower-M. Dictionary
490a; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 187), also atrin (Drower-M. Dictionary 44b); NeoArm. it\r(i),
fem. t\are(i) (Bergsträsser Gloss. 102; Spitaler Gloss. 95b); NeoSyr. tréÆ, téÆrti, tirweµ, tarweµ
(Kutscher, Tarbiz 21–23: 66; Maclean 326a); Mehri thruµ, thréÆt; Soq. tro (Leslau Lex. Soq. 445);
basic form *thinay > thiray, with n dissimilated > r and transferred to fem. (Brockelmann
Grundriss 1: 484f; Bauer-Leander BArm. 249f) :: also thry, and Proto-Semitic fem. tart (Ruzû
icðka 66f; Gordon Orientalia 19: 89); alternatively < Akk. tardennu > tartennu younger son (
AHw. 1329a), see Ungnad ZAW 41 (1923), 204f; Hurrian loanword, like tartaµnu AHW 1332a:
cardinal number, two Da 61 Ezr 424; rc'[} AyreT] twelve Da 426 Ezr 617. †
*[r'T:] primary noun, → Heb. I r['v' :: KBL, [rt; Heb. II r[v; JArm. (Dalman Wb. 449b); Syr.
(Brockelmann Lexicon 836b); NeoSyr. twr (Ritter Gloss. 119: 9; Maclean 327a s.v. tr>); twaµra
(Polotsky Gloss. 110); better tar>o, see Sokoloff, DSD7 (2000), 109, to break, tear, rend, split;
Arm. tar>aµ > Late Babylonian tarahÉu gate (von Soden Orientalia 46 (1977), 196; AHw. 1324b);
EmpArm., Uruk tarahÉa/i; [rt, EgArm. (Cowley Arm. Pap.; Ah\iqar; Kraeling Arm. Pap.;
Driver Arm. Docs.); Nab., Palm., Hatra, JArm. inscr. (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 335;
Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1232 s.v. tr>1); JArm., DSS (Dalman Wb. 450a, h[;r]T'; Beyer
Arm. Texte 728); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 224a); Sam. tera (Ben H\ayyim Literary and Oral
Tradition 2: 561); Syr. (Brockelmann Lexicon 836b); NeoSyr. tar>a (Maclean 327a); NeoArm.
t\ar>a door (Bergsträsser Gloss. 103; Spitaler Gloss. 95b); Mnd. tira (Drower-M. Dictionary
486b; Nöldeke Mand. Gramm. 101); Bauer-Leander BArm. 182x: the same in the cstr.
—1. door, opening, of the ÷WTa' Da 326.
—2. gate, aK;l]m' [r'T] the gate of the royal palace, court Da 249 (for EgArm., see Ah\i-qar 44
btr> hykl< at the gate of the palace, meaning the court; cf. bbb hykl< meaning the same in Ah\iqar
9, 17, 23; cf. line 143 bb (Jean-H. Dictionnaire 335; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1233, 1b);
as also in Akk. baµb sûarri (AHw. 95b; see also CAD B: 14b, baµbu A); cf. Jl,M,h' r['v' (HAL
1493b, 7aa; HALOT 1617b), and Herodotus iii: 117, qu;rai tou` basilevw"; see also abul sûarri
(El-Amarna letter 296: 29), and Turkish bab aµli meaning the main gate, Sublime Porte, to
designate the rule of the Ottomans from the place where councils convened; see Lexikon des
Mittelalters (Munich and Zürich: Artemis Verlag, 1991), vol. 5: 84; cf. Plöger KAT xviii: 45
and 47); Sokoloff, DSD 7 (2000), 109 draws attention to the work of H. Wehr, Islam 39 (1964)
247–260. †
Der. *[r;T;.
*[r;T:; [r'T]; Heb. r[e/v; EmpArm., Hatra (Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 1233 s.v. tr>2); JArm.
a[;r;T; (Dalman Wb. 450a); CPArm. (Schulthess Lex. 224b); Syr. taµre>aµ and tarraµ>aµ
(Brockelmann Lexicon 837); Bauer-Leander BArm. 191c < *tarraµ>; pl. det. aY:['r;T;: gate-keeper
, in lists of temple personnel Ezr 724. †
÷yTer]T:' → ÷yreT].
yn"T]T:' n.m.; Sept. qaqqanai(") and qanqanai Esdras Sisivnnh" (Bewer 56 :: Eilers 36 ); 1
governor (hj;P,) of → ar;h} ÷'Arb'[} Ezr 53.6 66.13; not the same as Usûtani-Hystanes (Meissner
ZAW 17: 191f) but to be identified with Tattannu pahÉat Ebir-naµri (502 BC; see Ungnad ZAW
58 (1940/1941), 240ff; Olmstead JNES 3: 46), or Tattenai (Eilers 35f, 121); ÷tt (Babylonian
Expedition of the University of Pennsylvania 10: 643, tt (see Kraeling Arm. Pap. 4: 24; cf. p.
175). †
SUPPLEMENTARY BIBLIOGRAPHY
Where more than one work of a given writer is referred to the order adopted here is a chronological
one; uncertain dates come at the head of a list. Primary references to reviews are given under the
name of the reviewer; cross references from the author of the book under review have the date of
the published review asterisked. Joint authorship involves a primary reference under the first
mentioned author, with cross references from those subsequently mentioned using the + sign.
References to page numbers are generally those as quoted in the text of the Lexicon rather than the
whole extent of an article.
Aartun, Kjell.
1967 Beiträge zum ugaritischen Lexikon (WdO 4 (1967–68) 278–299)
1974 Die Partikeln des Ugaritischen (AOAT 21/1) 16
1980 Die belegten Partikelformen in den ugaritischen Texten aus Ras Ibn Hani (
(1980) 1–6)
1982 Präpositionale Ausdrücke im Ugaritischen als Ersatz für semitisch min: eine
kontrastive und sprachgeschichtliche Analyse (UF 14 (1982) 1–14)
1984/86 Neue Beiträge zum ugaritischen Lexicon (I :UF 16 (1984) 1–52; II: UF 17 (1986)
1–48)
Abba, R.
1977 Priests and Levites in Deuteronomy (VT 27 (1977) 257–267)
Abbadi, S.
1985 Ein ammonitisches Siegel aus Amman (ZDPV 101 (1985) 30–31)
Abel, R. P. F.-M.
1951 La prétendue Caverne des Sidoniens et la localisation de la ville d’Ara (RB
(1951) 47–53)
Aberbach, D.
1977 w<tn lhm y>brwm (Jeremiah 8: 13): the problem and its solution (VT 27 (1977)
99–101)
Ackroyd, P. R.
1963 Hosea and Jacob (VT 13 (1963) 245–259)
1979 Note to *parzon “iron” in the Song of Deborah (JSS 24 (1979) 19–20)
Adler, Hans-Peter.
1976 Das Akkadische des Königs Tusûratta von Mitanni (AOAT 201 (1976) 327)
Aggoula, B.
1972/77 Remarques sur les inscriptions hatréennes (II: MUSJ 47 (1972) 1–84; V: Semitica
27 (1977) 123–144)
Aharoni, I. (or J.)
1926 Über das Vorkommen der Säugetiere in Palästina und Syrien (ZDPV 49 (1926) 247f)
1939/39 Mélanges (1, >Ar, le Gypaëte barbu et >Ar-Moab: RB 48 (1939) 237–241; 2, Notes
de zoologie biblique: RB 48 (1939) 554–556)
Aharoni, Yohanan.
1958 The Negeb of Judah (IEJ 8:26–38)
1958 The northern boundary of Judah (PEQ 90 (1958) 27)
1959 Zephath of Thutmose (IEJ 9:110–122)
1959 The province-list of Judah (VT 9 (1959) 225–246)
1961 Excavations at Ramat Rah\el (BA 24:98–118)
1963 Tamar and the roads to Elath (IEJ 13 (1963) 30–42)

1968 Trial excavation in the “Solar Shrine” at Lachish (IEJ 18 (1968) 157–169)
1968 Arad: its inscriptions and temple (BA 31:2–32)
1970 Three Hebrew ostraca from Arad (BASOR 197 (1970) 16–41)
1975 Chronique archéologique: Tel Beer-Sheba (RB 82 (1975) 92–95)
+ Amiran, Ruth.
1964 Excavations at Tell Arad: preliminary report on the first season, 1962 (IEJ
131–147)
+ Fritz, V. und Kempinski, A.
1975 Vorbericht über die Ausgrabungen auf der Håirbet el-Msûaµsû (Teµl MaµsŒoÆsŒ), 2.
Kampagne 1974 (ZDPV 91 (1975) 109–130)
Ah\ituv, S.
1970 Pashhur (IEJ 20 (1970) 95)
Ahlström, G. W.
1961 Der Prophet Nathan und der Tempelbau (VT 11 (1961) 113–127)
1971 Joel and the temple cult of Jerusalem (VTSupp. 21 (1971) 2)
1977 Judges 5: 20f. and history (JNES 36 (1977) 287–288)
1978 KRKR and T_PD (VT 28 (1978) 100–101)
Ahrens, Karl.
1910 Der Stamm der schwachen Verba in den semitischen Sprachen (ZDMG 64 (1910)
161- 194)
Ahwiya, A.
1974 bv means sometimes bvy sat, rested, was tranquil (“] bwf” w “bfy” wmK “
hnhw) (Lesûonenu 39 (1974/75) 21–36)
>Ajjan, L.
*1976 see Badre
al-Ansary, A.
1969 Libynite personal names: a comparative study (ALUOS 7 (1969–73) 5–16)
Albertz, Rainer.
1978 Hintergrund und Bedeutung des Elterngebots im Dekalog (ZAW 90 (1978) 348–373)
Albrecht, K.
1895 Das Geschlecht der hebräischen Hauptwörter ([I]: ZAW 15 (1895) 313ff; [II]:
16 (1896) 41ff)
1911 v in der Mischna (ZAW 31 (1911) 205–217)
1916 Kil. viii: 5 (ZAW 36 (1916) 64)
1921 Die sogenannten Sonderbarkeiten des masoretischen Textes (ZAW 39 (1921)
160–169)
Albright, William Foxwell.
1920 A colony of Cretan mercenaries on the coast of the Negeb (JPOS 1 (1920–21)
187–194)
1920 A revision of early Hebrew chronology (JPOS 1 (1920–21) 49–79)
1920 The Hebrew stems dlk\, grsû, sûkh\ (JBL 39 (1920) 167)
1922 Excavations and results at Tell el-Fûl, Gibeah of Saul (AASOR 4: 1922–23)
1922 New light on Magan and MeluhÉa (JAOS 42 (1922) 317–322)

1922 Palestine in the earliest historical period (JPOS 2 (1922) 110–138)
1922 The earliest forms of Hebrew verse (JPOS 2 (1922) 69–86)
1923 Some archaeological and topographical results of a trip through Palestine (
11:3)
1924 Egypt and the early history of the Negeb (JPOS 4 (1924) 131–161)
1924 The Jordan valley in the Bronze Age (AASOR 6 (1924–25) 13–74)
1924 Contributions to biblical archaeology and philology (JBL 43:362–293)
1924 Researches of the School in Western Judea (BASOR 15:2)
1924 The archaeological results of an expedition to Moab and the Dead Sea (BASOR
14:2)
1925 The evolution of the West-Semitic divinity >An->Anat->Attaó (AJSL 41 (1925) 73–101)
1925 The fall trip of the School in Jerusalem: from Jerusalem to Gaza and back (
17:4)
1925 Topographical researches in Judea (BASOR 18:6–10)
1926 Review: Theo Bauer Die Ostkanaana¬er (AfO 3 (1926) 124–25)
1926 The topography of the tribe of Issachar (ZAW 44 (1926) 225–236)
1927 The names “Israel” and “Judah”, with an excursus on the etymology of todah
torah (JBL 46:151–185)
1929 The American excavations at Tell Beit Mirsim (ZAW 47 (1929) 1–17)
1930 Mitannian maryannu chariot-warrior and the Canaanite and Egyptian equivalents (
AfO 6 (1930–31) 217–221)
1931 The discovery of an Aramaic inscription relating to King Uzziah (BASOR
8–9)
1932 New light on early Canaanite language and literature (BASOR 46 (1932) 15–19)
1932 The seal of Eliakim and the latest pre-exilic history of Judah, with some
observations on Ezekiel (JBL 51 (1932) 77–106)
1933 More light on the Canaanite epic of AleyaÆn Baal and MoÆt (BASOR 50 (1933) 13–19)
1934 The Kyle memorial excavation at Bethel (BASOR 56 (1934) 2–14)
1935 The names Shaddai and Abram (JBL 54 (1935) 173–204)
1936 A supplement to Jeremiah: the Lachish ostraca (BASOR 61 (1936) 10–16)
1936 The Canaanite god H\auroÆn / H\oÆroÆn (AJSL 53 (1936) 1–12)
1936 The Song of Deborah in the light of archaeology (BASOR 62 (1936) 26–30)
1936 Zabul Yam and Thapit Nahar (JPOS 16 (1936) 17–20)
1937 Review: Rostovtzeff, Bellinger, Hopkins, and Welles The Excavation of
Dura-Europos. Preliminary Report of Sixth Season of Work, October 1932-March 1933 (JAOS 57
(1937) 319–321)
1937 Western Asia in the twentieth century B.C.: the archives of Mari (BASOR
26–29)
1938 Recent progress in North-Canaanite research (BASOR 70 (1938) 18–23)
1939 The Babylonian matter in the predeuteronomic primeval history (JE) in Gen. 1–11 (
JBL 58 (1939) 91–103)
1940 Islam and the religions of the ancient Orient (JAOS 60 (1940) 283–301)
1940 New light on the history of Western Asia in the second millennium BC (continued) (
BASOR 78 (1940) 23–30)
1941 New Egyptian data on Palestine in the Patriarchal age (BASOR 81 (1941) 16–20)
1941 New light on the early history of Phoenician colonization (BASOR 83 (1941) 14–21)
1941 New light on the walls of Jerusalem in the New Testament age (BASOR 81 (1941)
6–9)
1941 Ostracon no. 6043 from Ezion-geber (BASOR 82 (1941) 11–14)
1941 Stratum B (Iron I) (AASOR 21 (1941–43) 1–38)
1941 The Lachish letters after five years (BASOR 82 (1941) 18–24)
1941 The land of Damascus between 1850 and 1750 B.C. (BASOR 83 (1941) 30–35)
1941 The Egypto-Canaanite deity H\auroÆn (BASOR 84 (1941) 7–11)
1941 Two letters from Ugarit (Ras Shamrah) (BASOR 82 (1941) 43–49)
1942 A case of lèse-majesté in pre-Israelite Lachish, with some remarks on the Israelite
conquest (BASOR 87 (1942) 32–38)
1942 A teacher to a man of Shechem about 1400 BC (BASOR 86 (1942) 28–31)
1942 A third revision of the early chronology of Western Asia (BASOR 88 (1942) 28–35)
1942 A votive stele erected by Ben-Hadad I of Damascus to the god Melcarth (
87 (1942) 23–28)
1942 Two little understood Amarna letters from the middle Jordan valley (BASOR
(1943) 7–17)
1943 An archaic Hebrew proverb in an Amarna letter from central Palestine (BASOR
(1943) 29–31)
1943 The furniture of El in Canaanite mythology (BASOR 91 (1943) 39–43)
1943 The Gezer calendar (BASOR 92 (1943) 16–25)
1944 A prince of Taanach in the fifteenth century BC (BASOR 94 (1944) 12–27)
1944 An unrecognized Amarna letter from Ugarit (BASOR 95 (1944) 30–33)
1944 In reply to Dr Gaster’s observations (BASOR 93 (1944) 23–24)
1944 The end of “Calneh in Shinar” (JNES 3 (1944) 254)
1944 The oracles of Balaam (JBL 63 (1944) 207–234)
1945 The chronology of the divided monarchy of Israel (BASOR 100 (1945) 16–22)
1946 Cuneiform material for Egyptian prosopography, 1500–1200 B.C. (JNES 5 (1946)
7–39)
1946 The names “Nazareth” and “Nazorean” (JBL 65 (1946) 397–402)
1947 The Phoenician inscriptions of the tenth century BC from Byblus (JAOS 67 (1947)
153–159)
1948 Exploring in Sinai with the University of California African Expedition (
109 (1948) 5–19)
1948 The early alphabetic inscriptions from Sinai and their decipherment (BASOR
(1948) 6–22)
1949 On the date of the scrolls from >Ain Feshkha and the Nash Papyrus (BASOR
(1949) 10–19)
1950 A catalogue of early lyric poems (Psalm 68) (HUCA 23/1 (1950–51) 1–41)
1950 The chronology of ancient South Arabia in the light of the first campaign of
excavation in Qataban (BASOR 119 (1950) 5–14)
1951 The Hebrew expression for “making a covenant” in pre-Israelite documents (
121 (1951) 21–22)
1952 The Chaldaean inscriptions in proto-Arabic script (BASOR 128 (1952) 39–45)
1952 The smaller Beth-shan stele of Sethos I (1309–1290 BC) (BASOR 125 (1952)
24–32)
1953 Review: Jacques Ryckmans LÕinstitution monarchique en Arabe MeŒridionale avant
lÕIslam (JAOS 73 (1953) 36–39)
1954 Northwest-Semitic names in a list of Egyptian slaves from the 18th Century BC (
JAOS 74 (1954) 222–232)
1955 New light on early recensions of the Hebrew Bible (BASOR 140 (1955) 27–33)
1955 Notes on Psalms 68 and 134 (NTT 56 (1955) 1–12)
1955 Some Canaanite-Phoenician sources of Hebrew wisdom (VTSupp. 3 (1955) 1–15)
1956 A note on early Sabaean chronology (BASOR 143 (1956) 9–10)
1956 Further light on synchronisms between Egypt and Asia in the period 935–685 BC (
BASOR 141 (1956) 23–26)
1956 The high place in ancient Palestine (VTSupp. 4 (1956) 242)

1957 Further observations on the chronolgy of Alalakh (BASOR 146 (1957) 26–33)
1957 The seal impression from Jericho and the treasurers of the second temple (
148 (1957) 28–29)
1958 An ostracon from Calah and the North-Israelite diaspora (BASOR 149 (1958)
33–36)
1958 Specimens of late Ugaritic prose (BASOR 150 (1958) 36–38)
1959 Some remarks on the Song of Moses in Deuteronomy 32 (VT 9 (1959) 339–346)
1960 Review: E. Täubler Biblische Studien: Die Epoche der Richter (BiOr. 17 (1960)
242–243)
1961 Abram the Hebrew: a new archaeological interpretation (BASOR 163 (1961) 36–53)
1964 The eighteenth-century princes of Byblos and the chronology of middle-bronze (
BASOR 176 (1964) 38–45)
1973/73 From the patriarchs to Moses (I, From Abraham to Joseph: BA 36 (1973) 5–32; II,
Moses out of Egypt: BA 36 (1973) 48–77)
+ Lambdin, T. O.
1957 New material for the Egyptian syllabic orthography (JSS 2:113–127)
+ Moran, W. L.
1950 Rib-Adda of Byblos and the affairs of Tyre: EA 89 (JCS 4 (1950) 163–168)
1948 A re-interpretation of an Amarna letter from Byblos: EA 82 (JCS 2 (1948) 239–248)
+ Sellers, O. R.
1931/58 The first Campaign of excavation at Beth Zur ([I:] BASOR 43 (1931) 2–12; [II:]
BASOR 150 (1958) 8–20)
Alfrink, B.
1932 Die Bedeutung des Wortes bgr in Job 21: 33 und 38:38 (Biblica 13 (1932) 77–86)
1943 L’expression wytwba µ[ bk (OTSt. 2 (1943) 106–118)
1948 L’expression wym[Ala ¹san (OTSt. 5:118–131)
Allegro, John M.
1951 The meaning of ÷yb in Isaiah 44:4 (ZAW 63 (1951) 154–156)
1953 The meaning of the phrase sûet\uµm haµ>ayin in Num. 24: 3, 15 (VT 3 (1953) 78–79)
1955 Uses of the Semitic demonstrative element z in Hebrew (VT 5 (1955) 309–312)
1956 Further light on the history of the Qumran sect (JBL 75 (1956) 89–95)
1959 A recently discovered fragment of a commentary on Hosea from Qumran’s fourth
cave (JBL 78 (1959) 142–147)
1962 More unpublished pieces of a Qumran commentary on Nahum (4Q pNah) (
7:304–308)
1968 Qumrân Cave 4 (DJD 5) 13)
Allen, L. C.
1971 Isaiah 53: 2 again (VT 21 (1971) 490)
Allo, E. B.
1941 L’évolution de l’évangele de Paul (fin) (RB 50:165–193)
Alt, Albrecht.
1924 Das Institut im Jahre 1924 (PJb 21 (1925) 5–57)
1927 Eine galiläische Ortsliste in Jos 19 (ZAW 45 (1927) 59–81)
1927 Zur Vorgeschichte des Buches Hiob (ZAW 55 (1927) 265–268)
1928 Römerstrasse Jerusalem-Hebron (PJb 24 (1928) 22–24)

1928 Ubel = Mehola? (PJb 24 (1928) 44–49)
1932 Beiträge zur historischen Geographie und Topographie des Negeb (JPOS
126–141)
1932 Die Ausflüge Ephron (PJb 28 (1932) 8)
1935 Aus der >Araba II-IV (ZDPV 58 (1935) 1)
1935 Beiträge zur historischen Geographie und Topographie des Negeb (JPOS
294–324)
1937 Galiläische Probleme: die Herkunft des Namens Galiläa (PJb 33 (1937) 52–64)
1939 Gitthaim (PJb 35 (1939) 100)
1939 Sihor und Epha (ZAW 57 (1939) 147f)
1940 Ein ägyptisches Gegenstück zu Ex. 3: 14 (ZAW 58 (1940/41) 159–160)
1943 Taphnaein und Taphnas (ZDPV 66 (1943) 64)
1944 Meggido in Übergang vom kanaanäischen zum israelitischen Zeitalter (ZAW
(1944) 67–84)
1945 Ägyptisch-Ugaritisches (AfO 15 (1945–51) 69–73)
1946 Neue Erwägungen über die Lage von Mizpa, Ataroth, Beeroth und Gibeon (
69 (1946) 1)
1947 Die phönikischen Inschriften von Karatepe (WdO 4 (1947–52) 272–287)
1950 Menschen ohne Namen (ArchOr. 18–1/2: 9–24)
1952 Zu hit>ammeµr (VT 2 (1952) 153–159)
1954 Bemerkungen zu den Verwaltungs- und Rechtsurkunden von Ugarit und Alalach
(Schluss) (WdO 2 (1954–59) 338–342)
1954 Ergänzungen zu den phönikischen Inschriften von Karatepe (WdO 2 (1954–59)
172–183)
Althann, R.
1978 Jeremiah 4: 11–12: stichometry, parallelism and translation (VT 28 (1978) 385–391)
Altheim, Franz.
1950 Litt. u Gesellsch. in … Altertum. Vol. 2
Amiran, Ruth.
1964 see Aharoni+
Anbar (or Bernstein), M.
1974 Les sakbuÆ et les bazahÉaµtum à Mari (UF 6 (1974) 439–441)
1975 Aspect moral dans un discours “prophétique” de Mari (UF 7 (1975) 517–518)
Anderson, G. W.
1974 A note on Psalm 1 (VT 24 (1974) 231–233)
Andreasen, N.-E.
1974 Recent studies of the Old Testament sabbath: some observations (ZAW 86 (1974)
453–469)
Ap-Thomas, D. R.
1956 Notes on some terms relating to prayer (VT 6 (1956) 225–241)
1957 Some aspects of the root H\NN in the Old Testament (JSS 2 (1957) 128–148)
Aquilina, J.
1958 Maltese as a mixed language. (JSS 3:58–79)

Armstrong, J. F.
1960 A critical note on Genesis 6: 16a (VT 10 (1960) 328–333)
Ashbel, D.
1936 On the importance of dew in Palestine (JPOS 16 (1936) 316–321)
Asmussen, J. P.
1957 Bemerkungen zur sakralen Prostitution im Alten Testament (StTh. 11 (1957)
167–192)
Astour, Michael C.
1963 Place names from the kingdom of AlalahÉ in the north Syrian list of Thutmose III: a
study in historical topography (JNES 22 (1963) 220–241)
1965 Sabtah and Sabteca (JBL 84 (1965) 422–424)
1968 Two Ugaritic serpent charms (JNES 27 (1968) 13–36)
Auerbach, E.
1952 Die babylonische Datierung im Pentateuch und das Alter des Priester-Kodex (
(1952) 334–342)
1953 Das Fest der Lese am Abschluss des Jahres (VT 3 (1953) 186–187)
1958 Die Feste im alten Israel (VT 8 (1958) 1–18)
Auffret, P.
1980 Essai sur la structure littéraire du psaume 137 (ZAW 92 (1980) 346–377)
Auvray, P.
1954 Sur le sens du mot ÷y[ en Ez. 1: 18 et 10:12 (VT 4 (1954) 1–6)
Avi-Yonah, M.
1963 The bath of the lepers at Scythopolis (IEJ 13 (1963) 325–332)
Avigad, Nahman.
1955* see Perath
1958 New light on the ms\h seal impressions (IEJ 8:113–119)
1961 The Jotham seal from Elath (BASOR 163 (1961) 18–21)
1963 A seal of “Manasseh, son of the king” (IEJ 13 (1963) 133–136)
1968 Notes on some inscribed Syro-Phoenician seals (BASOR 189 (1968) 44–49)
1969 A group of Hebrew seals (ErIsr. 9 (1969) 5)
1971 The burial-vault of a Nazirite family on Mount Scopus (IEJ 21 (1971) 185–200)
1972 Two Hebrew inscriptions on wine jars (IEJ 22 (1972) 1–10)
1975 Jüd.-bab. Sðu-bu-nu-Ja-a-ma, Sðubunu-Jaµma (ErIsr. 12 (1975 68)
1975 The priest of Dor (IEJ 25 (1975) 101–105)
1976 Bullae and seals from a post-exilic Judean archive (Qedem 4 (1976))
1976 The governor of the city (IEJ 26 (1976) 178–187)
1978 Baruch the scribe and Jerahmeel the king’s son (IEJ 28 (1978) 52–82)
Avishur, Y.
1975 Word pairs common to Phoenician and Biblical Hebrew (UF 7 (1975) 13–48)
1976 Studies of stylistic features common to the Phoenician inscriptions and the Bible (
8 (1976) 1–22)
1981 The ghost-expelling incantation from Ugarit (Ras Ibn Hani 78/20) (UF 13 (1981)
13–26)
1981 tytyrgwabw tyrb[b ÷yyn l[wph tw[mm—lnnwta ytwylkw (Lesûonenu 45 (1981)

263)
1986 The “duties of the son” in the “Story of Aqhat” and Ezekiel’s prophecy on idolatry
(Ch. 8) (UF 17 (1986) 49–60)
Babut, J.-M.
1986 Que son sang soit sur sa tête (VT 36 (1986) 474–480)
Bach D.
1978 Rite et parole dans l’Ancien Testament: nouveaux éléments apportés par l’étude de
Tôdâh (VT 28 (1978) 10–19)
Bach, R.
1958 Zur Siedlungsgeschichte des Talkessels von Samaria (ZDPV 74 (1958) 41)
Bächli Otto.
1962 Israel und die Völker (ATANT 41 (1962) 53–55)
1973 Von der Liste zur Beschreibung: Beobachtungen und Erwägungen zu Jos. 13–19 (
ZDPV 89 (1973) 1–14)
Badé, W. F.
1933 The seal of Jaazaniah (ZAW 51 (1933) 150–155, with 1 plate)
Badre L., Bordreuil P., Mudarres J., >Ajjan L., Vitale R.
1976 Notes ougaritiques. I. Keret (Syria 53 (1976) 95–126)
Baillet M., Milik J. T., and Vaux R. de.
1962 Les “Petites Grottes” de Qumrân (DJD 3 (1962) 33)
Baisas, B. Q.
1973 Ugaritic >d_r and Hebrew >zr I (UF 5 (1973) 41–52)
Baldacci, M.
1981 The Ammonite text from Tell Siran and North-West Semitic philology (VT
(1981) 363–368)
Baldensperger, L.
1931 see Crowfoot +
Baldwin, J. G.
1964 s\emah\ as a technical term in the prophets (VT 14 (1964) 93–97)
Balentine, S. E.
1980 A description of the semantic field of Hebrew words for “hide” (VT 30 (1980)
137–153)
Baltzer, Dieter.
1971 Ezechiel und Deuterojesaja (BZAW 121 (1971) 34–172)
Bar-Deroma, H.
1960 The river of Egypt (nahal mizraim) (PEQ 92 (1960) 37)
Bardtke, Hans.
1955 Die Kriegsrolle von Qumraµn übersetzt: der gegenwärtige Stand der Erforschung der
in Palästina neu gefundenen hebräischen Handschriften 29 (ThLZ 80 (1955) 401–512)
1958 Der Erweckungsgedanke in der exilische-nachexilischen Literatur des Alten

Testaments. (BZAW 77 (1958) 12–24)
1968 Qumran und seine Probleme (ThR 33 (1968) 185–236)
Barr, James.
1967 St Jerome and the sounds of Hebrew (JSS 12 (1967) 1ff)
1968 The image of God in the book of Genesis: a
studyofterminology(BJRL51(1968–69)11–26)
1969 The symbolism of names in the Old Testament (BJRL 52 (1969–70) 11–29)
1973 Ugaritic and Hebrew sûbm? (JSS 18 (1973) 17f)
Barstad, H. M.
1975 Die Basankühe in Amos 4: 1 (VT 25 (1975) 286–297)
Barth, Christoph.
1949* see Zimmerli
Barth, J.
1916 hbxnh Sach. 11: 16 (ZAW 36 (1916) 117–119)
Barth, Jacob.
1884/87 Vergleichende Studien ([I:] ZDMG 41:603–641; [II:] 42:341–358; [III:] 43:177–191)
Barthélmy, A. and Fleisch, H.
1994 Dictionnaire Arabe-Français (Paris, 1994)
Barthélemy, D.
1950 Le grand rouleau d’Isaie trouvé près de la Mer Morte (RB 57 (1950) 530–549)
+ Milik, J. T.
1955 Qumran Cave I (DJD 1 (1955) 36)
Bartlett, J. R.
1969 The use of the word var as a title in the Old Testament (VT 19 (1969) 1–10)
1970 Sihon and Og, kings of the Amorites (VT 20 (1970) 257–277)
1976 An adversary against Solomon, Hadad the Edomite (ZAW 88 (1976) 205–226)
Barton, George A.
1925 Report of the professor in charge of the School in Bagdad (BASOR 20:19–40)
1928 Dr Speiser’s excavation of Teppe Gaura (BASOR 29 (1928) 12)
Baudissin, W. W. G.
1904 Die alttestamentliche Bezeichnung der Götzen mit gilluµléÆm (ZDMG 58:395–425)
Bauer, Hans.
1912 Zu Simsons Rätsel in Richter Kapitel 14 (ZDMG 66:473–474)
1917 Kanaanäische Miszellen (ZDMG 71 (1917) 410–413)
1919 Semitische Sprachprobleme 5. Die Verwandschaftsnamen und ilaµh “Gott” im
Semitischen; 6. Die Entstehung des semitischen Passivums; 7. Das aramäischen Aoristpräfix n (
ZDMG 69:561)
1926 Überreste der kanaanäischen Unterschicht in den aramäischen Sprachen (
(1926) 801–802)
1930 Die hebräischen Eigennamen als sprachliche Erkenntnisquelle (ZAW 48 (1930)
73–80)
1930 Die israelitischen Personennamen im Rahmen der gemeinsemitischen Namengebung

(OLZ 33 (1930) 588–720)
1930 sûwda und Verwandtes (OLZ 36 (1933) 473)
1932 Ein aramäischer Staatsvertrag aus dem 8. Jahrhundert v. Chr.: die Inschrift der Stele
von Sudschin (AfO 8 (1932–33) 1ff)
1933 Die Gottheiten von Ras Schamra (ZAW 51 (1933) 83–100)
1935 Al-MusûtaréÆ (OLZ 38 (1935) 477)
Bauer, Johannes B.
1962 Ps. 119: 105a als Lämpcheninschrift? (ZAW 74 (1962) 324)
Bauer, L.
1927 Einige Stellen des Alten Testaments (ThStKr. 100 (1927–28) 426–438)
Bauer, Theo.
1934 Bücherschau (ZA 42 (1934) 170–184)
1957 Ein viertes altbabylonisches Fragment des Gilgamesû-Epos. (JNES 16 (1957)
254–262)
+ Landsberger, B. and von Soden, W.
1933 Lexikalisches Archiv (ZA 41 (1933) 216–236)
Baumann, E.
1908 [dy und seine Derivate: eine sprachlich-exegetische Studie (ZAW 28 (1908) 22–41)
1929 tbw bw: eine exegetische Untersuchung (ZAW 47 (1929) 17–44 )
Baumgärtel, F.
1961 Die Formel neÕum jahwe (ZAW 73 (1961) 277–289)
Baumgartner, Walter.
1926 Neues keilschriftliches Material zum Buche Daniel? (ZAW 44 (1926) 38–56)
1927 Das Aramäische im Buche Daniel (ZAW 45 (1927) 81–133)
1941 Ras Shamra und das Alte Testament II (ThR 13 (1941) 157–182)
1946 Zur Etymologie von scheÕoµl (ThZ 2 (1946) 233–235)
1947 (Eissfeldt Festschrift (BZAW 77) 30f; 48f)
1950–51 Zur Mandäerfrage. (HUCA 23/1: 41–72)
1953 Das hebräische Nominalprefix mi- (ThZ 9 (1953) 155)
1954 Berichtigung (VT 4 (1954) 196)
1955* see Honeyman (review of Koehler and Baumgartner)
+ Eglin, Max.
1948 Ein Gegenstück zum biblischen Manna (ThZ 4 (1948) 235–236)
Bea, A.
1937 Kinderopfer für Moloch oder für Jahwe? Exegetische Anmerkungen zu O. Eissfeldt
Molk als Opferbegriff (Biblica 18:95–107)
Beattie, D. R. G.
1971 Kethibh and Qere in Ruth 4: 5 (VT 21 (1971) 490–494)
1974 The book of Ruth as evidence for Israelite legal practice (VT 24 (1974) 251–267)
Becker, Joachim.
1965 Gottesfurcht im Alten Testament (AnBibl. 25 (1965))
1976 Wurzel und Wurzelspross (BZ 20 (1976) 22–44)
Becking, Bob.
1980 Der Text von Jesaja 9: 2a (ZAW 92 (1980) 142–144)
Beegle, Dewey M.
1951 Proper names in the new Isaiah scroll (BASOR 123 (1951) 26–29)
Beek, G. W. van.
1935 Danielbuch
1960 Frankincense and myrrh (BA 23:70–95)
Beek, M. A.
1950 Das Problem des aramäischen Stammvaters (Deut. 26:5) (OTSt. 8:193–212)
1965 Der Dornbusch als Wohnsitz Gottes (Deut. 33:16) (OTSt. 14 (1965) 155–161)
Beer, G.
1915 Zu Hiob 5:23 (ZAW 35 (1915) 63f)
Beeston A. F. L.
1950/73 Notes on Old South Arabian lexicography (I: Muséon 63 (1950) 53–68; IV: 66
(1953) 109–122; VIII: 86 (1973) 443–454)
1953 Remarks on the H\adrami inscription Jamme 402 (Or. 22 (1953) 416f)
1958 The Hebrew verb sûpt (VT 8 (1958) 216–217)
1977 On the correspondence of Hebrew sŒ to ESA s2 (JSS 22 (1977) 50–58)
Begrich Joachim.
1928 mabbuµl: eine exegetisch-lexikalische Studie (ZS 6 (1928) 135–153)
1935 Atalja, die Tochter Omris (ZAW 53 (1935) 78)
1936/64 Die priesterliche Tora (BZAW 66 (1936) 63–88 = ThB 21 (1964) 232–260)
1939 Zur Frage der alttestamentlichen Textkritik (OLZ 42 (1939) 473–592)
1940 soµfeµr und mazkéÆr: ein Beitrag zur inneren Geschichte des davidisch-salomonischen
Grossreiches und des Königreiches Juda (ZAW 58 (1940/41) 1–30)
1944 berit: ein Beitrag zur Erfassung einer alttestamentlichen Denkform (ZAW
1–10)
Behrmann, Georg.
1894 Das Buch Daniel
Bellinger.
1937* see Albright
Beltz, Walter.
1974 Religionsgeschichtliche Anmerkungen zu Gen. 4 (ZAW 86 (1974) 83–85)
Ben David, A.
1979 The Philistine talent from Ashdod; the Ugarit talent from Ras Shamra; the
the N-S\-P (UF 11 (1979) 29–46)
Ben Hayyim, Z.
1936 al tprjn hjp awhw (Leshonenu 7 (1936) 362–366)
1972 hrkrk (Leshonenu 36:236)
1980 wm[ hwlnhw wb lwlkh—br[ rwh (Leshonenu 44 (1980) 85)
Ben Mordechai, C. A.
1939 Chezib (JBL 58 (1939) 283–324)
Ben Yehudah, Eliezer.

1920 The Edomite Language (JPOS 1 (1920–21) 113–115)
Benoit, B., Milik, J. T. and Vaux R. de.
1961 Les Grottes de Murabba‘ât. (DJD 2 (1961))
1961 see Milik +
Bentzen, Aage.
1939 Die Schwindsucht in Ps. 106:15b (ZAW 57 (1939) 152)
1951 Der Sichel (VT 1 (1951) 216–217)
Benveniste.
1934 Termes et noms achéménides en araméen (JA 225 (1934) 180)
1940 Textes sogdiens
Berger, P.-R.
1970 Zu den Strophen des 10. Psalms (UF 2 (1970) 7–18)
1971 Zu den Namen rxbvv und rxanv (ZAW 83 (1971) 98–100)
1975 Der Kyros-Zylinder mit dem Zusatzfragment BIN II Nr.32 und die akkadischen
Personennamen im Danielbuch (ZA 64 (1975) 192–234)
1982 Ellasar, Tarschisch und Jawan, Gn. 14 und 10 (WdO 13 (1982) 50–78)
Bergler, S.
1977 Threni 5: nur ein alphabetisierendes Lied? Versuch einer Deutung (VT 27 (1977)
304- 320)
Bergman, A.
1936 The Israelite tribe of half-Manasseh (JPOS 16 (1936) 224–254)
Bergmeier, R.
1967 Zum Ausdruck µy[r tx[ in Ps. 1:1, Hi. 10:3, 21:16 und 22:18 (ZAW 79 (1967)
229- 232)
Bergsträsser, G.
1909 Das hebräische Präfix (ZAW 29 (1909) 40–55)
1926 Review: Friedrich Schulthess, Grammatik des christlich-pala¬stinischen Arama¬isch
OLZ 29 (1926) 498)
1932* see Fück, J.
Bernhardt, Karl-Heinz.
1960 Beobachtungen zur Identifizierung moabitischer Ortslagen (ZDPV 76 (1960) 136)
1971 Prophetie und Geschichte (VTSupp. 22 (1971) 20–46)
Bernstein, see Anbar
Berridge, John M.
1976 Zur Intention der Botschaft des Amos: exegetische Überlegungen zu Am. 5 (
(1976) 321–340)
Berry, G. R.
1931 The Hebrew word jwn (JBL 50:207–210)
Bertholet, A.
1899 Deuteronomium (KHC V (1899) 36)
1908 Eine crux interpretum: Ps. 2:11f (ZAW 28 (1908) 58f)

Bertram, Georg.
1958 ‘IKANOS in den griechischen Übersetzungen des ATs als Wiedergabe von
(ZAW 70 (1958) 20–30)
1964 “Hochmut” und verwandte Begriffe im griechischen und hebräischen Alten
Testament (WdO 3 (1964–66) 32–43)
Beth, K.
1916 El und Neter (ZAW 36 (1916) 129–186)
Beuken, W. A. M.
1973 Jes. 50: 10–11: eine kultische Paränese zur dritten Ebedprophetie (ZAW 85 (1973)
168- 182)
Bewer, Julius A.
1942 Notes on 1 Sam. 13: 21; 2 Sam. 23: 1; Psalm 48: 8 (JBL 61 (1942) 45–50)
1951 Beiträge zur Exegese des Buches Ezechiel (ZAW 63 (1951) 193–200)
Beyer, K. and Livingstone, Alasdair.
1987 Die neuesten aramäischen Inschriften aus Taima (ZDMG 137 (1987) 285–296)
Beyer, G.
1931 Beiträge zur Territorialgeschichte von Südwestpalästina im Altertum (ZDPV
1933 Die Stadtgebiete von Diospolis und Nikopolis im 4. Jahrhundert n. Chr und ihre
Grenznachbarn (ZDPV 56:218)
Beyerlin, W.
1961 Das Königscharisma bei Saul (ZAW 73 (1961) 186–201)
1967 Die toÆdaµ der Heilsvergegenwärtigung in den Klageliedern des Einzelnen (
(1967) 208–224)
1978 “Wir sind wie Träumende”: Studien zum 126. Psalm (SBS 89 (1978) 41)
1979 Werden und Wesen des 107. Psalms (BZAW 153 (1979) 48)
Bicð, M.
1951 Prophet Amos- ein Haepatoskopos (VT 1 (1951) 293–296)
Bickerman, Elias J.
1946 The edict of Cyrus in Ezra 1 (JBL 65 (1946) 244–276)
Biesenthal and Lebrecht, see Kimhi (1847)
Birnbaum, Solomon A.
1950 The Leviticus fragments from the cave (BASOR 118 (1950) 20–27)
1962 A new eighth-century Hebrew epitaph from Aden (JSS 6:95–96)
Bittner, Maximilian von.
1910 Neues Mehri-Materiale (WZKM 24 (1910) 70–93)
Blake, Frank R.
1915 Studies in Semitic grammar (JAOS 35 (1915) 375–385)
Blank, Sheldon H.
1961 Some observations concerning Biblical prayer (HUCA 32:75–90)
Blau, J.
1954 Zum angeblichen Gebrauch von ta vor dem Nonativ (VT 4 (1954) 7–19)
1955 Etymologische Untersuchungen auf Grund des palästinischen Arabisch (VT
(1955) 337–344)
1956 Zum Hebräisch der Übersetzer des AT (VT 6 (1956) 97–99)
1956 Gibt es ein emphatisches <et_ im Bibelhebräisch? (VT 6 (1956) 211–212)
1956/57 Über homonyme und angeblich homonyme Wurzeln (I: VT 6 (1956) 242–248; II: 7
(1957) 98–102)
1957 Über die t-Form des hif>il im Bibelhebräisch (VT 7 (1957) 385–388)
1959 Adverbia als psychologische und grammatische Subjekte/Praedikate im
Bibelhebräisch (VT 9 (1959) 130–137)
1961 Reste des i-Imperfekts von zkr qal (VT 11 (1961) 81–86)
1979 Zu Lautlehre und Vokalismus des Ugaritischen (UF 11 (1979) 55–62)
+ Loewenstamm, S. E.
1970 Zur Frage der scriptio plena im Ugaritischen und Verwandtes (UF 2 (1970) 19–34)
Blochet, E.
1937 Sur le phénix (Muséon 50 (1937) 123)
Böhl, Franz. M. Th.
1916 Die Könige von Genesis 14 (ZAW 36 (1916) 65–73)
1926 Wortspiele im AT (JPOS 6 (1926) 196–221)
1936 Oud-babylonische Mythen (JbEOL 2 (1936) 194–206)
1948 Babylon, die heilige stad (JbEOL 10:491–525)
1960 Babel und Bibel (II): Die Patriarchenzeit (JbEOL 17 (1963) 125–140)
Boecker, H.-J.
1964 Redeformen des Rechtslebens im Alten Testament (WMANT 14 (1964) 13)
Boehmer, J.
1914 Wieviel Menschen sind am letzten Tage des Hexaëmerons geschaffen worden? (
ZAW 34 (1914) 31–35)
1929 Vom präformierten t-locale (ZAW 47 (1929) 79f)
Boer, P. A. H. de.
1943 De Voorbede in het Oude Testament (OTSt. 3 (1943) 165)
1949 Research into the text of 1 Samuel 18–31 (OTSt. 6 (1949) 1–100)
1951 Notes on an Oxyrhynchus papyrus in Hebrew (VT 1 (1951) 49–57)
1954 Étude sur le sens de la racine QWH (OTSt. 10 (1954) 225–246)
1955 The counsellor (VTSupp. 3 (1955) 42–71)
1955 “Vive le roi!” (VT 5 (1955) 225–231)
1956 Second-Isaiah’s message (OTSt. 11 (1956))
1956 Texte et traduction des paroles attribuées à David en 2 Samuel 23: 1–7 (VTSupp.
(1956) 47–56)
1959 Notes on text and meaning of Isaiah 38:9–20 (OTSt. 9 (1959) 170–186)
1972 An aspect of sacrifice: I. Divine bread. II. God’s fragrance (VTSupp. 23 (1972)
27–47)
1981 Cantate Domino: an erroneous dative? (OTSt. 21 (1981) 55–67)
Boehmer, J.
1926 “Dieses Volk” (Isa. 6: 9f) (JBL 45 (1926) 134–148)
Bons, E.
1987 sûiddaµw = sûiddoµt: Überlegungen zum Verständnis eines Hapaxlegomenons (

(1987) 12–16)
Bordreuil, Pierre.
1973 Inscriptions sigillaires ouest-sémitiques: I. Épigraphie ammonite (Syria 50 (1973)
181- 196)
1976* see Badre
+ Lemaire, André.
1976 Nouveaux sceaux hébreux, araméens et ammonites (Semitica 26 (1976) 45–64)
Borger, R.
1954 Zu tyÖwbv bwv (ZAW 66 (1954) 315f)
1958 Das Problem der >apéÆru (HåabéÆru) (ZDPV 74 (1958) 121)
1959 Gen. 4: 1 (VT 9 (1959) 85–86)
1960 Das Ende des ägyptischen Feldherrn Sib’e = aws (JNES 19 (1960) 49–53)
1964 Ausstrahlungen des Zweistromlandes (JbEOL 18 (1964) 317–330, + plates 18–19)
1969 Weitere ugaritologische Kleinigkeiten (III-V) (UF 1 (1969) 1–4)
1972 Die Waffenträger des Königs Darius (VT 22 (1972) 385–398)
1977 Hiob 39: 23 nach dem Qumran-Targum (VT 27 (1977) 102–105)
+ Klähn, J.
1975 Sðulgi badet (ZA 64 (1975) 235–240)
Bork, Ferdinand.
1939 Philistäische Namen und Vokabeln (AfO 13 (1939–40) 226–236)
Born, A. van den.
1954 Haggib>ah et Gib>on (OTSt. 10 (1954) 201–214)
Bossert, Helmuth Th.
1959 Das Wort “Gotteshaus” bei den Hethitern (AfO 19 (1959–60) 147–148)
Bottéro, J.
1959* see Cazelles
Botterweck, Johannes G.
1954* see von Soden
Bourgeois, H.
1909 Le glagol (Muséon 28 (1909) 39–68)
Bowman, Raymond A.
1941 An Aramaic journal page (AJSL 58 (1941) 312)
1944 Yahweh the speaker (JNES 3 (1944) 1–8)
1970 Aramaic ritual texts from Perspolis
Boyd Barrick, W.
1975 The funerary character of “high-places” in ancient Palestine: a reassessment (
(1975) 565–595)
Bracke, J. M.
1985 sûuÆb sûebuÆt; a reappraisal (ZAW 97 (1985) 233–244)
Branden, A. van den.
1957 La chronologie de Dedan et de Lihyân (BiOr. 14 (1957) 13–16)

1962 L’origine des alphabets protosinaïtique, arabes préislamiques et phénicien (
(1962) 198–206)
1976 L’inscription phénicienne sur une petite base en bronze d’Idalon (BiOr. 33 (1976)
6–9)
Brandenstein, C.-G. von.
1940 Zum Churrischen Lexikon (ZA 46 (1940) 83–115)
Bratsiotis, N. P.
1961 Der Monolog im Alten Testament (ZAW 73 (1961) 30–70)
1965 nephesû-psyche: ein Beitrag zur Erforschung der Sprache und der Theologie der
Septuaginta (VTSupp. 15 (1965) 58–89)
Braulik, G.
1970 Die Ausdrücke für “Gesetz” im Buch Deuteronomium (Biblica 51 (1970) 39–66)
Breasted, J. H.
1904 Spiegelberg’s Aegyptologische Randglossen zum Alten Testament (AJSL
Brekelmans, Chr. H. W.
1954 Exodus 18 and the origins of Yahwism in Israel (OTSt. 10 (1954) 215–224)
1969 Some considerations on the translation of the Psalms by M. Dahood: I. The
preposition b = from in the Psalms according to M. Dahood (UF 1 (1969) 5–14)
Brichto, H. C.
1973 Kin, cult, land and afterlife: a Biblical complex (HUCA 44 (1973) 1–55)
Bright, John.
1961 Altisrael in der neueren Geschichtsschreibung (ATANT 40 (1961))
Brinktine, J.
1952 Zur Übersetzung von Ps. 105 (104): 18: wvpn hab lgrb (ZAW 64 (1952)
251–258)
Brockelmann, C.
1900 ZDMG 54 (1900) 252
1906 ydy la (ZAW 26 (1906) 29–32)
1913 Semitische Analogiebildungen (ZDMG 67:107–112)
1927 Semitische Reimwortbildungen (ZS 5 (1927) 6–38)
1939 Eine vermeintliche aramäische Präposition (OLZ 42 (1939) 666)
1940 Neuere Theorien zur Geschichte des Akzents und des Vokalismus im Hebräischen
und Aramäischen (ZDMG 94 (1940) 332–371)
1953 Review: J. Németh Osttu¬rkische Grammatik der islamischen Litteratursprachen
Mittelasiens. (OLZ 48 (1953) 265–269)
Brongers, H. A.
1963 Der Eifer des Herrn Zebaoth (VT 13 (1963) 269–284)
1965 Bemerkungen zum Gebrauch des adverbialen we>attaµh im Alten Testament (
(1965) 289–299)
1965 Die Wendung besûeµm jhwh im Alten Testament (ZAW 77 (1965) 1–19)
1965 Merismus, Synekdoche und Hendiadys in der Bibel-Hebräischen Sprache (
(1965) 100–114)
1975 Einige Bemerkungen zu Jes. 58:13–14 (ZAW 87 (1975) 212–215)
1977 Fasting in Israel in Biblical and Post-biblical Times (OTSt. 20 (1977) 1–21)
Brönno, E.
1968 Samaritan Hebrew and Origen’s Secunda (JSS 13 (1968) 192–201)
Brooke, G. J.
1979 The textual, formal and historical significance of Ugaritic letters RS 34.124 (=
2.72) (UF 11 (1979) 69–88)
Brown, J. F.
1965 Kothar, Kinyras, and Kythereia (JSS 10:197–221)
Brown, J. Pairman.
1968 Literary contexts of the common Hebrew-Greek vocabulary (JSS 13:163–191)
1969 The Mediterranean vocabulary of the vine (VT 19 (1969) 146–170)
1971 Peace symbolism in ancient military vocabulary (VT 21 (1971) 1–23)
1979 The sacrificial cult and its critique in Greek and Hebrew (I) (JSS 24 (1979) 159–174)
1986 The templum and the saeculum: sacred space and time in Israel and Etruria (
98 (1986) 415–433)
Brownlee, William Hugh.
1951 The text of Isaiah 6:13 in the light of DIsa. (VT 1 (1951) 296–298)
1952 The manuscripts of Isaiah from which DIsa. was copied (BASOR 127 (1952) 16–20)
1953 The servant of the Lord in the Qumran scrolls (BASOR 132 (1953) 8–14)
Bruce, F. F.
1962 Review: J. Finegan, Light from the ancient past (JSS 6 (1962) 119)
1962 Review: C. H. W. Brekelmans, De h\erem in het Oude Testament (JSS 6 (1962) 121)
Brueggemann, W.
1969 Amos’ intercessory formula (VT 19 (1969) 385–399)
1972 From dust to kingship (ZAW 84 (1972) 1–18)
1977 Neglected sapiential word pair (ZAW 89 (1977) 234–258)
Brunet, G.
1966 La vision de l’étain; réinterpretation d’Amos 7: 7–9 (VT 16 (1966) 387–395)
Brunner, Hellmut.
1954 Das Herz als Sitz des Lebensgeheimnisses (AfO 17 (1954–56) 140)
1958 “Was aus dem Munde Gottes geht” (VT 8 (1958) 428–429)
Bruppacher, Hans.
1966 Die Bedeutung des Namens Ruth (ThZ 22 (1966) 12–18)
Buchanan, George Wesley.
1961 Eschatology and the “end of days” (JNES 20 (1961) 188–193)
Buck, A. de.
1951 La fleur au front du grand-prêtre (OTSt. 9 (1951) 18–29)
Budde, K.
1898 Die Fu¬nf Megillot (KHC 17 (1898) 38)
1902 Die Bu¬cher Samuel (KHC 8 (1902) 236)
1914 ella¬ toledoth (ZAW 34 (1914) 241–253)
1915 Wortlaut und Werden der ersten Schöpfungsgeschichte (ZAW 35 (1915) 65–97)
1915 Zum Text der Psalmen (ZAW 35 (1915) 175–195)

1917 Das Rätsel von Micha 1 (ZAW 37 (1917/18) 77–108)
1919 Micha 2 und 3 (ZAW 38 (1919/20) 2–22)
1925 Zu Text und Auslegung des Buches Amos (Schluss) (JBL 44:63–122)
1925 Der Abschnitt Hosea 1–3 und seine grundlegende religionsgeschichtliche Bedeutung
(ThStKr. 96/97 (1925) 1–89)
1928 Das Schwirrholz Werkzeug der alttestamentlichen Titenbeschwörung? (ZAW
(1928) 75f)
1931 Zum Text von Habakuk Kap. 1 u. 2 (OLZ 34 (1931) 409–410)
1932 Zu Jesaja 1–5 (ZAW 50 (1932) 38–72)
1934 Die Herkunft S\adok’s (ZAW 52:42–50)
Bühlmann, W.
1976 Vom rechten Reden und Schweigen (OBO 12 (1976) 204f)
Bultmann, D. Rudolf.
1928 Untersuchungen zum Johannesevangelium (ZNW 27 (1928) 113–162)
1929 Zur Geschichte der Paulusforschung (ThR 1 (1929) 7–25)
Bull, Robert J. and Campbell Jr., Edward F.
1968 The sixth campaign at Balatah (Shechem) (BASOR 190 (1968) 2–40)
Burns, J. B.
1972 An interpretation of Psalm 141: 7b (VT 22 (1972) 245–246)
Burrows, Millar.
1932 Daroma (JPOS 12 (1932) 142–148)
1951 Waw and yodh in the Isaiah Dead Sea scroll (DSIa) (BASOR 124 (1951) 18–20)
Buss, M. J.
1966 The covenant theme in historical perspective (VT 16 (1966) 502–504)
Calderone, Philip J.
1961/62 HDL-II in poetic texts, with supplementary note (CBQ 23 (1961) 451–460; 24
(1962) 412–419)
Calice, F.
1928 Zur Entwicklung des u-Lautes im Ägyptischen und Koptischen (ZAS 63 (1928)
141–143)
Callaway, Joseph A.
1976 Excavating Ai (et-tell), 1964–1972 (BA 39 (1976) 18–30)
Campbell, Edward F. Jr.
1948 The Amarna letters and the Amarna period (BA 23:2–22)
1968 see Bull +
+ Dahlberg, Bruce T.
1953 Archaeological news from Jordan (BA 28:17–32)
Canaan, T.
1924 Mohammedan saints and sanctuaries in Palestine (JPOS 4 (1924) 1–84)
1931 Unwritten laws affecting the Arab women of Palestine (JPOS 11 (1931) 172–203)
Cantineau, J.
1936 Review: Franz Rosenthal, Die Sprache der palmyrenischen Inschriften und ihre
Stellung innerhalb des Arama¬ischen (AfO 11 379)
1936 Tadmorea (Syria 17 (1936) 353)
Caquot, André.
1951 La déesse Sðegal (Semitica 4 (1951/52) 55–58)
1952 Chadrapha: à propos de quelques articles récents (Syria 29 (1952) 74–88)
1955 Nouvelles inscriptions araméennes de Hatra (IV: Syria 32 (1955) 261–272; VI: Syria
41 (1964) 251–272)
1958 Le psaume 91 (Semitica 8 (1958) 21–38)
1959 Purification et expiation selon le psaume 51 (RHR 169 (1959) 133–154)
1959/64 La divinité solaire ougaritique (Syria 36 (1959) 90–101)
1960 Remarques sur la fête de la “néoménie” dans l’ancien Israël (RHR 158 (1960) 1–18)
1966 Remarques sur le psaume 110 (Semitica 6 (1966) 33–52)
1966 Sur quelques démons de l’Ancien Testament (Reshep, Qetel, Deber) (Semitica 6
(1966) 53–68)
1970 Le psaume 68 (RHR 177 (1970) 147–182)
1971 Le psaume 73 (Semitica 21 (1971) 29–56)
1976 La parole sur Juda dans le Testament lyrique de Jacob (Genèse 49: 8–12) (Semitica
26 (1976) 5–32)
1979 Un épisode peu connu du mythe de Baal et de la Génisse (19.54 = PRU V: 124 =
KTU 1.93) (UF 11 (1979) 101–104)
+ Masson, O.
1968 Deux inscriptions phéniciennes de Chypre (Syria 45 (1968) 295–322)
1977 Tablettes ougaritiques du Louvre (Semitica 27 (1977) 5–20)
Carlson, R. A.
1974 The anti-Assyrian character of the oracle in Is. 9: 1–6 (VT 24 (1974) 130–135)
Carm, O. A.
1952 see Murphy +
Carmignac, J.
1955 Précisions aportées au vocabulaire de l’Hébreu biblique par la guerre des fils de
lumière contre les fils de ténèbres (VT 5 (1955) 345–365)
Carroll, R. P.
1977 Rebellion and dissent in ancient Israelite society (ZAW 89 (1977) 176–204)
Casetti, P.
1982 Gibt es ein Leben vor dem Tod? Eine Auslegung von Ps. 49 (OBO 44 (1982) 266f)
Caspari, Wilhelm.
1915 Die kleineren Personenlisten in Samuelis (ZAW 35 (1915) 142–174)
1926 Die Samuelbu¬cher (KAT 7 (1926) 669)
1927 Kultpsalm 50 (ZAW 45 (1927) 259)
1928 Hebr. abéÆr als dynamistischer Ausdruck (ZS 6 (1928) 71–75)
1933 t\abur (Nabel) (ZDMG 86:49–65)
Cassin, E.
1951 RHR 139 (1951) 138
Cassuto, U.
1950 The seven wives of king Keret (BASOR 119 (1950) 18–19)
Cathcart, K. J.
1969 trkb qmh\ in the Arad ostracon and Biblical Hebrew rekeb “upper millstone” (
(1969) 121–123)
Cazelles, Henri.
1948 Sur un rituel du Deutéronome (Deut. 26: 14) (RB 55 (1948) 54–71)
1951 La dîme israélite et les textes de Ras Shamra (VT 1 (1951) 131–134)
1952* see Ginsberg
1954 La mission d’Esdras (VT 4 (1954) 113–140)
1955 Les localisations de l’Exode et la critique littéraire (RB 62 (1955) 321–364)
1956 Review: C. F. L. Schaeffer and J. Nougayrol Le palais royal dÕUgarit III: Textes
accadiens et hourrites (VT 6 (1956) 218–222)
1958 Review: J.-R. Kupper Les nomades en MeŒsopotamie (VT 8 (1958) 316–320)
1958 Review: L. Moraldi Espiazione sacrificale e riti espiatori (VT 8 (1958) 312 -316)
1959 Review: J. Bottéro Archives royales de Mari, VII (VT 9 (1959) 211–212)
1959 Tophel (Deut. 1: 1) (VT 9 (1959) 412–415)
1965 Institutions et terminologie en Deutéronome 1: 6–17 (VTSupp. 15 (1965) 97–112)
1968 Israël du nord et arche d’alliance (VT 18 (1968) 147–158)
1969 Review: J. Nougayrol, E. Laroche, C. Virolleaud, C. F. L. Schaeffer Ugaritica
19 (1969) 499–505)
1974 Déborah (Jud. 5: 14), Amaleq et Mâkîr (VT 24 (1974) 235–238)
Cecchini, S. M.
1981 th\t in KAI 2:3 e in KTU 1.161: 22ss (UF 13 (1981) 27–31)
Chajes, H. P.
1903 ÷za (OLZ 6:305–320)
Chaumont, M.-L.
1959 Vestiges d’un courant ascétique dans le Zoroastrisme sassanide d’après le VIe livre
du Deµnkart (RHR 155 (1959) 1–24)
Christensen, D. L.
1975 The acrostic of Nahum reconsidered (ZAW 87 (1975) 17–29)
Christian, V.
1919 Sprachvergleichende Bemerkungen zum Assyrischen (OLZ 22 (1919) 206–208)
Cintas, P.
1966 Tarsis; Tartessos; Gadès (Semitica 16 (1966) 5–38; 1 map)
Cleveland, Ray L.
1963 Cherubs and the “tree of life” in ancient South Arabia (BASOR 172 (1963) 55–59)
Clines, D. J. A.
1974 The tree of knowledge and the law of Yahweh (VT 24 (1974) 8–14)
+ Gunn, D. M.
1978 “You tried to persuade me” and “Violence! Outrage!” in Jeremiah 20: 7–8 (
(1978) 20–27)
Coats, G. W.
1968 Despoiling the Egyptians (VT 18 (1968) 450–457)

1972 An exposition for the wilderness traditions (VT 22 (1972) 288–295)
Cody, A.
1964 When is the chosen people called a goÆy? (VT 14 (1964) 1–6)
Cogan, Morton.
1968 A technical term for exposure (JNES 27 (1968) 133–135)
Cohen, J. M.
1974 A Samaritan authentication of the rabbinic interpretation of kephéÆ tah\raµ< (
(1974) 361–366)
Conrad, Diethelm.
1968 Zu Jes. 65:3b (ZAW 80 (1968) 232–234)
1971 Der Gott Reschef (ZAW 83 (1971) 157–183)
Cook, H. J.
1964 Pekah (VT 14 (1964) 121–135)
Cooke, G.
1961 The Israelite king as son of God (ZAW 73 (1961) 202–225)
1964 The sons of (the) god(s) (ZAW 76 (1964) 22–47)
Coote, Robert B.
1971 Amos 1:11: RH\MYW (JBL 90 (1971) 206–208)
1971 Hosea 12 (VT 21 (1971) 389–402)
Cornelius, F.
1960 Genesis 14 (ZAW 72 (1960) 1–6)
1966 Moses urkundlich (ZAW 78 (1966) 75–77)
Cornill, C. H.
1884 Die Composition des Buches Jesaia (ZAW 4:83ff)
Coulin.
1914 Zeitschr für vergleich Rechtwissenschaft 32 (1914) 326ff
Couroyer, B.
1949 Le chemin de vie en Egypte et en Israël (RB 56 (1949) 412–432)
1955 lh\n “chantre” (VT 5 (1955) 83, 88)
1956 Quelques égyptianismes dans l’Exode (RB 63 (1956) 209–219)
1960 “Mettre sa main sur sa bouche” en Égypte et dans la Bible (RB 67 (1960) 197–209)
1960 Un égyptianisme biblique: “depuis la fondation de l’Égypte” (Exode 9: 18) (
(1960) 42–48)
1973 Origine des Phéniciens (RB 80 (1973) 264–276)
Cowley, A. E.
1929 Two Aramaic ostraka (JRAS (1929) 107)
Coxon, P. W.
1976 Daniel 3:17: a linguistic and theological problem (VT 26 (1976) 400ff; 406ff)
1977 A philological note on wyta Dan. 5: 3f (ZAW 89 (1977) 275f)
Craigie, P. C.
1968 A note on Judges 5: 2 (VT 18 (1968) 397–399)

1970 An Egyptian expression in the Song of the Sea (Exodus 15: 4) (VT 20 (1970) 83–86)
1972 Psalm 29 in the Hebrew poetic tradition (VT 22 (1972) 143–151)
1972 Some further notes on the song of Deborah (VT 22 (1972) 349–353)
1973 Helel, Athtar and Phaethon (Jes. 14: 12–15) (ZAW 85 (1973) 223–224)
Crenshaw, J. L.
1968 Amos and the theophanic tradition (ZAW 80 (1968) 203–215)
1986 The expression méÆ yoÆdeµa> in the Hebrew Bible (VT 36 (1986) 274–288)
Croatto, José S. and Soggin, J. Alberto.
1962 Die Bedeutung von twhdv im Alten Testament (ZAW 74 (1962) 44–49)
Cross, Frank Moore.

1947 The tabernacle (BA 10:46–68)
1950 Notes on a Canaanite psalm in the Old Testament (BASOR 117 (1950) 19–20)
1952 Ugaritic db<at and Hebrew cognates (VT 2 (1952) 162–164)
1953 A new Qumran Biblical fragment related to the original Hebrew underlying in the
Septuagint (BASOR 132 (1953) 15–26)
1954 The manuscripts of the Dead Sea caves (BA 17:2–21)
1955 see Freedman +
1956 A footnote to Biblical history (BA 19:12–17)
1962 An inscribed seal from BalaÆt\ah (Shechem) (BASOR 167 (1962) 14–15)
1962 Epigraphic notes on Hebrew documents of the eighth-sixth centuries BC II: The
Murabba>ât papyrus and the letter found near Yabneh-yam (BASOR 165 (1962) 34–45)
1962 Yahweh and the god of patriarchs (HTR 55 (1962) 225–260)
1963 The discovery of the Samaria papyri (BA 26 (1963) 110–121)
1972 An interpretation of the Nora stone (BASOR 208 (1972) 13–18)
+ Freedman, David Noel.
1948 The blessing of Moses (JBL 67 (1948) 191–210)
1955 The Song of Miriam (JNES 14 (1955) 237–250)
1964 The name of Ashdod (BASOR 175 (1964) 48–49)
+ Milik, J. T.
1954 Inscribed javelin-heads from the period of the Judges: a recent discovery in Palestine
(BASOR 134 (1954) 5–14)
1956 Explorations in the Judaean BuqeÆ>ah (BASOR 142 (1956) 5–16)
+ Lambdin, Thomas O.
1960 A Ugaritic abecedary and the origins of the proto-Canaanite alphabet (BASOR
(1960) 21–26)
Crowfoot, Grace M. and Baldensperger, L.
1931 Hyssop (PEQ 66 (1931) 89)
Crown, A. D.
1974 Messengers and scribes (VT 24 (1974) 366–370)
Crüsemann, F.
1969 Studien zur Formgeschichte von Hymnus und Danklied in Israel (WMANT
(1969))
1973 Überlegungen zur Identifikation der Håirbet el-Msûaµsû (Teµl MaµsŒoÆsŒ) (ZDPV 89 (1973)
211)
1978 Ein israelitisches Ritualbad aus vorexilischer Zeit (ZDPV 94 (1978) 68–75)
Cumont, Fr.
1926 Fouilles de Doura Europos: les inscriptions.
Cüppers.
1967 see Donner +
Curtis, J. B.
1957 An investigation of the Mount of the Olives in the Judeao-Christian tradition (
28: 137–180)
1979 A folk etymologie of naµbéÆ< (VT 29 (1979) 491–493)
Cutler, B. and Macdonald, J.
1976 Identification of the na>ar in the Ugaritic texts. (UF 8 (1976) 27–36)
1977 The unique Ugaritic text UT 113 and the question of “guilds” (UF 9 (1977) 13–30)
1982 see Macdonald +
Dahood, Mitchell J.
1952 Canaanite-Phoenician influence in Qoheleth (Biblica 33 (1952) 30–52; 191–221)
1954 The language and date of Psalm 48 (47) (CBQ 16 (1954) 15–19)
1955 Two Pauline quotations from the Old Testament (CBQ 17 (1955) 19–24)
1956 Enclitic mem and emphatic lamedh in Psalm 85 (Biblica 37 (1956) 338–340)
1957 Some Northwest-Semitic words in Job (Biblica 38 (1957) 306–320)
1958 Some ambiguous texts in Isaiah (CBQ 20 (1958) 41–49)
1959 Is Õeben YisŒrÕeµl a divine title? (Gen. 49: 24) (Biblica 40 (1959) 1002–1007)
1959 The root bz[ II in Job (JBL 78 (1959) 303–309)
1959 The value of Ugaritic for textual criticism (Biblica 40 (1959) 160–170)
1960 Immortality in Proverbs 12: 28 (Biblica 41(1960) 176–181)
1960 Textual notes on Isaiah (CBQ 22 (1960) 400–409)
1961 misûmaµr “muzzle” in Job 7: 12 (JBL 80 (1961) 270–308)
1961 Two textual notes on Jeremiah (CBQ 23 (1961) 462–464)
1962 Philological notes on Jer. 18: 14–15 (ZAW 74 (1962) 207–208)
1962 Qoheleth and Northwest-Semitic philology (Biblica 43 (1962) 349–365)
1963 An allusion to Koshar in Ezekiel 33: 32 (Biblica 44 (1963) 531–532)
1963 Karatepe notes (Biblica 44 (1963) 70–73)
1963 Zacharia 9: 1: >eÆn ÕA÷daµm (CBQ 25 (1963) 123–124)
1963/74 Hebrew-Ugaritic lexicography (I: Biblica 44 (1963) 289–303; II: Biblica 45 (1964)
393–412; III: Biblica 46 (1965) 311–332; IV: Biblica 47 (1966) 403–419; V: Biblica 48 (1967)
421–438; VI: Biblica 49 (1968) 355–369; VIII: Biblica 51 (1970) 391–404; IX: Biblica 52 (1971)
337–356; X: Biblica 53 (1972) 386–403; XI: Biblica 54 (1973) 351–366; XII: Biblica 55 (1974)
381–393)
1964 Accadian-Ugaritic dmt in Ezekiel 27: 32 (Biblica 45 (1964) 83–84)
1966 The Phoenician background of Qoheleth (Biblica 47 (1966) 264–282)
1966 Vocative lamedh in the Psalter (VT 16 (1966) 299–311)
1969 Accusative >eµs\aµh wood in Isaiah 30: 1b (Biblica 50 (1969) 57–58)
1969 Ugaritic-Hebrew syntax and style (UF 1 (1969) 15–36)
1969* see Brekelmans
1975 Four Ugaritic personal names and Job 39: 5, 26–27 (ZAW 87 (1975) 220)
1977 Hebrew tamruÆréÆm and téÆmaµroÆt (Orientalia 46 (1977) 385)
1979 Third masculine singular with preformative t- in Northwest-Semitic (Orientalia 48
(1979) 97–106)
1979* see Fenton
1982 Eblaite and Biblical Hebrew (CBQ 44 (1982) 1–24)
+ Deller, K. and Köbert, R.
1965 Comparative Semitics: some remarks on a recent publication (Orientalia 34 (1965)
35–44)
+ Pettinato, G.
1977 Ugaritic rsûp gn and Eblaite rasup gunu(m)ki (Orientalia 46 (1977) 230–232)
Dalman, G.
1909 Zu Psalm 42: 7, 8 (PJb 5 (1909) 101ff)
1929 Einige geschichtliche Stätten im Norden Jerusalems (JBL 48 (1929) 354–361)
Daube, D.
1961 Direct and indirect causation in Biblical law (VT 11 (1961) 246–269)
David, M.
1943 Deux anciens termes bibliques pour le gage (fwb[ and lbj) (OTSt. 2 (1943) 79–86)
1951 hit>amer (Deut. 21: 14; 24: 7) (VT 1 (1951) 219–221)
1951 Zabal (Gen. 30: 20) (VT 1 (1951) 59–60)
Davies, E. W.
1980 The meaning of qesem in Prov. 16: 10 (Biblica 61 (1980) 554–556)
Davies, G. I.
1972 Hagar, el-Hegãra and the location of Mt Sinai (VT 22 (1972) 152–163)
1974 The Hebrew text of Exodus 8: 19: an emendation (VT 24 (1974) 489–492)
1977 The uses of r>> qal and the meaning of Jonah 4: 1 (VT 27 (1977) 105–110)
1979 A note on the etymology of hisûtah\awaµh (VT 29 (1979) 493–495)
Davies, G. H.
1973 Psalm 95 (ZAW 85 (1973) 183–195)
Davies, J. A.
1975 A note on Job 12: 2 (VT 25 (1975) 670–671)
Day, J.
1979 Habakkuk 3: 9 and the identity of the seraphim in Isaiah 6 (VT 29 (1979) 143–151)
1981 shear-jashub (Isaiah 7: 3) and “the remnant of wrath” (Psalm 76: 11) (VT
76–78)
De Roche, M.
1981 The reversal of creation in Hosea (VT 31 (1981) 400–409)
1983 Structure, rhetoric, and meaning in Hosea 4: 4–10 (VT 33 (1983) 185–198)
Degen, Rainer.
1967 Zur Schreibung des Kasûka-Namens in ägyptischen, ugaritischen und altaramäischen
Quellen: kritische Anmerkungen zu einer Monographie über die Kasûkäer (WdO 4 (1967–68) 48–60)
1970 Zur neueren hebraistischen Forschung (WdO 6 (1970–71) 47–79)
1973 New inscriptions from Hatra (Nos. 231–280) (JbEOL 23 (1973–74) 402–422)
Deist, Ferdinand.
1973 Jes. 11: 3a: eine Glosse ? (ZAW 85 (1973) 351–355)
1973 Zu hvqm rmtk in Jer 10: 5 (ZAW 85 (1973) 225)

Del Medico, H. E.
1957 Melchisédech (ZAW 69 (1957) 160–170)
Del Olmo Lete, G.
1978 Notes on Ugaritic Semantics IV (UF 10 (1978) 47–52)
1981 Le mythe de la vierge-mère ‘Anatu: une nouvelle interprétation de CTA/KTU 13 (
13 (1981) 49–62)
Delcor, M.
1962 Le trésor de la maison de Yahweh des origines de l’exil (VT 12 (1962) 353–377)
1966 Les attaches littéraires, l’origine et la signification de l’expression biblique “prendre
à témoin le ciel et la terre” (VT 16 (1966) 8–25)
1967 Une inscription funéraire araméenne trouvée à Daskyleion en Turquie (Muséon 80
(1967) 301–326)
1974 Astarté et la fécondité des troupeaux en Deut. 7: 13 et parallèles (UF 6 (1974) 7–14)
1975 Quelques cas de survivances du vocabulaire nomade en hébreu biblique (
(1975) 307–322)
1978 Les Kéréthim et les Crétois (VT 28 (1978) 409–422)
1979 Le personnel du temple d’Astarté à Kition d’après une tablette phénicienne (CIS 86
A et B) (UF 11 (1979) 147–164)
Delekat, L.
1958 Ein Septuagintatargum (VT 8 (1958) 225–252)
1964 Probleme der Psalmenüberschriften (ZAW 76 (1964) 280–297)
1964 Zum hebräischen Wörterbuch (VT 14 (1964) 7–66)
1972 Zum ugaritischen Verbum (UF 4 (1972) 11–26)
Delitzsch, F.
1886* see Nöldeke
1916 Philologische Forderungen an die hebräische Lexikographie (OLZ 19 (1916)
161–172)
Deller, K.-Watanabe, K.
1980 sûukkulu(m), sûakkulu “abwischen, auswischen” (ZA 70 (1980) 198–225)
Deller, K.
1965 see Dahood +
Dhorme, Édouard.
1927 Review: Fritz Hommel, Ethnologie und Geographie des Alten Orients (RB
(1927) 90)
1932 Les peuples issus de Japhet d’après le chapitre 10 de la Genèse (Syria 13 (1932)
28–49)
1933 Où en est le déchiffrement des hiéroglyphes hittites? (Syria 14 (1933) 341–367)
1936 Review: A. H. Gardiner The attitude of the ancient Egyptians to death and the dead.
(RHR 113 (1936) 275–276)
+ Vincent, L. H.
1926 Les chérubins (RB 35 (1926) 328–358)
Dick, M. B.
1979 Job 28: 4: a new translation (VT 29 (1979) 216–219)
Diethelm, Michel.
1960 Tempora und Satzstellung in den Psalmen (Abhandlungen zur evang. Theologie,
Vol. 1 (1960) 132ff)
Dietrich, Ernst Ludwig.
1925 twb bw Die endzeitliche Wiederherstellung bei den Propheten (BZAW 40 (1925) 6)
Dietrich, Manfred and Loretz, Oswald.
1964 Der Vertrag zwischen Sðuppiluliuma und Niqmandu: eine philologische und
kulturhistorische Studie (WdO 3 (1964–66) 206–245)
1964 Die soziale Struktur von AlalahÉ und Ugarit: 1. Die Berufsbezeichnungen mit der
hurritischen Endung -hÉuli (WdO 3 (1964–66) 188–205)
1966/75 Zur Ugaritischen Lexikographie (I: BiOr. 23 (1966) 127–133; V: UF 4 (1972)
27–36; VII (with Sanmartín, J.), Lexicographische Einzelbemerkungen: UF 5 (1973) 79–104; VIII:
UF 5 (1973) 105–118; IX, pgr im Ugaritischen: UF 5 (1973) 289–291; XI: Lexicographische
Einzelbemerkungen: UF 6 (1974) 19–38; XII: Lexicographische Einzelbemerkungen: UF 6 (1974)
39–46; XIII: UF 7 (1975) 157–170)
1967 Untersuchungen zur Schrift- und Lautlehre des Ugaritischen (I). Der ugaritische
Konsonant gù (WdO 4 (1967–68) 300–315)
1977 Ein Spottlied auf >at\tar (KTU 1.6 i 50–52) (UF 9 (1977) 330–331)
1978 Die sieben Kunstwerke des Schmiedegottes in KTU 1.4 i 23–43 (UF 10 (1978)
57–64)
1978 Die ug. Feldbezeichnung RPSð “Schlamm-, Sumpffeld” (UF 10 (1978) 430)
1978 Ein ug. Fruchtbarkeitsritus (KTU 1.16 iii 1–11) (UF 10 (1978) 424–425)
1978 Ug. * ‘BSð, T_BSð, Hebr. * SðBS (Am. 5:11) sowie ug. T_SðY und SðBSð (UF 10 (1978)
434–435)
1979 Einzelfragen zu Wörtern aus den ugaritischen Mythen und Wirtschaftstexten (
(1979) 189–198)
1980 baal rpu in KTU 1.108; 1.113 und nach 1.17 vi 25–33 (UF 12 (1980) 171–182)
1980 Der Tod Baals als Rache Mots für die Vernichtung Leviathans in KTU 1.5 i 1–8 (
12 (1980) 404–407)
1980 Die Bannung von Schlangengift (KTU 1.100 und 1.107:7b-13a. 19b-20) (
(1980) 154)
1980 Gebrauch von Götterstatuen in der Mantik von Ugarit (KTU 1.124) (UF 12 (1980)
395–396)
1980 Totenverehrung in Maµri (12803) und Ugarit (KTU 1.161) (UF 12 (1980) 381–382)
1981/83 Neue Studien zu den Ritualtexten aus Ugarit. (I: Ein Forschungsbericht; UF
(1981) 63–100; II: Nr. 6, epigraphische und inhaltliche Probleme in KTU 1.161; UF 15 (1983)
17–24)
1982 Kennt das ug. Zahlensystem die Duale t\lt\tm “6” und t\t\tm “12”? (UF 14 (1982)
307–308)
1984 Brief des Gnryn an Mlkytn: KTU 2.15 (UF 16 (1984) 353–354)
1986 Kerets Krankheit und Amtsunfähigkeit (UF 17 (1986) 123–128)
+ Loretz, Oswald and Sanmartín, J.
1974 Keilalphabetische Bürgschaftsdokumente aus Ugarit (UF 6 (1974) 466–467)
1975 Bemerkungen zur Schlangenbeschwörung RS 24.244 = Ug. 5, S. 564ff. Nr. 7 (
(1975) 121–126)
1975 Bericht über ein Orakel (RS 24.272 = Ug. 5, S. 563 Nr. 6) (UF 7 (1975) 540–541)
1975 Der “Neujahrspsalm” RS 24.252 = Ug. 5, S. 551–557 Nr. 2 (UF 7 (1975) 115–120)
1975 Der keilaphabetische sûumma izbu Text RS 24.247 + 265 + 268 + 328 (UF
133–140)
1975 Der stichometrische Aufbau von RS 24.258 = Ug. 5, S. 545–551 Nr 1 (UF
109–114)
1975 Notizen zum Opfertext RS 24.260 = Ug. 5, S. 586 Nr. 11 (UF 7 (1975) 543–545)
1976 Die ugaritischen Totengeister rpu(m) und die biblischen Rephaim (UF 8 (1976)
45–52)
Dietrich, Walter.
1972 Prophetie und Geschichte (FRLANT 108 (1972) 75)
1976 Jesaja und die Politik (Beiträge zur Evang. Theologie 74 (1976) 141)
1985 “… den Armen das Evangelium verkünden”: vom befreienden Sinn biblischer
Gesetze (ThZ 41 (1985) 31–43)
Dijk, H. J. van.
1968 A neglected connotation of three Hebrew verbs (VT 18 (1968) 16–30)
Dijkstra, M.
1975 A note on 1 Chr. 4: 22–23 (VT 25 (1975) 671–672)
1976 Two notes on PRU 5, no. 60 (UF 8 (1976) 437–439)
1988 The legend of Danel and the Rephaim 35–52 (UF 20 (1988) 46)
+ Moor, J. C. de.
1975 Problematic passages in the legend of Aqhâtu (UF 7 (1975) 171–216)
Diringer, David.
1949 The royal jar-handle stamps of ancient Judah (BA 12 (1949) 70–86)
Dobbie, R.
1955 The text of Hosea 9: 8 (VT 5 (1955) 199–203)
Dohmen, Ch.
1983 Ein kanaanäischer Schmiedeterminus (nsk) (UF 15 (1983) 39–42)
1985 Das Bilderverbot: seine Entstehung und seine Entwicklung im Alten Testament (
BBB 62 (1985) 216–223)
Donner, Herbert.
1957 Zur Inschrift von SuµdschéÆn AA9 (AfO 18 (1957–58) 390–392)
1961 Der “Freund des Königs” (ZAW 73 (1961) 269–276)
1964 Israel unter den Völkern. Die Stellung der Klassischen Propheten des 8.
Jahrhunderts v. Chr. zur Aussenpolitik der könige von Israel und Juda (VTSupp. 11 (1964) 68)
1967 Ugaritismen in der Psalmenforschung (ZAW 79 (1967) 322–350)
1968 Der Feind aus dem Norden: topographische und archäologische Erwägungen zu Jes.
10:27b-34 (ZDPV 84 (1968) 46)
1970 Die Schwellenhüpfer: Beobachtungen zu Zephanja 1: 8f. (JSS 15:42–55)
+ Cüppers, Heinz.
1967 Die Restauration und Konservierung der Mosaikkarte von Madeba (ZDPV
Dossin, Georges.
1938 Les archives épistolaires du palais de Mari (Syria 19 (1938) 105–141)
1939 NQMD et NIQME-HAD (Syria 20 (1939) 169–176)
1948 Debir (Muséon 61 (1948) 37–42)
1972 adasûsûum et kirhÉum dans les textes de Mari (RA 66 (1972) 111–130)
Driver, Godfrey Rolles.

1924 The root Årp in Hebrew (JTS 25 (1924) 177)
1926 On some passages in the books of Kings and Chronicles (JTS 27 (1926) 158)
1927 Two forgotten words in the Hebrew language (JTS 28 (1927) 285–286)
1928 Some Hebrew words (JTS 29 (1928) 390–400)
1928 The original form of the name “Yahweh”: evidence and conclusions (ZAW
(1928) 7–25)
1929 Some Hebrew verbs, nouns, and pronouns (JTS 30 (1929) 371–378)
1931/33 Studies in the vocabulary of the Old Testament ([I:] JTS 32 (1931) 250–269; [II:]
361–366; [III:] JTS 33 (1932) 38; V: JTS 34 (1933) 33–44; VI: JTS 34 (1933) 375–384)
1932 Problems in Proverbs (ZAW 50 (1932) 141–148)
1934 Hebrew notes (ZAW 52 (1934) 51–56)
1936 Problems in Job (AJSL 52 (1936) 160–170)
1936 Supposed Arabisms in the Old Testament (JBL 55 (1936) 101–120)
1936 Textual and linguistic problems of the book of Psalms (HTR 29 (1936) 171–196)
1937 Isaiah 1–39: linguistic and textual problems (JTS (1. Series) 38 (1937) 36–49)
1937 Linguistic and textual problems: Jeremiah (JQR 28 (1937–38) 97–134)
1937 Suggestions and objections (ZAW 55 (1937) 68–72)
1937 Problems of Semitic grammar (ZDMG 91:343–351)
1938/38 Linguistic and textual problems: Ezekiel ([I:]Biblica 19 (1938) 60–69; [II:]
19 (1938) 175–187)
1940 Hebrew notes on prophets and proverbs (JTS 41 (1940) 162–174)
1944 Uncertain Hebrew words (JTS 45 (1944) 13)
1945 Brief notes (PEQ 77 (1945) 5)
1946 Theological and philological problems in the Old Testament (JTS 47 (1946)
156–165)
1947 Hebrew roots and words (WdO 1 (1947–52) 406–415)
1947 Misreadings in the Old Testament (WdO 1 (1947–52) 234–238)
1947 Mistranslations in the Old Testament (WdO 1 (1947–52) 29–31)
1947 On a passage in the Baal epic (IV AB iii 24) and Proverbs 31: 21 (BASOR
(1947) 11)
1950 New Aramaic documents (ZAW 62 (1950) 223)
1951 Ezekiel’s inaugural vision (VT 1 (1951) 60–62)
1951 Hebrew notes (VT 1 (1951) 241–250)
1951 Problems in the Hebrew text of Proverbs (Biblica 32 (1951) 173–197)
1952 Three notes (VT 2 (1952) 356–357)
1953 Hebrew poetic diction (VTSupp. 1 (1953) 26–39)
1953 On Psalm 35: 16 (ThZ 9 (1953) 468)
1953 Some Hebrew medical expressions (ZAW 65 (1953) 255–262)
1954 A Hebrew burial custom (ZAW 66 (1954) 314)
1954 Babylonian and Hebrew notes (WdO 2 (1954–59) 19–26)
1954/54 Ezekiel: linguistic and textual problems (Biblica 35 (1954) 145–159; 299–312)
1954 Problems and solutions (VT 4 (1954) 225–245)
1954 Technical terms in the Pentateuch (WdO 2 (1954–59) 254–263)
1954* see Milik
1955 Hebrew mothers (ZAW 67 (1955) 246–248)
1955 Problems in the Hebrew text of Job (VTSupp. 3 (1955) 72–93)
1955/55 Birds in the Old Testament: I. Birds in law; and II: PEQ 87 (1955) 5; 129)
1956 Mythological monsters in the OT (StOr. 1 (1956) 234–249 = Levi della Vida
.))
1956 On Job 5: 5. (ThZ 12 (1956) 485)
1956 Three technical terms in the Pentateuch (JSS 1 (1956) 97–105)

1956 Two problems in the Old Testament examined in the light of Assyriology (Syria 33
(1956) 70–78)
1957 On hl[ “went up country” and dry “went down country” (ZAW 69 (1957) 74–76)
1958 Once again birds in the Bible [see above Driver 1955/55] (PEQ 90 (1958) 56)
1959 Lilith (PEQ 91(1959) 55)
1959* see Starcky
1960 Abbreviations in the Massoretic text (Textus 1 (1960) 112–131)
1962 The resurrection of marine and terrestrial creatures (JSS 7:12–22)
1962 Problems in Judges newly discussed (ALUOS 4 (1962/63) 6–25)
1964 Once again abbreviations [see above Driver 1960] (Textus 4 (1964) 76–94)
1965 Ein Wörterbuch der ugaritischen Sprache (OLZ 60 (1965) 5–116)
1966 Myths of Qumran (ALUOS 6 (1966–68) 23–48)
1967 Hebrew homonyms (VTSupp. 16 (1967) 50–64)
1968 Isaiah 1–39: textual and linguistic problems (JSS 13 (1968) 36–57)
1968 Isaiah 52: 13–53: 12: the servant of the Lord (BZAW 103 (1968) 90–105)
1968 Old problems re-examined (ZAW 80 (1968) 174–182)
1970 Water in the mountains (PEQ 102 (1970) 83–91)
Driver, S. R.
1900 Daniel
Ducos, P.
1967 Les débuts de l’élevage en Palestine (Syria 44 (1967) 375–400)
Duhm, B.
1911 Anmerkungen zu den Zwölf Propheten (ZAW 31 (1911) 1–43)
1922 Die Psalmen (KHC 15 2 (1922) 34f)
Dumbrell, W. J.
1975 Midian: a land or a league? (VT 25 (1975) 323–337)
Dumermuth, Fritz.
1958 Zur deuteronomischen Kulttheologie und ihren Voraussetzungen (ZAW 70 (1958)
59–97)
1961 Moses strahlendes Gesicht (ThZ 17 (1961) 240–248)
1963 Josua in Ex. 33: 7, 11 (ThZ 19 (1963) 161–168)
Dumortier, J.-B.
1972 Un rituel d’intronisation: le Ps. 89: 2–38 (VT 22 (1972) 176–196)
Dupont-Sommer, A.
1946 La doctrine gnostique de la lettre waw
1947 Une inscription inédite de l’Ouâdi H\ammâmât (RA 41 (1947–48) 105ff)
1947 Une inscription phénicienne archaïque de Chypre (RA 41 (1947) 201–212)
1960 Exorcismes et guérisons dans les récits de Qoumrân (VTSupp. 7 (1960) 246–261)
Durand, J. M.
1977 Notes sur l’histoire de Larsa (RA 71 (1977) 17–34)
Dürr, L.
1925 Hebr. vpn = akk. napisûtu = Gurgel, Kehle (ZAW 43 (1925) 262–269)
1939* see Junker
Dus, Jan.
1964 Die Thron- und Bundeslade (ThZ 20 (1964) 241–251)
Dussaud, René.
1932 Le sanctuaire et les dieux phéniciens de Ras Shamra (RHR 105 (1932) 245)
1933 Les Phéniciens au Négeb et en Arabie d’après une texte de Ras Shamra (RHR
108(1933)5–49)
1936 Le vrai nom de Ba>al (RHR 113 (1936) 5–20)
1923 Comptes d’ouvriers d’une entreprise funéraire juive (Syria 4 (1923) 241–249)
1926 Le sanctuaire phénicien de Byblos d’après Benjamin de Tudèle (Syria 7 (1926)
247–256)
Duschesne-Guillemin, J.
1953 Les noms des eunuques d’Assurérus (Muséon 66 (1953) 105–108)
Eaton, J. H.
1964 The origin and meaning of Habbakuk 3 (ZAW 76 (1964) 144–170)
1968 Proposals in Psalm 99 and 119 (VT 18 (1968) 555–558)
Ebach, J. H.
1971 PQR = (Toten-) Opfer? (UF 3 (1971) 365–368)
1976 Sozialethische Erwägungen zum alttestamentlichen Bodenrecht (BN 1 (1976) 31–46)
+ Rüterswörden, U.
1977 Unterweltsbeschwörung im Alten Testament (UF 9 (1977) 57–70)
Ebbell, B.
1924 Die ägyptischen Krankheitsnamen (ZAS 59 (1924) 55–59)
Ebeling, E.
1952 Die Rüstung eines babylonischen Panzerreiters nach einem Vertrage aus der Zeit
Darius II (ZA 50 (1952) 203–213)
Ebeling, Gerhard D.
1958 Jesus und Glaube (ZThK 55 (1958) 64–109)
Edelman, D.
1988 Saul’s journey through Mt. Ephraim and Samuel’s Ramah (1 Sam. 9: 4–5; 10: 2–5) (
ZDPV 104 (1988) 44–67)
Edelmann, R.
1966 To twn[: Exodus 32:18 (VT 16 (1966) 355)
Edzard, D. O.
1959 Altbabylonisch nawuÆm (ZA 53 (1959) 168–173)
1964 Mari und Aramäer? (ZA 56 (1964) 142–149)
1976 Ein Brief an den “Grossen” von Kumidi aus Kaµmid al-Loµz (ZA 66 (1976) 62–67)
Eerdmans, B. D.
1942 On the road to monotheism (OTSt. 1 (1942) 105–125)
1947 The Hebrew book of Psalms (OTSt. 4 (1947))
Eglin, Max.
1948 see Baumgartner +
Ehrlich, Ernst Ludwig.

1965 Der Aufenthalt des Königs Manasse in Babylon (ThZ 21 (1965) 281–286)
Ehrmann, Albert.
1959 A note on jy in Mic. 6: 14 (JNES 18 (1959) 156–168)
Eichrodt, Walther.
1957 Vom Symbol zum Typos. Ein Beitrag zur Sacharja-Exegese (ThZ 13 (1957)
509–522)
Eilers, Wilhelm.
1932 Die Gesetzestele Chammurabis (AO 31/3–4)
1935 Das Volk der karkaµ in den Achämenideninschriften (OLZ 38 (1935) 201–272)
1936 Eine mittelpersische Wortform aus frühachämenidischer Zeit? (ZDMG 90:160–200)
1940 Kleinasiatisches (ZDMG 94:189–233)
1952 Ein Büste mit Inschrift aus Palmyra (AfO 16 (1952–53) 311–312; with 2 plates)
1954 Akkad. kaspum “Silber, Geld” und Sinnverwandtes (WdO 2 (1954–59) 322–337;
see also Nachträge, pp. 465–469)
1954 Neue aramäische Urkunden aus Ägypten (AfO 17 (1954–56) 322–335)
1955 Altpersische Miszellen I (ZA 51 (1955) 225–236)
1964 Zur Funktion von Nominalformen. Ein Grenzgang zwischen Morphologie und
Semasiologie (WdO 3 (1964–66) 80–145)
Eisenbeis, Walter.
1969 Die Wurzel µl im Alten Testament (BZAW 113 (1969))
Eissfeldt, Otto.
1917 Erstlinge und Zehnten im Alten Testament (BWANT 22 (1917) 56ff)
1928 Jahwe als König (ZAW 46 (1928) 81–105)
1930 Der Gott Bethel (ARw. 28 (1930) 1–30)
1930 Der Gott des Tabor und seine Verbreitung (ARw. 31 (1934) 14–41)
1936 Hesekiel Kap. 16 als Geschichtsquelle (JPOS 16 (1936) 286–292)
1938 Neue Belege für tda “Herrin” (OLZ 41 (1938) 489–490)
1939 Ba>alsûamem und Jahwe (ZAW 57 (1939) 1–30)
1941 Zu syrischen Tempeln und Kulten in hellenistisch-römischer Zeit (OLZ 44 (1941)
433)
1943 Israelitisch-philistäische Grenzverschiebungen von David bis auf die Assyrerzeit (
ZDPV 66:115)
1945 “Mein Gott” im Alten Testament (ZAW 61 (1945/48) 3–16)
1951 Die Menetekel-Inschrift und ihre Deutung (ZAW 63 (1951) 105–113)
1952 Taautos und Sanchunjaton (Sitzungsberichte d. Deutschen Akad. d. Wissenschaften
zu Berlin, Klasse f. Sprachen, Literatur und Kunst, Jahrg (1952/1) 21)
1954 Das Alte Testament im Lichte der safatenischen inschriften (ZDMG 104:88–118)
1954 Psalm 132 (WdO 2 (1954–59) 480–483)
1955 Zwei verkannte militärtechnische Termini im Alten Testament (VT 5 (1955)
232–238)
1956 El and Yahweh (JSS 1:25–37)
1957 Psalm 76 (ThLZ 82 (1957) 801)
1958 see Christopher R. North Festschrift (The essence of idolatry), BZAW 77 (1958)
151–160)
1960 The alphabetical cuneiform texts from Ras Shamra published in “Le Palais Royal
d’Ugarit, vol. 2, 1957 (JSS 5:1–49)

1962 Pergamente und Papyri aus Dura-Europos (OLZ 57 (1962) 347–452)
1962 Ein Psalm aus Nord-Israel (ZDMG 112:259–268)
1963 Gut Glück in Semitischer Namengebung (JBL 82 (1963) 195–200)
1963 Jahwe, der Gott der Väter (TLZ 88 (1963) 481)
1963 Jakobs Begegnung mit El und Moses. Begegnung mit Jahwe (OLZ 58 (1963)
325–436)
1968 Protektorat der Midianiter über ihre Nachbarn im letzten Viertel des 2. Jahrtausends
v. Chr (JBL 87 (1968) 383–393)
Eitan, Israel.
1923 The bearing of Ethiopic on Biblical exegesis and lexicography (JPOS 3 (1923)
136–144)
1927 AJSL 44 (1927–28) 187f
1928 The identification of tisûkah\ yeµméÆnéÆ, Ps 137: 5 (JBL 47:193–195)
1929/29 Hebrew and Semitic particles (AJSL 45 (1929) 22–51; 197–211)
1937 A contribution to Isaiah exegesis (HUCA 12/13 (1937/38) 55–88)
Elhorst, H. J.
1910 Das Ephod (ZAW 30 (1910) 259–276)
1924 Die deuteronomischen Jahresfeste (ZAW 42 (1924) 136–145)
Ellermeier, F.
1963 Das Verbum vwj in Koh 2: 25 (ZAW 75 (1963) 197–217)
Elliger, K.
1930 Die Grenze zwischen Ephraim und Manasse (ZDPV 53 (1930) 265)
1934 Die Heimat des Propheten Micha (ZDPV 57:81)
1935 Die dreizig Helden Davids (PJb 31 (1935) 29–74)
1936 Die Nordgrenze des Reiches Davids (PJb 32 (1936) 34–72)
1937 Thappuah (PJb 33 (1937) 7–21)
1939 Zu text und Schrift der Ostraka von Lachis (ZDPV 62:63)
1950 Ein Zeugnis aus der jüdischen Gemeinde im Alexanderjahr 322 v. Chr (ZAW
(1950) 63–114)
1958 Ephod und Choschen (VT 8 (1958) 19–35)
1971 Der Sinn des hebräischen Wortes ypv (ZAW 83 (1971) 317–329)
Emerton, J. A.
1966 “Spring and torrent” in Psalm 74: 15 (VTSupp. 15 (1966) 122–133)
1967 The meaning of vdqAynba in Lamentations 4: 1 (ZAW 79 (1967) 233–236)
1969 Notes on Jeremiah 12: 9 and on some suggestions of J. D. Michaelis about the
Hebrew words nah\aµ, >e¬braµ, and jadaŒ> (ZAW 81 (1969) 182–190)
1969 Some linguistic and historical problems in Isaiah 8: 23 (JSS 14 (1969) 151–175)
1973 Notes on two proposed emendations in the book of Judges (11: 24 and 16: 28) (
85 (1973) 220–222)
1974 The meaning of sûeµnaµ< in Psalm 127: 2 (VT 24 (1974) 15–31)
1975 Some problems in Genesis 38 (VT 25 (1975) 338–361)
1977 A textual problem in Isaiah 25: 2 (ZAW 89 (1977) 64–72)
1977 The etymology of hisûtah\awaµh (OTSt. 20 (1977) 41–55)
1978 A further note on CTA 5 I 4–6 (UF 10 (1978) 73–78)
1980 Notes on the text and translation of Isaiah 22: 8–11 and 65: 5 (VT 30 (1980)
437–451)
1981 see Mélanges Cazelles (AOAT 212 (1981) 125)

1982 New light on Israelite religion: the implications of the inscriptions from Kuntillet
>Ajrud (ZAW 94 (1982) 2–19)
Emmerson, G. I.
1974 A fertility goddess in Hosea 9: 17–19? (VT 24 (1974) 492–497)
1975 The structure and meaning of Hosea 8: 1–3 (VT 25 (1975) 700–710)
Epstein, J. N.
1917 Biblisch-Talmudisches (OLZ 20 (1917) 274–277)
Erman, A.
1925 Hebräisch vlg “springen” (OLZ 28 (1925) 5–56)
Falk, Z. W.
1960/67 Hebrew legal terms (I: JSS 5 (1960) 350–354; II: JSS 12 (1967) 241–244)
Falkenstein, A.
1957 Bücherschau (ZA 52 (1957) 324–328)
Falkner, Margarete.
1957 Studien zur Geographie des alten Mesopotamien (AfO 18 (1957–58) 1–37)
Farmer, William R.
1956 The geography of Ezekiel’s river of life (BA 19 (1956) 17–22)
Fauth, W.
1970 SSM BN PDRSðSðA (ZDMG 120 (1970) 229–256)
Feigin, Samuel I.
1947 h\amoÆr gaµréÆm: “castrated ass” (JNES 6 (1947) 230)
1950 The heavenly sieve (JNES 9 (1950) 40–43)
Feiler, W.
1939 Håurritische Namen im Alten Testament (ZA 45 (1939) 216–229)
Feliks, J.
1980 rbhArww wat µar (Lesûonenu 44 (1980) 124)
Fensham, F. Charles.
1959 The stem HTL in biblical Hebrew (VT 9 (1959) 310–311)
1960 Exodus 21: 18–19 in the light of Hittite Law paragraph 10 (VT 10 (1960) 333–335)
1960 Ps. 68: 23 in the light of the recently discovered Ugaritic tablets (JNES 19 (1960)
292)
1962 A Cappadocian parallel to Hebrew kutoµnet (VT 12 (1962) 196–198)
1962 >d in Exodus 22: 12. (VT 12 (1962) 337–339)
1962 Malediction and benediction in ancient Near Eastern vassal-treaties and the Old
Testament (ZAW 74 (1962) 1–8)
1962 Salt as curse in the Old Testament and ancient Near East (BA 25:48–50)
1963 Common trends in curses of the Near-Eastern treaties and kudurru-inscriptions
compared with maledictions of Amos and Isaiah (ZAW 75 (1963) 155–175)
1967 Possible explanation of the name Baal-Zebub of Ekron (ZAW 79 (1967) 361–363)
1971 Some remarks on the first three mythological texts of Ugaritica V (UF 3 (1971)
21–24)
1972 The first Ugaritic text in Ugaritica V (VT 22 (1972) 296–303)
Fenton, T. L.
1969 Ugaritica-Biblica (UF 1 (1969) 65–70)
1979 Comparative evidence in textual study: M. Dahood on 2 Sam. 1: 21 and CTA 19 (1
Aqht), i: 44–45 (VT 29 (1979) 162–170)
Ferron, J.
1967 Inscription néopunique à Malta (ZDMG 117:17–21)
Feuillet, R.
1961 Les villes de Juda au temps d’Ozias (VT 11 (1961) 270–291)
Février, J.-G.
1949 A propos de Ba>al Addir (Semitica 2:24–28)
1951 L’inscription funéraire de Micipsa (RA 45 (1951) 139–150)
1953 Molchomor (RHR 143 (1953) 8–18)
Fichtner, Johannes.
1933 Die altorientalische Weisheit in ihrer Israelitisch-Jüdischen Ausprägung: eine Studie
zur Nationalisierung der Weisheit in Israel (BZAW 62 (1933))
Fichtner, J.
1951 Jahves Plan in der Botschaft des Jesaja (ZAW 63 (1951) 16–32)
1956 Die etymologische Ätiologie in den Namengebunden der geschichtlichen Bücher des
Alten Testaments (VT 6 (1956) 372–396)
Finkel, J.
1955 A mathematical conundrum in the Ugaritic Keret poem (HUCA 26:109–150)
Finkel, I. L.
1976 An early Old-Babylonian legal document (RA 70 (1976) 45–54)
Finkelstein, J. J.
1956 Hebrew rbj and Semitic *HåBR (JBL 75 (1956) 328)
1962 “Mesopotamia” (JNES 21 (1962) 73–92)
Finkelstein, Louis.
1944 A Talmudic note on the word for cutting flax in the Gezer Calendar (BASOR
(1944) 28)
Fischer, A.
1902 Zur Siloahinschrift (ZDMG 56:800–808)
1917 Die semitischen Gottesnamen Õil, Õel – Õilaµh, Õeloµah Õelaµh usw. (ZDMG 71:445)
1918 Zu arabisch fahÉhÉaµr (ZDMG 72 (1918) 328)
Fisher, L. R.
1958 An Amarna age prodigal (JSS 3 (1958) 113–122)
Fishbane, Michael.
1970 The treaty background of Amos 1: 11 and related matters (JBL 89 (1970) 313–318)
Fitzgerald, Aloysius.
1967 Hebrew yd, “love” and “beloved” (CBQ 29 (1967) 368–374)
1972 A note on G-Stem rxny forms in the Old Testament (ZAW 84 (1972) 90–92)
1974 MTNDBYM in 1QS (CBQ 36 (1974) 495–502)
Fitzmyer, Joseph A.
1959 The Aramaic qorbaµn inscription from Jebel Håallet et\-T\uÆri and Mark 7: 11 / Matt. 15:
5 (JBL 78 (1959) 60–65)
1961 A note on Ezk. 16:30 (CBQ 23 (1961) 460–462)
1971 (Albright Festschrift, 153; 162)
Flashar, M.
1908 Das ghain in der Septuaginta (ZAW 28 (1908) 194–220)
Fleisch, see Barthélmy and Fleisch.
Floss.
1975 Jahwe dienen—Göttern dienen. Terminologische, literarische und semantische
Untersuchungen einer theologischen Aussage zum Gottesverhältnis im Alten Testament (BBB 45
(1975) 198)
Fohrer, Georg.
1963 “Priesterliches Königtum”: Ex. 19: 6 (ThZ 19 (1963) 359–384)
1964 Überlieferung und Geschichte des Exodus. Eine Analyse von Ex. 1–15 (BZAW
(1964))
1967 Studien zur alttestamentlichen Prophetie (1949–1965) (BZAW 99 (1967))
1969 Studien zur alttestamentlichen Theologie und Geschichte (1949–1966) (BZAW
(1969))
Fokkelman, J. P.
1979 tmwrt yd in 2 Sam 1: 21a—a non-existent crux (ZAW 91 (1979) 290–291)
Fontinoy, C.
1971 Les noms de lieux en -ayim dans la Bible (UF 3 (1971) 33–40)
Forbes, R. J.
1934 Metalen en hun bewerking in het Nabije Oosten (JbEOL 2 (1934) 139–143)
1936 Iets over antieke mijnbouw (JbEOL 4 (1936) 255–260)
1944 The coming of iron (JbEOL 9: 207–214)
Fowler, M. D.
1984 Concerning the “cultic” structure at Taanach (ZDPV 100 (1984) 30–34)
Fraenkel, S.
1899 Zum Buche Ezra (ZAW 19 (1899) 178ff)
1907 Zum Christlich-Palästinischen (ZA 20 (1907) 442–445)
Frank, F.
1934 Aus der >Araba I. Reiseberichte (ZDPV 57 (1934) 191)
Franken, H. J.
1965 Tell es-Sultan and Old Testament Jericho (OTSt. 14 (1965) 189–200)
Frankena, R.
1972 Some remarks on the Semitic background of chapters 29–31 of the book of Genesis (
OTSt. 17 (1972) 53–64)
Frankfort, H.
1937 The Burney relief (AfO 12 (1937–39) 128–134, with 5 figures)
Freedman, David Noel.
1948 see Cross +
1955 see Cross +
1960 Archaic forms in early Hebrew poetry (ZAW 72 (1960) 101–106)
1960 The name of the God of Moses (JBL 79 (1960) 151–156)
1962 The Massoretic text and the Qumran scrolls: a study in orthography (Textus
(1962) 87–102)
1963 The original name of Jacob (IEJ 13 (1963) 125–126)
1964 see Cross +
1978 The real story of the Ebla tablets: Ebla and the cities of the plain (BA 41 (1978) 143-
165)
+ Cross, Frank Moore.
1955 The Song of Miriam (JNES 14 (1955) 237–250)
Friedrich, J.
1930 Staatsverträge des Håatti-Reiches II (MVAG 34/1, 1930) 96f. 169)
1942 Hethitisch-Ugaritisches (ZDMG 96:471–494)
1942 Hethitisch ZU = GÍN: “Sekel” (WZKM 49 (1942) 174)
1943 Die Partikeln der zitierten Rede im Achämenidisch—Elamischen (Orientalia 12
(1943) 23–30)
1957 Punische Studien (ZDMG 107:282–298)
Fritz, Volkmar.
1969 Die sogenannte Liste der besiegten Könige in Josua 12 (ZDPV 85 (1969) 137–161)
1973 Das Ende der spätbronzezeitlichen Stadt Hazor Stratum XIII und die biblische
Überlieferung in Josua 11 und Richter 4 (UF 5 (1973) 128)
1973 Vorbericht über die Ausgrabungen auf der Håirbet el-Msûaµsû (Teµl MaµsŒoÆsŒ), 1.
Kampagne 1972 (ZDPV 89 (1973) 197–210)
1974 Das Wort gegen Samaria Mi. 1: 2–7 (ZAW 86 (1974) 316–330)
1975 Ein Ostrakon aus Håirbet el-Msûaµsû (ZDPV 91 (1975) 131–134)
1975 Erwägungen zur Siedlungsgeschichte des Negeb in der Eisen I-Zeit (1200 bis 1000
v. Chr.) im Lichte der Ausgrabungen auf der Håirbet el-Msûaµsû (ZDPV 91 (1975) 30–45)
1975 see Aharoni +
1976 Die Deutungen des Königstums Sauls in den Überlieferungen von seiner Entstehung
1 Sam. 9–11 (ZAW 88 (1976) 346–362)
1980 Die kulturhistorische Bedeutung der früheisenzeitlichen Siedlung auf der
el-Msûaµsû und das Problem der Landnahme (ZDPV 96 (1980) 121–135)
Fronzaroli, P.
1979 The concord in gender in Eblaite theophoric personal names 275–281 (UF
279)
Fück, J.
1932 Review: G. Bergsträsser Plan eines apparatus criticus zum Koran. OLZ 35 (1932)
328
Fuhs, H. F.
1967 h\zh: zu einem angeblicken Aramaismus im Hebräischen (BN 2 (1967) 7–12)
Gábor, Ignaz.
1929 Der hebräische Urrhythmus (BZAW 52 (1929))
Gabriel, J.
1959 Die Kainitengenealogie Gen. 4: 17–24 (AnBibl. 10 (1959) 275–293)
1959 Die Kainitengenealogie (Biblica 40 (1959) 409–427)
Gall, F. von.
1904 Jeremias 43: 12 und das Zeitwort hf[ (ZAW 24 (1904) 105ff)
Galling, Kurt.
1931 Die Halle des Schreibers (PJb 27 (1931) 51–57)
1931 Archäologischer jahresbericht (ZDPV 54:80ff)
1932 Kohelet-Studien (ZAW 50 (1932) 276–299)
1933 Ein Stück judäischen Bodenrechts in Jesaja 8 (ZDPV 56:209ff)
1936 Hezekiel1. (HAT 13 (1936) 140)
1941 Beschriftete Bildsiegel des 1. Jahrtausends v. Chr. vornehmlich aus Syrien und
Palästina (ZDPV 64 (1941) 121ff)
1943 Bethel und Gilgal (ZDPV 66:140ff)
1950 The scepter of wisdom: a note on the gold sheath of Zendjirli and Ecclesiastes 12:
11 (BASOR 119 (1950) 15–17)
1951 Chronzeugen des Artaxerxes (ZAW 63 (1951/52) 70; 71)
1951 Königliche und nichtkönigliche Stifter beim Tempel von Jerusalem (ZDPV
1954 Das Deutsche Evangelische Institut für Altertumswissenschaft des Heiligen Landes
im Jahre 1953 (ZDPV 70:97ff)
1954 Zur Deutung des Ortsnamens lprf = Tripolis in Syrien (VT 4 (1954) 418–422)
1956 Erwägungen zur antiken Synagoge (ZDPV 72:163ff)
1956 Der Ehrenname Elisas und die Entrückung Elias (ZThK 53 (1956) 129–148)
1958 Die TERPOLH des Alexander Jannäus (BZAW 77 (1958) 49–62)
1959 Erwägungen zum Stelenheiligtum von Hazor (ZDPV 75 (1959) 1ff)
1961 Der Rätsel der Zeit (ZThK 58 (1961) 1–15)
1961 Ein Ostrakon aus Samaria als Rechtsurkunde. Erwägungen zu C1101 (ZDPV
(1961) 173ff)
1963 Eschmunazar und der Herr der Könige (ZDPV 79:140ff)
1965 Goliath und seine Rüstung (VTSupp. 15 (1965) 150–169, with illustrations)
1965 Kritische Bemerkungen zur Ausgrabung von Egã-gãib (BiOr. 22 (1965) 242–245)
1967 Miscellanea Archeologica (ZDPV 83 (1967) 123ff)
1972 Der Weg der Phöniker nach Tarsis in literarischer und archäologischer Sicht (
88 (1972) 140–181)
1972 Westliches Mittelmeergebiet Südspanien und Zypern (ZDPV 88 (1972) 1–20)
Gamoran, Hillel.
1971 The Biblical law against loans on interest (JNES 30 (1971) 127–134)
Garbini, G.
1962* see Röllig
1974 Ammonite inscriptions (JSS 19 (1974) 159–168)
1978 *parzoµn “iron” in the Song of of Deborah? (JSS 23 (1978) 23–24)
Gaster, Theodor H.
1954 Old Testament notes (VT 4 (1954) 73–79)
1958 A Qumran reading of Deuteronomy 33: 10 (VT 8 (1958) 217–219)
1973 A hang-up for hang-ups: the second amuletic plaque from Arslan Tash (BASOR
(1973) 18–26)
Gaston, Lloyd.
1962 Beelzebul (ThZ 18 (1962) 247–255)
Gawlikowski, M.
1973 Liturges et custodes sur quelques inscriptions palmyréniennes (Semitica 23 (1973)
115)
1974 Le tadmoréen (Syria 51 (1974) 91–104)
Gebhardt, Oskar von.
1875 Codex venetus; griechisches Übersetzung
Gehman, H. S.
1924 Notes on the Persian words in the book of Esther (JBL 43:321–328)
1939 Notes on vqwm (JBL 58:277–281)
1972 Episkepomai, episkefi", episkopo", episkoph (VT 22 (1972) 197–207)
Gelston, A.
1971 Some notes on Second Isaiah (VT 21 (1971) 517–527)
1975 A note on the text of Psalm 28: 7b (VT 25 (1975) 214–216)
Gemser, B.
1925 Bemerkung: Der Stern aus Jakob (Num. 24: 17) (ZAW 43 (1925) 301f)
1952 be>eµber hajjardeµn: in Jordan’s borderland (VT 2 (1952) 349–355)
Georges, K. E.
1880 Lateinisch-Deutsches Handwörterbuch
Gerleman, Gillis.
1973 Die Wurzel sûlm (ZAW 85 (1973) 1–14)
1973 Review: L. Sabotka Zephanja (VT 23 (1973) 253–254)
1974 Der Nicht-Mensch, Erwägungen zur hebräische Wurzel nbl (VT 24 (1974) 147–158)
1976 Was heisst jsp? (ZAW 88 (1976) 409–413)
1977 Nutzrecht und Wohnrecht: zur Bedeutung von hzja und hljn (ZAW 89 (1977)
313–324)
1978 Das übervolle Mass: ein Versuch mit h\aesaed (VT 28 (1978) 151–164)
1979 Die sperrende Grenze: die Wurzel >lm im Hebräischen (ZAW 91 (1979) 338–349)
1980 Der Sinnbereich “festlos(e)” im Hebräischen (ZAW 92 (1980) 404–415)
Gernot, W.
1970 ta/erdennu, ta/urtannu, ta/urtaµnu (UF 2 (1970) 277–282)
Gertner, M.
1960 The Masorah and the Levites: appendix on Hosea 12 (VT 10 (1960) 241–272)
Gese, H.
1957 Die hebräischen Bibelhandschriften zum Dodekapropheton nach der
Variantensammlung des Kennicott (ZAW 69 (1957) 55–68)
1958 Ammonitische Festungen zwischen waµdi es\-s\éÆr und naµe uµr (ZDPV 74:55ff)
1962 Kleine Beiträge zum Verständnis des Amosbuches (VT 12 (1962) 417–438)
1974 Vom Sinai zum Zion Alttestamentliche (Beiträge zur evang. Theologie (1974) 190)
Gesenius W., see Torczyner

Gevirtz, Stanley A.
1957 On the etymology of the Phoenician particle a (JNES 16 (1957) 124–127)
1958 The hapax legomenon hmrt (Judges 9: 31) (JNES 17 (1958) 59–96)
1961 West-Semitic curses and the problem of the origins of Hebrew law (VT 11 (1961)
137–158)
1963 Jericho and Shechem (VT 13 (1963) 52–62)
1968 A new look at an old crux: Amos 5: 26 (JBL 87 (1968) 267–276)
1971 The reprimand of Reuben (JNES 30 (1971) 87–98)
1975 Of patriarchs and puns: Joseph at the fountain, Jacob at the ford (HUCA 46 (1975)
33–54)
Gibson, A.
1976 s\nh\ in Judges 1: 14: NEB and AV translations (VT 26 (1976) 275–283)
Gibson, D.
1978 Letters from Tel Arad (UF 10 (1978) 239–336)
Giesebrecht, F.
1881 Über die Abfassungszeit der Psalmen. I. Buch II-V (ZAW 1 (1881) 276ff)
1881 Zur Hezateuchkritik. Der Sprachgebrauch des hexateuchischen Elohisten (
(1881) 177ff)
Giesen G.
1981 Die Wurzel [bv “schwören”. Eine semasiologische Studie zum Eid im Alten
Testament (BBB 56 (1981) 5–10 )
Ginsberg, H. L.
1931 An obscure Hebrew word (JQR 22 (1931–32) 143–146)
1933 Lexicographical notes (ZAW 51 (1933) 308)
1936 Ba>lu and his brethren (JPOS 16 (1936) 138–149)
1938 A Ugaritic parallel to 2 Sam. 1: 21 (JBL 57 (1938) 209–213)
1939 Two religious borrowings in Ugaritic literature. I: A Hurrian myth in Semitic dress
(Orientalia 8 (1939) 317)
1948 MMSðT and MS\H (BASOR 109 (1948) 20–21)
1951 A preposition of interest to historical geographers (BASOR 122 (1951) 12–14)
1951 Postscript to Bulletin no. 122, pp. 12–14 (BASOR 124 (1951) 29)
1952 Review: H. Cazelles Studies in Daniel. (BiOr. 9 (1952), 144–146)
1961 Hosea’s Ephraim: more fool than knave (JBL 80 (1961) 339–347)
+ Maisler, B.
1934 Semitised Håurrians in Syria and Palestine (JPOS 14 (1934) 243–267)
Giveon, R.
1964 Toponymes ouest-asiatiques à Soleb (VT 14 (1964) 239–255)
Glaser, O.
1932 Zur Erzählung von Ehud und Eglon (ZDPV 55:81f)
1932 Die ältesten Psalmenmelodien (ZS 8 (1932) 193–200)
Globe, A.
1975 Judges 5: 27 (VT 25 (1975) 362–367)
Glück, J. J.
1964 Proverbs 30: 15a (VT 14 (1964) 367–370)
1964 The verb PRS\ in the Bible and in theQumran literature (RQ 5 (1964) 123–127)
1965 Merab or Michal (ZAW 77 (1965) 72–81)
1969 <aréÆ and lavéÆ< (labéÆ<): an etymological study (ZAW 81 (1969) 232–235)
Glueck, Nelson.
1934/45 Explorations in Eastern Palestine (II: AASOR 15 (1934–35); IV Part II, Pottery:
notes and plates: AASOR 25–28 (1945–49)
1938 The first campaign at Tell el-Kheleifeh (Ezion-geber) (BASOR 71 (1938) 3–17)
1938 The topography and history of Ezion-geber and Elath (BASOR 72 (1938) 2–12)
1940 Ostraca from Elath (BASOR 80 (1940) 3ff)
1941 Ostraca from Elath continued (BASOR 82 (1941) 3ff)
1943 Some ancient towns in the plains of Moab (BASOR 91(1943) 7–26)
1955 Futher explorations in the Negeb (BASOR 137 (1955) 10–22)
1959 A seal weight from Nebi Rubin (BASOR 153 (1959) 35–37)
1961 The archaelogy of the Negev (HUCA 32:11–18)
Goetze, Albrecht.
1936 The meaning of Sumerian kislah and its Akkadian equivalents (AJSL 52
(1936)143–159)
1938 The tenses of Ugaritic (JAOS 58 (1938) 266–309)
1939 Accent and vocalism in Hebrew (JAOS 59 (1939) 431–459)
1944 Diverse names in an Old-Babylonian paylist (BASOR 95 (1944) 18–24)
1947 Short or long a ? (Orientalia 16 (1947) 239–250)
1953 A seal cylinder with an early alphabetic inscription (BASOR 129 (1953) 8–10)
1957 The Syrian town of Emar (BASOR 147 (1957) 22–26)
1957 Review: Chicago Assyrian Dictionary, Vols. 5 and 6 (JCS 11 (1957) 79–82
1958 Remarks on some names occurring in the Execration Texts (BASOR 151 (1958)
28–32)
1959 Amurrite names in Ur III and early Isin texts (JSS 4 193–203)
1959 The roster of women: AT 298 (JCS 13 (1959) 98–103)
Goitein, S. D. F.
1933 Zur heutigen Praxis der Leviratsehe bei orientalischen Juden (JPOS 13 (1933) 159-
166)
1956 YHWH the passionate: the monotheistic meaning and origin of the name
6 (1956) 1–9)
1965 ayummaµ kannidgaµloµt (Song of Songs 6: 10) (JSS 10:220–221)
Goldman, M. D.
1951 Lexicographical notes on the Hebrew text of the Bible (2) (ABR 1 (1951) 134–142)
Goldschmidt, L. (ed.)
1897 Der babylonische Talmud
Goldziher, I.
1900 Zu Sðaeat\neÆz (ZAW 20 (1900) 36f)
Gonda, J.
1941 “Ein neues Lied” (WZKM 48 (1941) 275–290)
Good, R. M.
1981 Geminated sonants, word stress, and energic in -nn/-.nn in Ugaritic (UF 13 (1981)
117–122)
Gooding, D. W.
1964 Ahab according to the Septuagint (ZAW 76 (1964) 269–279)
Gordis, Robert.
1936 “The branch to the nose”: a note on Ezekiel 8: 17 (JTS 37:284–287)
1944 A wedding song for Solomon (JBL 63 (1944) 263–270)
1950 “Na‘alam” and other observations on the Ain Feskha scrolls (JNES 9 (1950) 44–50)
1955 The text and meaning of Hosea 14: 3 (VT 5 (1955) 88–90)
1957 The knowledge of good and evil in the Old Testament and the Qumran scrolls (
76 (1957) 123–138)
1966 A document in code from Qumran: some observations (JSS 11:37–39)
1967 Commentary on the text of Lamentations (JQR 58 (1967–68) 14–33)
Gordon, Cyrus H.
1934 Aramaic magical bowls in the Istanbul and Baghdad Museums (ArchOr. 6 (1934)
319–334, with 7 plates)
1935 Fratriarchy in the Old Testament (JBL 54 (1935) 223)
1935 µyhla in its reputed meaning of rulers, judges (JBL 54 (1935) 139–144)
1937 The Aramaic incantation in cuneiform (AfO 12 (1937–39) 105–117)
1940 Two North-West Semitic inscriptions from Tarsus (BASOR 78 (1940) 10f)
1947 The new Amarna tablets (Orientalia 16 (1947) 1–21, plates I-II))
1950 Review: Arthur Ungnad Grammatik des Akkadischen (Orientalia 19 (1950) 89)
1950–51 Belt-wrestling in the Bible world (HUCA 23/1:131–136)
1955 Homerand Bible: the origin and character of East Mediterranean literature
(HUCA26:43–108)
1955 The origin of the Jews in Elephantine (JNES 14 (1955) 56–64)
1958 Abraham and the merchants of Ura (JNES 17 (1958) 28–31)
1963 Toward a grammar of Minoan (Orientalia 32 (1963) 292–297)
1978 The wine-dark-sea (JNES 37 (1978) 51–80)
Gordon, R. P.
1970 Isaiah 53: 2 (VT 20 (1970) 491–492)
Görg, M.
1974 Die Gattung des sogenannten Tempelweihespruchs (1 Kg. 8: 12f) (UF 6 (1974)
55–64)
1974 Zum “Skorpionenpass”: Num. 34: 4; Jos. 15: 3 (VT 24 (1974) 508–509)
1976 Die “Heimat Bileams” (BN 1 (1976) 24–28)
1976 Jahwe: ein Toponym? (BN 1 (1976) 7–14)
1976 Zur Deutung von rbk (WB II, 414) (ZAS 103 (1976) 147)
1976 H\iwwiter im 13. Jahrhundert v. Chr (UF 8 (1976) 53–56)
1977 “Wo lag das Paradies?”: einige Beobachtungen zu einer alten Frage (BN 2 (1977)
23–32)
1977 Die kopfbedeckung des Hohenpriesters (BN 3 (1977) 24–26)
1977 Eine neue Deutung für kaŒppore¬t (ZAW 89 (1977) 115–118)
1977 Weiteres zu nzr “Diadem” (BN 4 (1977) 7f)
1978 Die Funktion der Serafen bei Jesaja (BN 5 (1978) 28–39)
1978 Eine formelhafte Metaphor bei Joel und Nahum (BN 6 (1978) 12–14)
1978 qmh\ und qm in den Arad-Ostraka (BN 6 (1978) 7–11)
1979 Ein semitisch-ostmediterranes Kulturwort im Alten Testament (BN 8 (1979) 7–10)

1979 Namenstudien III: zum Problem einer Frühbezeugung von Aram (BN 9 (1979) 8)
1979 piggul und pilaegaesû—Experimente zur Etymologie (BN 10 (1979) 7–11)
1979 Zwei bautechnische Begriffe in 1 Kön. 6: 9 (BN 10 (1979) 12–15)
1980 Lexikalisches zur Beschreibung des salomonischen Palastbezirks (1 Kön. 7: 1–12) (
BN 11 (1980) 7–13)
1980 Namenstudien VI: Drei weitere Belege für bekannte asiatische Ortsnamen aus
Ägypten (BN 11 (1980) 14–17)
1980 Ijob aus dem Lande >uŒ>s\ (BN 12 (1980) 7–12)
1980 tohuÆ wabohuÆ: ein Deutungsvorschlag (ZAW 92 (1980) 431–434)
1980 Zur Dekoration der Tempelsäulen (BN 13 (1980) 17–21)
1981 “Ausschlag” an Häusern: zu einem problematischen Lexem in Lev. 14: 37 (
(1981) 20–25)
1981 Missbrauch des Gottesnamens (BN 16 (1981) 16f)
1981 Ophir, Tarschisch und Atlantis: einige Gedanken zur symbolischen Topographie (
15 (1981) 76–86)
1982 Ezechiels unreine Speise (BN 19 (1982) 22ff)
1983 “Travestie” im Hohen Lied: eine kritische Betrachtung am Beispiel von HL 1: 5f (
BN 21 (1983) 101–115)
1987 Königliche Eulogie. Erwägungen zur Bildsprache in Ps 8: 2 (BN 37 (1987) 38–47)
1987 Namen und Titel in 1 Kön 11: 19f (BN 36 (1987) 22–26)
1988 topaet Tofet: “die ‘Stätte’ des Feuergottes”? BN 43 (1988) 12–13)
Goshen-Gottstein, M. H.
1953 µyhla ayn, Gen. 23: 6 (VT 3 (1953) 298–299)
1956 A note on jnx (VT 6 (1956) 99–100)
1958 “Sefer Hagu”: the end of a puzzle (VT 8 (1958) 286–288)
1963 Theory and practice of textual criticism: the text-critical use of the Septuagint (
Textus 3 (1963) 130–158)
Gottlieb, H.
1967 Die Tradition von David als Hirten (VT 17 (1967) 190–200)
1971 The Hebrew particle naÆ (ActOr. 33 (1971) 47–54)
Grabbe, L. L.
1976 The seasonal pattern and the “Baal Cycle” (UF 8 (1976) 57–64)
1979 Hebrew paµ>al / Ugaritic b>l and the supposed B/P interchange in Semitic (
(1979) 307–314)
Gradwohl, R.
1962 Zum Verständnis von Ex. 17: 15f (VT 12 (1962) 491–494)
1976 Der “Hügel der Vorhäute” (Josua 5: 3) (VT 26 (1976) 235–240)
Graham, M. P.
1985 A connection proposed between 2 Chr. 24: 26 and Ezra 9–10 (ZAW 97 (1985)
256–258)
Granqvist.
1927 Aus dem Erzählungsschatz palästinischer Bauernfrauen (PJb 23 (1927) 124)
Grave, C.
1980 The etymology of Northwest Semitic s\apaµnu (UF 12 (1980) 221–230)
Gray, John.
1949 The desert God >att\r in the literature and religion of Canaan (JNES 8 (1949) 72–83)
1952 Canaanite kingship in theory and practice (VT 2 (1952) 193–220)
1952 Feudalism in Ugarit and early Israel (ZAW 64 (1952) 49–55)
1952 Tell el-Far>a by Nablus: a “mother” in ancient Israel (PEQ 84 (1952) 110)
1953 A metaphor from building in Zephania 2: 1 (VT 3 (1953) 404–407)
1953 The diaspora of Israel and Judah in Obadiah 5: 20 (ZAW 65 (1953) 53–58)
1954 The desert sojourn of the Hebrews and the Sinai-Horeb tradition (VT 4 (1954) 148-
154)
1960* see Pope
1966 Social aspects of Canaanite religion (VTSupp. 15 (1966) 170–192)
1971 Ba>al’s atonement (UF 3 (1971) 61–70)
1974 The Massoretic text of the book of Job, the Targum and the Septuagint version in
the light of the Qumran Targum (11Qtarg Job) (ZAW 86 (1974) 331–350)
1977 A cantata of the autumn festival: Psalm 68 (JSS 22 (1977) 12–47)
1979 The blood bath of the goddess Anat in the Ras Shamra texts (UF 11 (1979) 315–324)
Greenberg, Moshe.
1951 Hebrew segullaµ: Akkadian sikiltu (JAOS 71 (1951) 172–173)
1957 The Hebrew oath particle H\ay/H\e (JBL 76 (1957) 34–39)
1960 hsn in Exodus 20:20 and the purpose of the Sinaitic theophany (JBL 79 (1960) 273-
276)
Greenfield, J. C.
1958/59 Lexicographical notes (I:HUCA 29 (1958) 203–228; II: HUCA 30 (1959) 141–152)
1965 The etymology of tjtma (ZAW 77 (1965) 90–92)
1979 The root SðQL in Akkadian, Ugaritic and Aramaic (UF 11 (1979) 325–328)
Greiff, G.
1960 Was war ein eloµn? (ZDPV 76:161ff)
Grelot, P.
1956 Isaïe 14: 12–15 et son arrière-plan mythologique (RHR 149 (1956) 18)
1956 La dernière étappe de la rédaction sacerdotale (VT 6 (1956) 174–189)
1957 Complementary note on the Semitic root qb[ÖÅb[ (JSS 2 (1957) 195–197)
1961 Parwaïn des Chroniques à l’apocryphe de la Genèse (VT 11 (1961) 30–38)
1962 La racine hwn en Dt. 1:41 (VT 12 (1962) 198–201)
1964 H\ofsûéÆ (Ps. 88: 6) (VT 14 (1964) 256–263)
1971 Review: M. Delcor, Le livre de Daniel (RB 78 (1971) 602)
1975 Arioµk (VT 25 (1975) 711–719)
1979 L’orchestre de Daniel 3: 5, 7, 10, 15 (VT 29 1979 24–38)
Gressmann, H.
1903 Musik und Musikinstrumente
1909 Dolmen, Masseben und Napflöcher (ZAW 29 (1909) 13–128)
1921 H koinwnia thn daimoniwn (ZNW 20 (1921) 224–230)
1924 Babylonische Mysterien: der Untergang Ninives; Ausgrabungen der Davidstadt;
heilige Tänze; Kultlieder (ZAW 42 (1924) 156–163)
1924 Die neugefundene Lehre des Amen-em-ope und die vorexilische Spruchdichtung
Israels (ZAW 42 (1924) 272–296)
1924 Josia und das Deuteronomium (ZAW 42 (1924) 313–337)
1924 Rhinokorura (ZDPV 47 (1924) 244)
Grether, Oskar.
1934 Name und Wort Gottes im Alten Testament (BZAW 64 (1934))
Grill, Severin.
1964 Textkritische Bemerkungen zum Hohenliede (ThZ 20 (1964) 207–240)
Grimm, D.
1973 Erwägungen zu Hosea 12: 12: “in Gilgal opfern sie Stiere” (ZAW 85 (1973)
339–347)
Grintz, Jehoshua M.
1966 The treaty of Joshua with the Gibeonites (JAOS 86 (1966) 113–125)
Grollenberg, L.
1959 Post-Biblical twrj in Ps. 84: 11? (VT 9 (1959) 311–312)
Gröndahl, F.
1969* see de Moor
Gropp, D. M.
1986 The Samaria papyri from Wâdi ed-Dâliyeh
Grossfeld, Bernard.
1979 The relationship between Biblical Hebrew jrb and swg and their corresponding
Aramaic equivalents in the Targum, qrx, ûpa, lza: a preliminary study in Aramaic-Hebrew
Lexicography (ZAW 91 (1979) 107–123)
Guillaume, Alfred.
1949 A note on ynh rph (Judges 6: 25, 26, 28) (JTS 50 (1949) 52)
1956 Critical note: the meaning of llwt in Ps 137: 3 (JBL 75 (1956) 143)
1957 Some readings in the Dead Sea scroll of Isaiah (JBL 76 (1957) 40–43)
1962 A note on Numbers 23: 10 (VT 12 (1962) 335–337)
1964 Paronomasia in the Old Testament (JSS 9 (1964) 282–290)
Gunkel, Herman.
1924 Der Micha-Schluss: zur Einführung in die literaturgeschichtliche Arbeit am Alten
Testament (ZS 2 (1924) 145–178)
1924 Jesaia 33: eine prophetische Liturgie (ZAW 42 (1924) 177–208)
Gunn, D. M.
1978 see Clines +
Gurewicz, S. B.
1963 Some examples of modern Hebrew exegeses of the OT (ABR 11 (1963) 15–23)
Gustavs, A.
1928 Die Personennamen in den Tontafeln von Tell Ta>annek (ZDPV 51 (1928) 169ff)
Güterbock, H. G.
1950 Die Elemente muwa und ziti in den hethitischen Hieroglyphen (ArchOr. 18:1/2:
208–238)
1954 Carchemish (JNES 13 (1954) 102–114)
Güthling, see Menge and Güthling
Guttman, M.
1926 The term “foreigner” yrkn historically considered (HUCA 3:1–20)
Haag, H.
1977 Jerusalemer Profanbauten in den Psalmen (ZDPV 93 (1977) 87–96)
Haas, M.
1969 Huldrych Zwingli und seine Zeit
Hadley, J. M.
1987 Some drawings and inscriptions on two pithoi from Kuntillet >Ajrud (VT
180- 213)
Halbe, J.
1975 Das Privilegrecht Jahwes Ex. 34: 10–26 (FRLANT 114 (1975) 474f)
1975 Erwägungen zu Ursprung und Wesen des Massotfestes (ZAW 87 (1975) 324–345)
1975 Gibeon und Israel (VT 25 (1975) 613–641)
1980 Die Reihe der Inzestverbote Lev. 18: 7–18 (ZAW 92 (1980) 60–88)
Hallo, William W.
1958 Isaiah 28: 9–13 and the Ugaritic abecedaries (JBL 77 (1958) 324–338)
Halperin, D. J.
1976 The exegetical character of Ezek. 19: 9–17 (VT 26 (1976) 129–141)
Halpern, B.
1978 Yhwh’s summary justice in Job 14: 20 (VT 28 (1978) 472)
Hamerton-Kelly, R. G.
1970 The temple and the origins of Jewish apocalyptic (VT 20 (1970) 1–15)
Hammond, Philip C.
1960 Excavations at Petra in 1959 (BASOR 159 (1960) 26–31)
Hamp, Vinzenz.
1972 Ps. 8: 2b, 3 (BZ 16 (1972) 115–120)
Hanfman, George M. A.
1959/68 Excavations at Sardis, 1958 (BASOR 154 (1959) 5–34; 186 (1967) 17–52; 191
(1968) 2–41)
Hansen, Donald P.
1962 An archaic bronze boar from Sardis (BASOR 168 (1962) 27–35)
Hanson, Paul D.
1968 Song of Heshbon and David’s néÆr (HTR 61 (1968) 297–320)
Haran, Menah\em.
1953 µyyarqmh twrwqmb dwpah trwx (Tarbiz 24:380–391)
1960 The nature of the “>O÷hel MoÆ>eµdh” in Pentateuchal sources (JSS 5:50)
1960 The uses of incense in the ancient Israelite ritual (VT 10 (1960) 113–129)
1961 Studies in the account of the Levitical cities (JBL 80 (1961) 45–54)
1961 The complex of ritual acts performed inside the tabernacle (ScrHier. 8 (1961)
272–302)
1961 The Gibeonites, the Nethinim and the sons of Solomon’s servants (VT 11 (1961)
159–169)
1965 The priestly image of the tabernacle (HUCA 36 (1965) 191–226)
1967 The rise and decline of the empire of Jeroboam ben Joash (VT 17 (1967) 266–297)
1969 zebah\ hayyaméÆm (VT 19 (1969) 11–22)
Harris, J. S.
1963 The stones of the high priest’s breastplate (ALUOS 5 (1963–65) 40–62)
Hartmann, Benedikt.
1958 Gold und Silber im Alten Testament (STU 28 (1958) 29–33)
1960 Himmel und Erde im Alten Testament (STU 30 (1960) 221–224)
1960 Es gibt keinen Gott ausser Jahwe. Zur generellen Verneinung im Hebräischen (
ZDMG 110:229–235)
1965 “Es gibt keine Kraft und keine Macht ausser bei Gott”: zur Kopula im Hebräischen (
OTSt. 14 (1965) 115–121)
Hartmann, R.
1910 Die Namen von Petra (ZAW 30 (1910) 143–151)
Hasel, Gerhard F.
1980 Resurrection in the theology of Old Testament apocalyptic (ZAW 92 (1980)
267–284)
Haupt, P.
1909 Lea und Rahel (ZAW 29 (1909) 281–286
1909 Some Assyrian etymologies (AJSL 26 (1909) 1–26)
1910 Critical notes on Micah (AJSL 26 (1910) 201–252)
1910 Elul und Adar (ZDMG 64:703–714)
Häussermann, Friedrich.
1932 Wortempfang und Symbol in der alttestamentlichen Prophetie. Eine Untersuchung
zur Psychologie des prophetischen Erlebnisses (BZAW 58 (1932))
Healey, J. F.
1978 Ritual text KTU 1.161: translation and notes (UF 10 (1978) 83–88)
Hedwig, Jahnow.
1923 Das hebräische Leichenlied im Rahmen der Völkerdichtung (BZAW 36 (1923))
Hehn, J.
1925 Zum Problem des Geistes im Alten Orient und im Alten Testament (ZAW
210–225)
Heinen, Karl.
1973 Das Nomen tefillaµ als Gattungsbezeichnung (BZ NF 17 (1973) 103–105)
Heinisch, Paul.
1931* see Sðanda
Heintz, J.-G.
1969 Oracles prophétiques et “guerre sainte” selon les archives royales de Mari et
l’Ancien Testament (VTSupp. 17 (1969) 112–138)
1971 Aux origines d’une expression biblique: uµmuµsûuµ qerbuµ (VT 21 (1971) 528–540)
Helck, W.
1965 T_kw und die Ramses-stadt (VT 15 (1965) 35–48)
1968 Die Bedrohung Palästinas durch einwandernde Gruppen am Ende der 18. und am
Anfang der 19. Dynastie (VT 18 (1968) 472–480)
Held, Moshe.
1961 A faithful lover in an Old Babylonian dialogue (JCS 15 (1961) 1–48)
1968 The root ZBL/SBL in Akkadian, Ugaritic and Biblical Hebrew (JAOS 88 (1968)
90–95)
Heller, J.
1958 Der Name Eva (ArchOr. 26:636–656)
1962 Noch zu Ophra, Ephron und Ephraim (VT 12 (1962) 339–341)
Hempel, Johannes
1922 Die israelitischen Anschauungen von Segen und Fluch im Lichte altorientalischer
Parallelen (ZDMG 79:20–110)
1924 Jahwegleichnisse der israelitischen Propheten (ZAW 42 (1924) 74–104)
1927 Westliche Kultureinflüsse auf das älteste Palästina (PJb 23 (1927) 52–91)
1929 ZAW 47 (1929) 150f
1936 Eine Vorfrage zum Ersgeburtsopfer (ZAW 54 (1936) 311)
1953 Glaube, Mythos und Geschichte im Alten Testament (ZAW 65 (1953) 109–166)
1957 “Ich bin der Herr, dein Arzt” (ThLZ 82 (1957) 809)
1958 Heilung als Symbol und Wirklichkeit im biblischen Schrifttum (NAWG (1958/3)
237- 314)
1958 Zusammenfassung und Einzelforschung in der Archäologie (ZAW 70 (1958)
165–173)
1964 Zu Jes. 50:6 (ZAW 76 (1964) 327)
Henke, O.
1959 Zur Lage von Beth-Peor (ZDPV 75 (1959) 155ff)
Hennig, R.
1940 Die Purpurinseln elissa der Bibel (ZGE 1940:401)
Henninger, J.
1953 Was bedeutet die rituelle Zeilung eines Tieres in zwei Hälften? (Biblica 34:344–353)
Hentschke, Richard.
1957 Die Stellung der vorexilischen Schriftpropheten zum Kultus (BZAW 75 (1957))
Heras, Henry.
1949 The standard of Job’s immortality (CBQ 11 (1949) 263–279)
Herbig, R.
1927 Aphrodite parakyptusa (OLZ 30 (1927) 917–1032)
Hermisson Hans-Jürgen.
1965 Sprache und Ritus im alttestamentlichen Kult (WMANT 19 (1965) 31ff)
Herrmann, Wolfram.
1958 Das Aufgebot aller Kräfte (ZAW 70 (1958) 215–220)
1960 Götterspeise und Göttertrank in Ugarit und Israel (ZAW 72 (1960) 205–216)
1963 Gedanken zur Geschichte des altorientalischen Beschreibungsliedes (ZAW
(1963) 176–196)
1968 YarihÉ und Nikkal und der Preis der Kut\araµt-Göttinnen: ein kultisch-magischer Text
aus Ras Schamra (BZAW 106 (1968))
1979 Mercatores mandatu missi. Ein beitrag zum Verständnis der Einheiten “Fünf” und
“Zehn” in der kanonischen und deuterokanonischen Literatur des Alten Testaments (ZAW 91 (1979)
329–337)
Hertzberg, H. W.
1922 Die Entwicklung des Begriffes fpm im AT (ZAW 40 (1922) 256–287)
1953 “Grüne Pferde” (ZDPV 69 (1953) 177ff)
1957 Palästinische Bezüge im Buche Kohelet (ZDPV 73 (1957) 113ff)
Hess, J. J.
1915 Beduinisches zum Alten und Neuen Testament (ZAW 35 (1915) 120–131)
1924 Über das präfigierte >ain im Arabischen (ZS 2 (1924) 219–245)
Hill, R.
1966 Aetheria 12: 9 and the site of Biblical Edrei (VT 16 (1966) 412–419)
Hillers, Delbert R.
1964 A note on some treaty terminology in the Old Testament (BASOR 176 (1964) 46)
1967 Delocutive verbs in Biblical Hebrew (JBL 86 (1967) 320–368)
1972 pah\ad tis\h\aµq (JBL 91 (1972) 90–144)
Hinz, W.
1971 Achämenidische Hofverwaltung (ZA 61 (1971) 260–311)
Hirsch, Hans.
1963 Die Inschriften der Könige von Agade (AfO 20 (1963) 1–81)
1968 “Den Toten zu beleben” (AfO 22 (1968–69) 39–57)
Hirschberg, H. H.
1961 Some additional Arabic etymologies in Old Testament lexicography (VT
373- 385)
Hobbs, T. R.
1974 Jeremiah 3: 1–5 and Deuteronomy 24: 1–4 (ZAW 86 (1974) 23–29)
Hoenig S. B.
1967 Textual readings and meanings in Hodayot (I Q H) (JQR 58 (1967/68) 309–319)
Hoffmann, Hans Werner.
1974 Die Intention der Verkündigung Jesajas (BZAW 136 (1974))
Hoffmann, G.
1931 Ergänzungen und Berichtigungen zu Hiob (ZAW 49 (1931) 141–145)
Hoffner, Harry A.
1968 Hittite tarpisû and Hebrew teraµphéÆm (JNES 27 (1968) 61–68)
1973 Incest, sodomy and bestiality in the ancient east (AOAT 22 (1973) 81–90)
Hofmann, Inge.
1971 Zu den sogenannten Denkmälern der Könige Skorpion und der am Jebel Sheikh
Suliman (Nubien) (BiOr. 28 (1971) 308–309)
Höfner, Maria.
1930 Review: I. H. Mordtmann and E. Mittwoch Himjarische Inschriften in den
Staatlichen Museen zu Berlin (ZDMG 87:255–256)
1933 Die sabäischen Inschriften der südarabischen Expedition im Kunsthistorischen
Museum in Wien (I) (WZKM 40 (1933) 1–36)
Hoftijzer, J.
1957 Exod. 21: 8 (VT 7 (1957) 388–391)
1958 Eine Notiz zum punischen Kinderopfer (VT 8 (1958) 288–292)
1963 Deux vases à inscription identique (VT 13 (1963) 337–339)
1965 Remarks concerning the use of the particle Õt in Classical Hebrew (OTSt.
1–99)
1971 A note on G 1083 3: Õisût Õir and related matters (UF 3 (1971) 361–364)
1971 A peculiar question: a note on 2 Sam. 15: 27 (VT 21 (1971) 606–609)
1972 Two notes on the Ba>al Cyclus (UF 4 (1972) 155–158)
1979 Une lettre du roi de Tyr (UF 11 (1979) 383–388)
Holladay, W. L.
1966 Jer. 31: 22b reconsidered: “the woman encompasses the man” (VT 16 (1966)
236–239)
1970 Form and word-play in David’s lament over Saul and Jonathan (VT 20 (1970)
153–189)
1977 A fresh look at “source B” and “source C” in Jeremiah (VT 25 (1977) 394–411)
1976 Structure, syntax and meaning in Jeremiah 4: 11–12a (VT 26 (1976) 28–37)
Holma, H.
1914 Lexikalische Miszellen (ZA 28 (1914) 147–162)
1914 Zum ersten Ta>annek-Brief (ZA 28 (1914) 102)
1944 Zum akkadischen Wörterbuch 1–8 (Orientalia 13 (1944) 102–115)
Hommel, Fritz, see Dhorme (1927)
Honeyman, A. M.
1936 Hebrew ¹s basin, goblet (JTS 37:56–58)
1939 The pottery vessels of the Old Testament (PEQ 71 (1939) 76)
1944 Some developments of the Semitic root Õby (JAOS 64 (1944) 81–82)
1944 Traces of an early diacritic sign in Isaiah 8: 6b (JBL 63 (1944) 45–52)
1948 The evidence for regnal names among the Hebrews (JBL 67 (1948) 13–36)
1949 Two contributions to Canaanite toponymy: I. Elteque<, Elteqeh, and Elteqon; II.
“Talpioth” (JTS 50 (1949) 50–51)
1951 An unnoticed euphemism in Isaiah 9: 19–20? (VT 1 (1951) 221–223)
1951 Isaiah 1: 6 (VT 1 (1951) 63–65)
1953 The salting of Shechem (VT 3 (1953) 192–195)
1955 Review: L. Koehler and W. Baumgartner Lexicon in Veteris Testamenti Libros
5 (1955) 214–223
1961 <ID_, D_U÷ and Psalm 62: 12 (VT 11 (1961) 348–350)
Honigman, E. and Maricq, A.
1953 Recherches sur les res gestae divi saporis (Brussels, Académie Royale de Belgique,
Classe des Lettres, Mémoires 47/4)
Hopkins.
1937* see Albright
Horn, Siegfried H.
1966 Review: H. J. Zobel Stammesspruch und Geschichte (BiOr. 23 (1966) 313–315)
1968 An inscribed seal from Jordan (BASOR 189 (1968) 41–43)
1969 The Ammaµn citadel inscription (BASOR 193 (1969) 2–12)
1972 A seal from Amman (BASOR 205 (1972) 43)
Horsfield, G. and Vincent R. P. H.
1932 Une stèle égypto-moabite au Balou>a (RB 41:417–444)
Horowitz, J.
1925 Jewish proper names and derivatives in the Koran (HUCA 2 (1925); reprinted
Hildesheim, 1964)
1926 Koran Untersuchungen
Horst, F.
1929 Die Doxologien im Amosbuch (ZAW 47 (1929) 45–54)
1930 Einiges zum Text von Gen. 49 (OLZ 33 (1930) 1–2)
Hospers, J. H.
1949 Enige pasgevonden zegels uit >Ammaµn (JbEOL 11:79)
Hossfeld-Meyer.
1973 Prophet gegen Prophet. (Biblische Beiträge 9 (1973) 29f )
Hort, Greta
1957 The plagues of Egypt I (ZAW 69 (1957) 84–102)
Houberg, R.
1975 Note sur Jérémie 11: 19 (VT 25 (1975) 676–677)
Houtman, C.
1977 What did Jacob see in his dream at Bethel? Some remarks on Genesis 28: 10–22 (
27 (1977) 337–351)
Houtsma, M. Th.
1907 Textkritisches (ZAW 27 (1907) 57–59)
Hrozny, B.
1935 Der babylonische Fischgott Oannes in den Keilinschriften (ArchOr. 7 (1935) 2)
Huber, Friedrich.
1976 Jahwe, Juda und die anderen Völker beim Propheten Jesaja (BZAW 137 (1976)
155f)
Huffmon, Herbert B.
1966/66 The treaty background of Hebrew yaµda> (BASOR 181 (1966) 31–37; A further note
… BASOR 184 (1966) 36–37)
1968 Prophecy in the Mari letters (BA 31 (1968) 101–124)
Hulse, E. V.
1975 The nature of Biblical “leprosy” and the use of alternative medical terms in modern
translations of the Bible (PEQ 107 (1975) 87–107)
Hulst, A. R.
1958 kol basŒar in der priesterlichen Fluterzählung (OTSt. 12:28–68)
Humbert, Paul.
1917 µymq µlwb (Amos 7: 14) (OLZ 20 (1917) 296–297)
1919 Der Name meri-ba>al (ZAW 38 (1919/20) 86)
1926 Essai d’analyse de Nahoum 12–23 (ZAW 44 (1926) 266–280)
1932 maheµr sûalaµl h\aµs baz (ZAW 50 (1932) 90–92)
1933 Die Herausforderungsformel hinnenéÆ eÆleŒkaÆ (ZAW 51 (1933) 101–108)
1936 ShaÆrouh\en dans les textes de Ras Shamra (Syria 17 (1936) 313–315)
1947 Emploi et portée du verbe baÆraÆ (créer) dans l’Ancien Testament (ThZ 3 (1947)
401–431)
1950 En marge du dictionnaire hébraïque (ZAW 62 (1950) 199–206)
1957 La rosée tombe en Israël: à propos d’Esaïe 26: 19 (ThZ 13 (1957) 487–493)
1960 Le substantif to>eµbaµ et le verbe t>b dans l’Ancien Testament (ZAW 72 (1960)
217–236)
1962 “Étendre la main” (note de lexicographie hébraïque) (VT 12 (1962) 383)
1962 Dieu fait sortir. Hiphil de yaµs\aµ (ThZ 18 (1962) 357–384)
Hummel, Horace D.
1957 Enclitic mem in early Northwest Semitic, especially Hebrew (JBL 76 (1957) 85–107)
Hummel, K.
1967 (Mitt. d. Deutschen Phamazeutischen Gesellschaft 37 (1967) 113)
Hunziger, C.-H.
1957 Fragmente einer älteren Fassung des Buches Milh\amaµ aus Höhle 4 von Qumr
ZAW 69 (1957) 131–150)
Huppenbauer, Hans Walter.
1959 (ATANT 34 (1959) 22)
1959 Belial in den Qumrantexten (ThZ 15 (1959) 81–89)
Hurvitz, Avi.
1967 Notes and observations: the usage of and Åwb in the Bible and its implication for
the date of P (HTR 60 (1967) 117–121)
1982 The history of a legal formula (Ps. 115: 3; 135: 6) (VT 32 (1982) 262)
Hutter, M.
1987 Jes. 40: 20: kulturgeschichtliche Notizen zu einer Crux (BN 36 (1987) 31–36)
Hvidberg, F.
1939 Vom Weinen und Lachen im AT (ZAW 57 (1939) 150–151)
Hyatt, J. P.
1939 The deity Bethel and the Old Testament (JAOS 59 (1939) 81–98)
Ingholt, Harald.
1926 Un nouveau thiase à Palmyre (Syria 7 (1926) 128–141)
1935 Five dated tombs from Palmyra (Berytus 2 (1935) 57–120)
+ Starcky, J.
1951 Recueuil des inscriptions, in D. Schlumberger, La Palmyrène du Nord Ouest
139–147
Irsigler H.
1987 “Umsonst ist es, dass ihr früh austeht …”: Psalm 127 und die Kritik der Arbeit in
Israels Weisheitsliteratur (BN 37 (1987) 48–72)
Irwin, W. A.
1952 Hashmal (VT 2 (1952) 169–170)
Irwin W. H.
1977 Isaiah 28–33: translation with philological notes (BiOr. 30 (1977) 158f)
Ismail, B. K. and Müller, M.
1977 Einige bemerkenswerte Urkunden aus Tell al-FahÉhÉaµr zur altmesopotamischen
Rechts-, Sozial- und Wirtschaftsgeschichte (WdO 9 (1977) 14–34)
Isserlin, B. S. J.
1950 On some possible early occurrences of the camel in Palestine (PEQ 82 (1950) 50)
Iwry, Samuel.
1957 mas\s\eµbaµh and baµmaµh in 1Q Isaiah A 6: 13 (JBL 76 (1957) 225–232)
1961 New evidence for belomancy in ancient Palestine and Phoenicia (JAOS 81 (1961)
27–33)
1966 axmnhw: a striking variant reading in 1QIsa (Textus 5 (1966) 34–43)
Izre<el, Sh.
1976 The symptoms of King Krt’s illness (UF 8 (1976) 446–447)
Jacob, B.
1897 Beiträge zu einer Einleitung in die Psalmen (ZAW 17 (1897) 48ff)
1898 Miscellen zu Exegese, Grammatik und Lexikon (ZAW 18 (1898) 287ff)
1899 Zu Bacher’s Bemerkungen (ZAW 19 (1899) 351f)
1912 Erklärung einiger Hiob-Stellen (ZAW 32 (1912) 278–287)
Janowski, B.
1980 Ewägungen zu Vorgeschichte des israelitischen sûelaméÆm-Opfers (UF 12 (1980)
231–260)
Janssen, J. M. A.
1951 Notes on the geographical horizon of the ancient Egyptians: Aethiopians and
Haunebut (BiOr. 8 (1951) 213–217)
1952 Egyptological remarks on the story of Joseph in Genesis (JbEOL 14:63–72)
Jaussen, R. P.
1906 Liste des noms arabes relevés au Nedjeb (RB 15:595)
Jarosû, Karl.
1976 Des Mose “strahlende Haut”: eine Notiz zu Ex. 34: 29, 30, 35 (ZAW 88 (1976)
275–279)
Jean.
1950 Studia Mariana
Jelitto, Joseph Thomas.
1913 Die peinlichen Strafen im Kriegs- und Rechtwesen der Babylonier und Assyrrer
Jenni, Ernst.
1952/53 Das Wort >oôlaôm im Alten Testament. (I and II: ZAW 64 (1952) 197–248; III:
65 (1953) 1–34)
1965 Die altsyrischen Inschriften, 1.-3. Jahrhundert n. Chr. (ThZ 21 (1965) 371–385)
1972 Zur Verwendung von >atta, jetzt, im Alten Testament (ThZ 28 (1972) 5–12)
1978 “Fliehen” im akkadischen und im hebräischen Sprachgebrauch (Orientalia 47 (1978)
351–359)
Jensen, P.
1892 Elamitischen Eigennamen (WZKM 6 (1892) 47–70)
1924 Akkadisch muduµ (ZA 35 (1924) 124–132)
Jeppesen, K.
1984 Micah 5: 13 in the light of a recent archaeological discovery (VT 34 (1984)
462–466)
Jepsen, Alfred.
1941 Israel und Damaskus (AfO 14 (1941–44) 153–171)
1945 Die “Hebräer” und ihr Recht (AfO 15 (1945–51) 54–67)
1958 Amah und Schiphchah. (VT 8 (1958) 293–297)
1958 Pardes (ZDPV 74 (1958) 65ff)
1959 Zur Kanongeschichte des Alten Testaments (ZAW 71 (1959) 114–135)
1960 Die Nebiah in Jes. 8: 3 (ZAW 72 (1960) 267–268)
1961 Gnade und Barmherzigkeit im Alten Testament (KerDog. 7 (1961) 261–271)
1967 Beiträge zur Auslegung und Geschichte des Dekalogs (ZAW 79 (1967) 277–304)
1968 Israel und das Gesetz (ThLZ 93 (1968) 85–94)
Jeremias C.
1977 Die Nachtgesichte des Zacharia (FRLANT 117 (1977) 184ff)
Jeremias, J.
1936 Die “Zinne” des Tempels (Mt. 4: 5; Lk. 4: 9) (ZDPV 59:195ff)
1970 Kultprophetie und Gerichtsverkündigung in der späten Königszeit Israels (
35 (1970) 77)
1972 misûpat\ im ersten Gottesknechtslied (VT 22 (1972) 31–42)
Jirku, A.
1930 Der Ursprung des Namens der südpalästinensischen Stadt Ke>ila: das he. n. pr. f.
mikal (lkym). Die Zwölfzahl der Städte in Jes. 10: 28–32 (ZAW 48 (1930) 228–230)
1939 Lag das alte Lakisû auf dem Tell ed-Duweir? (ZAW 57 (1939) 152)
1944 Die Gesichtsmaske des Mose (ZDPV 67:43f)
1953 <ajjelet hasû-sûahÉar (Ps. 22: 1) (ZAW 65 (1953) 85)
1953 Die Mimation in der nordsemitischen Sprachen und einige Bezeichnungen der
altisraelitischen Mantik (Biblica 34 (1953) 78–80)
1954 Das n. pr. lemu<el (Prov. 31: 1) und der Gott Lim (ZAW 66 (1954) 151)
1957 nit\>eµ na>amanim (Jes. 17: 10c) = nit>e na>aman-ma (VT 7 (1957) 201–202)
1957 Wetere Fälle von afformativem -ma im Hebräischen (VT 7 (1957) 391–392)
1960 Gab es eine palästinisch-syrische Gottheit Kinneret? (ZAW 72 (1960) 69)
1963 Zu einigen Orts- und Eigennamen Palästina-Syriens (ZAW 75 (1963) 86–87)
Jochims, U.
1960 Thirza und die Ausgrabungen auf dem tell el-faôr>a (ZDPV 76 (1960) 73–96)
Johannes, Fr.
1950 Punische Studien (ZDMG 107:282–298)
Johannessohn, Martin.
1942 Die biblische Einführungsformel kai estai (ZAW 59 (1942/43) 129–183)
Jones, Allen H.
1972 The Philistines and the hearth: their journey to the Levant (JNES 31 (1972) 343-
350)
Jones, D. R.
1955 The tradition of the oracles of Isaiah of Jerusalem (ZAW 67 (1955) 226–245)
1962 A fresh interpretation of Zechariah 9–11 (VT 12 (1962) 241–259)
Jongeling, B.
1974 L’expression my ytn dans l’ancien testament (VT 24 (1974) 32–40)
Jongkees, J. H.
1936 Lydië (JbEOL 4 (1936) 231–235)
1944 Kroiseios en Dareikos (JbEOL 9:163–168)
Joüon, P.
1926/27 Notes de lexicographie hébraïque (Biblica 7:162–170; 285–294; 402–412; 8: 51–64)
1931 Notes philologiques sur le texte hébreu de I Chroniques (Biblica 13 (1931) 87)
1932 “Respondit et dixit: hn[ en hébreu en araméen biblique, apoksinesai dans les
évangiles) (Biblica 13 (1932) 309)
1937 Parallèles palmyréniens à l’infinitif du type hkab (Biblica 18:334)
1938 Glanes plamyréniennes III: lbj, “malheur” (Syria 19 (1938) 186 ff)
1940 Notes de lexicographie hébraïque (Biblica 21:56–59)
1941 Le mot agÉr]VÕa, dans Esdras 5: 3 (9) (Biblica 22 (1941), 38ff)
Junker, H.
1939 Review: L. Dürr Die Wertung des go¬ttlichen Wortes im Alten Testament und im
Antiken Orient (OLZ 42 (1939) 368)
Kahle, P.
1898 Textkrit. und lex. Bemerkungen zum Sam. Pent.
1902 Fragmente des samaritanischen Pentateuch-targums, herausgegeben und erlaütert (
ZA 16 (1902) 97)
+ Sommer
1930 Kleinasiatische Forschungen 1 (1930)
Kaiser, A.
1930 Neue naturwissenschaftliche Forschungen auf der Sinai-Halbinsel (besonders zur
Mannfrage) (ZDPV 53:63ff)
Kaiser, Otto.
1958 Traditionsgeschichtliche Untersuchung von Gen. 15 (ZAW 70 (1958) 107–125)
1959 Die mythische Bedeutung des Meeres in Ägypten, Ugarit und Israel (BZAW
(1959) 114f)
1960 Stammesgeschichtliche Hintergründe der Josephsgeschichte (VT 10 (1960) 1–15)
1970 Zum Formular der in Ugarit gefundenen Briefe (ZDPV 86 (1970) 10–23)
Kallai-Kleinmann, Y.
1958 The town lists of Judah, Simeon, Benjamin and Dan (VT 8 (1958) 134–160)
Kallai, Z.
1986 The settlement traditions of Ephraim: a historiographical study (ZDPV 102 (1986)
68–74)
Kampfmeyer, G.
1892 Alte Namen im heutigen Palästina und Syrien (ZDPV 15:1–33; 16:1–71)
Kapelrud, A. S.
1954 Genesis 49: 12 (VT 4 (1954) 426–428)
Katz, Peter.
1948 Zur Aussprache von hwhy (ThZ 4 (1948) 467)
Katzenstein, H. J.
1955 Who were the parents of Athaliah? (IEJ 5 (1955) 194–197)
1960 The royal steward asher >al ha-bayith (IEJ 10:149–154)
Kaupel, H.
1935 “Sirenen” in der Septuaginta (BZ 23 (1935–36) 158–165)
Kautzsch, E.
1884 Grammatik des Biblisch-Aramäischen
1903* see Nöldeke
Keel, Othmar.
1972 Erwägungen zum Sitz im Leben des vormosaischen Pascha und zur Etymologie von
jsp (ZAW 84 (1972) 422–428)
1973 Das Vergraben der “fremden Götter” in Gen. 35: 4b (VT 23 (1973) 305–336)
1974 Wirkmächtige Siegeszeichen im AT (OBO 5 (1974) 153–160)
1977 Der Bogen als Herrschaftssymbol: einige unveröffentlichte Skarabäen aus Ägypten
und Israel zum Thema “Jagd und Krieg” (ZDPV 93 (1977) 141–177)
1978 Jahwes Entgegnung an Ijob. Eine Deutung von Ijob 38–41 vor dem Hintergrund der
zeitgenössischen Bildkunst (FRLANT 121 (1978) 143)
1981 see Barthélemy Festschrift (= OBO 38 (1981) 195–212)
1981 Zwei kleine Beiträge zum Verständnis der Gottesreden im Buch Ijob (38: 36f; 40:
25) (VT 31 (1981) 220–225)
1984 Deine Blicke sind Tauben. Zur Metaphorik des Hohen Liedes (SBS 114/115 (1984)
111)
Keimer, Louis.
1927 Eine Bemerkung zu Amos 7: 14 (Biblica 8:441–444)
1954 Altägyptische, griechisch-römische und byzantisch-koptische Darstellungen des
syrischen Bären (AfO 17 (1954–56) 336–352, with 26 illustrations)
Keller, Carl A.
1955 Das quietistische Element in der Botschaft des Jesasja (ThZ 11 (1955) 81–97)
1955 Über einige alttestamentliche Heiligtumslegenden I. (ZAW 67 (1955) 143–154)
1972 Die theologische Bewältigung der geschichtlichen Wirklichkeit in der Prophetie
Nahums (VT 22 (1972) 399–419)
1973 Die Eigenart der Prophetie Habakuks (ZAW 85 (1973) 160)
Kellermann, Diether.
1964 <aµsûaµm in Ugarit? (ZAW 76 (1964) 319–322)
1970 Die Priesterschrift von Numeri 1: 1 bis 10: 10: literarkritisch und
traditiongeschichtlich untersucht (BZAW 120 (1970))
1970 Ein Beitrag zur Bedeutung des wortes MRQ> (ZDPV 86 (1970) 24–37)
1978 Überlieferungsprobleme alttestamentlicher Ortsnamen (VT 28 (1978) 423–432)
1981 >Asûtaµroµt—>Asûteroµt Qarnayim—Qarnayim: historisch-geographische Erwägungen zu
Orten im nördlichen Ostjordanland (ZDPV 97 (1981) 45–61)
1982 Migdal—El—Magdiel (ZDPV 98 (1982) 63–69)
Kellermann, U.
1977 Erwägungen zum deuteronomischen Gemeindegesetz Dt. 23: 2–9 (BN 2 (1977)
33–47)
1978 Psalm 137 (ZAW 90 (1978) 43–58)
Kempinski, A.
1975 see Aharoni +
Kessler, M.
1964 The “shield” of Abraham? (VT 14 (1964) 494–497)
Kessler, K.
1975 Die Anzahl der assyrischen Provinzen des Jahres 738 v. Chr. in Nordsyrien (
(1975–76) 49–63)
Kessler, W.
*1957 see Petuchowski
Kienast, B.
1979 Rechtsurkunden in ugaritischer Sprache (UF 11 (1979) 431–452)
Kilian, R.
1966 Gen. 1: 2 und die Urgötter von Hermopolis (VT 16 (1966) 420–438)
Kilpp, N.
1985 Eine frühe Interpretation der Katastrophe von 587 (ZAW 97 (1985) 210–220)
Kimhi, David
1847 µyr rps Liber radicum (ed. Biesenthal and Lebrecht; Berlin)
Kingsbury, E. C.
1977 La dixième année de Sumu-el (RA 71 (1977) 9–16)
Kinnier, Wilson J. V.
1975 A return to the problems of behemoth and leviathan (VT 25 (1975) 1–14)
Kitchen, K. A.
1977 The king list of Ugarit (UF 9 (1977) 131–142)
Kittel, Rudolf.
1913 Festschrift (= BWANT 13 (1913) 138–140)
Klähn.
1975 see Borger +
Klauber, Ernst Georg.

1910 Ass. Beamtentum
1913 Politisch-relig. Texte aus der Sargonidzeit
Klein, H.
1914 Das Klima Palästinas auf Grund der alten hebräischen Quellen (ZDPV 37 (1914)
217ff)
Kletzel, W.
1918 yna im Munde von Frauen (OLZ 21 (1918) 1–4)
Klopfenstein.
1972 Scham und Schande nach dem Alten Testament (ATANT 62 (1972) 97)
Knauf, E. A.
1978 Zum text von Hi. 21: 23–26 (BN 7 (1978) 22–24)
1981 El Sðaddai (BN 16 (1981) 20–26)
1983 Supplementa Ismaelitica 2. Zur Chronologie von Taimaµ<; 3. Die Eigennamen der
Ituräer (BN 21 (1983) 37–47)
1985 Alter und Herkunft der edomitischen Königliste Gen. 36: 31–39 (ZAW 97 (1985)
245–253)
Knierim, R.
1961 Exodus 18 und die Neuordnung der mosaischen Gerichtsbarkeit (ZAW 73 (1961)
146–170)
1965 Das erste Gebot (ZAW 77 (1965) 20–39)
Kob, K.
1978 Noch einmal Netopha (ZDPV 94 (1978) 119–134)
Köbert, R.
1945 Gedanken zum semitischen Wort- und Satzbau 1–7 (Orientalia 14 (1945) 273–283)
1964 Achamoth (Biblica 45:254–255)
1965 see Dahood +
Koch, H.
1982 “Hofschatzwarte” und “Schatzhäuser” in der Persis (ZA 71 (1982) 232ff)
Koch, K.
1955 Zur Geschichte der Erwählungsvorstellung in Israel (ZAW 67 (1955) 205–225)
1962 Der Spruch “Sein Blut bleibe auf seinem Haupt” und die israelitische Auffassung
vom vergossenen Blut (VT 12 (1962) 396–416)
1962 Zur Lage von S\emarajim: Erkundungen zwischen beµtéÆn und et\-t\aijibe (ZDPV
(1962) 19ff)
1966 Haggais unreines Volk (ZAW 79 (1966) 52–66)
1967 Die Sohnesverheissung an den ugaritischen Daniel (ZA 58 (1967) 211–221)
1969 Die Hebräer vom Auszug aus Ägypten bis zum Grossreich Davids (VT 19 (1969)
37–81)
1972 Die Briefe “profetischen” Inhalts aus Mari. Bemerkungen zu Gattung und Sitz im
Leben (UF 4 (1972) 53–78)
1974 Die Rolle der hymnischen Abschnitte in der Komposition des Amos-Buches (
86 (1974) 504–537)
1976 Saddaj (VT 26 (1976) 299–332)
Koehler, B.
1971 Sacharja 9: 9. Ein neuer Übersetzungsvorschlag (VT 21 (1971) 370)
Koehler, Ludwig.
1909 Beobachtungen am hebräischen und griechischen Text von Jeremiah Kap. 1–9 (
ZAW 29 (1909) 1–39)
1909 Die Adoptionsform von Rt. 4:16 (ZAW 29 (1909) 312–314)
1911 Das substantiv in der Septuaginta. Die Septuagintavorlage von Hi. 15 28 (
(1911) 154–156)
1912 Lautes Lesen: zu Jahrgang 1912, S. 155 (ZAW 32 (1912) 240)
1912 Zur Weiterführung des alttestamentlichen Wörterbuches (ZAW 32 (1912) 1–16)
1916/22 Ärchäologisches (ZAW 36 (1916) 21–28; ZAW 40 (1922) 15–46; ZAW 44 (1926)
56–62; ZAW 46 (1928) 213–220)
1917 Der hebräische Imperfekttypus jeÆsûeµb (OLZ 20 (1917) 172–173)
1921 Jes. 63: 4 (ZAW 39 (1921) 316)
1926 Die Bezeichnungen der Heuschrecke im Alten Testament (ZDPV 49 (1926) 328ff)
1929 Hebräisch swj aramäisch h\s (OLZ 32 (1929) 617)
1930 Zu Jes. 28: 15a und 18b (ZAW 48 (1930) 227f)
1931 Review: G. Dalman Arbeit und Sitte in Pala¬stina I/2 (ZDPV 54:100ff)
1934 Kleinigkeiten (ZAW 52 (1934) 160)
1936/40 Hebräische Vokabeln (I: ZAW 54 (1936) 287–292; II: ZAW 55 (1937) 161–173; III:
ZAW 58 (1940/41) 228–233)
1936 Zum Ortsnamen Ezjon- Geber (ZDPV 59 (1936) 193ff)
1939 Lexikologisch- Geographisches (ZDPV 62 (1939) 115)
1940 Hebräische Etymologien (JBL 59 (1940) 35–40)
1945 Alttestamentliche Wortforschung: Psalm 8: 5 (ThZ 1(1945) 77)
1945 Der Name Ammoniter (ThZ 1 (1945) 154)
1946 Gilead (ThZ 2 (1946) 314)
1946 peloµni (ThZ 1 (1946) 303)
1946/50 Alttestamentliche Wortforschung (1. scheoµl ThZ 2 (1946) 71–74; 2. bedéÆl
bedéÆléÆm ThZ 3 (1947) 155; 3. Der Personenname age ThZ 4 (1948) 153; 4. doberot = Flösse ThZ 5
(1949) 74; baµzaµ = fortschwemmen ThZ 6 (1950) 316)
1947 jod als hebräisches Nominalpräfix (WdO 1 (1947–52) 404–405)
1947 puµk: 1. schwarze Schminke; 2. Hartmörtel (ThZ 3 (1947) 314)
1947 séÆg und séÆgéÆm = Bleiglätte (ThZ 3 (1947) 232)
1947 Zwei Fachwörter der Bausprache in Jesaja 28: 16 (ThZ 3 (1947) 390)
1948 *laµboµn und Weihrauch (ThZ 4 (1948) 233)
1948 Aèschpaµr Dattelkuchen (ThZ 4 (1948) 397)
1948 Die Grundstelle der Imago-Dei-Lehre, Gen. 1: 26 (ThZ 4 (1948) 16–21)
1948 Loch-und Ringbrot (ThZ 4 (1948) 154)
1949 deféÆ = Makel (ThZ 5 (1949) 75)
1949 HåoµhÉim Schlupfwinkel (ThZ 5 (1949) 314)
1950 t\app = Nicht oder wenig Marschfähige (ThZ 6 (1950) 387)
1950 Vom hebräischen Lexikon (OTSt. 8 (1950) 137–155)
1952 Vier Marginalien (ZAW 64 (1952) 195–196)
1953 Syntactica (III: VT 3 (1953) 188–189; IV: VT 3 (1953) 299–305)
1955 “Aussatz” (ZAW 67 (1955) 290–291)
1956 Problems in the study of the language of the Old Testament (JSS 1 (1956) 3–24)
1957 Psalm 23 (ZAW 68 (1957) 227–233)
+ Baumgartner, W.
1955* see Honeyman

Koenig, J.
1964 Itinéraires sinaïtiques en Arabie (RHR 166 (1964) 121–142)
1968 L’allusion inexpliquée au roseau et à la mêche (Isaïe 42: 3) (VT 18 (1968) 159–172)
Koffmahn, E.
1963 Zur Datierung der aramäisch/hebräischen Vertragskunden von Murabba>at (
59–60 (1963–64) 119–136)
Komlós, O.
1956 òlgrl WKT (Deut. 33: 3) (VT 6 (1956) 435–436)
1957 The meaning of hkljAµyaklj (JSS 2:243–246)
1960 b[ jyrfy yrbA¹a (VT 10 (1960) 75–77)
König, E.
1924 Stimmen Ex. 20: 24 und Dtn. 12: 13f zusammen? (ZAW 42 (1924) 337–346)
König, F. W.
Älteste Geschichte der Meder (AO 33:3/4)
Koopmans, J. J.
1949 Aramese Grammatica
Kopf, L.
1956 Das arabische Wörterbuch als Hilfsmittel für die hebräische Lexikographie (
(1956) 286–302)
1958/59 Arabische Etymologien und Parallelen zum Bibelwörterbuch (VT 8 (1958)
161–215; VT 9 (1959) 247–287)
Kornfeld, Walter.
1962 Der Symbolismus der Tempelsäulen (ZAW 74 (1962) 50–56)
1965 Reine und unreine Tiere im Alten Testament (Kairos 7 (1965) 134–147)
1976 Onomastica aramaica und das Alte Testament (ZAW 88 (1976) 105–112)
Kottsieper, Ingo.
1984 KTU1.100: Versuch einer Deutung (UF 16 (1984) 97–110)
1986 Die Bedeutung der Wz. >s\b und skn in Koh. 10: 9 (UF 18 (1986) 218)
Kowalski, T.
1924 Nase und Niesen im arabischen Volksglauben und Sprachgebrauch (WZKM
(1924) 193- 218)
Kraeling, Emil G.
1922 Terach-Metusûelach (ZAW 40 (1922) 153–155)
1933 The death of Sennacherib (JAOS 53 (1933) 335–346)
1940 Light from Ugarit on the Khabiru (BASOR 77 (1940) 32)
1948 Two place names of Hellenistic Palestine (JNES 7 (1948) 199–201)
Kraemer, Joel L.
1966 Sðeqa>aruµroµt: a proposed solution for an unexplained hapax (JNES 25 (1966)
125–129)
Krahmalkov, Charles.
1976 An Ammonite lyric poem (BASOR 223 (1976) 55–56)

Kramer, J. H.
1949 in I. J. Koopmans Aramese Grammatica 123
Kraus Fritz Rudolph.
1965 Ein Edikt des Königs Samsuiluna von Babylon (Assyriological Studies 16 (Chicago
1965) 225–231)
1973 Vom mesopotamischen Menschen der altbabylonischen Zeit und seiner Welt
Kraus, H.-J.
1956 Chirbet el-choµch (ZDPV 72 (1956) 152ff)
1973 hoÆj als profetische Leichenklage über das eigene Volk im 8. Jahrhundert (
(1973) 15–46)
Krauss, S.
1907 hbq = fornicatio. Die Thora-Abschrift des Königs. Der hebräische Name der
Ölkelter. Der gazäische und askalonische Weinkrug. Pherec = gubernaculum (ZAW 27 (1907)
286–294)
1908 Städtenamen und Bauwesen (ZAW 28 (1908) 241–270)
1930 Textkritik auf Grund des Wechsels von h und µ (ZAW 48 (1930) 321–324)
Krebs, W.
1966 “… sie haben Stiere gelähmt” (Gen 48: 6) (ZAW 78 (1966) 359–361)
Kreuzer, S.
1981 Schubaël: eine scheinbare Ausnahme in der Typologie der israelitischen
Namengebung (ZAW 93 (1981) 443–444)
1985 Zur Bedeutung und Etymologie von hisûtah\awaµh/ysûth\wy (VT 35 (1985) 39)
Krinetzki, Leo.
1961 “Tal” und “Ebene” im AT (BZ NF 5 (1961) 204–220)
Kristensen, A. L.
1977 Ugaritic epistolary formulas (UF 9 (1977) 143–158)
Kuhl, Curt.
1930 Die drei Männer im Feuer: Daniel Kap. 3 und seine Zusätze (BZAW 55)
Kuhn G.
1921 Beiträge zur Erklärung des Buches Henoch (ZAW 39 (1921) 240–275)
1931 Beiträge zur Erklärung des Salomonischen Spruchbuches (BWANT 57 (1931) 3f)
1939 Ein Beleg for ÷wl[ (>eloÆn) als phönizischen Gottesnamen (ZAW 57 (1939) 150ff)
Kuhn, Karl Georg.

1952 peirasmoé amartia sarx im Neuen Testament und die damit zusammenhängenden
Vorstellungen (ZThK 49 (1952) 200–222)
1954 Les rouleaux de cuivre de Qumran (RB 61:193–205)
1956 Beiträge zum Verständnis der Kriegsrolle von Qumraµn. Der gegenwärtige Stand der
Erforschung der in Palästina neu gefundenen hebräischen Handschriften (ThLZ 81 (1956) 25)
Kümmel, H. M.
1969 Ugaritica-Hethitica (UF 1 (1969) 159–166)
Künstlinger, D. I.
1930 Zu OLZ 32 (1929), 8–9, Kol. 617–8 (OLZ 33 (1930) 969)

1931 dba yd[ II. db] sml (OLZ 34 (1931) 609–696)
Kupper J.-R.
1958* see Cazelles
Kuschke, Arnulf.
1939 Arm und reich im Alten Testament mit besonderer Berücksichtigung der
nachexilischen Zeit (ZAW 57 (1939) 31–56)
1951 Die Lagervorstellung der priesterschriftlichen Erzählung (ZAW 63 (1951) 74–104)
1954/58 Beiträge zur Siedlungsgeschichte der Bik\aµe ([I:] ZDPV 70 (1954) 104ff; [II:]
74 (1958) 81ff)
1958 Das Deutsche Evangelische Institut für Altertumswissenschaft des Heiligen Landes.
Lehrkursus 1957 (1957: ZDPV 74 (1958) 7ff; 1959: ZDPV 76 (1960) 8ff; 1960: ZDPV 77 (1961)
1ff)
1972 see Metzger +
Kutsch, Ernst.
1952 Die Wurzel rx[ im Hebräischen (VT 2 (1952) 57–69)
1953 arqm (ZAW 65 (1953) 247–252)
1958 Erwägungen zur Geschichte der Passafeier und das Massotfestes (ZThK 55 (1958)
1–35)
1963 Salbung als Rechtsakt: im Alten Testament und im Alten Orient (BZAW
1964 Deus humiliat et exaltat (ZThK 61 (1964) 193–220)
1971 “… am Ende des Jahres”: zur Datierung des israelitischen Herbstfestes in Ex 23: 16 (
ZAW 83 (1971) 15–21)
1973 Verheissung und Gesetz: Untersuchungen zum sogenannten “Bund” im Alten
Testament (BZAW 131 (1973))
1982 Text und Geschichte in Hiob 19: zu Problemen in vv. 14–51, 20, 23–24 (
(1982) 464–484)
Kutscher, E. Y.
1952 Tarbiz 22/23, 66
1954 New Aramaic texts (JAOS 74 (1954) 233–248)
1958 The language of the Genesis Apocryphon: a preliminary study (ScrHier. 4 (1958)
1–35)
1962 twyrb[htwrgyahynrmamwrrdynbwhbswkrbltwymrahwtwyrb[htwrgyahlnnwl
(Leshonenu 26:9)
1963 tyrb[b tymrah l hawbb (Tarbiz 33 (1963–64) 118–130)
1963 µyklhm :5 lglg :4 dwdg :3 rpa :2 ¹sa :1 yarqmh ÷wlymh ylwb (Leshonenu
27–28:183)
1963 ÷yrgtw ÷ymrj ÷ygrj (Leshonenu 27:34)
1965 Contemporary studies in North-western Semitic (JSS 10:21–51)
1966 Marginal notes to the Biblical lexicon (Leshonenu 30:18ff)
Kutscher, R.
1962 hytwyjaw µyklhm (Leshonenu 26:93)
Labuschagne, C. J.
1955 The root mh\h attested in Ugaritic (VT 5 (1955) 312–313)
1967 The crux in Ruth 4: 11 (ZAW 79 (1967) 364–366)

Lacau, P.
1972* see Ward
Lagarde, P. de.
1868 Gesammelte Abhandlungen (Leipzig)
Lambdin, Thomas O.
1953 Egyptian loan words in the Old Testament (JAOS 73 (1953) 145–155)
1960 see Cross +
Lambert, G.
1953 Le livre d’Isaïe, parle-t-il des Chinois? (NRTh 75 (1953) 965–1008)
Lambert, W. G.
1960 The domesticated camel in the second millennium: evidence from Alalakh and
Ugarit (BASOR 160 (1960) 42)
Landberg, Le Comte de.
1905* see Nöldeke
Landes, George M.
1956 The fountain at Jazer (BASOR 144 (1956) 30–37)
1961 The material civilization of the Ammonites (BA 24 (1961) 66–86)
Landsberger, Benno.
1923 Review: Arthur Ungnad Altbabylonische Briefe aus dem Museum zu Philadelphia
OLZ 26 (1923) 73)
1926 Schwierige akkadische Wörter. 2: “früh” und “spät” (AfO 3 (1926) 164–171)
1933 Bücherbesprechungen (ZA 41 (1933) 232)
1933 see Bauer +
1935 Studien zu den Urkunden aus der Zeit des Ninurta-tukul-Asûsûur (AfO 10 (1935–36)
140- 159)
1937 Zu den aramäischen Beschwörungen in Keilschrift (AfO 12 (1937–1939) 247ff)
1948 Sam<al
1949 Jahreszeiten im Sumerisch-Akkadischen (JNES 8 (1949) 273–298)
1957 Akkadisch aspu = Schleuder, assukku = Schleuderstein (AfO 18 (1957–58)
378–379)
1960/64 Einige unerkannt gebliebene oder verkannte Nomina des Akkadischen ([A]:
56 (1960) 109–129; 5. hÉa<attu = Ohnmacht, WdO 3 (1964–66) 48–58; 6. kurkuÆ = “Gans”, WdO 3
(1964–66) 246–268)
1965 Brief des Bischofs von Esagila an Ko¬nig Asarhaddon
1967 in Baumgartner Festschrift 198–204
1967 The date palm and its byproducts according to the cuneiform sources (AfO
17 (1967) 19)
1967 Über Farben im Sumerisch-akkadischen (JCS 21 (1967) 139–173)
1969 Tin and lead: the adventures of two vocables (JNES 24 (1965) 285–296)
Langlamet F.
1969 Israel et “l’habitant du pays”: vocabulaire et formules d’Ex. 34: 11–16 (RB
(1969) 321–350)
Lapp, Paul W.
1960 Late royal seals from Judah (BASOR 158 (1960) 11–22)
1962 Soundings at >AraÆq el-EméÆr, Jordan (BASOR 165 (1962) 16–33)
1967 Taanach by the waters of Megiddo (BA 30 (1967) 2–27)
Laroche, E.
1969* see Cazelles
Lasch, R. and Werminghoff, A.
1915 Das Pfeifen und seine Beziehung zu Dämonenglauben und Zauberei (ARw.
(1915) 589–592)
Leander, P.
1917 Einige hebräische Lautgesetze chronologisch geordnet (ZDMG 74:61–76)
1927 Verbesserungen am aramäischen Teil von Gesenius’ Handwörterbuch (ZAW
(1927) 156–158)
Lebram, J. C. H.
1972 Purimfest und Estherbuch (VT 22 (1972) 208–222)
1975 König Antiochus im Buch Daniel (VT 25 (1975) 737–772)
Lebrecht, see Biesenthal and Lebrecht
Leeuwen, J. H. van.
1988 The meaning of sûypt in Lev. 6: 14 (ZAW 100 (1988) 268)
Lehmann, Manfred R.
1953 Abraham’s purchase of Machpelah and Hittite law (BASOR 129 (1953) 15–17)
1969 Biblical oaths (ZAW 81 (1969) 74–92)
Lehming, Sigo.
1958 Erwägungen zu Amos (ZThK 55 (1958) 145–169)
1961 Massa und Meriba (ZAW 73 (1961) 71–77)
1962 Versuch zu Num 16 (ZAW 74 (1962) 291–320)
Lemaire, A.
1966 Avec un sceptre de fer: Ps 2: 9 et l’archéologie (BN 32 (1966) 25–30)
1973 Note épigraphique sur la pseudo-attestation du mois s\h\ (VT 23 (1973) 243–245)
1975 zaµméÆr dans la tablette de Gezer et le Cantique des Cantiques (VT 25 (1975) 15–26)
1976 see Bordreuil +
1981 Galaad et Makîr: remarques sur la tribu de Manassé à l’est du Jourdain (VT
(1981) 39–61)
1984 La Haute Mésopotamie et l’origine des Benê Jacob (VT 34 (1984) 95–101)
Lenze, O.
1935 Die Satrapienanteilung in Syrien und in Zweistromland
Lescow, T.
1967 Das Geburtsmotiv in den messianischen Weissagungen bei Jesaja und Micha (
79 (1967) 172–207)
1970 Die dreistufige Tora: Beobachtungen zu einer Form (ZAW 82 (1970) 362–379)
1972/72 Redaktionsgeschichtliche Analyse von Micha 1–5 (Micha 1–5: ZAW 84 (1972)
46–85; Micha 6–7: ZAW 84 (1972) 182–212)
1973 Jesajas Denkschrift aus der Zeit des syrisch-ephraimitischen Krieges (ZAW
(1973) 315–331)
Leslau, Wolf.
1956 The expressions “under, after” in the Ethiopic languages (JNES 15 (1956) 241–245)
1962 An Ethiopian parallel to Hebrew hl[ “went up country” and dry “went down
country” (ZAW 74 (1962) 322)
1969 Southeast Semitic cognates to the Akkadian vocabulary, III. (JAOS 89 (1969)18–21)
Leslie, Elmer.
1949* see Wevers
Lettinga, J. P.
1957 A note on 2 Kings 19: 37 (VT 7 (1957) 105–106)
Levenson, J. D.
1975 Textual and semantic notes on Nah. 1: 7–8 (VT 25 (1975) 792–794)
Levine, Baruch A.
1963 The netéÆnéÆm (JBL 82 (1963) 207–212)
Lewy, Hildegard.
1949 Studies in Assyro Babylonian mathematics and metrology (Orientalia 18 (1949)
137–170)
1952 Nitokris-Naqî<a (JNES 11 (1952) 264ff)
1959 Origin and significance of the maÆgeÆn daÆwéÆd (ArchOr. 18/3: 330–365)
Lewy, Julius.
1929 Zur Amoriterfrage (ZA 38 (1929) 243–274)
1934 Les textes paléo-assyriens et l’Ancien Testament (RHR 110 (1934) 29–65)
1939 The Assyrian calendar (ArchOr. 11 (1939) 35–65)
1939 The feast of the 14th day of Adar (HUCA 14:127–152)
1942–43 The origin of the week and the oldest West Asiatic calendar (HUCA 17:1–152)
1944 The old West Semitic sun god H\ammu (HUCA 18 (1944) 429; 452)
1945–46 The late Assyro-Babylonian cult of the moon and its culmination at the time of
Nabonidus (HUCA 19:405–490)
1950 Studies in Old Assyrian grammar and lexicography (Orientalia 19 (1950) 1–36)
1952 Studies in the historic geography of the ancient Near East. II. Old Assyrian caravan
roads in the valleys of the Habuµr and the Euphrates and in the Northern Syria (Orientalia 21 (1952)
265–292; 393–425)
1954 The problems inherent in section 70 of the Bisitun inscription (HUCA 25 (1951)
201ff)
1955 Old Assyrian hÉusaÆrum and Sanchunyâtôn’s story about Chusor (IEJ 5:154–162)
1958 Some aspects of commercial life in Assyria and Asia Minor in the nineteenth
pre-Christian century (JAOS 78 (1958) 89–100)
1959 Håatta, Håattu, Håatti, Håattusûa, and “Old Assyrian” Håattum (ArchOr. 18/3:366–441)
1959 Old Assyrian izeÆzum and its implications (Orientalia 28 (1959) 351–360)
1960 Lexical and grammatical studies (Orientalia 29 (1960) 20–45)
Lexa.
1937 ArchOr. 9 (1937) 8
L’Heureux, Conrad E.
1974 The Ugaritic and Biblical Rephaim (HTR 67 (1974) 265–274)
1976 The yeléÆdeÆ haµraµpaµÕ: a cultic association of warriors (BASOR 221 (1976) 83–86)
L’Hour, J.
1964 Les interdits to>eba dans le Deutéronome (RB 71 (1964) 481–503)

Lidzbarski, M.
1905 Das Johannesbuch der Mandäer
1918 ZDMG 72 (1918) 189ff
1927 Epigraphisches (OLZ 30 (1927) 1043)
Liedke, G.
1971 Gestalt und Bezeichnung alttestamentlicher Rechtssätze (WMANT 39 (1971))
Lilley, J. P. U.
1978 By the river-side (VT 28 (1978) 165–171)
Lindblom, Joh.
1942 Bemerkungen zu den Psalmen 1 (ZAW 59 (1942/43) 1–13)
1951 Die Ebed Jahwe-Orakel in der neuentdeckten Jesajahandschrift (ZAW 63 (1951)
235–248)
1953 The political background of the Shiloh oracle (VTSupp. 1 (1953) 78–87)
1956 Der Kessel in Jer 1: 13f (ZAW 68 (1956) 223–224)
1957 Theophanies in holy places in Hebrew religion (HUCA 32:91–106)
1962 Lot-casting in the Old Testament (VT 12 (1962) 164–178)
Lipinski, E.
1963 Yaµhweh MaÆlaµk. (Biblica 44:405–460)
1967 Judges 5: 4–5 et Psaume 68: 8–11 (Biblica 48 (1967) 185–206)
1967 Peninna, Iti’el et l’Athlète (VT 17 (1967) 68–75)
1970 Banquet en l’honneur de Baal: CTA 3 (V AB), A, 4–22 (UF 2 (1970) 75–88)
1970 Recherches sur le livre de Zacharie (VT 20 (1970) 25–55; see also corrigendum et
addendum, pp. 494–495)
1971 Épiphanie de Baal-Haddu RS 24.245 (UF 3 (1971) 81–92)
1973 On the comparison in Isaiah 65: 10 (VT 23 (1973) 246–247)
1973 Recherches ugaritiques: 4. Envoi d’un messager; 5. Le bannissement de Ya
Ba>lu-s\aduq, maire du palais; 7. Une lettre d’affaires du chancelier royal; 8. El-Berit (Syria 50 (1973)
35–52)
1973 skn et sgn dans le sémitique occidental du nord (UF 5 (1973) 191–208)
1974 >Anaq-Kiryat <arba>: Hébron et ses sanctuaires tribaux (VT 24 (1974) 41–55)
1974 La légende sacrée de la conjuration des morsures de serpents (UF 6 (1974) 169–174)
1974 naµgéÆd, der Kronprinz (VT 24 (1974) 497–499)
1976 L’“esclave hébreu” (VT 26 (1976) 120–123)
Littmann, E.
1899 Das Verbum der Tigresprache (ZA 14 (1899) 1–102)
1903 Zur Bedeutung von miskéÆn (ZA 17 (1903) 262–264)
1928 Review: Hans Bauer and Pontus Leander Grammatik des Biblisch-Arama¬ischen
OLZ 31 (1928) 580)
1934 Syriac Inscriptions
1944 Répertoire d’épigraphie sémitique publié par la Commission du Corpus
Insriptionum Semiticarum (ZDMG 101:375–377)
Livingstone, A.
1987 see Beyer +
Loewenstamm, Samuel E.
1969 “The Lord is my strength and my glory” (VT 19 (1969) 464–470)

1969 Eine lehrhafte ugaritische Trinkburleske (UF 1 (1969) 71–78)
1969 ûn and tybrtÖµ (JBL 88 (1969) 78–128)
1970 see Blau+
1971 Grenzgebiete ugaritischer Sprach- und Stilvergleichung: Hebräisch des Zweiten
Tempels, mittelhebräisch, Griechisch (UF 3 (1971) 93–100)
1971 ms\d (UF 3 (1971) 357–359)
1978 balloti be sûa¬ma¬n ra>a naµn (UF 10 (1978) 111–114)
1980 Comparative studies in Biblical and ancient oriental literatures (AOAT 204 (1980)
271)
Loewinger, D. S.
1960 The Aleppo codex and the Ben Asher tradition (Textus 1 (1960) 59–111)
Lofthouse, W. F.
1933 H\en and H\esed in the Old Testament (ZAW 51 (1933) 29–34)
Lohfink, N.
1962 Enthielten die im Alten Testament bezeugten Klageriten eine Phase des
Schweigens? (VT 12 (1962) 260–277)
Löhr, M.
1916 Jesaias-Studien (ZAW 36 (1916) 74–80)
Lökkegaard, F.
1955 The house of Baal (ActOr. 22 (1955) 10–27)
Loretz, Oswald.
1961 The perfectum copulativum in Sm. 7: 9–11 (translated by Roland E. Murphy) (
23 (1961) 294–296)
1962 k>t h\yh, “wie jetzt ums Jahr”: Gen. 18: 10 (Biblica 43 (1962) 75–78)
1962 Ugaritisches s\amaµtu und hebräisches s\m(y)tt (BZ NF 6 (1962) 269–279)
1964 … see Dietrich+ 1964; 1964; 1966/75; 1967; 1977; 1978; 1978; 1978; 1978; 1979;
1980; 1980; 1980; 1980; 1980; 1981; 1982; 1984; 1986; see also Dietrich and Loretz and Sanmartín:
1974; 1975; 1975; 1975; 1975; 1975; 1975; 1976
1967 sû>r hmlk—“das Tor des Königs” (Est. 2: 19) (WdO 4 (1967–68) 104–108)
1974 Stichometrische und textologische Probleme in den Thronbesteigungs-Psalmen.
Psalmenstudien (IV) (UF 6 (1974) 211–241)
1977 Die ammonitische Inschrift von Tell Siran (UF 9 (1977) 169–172)
+ Mayer, W.
1974 Die Glossen mi-ke-tu und ia-pa-aq-ti in EA 64, 22–23 (UF 6 (1974) 493–494)
Löw, Immanuel.
1909 Lexikalische Miszellen ([I:] ZA 22 (1909) 79–97; [II:] ZA 23 (1909) 274–295)
1912 Aramäische Lurchnamen. I. Eidechsen (ZA 26 (1912) 126–147)
1913 wytbwf Neh. 6: 19 (ZAW 33 (1913) 154f)
1922 Semitische Färberpflanzen (ZS 1 (1922) 97–162)
1926 Yayin KoÆses (RéJ 82 (1926) 165–168)
Luria, S.
1926 Die ägyptische Bibel (Joseph- und Mosesage) (ZAW 44 (1926) 94–135)
Lust, J.
1975 A gentle breeze or a roaring thunderous sound? 1 Kings 19: 2 (VT 25 (1975)
110–115)
Lust, J.
1974 On wizards and prophets. (VTSupp. 26 (1974) 133–142)
Lutz, H.-M.
1968 Jahwe, Jerusalem und die Völker (WMANT 27 (1968))
Lux, Ute.
1974 Das Deutsche Evangelische Institut für Altertumswissenschaft des Heiligen Landes
in den Jahren 1970 und 1971 (ZDPV 90 (1974) 185–225)
Maag, Victor.
1953 Morphologie des hebräischen Narrativs (ZAW 65 (1953) 86–87)
1957 Jacob—Esau—Edom (ThZ 13 (1957) 418–429)
1958 Der Hirte Israels (ThR 28 (1958) 2–28)
1959 malkuÆt jhwh (VTSupp. 7 (1959) 129–153)
1964 Tod und Jenseits nach dem Alten Testament (STU 34, 1964, 17ff = Fschr. V. Maag
181ff)
1965 beléÆja>al im Alten Testament (ThZ 21 (1965) 287–309)
McClellan, William H.
1944 “El Gibbor” (CBQ 6 (1944) 276–288)
McDaniel, T. F.
1968 Philological studies in Lamentations (Biblica 49 (1968) 27–53)
Macdonald, J.
1964 ed. Memra Miqra
1964 The particle ta in Classical Hebrew: some new data on its use with the nominative (
VT 14 (1964) 264–275)
1976 see Cutler +
1979 An assembly at Ugarit? (UF 11 (1979) 515–526)
+ Cutler, B.
1982 On the origin of the Ugaritic text KTU 1.23 (UF 14 (1982) 33–50)
Macholz, G. C.
1972 Zur Geschichte der Justizorganisation in Juda (ZAW 84 (1972) 314–340)
Macintosh, A. A.
1971 Exodus 8: 19 (VT 21 (1971) 548–555)
1973 Psalm 91: 4 and the root sh\r (VT 23 (1973) 56–62)
1974 A third root >rh in biblical Hebrew? (VT 24 (1974) 454–473)
McKay, J. W.
1972 The date of passover and its significance (ZAW 84 (1972) 435–446)
1979 Psalms of vigil (ZAW 91 (1979) 229–246)
MacLaurin, E. C. B.
1962 YHWH, the origin of the Tetragrammaton (VT 12 (1962) 439–463)
1965 Anak / ÒAnax (VT 15 (1965) 468–473)
Maisler, B.
1932 Zur Götterwelt des alten Palästina (ZAW 50 (1932) 86f)
1934 see Ginsberg +
1935 Die westliche Linie des Meerweges (ZDPV 58:78ff)
1936 A genealogical list from Ras Shamra (JPOS 16 (1936) 150–157)
1946 Canaan and the Canaanites (BASOR 102 (1946) 7–11)
1951 The excavation of Tell Qasile (BA 14:43–50)
Malamat, Abraham.
1953 The historical background of the assassination of Amon, king of Judah (IEJ
1954 Cushan Rishathaim and the decline of the Near East around 1200 BC (JNES
(1954) 231–264)
1960 Hazor, “the head of all those kingdoms” (JBL 79 (1960) 12–19)
1962 Mari and the Bible: some patterns of tribal organization and institutions (
(1962) 143–162)
1963 Aspects of the foreign policies of David and Solomon (JNES 22 (1963) 1–17)
1963 Kingship and council in Israel and Sumer: a parallel (JNES 22 (1963) 247–253)
1965 Organs of statecraft in the Israelite monarchy (BA 28:34–65)
1966 Prophetic revelations in new documents from Mari and the Bible (VTSupp.
(1966) 207–227)
1968 The last kings of Judah and the fall of Jerusalem (IEJ 18 (1968) 137–156)
1970 The Danite migration and the pan-Israelite exodus-conquest: a Biblical narrative
pattern (Biblica 51 (1970) 1–16)
1975 The twilight of Judah; in the Egyptian-Babylonian maelstrom (VTSupp. 28 (1975)
123- 145)
Mannati, M.
1975 Les accusations de Psaume 1: 18–20 (VT 25 (1975) 659–669)
1979 Le Psaume 11: un exemple typique des liens entre l’interprétation du genre littéraire
et l’étude de stiques obscurs (VT 29 (1979) 222–227)
Manitius, W.
1910/10 Das stehende Heer der Assyrerkönige und seine Organisation (ZA 24 (1910)
97–149; 185- 224)
Manross, Lawrence N.
1953 beÆth essentiae (JBL 73 (1953) 238–239)
Mansfeld, Günther.
1969* see Röllig
Mansoor, M.
1958 Some linguistic aspects of the Qumran texts (JSS 3:40–54)
Marböck, J.
1970 wq: eine Bezeichnung für das hebräische Metrum? (VT 20 (1970) 236–239)
Marcus, R.
1947 On Biblical hypostases of wisdom (HUCA 23/1:157–172)
Margalit, B.
1976 Studia Ugaritica II: “Studies in Krt and Aqht.” (UF 8 (1976) 137–192)
1981 The Ugaritic creation myth: fact or fiction (UF 13 (1981) 144)
1983/85 Lexicographical notes on the Aqht Epic (Part I, KTU 1.17–18: UF 15 (1983)
65–104; Part II, KTU 1.19: UF 16 (1985) 119–180)

Margalith, Othniel.
1983 dr ydgb = fine linen from Colchis (ZAW 95 (1983) 430–431)
1985 Samson’s foxes (VT 35 (1985) 224)
Margulis, B.
1970 A New Ugaritic Farce (RSð 24.258) (UF 2 (1970) 131–138)
Maricq, A., see Honigman and Maricq
Markert, Ludwig.
1977 Struktur und Bezeichnung des Scheltworts. Eine gattungskritische Studie anhand
des Amosbuches (BZAW 140 (1977))
Marmorstein, A.
1933 Jüdische Archäologie und Theologie (ZNW 32 (1933) 32–41)
Marrow, S.
1965 H\aµmaµs “violentia” in Jer. 20: 8 (VbDom. 43 (1965) 241–255)
Martin, G. T.
1989 The Memphite tomb of Horemheb (London: Egypt Exploration Society, 55th.
excavation memoir)
Martin-Achard, Robert.
1960 La signification théologique de l’élection d’Israël (ThZ 16 (1960) 333–341)
1965 Jahwé et les >anawim (ThZ 21 (1965) 349–357)
1968 L’oracle contre Shebnâ et le pouvoir des clefs, Es. 22: 15–25 (ThZ 24 (1968)
241–254)
Marzal A.
1971 The provincial governor at Mari: his title and appointment (JNES 30 (1971)
186–217)
Mason, R. A.
1976 The relation of Zech 9–14 to proto-Zechariah (ZAW 88 (1976) 227–238)
Masson, E.
1968/77 see Caquot + 1968; 1977.
Mastin, B. A.
1973 Daniel 2:46 and the hellenistic world (ZAW 85 (1973) 81)
Mathys, Felix.
1972 Sabbatruhe und Sabbatfest: Überlegungen zur Entwicklung und Bedeutung des
Sabbat im Alten Testament (ThZ 28 (1972) 241–262)
Matthiae, P.
1979 Princely cemetery and ancestors cult at Ebla during Middle Bronze II: a proposal of
interpretation (UF 11 (1979) 563–570)
May, Herbert Gordon.
1941 “>al.…” in the superscriptions of the Psalms (AJSL 58 (1941) 70–83)
1942 The two pillars before the Temple of Solomon (BASOR 88 (1942) 19–27)
Mayer, W.
1974 see Loretz +
Mayes, A. D. H.
1973 Israel in the pre-monarchy period (VT 23 (1973) 151–170)
Mayrhofer, M.
1950 Etymologische Miszellen (ArchOr. 18/4 (1950) 68–77)
Mazar, Benjamin.
1962 The Aramean empire and its relations with Israel (BA 25 (1962) 98–120)
Mazar, B.
1954 Gath and Gittaim (IEJ 4:227–235)
1957 The campaign of Pharaoh Shishak to Palestine (VTSupp. 4 (1957) 57–66)
1959 The cities of the priests and the levites (VTSupp. 7 (1959) 193–205)
1960 The cities of the territory of Dan (IEJ 10:65–77)
1961 Geshur and Maacah (JBL 80 (1961) 16–28)
1963 The military élite of king David (VT 13 (1963) 310–320)
1965 The sanctuary of Arad and the family of Hobab the Kenite (JNES 24 (1965)
297–304)
Mc see under Mac
Medico, H. E. del.
1963 zahab parwayim: l’or fructifére dans la tradition juive (VT 13 (1963) 158–186)
Meehan, Ch.
1980 An Aramaic inscription from Håirbet Gðeµmar (ZDPV 96 (1980) 59–66)
Meek, Theophile James.
1935 The iterative names in the Old Akkadian texts from Nuzi (RA 32 (1935) 51–55)
1960 Translating the Hebrew Bible (JBL 79 (1960) 328–335)
Meissner, Brunno.
1897 yntt (ZAW 17: 191)
1898 Babylonische Leichenfeierlichkeiten (WZKM 12 (1898) 59–66)
1903 Lexicographische Studien (ZA 17 (1903) 239–290)
1914 Das Antimongebirge (OLZ 17 (1914) 52–54)
1947 Akkadisch? (Orientalia 16 (1947) 22)
Mendenhall, George E.
1954 Puppy and lettuce in Northwest-Semitic covenant making (BASOR 133 (1954)
26–30)
Mendelsohn, I.
1940 Guilds in ancient Palestine (BASOR 80 (1940) 17–21)
1940 Guilds in Babylonia and Assyria (JAOS 60 (1940) 68–72)
1941 The Canaanite term for “free proletarian.” (BASOR 83 (1941) 36–38)
1942 State slavery in ancient Palestine (BASOR 85 (1942) 14–17)
1955 New light on the Håupsûu (BASOR 139 (1955) 9–10)
1956 Samuel’s denunciation of kingship in the light of the Akkadian documents from
Ugarit (BASOR 143 (1956) 17–21)
1959 On the preferential status of the eldest son (BASOR 156 (1959) 38–39)
Menge and Güthling.

1924 Langenscheidts Grosswörterbuch Grieks-Deutsch
Merendino, Rosario P.
1969 Das deuteronomische Gesetz. Eine literarkritische, gattungs- und
überlieferungsgeschichtliche Untersuchung zu Dt. 12–26 (BBB 31 (1969) S. 80)
1969 Dat Dtn Gesetz (BBB 61 (1969) 173)
Meshel, Ze>ev and Meyers, Carol.
1976 The name of God in the wilderness of Zin (BA 39 (1976) 6–10)
Mettinger, Tryggve N. D.
1971 The nominal pattern qetullaµ in Biblical Hebrew (JSS 16 (1971) 2–14)
1974 Abbild oder Urbild? “Imago Dei” in traditionsgeschichtlicher Sicht (ZAW
403–424)
1974 The elimination of a crux? A syntatic and semantic study of Isaiah 40: 19–20 (
VTSupp. 26 (1974) 77–83)
Metzger, M.
1960 Lodebar und der tell el-mghannije (ZDPV 76 (1960) 97ff)
1970 Himmlische und irdische Wohnstatt Jahwes (UF 2 (1970) 139–158)
+ Kuschke, Arnulf.
1972 Kumidi und die Ausgrabungen auf Tell Kamid el-Loz (VTSupp. 22 (1972) 143–173)
Meuli, K.
1951 Schweizer Volkskunde
Meyer, Rudolf.
1950 Zur Sprache von >Ain Feschcha (ThLZ 75 (1950) 721)
1958 Bemerkungen zu den hebräischen Aussprachetraditionen von Chirbet Qumraµn
ZAW 70 (1958) 39–47)
1958 Spuren eines semitischen Präsens-Futur in der Texten von Chirbet Qumran (
77 (1958) 118–128)
1961 Review: A. Sperber A Grammar of Masoretic Hebrew (VT 11 (1961) 474–486)
1965 Melchisedek von Jerusalem und Moresedek von Qumran (VTSupp. 15 (1965)
228–239)
1972 Methodische Erwägungen zur geplanten Neuauflage von Gesenius,
Hebra¬isch-arama¬isches Handwo¬rterbuch (VTSupp. 22 (1972) 174–184)
1973 in Elliger Festschrift 137–142
1979 Gegensinn und Mehrdeutigkeit in der althebräischen Wort- und Begriffsbildung (
11 (1979) 603–612)
Meyer-Opificius, R.
1982 Simson, der sechslockige Held (UF 14 (1982) 149–152)
Meyers, Carol.
1976 see Meshel +
Meysing, J.
1960 A text-reconstruction of Ps. 117 (118): 27 (VT 10 (1960) 130–137)
Michel, D.
1956 Studien zu den sogenannten Thronsbesteigungspsalmen (VT 6 (1956) 40–68)
Michel, Ernst.
1947/47 Die Assur-Texte Salmanassars III (858–824), (1. Fortsetzung 5–7, Text: WdO
(1947–52) 57–71, Tfl. 7–9; 3. Fortzetsung 18–25, Text: WdO 1 (1947–52) 255–271, Tfl. 12–13)
Milgrom, J.
1967 The cultic Sðegaµgaµ and its influence in Psalms (JQR 58 (1967–68) 115–125)
1970 The Levitical >ABOD_A÷ (JQR 61 (1970/71) 132–154)
1972 The alleged wave-offering in Israel and in the ancient Near East (IEJ 22 (1972)
33–38)
1977 The betrothed slave-girl, Lev 19: 20–22 (ZAW 89 (1977) 43–49)
Milik, J. T.
1950 De vicissitudinibus notionis et vocabuli iubilaei (VbDom. 28 (1950) 162 -167)
1951 The Dead Sea Scrolls fragment of the Book of Enoch (Biblica 32:393–400)
1952 Koheleth: the man and his word (RB 59 (1952) 590)
1954 Review: G. R. Driver Aramaic documents of the fifth century B.C., transcribed and
edited with translation and notes (RB 61 (1954) 594)
1954 Un contrat juif de l’an 134 après Jésus-Christ (RB 61 (1954) 182–190)
1954 see Cross +
1955 see Barthélemy +
1956 “Prière de Nabonide” et autres écrits d’un cycle de Daniel: fragments araméens de
Qumrân 4 (RB 63 (1956) 407–415)
1956 An unpublished arrow-head with Phoenician inscription of the 11th-10th century BC
(BASOR 143(1956) 3–5)
1956 see Cross +
1958 (Studi Biblici Franciscani: Liber Ann. 9 (1958/59) 331)
1958 Nouvelles inscriptions nabatéennes (Syria 35 (1958) 227–251)
1959 Le rouleau de cuivre de Qumrân (3Q 15): traduction et commentaire topographique (
RB 66 (1959) 321–357)
1959 Notes d’épigraphie et de topographie palestiniennes (RB 66 (1959) 550–575)
1959 Deux jarres inscrites provenant d’une grotte de Qumraµn (Biblica 40:985–991)
1961 see Benoit +
*1962 see Baillet
1968 Parchemin judéo-araméen de Doura-Europos, an 200 ap. J.C. (Syria 45 (1968)
97–104)
1972 4Q visions de >Amram et une citation d’Origène (RB 79 (1972) 77–97)
+ Benoit, B. and Vaux R. de.
1961 Les Grottes de Murabba>ât (DJD 2 (1961))
Millard A. R.
1962 Ezekiel 27: 19; the wine trade of Damascus (JSS 7:201–203)
1976 Assyrian royal names in Biblical Hebrew (JSS 21 (1976) 1–14)
Miller, J. M.
1967 The fall of the house of Ahab (VT 17 (1967) 307–324)
1974 The descendents of Cain: notes on Genesis 4 (ZAW 86 (1974) 164–173)
Miller, P. D.
1970 Ugaritic GùZR and Hebrew >ZR II (UF 2 (1970) 159–176)
1970 Animal names as designations in Ugaritic and Hebrew (UF 2 (1970) 177–186)
1979 yaµpéÆah\ in Psalm 12: 6 (VT 29 (1979) 495–500)
Mitchell, T. C.
1961 The Old Testament usage of nesûama (VT 11 (1961) 177–187)
Mittmann, S.
1976 Amos 3: 12–15 und das Bett der Samarier (ZDPV 92 (1976) 149–167)
1977 Ri. 1: 16f und das Siedlungsgebiet der kenitischen Sippe Hobab (ZDPV 93 (1977)
213–235)
1978 Komposition und Redaktion von Psalm 29 (VT 28 (1978) 172–194)
1980 “Reigentänze” in Ex. 32: 18 (BN 13 (1980) 41–45)
1981 Die Grabinschrift des Sängers Uriahu (ZDPV 97 (1981) 139–152)
Mittwoch, E.
1930* see Mordtmann and Mittwoch
Mittwoch, H.
1965 The story of the blasphemer seen in a wider context (VT 15 (1965) 386–389)
Mohle, A.
1934 Ein neuer Fund zahlreicher Stücke aus den Jesaiaübersetzungen des Akylas,
Symmachos und Theodotion (ZAW 52 (1934) 176–183)
Möhlenbrink, K.
1934 Die Levitischen Überlieferungen des Alten Testaments (ZAW 52 (1934) 184–230)
Molin, Georg.
1954 Die Stellung der Gebira im Staate Juda (ThZ 10 (1954) 161–196)
1956 What is a kidon? (JSS 1:334–337)
Montalbano, Frank J.
1951 Canaanite dragon: origin, nature (CBQ 13 (1951) 381–397)
Montgomery, J. A.
1927 The hemzah-h in the Semitic (JBL 46:144–146)
1934 Some Hebrew etymologies (JQR 25 (1934–35) 261–270)
1935 Ras Shamra Notes III (JAOS 55 (1935) 89–94, with two plates)
1935 Some oracle place names (JBL 54:61–62)
1938 Hebraica (JAOS 58 (1938) 130–139)
Moor J. C. de.
1957 Lexical remarks concerning yah\ad and yah\daw (VT 7 (1957) 350–355)
1966 Der mdl Baals im Ugaritischen (ZAW 78 (1966) 69–70)
1969 Review: F. Grondahl Die Personennamen der Texte aus Ugarit (BiOr. 26 (1969)
105–108)
1969/70 Studies in the new alphabetic texts from Ras Shamra (I: UF 1 (1969) 167–188; II:
UF 2 (1970) 303–328)
1970 The Semitic pantheon of Ugarit (UF 2 (1970) 187–228)
1971 The ash in Ugarit (UF 3 (1971) 349–350)
1971 The seasonal pattern in the Ugaritic myth of Ba>lu . . . (AOAT 16 (1971) 126. 133)
1975 see Dijkstra +
1976 Raµpi<uµma—Rephaim (ZAW 88 (1976) 323–345)
1979 Contributions to the Ugaritic lexicon (UF 11 (1979) 639–653)
1980 An incantation against evil spirits (Ras Ibn Hani 78/20) (UF 12 (1980) 429–432)
1981 Donkey-packs and geology (UF 13 (1981) 303–304)
1986 >Athtartu the huntress (KTU 1.92) (UF 17 (1986) 225–230)
+ Spronk, K.
1982/82 Problematic Passages in the Legend of Kirtu (I: UF 14 (1982) 153–172; II:
(1982) 173–190)
Morag, S.
1959 The vocalization of Codex Reuchlinianus: is the “premasoretic” Bible premasoretic (
JSS 4 (1959) 216–237)
Moraldi, L.
*1958 see Cazelles
Moran, William L.
1950 The putative root >tm in Is. 9: 18 (CBQ 12 (1950) 153–154)
1953 Amarna sûumma in main clauses (JCS 7 (1953) 78–80)
1958 Gen. 49: 10 and its use in Ezk. 21: 32 (Biblica 39 (1958) 405–425)
1958 Ugaritic s\éÆs\uÆma and Hebrew s\éÆs\ (Biblica 39 (1958) 69–71)
1960 Early Canaanite yaqtula (Orientalia 29 (1960) 1–19)
1963 A note on the treaty terminology of the Sefire stelas (JNES 22 (1963) 173–176)
Morenz, S.
1959 Joseph in Ägypten (ThLZ 84 (1959) 401–414)
Mordtmann, I. H. and Mittwoch E.
1930* see Höfner
Morgenstern, J.
1938 The mythological background of Psalm 82 (HUCA 14:29–126)
1939 Psalm 121 (JBL 58:311–323)
1945 The chanukkah festival and the calendar of ancient Israel (HUCA 21:365)
1961 The suffering servant: a new solution (VT 11 (1961) 292–320)
Moriarty, Frederick L.
1952 A note on the root yp> (CBQ 14 (1952) 62)
Moritz, B.
1926 Edomitische Genealogien I. (ZAW 44(1926) 81–93)
1937 Die Könige von Edôm (Muséon 50 (1937) 101–176)
1939 Ergänzungen zu meinem Aufsatz: “Die Könige von Edom” (ZAW 57 (1939)
148–149)
Moroder, R. J.
1974 Ugaritic and modern translation of the Psalter: a critical examination of Die Psalmen
—Ökumenische Übersetzung der Bibel (UF 6 (1974) 249–264)
Moscati, S.
1946 La radice semitica <mr (Biblica 27:115–126)
1946 Sull’etimologia di bkwk (Biblica 27:269–272)
1949 I sigilli nell’Antico Testamento (Biblica 30:314–338)
Motzki, H.
1975 Ein Beitrag zum Problem des Stierkultes in der Religionsgeschichte Israels (
(1975) 470–485)
Mouterde, Paul.
1969 La faune du Proche-Orient dans l’antiquité (MUSJ 45 (1969) 450)

Mowinckel, Sigmund.
1916 rmk, rmk (ZAW 36 (1916) 238f)
1927 Die letzten Worte Davids: II Sam. 23: 1–7 (ZAW 45 (1927) 30–58)
1930 Der Ursprung der Bil>aµmsage (ZAW 48 (1930) 233–271)
1930 twjf und ywk: eine Studie zur Astrologie des Alten Testaments (ActOr. 8 (1930)
1–44)
1935 Hat es ein israelitisches Nationalepos gegeben? (ZAW 53:130–152)
1939 The Babylonian matter in the predeuteronomic primeval history (JE) in Gen. 1–11 (
JBL 58:87–91)
1948 Om Jesajas striskjort og hans nakenhet (NTT 49 (1948) 91–96)
1953 Der metrische Aufbau von Jes. 62: 1–12 und die neuen sog. “Kurzverse” (
(1953) 167–187)
1953 Zum Psalm des Habakuk (ThZ 9 (1953) 1–22)
1955 Psalm criticism between 1900 and 1935 (VT 5 (1955) 13–33)
1955 Die Gründung von Hebron (OrSuec. 4 (1955) 67–76)
1957 The name of the God of Moses (HUCA 32:121–134)
1960/60 Loven og de 8 termini i Sl. 119 (I-II: NTT 61 (1960) 95–127; III-IV: NTT
129–159)
1961 The verb sŒiah\ and the nouns sŒiah\, sŒih\aµ (StTh. 15/1 (1961) 1–10)
1961 Zwei Qumran-Miszellen (ZAW 73 (1961) 297–298)
1962 Drive and/or ride in OT (VT 12 (1962) 278–299)
1965 Studia Theologica (1965), 130ff
Mudarres, J.
1976 see Badre
Muilenburg, James.
1954 A Qoheleth scroll from Qumran (BASOR 135 (1954) 20–27)
1954 Mizpah of Benjamin (StTh. 8/1 (1954) 25–42)
1955 The site of ancient Gilgal (BASOR 140 (1955) 11–26)
1957 The linguistic and rhetorical usages of the particle yk in the Old Testament (
32:135–160)
1961 The Biblical view of time (HTR 54 (1961) 225–252)
Mulder, Martin J.
1968 Un euphémisme dans 2 Sam. 12: 14? (VT 18 (1968) 108–114)
1972 Hat man in Ugarit die Sonnenwende begangen? (UF 4 (1972) 79–96)
1972 Versuch zur Deutung von sokenet in 1. Kön. 1: 2, 4 (VT 22 (1972) 43–54)
1976 Einige Bemerkungen zur Beschreibung des Libanonwaldhauses in I Reg. 72f (
88 (1976) 99–104)
Müller, Hans-Peter.
1963 Die himmlische Ratsversammlung: Motivgeschichtliches zu Apc. 51–5 (ZNW
(1963) 254–267)
1964 Zur Frage nach dem Ursprung der biblischen Eschatologie (VT 14 (1964) 276)
1967 “Der bunte Vogel” von Jer. 12: 9 (ZAW 79 (1967) 225–228)
1969 Die hebräische Wurzel jyc (VT 19 (1969) 361–371)
1969 Magisch-mantische Weisheit und die Gestalt Daniels (UF 1 (1969) 79–94)
1969 Ursprünge und Strukturen alttestamentlicher Eschatologie (BZAW 109 (1969))
1970 Der Begriff “Rätsel” im Alten Testament (VT 20 (1970) 474f)
1970 Notizen zu althebräischen Inschriften I (UF 2 (1970) 229–242)

1971 Die Wurzeln >yq, y>q und >wq (VT 21 (1971) 556–564)
1972 Mantische Weisheit und Apokalyptik (VTSupp. 22 (1972) 268; 271; 277)
1974 Review: Loren R. Fisher, Ras Shamra parallels vol. 1 (ZA 64 (1974) 305)
1974 Glauben und Bleiben: zur Denkschrift Jesajas Kapitel VI 1-VIII 18 (VTSupp.
(1974) 25–54)
1975 Bücherschau (ZA 65 (1975) 301–312)
1975 Das Wort von den Totengeistern Jes. 8: 19f (WdO 8 (1975–76) 65–71)
1975 Die phönizische Grabinschrift aus dem Zypern-Museum KAI 30 und die
Formgeschichte des nordwestsemitischen Epitaphs (ZA 65 (1975) 104–132)
1976 Bücherschau (ZA 66 (1976) 305–309)
1978 Einige alttestamentliche Probleme zur aramäischen Inschrift von Deµr >Allaµ
94 (1978) 56–67)
1978 Gilgameschs Trauergesang um Enkidu und die Gattung der Totenklage (ZA
(1978) 233–250)
1980 Monotheismus im alten Israel und in seiner Umwelt (Biblische Beiträge 14 (1980)
131)
1980 Religionsgeschichtliche Beobachtungen zu den Texten von Ebla (ZDPV 96 (1980)
1–19)
1982 Die aramäische Inschrift von Deir >Allaµ und die älteren Bileamsprüche (ZAW
(1982) 217–243)
1983 Zur Geschichte des hebräischen Verbs—Diachronie der Konjugationsthemen (
27 (1983) 34–57)
1984 Der 90. Psalm. Ein Paradigma exegetischer Aufgaben (ZThK 81 (1984) 265–285)
Müller, M.
1977 see Ismail +
Müller, W. M.
1911 Gosen nach einem demot. Schulbuch (OLZ 14 (1911) 195–199)
Müller, W. W.
1963 Altsüdarabische Beiträge zum hebräische Lexikon (ZAW 75 (1963) 304–316)
Murphy, Roland E.
*1961 see Loretz
+ Carm, O. A.
1952 Fragment of an early Moabite inscription from Dibon (BASOR 125 (1952) 20–23)
Murtonen, A.
1952 The prophet Amos: a hepatoscoper (VT 2 (1952) 170–171)
1959 The use and meaning of the words lebaórek and beraókaóh in the Old Testament (
(1959) 158–177)
Mutius, H. G. v.
1978 Hebräisch-arabische Sprachvergleichung im Jesajakommentar Abraham Ibn Esras (
BN 6 (1978) 15–18)
Myers, J. M.
1962 Some considerations bearing on the date of Joel (ZAW 74 (1962) 177–194)
Na>aman, Nadav.
1981 “Hebron was built seven years before Zoan in Egypt” (Numbers 13: 22) (
(1981) 488–492)
1978 Looking for KTK (WdO 9 (1978) 220–239)
1980 The inheritance of the sons of Simeon (ZDPV 96 (1980) 136–152)
Nagel, W.
1962 Frühe Tierwelt in Südwestasien (ZA 55 (1962) 169–236)
Narkis, M.
1935 The snuff-shovel as a Jewish symbol (JPOS 15 (1935) 14–34)
Naveh, J.
1963 Old Hebrew inscriptions in a burial cave (IEJ 13 (1963) 74–92)
1971 The Aramaic inscriptions of boundary stones in Armenia (WdO 6 (1971) 44)
+Shaked, S.
1985 Amulets from magic bowls (Leiden)
Nebe, Gerhard-Wilhelm.
1981 Psalm 104: 11 aus Höhle 4 von Qumran (4QPsd) und der Ersatz des Gottesnamens (
ZAW 93 (1981) 284–290)
Negev, Avraham.
1971 The Nabatean necropolis of Mampsis (Kurnub) (IEJ 21 (1971) 110–129)
1977 A Nabatean sanctuary at Jebel Moneijah, Southern Sinai (IEJ 27 (1977) 219–231)
Neiman, David.
1948 pgr: a Canaanite cult-object in the Old Testament (JBL 67 (1948) 55–60)
1963 Sefarad: the name of Spain (JNES 22 (1963) 128–144)
1966 CarcheÆdoÆn = “New City” (JNES 25 (1966) 42–47)
1971 >br. iht. npsûmm (‘nt vi: 8–9 ): a proposed translation (JNES 30 (1971) 64–68)
Németh, J.
*1953 see Brockelmann
Nestle, E.
1892 Jozua-Jesus (ThStKr. 65 (1892) 573–575)
1900/03 Miscellen: (1. Joel 1: 17. 2. Der Mamzer von Asdod. 3. Das Lied Habakkuks und
der Psalter. 4. Neue Stoffe zu Doktorarbeiten. 5. Ein neues Wort für das hebräische Wörterbuch:
ZAW 20 (1900) 164–172; 5. Zum ehernen Maultier des des Manasse. 6. 1Sam. 15: 22. 7. Zu 1 (3)
Reg. 18,27. 8. Psalm 2: 11. 9. Zu den alphabetischen Psalmen. 10. Zu Jaddua als Dichter des 119.
Psalms. 11. Sommerfädenauf Hebräisch. 12. Zum Baal tetramorphos. 13. Tresterwein im Alten
Testament. 14. Gomer Bath Diblaim: ZAW 23 (1903) 337–347)
1904/04 Miscellen (1. Zur kapiteleinteilung in Joel. 2. Jes. 14: 19. 3. Eine Abbildung des
Königs Manasse im Stier. 4. Die Synchronismen der Genesis in graphischer Darstellung. 5. Ein
Vorgänger Goethe’s über den zweiten Dekalog. 6. Acht Söhne Japheths in Gen. 10. 7. Nicht
nachgewiesene Bibelzitate: ZAW 24 (1904) 122–138; 6. Zur Geschichte der hebräischen
Lexikographie. 7. Gen. 3: 16; 4: 7; Cant. 7: 11. 8. Die Mesusa. 9. Nicht nachgewiesene Bibelzitate.
10. Nathan in Zach. 12. 11. “Deuteronomos” und “Numeri, Leviticus”. 12. Zum Geschlecht von
pentatucos und dekalogos: ZAW 24 (1904) 309–325)
1905 Ex. 9: 24 (Miscellen 20) (ZAW 25 (1905) 364–365)
1906 I Könige 3: 22 (Miscellen 3) (ZAW 26 (1906) 163–164)
1907 Moses-Moyses (Miscellen 1) (ZAW 27 (1907) 111–113)
1909 Miscellen (ZAW 29 (1909) 232)
1910 Adam. Ein zweiter Adam (ZAW 30 (1910) 72f)

1913 Das Böcklein in der Milch der Mutter (ZAW 33 (1913) 73–76)
Neuberg, Frank J.
1950 An unrecognized meaning of Hebrew doÆr (JNES 9 (1950) 215–216)
Neufeld, E.
1955 The prohibitions against loans at interest in ancient Hebrew laws (HUCA
26:355–412)
1980 Insects as warfare agents in the ancient Near East (Orientalia 49 (1980) 30–57)
Nicholson, E. W.
1965 The meaning of the expression Årah µ[ in the Old Testament (JSS 10 (1965)
59–66)
1974 The interpretation of Exodus 24: 9–11 (VT 24 (1974) 77–97)
1977 Blood-spattered altars? (VT 27 (1977) 113–116)
1977 The problem of jnx (ZAW 89 (1977) 259–265)
Niehaus, J.
1980 pa>am <eh\aµt and the Israelite conquest (VT 30 (1980) 236–238)
1981 raµz-pesûar in Isaiah 24 (VT 31 (1981) 376–378)
Nielsen, Eduard.
1972 Creation and the fall of man: a cross-disciplinary investigation (HUCA 43 (1972)
1–22)
Nober, Peter.
1958 Esr. 7: 23 (BiZ (NF) 2 134–138)
Nöldeke, Arnold.
1947 Zur Hydrographie des Euphrat im Schwemmlande (WdO 1 (1947–52) 158–186,
with map, plate 11)
Nöldeke, Theodor.
1871 Die Namen der aramäischen Nation und Sprache (ZDMG 25:113–131)
1874 Ein zweiter syrischer Julianusroman (ZDMG 28:660–674)
1875 Zur Geschichte der Araber im 1. Jahrh. d. H. aus syrischen Quellen (ZDMG
29:76–98)
1884 Göttinger Gelehrte Anzeiger (1884), 1022
1885 ZDMG 40 (1885) 741
1886 Review: Th. W. Robertson Smith Kinship and marriage in early Arabia (
(1886) 148–187)
1886 Review: Friedr. Delitzsch Prolegomena eines neuen hebra¬isch-arama¬ischen
Wo¬rterbuchs zum Alten Testament (ZDMG 40 (1886) 718–743)
1899 ZDMG 54 (1899) 163
1900 Bemerkungen zum hebräischen Ben SéÆraµ (ZAW 20 (1900) 81ff)
1903 Review: E. Kautzsch Die Aramaismen im Alten Testament untersucht von E.
Kautzch 1. Lexikalischen Teil (ZDMG 57 (1903) 412–420)
1904 Sieben Brunnen (ARw. 7 (1904) 340–344)
1905 Review: Le Comte de Landberg La langue arabe et ses dialectes. Communication
faite au XIVe Congrès international des Orientalistes à Alger. (ZDMG 59:412–420)
1908 Aramäische Inschriften (ZA 21: 383)
1915–16 Glossen zu H. Bauer’s Semitischen Sprachproblemen (ZA 30:163–170)
1917–18 Texte im aramäischen Dialekt von Ma>luµla (ZA 31:203–230)

Noort, E.
1971 Eine weitere Kurzbemerkung zu 1. Samuel 14: 41 (VT 21 (1971) 112–116)
1977 Untersuchungen zum Gottesbescheid in Mari (AOAT 202 (1977) 97)
North, Christopher R.
1932 The religious aspects of Hebrew kingship (ZAW 50 (1932) 8–38)
1958 The essence of idolatry (BZAW 77 (1958) 151–160)
1967 Psalm 60: 8 || 108: 8 (VT 17 (1967) 242–243)
North, Francis Sparling.
1954 Aaron’s rise in prestige (ZAW 66 (1954) 191–198)
1961 Four-month seasons of the Hebrew Bible (VT 11 (1961) 446–448)
North, Robert.
1954 Yad in the shemitta-law (VT 4 (1954) 196–199)
1955 Flesh, covering and response, Exod. 21: 10 (VT 5 (1955) 204–206)
1967 Separated spiritual substances in the Old Testament (CBQ 29 (1967) 419–449)
1970 Zechariah’s seven-spout lampstand: “tabula extra seriem” (Biblica 51 (1970)
183–206)
Noth, Martin.
1927 Gemeinsemitische Erscheinungen in der israelitischen Namengebung (ZDMG
81:1–45)
1927 Das Krongut der israelitischen Könige und seine Verwaltung (ZDPV 50 (1927)
211ff)
1928 Zum phönizischen tda (OLZ 31 (1928) 553–555 )
1929 La>asch und Hazrak (ZDPV 52:124ff)
1930 Zum Problem der “Ostkaanäer” (ZA 39 (1930) 213–244)
1932 Eine siedlungssgeographische Liste in 1 Chr. 2 und 4 (ZDPV 55:97ff)
1934 Die Unsiedlung des Stammes Juda auf dem Boden Palästinas (PJb 30 (1934) 31–46)
1935 Studien zu den historisch-geographischen Dokumenten des Josuabuches (
58:185ff)
1938/38 Die Wege der Pharaonenheere in Palästina und Syrien III. (ZDPV 61 (1938) 26ff)
IV. (ZDPV 61 (1938) 277ff)
1940 Der Mallsahrtsweg zum Sinai (PJb 36 (1940) 5–28)
1940 Num. 21 als Glied der “Hexateuch”-Erzählung (ZAW 58 (1940/41) 161–189)
1944 Eine palästinische Lokalüberlieferung in 2 Chr. 20 (ZDPV 67 (1944) 45ff)
1944 Israelitische Stämme zwischen Ammon und Moab (ZAW 60 (1944) 11–56)
1947 Zum Ursprung der phönikischen Küstenstädte (WdO 1 (1947–52) 21–28)
1951 Arioch-Arriwuk (VT 1 (1951) 136–140)
1951 Noah, Daniel und Hiob in Ezechiel 14 (VT 1 (1951) 251–260)
1951 Review: H. H. Rowley From Joseph to Joshua (VT 1 (1951) 74–80)
1951 Beiträge zur Geschichte des Ostjordanlandes III: Die Nachbarn der israelitischen
Stämme im Ostjordanland (ZDPV 68:1ff)
1953 in Alt Festschrift 152
1955/66 Das Deutsche Evangelische Institut für Altertumswiss. des Heiligen Landes.
Lehrkursus (1954: ZDPV 71 (1955) 1ff; 1955: ZDPV 72 (1956) 31ff; 1956: ZDPV 73 (1957) 1ff;
1965: ZDPV 82 (1966) 255ff)
1955 Der alttestamentliche Name der Siedlung auf Chirbet K\umraµn (ZDPV 71 (1955)
111ff)
1956 Der Jordan in der Geschichte Palästinas (ZDPV 72 (1956) 123ff)

1956 Remarks on the sixth volume of Mari studies (JSS 1 (1956) 322–333)
1958 Die Einnahme von Jerusalem im Jahre 597 v. Chr. (ZDPV 74 (1958) 133ff)
1959 Gilead und Gad (ZDPV 75 (1959) 14ff)
1959 Zur Anfertigung des “Goldenen Kalbes” (VT 9 (1959) 419–422)
1963 Samuel und Silo (VT 13 (1963) 390–400)
Nötscher, F.
1951 Entbehrliche Hapaxlegomena in Jesaia (VT 1 (1951) 299–302)
1952 Heisst kaµboµd auch “Seelee”? (VT 2 (1952) 358–362)
1953 Zum emphatischen Lamed (VT 3 (1953) 372–380)
1959 Himmlische Bücher und Schicksalsglaube in Qumran (RQ 1 (1959) 405–412)
1961 Bar Kochba, Ben Kosba: der Sternsohn, der Prächtige (VT 11 (1961) 449–451)
Nougayrol, J.
1956* see Cazelles
1959* see Cazelles
Nyberg, H. S.
1934 Das textkritische Problem des Alten Testaments, am Hoseabuche demonstriert (
ZAW 52 (1934) 241–253)
1935 Deuteronomion 33: 2–3 (ZDMG 92:320–344)
1938 Studien zum Religionskampf im Alten Testament (ARw. 35 (1938) 329–387)
O’Callaghan, R. T.
1954 Echoes of Canaanite literature in the Psalms (VT 4 (1954) 164–176)
Odil, Hannes Steck.
1975 Der Schöpfungsbericht der Priesterschrift (FRLANT 115 (1975) 67)
Oldenburg, U.
1970 Above the stars of El (ZAW 82 (1970) 187–208)
Olmo Lete, G. del.
1975/82 Notes on Ugaritic Semantics (I: UF 7 (1975) 89–102; V: UF 14 (1982) 55–70)
1984 David’s farewell oracle (2 Samuel 23: 1–7): a literary analysis (VT 34 (1984)
414–437)
Olmstead, A. T.
1932 A Persian letter in Thucydides (AJSL 49 (1932/33) 160)
1944 Tattenai, Governor of “Across the River” (JNES 3: 46)
Opitz, Dietrich.
1932 Der Bär bei den Babyloniern und bei Berossos (AfO 8 (1932–33) 45–50, with 1
illustration)
Oppenheim, Leo A.
1941 Idomatic Accadian (JAOS 61 (1941) 251–271)
1946 Assyriological notes to the Old Testament (JQR 37:75–176)
1946 Assyriological gleanings IV. (BASOR 103 (1946) 11–13)
1949 The golden garments of the gods (JNES 8 (1949) 172–193)
Orlinsky, Harry M.
1939 H\aµs\eµr in the Old Testament (JAOS 59 (1939) 22–37)

1951 Photography and paleography in the textual criticism of St. Mark’s Isaiah scroll, 43:
19 (BASOR 123 (1951) 33)
1957 Madhebah in Isaiah 14: 4 (VT 7 (1957) 202–203)
1959 Qumran and the present state of Old Testament text studies: the Septuagint text (
78 (1959) 26–33)
Osten-Sacken, P. von der.
1979 Die Bücher der Tora als Hütte der Gemeinde: Amos 5: 26f in der Damaskusschrift (
ZAW 91 (1979) 423–435)
Otto, Eckart.
1976 Silo und Jerusalem (ThZ 32 (1976) 65–77)
1977 Die Stellung der Wehe-Worte in der Verkündigung des Propheten Habakuk (
89 (1977) 73–106)
1978 Survey-archäologische Ergebnisse zur Geschichte der früheisenzeitlichen Siedlung
Janoah (Jos. 16: 6, 7) (ZDPV 94 (1978) 108–118)
1980 El und Jhwh in Jerusalem. Historische und theologische Aspekte
Religionsintegration (VT 30 (1980) 316–329)
Otzen, B.
1970 Noch einmal das Wort trkb auf einem Arad-ostracon (VT 20 (1970) 239–242)
Ouellette, Jean.
1972 The Yaµs\éÆa> and the S\elaµ>oµt: two mysterious structures in Solomon’s temple (
(1972) 187)
Palache, J. L.
1913 Über das Weinen in der jüdischen Religion (ZDMG 70:251–256)
Pardee, Dennis G.
1973 A note on the root >tq in CTA 16 I 2,5 (UT 125, KRT II) (UF 5 (1973) 229–234)
1975/76 The preposition in Ugaritic (Part I: UF 7 (1975) 329–378; Part II: UF 8 (1976)
215–322)
1977 A new Ugaritic letter (BiOr. 34 (1977) 3–20)
1977 Attestations of Ugaritic verb/preposition combinations in later dialects (UF
205–232)
1978 Letters from Tel Arad (UF 10 (1978) 289–336)
1978 yph\ “witness” in Hebrew and Ugaritic (VT 28 (1978) 204–213)
1979 meroÆraŒt-petanéÆm “venom” in Job 20: 14 (ZAW 91 (1979) 401–415)
Paret, R.
1941 in Handwo¬rterbuch des Islam (Leiden, 1941), 762f
1971 Der Koran: Kommentar und Übersetzung
Parker, Simon B.
1972 The Ugaritic deity Raµpi<u (UF 4 (1972) 97–104)
1976 The marriage blessing in Israelite and Ugaritic literature (JBL 95 (1976) 23–30)
1978 Possessions, trance and prophecy in pre-exilic Israel (VT 28 (1978) 271–285)
Parpola, S.
1970 Neo-Assyrian toponyms (AOAT 6 (1970) 297)
Passow, F.
1857 Handwörterbuch der griech. Sprache (5th. edition, Leipzig)
Patrick, D.
1976 The translation of Job 42: 6 (VT 26 (1976) 369–371)
Paul, Shalom M.
1970 Studies in the Book of the Covenant in the light of cuneiform and Biblical law (
VTSupp. 18 (1970))
1978 Fishing imagery in Amos 4: 2 (JBL 97 (1978) 183–190)
1979 Unrecognized Biblical legal idioms in the light of comparative Akkadian
expressions (RB 86 (1979) 231–239)
Payne, D. F.
1967 Characteristic word-play in “Second Isaiah”: a reappraisal (JSS 12 (1967) 207–229)
Pelletier, P.
1972 Sabbata: transcription grècque de l’araméen (VT 22 (1972) 436–447)
Pelzl, Bernhard.
1975 Philologisches zu Esra 8: 27 (ZAW 87 (1975) 221–223)
Perath, M.J.
1955 Review: N. Avigad mas\s\eÆbhoÆth qeÆdhuÆmoÆth beŒ-nahal QidhroÆn (Ancient monuments
in the Kidron valley) (BiOr. 12 (1955) 193–194)
Perles, Felix.
1912 Review: A. E. Cowley The Samaritan liturgy (OLZ 15 (1912) 218)
1914 Eflimmu im AT und im Talmud (OLZ 17 (1914) 108–109)
1925 Ergänzungen zu den “Akkadischen Fremdwörtern” (OLZ 21 (1925) 65–71)
1927 Übersehenes akkadisches Sprachgut im Alten Testament (AfO 4 (1927) 218–220)
1927 Correction (JQR 18 (1927–28) 57–58)
Péter, R.
1975 rp et rw, note de lexicographie hébraïque (VT 25 (1975) 486–496)
1977 L’imposition des mains dans l’Ancien Testament (VT 27 (1977) 48–55)
Peters, C.
1942 Zur semitischen Nominalform qutullaµÕ (OLZ 45 (1942) 274–344)
Petersen, D. L.
1976 The Yahwist on the flood (VT 26 (1976) 438–446)
Pettinato, Giovanni.
1976 The royal archives of Tell-Mardikh-Ebla (BA 39 (1976) 44–55)
1977 see Dahood +
Petuchowski, J. J.
1957 A note on W. Kessler’s Problematik des Dekalogs (VT 7 (1957) 397–398)
Pfeifer, Gerhard.
1972 Entwöhnung und Entwöhnungsfest im Alten Testament: der Schlüssel zu Jesaja 28:
7–13? (ZAW 84 (1972) 341–347)
1976 Denkformenanalyse als exegetische Methode, erläutert an Amos 1: 2–2: 16 (
88 (1976) 56–71)
Pfeiffer, E.
1959 Glaube im Alten Testament (ZAW 71 (1959) 151–164)
Pfeiffer, R. H.
1926 Edomitic wisdom (ZAW 44 (1926) 13–25)
1955 The fear of God (IEJ 5:48–51)
Pfister, R.
1974 Kirchengeschichte der Schweiz, vol. 2
Phillips, A.
1966 The interpretation of 2 Samuel 12: 5–6 (VT 16 (1966) 242–244)
1973 Some aspects of family law in pre-exilic Israel (VT 23 (1973) 349–361)
Plataroti, D.
1978 Zum Gebrauch des Wortes mlk im Alten Testament (VT 28 (1978) 286–300)
Plautz, W.
1962 Zur Frage des Muttersrechts im Alten Testament (ZAW 74 (1962) 9–30)
1963 Monogamie und Polygynie im Alten Testament (ZAW 75 (1963) 3–26)
1964 Die Form der Eheschliessung im Alten Testament (ZAW 76 (1964) 298–318)
Ploeg, J. van der.
1946 Le sens du verbe hébreu arb baµraµÕ, étude sémasiologique (Muséon 59 (1946)
143–161)
1950 Les chefs du peuple d’Israel et leurs titres (RB 57 (1950) 42–61)
1950 Studies in Hebrew law. I. The terms; II. The style of the laws (CBQ 12 (1950)
248–259)
1953 Prov. 25: 23 (VT 3 (1953) 189–192)
1954 Les sûoµt\eréÆm d’Israël (OTSt. 10 (1954) 185–196)
1971 Slavery in the Old Testament (VTSupp. 22 (1971) 72–87)
Poebel, A.
1930 Sumerische Untersuchungen IV (ZA 39 (1930) 129–164)
1942 The Assyrian king list from Khorsabad (JNES 1 (1942) 247–306)
Pope, Marvin H.
1951 Ugaritic enclitic -m (JCS 5 (1951) 123–128)
1953 “Pleonastic” waµw before nouns in Ugaritic and Hebrew (JAOS 73 (1953) 95–98)
1955 El in the Ugaritic texts (VTSupp. 2 (1955))
1960 Review: J. Gray The Legacy of Canaan (JSS 11 (1960) 228)
1964 The word sûah\at tj in Job 9: 31 (JBL 83 (1964) 269–278)
1979 Ups and downs in El’s amours (UF 11 (1979) 701–708)
+ Tigay, J. H. A.
1971 Description of Baal (UF 3 (1971) 117–130)
Porten, Bezalel.
1968 Archives from Elephantine ((1968) 144f)
1971 Domla<el and related names (IEJ 21 (1971) 47–49)
Posener, G.
1973 Une liste de noms propres étrangers sur deux ostraca hiératiques du Nouvel Empire
(Syria 18 (1973) 183–197)

Press, R.
1933 Das Ordal im Alten Israel. II. (ZAW 51 (1933) 227–254)
1955 Der Gottesknecht im Alten Testament (ZAW 67 (1955) 67–98)
Preuschen, E.
1895 Die Bedeutung von twbv bwv im Alten Testament: eine alte Controverse (
(1895) 1ff)
Preuss, H.-D.
1959 Die Psalmenüberschriften in Targum und Midrasch (ZAW 71 (1959) 44–54)
1968 “… ich will mit dir sein” (ZAW 80 (1968) 139–173)
1971 Verspottung fremder Religionen im Alten Testament (BWANT 92 (1971) 58)
Priebatsch, H. Y.
1975 Jerusalem und die Brunnenstrasse Merneptahs (ZDPV 91 (1975) 18–29)
1977 Die amoritische Sprache Palästinas in ihren Beziehungen zu Mari und Syrien (
(1977) 249–258)
Priest, John F.
1962 mebaqqer paqid and the Messiah (JBL 81 (1962) 55–61)
Prignaud, J.
1964 Caftorim et Kerétim (RB 71 (1964) 215–229)
1964 Un sceau hébreu de Jérusalem et un ketib du livre d’Esdras (RB 71 (1964) 372–383)
Prijs, J.
1960 Ergänzungen zum talmudisch-aramäischen Wörterbuch (ZDMG 117:266–286)
1957 Über Ben Naftali-Bibelhandschriften und ihre paläographischen Besonderheiten (
ZAW 69 (1957) 171–184)
Pritchard, James B.
1959 Gibeon’s history in the light of excavation (VTSupp. 7 (1959) 1–12)
1960 More inscribed jar handles from el-JéÆb (BASOR 160 (1960) 2–5)
Procksch, O.
1942 Gat (ZDPV 66:174ff)
Puech, E.
1971 Sur la racine s\lh\ en hébreu et en araméen (Semitica 21 (1971) 5–20)
Puhvel, Jaan.
1954 Semitic affinities of Hittite hÉar-asû-zi (JAOS 74 (1954) 86–91)
Rabin, C.
1946 BA÷RIAH\ (JTS 47 (1946) 38–40)
1955 Notes on the Habakkuk scroll and the Zadokite documents (VT 5 (1955) 148–162)
1961 Etymological miscellanea (ScrHier. 8 (1961) 384ff)
1963 Hittite words in Hebrew (Orientalia 32 (1963) 113–139)
1966 Nos\erim (Textus 5 (1966) 44–52)
1966 Rice in the Bible (JSS 11:2–9)
Rabinowitz, Isaac.
1956 Aramaic inscriptions of the fifth century B.C.E. from a North-Arab shrine in Egypt (
JNES 159 (1956) 1–17)
1956 The meaning of anZwm l[ btt in the Aramaic papyri (VT 6 (1956) 104)
1959 Exodus 22: 4 and the Septuagint version thereof (VT 9 (1959) 40–46)
1959 A note to the Genesis Apocryphon (JSS 3:55–57)
1961 The Susa tablets, the Bible and the Aramaic papyri (VT 11 (1961) 55–76)
1964 The alleged orphism of 11 Q Pss 28 3–12 (ZAW 76 (1964) 193–199)
1973 peÆsher/pittaÆroÆn: its Biblical meaning and its significance in the Qumran literature (
RQ 8 (1973) 219–232)
Rabinowitz, Jacob J.
1955 A clue to the Nabatean contract from the Dead Sea region (BASOR 139 (1955)
11–13)
1954 A note on Isaiah 46: 4 (JBL 73 (1954) 237)
Rad, Gerhard von.
1959 The origin of the concept of the day of Yahweh (JSS 4:97–126)
1967 µylpk in Jes. 40 2 = Äquivalent? (ZAW 79 (1967) 80–82)
Rainey, A. F.
1970 Compulsory labour gangs in ancient Israel (IEJ 20 (1970) 192–202)
1971 Observations on Ugaritic grammar (UF 3 (1971) 151–172)
1973 Reflections on the suffix conjugation in West-Semitized Amarna tablets (
(1973) 235–262)
1974 El->Amârna notes (UF 6 (1974) 295–312)
Ranke, H.
1923 Keilschriftliches (ZAS 58 (1923) 132–138)
Raymond, Ph.
1957 Un tesson pour “ramasser” de l’eau à la mare (Esaie 33: 14) (VT 7 (1957) 203–207)
Redford, D. B.
1963 Exodus 1: 11 (VT 13 (1963) 401)
1965 The “land of the Hebrews” in Gen. 40: 15 (VT 15 (1965) 529–532)
1970 A study of the Biblical story of Joseph (Genesis 37–50) (VTSupp. 20 (1970))
Reid, Patrick V.
1975 sûbt\y in 2 Samuel 7: 7 (CBQ 37 (1975) 17–20 )
Reider, J.
1952–53 Contributions to the scriptural text (HUCA 24:85–106)
1952/54 Etymological studies in Biblical Hebrew ([I:] VT 2 (1952) 113–130; [II:]
(1954) 276–295)
Reif, S. C.
1971 What enraged Phineas? A study of Numbers 25: 8 (JBL 90 (1971) 200–205)
1972 Dedicated to hnk (VT 22 (1972) 495–501)
Reiss, W.
1940 “Gott nicht kennen” im Alten Testament (ZAW 58 (1940/41) 70–98)
Reiser, Werner.
1960 Die Verwandtschaftsformel in Gen. 2: 23 (ThZ 16 (1960) 1–4)
Rendtorff, Rolf.
1954 Zum Gebrauch der Formel ne< um jahwe im Jeremiabuch (ZAW 66 (1954) 27–36)
1962 Botenformel und botenspruch (ZAW 74 (1962) 165–176)
1966 El, Ba>al und Jahwe: Erwägungen zum Verhältnis von kanaanäischer und
israelitischer Religion (ZAW 78 (1966) 277–291)
1967 Studien zur Geschichte des Opfers im Alten Israel (WMANT 24 (1967) 74–76)
1984 Esra und das “Gesetz” (ZAW 96 (1984) 171)
Rhodokanakis, Nikolaus.
1936 Zur Interpretation altsüdarabischer Inschriften (WZKM 43 (1936) 21–76)
Richardson, H. Neal.
1955 Some notes on Åyl and its derivatives (VT 5 (1955) 163–179)
1971 The last words of David: some notes on 2 Samuel 23: 1–7 (JBL 90 (1971) 257–266)
1973 skt (Amos 9–11): “booth” or “succoth”? (JBL 92 (1973) 375–393)
Richter, G.
1914 Untersuchungen zu den Geschlechtsregistern der Chronik (ZAW 34 (1914) 107–141)
1932 Zu den Geschlechtsregistern I Chronik 2–9 (ZAW 50 (1932) 130–141)
Richter, H. F.
1986 Zur Urgeschichte des Jahwisten (BN 34 (1986) 39–57)
Richter, Wolfgang.
1965 Die naµgéÆd-Formel (BZ NF 9 (1965) 71–84)
1965 Zu den “Richtern Israels” (ZAW 77 (1965) 40–72)
1966 Traditionsgeschichtliche Untersuchungen zum Richterbuch (BBB 18, 2 (1966) 160)
1970 Die sogenannten vorprophetischen Berufungsberichte (FRLANT 101 (1970) 156ff)
Ridderbos, Nic. H.
1972 Die Psalmen. Stilistische Verfahren und Aufbau mit besonderer Berücksichtigung
von Ps. 1–41 (BZAW 117 (1972))
Riedel, W.
1900 Miscellen (ZAW 20 (1900) 315ff)
Rignell, L. G.
1956 Das Orakel maher-salal has-bas: Jesaja 8 (StTh. 10/1 (1956) 40–52)
1957 Das Immanuelszeichen: einige Gesichtspunkte zu Jes. 7 (StTh. 11/1 (1957) 99–119)
Rin, Svi.
1959 The twm of grandeur (VT 9 (1959) 324–325)
1963 Ugaritic-Old Testament affinities (BZ 7 (1963) 22–33)
Rinaldi, G.
1959 Alcuni termini ebraici relativi alla letteratura (Biblica 40:267–289)
Ritter, Helmut.
1955 Glossar
Robert, Ph. de.
1971 Juges ou tribus en 2 Samuel 7: 7? (VT 21 (1971) 116–118)
Roberts, J. J. M.
1975 nisûkah\téÆ … milleµb, Ps. 31: 13 (VT 25 (1975) 797–800)

Robertson, Edward.
1964 The <uµréÆm and tumméÆm: what were they? (VT 14 (1964) 67–74)
Robertson-Smith, T.W.
1886* see Nöldeke
Robinson, A.
1974 The meaning of réÆ and the dubiety of the form harreÆ and its variants (VT 24 (1974)
500–504)
1974 Three suggested interpretations in Ps. 84 (VT 24 (1974) 378)
1974 Zion and S\aµphoµn in Psalm 48: 3 (VT 24 (1974) 118–123)
1977 A possible solution to the problem of Psalm 74: 5 (ZAW 89 (1977) 120–121)
Robinson, G.
1980 The idea of rest in the Old Testament and the search for the basic character of
sabbath (ZAW 92 (1980) 32–42)
Robinson, Th. H.
1954 Die zwölf kleinen Propheten (HAT 14/2 (1954) 66)
1961 New light on the text and interpretation of the Old Testament supplied by recent
discoveries (ZAW 73 (1961) 265–268)
Robson, J.
1956 The transmission of NasaµÕéÆÕs sunan (JSS 1:38–62)
Röllig, Wolfgang.
1962 Review: Giovanni Garbini Il Semitco di Nord-Ovest (BiOr. 19 (1962) 23–26)
1964 Erwägungen zu neuen Stelen König Nabonids (ZA 56 (1964) 218–260)
1975 Der altmesopotamische Markt (WdO 8 (1975–76) 286–295)
+ Mansfeld, Günther.
1969 Zwei Ostraka vom Tell Kamid-el-Loz und ein neuer Aspekt für die Entstehung des
kanaanäischen Alphabets (WdO 5 (1969–70) 265–270)
Römer, Willem H. Ph.
1971 Frauenbriefe über Religion, Politik und Privatleben in Mari (AOAT 12 (1971) 93)
Rompay, van. L.
1975 (Orientalia Lovaniensia Periodica 6/7 (1975/6) 569–75)
Rose, Martin.
1975 Der Ausschliesslichkeitsanspruch Jahwes. Deuteronomische Schultheologie und die
Volksfrömmigkeit der späteren Königszeit (BWANT 108 (1975) 92)
1981 “Atheismus” als Wohlstandserscheinung? (Zephanja 1:12) (ThZ 37 (1981) 193–208)
1981 Deuteronomist und Jahwist: Untersuchungen zu den Berührungen beider
Literaturwerke (ATANT 67 (1981) 274)
Rösel, H. N.
1975/76 Studien zur Topographie der Kriege in den Büchern Josua und Richter (ZDPV
(1975) 159–190; Schluss: ZDPV 92 (1976) 10–46)
1977 Zur Ehud-Erzählung (ZAW 89 (1977) 270–272)
Rosén, H. B.
1959 Zur Vorgeschichte des Relativsatzes im Nordwestsemitischen (ArchOr. 27:186–198)

Rosenberg, H.
1905 Zum Geschlecht der hebräischen Hauptwörter (ZAW 25 (1905) 325ff)
Rosenthal, Franz.
1939 Die Parallelstellen in den Texten von Ugarit (Orientalia 8 (1939) 213–237)
1942 Al-Kindi als Literat (Orientalia 11 (1942) 262–296)
1950–51 s\edaÆk\aÆ charity (HUCA 23/1(1950/51) 411–430)
1960 Notes on the third Aramaic inscription from Sefîre-Sûjîn (BASOR 158 (1960)
28–30)
Ross, James F.
1970 Prophecy in Hamath, Israel, and Mari (HTR 63 (1970) 1–28)
Rössler, Otto.
1952 Der Semitische Charakter der libyschen Sprache (ZA 50 (1952) 121–150)
1961 Ghain im Ugaritischen (ZA 54 (1961) 158–172)
1962 Die Präfixkonjugation Qal der Verba primae nuÆn im Althebräischen und das
Problem der sogenannten Tempora (ZAW 74 (1962) 125–140)
Rost, L.
1942 Weidewechsel und altisraelitischer Festkalender (ZDPV 66: 205ff)
1936 Zu Jesaja 28: 1ff (ZAW 53 (1936) 292)
1938 Die Vorstufen von Kirche und Synagoge im Alten Testament (BWANT 76 (1938)
41f)
1967 Der Leberlappen (ZAW 79 (1967) 35–41)
Roth, W. M. W.
1960 nbl (VT 10 (1960) 394–409)
1968 A study of the classical Hebrew verb s\kl (VT 18 (1968) 69–78)
Rouillard, H. and Tropper, J.
1987 trpym, rituels de guérison et culte des ancêtres d’après 1 Samuel 19: 11–17 et les
textes parallèles d’Assur et de Nuzi (VT 37 (1987) 340–361)
Rowlands, E. R.
1959 The Targum and the Peshit\ta version of the book of Isaiah (VT 9 (1959) 178–199)
Rowley, Harold H.
1931 Daniel: the historicity of the fifth chapter of (JTS 32: 18)
1947 The marriage of Ruth (HTR 40 (1947) 77–100)
1948 The suffering servant and the Davidic Messiah (OTSt. 8:100–136)
1950 The meaning of sacrifice in the Old Testament (BJRL 33 (1950–51) 74–110)
1951* see Noth
1951 Moses and the Decalogue (BJRL 34 (1951/52) 1093)
1956 The Kittim and the Dead Sea Scrolls (PEQ 88 (1956) 92)
1957 Mose und der Monotheismus (ZAW 69 (1957) 1–20)
1960 Elijah on Mount Carmel (BJRL 43 (1960–61) 190–219)
Rowton, M. B.
1952 The date of the Hittite capture of Babylon (BASOR 126 (1952) 20–23)
Rostovtzeff.
1937* see Albright

Rubinstein, A. A.
1959 kethib-qere problem in the light of the Isaiah scroll (JSS 4 (1959) 127–133)
Rudolph, Kurt.
1954 Tekstkritisches zum Estherbuch (VT 4 (1954) 89–90)
1962* see von Soden
1963 Präparierte Jungfrauen? (ZAW 75 (1963) 65–72)
Rudolph, W.
1931 Obadja (ZAW 49 (1931) 222–231)
1942 Das hohe Lied im Kanon (ZAW 59 (1942/43) 189–198)
Rüger, Hans-Peter.
1968 Zum Problem der Sprache Jesu (ZNW 59 (1968) 113–122)
1969 ahawh-er: zur Deutung von 1Q S 8, 13–14 (ZNW 60 (1969) 142–144)
1969 Zu RS 24.258 (UF 1 (1969) 203–206)
1969 Zum Text von Prov. 31: 30 (WdO 5 (1969–70) 96–99)
1970 Zum Text von Sir. 40: 10 und Ex. 10:21 (ZAW 82 (1970) 103–109)
Rundgren, Frithiof.
1953 Zum Lexicon des Alten Testaments (ActOr. 21 (1953) 301–336)
1955 Parallelen zu Akk. sûineµpuµm “2/3” (JCS 9 (1955) 29–30)
1958 Über einen juristischen Terminus bei Esra 6: 6 (ZAW 70 (1958) 209–214)
1961 Semitische Wortstudien (OrSuec. 10 (1961) 99–136)
1962 ÷wyrpa “Tragsessel, Sänfte” (ZAW 74 (1962) 70–71)
1963 Ein iranischer Beamtenname in Aramäischen (OrSuec. 12 (1963) 89–98)
1963 Hebräisch ba¬s\a¬r “Golderz” und Õaµmar “sagen”: zwei Etymologien (Orientalia 32
(1963) 178–183)
Ruppert, L.
1972 Das Motiv der Versuchung durch Gott in vordeuteronomischer Tradition (
(1972) 55–63)
Ruprecht, E.
1974 Stellung und Bedeutung der Erzählung vom Mannawunder (Ex. 16) im Aufbau der
Priesterschrift (ZAW 86 (1974) 269–306)
Rupprecht, Konrad.
1970 Årah ÷m hl[ (Ex. 1: 10, Hos. 2: 2): “sich des Landes bemächtigen”? (ZAW
(1970) 442–447)
1972 Nachrichten von Erweiterung und Renovierung des Tempels in 1. Könige 6 (
88 (1972) 38–52)
Rüterswörden, U.
1977 see Ebach +
Rüthy, Albert E.
1957 “Sieben Augen auf einem Stein”: Sach. 3: 9 (ThZ 13 (1957) 523–529)
Ryckmans, G.
1947 Le sacrifice DBH\ dans les inscriptions s\afaïtiques (HUCA 23/1:431–438)
1953* see Albright
1958 Notes épigraphiques (cinquième série) (Muséon 71 ( 1958) 125–148)
Saarisalo, Aapeli.
1929/30 Topographical researches in Galilee ([1.] JPOS 9 (1929) 27–40; [2.] JPOS
5–10)
Sabottka, L. Z.
1972 Versuch einer Neuübersetzung mit philologischem Kommentar (Biblica et
Orientalia Nr. 25, (1972) 49)
1973* see Gerleman
Sack, R. H.
1978 Nergal-sûarra-us\ur, King of Babylon, as seen in the cuneiform, Greek, Latin and
Hebrew sources (ZA 68 (1978) 129–149)
Saebö, M.
1964 Zur Traditionsgeschichte von Jesaia 8: 9–10 (ZAW 76 (1964) 132–143)
1968 Eine Bemerkenswerte Kennicott-Variante in Sacharja 9: 17 (ZAW 80 (1968)
235–237)
1974 Grenzbeschreibung und Landideal im Alten Testament: mit besonderer
Berücksichtigung der min->ad-Formel (ZDPV 90 (1974) 14–37)
Saggs, H. W. F.
1974 “External souls” in the Old Testament (JSS 19 (1974) 1–12)
Salo, Vello.
1968 “Joseph, Sohn der Färse” (BZ (NF) 12 (1968) 94–95)
Salonen, Armas.
1950 Akkadian lexicography (Orientalia 19 (1950) 404–407)
1959/70 Review: Wolfram von Soden Akkadisches Handwo¬rterbuch (Lfg. 1/2: AfO
(1959–60) 156–159; Lfg. 3–5: AfO 21 (1966) 96–97; Lfg. 8: AfO 23 (1970) 95–96)
1967 Die Gruss- und Höflichkeitsformeln in den babylonisch-assyrischen Briefen (
38 (1967) 105f)
Salters, R. B.
1976 A note on the exegesis of Ecclesiastes 3: 15b (ZAW 88 (1976) 419–421)
1977 Text and exegesis in Koh. 10: 19 (ZAW 89 (1977) 423–426)
1979 Notes on the interpretation of Qoh. 6:2 (ZAW 91 (1979) 282–289)
Sðanda, A.
1931 Review: Paul Heinisch Das Buch Genesis (AfO 7 (1931–32) 287–288)
Sander, O.
1965 Leib-Seele: Dualismus im Alten Testament? (ZAW 77 (1965) 329–332)
Sanders, J. A.
1964 Two non-canonical psalms in 11 QPsa (ZAW 76 (1964) 57–74)
1965 The psalms scroll of Qumrân cave 11 (DJD 4 (1965))
Sandmel, S.
1957 Genesis 4: 26b (HUCA 32:19–30)
Sanmartín, J.
1974/76 see above, Dietrich and Loretz and Sanmartín

1978 Lexikographisches zu ug. >tq (KTU 1.16 I 2–5;15–19; II 38–42) (UF 10 (1978)
453–454)
1979 Glossen zum ugaritischen Lexikon (III) (UF 11 (1979) 723–728)
1980 Die Haartracht der >nt (UF 12 (1980) 341–344)
San Nicolò, M.
1927 Vorderasiatisches Rechtsgut in den ägyptischen Eheverträgen der Perserzeit (
30 (1927) 217–220)
Sapir, E.
1937 Hebrew “helmet”: a loan-word, and its bearing on Indo-European phonology (
57 (1937) 73–77)
Saracino, Francesco.
1983 A state of siege: Mi. 5: 4–5 and an Ugaritic prayer (ZAW 96 (1983) 263–269)
Sarauw, Chr.
1907 Der hebräische Lokativ (ZA 20 (1907) 183–189)
Sarna, Nahum M.
1957 Epic substratum in the prose of Job (JBL 76 (1957) 16–25)
1959 The interchange of the prepositions beth and min in Biblical Hebrew (JBL
310–321)
1963 The mythological background of Job 18 (JBL 82 (1963) 315–318)
1964 Ezekiel 8: 17: a fresh examination (HTR 57 (1964) 347–352)
Sarsowsky, A.
1912 Notizen zu einigen biblischen geographischen und ethnographischen Namen (
32 (1912) 146–151)
Sasson, Jack M.
1966 Canaanite maritime involvement in the 2nd millennium BC (JAOS 86 (1966)
126–137)
1968 Bovine symbolism in the Exodus narrative (VT 18 (1968) 380–387)
1972 A note on sûarbéÆt (VT 22 (1972) 111)
Sasson, V.
1974 Håurrians and Håurrian names in the Mari texts (UF 6 (1974), 351–400)
1980 The word trkb in the Arad ostracon (VT 30 (1980) 44–52)
1982 Ugaritic t\> and g÷zr and Hebrew sûoÆwa> and >oµzeµr (UF 14 (1982) 201–208)
1985 The book of oracular visions of Balaam from Deir >Alla (UF 17 (1985) 283–309)
Sauer Georg.
1959 Bemerkungen zu 1965 edierten ugaritischen Texten (ZDMG 116:235–241)
1966 Mandelzweig und Kessel in Jer. 1: 11ff (ZAW 78 (1966) 56–60)
1969 Die Tafeln von Deir >Allaµ (ZAW 81 (1969) 145–155)
1970 Wort-Gebot-Glaube (ATANT 59 (1970) 286, Eichrodt Fschr.)
1978 Die Ugaritistik und die Psalmenforschung II (UF 10 (1978) 357–386)
Sauren, H.
1969 Untersuchungen zur Schrift- und Lautlehre der neusumerischen Urkunden aus
Nippur (ZA 59 (1969) 11–64)
Sauermann, P.
*1957 see von Soden
Savignac, J. de.
1953 Note sur le sens du terme sŒaphoÆn dans quelques passages de la Bible (VT
95–96)
1954 Note sur le sens du verset 8: 22 des Proverbes (VT 4 (1954) 429–432)
1962 La sagesse en Proverbes 8: 22–31 (VT 12 (1962) 211–215)
1972 Les “seraphim” (VT 22 (1972) 320–325)
Sawyer, J. F. A.
1976 A note on the etymology of s\aµra>at (VT 26 (1976) 241–245)
1978 A note on the brooding partridge in Jeremiah 17: 11 (VT 28 (1978) 324–329)
Schaeffer, Claude F.-A.
1951 Reprises des recherches archéologiques à Ras Shamra-Ugarit: sondages de 1948 et
1949, et campagne de 1950 (Pl. I-IV) (Syria 28 (1951) 1–56)
Schaeder, Hans Heinrich.
1938 Der iranische Zeitgott und sein Mythos (ZDMG 95:268–299)
1938 Eine verkannte aramäische Präposition (OLZ 41 (1938) 593)
1941 Der iranische Zeitgott und sein Mythos (ZDMG 95 (1941) 269f)
1942 Beiträge zur mitteliranischen Schrift- und Sprachgeschichte (ZDMG 96 (1942) 1)
1947 Die Kantäer (WdO 1 (1947–52) 288–298)
Schaeffer, C. F. L.
1956* see Cazelles
1969* see Cazelles
Scharbert, Josef.
1957 Formgeschichte und Exegese von Ex. 34: 6f und seiner Parallelen (Biblica
(1957) 130–150)
1960 Das Verbum PQD in der Theologie des Alten Testaments. (BZ NF 4 (1960)
209–226)
1967 (SBS 19 (1967) 22)
Schedl, C.
1962 hnkt >bnt auf neupunischen Grabinschriften (VT 12 (1962) 343–345)
1962 Nochmals das Jahr der Zerstörung Jerusalems, 587 oder 586 v. Chr. (ZAW
(1962) 209–212)
1964 Die “Heiligen” und die “Herrlichen” in Psalm 16 :1–4 (ZAW 76 (1964) 171–175)
Scheiber, A.
1961 Zwei Bemerkungen zu Jesaja 3: 15; 21: 12) (VT 11 (1961) 455–456)
Schelbert, G.
1958 Exodus 22: 4 im palästinischen Targum (VT 8 (1958) 253–263)
Schickelberger, F.
1973 Die Ladeerzählungen des ersten Samuel-Buches (Forschungen zur Bibel 7 (1973)
75f)
Schiemann, R.
1967 Covenanting with the princes: Neh. 6: 2 (VT 17 (1967) 367–369)
Schild, E.
1954 On Exodus 3: 14: “I am that I am” (VT 4 (1954) 296–302)
Schill, S.
1891 Zu 2 Sam. 12: 6 (ZAW 11 (1891) 318)
Schlumberger, D., see Ingholt and Starcky
Schmid, Herbert.
1955 Jahwe und die Kulttraditionen von Jerusalem (ZAW 67 (1955) 168–197)
1968 Mose: Überlieferung und Geschichte (BZAW 110 (1968))
1977 Gottlose und Gottlosigkeit um Alten Testament (Judaica 33 (1977) 75)
Schmid, Rudolf.
1979 Opfer mit Jubel: die zibh\eµ teruµ>aµ von Ps. 27: 6 (ThZ 35 (1979) 48–54)
Schmidt, Ludwig.
1970 Menschlicher Erfolg und Jahwes Initiative (WMANT 38 (1970) 6f)
1976 “De Deo”: Studien zur Literaturkritik und Theologie des Buches Jona, des
Gesprächs zwischen Abraham und Jahwe in Gen. 18:22ff. und von Hi. 1 (BZAW 143 (1976))
Schmidt, Werner H.
1961 Königtum Gottes in Ugarit und Israel: zur Herkunft der Königsprädikation Jahwes (
BZAW 80 (1961))
1962 Ein “Haus Omris” bei Samaria? (ZDPV 78 (1962) 30ff)
1962 Wo hat die Aussage: Jahwe “der Heilige” ihren Ursprung? (ZAW 74 (1962) 62–65)
1963 ÷kvm als Ausdruck Jerusalemer Kultursprache (ZAW 75 (1963) 91–92)
1967 Die Schöpfungsgeschichte der Priesterschrift (WMANT 17 2 (1967) 78ff; also 122)
1971 Überlieferungsgeschichtliche Erwägungen zur Komposition des Dekalogs (
22 (1971) 201–220)
Schmitt, Armin.
1974 Interpretation der Genesis aus hellenistischem Geist (ZAW 86 (1974) 137–163)
Schmitt, G.
1970 Du sollst keinen Frieden schliessen mit den Bewohnern des Landes (BWANT
(1970) 93)
1973 Zu Gen. 26: 1–14 (ZAW 85 (1973) 143–155)
1974 El Berit—Mitra (ZAW 76 (1974) 325–326)
Schmitt, R.
1975 (OBO 7 (1975) 25)
Schmökel, H.
1952 Zur kultischen Deutung des Hohenliedes (ZAW 64 (1952) 148–155)
Schnutenhaus, F.
1964 Das Kommen und Erscheinen Gottes im Alten Testament (ZAW 76 (1964) 1–21)
Schoors, A.
1971 Two notes on Isaiah 40–55: Is. 40: 20 and 54: 4 (VT 21 (1971) 501–505)
Schottroff, W.
1961 Gedenken in alten Orient und in AT
1966 Horonaim, Nimrim, Luhith und der Westrand des “Landes Ataroth” (ZDPV
(1966) 163ff)
1969 Der israelitische Fluchspruch (WMANT 30 (1969) 212)
1970 Das Weinberglied Jesajas (Jes. 5 1–7) (ZAW 82 (1970) 68–90)
Schott, Albert.
1927 Review: Knut Tallqvist Die vergleiche in den akkadischen Ko¬nigsinschriften
WZKM 34 (1927) 146)
Schott, Siegfried.
1957 Wörter für Rollsiegel und Ring (WZKM 54 (1957) 177–185)
Schreiner, S.
1979 Mischehen-Ehebruch-Ehescheidung: Betrachtungen zu Mal. 2: 10–16 (ZAW
(1979) 207–228)
Schroeder, O.
1915 Zu Berliners Amarnatexten (OLZ 18 (1915) 293–295)
Schroer.
1987 In Israel gab es Bilder (OBO 74 (1987) 171)
Schult, H.
1965 Ein inschriftlicher Beleg für “Plethi”? (ZDPV 81 (1965) 74ff)
1971 Marginalie zum “Stab des Brotes” (ZDPV 87 (1971) 206–208)
Schulthess, Friedr.
1902 Miscellen zum Biblisch-Aramäischen (ZAW 22 (1902) 162ff)
1905/12 Aramäisches (ZA 19 (1905/06) 126–174; ZA 25 (1911) 287–297; ZA 27 (1912)
230–308)
1910 Zwei etymologische Versuche (ZAW 30 (1910) 61–63)
1922 ZNW 21 (1922) 245
1924 Miszellen (ZS 2 (1924) 14–18)
Schulz, A.
1934 Eli>ezer? (ZAW 52 (1934) 274–278)
1942 Drei Anmerkungen zur Genesis (ZAW 59 (1942/43) 184–188)
Schulz, Hermann.
1969 Das Todesrecht im Alten Testament. Studien zur Rechtsform der
Mot—Jumat—Sätze (BZAW 114 (1969))
1973 Das Buch Nahum: eine redaktionskritische Untersuchung (BZAW 129 (1973))
Schunck, K. D.
1956 Erwägungen zur Geschichte und Bedeutung von Mahanaim (ZDMG 113:34–40)
1961 Ophra, Ephron und Ephraim (VT 11 (1961) 188–200)
1962 Bemerkungen zur Ortsliste von Benjamin (Jos. 18: 21–28) (ZDPV 78 (1962) 143ff)
1966 Jes. 30 6–8 und die Deutung der Rahab im Alten Testament (ZAW 78 (1966) 48–55)
Schüngel, P. H.
1978 Noch einmal zu rwrap axbq Jo. 2: 6 und Nah. 2: 11 (BN 7 (1978) 29–31)
Schüngel, H. and Straumann.
1973 Der Dekalog: Gottes Gebote? (SBS 67 (1973) 63)
Schwally, Friedrich.
1893 Idioticon des christlich palästinischen Aramäisch

1898 Über einige palästinische Völkernamen (ZAW 18 (1898) 126–148)
1898/99 Lexikalische Studien (ZDMG 52 (1898) 132–148; Nachträge: ZDMG 53 (1899:197-
201)
Schwantes, Milton.
1977 Das Recht der Armen (BET 4 (1977))
Schwantes, Siegfried J.
1964 Critical notes on Micah 1: 10–16 (VT 14 (1964) 454–461)
1967 A note on Amos 4: 2b (ZAW 79 (1967) 82–83)
Schwarz, Günther.
1972 “… sieht er … wird er satt …”? (ZAW 84 (1972) 356–357)
1974 “… zugunsten der Lebenden an die Toten”? (ZAW 86 (1974) 218–219)
Scott, J. M.
1985 A new approach to Habakkuk 2: 4–5a (VT 35 (1985) 330)
Scott, R. B. Y.
1949 Secondary meanings of rja, after, behind (JTS 50 (1949) 178)
1952 Meteorological phenomena and terminology in the Old Testament (ZAW
11–25)
1958 The Hebrew cubit (JBL 77 (1958) 205)
1959 A kingdom of priests (Exodus 19: 6) (OTSt. 8:213–219)
1959 Weights and measures of the Bible (BA 22:22–40)
1960 Wisdom in creation: the <aµmoÆn of Proverbs 8: 30 (VT 10 (1960) 213–223)
1964 The seal of Sðmryw (VT 14 (1964) 108–110)
Scullion, John J.
1971 s\edeq—s\edaqah in Isaiah chapters 40–66 with special reference to the continuity in
meaning between Second and Third Isaiah (UF 3 (1971) 335–348)
1972 Some difficult texts in Isaiah chapters 56–66 in the light of modern scholarship (
4 (1972) 105–128)
Seebass, Horst.
1963 Gen. 15: 2b (ZAW 75 (1963) 317–319)
1964 Ephraim in 2 Sam. 13: 23 (VT 14 (1964) 497–500)
1965 Der Ort Elam in der südlichen Wüste und die Überlieferung von Gen. 14 (
(1965) 389–394)
1966 I Sam. 15 als Schlüssel für das Verständnis der sogenannten königsfreundlichen
Reihe I Sam. 9: 1–10: 16, 11: 1–15 und 13: 2–14: 52 (ZAW 78 (1966) 148–178)
1966 Zum Text von 1 Sam. 14: 23b-25a und 2: 29, 31–33 (VT 16 (1966) 74–82)
1967 Die Verwerfung Jerobeams I und Salomos durch die Prophetie des Ahia von Silo (
WdO 4 (1967–68) 163–182)
1967 Die Vorgeschichte der Königserhebung Sauls (ZAW 79 (1967) 155–171)
1975 Tradition und Interpretation bei Jehu ben Chanani und Ahia von Silo (VT
175–190)
1978 Erwägungen zum altisraelitischen System der zwölf Stämme (ZAW 90 (1978)
196–219)
1984 Die Stämmesprüche in Gen. 49: 3–27 (ZAW 96 (1984) 333–350)
1984 Zur Exegese der Grenzbeschreibungen von Jos. 16:1–17,13 (ZDPV 100 (1984)
70–83)
Seeligmann, Isaac Leo.

1949 Review: E. L. Sukenik, MegilloÆth GenuzoÆth: scrolls found hidden in an ancient
storage-place in the desert of Judea (BiOr. 6 (1949) 1–8)
1953 Voraussetzungen der Midraschexegese (VTSupp. 1 (1953) 150–181)
1961 Indications of editorial alteration and adaptation in the Massoretic text and the
Septuagint (VT 11 (1961) 201–221)
1962 Hebräische Erzählung und biblische Geschichts-schreibung (ThZ 18 (1962)
305–325)
1963 Menschliches Heldentum und göttliche Hilfe: die doppelte Kausalität im
alttestamentlichen Geschichtsdenken (ThZ 19 (1963) 385–411)
1964 A psalm from pre-regal times (VT 14 (1964) 75–92)
Segal, J. B.
1962 yrh\ in the Gezer “Calendar” (JSS 7:212–221)
Segert, S.
1953/55 Zur Habakuk-Rolle aus dem funde vom Toten Meer (I: ArchOr. 21 (1953) 218–239;
II, III: ArchOr. 22 (1954) 444–459; IV, V, VI: ArchOr. 23 (1955) 178–183; 575–619)
1955 Aramäische Studien. I. Die neuen Editionen von Brooklyn Papyri und Ar
Briefe in ihrer Bedeutung für die Bibelwissenschaft (ArchOr. 24 (1956) 383–403)
1962 Zur Etymologir von lappéÆd “Fackel” (ZAW 74 (1962) 323)
1970 Die Sprache der moabitischen Königinschritt (ArchOr. 29:197–267)
1970 Semitistische Marginalien (ArchOr. 29:80–118)
Sehmsdorf, E.
1972 Studien zur Redaktiongeschichte von Jesaja 56–66 (I. Jes. 65 16b-25 66 1–4 56 18) (
ZAW 84 (1972) 517–561)
Seidel, H.
1956–57 Horn und Trompete im Alten Israel Wissenschaftliche (Zeitschrift der Karl-Marx
Universität, Leipzig 6 (1956/57) 589–599)
Sekine, M.
1963 Vom Verstehen der Heilsgeschichte (ZAW 75 (1963) 145–154)
1972 Beobachtungen zu der josianischen Reform (VT 22 (1972) 361–368)
Sellers, O. R.
1936 Stages of Locust in Joel (AJSL 52:81–85)
Sellin, E.
1937 Noch einmal der alttestamentliche Efod (JPOS 17 (1937) 236–251)
Selms, Adrianus van.
1950 The best man and bride: from Sumer to St. John (JNES 9 (1950) 65–75)
1958 The Canaanites in the book of Genesis (OTSt. 12 (1958) 182–213)
1964 Judge Shamgar (VT 14 (1964) 294–309)
1970 Yammu’s dethronement by Baal: an attempt to reconstruct texts UT 129, 137 and 68
(UF 2 (1970) 251–268)
1971 CTA 32: a prophetic liturgy (UF 3 (1971) 235–248)
1973 Isaiah 28: 9–13: an attempt to give a new interpretation (ZAW 85 (1973) 332–338)
1975 A systematic approach to CTA 5: i: 1–8 (UF 7 (1975) 477–482)
1975 Guest-room for Ilu and its furniture: an interpretation of CTA 4, i: lines 30–44
(Gordon 51: i: 30–44) (UF 7 (1975) 469–476)
1979 The origin of the name Tyropoeon in Jerusalem (ZAW 91 (1979) 170–176)
1979 The root k-t\-r and its derivatives in Ugaritic literature (UF 11 (1979) 739–744)
Selmsdorf, E.
1972 Studien zur Redaktiongeschichte von Jesaja 56–66. (II. Jes. 66 17–24) (ZAW
(1972) 562–575)
Seybold, Klaus.
1972 Das davidische Königtum im Zeugnis der Propheten (FRLANT 107 (1972) 28)
1973 Das Gebet der Kranken im Alten Testament (BWANT 99 (1973) 151)
1974 Bilder zum Tempelbau. Die Visionen des Propheten Sacharia (SBS 70 (1974) 66f)
1974 Zwei Bemerkungen zu lmg / lwmg (VT 22 (1972) 112–117)
1976 Reverenz und Gebet. Erwägungen zu der Wendung h\illaµ panéÆm (ZAW 88 (1976)
2–16)
1977 Die anthropologischen Beiträge aus Jesaja 2 (ZThK 74 (1977) 401–415)
1979 Die Redaktion der Wallfahrtspsalmen (ZAW 91 (1979) 247–267)
1980 Psalm 58: ein Lösungsversuch (VT 30 (1980) 53–66)
1984 Psalm 104 im Spiegel seiner Unterschrift (ThZ 40 (1984) 1–11)
1985 Satirische Prophetie. Studien zum Buch Zefanja (SBS 120 (1985) 96)
Shaked, S., see Naveh +
Shea, William H.
1978 The Siran inscription: Amminadab’s drinking song (PEQ 110 (1978) 107–112)
Shiloh, Yigal.
1977 The Proto-aeolic capital: the Israelite “timorah” (palmette) capital (PEQ 109 (1977)
39–52)
Siegfried, D. C.
1884 Die Aussprache des Hebräischen bei Hieronymus (ZAW 4 (1884) 34ff)
Sierksma, F.
1951 Quelques remarques sur la circoncision en Israel (OTSt. 9 (1951) 136–169)
Simons, J.
1943 Topographical and archaeological elements in the story of Abimelech (OTSt.
(1943) 35–78)
1948 Two notes on the problem of the pentapolis (OTSt. 5 (1948) 92–117)
1961 The “table of nations” (Gen. 10): its general structure and meaning (OTSt.
184)
Sinclair, Lawrence A.
1960 An archaeological study of Gibeah (Tell el Fûl) (AASOR 34–35 (1960) 1–52)
Singer, A. D.
1945 The derivation of Hebrew lth (JQR 36 (1945–46) 239–260)
1948 Philological notes (JPOS 21 (1948) 104–109)
Sivan, D.
1982 Final triphthongs and final yu/a/i—wu/a/i diphthongs in Ugaritic nominal forms (
14 (1982) 209–218.)
1982 On the grammar and orthography of the Ammonite findings (UF 14 (1982) 219–234)
Skehan, Patrick W.
1954 A fragment of the “Song of Moses” (Deut. 32) from Qumran (BASOR 136 (1954)
12–14)
1954 Tower of death or deadly snare? (Sir. 26: 22) (CBQ 16 (1954) 154)
Smend, R.
1961* see Wevers
Smith, Robert Houston.
1966 The household lamps of Palestine in New Testament times (BA 29:2–27)
Smitten, W. Th. in der.
1971 Der tirschaµtaµ< in Esra-Nehemia (VT 21 (1971) 618–620)
1971 Eine aramäische inschrift in Pakistan aus dem 3. Jhdt. v. Chr. (BiOr. 28 (1971) 309-
311)
Snaith, N. H.
1952 Selah (VT 2 (1952) 43–56)
1965 ¹wsAµy: the sea of reeds, the Red Sea (VT 15 (1965) 395–398)
1971 Jeremiah 33: 18 (VT 21 (1971) 620–622)
1975 The meaning of µyry[ (VT 25 (1975) 115–118)
Snijders, L. A.
1954 The adjective rz in the ketubim (OTSt. 10 (1954) 60–110)
1965 L’orientation du temple de Jérusalem (OTSt. 14 (1965) 214–235)
Soden, Wolfram von.
1933 see Bauer +
1933 Der hymnisch-epische Dialekt des Akkadischen (ZA 41 (1933) 90–183)
1935 Zu ZAW 52 (1934) 53f (ZAW 53 (1935) 291)
1938 Lexikalisches Archiv (ZA 44 (1938) 181)
1947 Akkadisch ta<uÆ und hebräisch taµ< als Raumbezeichnungen (WdO 1 (1947–52)
356–361, Tfl. 17)
1947 Das altbabylonische Briefarchiv von Mâri. Ein Überblick (WdO 1 (1947–52) 187-
205)
1947/56 Zum akkadischen Wörterbuch (6–14: Orientalia 16 (1947) 66–84; 67–80:
akanna/akanni, Õtk [*ataµku], bahÉuÆ, diqungallu, daÆlum im D- und Sð-Stamm, geÆsûu, hÉehÉeµnu, kubsûu,
labaµ- sûum, maÆnu, nuÕÕuÆ und nuhÉhÉuÆ, naÕaµmum, naraµbum, sarduÆm: Orientalia 24 (1955) 377- 394; 81. l
statt n in altassyrischen Wortformen, 82. bisûimtu/bisûittu, 83. ginuÆ III, 84. makuÆm, 85. makaµku, 86.
neµrubaµtu, 87. usûurtum: Orientalia 25 (1956) 241–250)
1950 Ein Zwiegespräch Håammurabis mit einer Frau (Alt-babylonische Dialektdichtungen
Nr. 2) (ZA 49 (1950) 151–194)
1954 Review: Johannes G. Botterweck, Der Triliterismus im Semitischen (WdO
(1954–59) 84–98)
1955 Gibt es ein Zeugnis dafür, dass die Babylonier an die Wiederauferstehung Marduks
geglaubt haben? (ZA 51 (1955) 130–166)
1957 Ein neues Bruchstück des assyrischen Kommentars zum Marduk-Ordal (ZA
(1957) 224–234)
1957 Review: P. Sauermann and M. Otto Untersuchungen zu der Wortgruppe
WZKM 53 (1957) 157)
1959/70* see Salonen
1960 Zur Einteilung der semitischen Sprachen (WZKM 56 (1960) 177–191)
1962 Review: Kurt Rudolph, Die Manda¬er II. Der Kult (WZKM 58 (1962) 211)
1964 musûkeµnum und die MawaµléÆ des frühen Islam (ZA 56 (1964) 133–141)
1964 Vedisch magham, “Geschenk”—neuarabisch magðgðaµnéÆja, “Gebühren-freiheit”: der
Weg einer Wortsippe (JbEOL 18 (1964) 339–344)
1966/77 Aramäische Wörter in neuassyrischen und neu- und spätbabylonischen Texten. Ein
Vorbericht. (I, agaÆ—*muµs:û Orientalia 35 (1966) 1–20; II, n-z und Nachträge: Orientalia 37 (1968)
261–271; III: Orientalia 46 (1977) 183–197)
1968 (Studia orientalia in memoriam Caroli Brockelmann: WZUH 17 (1968) 175)
1969 Bemerkungen zu einigen literarischen Texten in akkadischen Sprache aus Ugarit (
1 (1969) 189–196)
1970 Mirjaµm-Maria “(Gottes-)Geschenk” (UF 2 (1970) 269–272)
1970 Zur Stellung des “Geweihten” (qdsû) in Ugarit (UF 2 (1970) 329–330)
1972 Der neubabylonische Funktionär simmagir (ZA 62 (1972) 84–108)
1977 Aramäische Wörter un neuassyrischen und neu- und spätbabylonischen Texten
(Orientalia 46 (1977) 185)
1978 Die erste Tafel des altbabylonischen AtramhÉaséÆs—Mythus. “Haupt-text” und
Parallelversionen (ZA 68 (1978) 50–94)
1985 Zum hebräischen Wörterbuch (UF 13 (1981) 157–164)
Soggin, J. Alberto.
1962 see Croatto +
1963 Charisma und Institution im Königtum Sauls (ZAW 75 (1963) 54–64)
1963 Der judäische >am-ha<ares\ und das Königtum in Juda (VT 13 (1963) 187–195)
1965 Gilgal, Passah und Landnahme: eine neue Untersuchung des kultischen
Zusammenhangs der Kap. 3–6 des Josuabuches (VTSupp. 15 (1965) 263–277)
1965 Zum wiederentdeckten altkanaanäischen Monat jx (ZAW 77 (1965) 83–85)
1966 Der offiziell geförderte Synkretismus in Israel während des 10. Jahrhunderts (
78 (1966) 179–203)
1967 Zum ersten Psalm (ThZ 23 (1967) 81–96)
1968 Akkadisch TAR BERIïTI und Hebräisch tyrb trk (VT 18 (1968) 210–215)
1971 Textkritische Untersuchung von Ps. 8: 2–3 und 6 (VT 21 (1971) 565–571)
1982 Amalek und Ephraim, Richter 5:14 (ZDPV 98 (1982) 58–62)
1989 <Ehud und >Egloµn: Bemerkungen zu Richter 3: 11b-31 (VT 39 (1989) 95–100)
Speier, Salomon.
1946 Alttestamentliche Wortforschung: t\aµraµf, Genesis 8: 11 (ThZ 2 (1946) 153)
1953 Bemerkungen zu Amos (VT 3 (1953) 305–310)
1958 Die Bedeutung von hantal in einem Kairoer Genisafragment (VT 8 (1958)
435–436)
Speiser, Ephraim A.
1923 The etymology of “Armon” (JQR 14 (1923–24) 329–330)
1930 The name Bildad (AfO 6 (1930–31) 23)
1942 The shibboleth incident (Judges 12:6) (BASOR 85 (1942) 10–13)
1951 The semantic range of dalaµpu (JCS 5 (1951) 64–66)
1955 <Ed in the story of creation (BASOR 140 (1955) 9–10)
1956 “Coming” and “going” at the “city” gate (BASOR 144 (1956) 20–23)
1956 Nuzi marginalia: 1. The Hurrian equivalent of sikiltu(m); 2. OB k/liisûsûaµtum
hÉi/esûsûu-maku; 3. The Hurrian element -maku; 4. Ceremonial payment; 5. The terminology of the oath
by the gods. (Orientalia 25 (1956) 1–23)
1956 YDWN: Gen. 6: 3 (JBL 75 (1956) 126–129)
1957 T\WT\PT (JQR 48 (1957–58) 208–217)

1958 Census and ritual expiation in Mari and Israel (BASOR 149 (1958) 17–24)
1960 “People” and “nation” of Israel (JBL 79 (1960) 157–163)
1960 An angelic “curse”: Exodus 14: 20 (JAOS 80 (1960) 198–199)
1961 The word SH\R in Genesis and early Hebrew movements (BASOR 164 (1961)
23–27)
1963 Background and function of the biblical naµsŒéÆ (CBQ 25 (1963) 111–117)
1963 The stem pll in Hebrew (JBL 82 (1963) 301–306)
1964 The syllabic transcription of Ugaritic hÉ and h\ (BASOR 175 (1964) 42–46)
Spencer, John R.
1984 The tasks of the Levites: sûmr and s\bÕ (ZAW 96 (1984) 267–270)
Sperber, Alexander.
1937 Hebrew based upon Greek and Latin transliterations (HUCA 12/13 (1937/38) 230)
1943 Hebrew grammar: a new approach (JBL 62 (1943) 137–262)
1961* see Meyer
Spiegel, Shalom.
1935 Toward certainty in Ezekiel (JBL 54 (1935) 145–172)
Spiegelberg, W.
1906 Das n. pr. lykp (OLZ 9 (1906) 109)
1906 µyjtpn (OLZ 9 (1906) 276–280)
1919 Zu dem Namen Meri-Baal (ZAW 38 (1919/20) 172)
1928 Zu Ezechiel 30: 16 (OLZ 31 (1928) 3)
Spitaler, A.
1950 Neue Materialien zum aramäischen Dialekt von Ma>luµla (ZDMG 107:299–339)
Sprengling, M.
1919 Joel 1: 17a (JBL 38 (1919) 129–141)
1928 The epigraphic material of Aghaya Kaleh (AJSL 45 (1928–1929) 279–280)
1932 An Aramaic seal impression from Khorsabad (AJSL 49 (1932) 53–55)
1940 Shahpuhr I the Great on the kaabah of Zoroaster (AJSL 57 (1940):341–365)
Spronk, K.
1982 see de Moor +
Stade, B.
1902 Ein phönizisches Aequivalent von hnvm ÷hk (ZAW 22 (1902) 325ff)
1906 Zu Jes. 3: 1, 17, 24; 5: 1; 8: 1f, 12–14, 16; 9: 7–20; 10: 26 (ZAW 26 (1906)
129–141)
Stadelmann, Luis I. J.
1970 The Hebrew conception of the world (AnBibl. 39, (1970))
Staerk, W.
1937 Zum alttestamentlichen Erwählungsglauben (ZAW 55 (1937) 1–35)
Stähli, Hans Peter.
1978 Knabe-Jüngling-Knecht, Untersuchungen zum Begriff r[n im Alten Testament (
BET 7 (1978))
Stähli, Solare.
1985 Elemente im Jahweglauben des Alten Testaments (OBO 66 (1985) 11f)
Stamm, Johann Jakob.
1945 Sprachliche Erwägungen zum Gebot “Du sollst nicht töten” (ThZ 1 (1945) 81)
1945 Zum Altargesetz im Bundesbuch (ThZ 1 (1945) 304)
1948 Versuche zur Erklärung von Hiob 19: 24 (ThZ 4 (1948) 331–337)
1949 Zum Ursprung des Namens der Ammoniter (ArchOr. 17 (1949) 379–382)
1954 Probleme der akkadischen und ägyptischen Namengebung (WdO 2 (1954–59)
111–119)
1957 Eine Bemerkung zum Anfang des 8. Psalms (ThZ 13 (1957) 470–478)
1959 Der Name des Königs David (VTSupp. 7 (1959) 165–183)
1960 Der Name des Königs Salomo (ThZ 16 (1960) 285–297)
1961/61 Dreissig Jahre Dekalogforschung (ThR 27 (1961)189–196; 281–305)
1974 Die Immanuel-Perikope: eine Nachlese (ThZ 30 (1974) 11–22)
1979 Ein Ugaritisch-hebräisches Verbum und seine Ableitungen (ThZ 35 (1979) 5–17)
1979 Erwägungen zu RS 24.246 (UF 11 (1979) 753–758)
1980 Der Name des Propheten Amos und sein sprachlicher Hintergrund (BZAW
(1980) 137)
Staples, W. E.
1943 The “vanity “ of Ecclesiastes (JNES 2 (1943) 95–104)
Starcky, J.
1956 Travail d’édition (RB 63 (1956) 273)
1959 Review: G.R. Driver Aramaic Documents of the Fifth Century B.C. (Syria 36 (1959)
124–125
Steuernagel, C.
1924 Der >Adschluµn (ZDPV 47 (1924) 191ff)
Stegemann, H.
1990 Das Gesetzeskorpus der “Damaskusschrift” (CD IX-XVI) (RQ 14 (1990) 409–434)
Stenning, J.F.
1949 The targum of Isaiah
Stieglitz, Robert R.
1970 An unrecognized meaning of Ugaritic sûmn (JNES 29 (1970) 56–72)
Stiehl, Ruth.
1957 Das Buch Esther (WZKM 53 (1957) 4–22)
Stinespring, William F.
1944 Note on Ruth 2: 19 (JNES 3 (1944) 101–103)
1966 Wilson’s arch revisited (BA 29:27–36)
Stoebe, Hans Joachim.
1952 Die Bedeutung des Wortes h\a¬sa¬d im Alten Testament (VT 2 (1952) 244–254)
1953 Gut und Böse in der Jahwistischen Quelle des Pentateuch (ZAW 65 (1953) 188–204)
1954 Anmerkungen zu 1 Samuel 8: 16 en 16: 20 (VT 4 (1954) 177–184)
1956 Die Goliathperikope 1 Sam. 17: 1–18: 5 und die Textform der Septuaginta (
(1956) 397–413)
1957 Die Einnahme Jerusalems und der s\innoÆr (ZDPV 73 (1957) 73ff)
1958 David und Mikal: Überlegungen zur Jugendgeschichte Davids (BZAW 77 (1958)
224–243)
1964 Das Deutsche Evangelische Institut für Altertumswissenschaft des Heiligen Landes.
Lehrkursus 1962 (ZDPV 80 (1964) 1ff)
1972 Anmerkungen zur Wurzel pl< im Alten Testament (ThZ 28 (1972) 13–23)
1977 David und der Ammoniterkrieg (ZDPV 93 (1977) 236–246)
1986 David und Uria: Überlegungen zur Überlieferung von 2 Sam. 11 (Biblica
388- 396)
Stolz, Fritz.
1970 Strukturen und Figuren im Kult von Jerusalem: Studien zur altorientalischen, vor-
und frühisraelitischen Religion (BZAW 118 (1970) 210f)
1972 Jahwes und Israels Kriege (ATANT 60 (1972) 46–49)
1972 Zeichen und Wunder. Die prophetische Legitimation und ihre Geschichte (
(1972) 125–144)
Strack, H. L.
1921 Grammatik des Biblisch-Aramäischen (sixth edition)
Straumann.
1973 see Schüngel and Straumann
Strauss, H.
1970 Zur Auslegung von Ps. 29 auf dem Hintergrund seiner kanaanäischen Bezüge (
82 (1970) 91–102)
Streck, Maximilian.
1900 Das Gebiet der heutigen Landschaften Armenien, Kurdistân und Westpersien nach
den babylonisch- assyrischen Keilinschriften (ZA 15 (1900), 367f)
1915 in Sachau Festschrift 399
1916 Assurbanipal und die letzten assyrischen Könige bis zum Untergangs Ninevehs (
VAB 7)
Stricker, B. H.
1937 Trois études de phonétique et de morphologie coptes (ActOr. 15 (1937) 1–20)
Striedl, H.
1937 Untersuchung zur Syntax und Stilistik des hebräischen Buches Esther (ZAW
(1937) 73–107)
Stumme, H.
1912 Gedanken über libysche-phönizische Ankläge (ZA 27 (1912) 121–128)
Stummer, Friedrich.
1928 Spuren jüdischer und christlicher Einflüsse auf die Übersetzung der grossen
Propheten durch Hieronymus (JPOS 8 (1928) 35–55)
1932 “Convallis Mambre” und Verwandtes (JPOS 12 (1932) 6–21)
1939 Alttestamentliche Randbemerkungen zu den Texten aus der Grabung R. Campbell
Thompsons in Nineve (AfO 13 (1939–40) 318–323)
1954 hlma (Ez. 16: 30 A) (VT 4 (1954) 34–40)
Sukenik, E. L.
1949* see Seeligmann
1950 Megillot genuzot
Sutcliffe, E. F.
1948 St. Jerome’s Hebrew manuscripts (Biblica 29 (1948) 195–204)
1949 Notes on Job: textual and exegetical (Biblica 30:66–90)
1955 A gloss in Jeremiah 7: 4 (VT 5 (1955) 313–314)
Swetnam, J.
1965 Some observations on the background of qydx in Jeremiah 23:5a (Biblica
29–40)
Swiggers, J. C.
1981 The word sûibboµlet\ in Jud. 12: 6 (JSS 26 (1981) 205–208)
Tadmor, Hayim.
1958 Historical implications of the correct rendering of Akkadian daÆku (JNES 17 (1958)
129–141)
Tallqvist, Knut.
1927* see Schott
Taeubler, E.
1944 Cushan-Rishathaim (HUCA 20:137–142)
Talmon, S.
1953 The sectarian djy: a Biblical noun (VT 3 (1953) 133–140)
1954 A case of abbreviation resulting in double readings (VT 4 (1954) 206–208)
1960 yba tmjm µyabh µynyqh hmh bkrAtyb (IEJ 10:174–180)
1961 1 Sam. 15: 32b: a case of conflated readings (VT 11 (1961) 456–457)
1962 The three scrolls of the law that were found in the temple court (Textus 2 (1962)
14–27)
1963 The Gezer calendar and the seasonal cycle of ancient Canaan (JAOS 83 (1963)
177–187)
1964 Aspects of the textual transmission of the Bible in the light of Qumran manuscripts (
Textus 4 (1964) 95–132)
1965 The town lists of Simeon (IEJ 15 (1965) 235–241)
Tarragon, J. M. de.
1980 Le culte à Ugarit (CRB 19 (1980))
Tawil, H.
1980 >Azzazel, the prince of the steppe: a comparative study (ZAW 92 (1980) 43–59)
Teixidor, J.
1971 Bulletin d’épigraphie sémitique 1971 (Syria 48 (1971) 453–494)
Telegdi, M. S.
1934 Essai sur la phonétique des emprunts iraniens en araméen talmudique (JA
(1934) 254f)
Terrien, S.
1970 The Omphalos myth and Hebrew religion (VT 20 (1970) 315–338)
Thiel, W.
1969 Erwägungen zum Alter des Heiligkeitsgesetzes (ZAW 81 (1969) 40–73)
1970 Heµfeµr berit: Zum Bundbrechen im Alten Testament (VT 20 (1970) 214–229)
1980 Zur gesellschaftlichen Stellung des mudu (UF 12 (1980) 349–356)
Thierry, G. J.
1951 Gebál, Byblos, Bible, paper (VT 1 (1951) 130–131)
1951 Notes on Hebrew grammar and etymology (OTSt. 9 (1951) 1–17)
Thomas, D. Winton.
1932 A note on twxljm , in Zechariah 3: 4 (JTS 33:279–336)
1934 The root hnv in Hebrew (ZAW 52 (1934) 236–38)
1935 A study in Hebrew synonyms: verbs signifying “to breathe” (ZS 10 (1935) 311–314)
1936 The root rkm in Hebrew (JTS 37:388–389)
1937 (ThSt. 38 (1937) 400)
1939 The root bha “love” in Hebrew (ZAW 57 (1939) 57–64)
1951 Mount Tabor: the meaning of the name (VT 1 (1951) 229–230)
1953 A consideration of some unusual ways of expressing the superlative in Hebrew (
3 (1953) 209–224)
1955 Textual and philological notes on some passages in the book of Proverbs (
3 (1955) 280–292)
1956 Some observations on the Hebrew root ldj (VTSupp. 4 (1956) 8–16)
1956 The use of jxn as a superlative in Hebrew (JSS 1 (1956) 106–109)
1960 kelebh “dog”: its origin and some usages of it in the Old Testament (VT 10 (1960)
410- 427)
1962 twmlx in the Old Testament (JSS 7 (1962) 191–200)
1962 wa in Proverbs 31: 4 (VT 12 (1962) 499–500)
1963 The text of Isa. 2: 2 and the word qpc (ZAW 75 (1963) 88–90)
1964 Job 40: 29b: text and translation (VT 14 (1964) 114–116)
1967 Some observations on the Hebrew word ÷n[r (VTSupp. 16 (1967) 387–397)
1968 “A drop of a bucket”? Some observations on the Hebrew text of Isaiah 40: 15 (
BZAW 103 (1968) 214–221)
Thomas, W.
1972 Die Chronik als Auslegung (FRLANT 106 (1972) 76)
Thompson, Henri O.
1967 Tell el-Husn—Biblical Beth-shan (BA 30:110–135)
1973 see Zayadine and Thompson
+ Zayadine, Fawzi.
1973 The Tell Siran inscription (BASOR 212 (1973) 5–11)
1974 The works of Amminadab (BA 37 (1974) 13–19)
Thompson, J. A.
1942 On some stamps and a seal from Lachish (BASOR 86 (1942) 24–27)
1965 Expansions of the d[ root (JSS 10 (1965) 222–240)
1979 Israel’s “haters” (VT 29 (1979) 200–205)
Thompson, Thomas L.
1974 The historicity of the patriarchal narratives: the quest for the historical Abraham (
BZAW 133 (1974))
Thomson, J. G. S. S.
1955 Sleep, an aspect of Jewish anthropology (VT 5 (1955) 421–433)

Thureau-Dangin, F.
1922 Nouvelles lettres d’El-Amarna (RA 19:97–108)
Tigay, J. H. A.
1971* see Pope
Timm, S.
1980 Die territoriale Ausdehnung des Staates Israel zur Zeit der Omriden (ZDPV
(1980) 20–40)
Toeg, A.
1969 A textual note on 1 Samuel 14: 41 (VT 19 (1969) 493–498)
Tolkowsky, S.
1924 The measuring of the Moabites with the line (JPOS 4 (1924) 118–121)
1928 The meaning of rdh Å[ yrp (Lev. 23: 40) (JPOS 8 (1928) 17–23)
Toll, Christopher.
1990 Die aramäischen Ideogramme im Mittelpersischen (ZDMG Suppl. 8: 37)
Torczyner, H. (also Tur-Sinai, N. H.)
1913 Review: W. Gesenius Hebra¬isches und Arama¬isches Handwo¬rterbuch u¬ber das Alte
Testament (in Verbindung mit Prof. Dr. H. Zimmern, Prof. Dr. W. Max Müller und Prof. Dr. O.
Weber bearbeitet von Dr. Frants Buhl, Professor an der Universität Kopenhagen. 16. Auflage; mit
Deutsch-hebräischhem und -aramäischem Index von Lic. Dr. F. O. Kramer, für die 16. Aufl.
durchgesehen von Dr. A. Walter) (ZDMG 70:555–561)
1921 ryba kein Stierbild (ZAW 39 (1921) 296–300)
1937 wnnwlb twlwa µylm (Leshonenu 8: 99–109 and 259–278)
1947 The firmament and the clouds (StTh. 1/1 (1947) 188–96)
1949 sûit\ir sûameÆ, die Himmelsschrift (ArchOr. 17 (1949) 419–433)
1951 The ark of God at Beit Shemesh (1 Sam. 6) and peres >uzza (2 Sam. 6; 1 Chr. 13) (
VT 1 (1951) 275–286)
1951 Unverstandene Bibelworte I (VT 1 (1951) 307–309)
Torrey, Charles C.
1920 The Aramaic portions of Ezra (AJSL 24:209–281)
1924 Medina and Poli" and Luke 1: 39 (HTR 17 (1924) 83–90)
1936 The founding of the second temple at Jerusalem (JBL 55:247–260)
1938 Armageddon (HTR 31 (1938) 237–250)
1940 A Hebrew seal from the reign of Ahaz (BASOR 79 (1940) 27–28)
1941 On the ostraca from Elath (BASOR 82 (1941) 15)
1941 A synagogue at Elath? (BASOR 84 (1941) 4ff)
1953 Studies in the Aramaic of the first century A.D. (ZAW 65 (1953) 228–246)
Tournay, R.
1957 Le nom du “buisson ardent.” (VT 7 (1957) 410–413)
1964 Quelques relectures bibliques antisamaritaines (RB 71 (1964) 504–536)
1971 Le Psaume 8 et la doctrine biblique du nom (RB 78 (1971) 18–30)
1972 Notes sur les Psaumes (Ps. 42: 9; 75: 7–9; 90: 5 et 76: 2ss) (RB 79 (1972) 39–58)
Trever, John C.
1951 Isaiah 43: 19 according to the first Isaiah scroll (BASOR 121 (1951) 13–16)
1952 Some corrections regarding Isaiah 43: 19 in the Isaiah Scroll (BASOR 126 (1952)
26)
Tromp, N. J.
1961 Primitive conceptions of death and netherworld in the Old Testament (BiblOr.
(1961) 152–154)
1963 De radice h\lp in lingua hebraica (VbDom. 41 (1963) 299–304)
Tropper, J.
1987 TMYM >M YHWH “Vollkommen vor dem Herrn” (UF 19 (1987) 295–300)
1987 see Rouillard +
Trudinger, P.
1967 “To whom then will you liken God?” (Is. 40: 18–20) (VT 17 (1967) 220–225)
Tsevat, Matitiahu.
1948 Some Biblical notes (HUCA 24:107–114)
1953 Alalakhiana (HUCA 29:109–134)
1954 The Canaanite god Sða¬lah (VT 4 (1954) 41–49)
1958 Marriage and monarchical legitimacy in Ugarit and Israel (JSS 3 (1958) 327–335)
1959 On the “Amorite” ta/te “with” (BASOR 156 (1959) 40)
1959 The Neo-Assyrian and Neo-Babylonian vassal oaths and the prophet Ezekiel (
78 (1959) 199–204)
1969 God and the gods in assembly: an interpretation of Psalm 82 (HUCA 40–41
(1969–70) 123–138)
1971 Traces of Hittite at the beginning of the Ugaritic epic Aqht (UF 3 (1971) 351–352)
1972 The basic meaning of Biblical sabbath (ZAW 84 (1972) 447–459)
1979 Der Schlangentext von Ugarit UT 607—KTU 1.100 Ug. V, 564ff—RS 24.244 (
11 (1979) 759–778)
Tuland C. G.
1958 <Usûsûayyaµ< and <UsûsûarnaÆ: a clarification of terms, date and text (JNES 17 (1958),
269ff)
Tur-Sinai, N. H., see Torczyner
Tushingham, A. Douglas.
1952 The excavations at Dibon (DhéÆbaÆn) in Moab: the third campaign 1952–53 (
40 (1972); see also Van Beek 1964)
1953 A reconsideration of Hosea ch. 1–3 (JNES 12 (1953) 150–159)
Uchelen, N. A. van.
1968 Abraham als Felsen (Jes. 51: 1) (ZAW 80 (1968) 183–190)
Ullendorff, E.
1954 The construction of Noah’s ark (VT 4 (1954) 95–96)
1956 The contribution of South Semitic to Hebrew lexicography (VT 6 (1956) 190–198)
1961 Job 3: 8 (VT 11 (1961) 350–351)
1962 The meaning of tlhq (VT 12 (1962) 215)
1962 Ugaritic marginalia II (JSS 7 (1962) 339)
Ungnad, A.
1923 Joseph, der Tartan des Pharao (ZAW 41 (1923) 204f)
1940 Keilinschriftliche Beiträge zum Buch Esra und Esther (ZAW 58 (1940/41) 240–243)
Van Beek, G. W.
1964 The excavations at Dibon (DhéÆbaÆn) in Moab (AASOR 36–77 (1964); see also
Tushingham 1952)
Vanel, A.
1967 Six “ostraca” phéniciens (BMB 20 (1967) 47)
Vaux, R. de.
1936 Binjamin—Minjamin (RB 45 (1936) 278)
1953 Exploration de la région de Qumrân (RB 60 (1953) 540–561)
1953 Quelques textes hébreux de Murabba>at (RB 60 (1953) 268–275)
1959 Une hachette essénienne? (VT 9 (1959) 399–407)
1960 Les chérubins et l’arche d’alliance: les sphinx gardiens et les trônes divins dans
l’ancien Orient (MUSJ 37 (1960–61) 91–124)
1961 see Benoit +
1961 see Milik +
1962* see Baillet
1962 Les fouilles de Tell el-Far>ah: rapport préliminaire sur les 7e, 8e, 9e campagnes,
1958–1960 (RB 69 (1962) 271)
1965 Les patriarches hébreux et l’histoire (RB 72 (1965) 5–28)
1968 Le pays de Canaan (JAOS 88 (1968) 23–29)
1968 Le problème des Håapiru après quinze années (JNES 27 (1968) 221)
1969 Téman, ville ou région d’Edom? (RB 76 (1969) 379–85)
Veenhof, K. R.
1963 An Aramaic curse with a Sumero-Akkadian prototype (BiOr. 20 (1963) 142–144)
1975 An Old Akkadian private letter (JbEOL 24 (1975–76) 105)
Veijola, Timo.
1976 Zu Ableitung und Bedeutung von heµ>éÆd I im Hebräischen (UF 8 (1976) 343–352)
1983 Davidverheissung und Staatsvertrag. Beobachtungen zum Einfluss altorientalischer
Staatsverträge auf die biblische Sprache am Beispiel von Psalm 89 (ZAW 96 (1983) 9–30)
Verreet, E.
1983 Das silbenschliessende Aleph im Ugaritischen (UF 15 (1983) 223–258)
Vetter, D.
1974 Seherspruch und Segensschilderung (Calwer Theol. Monographien, Reihe A, Bd. 4,
Stuttgart, (1974) 47, 49)
Vincent, L. H.
1920 La Palestine dans les papyrus ptolémaiques de Gerza (RB 29 (1920) 161–202)
1920 La sépulture des patriarches d’après la Bible (RB 29 (1920) 507–540)
1926 see Dhorme +
1954 Bulletin (RB 61 (1954) 133)
Vincent, R. P. H.
1932 see Horsfield +
Virolleaud, C.
1969* see Cazelles
Vitale, R.
1976* see Badre
Vogels, W.
1972 Invitation à revenir à l’alliance et universalisme en Amos 9: 7 (VT 22 (1972)
223–239)
Vogt, E.
1953 Nuntii varii (Biblica 34 (1953) 416–429)
1958 Nova inscriptio aramaica saec. 8 a.C. (Biblica 39 (1958) 269–274.)
1962 “Ihr Tisch werde zur Falle” (Ps. 69: 23) (Biblica 43 (1962) 79–82)
1967 Einige hebräische Wortbedeutungen (Biblica 48 (1967) 57–74)
Voigt, R. M.
1979 Die Laterale im Semitischen (WdO 10 (1979) 93–114)
Völker.
1968 Zur Vorgeschichte von Sach. 12: 1–8 und 14: 1–5 (WMANT 27 (1968) 18)
Volkmar, F.
1970 Israel in der Wüste (Marburger Theol. Studien 7 (1970) 69)
1977 Tempel und Zelt: Studien zum Tempelbau in Israel und zu dem Zeltheiligtum der
Priesterschrift (WMANT 47 (1977) 158)
Vollers, Karl.
1894 Beiträge zur Kenntnis der lebenden arabischen Sprache in Aegypten (ZDMG
291- 326)
Vollmer, Jochen.
1971 Geschichtliche Rückblicke und Motive in der Prophetie des Amos, Hosea und Jesaja
(BZAW 119 (1971))
Volkwein, Brunno.
1969 Masoretisches >eµduµt, >eµdwoµt, >eµdoµt—“Zeugnis” oder “Bundesbestimmungen”? (
13 (1969) 18–40)
Volz, P.
1919 Zu Amos 9: 9 (ZAW 38 (1919/20) 105–111)
von Soden, W., see Soden, Wolfram von
Vorländer, H.
1975 Mein Gott: Die Vorstellung vom persönlichen Gott im Alten Orient und im Alten
Testament (AOAT 23 (1975) 29; 176ff; 266)
Vries, S. J. de.
1975 Temporal terms as structural in the holy-war tradition (VT 25 (1975) 80–105)
Vriezen, Theodor C.
1942 La tradition de Jacob dans Osée 12 (OTSt. 1 (1942) 64–78)
1953 Prophecy and eschatology (VTSupp. 1 (1953) 199)
1963 Das Hiphil von <aµmar in Deut. 26: 17, 18 (JbEOL 17 (1963) 207–210)
1965 The Edomitic deity Qaus (OTSt. 14 (1965) 330–353)
1966 Bubers Auslegung des Liebesgebots, Lev. 19: 18b (ThZ 22 (1966) 1–11)
1973 A reinterpretation of Exodus 3: 21–22 and related texts. Ex. 11: 2f; 12: 35f; and Ps.
105: 37f. (Gen. 15: 4b) (JbEOL 23 (1973–74) 389–401)
Vriezen, K. J. H.
1975 Håirbet KeféÆre—eine Oberflächenuntersuchung (ZDPV 91 (1975) 135–158)
Vycichl, W.
1959 Ägyptisch-semitische Anklänge (ZAS 84 (1959) 145–147)
Wächter, L.
1962 Überlegungen zur Umnennung von Pasûh\uµr in MaµgoÆr missaµbéÆb in Jeremia 20: 3 (
ZAW 74 (1962) 57–61)
1966 Drei umstrittene Psalmstellen (Ps. 26: 1; 30: 8; 90: 4–6) (ZAW 78 (1966) 61–68)
1968 Salem bei Sichem (ZDPV 84 (1968) 63–72)
1968 Zur Lage von Michmethath (ZDPV 84 (1968) 55ff)
1971 Reste von Sðaf>el-Bildungen im Hebräischen (ZAW 83 (1971) 380–388)
Wäfler, M.
1983 Zu Status und Lage von Tabaµl (Orientalia 52 (1983) 181–193)
Wagner, N. E.
1960 hnr in the Psalter (VT 10 (1960) 435–441)
Wagner, V.
1968 Umfang und Inhalt der moµt\-juµmat\ Reihe (OLZ 63 (1968) 325–436)
Wainwright, G. A.
1956 Caphtor-Cappadocia (VT 6 (1956) 199–210)
Waldmann, Nahum.
1976 A note on excessive speech and falsehood (JQR 67 (1976) 142–153)
Walker, N.
1956 Concerning huÆÕ and ÕanéÆ huÆÕ (ZAW 74:205–206)
Wallenstein, M. A.
1954 Some lexical material in the Judean scrolls (VT 4 (1954) 211–214)
1955 Striking hymns from the Dead Dea scrolls (BJRL 38 (1955–1956) 241–265)
1957 Some aspects of the vocabulary and morphology of the hymns of the Judean scrolls (
VT 7 (1957) 209–213)
Wallis, G.
1961 Thaanath-Silo (ZDPV 77 (1961) 38–45)
1966 Die Stadt in den Überlieferungen der Genesis (ZAW 78 (1966) 133–147)
Walters, St. D.
1973 The year names of Sumu-el (RA 67 (1973) 21–40)
Walz, R.
1944 Neue Untersuchungen zum der Domestikationsproblem der altweltlichen Cameliden
(ZVS 75:62f)
1944 Zum Problem des Zeitpunkts der Domestikation der altweltlichen Cameliden (
ZDMG 101:29)
Wancke, Gunther.
1966 ywa und ywh (ZAW 78 (1966) 215–218)
1966 Die Zionstheologie der Koachiten in ihrem traditionsgeschichtlichen
Zusammenhang (BZAW 97 (1966))
1971 Untersuchungen zur sogenannten Baruchschrift (BZAW 122 (1971))
Ward, E. F. de.
1977 Superstition and judgement: archaic methods of finding a verdict (ZAW 89 (1977)
1–19)
Ward, J. M.
1961 The literary form and liturgical background of Psalm 89 (VT 11 (1961) 321–339)
Ward, W. A.
1960 The Egyptian office of Joseph (JSS 5:144–150)
1962 Some Egypto-Semitic roots (Orientalia 31 (1962) 397–412)
1969 Notes on some Egypto-Semitic roots (ZAS 95 (1969) 65–72)
1972 Review: P. Lacau, Les noms des parties du corps en eŒgyptien et en seŒmitique
29 (1972) 18–23)
1974 The Semitic biconsonantal root SP (VT 24 (1974) 339–349)
Ward, W. W.
1976 Some personal names of the Hykos period rulers and notes on the epigraphy of their
scarabs (UF 8 (1976) 353–370)
Watanabe, K.
1980 see Deller
Watson, W. G. E.
1972 Archaic elements in the language of Chronicles (Biblica 53 (1972) 191–207)
1972 Fixed pairs in Ugaritic and Isaiah (VT 22 (1972) 460–468)
1976 Puzzling passages in the tale of Aqhat (UF 8 (1976) 371–378)
1978 Parallels to some passages in Ugaritic (UF 10 (1978) 397–402)
Watts, J. D. W.
1954 Note on the text Amos 5: 7 (VT 4 (1954) 215–216)
Wechter, P.
1941 Ibn Baruµn’s contribution to comparative Hebrew philology (JAOS 61 (1941)
172–187)
Wehr.
1964 Das “Tor des Königs” im Buch Esther und verwandte Ausdrücke (Der Islam 39
(1964) 247–260)
Weidhaas, Hermann.
1939 Der béÆt hÉilaµni (ZA 45 (1939) 108–168, with 8 illustrations)
Weidner, Ernst F.
1941 Sðilkan(hÉe)ni, König von Mus\ri, ein Zeitgenosse Sargons II. Nach einem neuen
Bruchstück der Prisma-Inschrift des assyrischen Königs (AfO 14 (1941–1944) 40–53)
1945 Die erste Tafel der Serie sûumma multabiltu (AfO 15 (1945–51) 54–68)
1954 Hof- und Harems-Erlasse assyrischer Könige aus dem 2. Jahrtausend v. Chr. (
17 (1954–56) 257–293, with 6 plates)
Weimar, Peter.
1974 Die Toledot-Formel in der priesterschriftlichen Geschichtsdarstellung (BZ
65–93)
Weinberg, Joel. P.
1973 Das beit <aµboµt im 6.-4. Jh. v.u. Z. (VT 23 (1973) 400–414)
1975 netéÆnéÆm und “Söhne der Sklaven Salomos” im 6.-4. Jh.v.u.Z (ZAW 87 (1975)
355–371)
1981 Die Natur in Weltbild des Chronisten (VT 31 (1981) 324–345)
Weinberg, W.
1980 Language consciousness in the OT (ZAW 92 (1980) 185–203)
Weinel, H.
1898 jm und seine Derivate (ZAW 18 (1898) 1ff)
Weinfeld, Moshe.
1970 The covenant of grant in the Old Testament and in the ancient Near East (
(1970) 184–203)
1972 The worship of Molech and of the queen of heaven and its background (UF
133–154)
1975 Jeremiah and the spiritual metamorphosis of Israel (ZAW 88 (1975) 17–55)
Weinreich, Otto.
1935 Zum Wundertypus der sunanacrwsin (ARw. 32 (1935) 246–264)
Weippert, Helga.
1970 Jahwekrieg und Bundesfluch in Jer. 21: 1–7 (ZAW 82 (1970) 396–408)
1973 Die Prosareden des Jeremiabuches (BZAW 132 (1973))
1979 Das Wort vom neuen Bund in Jeremia 31: 31–34 (VT 29 (1979) 336–351)
Weippert, Manfred.
1961 Gott und Stier: Bemerkungen zu einer Terrakotte aus Jaµfa (ZDPV 77 (1961) 93–117)
1961 Zum Text von Ps. 19: 5 und Jes. 22: 5 (ZAW 73 (1961) 97–98)
1966 Archäologischer Jahresbericht (ZDPV 82 (1966) 274ff)
1972 “Heiliger Krieg” in Israel und Assyrien: kritische Anmerkungen zu Gerhard von
Rads Konzept des “Heiliger Krieges im Alten Israel” (ZAW 84 (1972) 460–495)
1973 Die Kämpfe des assyrischen Königs Assurbanipal gegen die Araber:
redaktionskritische Untersuchung des Berichts in Prisma A (WdO 7 (1973–74) 39–85)
1973 Fragen des israelitischen Gesichtsbewusstseins (VT 23 (1973) 415–442)
1973 Menahem von Israel und seine Zeitgenossen in einer Steleninschrift Tiglathpilesers
III aus dem Iran (ZDPV 89 (1973) 26–53)
1975 Zum Präskript der hebräischen Briefe von Arad (VT 25 (1975) 202–212)
1982 Die “Bileam”-Inschrift von Tell Deµr >Allaµ (ZDPV 98 (1982) 77–103)
Weise, M.
1960 Jesaja 57: 7f (ZAW 72 (1960) 25–32)
Weiser, A.
1936 1 Samuel 15 (ZAW 54 (1936) 1–27)
1959 Das Deboralied (ZAW 71 (1959) 67–96)
1966 Die Legitimation des Könings David. Zur Eigenart und Entstehung der sogen.
Geschichte von Davids Aufstieg (VT 16 (1966) 325–354)
Weisman, Z.
1978 A connecting link in an old hymn: Deuteronomy 33: 19a, 21b (VT 28 (1978)
365–367)
Weiss, David Halivni.
1962 A note on hra al ra (JBL 81 (1962) 67–69)
Weiss, M.
1964 The origin of the “day of the Lord” reconsidered (HUCA 37:29–72)
Weissbach, F. H.
1927 Zu der Goldinschrift des Dareios I (ZA 37 (1927) 291–296)
1933 Bücherschau (ZA 41 (1933) 255–287)
Welles.
1937* see Albright
Welten, P.
1973 Geschichte und Geschichtsdarstellung in den Chronikbüchern (WMANT
100)
Wenham, G. J.
1975 Were David’s sons priests? (ZAW 87 (1975) 79–81)
Wenning, R. and Zenger, E.
1982 Die verschiedenen Systeme der Wassernutzung im südlichen Jerusalem und die
Bezugnahme darauf in biblischen Texten (UF 14 (1982) 279–294)
Werminghoff, A.
1915 see Lasch +
Wernberg-Møller, Preben.
1953 Notes of the Manual of Discipline (DSD) i 18, ii 9, iii 1–4, 9, vii 10–12, and xi
21–22 (VT 3 (1953) 195–202)
1954 A note on rwz “to stink.” (VT 4 (1954) 322–325)
1956 The pronoum hmta and Jeremiah’s pun (VT 6 (1956) 315–316)
1957 A note on hdb jwl in Gen. 24: 63 (VT 7 (1957) 414–416)
1957 Two difficult passages in the Old Testament (ZAW 69 (1957) 69–73)
1958 Studies in the defective spellings in the Isaiah-scoll of St. Mark’s monastery (
(1958) 244–264)
1958 Two notes (VT 8 (1958) 305–308)
1960 The noun of the Qet\oµl class in the Massoretic text (RQ 2 (1960) 448–450)
1964 The contribution of the Hodayot to Biblical textual criticism (Textus 4 (1964)
133–175)
Westermann, C.
1964 Das Hoffen im Alten Testament (Theol. Bücherei 24 (1964) 219–265)
Wevers, John Wm.
1949 Review: Elmer Leslie, The Psalms translated and interpreted in the light of Hebrew
life and worship (BiOr. 6 (1949) 156–157)
1961 Review: R. Smend, Das Mosebild von Heinrich Ewald bis Martin Noth (
(1961) 96)
Wevers, Wim.
1950 The infinitive absolute in the Phoenician inscription of Azitawadd (ZAW
316–317)
White, Hugh C.
1975 The initiation legend of Ishmael (ZAW 87 (1975) 267–305)
Whitley, C. F.
1957 A note on Isa. 41: 27 (JSS 2 (1957) 327–328)
1972 Deutero-Isaiah’s interpretation of s\edeq (VT 22 (1972) 469–475)
1972 The positive force of the Hebrew particle lb (ZAW 84 (1972) 213–219)
1973 Psalm 99: 8 (ZAW 85 (1973) 227)
1974 Has the particle µv an asseverative force? (Biblica 55 (1974) 394–398)
1978 The language and exegesis of Isaiah 8: 16–23 (ZAW 90 (1978) 28–42)
Whybray, R. N.
1969 “Their wrongdoings” in the Old Testament (ZAW 81 (1969) 237–239)
Wieder, Arnold A.
1965 Ugaritic-Hebrew lexicographical notes (JBL 84 (1965) 160–164)
Wiesenberg, E.
1954 A note on hzm in Psalm 75: 9 (VT 4 (1954) 434–439)
Wijngaards, J.
1965 ayxwh and hl[h: a twofold approach to the exodus (VT 15 (1965) 91–102)
Wildberger, Hans.
1960 Die Thronnamen des Messias: Jes. 9: 5b (ThZ 16 (1960) 314–332)
1965 Das Abbild Gottes: Gen. 1: 26–30 (ThZ 21 (1965) 245–259)
1979 Jahwe und sein Volk. Gesammelte Aufsätze zum AT (ThB 66 (1979) 28–55)
Wildeboer, G.
1897 Die Sprüche (KHC 15 (1897) 2)
Wildung, Dietrich.
1973 Der König Ägyptens als Herr der Welt? Ein seltener ikonograpischer Typus der
Königsplastik des Neuen Reiches (AfO 24 (1973) 108–116, with 14 illustrations)
Wilhelmi, G.
1975 Weg mit den vielen Altären( (Jeremia 11: 15) (VT 25 (1975) 119–121)
1975 Polster in Babel? (Jesaja 21: 5–8) (VT 25 (1975) 121–123)
1977 Der Hirt mit dem eisernen Szepter. Überlegungen zu Psalm 2: 9 (VT 27 (1977)
196–204)
Wilke, C.
1934 Zur Personifikation von Pyramiden (ZAS 70 (1934) 56–83)
Wilkie, J. M.
1951 The Peshit\ta translation of tabbur ha<ares\ in Judges 9: 37 (VT 1 (1951) 144)
Willesen, F.
1954 Die Eselsöhne von Sichem als Bundesgenossen (VT 4 (1954) 216–217)
1958 The Philistine corps of the scimitar from Gath (JSS 3 (1958) 327–335)
1958 The ytrpa of the shibboleth incident (VT 8 (1958) 97–98)
Willi.
1977 in Zimmerli Festschrift 545f
Willi-Plein, I.
1971 Vorformen der Schriftexegese innerhalb des Alten Testaments. Untersuchungen
zum literarischen Werden der auf Amos, Hosea und Micha zurückgehenden Bücher im hebräischen
Zwölfprophetenbuch (BZAW 123 (1971) 146)
1973 h\eµn: Gedanken zu Sach. 12: 10 (VT 23 (1973) 90–99)
1974 Prophetie am Ende. Untersuchungen zu Sacharja 9–14 (BBB 42 (1974) 82)
1977 Das Geheimnis der Apokalyptik (VT 27 (1977) 62–81)
Williams, A. J.
1979 A further suggestion about Amos 4: 1–3 (VT 29 (1979) 206–211)
Williams, R. J.
1975 “A people come out of Egypt”: an Egyptologist looks at the Old Testament (
VTSupp. 28 (1975) 231–252)
Williamson, H. G. M.
1973 A note on 1 Chronicles 7: 12 (VT 23 (1973) 375–379)
1976 The accession of Solomon in the books of Chronicles (VT 26 (1976) 351–361)
Wilms, Franz Elmar.
1972 Das jahwistische Bundesbuch in Ex. 34 (BZ NF 16 (1972) 24–53)
Wilson, John A.
1945 The assembly of a Phoenician city (JNES 4 (1945) 245)
Wilson, J. V. Kinnier.
1962 Hebrew and Akkadian philological notes (JSS 7:173–183)
Winnett, F. V.
1946 A Himyaritic inscription from the Persian Gulf (BASOR 102 (1946) 4ff)
Winter, P.
1954 Der Begriff “Söhne Gottes” im Moselied: Dtn. 32: 1–43 (ZAW 67 (1954) 40–47)
1963 Nochmals zu Deuteronomium 32: 8 (ZAW 75 (1963) 218)
Wiseman, D. J.
1982 “Is it peace?” Covenant and diplomacy (VT 32 (1982) 311–326)
Wolf, Herbert M. A.
1972 Solution to the Immanuel prophecy in Isaiah 7:14–8:22 (JBL 91 (1972) 449–456)
Wolff, H. W. J.
1956 Jahwe als Bundesvermittler (VT 6 (1956) 316–320)
Worrel, J.
1970 hx[: “counsel” or “council” at Qumran? (VT 20 (1970) 65–74)
Woude, A. S. van der.
1963 Zwei alte Cruces im Psalter: Ps. 32: 6 und Ps. 89: 20 (OTSt. 13 (1963) 131–136)
1965 Melchisedek als himmlische Erlösergestalt in den neugefundenen eschatologischen
Midraschim aus Qumran-Höhle XI. (OTSt. 14 (1965) 354–373, with plate)

1968 Micha 2: 7a und der Bund Jahwes mit Israel (VT 18 (1968) 388–391)
Wright, G. Ernest.
1941 Solomon’s temple resurrected (BA 4:19–31)
1966 Fresh evidence for the Philistine story (BA 29:70–86)
1968 Tell el-YehuµdéÆyah and the Glacis (ZDPV 84 (1968) 1ff)
Würthwein, Ernst.
1950 Amos-Studien (ZAW 62 (1950) 10–51)
1967 Zum Verständnis des Hohenliedes (ThR 32 (1967) 177–212)
Wyatt, N.
1976 Atonement theology in Ugarit and Israel (UF 8 (1976) 415–430)
Xella, P.
1982 Die Ausrüstung eines kanaanäischen Schiffes (KTU 4.689) (WdO 13 (1982) 31–35)
1982 Fenicio msûr (Tabnit 5) ed ebraico tsûwrh (1 Samuele 9: 7) (UF 14 (1982) 295–302)
Yadin, Yigael.
1955 Goliath’s javelin and the MNWRÕRGYM (PEQ 86 (1955) 58)
1957 Further light on Biblical Hazor (BA 20:34–48)
1959 Three years of excavations at Hazor (1955–1957) (BiOr. 16 (1959) 1–11)
1962 Expedition D (IEJ 12 (1962) 227–258)
1967 The Temple scroll (BA 30:135)
1971 Pesher Nahum (4Q pNahum) reconsidered (IEJ 21 (1971) 1–12)
Yalon, H.
1926 gn g (ZAW 44 (1926) 322f)
1932 Hithpaµ>el formen im Hebräischen (ZAW 50 (1932) 217–220)
Yamauchi, E. M.
1980 Was Nehemiah the cupbearer a eunuch? (ZAW 92 (1980) 132–141)
Yaron, R.
1959 The Coptos decree and 2 Sam. 12: 14 (VT 9 (1959) 89–91)
1960 A document of redemption from Ugarit (VT 10 (1960) 83–90)
1962 ka>eth h\ayyah and koh leh\ay (VT 12 (1962) 500–501)
Yaure, L.
1960 Elymas—Nehelamite—Pethor (JBL 79 (1960) 297–314)
Yeivin, Sh.
1932 The sign and the true nature of the early alphabets (ArchOr. 4 (1932) 71–78)
1952 Who was SIoµ, the king of Egypt? (VT 2 (1952) 164–168)
1960 The date of the seal “belonging to Shema‘ (the) servant (of) Jeroboam” (JNES
(1960) 205–212)
1961 Topographic and ethnic notes II (Atiqot 3 (1961) 176–180)
1962 The judicial petition from Mezad Hashavyaµh‚ (BiOr. 19 (1962) 3–10)
1966 Weights and measurements of various standards in the Biblical period (Leshonenu
31 (1966–67) 243–250)
1974 >Eduµth (IEJ 24 (1974) 17–20)
Yellin, David.
1920 Some fresh meanings of Hebrew roots (JPOS 1 (1920–21) 10–14)
1923 Emek-ha-bakha: bekhaim (JPOS 3 (1923) 191–192)
1929 µyyrb[ µyrl twjkn twarwh (Leshonenu 1:5–26)
York, A. D.
1977 Ezekiel 1: inaugural and restoration visions? (VT 27 (1977) 82–98)
Young, D. W.
1979 The Ugaritic myth of the god H\O÷RA÷N and the mare (UF 11 (1979) 839–848)
Youngblood, Ronald.
1962 Amorite influence in a Canaanite Amarna letter (EA 96) (BASOR 168 (1962)
24–26)
Zadok, Ran.
1976 On five Iranian names in the Old Testament (VT 26 (1976) 246–247)
1977 Historical and onomastic notes (WdO 9 (1977–78) 35–56)
1977 On five Biblical names (ZAW 89 (1977) 266–267)
1984 The origin of the name Shinar (ZA 74 (1984) 240–244)
1986 Notes on Esther (ZAW 98 (1986) 105–109)
Zayadine, Fawzi.
1973 see Thompson+
1974 see Thompson +
+ Thompson, Henri O.
1973 The Ammonite inscription from Tell Siran (Berytus 22 (1973) 139)
Zehnder, L.
1976 Volkskundliches in der älteren schweizerischen Chronistik: Schriften der
Schweizerischen Gesellschaft für Volkskunde 60 (1976) 409
Zenger, E.
1982 see Wenning and Zenger
Zeron, Alexander.
1974 Tag für Tag kam man zu David, um ihm zu helfen, 1. Chr. 12: 1–22.: ein
versprengtes Stück einer Abschalom—Tradition? (ThZ 30 (1974) 257–261)
1978 Der Platz Benajahus in der Heldenliste Davids (II Sam. 23: 20–23) (ZAW
20–27)
Zevit, Ziony.
1969 The use of db[ as a diplomatic term in Jeremiah (JBL 88 (1969) 74–77)
1975 A misunderstanding at Bethel: Amos 7: 12–17 (VT 25 (1975) 783–790)
Zijl, P. J. van.
1975 A discussion of the words ansû and nsûy in the Ugaritc texts (UF 7 (1975) 503–514)
Zimmerli, Walther.
1933 Zur Struktur der alttestamentlichen Weisheit (ZAW 51 (1933) 177–204)
1949 Review: Chrostoph Barth, Die Errettung vom Tode in den individuellen Klage- und
Dankliedern des ATs (ThZ 5:374)
1954 Die Eigenart der prophetische Rede des Ezechiel (ZAW 66 (1954) 1–26)
1972 Vier oder fünf Thronnamen des messianischen Herrschers von Jes. 9: 5b, 6 (
(1972) 249–252)
1980 “Heiligkeit” nach dem sogenannten Heiligkeitsgesetz (VT 30 (1980) 493–512)
Zimmermann, Frank.
1938 The Aramaic original of Daniel 8–12 (JBL 57:255–272)
1954 Some textual studies in Genesis (JBL 73 (1954) 97–124)
1962 >El and Adonai (VT 12 (1962) 190–195)
1965 Folk etymology of Biblical names (VTSupp 15 (1965) 311)
Zimmern, H.
1910 Assyr. kisuµ nicht zu arab. hebr. syr. ask (ZA 24 (1910) 317)
1916 Zu den altakkadischen geometrischen Berechnungsaufgaben (OLZ 19 (1916) 321)
Zirker, H.
1964 Die kultische Vergegenwärtigung der Vergangenheit in den Psalmen (BBB
(1964) 20)
Zobel, Hans-Jürgen.
1965 Stammesspruch und Geschichte. Die Angaben der Stammessprüche von Gen. 49,
Dtn. 33 und Jdc. 5 über die Politischen und Kultischen Zustände im Damaligen “Israel” (BZAW 95
(1965))
1966* see Horn
1970 Der bildliche Gebrauch von sûmn im Ugaritischen und Hebräischen (ZAW
209–215)
1971 Das Gebet um Abwendung der Not und seine Erhörung in den Klageliedern des
Alten Testaments und in der Inschrift des Königs Zakir von Hamath (VT 21 (1971) 91–99)
1973 Das Selbstverständnis Israels nach dem Alten Testament (ZAW 85 (1973) 281–293)
1975 Beiträge zur Geschichte Gross-Judas in früh- und vordavidischer Zeit (VTSupp.
(1975) 253–277)
Zolli, E.
1940 II Salmo 51: 6. (Biblica 21:198–200)
1946 Note di lessicografia biblica: III ¹[y (Biblica 27:127–128)
1955 >eyn <adam (Zach. 9: 1) (VT 5 (1955) 90–92)
Koehler, Ludwig; Baumgartner, Walter; Richardson, M.E.J. (tr.), The Hebrew & Aramaic Lexicon
of the Old Testament: Volume 5, Aramaic, (Leiden, The Netherlands: Brill) 2001, c2000.

Halot Aramaic

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Halot Aramaic

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Logos Library System 2.

The Hebrew and Aramaic

LUDWIG KOEHLER AND WALTER BAUMGARTNER

WITH ASSISTANCE FROM

TRANSLATED AND EDITED

Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data

ISBN 90 04 11528 5 Vol. V

aD;zÒr'd]a:' Sept. (for Ezr 8

ty"w:j} a': Da 512, → hwj haf.

an:j]n&'a,' variant hn:j]n&'a}; Da 3

vn:a,; Or. <enaµsû (Bauer-Leander BArm. 16s), Heb. v/naÔ.

J/yr]a': a) Heb., see HAL 85a, HALOT 88a on Gn 14 . ; b) Arm. Da 2

—1. < Persian aµcðarna (Hinz 21).

wyTiv]a;i Da 5 3f, → htv.

Der. WlyhiB], hl;h;B]t]hi.

rX'v'al]B:e n.m., Da 7 1 and variant 51 → rX'av'l]Be. †

—a) *balaµt\-sûarri-us\ur “protect the life of the king!”.

my nobles sought audience of me. †

Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 188) is uncertain; perhaps it is a part of the name, so

g: interchanges with û in rgs.

*µvg: Syr. pa. provided with a body; denominative from *µveGÒ.

d: —1. corresponds to Proto-Semitic d, Arb. d, Heb. d, in qbd, rbd, dwd etc.

59a); Bauer-Leander BArm. 181v: bear Da 75. †

ar;WD, Theodotion Dei>ra, i.e. ar;yDi, so one MS Ken.,

*hw:j} D', pl. ÷w:j} D', Or. dahwaµn: Da 6 19;

(Maclean Dictionary 59b).

with jB'v' Da 431.34 523. †

—1. to go Ezr 713, with l] to go after and µ[i to go with.

—d) or Ezr 726 (Bauer-Leander BArm. 324j).

z: —1. in general it corresponds to Proto-Semitic z, Arb. z.

—3. In BArm. a sbst. (Bauer-Leander BArm. 197g): innocence Da 623. †

lb,B;ruz:Ò n.m., Zerubbabel, Ezr 5 , see HAL 268b; HALOT 279b.

hwj: Heb. I hwj; Arm. loanword (Wagner 91/92; Jenni 112ff).

(Bauer-Leander BArm. 246n-q).

Der. *WzjÔ, traditionally t/zj}.

(Brockelmann Lexicon 235b).

desolate); NeoArm. (Bergsträsser Gloss. 39) and NeoSyr. (Maclean 105a).

Bauer-Leander BArm. 245g: cstr. tWjv]j': need Ezr 720. †

; > Arm. f in rWf, II llf, *rp'f], f[y and hf;(y)[e, fyIq'.

y: —1. interchanges with → a (→ ty:), with w in hwh.

personal name → Heb. qd;x;/hyÒ. †

f[y:Heb.Å[y;EmpArm.,EgArm.pt.f[ycounsellor (Ah\iqar; cf. Leander 82j; Jean-H. Dictionnaire

336d, on p. 337) positive, affirmative; yes of course 324. †

['WvyE: n. masc. Jeshua/Jesus Ezr 5 ; → Heb. I ['WvyE.

Bauer-Leander BArm. 192e: fem. hr;yTiy" and Da 322 64 77 ar;yTiy".

k: outside BArm. it alternates with q, cf. fyq, lfq.

Heb. ÷vol;. → BArm. ÷V;li.

am;: Ezr 6 8 → hm;.

hm;, Ezr 68 am;: Heb. hm;.

Jv'yme: Babylonian name for laev;ymi (Da 1 ) 2

Der. Jl,m,, hK;l]m', Wkl]m'.

of 519 711 (:: Montgomery 301f).

194r: det. a[;D]nÒm', sf. y[iD]nÒm' understanding Da 221 431.33 512. †

hv,m:o n.m. Moses Ezr 6 18 (→ HAL 607; HALOT 642). †

÷: —1. interchanges with → µ; cf. (÷)/Mhi.

( a) /gnÒ: → (a)/gnÒ dbe[}.

but meaning uncertain); → by-form dwn.

Dictionnaire 184 s.v. bxnI; Hoftijzer-Jongeling Dictionary 749); cuneiform na-sa-bã-bi,

pe: pf. ac;n;Ò impv. ace (Bauer-Leander BArm. 135c, 60h).

s: —1. = Proto-Semitic s, Arb. s, Heb. s, in rsa, dgs, ¹ws, qls etc.

ags and ayGIs' → agc and ayGIc.'

ay:nÒpoWs and ay:nÒpoysi: → ay:nÒPom]Ws.

ar;zÒ[:, n.m. Ezra, Ezr 7 12.21.25, → Heb. †

µvg: Syr. pa. provided with a body; denominative from µveGÒ.

lgv: Heb.; ? denominative from → lg¾ve: not attested in Arm.